The verb in the Greek non-literary papyri

Citation preview

THE VERB IN THE GREEK NON - LITERARY

PAPYRI

by BASIL G. MANDILARAS

μετὰ περιλήψεως

eis τὴν ᾿Ελληνικὴν

BASIL

G.

MANDILARAS

THE IN

VERB

THE

GREEK

NON-LITERARY

PAPYRI

YIOYPTEION HELLENIC

NOAITIZMOY

MINISTRY

KAI

OF CULTURE

Athens

1973

ENIZTHMRN AND

SCIENCES

Authorized copies of this book are numbered and rubber stamped by the Hellenic Ministry of Culture and Sciences

© Hellenic

Ministry

of

Culture

and

Sciences

Office of Scientific Research and Development Supervizion of the Edition by Dr. M. A. Spyrou, Scientific Adviser

FOREWORD

FOREWORD

In an epoch dominated by the achievements of technology and the surpassing of dreams by human ingenuity — yet silent to the pressing appeal for more and more understanding, words like "substantives", “adjectives”, "pronouns’, “verbs”, “adverbs” “prepositions” ," conjunctions" and "interjections", sound almost to have come from an entirely different and strange world, a world of its own,

where devotion to the satisfaction of current needs is not regarded

as the only profitable

investment

of time.

Much has been said and is still being said in this epoch about expertise and specialization, even about the "computerization" of reasoning — but little, very little, has so far proved useful to the lavman, the man still venturing in wonder and prayer before the closed gares to. simplicity. Tens of centuries ago, around 120 B.C.,

Dionysius Thrax, author of the

first Hellenic grammar, defined the latter “as the gathering of experience from

what is set down, chiefly by poets and writers" (Γραμματικὴ ἐστὶν ἐμπειρία τῶν παρὰ ποιηταῖς Te Kat συγγραφεῦσιν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ λεγομένων). Dionysius dealt with letters and syllables, with accents and punctuation marks, with the eight parts of speech and their interrelationships. Plato, expressing himself

in the person of Xenos in his “Sophistes”, had defined “verb” (ρῆμα) as the part of speech “denoting action” (ἐπὶ ταῖς πράξεσιν ov δήλωμα) — while Aristotle, a little later in the same century, in his “Poetics”, wrote that “the verb

is a composite sound denoting time” (ρῆμα δὲ φωνὴ συνθετὴ σημαντικὴ μετὰ xpovov). Were the writer of such a foreword as this to cite all the early grammarians, before or after

Dionysius

Thrax,

who

6

have contributed to the study of

FOREWORD

a mere patchwork of references. Prin Greek expression, the result would be EpheApollonius of Rhodes, Zenodotus of cipal among them have perhaps been of Byzantium, Aristarchos of Samosus, Asclepiades of Samos, Aristophanes ’), s Chalcenderus (“of the brazen guts thrace, Crates of Mallus, and Didymu invaluable contributions, it was not However, despite their life-work and ded. mmar in its scientific sense was foun until the second century A. D. that gra nce e crabbed"), according to Priscian "pri At that time Apollonius Dyscolus (“th ax”, “On Proof grammatians"

(grammaticorum

princeps),

wrote

“On

Synt

of Adverbs”. He stated that “the order nouns”, “On Conjunctions” and ^ On ing oral expression, very accurately, plac the parts of speech tmitates complete luded” both of which no expression is conc first the noun then the verb, without ιβῶς πρῶτον

(Ἔστιν οὖν ἡ τάξις μίμημα τὸ ὄνομα θεματίζουσα, συγκλείεται). The speech

which

racteristics through

τοῦ αὐτοτελοῦς λόγου,

μεθ᾽ ὃ τὸ

ρῆμα,

εἴτε

πᾶς

πάνυ ἀκρ

λόγος

ἄνευ

τούτων

ov

ined its essential chawe hear today in Greece has reta

successive stages of adjustment

and development

in the

tical anacon firmed by the searching gramma course of time. That this is so is Anyone from Apollonius Dyscolus onwards.

Ivses of a long series of scholars n ge owes al least part of the foundatio who now works on the Greek langua John anus, Aelius Donatus, Cheroboscus, of his knowledge to Aelius Herodi dor ' tantine Lascaris, Chrysoloras, Theo Philoponus (“the industrious”), Cons

es Kritopoulos, Girolamo Germano, Ghazis, Nicolaos Sophianus, Metrophan ussa, Langius, Tribbechovius, Mullach, Simon Portius, Anastasios Michael of Nao Albert Thumb, and Christopoulos, Pernot, John Velaras, Adamantios Korais, enic of other origin. many other distinguished writers of Hell

7

FOREWORD

As the twentieth century approaches its last quarter, efforts are under way in many universities and research centers in a number of countries for elucidating, under the impulse of new techniques, the historical, statistical or comparative structure of the Hellenic mode of expression. Relevant recording and selecting procedures,

sometimes

extremely

cumbersome,

combine

to

an

ever

greater

extent with “electronic” advances and computer technology to achieve a significant reduction in time. In Greece alone, where there is a rather limited number of papyri as against a

very

great

quantity

of

inscriptions,

the

amount

of

manuscripts

is

estimated to be in the order of 25,000. At any given time there is almost certainly some new material for study that has either not yet been published or has not yet become the subject of an identification procedure. Research institutions and activities function under the aegis of the Academy of Athens, the Hellenic Universities, the Ministries of National Education and Culture and Sciences,

and several other

linguistic or archaeological organizations.

A different outlook and a different way of life develop with each succeeding century, with each generation probably, in any country in the world. In this epoch of promise, of emergence to outer space and time, of agony and expectation, it is perhaps worth looking for the imprint of the layman, for his actions and reactions in the long past, for his own way of expression against the chal' lenges and guide lines set down by the great geniuses. As Metrophanes Kritopoulos wrote, “were somebody to achieve the publication of these rules..., he would not only offer something of practical importance, but he would enjoy it greatly...” (Ei οὖν τις τοὺς κανόνας τουτουσὶ... ἀξιώσειεν ἐκδοῦναι, οὐκ ἀλυσιτελὲς πρᾶγμα ἔσεται ποιῶν, €t μή τοί ye καὶ χαριεῖται τὰ μέγιστα... .). *

4

t

Dd

m.

3

-

8

FOREWORD

It is in this sense, that the work of Dr. BasilG. Mandilaras acquires additional value and relates immediately with the objectives of the Hellenic Ministry of Culture and Sciences. It is a pleasant duty to express my gratitude to him and through him to Professors D.M. Jones of London University, and H.J. Lioyd - Jones of the University of Oxford for their constant quidance and generous assistance in the completion of the thesis, which has served as a basis for his present work. My thanks are equally directed to all the Professors and Lecturers of the Faculty of Lettess of the National University of Athens, who have taught the author and inspired him with a love for scientific research. I wish also to thank Messrs. P.J. Parsons and T.W.W. Stinton, both of whom helped by suggesting a number of corrections and improvements for the text. Last but not least I feel indebted to Messrs. J. Zaronikos, Director General

of Scientific Research and Development, and G. Kournoutos, Director General of Cultural Affairs, who have recommended the manuscript of the author for publication — as well as to Dr. M. Spyrou, Adviser at the Office of Scientific Research and Development, who has supervised the overall edition with zeal and devotion, and to the printers, Mr. G. Tsiveriotis and his collaborators, for their efficient work. In this epoch of question marks and decisive steps, of revolutionary con-

troversy and systematic approach — all have tried to borrow from the experience of the ancient layman for the benefit of the scholar of to-morrow. reader add his own appreciation... Athens,

March

25th

May

the

1973 C. A. Panaghiotakis

PREFACE

h coverἃ millennium, 1.6. In this work I have examined papyrus texts whic first non-literary Greek papyrus from the end of the fourth century ».c. (the

of the eighth century A.D. I have appears in 411 B.c.). up to the beginning n, and Byzantine papyri, betaken into consideration the Ptolemaic, Roma lopment of the Greek language cause in this way it is possible to trace the deve

times are outgrowths of earlier and see which linguistic phenomena of later the Roman

for the first time in periods as opposed to those which appear indicated which phenomena are or Byzantine periods. Moreover, I have Ptolemaic papyri reflect the Attic confined to each period. In general the

enistic period, whereas the norm as remoulded by the Greeks of the Hell II

PREFACE

post-Ptolemaic papyri present linguistic developments, some of which are related to Semitic or Egyptian idiom. We are not in a position to give definite limits to this real or apparent influence of the Semitic and Egyptian languages, because a parallelism emerges between these languages and the Greek language. Particular attention has been given to the relationship between the language of the papyri and that of the New Testament (see 21ff. in general) with the conclusion that the latter has its closest parallel in the language of the papyri.

The papyrus texts which I have examined cannot be given in number as I have consulted certain texts which are subject to linguistic developments (as for example the letters), while [ have overlooked others reflecting the inftuence of education and thus failing to represent the language of the period. When

referring,

however,

to

statistics,

I have

mentioned

the

number

of

texts so that the reader might proceed tofurther conclusions about the frequency of the occurrences cited. In particular I have analyzed about

1,200

texts (see for details 459) according to tenses and moods. In the course of this book I have occasionally emended or otherwise corrected passages of papyrus texts according to conclusions which were the results of investigations of related subjects. Suggestions with regard to translation of the texts into English have also been made according to the meaning of the tense or mood

involved. Statistical tables have been

worked

out to

show the occurrences of certain verbal forms. Linguistic phenomena confined to a certain period have been underlined as they offer evidence to date papyrus

documents.

In general, evidence is presented to indicate that the language of the papyri was essentially the spoken language of the times, modified by the varying degree of education of the individual writers. I have examined the position of the language of the papyri especially in connection with New Testament Greek, and with Classical and Modern Greek as well. It appears that the Ptolemaic papyri preserve many characteristics of the language of earlier times; on the other hand the Roman and Byzantine papyri foster the developments which appear to be established in Modern Greek. The value and significance of the language of papyri for the study of Classical, New Testament and Modern

Greek is evident. I have become convinced that the

knowledge of this language gives us the background of the Greek language in general. The subjects which I have selected to deal with are grammatical in naI2

PREFACE

ture, but I do not claim that the present book constitutes a complete Grammar of the papyri. Such a work would require many volumes of the size of this book. The present work is the result of research during my post-graduate studies at Oxford; it consists of an abridged version of my thesis Moods and Tenses of the Greek Non-Literary Papyri, which I finished under the constant guidance of my supervisor Professor D. M. Jones. To all these who have helped me so generously, and to many others whose encouragement and counsel have been constant stimulus I tender my heartfelt thanks.

Basil

13

G.

Mandilaras

CONTENTS Page

FOREWORD by H.E.

the Minister

of Culture and Sciences

PREFACE BIBLIOGRAPHY Principal Editions of Greek Ostraca Special

Collections

Grammatical RESEARCH THE

LANGUAGE

NEW

TESTAMENT

ASPECT

AND

Confusion

of Papyrus

works

IN THE

Papyri

on the language of Papyri and N.T,

LANGUAGE

OF

OF

NON-LITERARY

AND

TIME

Texts

PAPYRI PAPYRI

PAPYRI

OF THE

TENSES

of Tenses

PRESENT

[.

FORMATION

OF

THE

STEM

Thematic Verbs Contracted Verbs Verbs in -εἰἴω Verbs in τ- ἕω -nyo Presents Verbs

IT.

in

51

62 00

70 77 Bo

-o«o

VCrOs ID «μι Alternative Present

Forms

MEANING

OF

AND

Simple Present Progressive Perfective Futuristic Conalive iterative

USIS

THE

155 PRESENT

INDICATIVE

175 103 202

214 22I 222

CONTENTS

$5 227 229

Historic Gnomic

AUGMENT Origin and Development The

Use

of the Augment

231 in the

232

Papyri

Syllabic Augment The Syllabic Augment in compound

Verbs with Prepositions

Temporal Augment Improper Use of the Augment ηThe Augment η- in the Place of the Syllabic

The Augment Conclusion

233 250 253 267

Augment

269 272 264

»- outside the Indicative

IMPERFECT I.

MORPHOLOGY

IMPERFECT Stem

276

The Endings of the Imperfect

277

Formation

IT.

OF THE

of the Tense

MEANINGS

AND

USES

OF

THE

284

IMPERFECT

285 286 287 288

Narrative [terative or Customary

Continual Aoristic Conative Epistolary

II.

293 295

CATEGORIES

OF

THE

297

IMPERFECT

AORIST I.

MORPHOLOGY

Formations of the Verb Stem Verb Stems Ending with a Vowel Verb Stems Ending with a Stop Verb Stems Ending with a Liquid Sigmatic — Second Aorists Aortsts

299 299 301 304 306 307 310

in -xa

Aorist Middle and Passive Active Forms of Deponent Verbs The Endings of the Aorist Second and First Aorists Second Aorist (Imperfect) The Ending -ocaThe

IT.

316

317

Endings

Ending -ac

MEANINO

AND

Narrative

or

USES

OF THE

AORIST

into the First Aorist

317 319 321 322 323 332

Historical

16

CONTENTS

Constative

Ingressive Perfective Continual Epistolary

Futuristic or Proleptic Gnomic AORIST

THE

USED

TO

DENOTE

RELATIVE

TIME

Conclusion

FUTURE Introduction MORPHOLOGY

Future Stems Future Stems

The Verb The Verb

Verbs

of Verbs in -$w Ending in a Liquid or Nasal of Stop Verbs Ending in a Vowel

in -oxw

The Future of Contracted Verbs Future Active for Future Middle Middle Futures New Formations of the Future Periphrastic Future ASPECT,

MEANING

Aspect The Future

AND

USFS

OF

FUTURE

THE

as Tense

Durative [nceptive Punctiliar

The

as

Future

Volitive Pure

Mood

Volitive in Agrecments

Volitive

[mperatival Deliberative Gnomic Uses

of the

Future

In Conditional Sentences (a) In Apodosis (b) In Protasis [n Relative Clauses the Particle ἄν

With

tear)

17 B. G.

Mandilaras,

The

Verb

in the

Greek

Non-Literarv

Papyrt

to

11.

CONTENTS

As ín

Apodosis Main

in Conditional-Relative

Clauses

Clauses

In Final clauses After

Verbs

expressing

"Fear"

REDUPLICATION PERFECT [ntroduction PERFECT

MORPHOLOG Y

Perfect in -«a ' First Perfect Perfect in -a (Second Perfect | New Perfect Formations The Endings of the Perfect Second Person Singular in τες, τας (or -9«) Third Person Plural in -av, -amı The

Perfect

Endings

-or and

-ove:

Middle-Passive

Periphrastic

If.

TIME,

IIT.

MEANING

Perfect

ASPECT,

AND

[ntensive Extensive or Resultative

AND

USES

OCCURRENCES

OF

THE

OF

THE

PERFECT

Effective

Auristic

Epistolary [terative Gnomic

PLUPFRFECT Introduction MORPHOLOGY

The Endings of the Pluperfect Pluperfect Middle-Passive Periphrastic (a) (b)

IT.

Pluperfect

Pluperfect Pluperfect

MEANING

AND

Active Middle-Passive

USES OF THE

PLUPERFECT

Iniensive Extensive fterative Epistolary

18

PERFECT

CONTENTS

TIT.

THE

PLUPERFECT

IN

SECONDARY

CLAUSES

In Relative Clauses [n Conditional Sentences

[n Temporal FUTURE

and Causal

Clauses

PERFECT

SUBJUNCTIVE Introduction

I.

MORPHOLOGY Subjunctives

with

Apparent

Short

Vowels

The Subjunctive of «μι Verbs Aorist Subjunctive - Future Indicative Second Aorists Thematic Changes Il.

MEANING

AND

USES

The Subjunctive

in Main

Clauses

Volitive Hortatory Jussive

In Prohibitions Futuristic Deliberative

The

Subjunctive in Secondary

Clauses

Fearing Purpose Meanings

and

Constructions

Introductory

of iva

tva

[mperatival iva Causal Sense of tra Remarks on the Use of iva Meaning and Uses of ὅπως Relative Clauses Temporal

Conditional

Sentences

OPTATIVE Introduction J.

MORPHOLOGY

Present {and Second Aorist) Thematic

bob

Verbs

613

-μι Verbs Contracted s- Aorisl Aorist Passive

har hei

Verbs

025

[9

CONTENTS

It.

THE

SYNTAX

OF

THE

OPTATIVE

Volitive Optative Potential Optative

The Optative in Secondary Clauses The Optative in Indirect Discourse The

Optative

in Indirect

Questions

The Optative in Other Secondary Conclusion

Clauses

IMPERATIVE Introduction MORPHOLOGY Thematic

Verbs

Uncontracted Contracted

Present and Second

Aorist

Present

Athematic Verbs

-m Verbs (Present and Aorist Active) First

Aorist

Aorist

Active

Middle

Aorist Passive Long-Vowel Aorists Perfect

without

Graduation

MEANING

OF

IMPERATIVE

AND

USES

THE

The Tenses of the Imperative Relationship between Present and

Aorist

The Persons of the Imperative Relationship between Imperative and other Imperative —. Future Indicative Imperative — Subjunctive Imperative —- Infinitive Imperative — ἵνα - clause Salutatory Expressions in the [mperalive The Syntax of the [mperative INFINITIVE

Select

Bibliography

Introduction MOR PHOLOG

+

Verb Stem The Endings

of the [nfinitive Present [Second Aorist) Infinitive First Aorist [nfinitive in -er 2

in -eı

Moods

CONTENTS

Perfect

Infinitive

751 752 754 755

in -ev

Infinitives in -« and -» Confusion of the Endings The [nfinitive of the Second Aorist IT.

MEANING

OF THE

INFINITIVE

Imperativa! Infinitive The Infinitive of Purpose The [Infinitive of Result Ἵνα with the [nfinitive The Infinitive Used Absolutely Ifl.

SYNTAX

Infinitive The The The The The The The

OF THE

756 779 772 775 Bo

INFINITIVE

without Infinitive Infinitive Infinitive Infinitive Infinitive Infinitive

Article as Subject as Subject of ἐστίν Used as Subject of the Impersonal after Expressions with ἔχειν after Impersonal Verbs after Verbs Taken Impersonally

Infinitive as Complement *Iva-Infinitive

of the

Verb

Articular

Without

783 yiverac

768

789 791 792

793 799 Bor

"Or-iInfinitive The

782

Intinitive

806

Prepositions

The Nominative of the Articular Infinitive

813

The

Accusative

The

Genitive of the Articular Infinitive After Impersonal Verbs or Expressions After Substantives or Verbal Expressions

814 rs 818 Big 821 846

of the Articular

Infinitive

The

After Verbs Dative of the Articular

Infinitive

The

Articular

Prepositions

Infinitive

with

and

Adverbs

839

PARTICIPLE Introduction

Bhs

I.

MORPHOLOGY

8068

If,

SYNTAX

OF

THE

876

PARTICIPLE

Gender

877

Number

878 79

Cases lll.

USES

The The

OF

THE

881

PARTICIPLE

Attributive Participle Participle Used as a Substantive 21

885 B88

CONTRA TS

SS Hoo

(Predicative | Participle

Supplementary

398 007

Adverbial Participle Genitive Absotute IV.

BETWEEN

RELATIONSHIPS Participle Infinitive Participle Participle

for for for for

PARTICIPLE

AND

OTHER

MOODS (12 qi8 920 (22

Infinitive Participle Indicative Imperative

Page

APPENDIX SUMMARY

IN

375

GREFK

INDEXES

INDEX

TO REFERENCES

INDEX

OF

SUBJFCTS

INDEX

OF

VERB

305 447

AND NAMIS

+55

FORMS

22

PRINCIPAL B.G.U, = Agyptische

EDITIONS

OF

GREEK

Urkunden aus den Staatlichen Museen

PAPYRI! zu Berlin, Griechische

Urkun-

den, Berlin 1895-. Vol. v = Der Gnomon der Idios Logos (= P.Gnom.). BL = Ἐς Preisigke, Berichtigungsliste der griechischen

Papyrusurkunden aus Ägypten, Ber-

lin-Leipzig 1922-. Vol. ii ed. F. Bilabel after Preisigke's death, Heidelberg 1933. Vol. iii ed. M. David, B.A. van Croningen and E. Kiessling after Bilabel's death, Leyden

1958. C.P.Herm. = See Stud. Pal. v. C.P.R.

(= Corpus Papyrorum

Raineri\ - P. Rainer.

C.P.R. Cat. = See P. Rainer ( Cal.) M. Chrest., W. Chrest. =L. Mitteis and U. Wilcken, Grundzüge und Chrestomathie der Papyruskunde, Leipzig 1912. Vol. t Historischer Teil, i 1 Grundzüge (= W.Gr.), i2 Chrestomathie (= W.Chrest.) ed. U, Wilcken. Vol. ii Juristische Teil, ii ı Grundzüge (= M.Gr.),

ii 2 Chrestomathie

(= M.Chrest.)

ed. L. Mitteis. (Gr. are cited by page,

Chrest, by number.) NB

(= Namenbuch) = F. Preisigke, Namenbuch, enthaltend alle griechischen, lateinischen, ägyptischen, hebräischen, arabischen und sonstigen semitischen und nichtsemitischen Menschennamen, soweit sie in griechischen Urkunden |Papyri, Ostraka, Inschriften,

Mumienschildern usw.)

Ägyptens sich vorfinden, Heidelberg

1922.

P. Abinn, See p. 33 under Bell. P.Achmím

= P.

Collart,

P.Alex.Inv. = Anna

Les

Papyrus

Swiderek

gréco-romain d' Alexandrie, P. Alexandr, = “Papyrus

and

grecs d’Achmim, Mariangela

Watsaw

ptolémaiques

Cairo

Vandoni,

1930. Papyrus

Grecs

de

Musee

1904. du

Musée

d' Alexandrie",

ed.

by G.

Botti,

in

B.S.A.A. First S. No 2 (1899), p. 55. P.Amh. =

ΒΡ.

Grenfell and

A.S. Hunt,

The Amherst

Papyri, 2 vols., London

1900,

1901,

P. Ant, = C.H. Roberts, The Antinoopolis Papyri, vol. i, London (Egypt Exploration Society} 1950, Vols. ii and iii ed. J. W.B. Barns and H. Zilliacus, London 1960, 1966.

]. The list. includes the made in this book. For a

tion, Oxford

1968,

principal complete

editions of list see E.G.

pp. 154- 71.

23

the papyri to which references are Turner, Greek Papyri: An Introduc-

PRINCIPAT,

EDLTLONS

OF

GREEK

PAPYRI

P. Athen, = G.A. Petropoulos, Papyri | Societatis Archaeologicae — Atheniensis = Παπυροι τῆς ἐν ᾿Αθήναις ᾿Αρχαιοληγικῆς ᾿Εταιρείας (Apaypateia: ᾿Ακαδημίας ᾿Αθηνῶν), Athens 1939.( Notes, comments εἴς, in Modern Greek). (Also abbr. P. S. A. Arhen.j. P.Baden = Veraffentlichungen aus den badischen Papyrus-Sammlungen, i-vi Heidelberg 19251938: Pt. i, Demotische Papyri, ed. W. Spiegelberg. Pt. ii, Griechische Papyri ( Urkunden, Briefe, Mumienetikettem), ed. F. Bilabel, 1923. Pts. tt and iv, Ein koptisches fragment über die Begründer des Manichüismus, ed. F. Bilabel, 1924. Pt. v, Griechische, koptische und arabische Texte zur Religion und religiösen Literatur in Ägyptens Spatzeit, ed. F, Bilabel and A. Grohman, 1934. Pt. vi, Griechische Papyri | Urkunden und Literarische Text aus der Papyrus-Sammlung der Universitatshibliothek | Heidelberg), ed. G.A. Gerhard, 1938. P.Bas.

= E. Rabel and W. Spiegelberg, Paprruskunden der Öffentlichen Bibliothek

der Uni-

versität zu Basel, Berlin 1917. P.Berl. Frisk = H.Frisk,

Bankakten

aus

dem

Faijüm

nebst

anderen Berliner Papyri, Gote-

borg 1931. The texts are all republished in SB 7513-7520. P.Berl, Möller = ἃ, Möller,

Griechische

Papyri

aus

dem

Berliner

Museum, Gotcborg

1929

(= SB 7338-7350). P. Berl, Zill, =

A. Zilliacus,

Vierzehn

Berliner griechische

cietas Scientiarum Fennica. Commentationes fors 1941. (Also abbr. 14 Berl. gr. P.). P.Bour.

= P. Collart, Les papyrus Bouriant,

P.Brem, = U. Wilcken, Die Bremer Wissenschaften), Berlin 1936.

Papyri

Paris

Papyri, Urkunden

humanarum

und

Briefe, So-

litterarum xj, 4, Helsing-

1926.

( Abhundlungen

der

Preussischen

P.Cuir. -: B.P. Grenfell and A.S, Hunt, Greek Pupyri, Catalogue. general egyptiennes du Musée du Caire, x, Mos. 10,001-8bq, Oxford 19073. P.Cuiro Goodspeed = E.J. Goodspeed, Greek Papyri of Chicago (Decenntal Publications v) 1902.

from

the

Cairo

Akademie des

Museum,

der

antiquites

University

P.Cair. Isider. -- A.E.R. Boak and H.C. Youtie, The Archive of Aurelius Isidorus Egyptian. Museum and in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor δὼ.

in the

P.Cairn Masp. - J, Maspero, Catalogue general des antiquites exvptiennes du Musee di Caire; Pupyrus grecs d'époque byzantine, 3 vols., Cairo 1911, 1913, 1916. P.Cuiro Preis.

— F. Preisigkc,

Strassburg

Griechische

Urkunden

des

‚lerprischen

Museums

zu Kairo,

8

P.Caira Zen. - C.C, Edgar, Curalogue general des antiquites egvptiennes du Musee du Cuire; Zenon Papyrt, 4 vols., Cairo 1925-1931. The series was completed posthumously by vol. v, published by the Société Fouad [ de Papyrologie and edited from Edgar's

materials by O. Guéraud and P. Jouguet, 1940. P.Cuttaouí

© P, Cuttaoní 3, ed.

B.P.

Grenfell, A.S;

24

Hunt

and

ΡΜ.

Meyer

in

4, PF.

in

PRINCIPAL

EDITIONS

OF GREEK

PAPYKI

(1906), pp. 55-67. (Cols. i-vi of the verso, and cols. i-vi of the recto re-edited by Mitteis in M.Chrest.88 and 372). Referencesin M.Chrest. P.Col.

i = W.L. Westermann, abbr. P.Col. Inv. 480.

Upon

Slavery

in Ptolemaic

Egypt,

New

York

1929. Also

P.Columb. (Inv. Nos. 493, 312, 318, 321,320) = C.W. Keyes, "Four Private Letters from the Columbia Papyri", C. Ph. xxx (1935), pp. 141-50. P.Col. Zen. = tine and Vol. ii, counted

Zenon Papyri: Business Papers of the Third Century B.C. dealing with PalesEgypt. Vol. i, ed. W.L. Westermann and E.S. Hasenoehr!, New York 1934. ed. W.L. Westermann, C.W. Keyes and H, Liebesny, New York 1940. Also as P.Col. iii and iv respectively.

P.Cornell = W.L. Westermann and C.J. Kraemer, Greek Papyri in the Library of Cornell University, New York (Cornell Univ. Press) 1926. P.Eleph. = O. Rubensohn, Elephantine Papyri, Ägyptische zu Berlin: Griechische Urkunden, Berlin 1907.

Urkunden aus den Kgl. Museen

P.Ent. = O. Guéraud, ENTEYZEIE: Requétes et plaintes adressées au roi d'Égypte au Hie siécle avant J.-C. Publications de la Société royale égyptienne de Papyrologie, Textes et Documents i, Cairo 1931-1932. P,Erlangen = W.Schubart, P.Eud. = F.

Blass,

Die Papyri der Universitätsbibliothek Erlangen,

Eudoxi

ars

astronomica,

qualis in charta

Aegyptiaca

Leipzig

1942.

superest,

Kiliae

1887, Ρ Fam. Tebt. = B. A. van Groningen, A Family Archive from Bat. vi 1950. P.Fay. = B.P. Grenfell,

their

Papyri,

P.Flor. = G. Vitelli, Papiri Fiorentini, documenti pubblici e privati dell'età romana

e bizan-

London

A.S. Hunt, and

D.G. Hogarth,

Tebtynis, Papyrologica Ludg.

Fayam

Towns and

1:900.

tina, | Milan 1906 : Nos. 1-105. Vol. ii 1-3, ed. D. Comparetti (1908-1911): 100-117; 118-169; 170-278. Vol. iii, ed. G. Vitelli (1915) : Nos. 279-391. P.Form.

-- Stud,

Pal. iti and

Nos.

vini.

P.Fouad vii = P.Phit.

P.Frankf. :- H. Lewald, Seminars

der

Griechische

Universität

der Wissenschaften,

Papyri aus dem

Frankfurt

Besitz

des

(Sitzungsberichte

der

Phil.-hist. Kl., 14 Abh.),

Rechtswissenschaftlichen Heidelberger

Akademie

Heidelberg 1920.

P.Freib. = W. Aly, M.Gelzer, J. Parisch, and U. Wilcken, Mitteilungen burger Papyrussammlung, Pts. i-iii, Heidelberg 1914, 1916. 1927.

aus

der

Frei-

P.Gen. = J, Nicole, Les Papyrus de Geneve, i, transcritset publiés par— ‚Geneva ıBy6b-1900, P.Giss, — O. Eger,

E. Kornemann,

and

P.M.

25

Meyer,

Griechische

Papyri

im

Museum

des

PRINCIPAL

ERITIONS

OF

ti KEER.

oberhessischen Geschichtsvereins zu Giessen. ili, Nos, 58-126, Leipzig-Berlin 1910-1912. P.Giss.

Univ.-Bibl,

= H. Kling

and

others,

Pt. i, Nos.

Mitteilungen.

Giessener Universitatshibliathek, Pts. i-vi, Giessen P.Gnom. — B.G.U. v. P.Goodspeed = E.J,

Goodspeed,

“A

Group

PAPYIO

of

1-353; Pt. i, Nas. 46-37;

aus

der

Pt.

Papyrussammlung

der

1924-1039.

Greck

Papyrus

Texts",

C. Ph. à (190),

pp. 167-75. P.Got.

= H. Frisk, 1029.

P.Gradenwitz

Paprrus grecs de la Bibliotheque municipale de Gothembourg,

- G. Plaumann,

Griechische

Papyri

der

Sammlung

Gradenwitz

Göteborg

(Sitsungsbe-

richte der Heidelberg Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1914, 15 Abh.), Heidelberg 1914. 1

P.Gr. Berol. = W. Schubart,

Papyri

Graecae.

Berolinenses,

Bonn

1011,

P.G.M. - K. Preisendanz, Papyri Graecae. Magicue, 3 vols., Leipzig-Berlin 1928, τύ ας ΤᾺ ΕΠ.

herausgegeben

P.Graux

xxi.

=

H, Henne,

“Papyrus

Graux”,

8.4.4.0.

(1923),

und

pp.

übersetzt

1859-214,

von-

and

.

xxxn

(1927). pp. 1-19. P.Grenf,

i = B.P. Grenfell,

Ptolemaic, Oxford P.Grenf.

it =

ΒΡ,

An Alexandrian

Erotic

Fragment

New

Classical

and Other Greek Papyri chiefly

i806.

Grenfell

and

and Latin Papyri, Oxford

A.S. Hunt,

Frayments

and

Other

Greek

1897.

P.Gran. = A.G. Roos, Papyri Groninyanae: Griechische Papyri der Universitatshibliothek zu Groningen nebst zwei Papyri der Universitatsbibliothek zu Amsterdam, Amsterdam ΓΟ... P.Gurob

= J.G.Smyly,

Memoirs, P.Hal, = Graeca

No.

Greek

Papyıri

from

12), Dublin-London

Halensis,

Dikaiomata:

Gurob.

{Royal

[τιν

Academy,

Auszüge aus Alexandrinisehen Gesetzen und Verard-

nungen in einem Pupyrus des philologischen Seminars der Universität Anhang weiterer Papyri derselben Sammlung, herausgegeben von—, P.Hamb. = P.M. Meyer, Griechische versitätsbibliothek, Y (in 2 parts), Griechische Papyri der

Halle, mit einem Berlin 1913.

Papyrusurkunden der Hamburger Staats-umnd UniLeipzig-Berlin 1911-1024. A new series begins with

Hamburger

Staats-und

Universititsbibliothek

mit

cken aus der Sammlung Hugo Ibscher, ed. B. Snell and others, Hamburg P. Harris = JE. Powell, Cambridge

The

Rendel

Cunningham

192t,

Harris

Pupyri

of

M'oodbrooke

College,

einigen

Stü-

1954. Birmingham,

1936.

P.Heid. = A. Deissmann,

Verüffentlichungen

aus

der

Heidelberzer

Die Septuaginta-Papvri und andere altchristliche

Texte,

Schott- Reinhardt ı, ed.

1906;

pyri, i, Prolemaische

C.H, Becker,

Heidelberg

Homerfragmente,

cd. 2b

Papyrussammlung

Heidelberg

d:

1905; ui: Paprri

1v: Griechische literarische Pa-

G.A. Gerhard,

Heidelberg

911,

NS.

1:

PRINCIHIELAI,

EDITIONS

OF

GREEK

PAPYKI

Zum Drogenhandel in Islamischen Ägypten, ed. A. Dietrich, Heidelberg 1954. N.S. 2: Literarische griechische Texte der Heidelberger Papyrussammlung, ed. E. Siegmann, Heidelberg 1956. N.S. 3: Griechische Papyrusurkunden und Ostraka der Heidelberger Papyrussammlung, ed. P. Sattler, Heidelberg 1962.

P.Heid. 210-224 = S. Jutta, “Griechische Papyrussammlung”,

und

Briefe

aus

= C.P.Herm.

P,Herm.

Rees = B.R, Rees, Papyri from

See

Stud.

Pal.

Heidelberger

v,

Hermopolis and Other Documents of the Byzantine

1964.

P.Hib. = B.P. Grenfell and A.S. Hunt, The Hibeh Papyri. Pt. 1, London E.G. Turner and M,T. Lenger, London 1956. P. Holm. = O. Lagercrantz, Purpur,

der

A.P.F. xvi (1958), pp. 143-68,

P.Herm.

Period, London

Urkunden

Papyrus

Uppsala-Leipzig

Graecus.

Holmiensis,

Recepte für

1906, Part ii, ed.

Silber,

Steine

und

1913.

P.land, = C, Kalbfleisch cum discipulis, Papyri fandanae, i-viit, Leipzig 1912-1938, Pt. i, Voluminum Codicumque Fragmenta Graeca cum Amuleto Christiano, ed. E. Schaefer, Leipzig 1912. Pt. ii, Epistulae Privatae Graecae, ed. L. Eisner, Leipzig 1913. Pt. tii, Instrumenta Graeca Publica et Privata, ed. L. Spohr, Leipzig 1913. Pt. iv, /nstrumenta Graeca Publica et Privata, ed. G. Spiess, Leipzig 1914. Pt. v, Literarische Stücke und Verwandtes, ed. J. Sprey, Leipzig-Berlin 1931. Pt. vi, Griechische Privatbriefe, ed. G. Rosenberger, Leipzig-Berlin 1934. Pt. vii, Griechische Verwaltungsurkunden, ed. D. Curschmann,

Leipzig-Berlin

1934.

Pt. viii, Griechische

Verwandtes, ed. J. Hummel, Leipzig-Berlin P.Jena = F. Zucker

and

F. Schneider,

P.Jews = H.T. Bell, Jews and

the Athanasian P.K.F. = See

Jenaer Papyrus-Urkunden,

Christians in Egypt:

Controversy,

Stud. Pal. iii and

Wirtschaftsrechnungen

London

und

1938.

The Jewish

Jena

Troubles

1926. in Alexandria

and

1924.

viii.

P.Leid. = C. Leemans, Papyri Grueci Musei Antiquarii Publici Lugduni-Batavi. Vol. i ( — P. Ludg. Bat.), Leiden 1843. Vol.ii, 1885, contains only documents of post-Christian times. P.Lille = P. Jouguet, P. Collart, J. Lesquier, and M. Xoual, Papyrus grecs {Institut papyrologique de l'Université de Lille), vol. i, Paris 1907-1928, vol. ii, 1912. Vol. ii contains the papyri from Magdola in the Fayyüm (therefore abbr. by P.Magd.), later re-edited by Guéraud in P. Ent, P.Lips. = L. Mitteis, Griechische Urkunden der Papyrussammlung zu Leipzig, i, Leipzig 1qo6,

P.Lips. Inv. = U. Wilcken,

“Papyrus - Urkunden",

A.P.F. v

(1913), p. 245.

P.Lond. = Greek Papyri in the British Museum, Vols. i and 11 ed, F.G. Kenyon, London 1893,

1898. Vol. iii, ed. F.G. Kenyon and H.T, Bell, 1907. Vol. iv, The Aphrodite Pupyri ed. H.T. Bell, with appendix of Coptic papyri by W.E, Crum,

2]

1910. Vol. v, ed. H.T. Bell,

PRINCIPAL

EDITIONS

1917. P.Jews continues the numerical

OF

GREER

sequence

BABY!

of the London

Papyri, i.e. Nos. 1912-

1929, but forms a separate publication. P.Lond. Inv. No. -= HUT, Bell, "Some Private Letters of the Roman Period from the London Collection” (fnv. Nos. 2575 (verso) ,2102, 1920, 1561}, Rev, Ex. N.S. i (1919). pp. 200-9. P, Louvre.

See

P.Luegd. Bar. P.Mag.

M.

and

- P.Leid.

W. {τς

Chrest. also

quoted

as P.Leid.

U. aller

U. Wilcken's

new

edition.

=- P.G.M.

P.Mard.

= P.Lille u.

P.Marmarica

-- P.¥at.

P.Merton = H.T. Bell and C.H. Roberis, A Descriptive Catalogue of the Greek Papyri in the Collection af Wilfred Merton, i, London 1948. Vol. ii, ed. J. W.B. Barns, H.T. Bell, and B.R. Rees, Dublin 1959. Vol. ili, ed. J.D. Thomas, London 1967. P. Meyer = P.M. Meyer,

Griechische

Texte aus

gypten:

i, Papyri des

Seminars der Universitat Berlin, i, Oxtraka der Sammlung

Neutestamentlichen

Deissmann,

Berlin

(Leipzig)

1916. P.Michael. -- D.S. Crawford, Paprri Michaelidae {being a catalogue of the Greek and Latin Papyri, Tablets and Ostraca in the Library of Mr. G.A. Michailidis of Cairo).

(The Egypt Exploration Society), London P. Mich. i (= P.Mich. Zen.)

1955.

= C.C. Edgar, Zenon Papyri in the University af Michigan Col-

lection, Ann Arbor (Univ. of Michigan Press) P. Mich. ii ( - P. Mich.Tehr.] ^ A.E.R. Boak, of Michigan Press) 1933. [Nas. 127-8].

1931. | Nos. 1-120].

Papyri

from

Tebtunis.

Ann

Arbor

(Univ.

P,Mich.in = J.G. Winter, Papyri in the University of Michigan Collection (Miscellaneous Papyri). Ann Arbor !Univ. of Michigan Press) 193b. | Nos. 131-221]. P.Mich. (v, 1 - ALC. Youtie with the collaboration of V.B. Schuman and O.M, Pearl, Tax Rolls from Karanis, T Text, Ann Arbor (Univ. of Michigan Press) 1936. | Nos. 223-5. P.Mich.

iv, If. = H.C. Youtie

and

O.M.

Pearl,

Tax

Rolls from Kuranis,

YE Texts and indexes,

Ann Arbor (Univ. of Michigan Press) 1939. | Nos. 357-031. P. Mich.

v

- ΕΜ.

Pt. ii. Aan P.Mich.

Husselman,

Arbor

(Univ. of Michigan

vi = H.C. Youtie

(Univ. of Michigan

A.E.R. Boak. and

and

Press)

W.F. Edgerton,

Papyri

Tebtunis,

1944. | Nos. 226-356|.

O.M. Pearl, Puprri und Ostraka from

Press)

from

Karanis,

Ann.

Arbor

1944. [ Nos. 364-428].

P.Mich. ving = H.C. Youtie and J.G. Winter, Papyri and Ostraca from Kuranis, Ann Arbor (Univ. of Michigan Press) 1951. INos. 464-521 [. Vol. vii contains the Latin Papyri, ed, by H.A. Sanders, 1947. P.MÜ.

R.

Uae.

A. Vogliano,

Florence 1935. vol. i, Milan.

Papyri

1937.

della

R.

Universita

Vol. 1 sometimes

268

degli

called

Studi

di

P. Primi,

Milano,

to.

vol.

il.

distinguish

PRINCIPAL

EDITIONS

this from the other Milanese

1965. Vols. iv and v, ed.

series.

OF

GKEEK

Vol.

V. Bartoletti

PAPYRI

iii ed. J. Cozzanica and others,

and others,

Milan 1967.

Vol.

Milan

ii, ed. L.

Castiglioni with the collaboration of others, Milan 1961. Vol. ii also abbr. by P.Mil. Vogliano. P.Monac. = A. Heisenberg and L. Wenger, Veróffentlichungen aus der Papyrussummlung der K, Hof-und Staatsbibliothek zu München: Byzantinische Papyri, Leipzig-Berlin 1914. P.Neutest. = P. Meyer. P.Os!, = S, Eitrem, Papyri Osloenses, i, Magical Papyri. Published by Det Dorske Videnskaps-Akademi I Oslo, Oslo 1925. Vols. ii and iii, ed. S. Eitrem and L. Amundsen,

Oslo 1931, 1936. P.Oxford = E.P. Wegener,

Some

Oxford Papyri, Leiden

1942. (= Vol. iti of

the series

Papyrologica Lugd.-Bat). P.Oxy. = B.P. Grenfell, A.S. Hunt, and others, The In progress. 4ı vols. in 1972.

P.Papyrus Roll =: P.Princ.

Oxvrhynchus Papyri,

London

1898.

Roll (q.v.).

P.Par. = A.J, Letronne and W. Brunet de Presle, Notices et textes des papyrus grecs du Musée du Louvre et de la Bibliothéque impériale (Notices et extraits des manuscrits

de la Bibl. impériale et autres bibl,, xviii 2), Paris 1865. P,Petrie = The Flinders Petrie Papyri, vol. i, ed. J.P. Mahaffy

(Royal [rish Academy,

Cun-

ningham Memoirs, No, viii). Vol. ii, ed. J.P. Mahaffy (ibid., No. ix). Vol. iii, ed. J.P. Mahaffy and J.G. Smyly

(ibid. No, xi), Dublin

1891-1905.

P.Phil. = 1. Scherer, Papyrus de Philadelphie (Publications de la Société Fouad ! de Papyrologie, Textes et Documents, vii), Cairo 1947. P.Primer = David - van. Groningen,

Papyrological Primer.

See p. 33 under David M.

P.Primi = P.Mil. R, Univ. Nos, 23-28 re-edited by E. Kiessling in SB/Bh, 2,Wiesbaden 1961. P.Princ. = E.H. Kase, A.C, Johnson, H.B. van Hoesen, and S.P. Goodrich, Papyri in the Princeton University Collections, Baltimore and Princeton 1931-1942. 3 Vols. in 1965: i : 1-14; il: 15-107; iii : 108-1917, P.Princ.

Roll = E.H. Kase, A Papyrus

Princeton P.Rainer

(= C.P.R.)

= C. Wessely, Corpus Papyrorum

chische Texte, Vienna P.Rainer

Roll in the Princeton University Collection ( Diss.),

1933. Ruineri Archiducis

Austriae,

i Grie-

1895.

(Cat.) = "Catalogus

Papyrorum

Raineri,

Series

Graeca".

ed.

C. Wessely,

in

Stud. Pal. xx (1921) Pt. i, xxii (1923) Pt. ii. P. Rein, = T. Reinach, W. Spiegelberg, cueillis

en

Égypte,

and others, Cairo P. Rev. = B.P. Grenfell, by

J. Bingen

in

Paris

and

S. de Ricci, Papyrus grecs et

1905. Vol. ii, Les Papyrus Théodore

demotiques re-

Reinach, ed.

P. Colları

1940. Revenie

SB,

Beiheft

Laws

of Ptolemy

1, Göltingen

40

Philadelphus,

1952.

Oxford

1896,

Re-edited

PRINCIPAL

P.Ross.-Georg.

EVITTIONS

OF

GREER

= G. Zereteli.O. Krüger, and P. Jernsiedt,

Sammlungen,

Vols. i-v, Tiflis

1925-1935.

Reprint

PAPYMHI

Papyri russischer und georgischer

1965.

P, Ryl, = Catalogue of the Greek Papyri in the John Rylands Library at Manchester. Vol, i, ed. A.S. Hunt, Manchester 1911, Vol. it, ed. A.S. Hunt, J. de M.Johnson, and V. Martin, 1915. Vol. iii, ed. C. H. Roberts, 1938. Vol. iv, ed. C.H. Roberts and E.G. Turner,

P.S.A.

1932.

Athen. -- P,Athen.

P. Sel, -: Select Papyri

(The

Loeb Classical Library).

Vol. i, Noa-Literary Pupyri:

Private

Affairs, Nos. 1-200, ed. A.S. Hunt and C.C. Edgar,London 1932 (reprint 1952, 1959). Vol. ti, Non-Lirerary Papyri: Public Documents, Nos. 201-434, ed. A.S. Hunt and C.C. Edgar, London 1934 {reprint 1936). Vol. in, Literary Papyri: Poetry, ed. DLL.

Page, London 1941 (revised and reprinted 1942, 1950). P.5.I. = G, Vitelli, M. Norsa, and others, Papiri greci e latini (Pubblicazioni Italiana per fa ricerca det Papiri greci e latini in Egitto) ı-xiv, Florence P.Sorb. — H. Cadell, Papyrus de fa Sarhonne P,Strassb.

= F. Preisigke,

Griechische

liothek zu Strassburg, Leipzig The series was continued bibliothéque nationale et

5$ (Nos,

Papyrus

1-68), Paris

della Società 1412-1957.

1966.

der Kaiserlichnen Universitats-und Landesbih-

i (1906-1912), [ Nos.

t-Bo]; ii (1920)

| Nos. 81-125]

by J. Schwartz and his pupils, “Papyrus Grecs de la universitaire de Strasbourg", Strasbourg 1948 | Nos, r26-

68], 1963 (Nos. 169-300]. P.Tebt, = B.P. Grenfell, A.S. Hunt, J-G.Smyly, E.J. Goodspeed, Tebtunis Papyri, i-i, London 1902-1938. Vol. iii in two parts, P.Thead. =: P. Jouguet, P.Tor.

> A. Peyron,

Papyrus

"Papyri

de Theadelphie,

Paris

and

C.C. Edgar,

The

10911.

graeci R. Muse: Aegyptii Taurinensis",

in Mem.

R. Acca.

Torino xxxi (1826), pp. 9-188 ( P.Far.A.). xxxiii (1827), 1-80. Also abbr. P.Taur. P.Vars. =: G. Manteuffel, P.Vat.

Papyri

Varsovienses,

Warsaw

1945.

- M. Norsa and ὦ. Vitelli, ff Papiro vaticano greco ii (1 4. Registri Fondiari della Marmarica), Città. del Vaticano.

Vaticana)

1931 (Studi e Testi 53). Also abbr. P,Marmurica,

P.Vind. Im. - E. Boswinkel, ΡΟΝ. Pestman, logica Lugd.-Bat. xiii), Leiden 1965. P.Vind. Sijp.

Φαβωρίνου περὶ φυγῆς; (Biblioteca. Apostolica

and

P.J, Si]pestetnjn, Papyri

| Ὁ. Sijpesteijn, Einige Wiener Pupyri

(Papyrologica

Selectae

i Papyro-

Lugd.-Bat. xi}, Leiden

ΜΕΥ P.Wuarren - M. David, BA, van Groningen, and J.C. van Oven, pyrologiea Lugd.-Bat. ij, Leiden 1941.

ΡΥ οι

ΡΜ

The

Warren Pupyri

Ῥὰ-

= H, Weil, “Un Papyrus inédit de la bibliotheque de M. Ambroise Firmin-Didor", in Monuments grecs publics par l'association pour & encouragement des études grecques en France, viii W879}. p. 35.

ΝΒ.

U. Wilcken,

Mifrerfunven aux der

Würzburger

zu

Papyrussamnmdung

(Aus

den

Ab-

PRINCIPAL

EDITIONS

handlungen der Preussischen No, 6), Berlin 1934.

OF

GREEK

PAPYRI

Akademie der Wissenschaften 1933, Phil.-hist. Klasse.

P.Zen. Col. = P.Col. Zen. (q.v.). SB = F.Preisigke,

F. Bilabel,

and

E. Kiessling,

Sammelbuch

griechischer

Urkunden

aus

Ägypten. Vols. i-viii?, Nos. 1-10208, In progress. Stud, Pal. =: C. Wessely, Studien zur Paläographie und Papyruskunde

(23 vols.), Leipzig 1901-

1966. Vols. iii and viii, Gr. Papyrusurkunden kleineren Formats | — P.K.F.), ed. C. Wes-

sely, Leipzig

1904,

1908.

Herm.), ed. C. Wessely, U.P.Z. = U. Wilcken, ägypten

Vol. Leipzig

Urkunden

Berlin-Leipzig

v, Corpus

Hermopolitanarum,

T ( - C.P.

1905.

der Prolemäerzeit

1922-1927.

W. Chrest, See p. 23 under M.

Papyrorum

(altere Funde). Vol. 1, Papyri aus Unter-

Vol. ii, Papyri aus

Oberügypten,

1937.

Chresi,

OSTRACA OQ. Meyer = P.Meyer. OÖ, Strassb, = P.

Viereck,

und Landesbibliothek O.Tait = J.G. Tait,

Greek

Griechische

und griechisch-demotische

zu Strassburg in Elsass, Berlin Ostraca

in the

Bodleian

Ostraka

der Universitats-

1923,

Library

at

Oxford and Various

Other

Collections, vol. i, London 1930. Vol. ii in collaboration with C, Préaux, London 1955. Vol. iii contains the indexes to vols. i and ii, ed. J. Bingen and M. Wittek, 1964. W.O.

- U. Wilcken, Griechische 2 vols.

Ovrraka aus

31

Aegypten und

Nubien, Leipzig-Berlin i899,

SPECIAL

COLLECTIONS

OF

PAPYRUS

TEXTS

Bell H.L, Martin V., Turner E.G. and van Berchem D., The Abinnaeus Archive (=P.Abinn.) :

Papers of a Roman Officer in the Reign of Constantius HJ. Collected and re-edited by-, Oxford Brooke

1962.

Dorothy,

Private Letters,

Calderini A., Lettere. private

Pagan

and

Christian,

dell'Egitto greco-romano,

London

Milan

1929.

1915.

Daum Götz, Griechische Papyrus-Briefe (Aus einem Jahrtausend antiker Kultur), Mainz 1959. David M. and

van

Groningen

B.A.,

Papyrological

Primer,

4th

ed.,

Leiden

1965.

Abbr.

P.Primer.

Davis W.H.,

Greek

Papyri

of the

First

Century,

New

York-London

1933.

Deissmann A., Licht vom Osten ( Das Neue Testament und die neuendeckten Texte der hellenistisch-rómischen Welt), 4th ed., Tübingen 1923. Translated into English under Light from

the Ancient East by L.R.M. Strachan, London

(Hodder

and

Stoughton)

1927. Dóllstádt Walter,

Griechische

Jahrhunderten

nach

Papyrusprivatbriefe

Christus

in gebildeter Sprache aus den ersten

{Inaugural-Diss.),

Leipzig

Erman A.-Krebs Fr., Aus den Papyrus der kgl. Museen,

1934.

Berlin

Ghedini G., Lettere cristiane dai papiri greca del Hil e IV secolo, Helbing R.. Auswahl aus griechische Papyri

(Sammlung

vier

Göschen,

1899. Milan

1923.

No. 625), Bertin-Leipzig

1912. Hofmann

M.,

Hunt A.S. and

Antike

Briefe,

Edgar C.C.

Lange K., Pyramiden,

Munich

1933.

See P.Sel.

Sphinxe,

Pharaasen,

Munich

1952.

Lietzmann L.H., Griechische Papyri: Kleine Texte für theologische

(Heft 14), Bonn texts, chiefly

1905, 4th ed.,

letters, from

Meyer P.M., Juristische Papyri,

law of Graeco-Roman

Berlin 1934.

P.Oxy., Berlin

Egypt,

P.Fay.

120.

with

Vorlesungen und Übungen

(A small collection

of

representative

etc.).

(A valuable collection of texts dlustrating the

elaborate

commentaries).

43 B.

G.

Mandilaras.

The

Verb

in the

Greek

Nom-Léterury

Papvri

3

SPECIAL,

COLLECTIONS

OF

PAPYRUS

Milligan G., Selections from the Greek Papyri, Cambridge

TENTS

1910,

(Edited with translation

and

notes). Olsson Bror, Papyrusbriefe aus der frühesten Römerzeit, Uppsala 1925. (80 letters republished, covering the period from 29 B.c. up to the end of the first century A.p.). Also abbr. by P. Briefe. Preisigke

Fr., “Familienbriefe aus

alter

Zeit",

Preuss.

J. cvii

(1902),

pp. 88-111.

Idem., Antikes Leben nach den Agyprischen Papyri, Leipzig-Berlin 1916 (= Aus Natur und Geisteswelt: Sammlung wissenschaftlichgemeinverständlicher Darstellungen, No. 565).

Schubart W., Papyri Graecae Berolinenses, Bonn 1911. (A collection of facsimiles, with transcripts etc., very useful to the palaeography

of papyri), cited as P.Gr.Berol.

ldem., Ein Jahrtausend am Nil, 2nd ed., Berlin 1923. (101

letters translated into German.

The material is chosen to illustrate life in Graeco-Roman Egypt at various periods. Informative and comprehensive introduction and comments on each letter), Idem., Griechische Papyri: Urkunden und Briefe von 4. Jahrh. v. Chr. bis ins B, Jahrh, n. Chr.

Vol. 1, Text, vol. i1 Kommentar, Sudhoff K., Vandoni

.Ärzrliches aus

Mariangela,

Berlin 1923.

den griechischen

Papyrus-Urkunden,

Leipzig

Feste publiche e private nei documenti greci,

Winter J.G., Life and Letters in the Papyri, Ann (There are quotations in Greek,

Arbor

1909.

Milano

(Univ. of Michigan

1964.

Press)

1933.

but in general the text of the letters is given in trans-

lation}. Witkowski S,, Epistulae graecae privatae

ed., Leipzig

quae

in papyris aetatis Lagidarum servantur, 2nd

1911.

Zwaan J. de, Griekse Papyri: Ten Dienste Grieks, Leiden {E.J. Brill} 1948.

von

34

het

Onderwijs

in

het

mieumlestamenrisch

GRAMMATICAL

Abel P.F.-M.,

WORKS

ON

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYRI

AND

Grammaire du grec biblique suivie d'un choix de papyrus, Paris

Antoniadis Sophie, L'Évangile de Luc, Esquisse de grammaire et de style. néoell. 7. Les Belles Lettres), Paris 1930. Anz H.,

Subsidia

Alexandrina

ad cognoscendum

repetita ( Diss.

Graecorum

Halis

sermonem

Saxonum),

vulgarem

N.T.!

1927.

(Coll. de l'Inst.

e Pentateuchi

versione

1894.

Bauer W.-Arndt W.F.-Gingrich F.W., A Greek-English Lexicon of the N.T. and Other Early Christian Literature, Chicago 1957. Translation of Bauer's Wörterbuch zum Neuen Testament, 4th edition (1952). 5th ed. of the German text, Berlin 1963. Blass F.-Debrunner A.-Funk R., A Greek Grammar of the New Testament and Other Early ? Christian Literature. A translation and revision of the gth-ıoth German ed. incorporating

supplementary

notes

of A. Debrunner

by

R. W. Funk,

Chicago

1961.

(The references correspond to the same numbers of the German ed.). Blomqvist J., Greek

Particles in Hellenistic Prose, Lund

1969.

Bóhlig G., Griechische Elemente in Koptischen als Zeugnis für die Geschichte

Sprache,

(Akten

d. xi. intern.

Byz.-Kongr.

Browning R., Medieval and Modern Greek

pp. 62-7),

Crönert G.,

Memoria

Debrunner A.,

Graeca

Grundfragen

Periods, Chicago

Herculanensis, und

Grundzüge

griechischen Sprache ü), Sammlung Deissmann A., Bibelstudien, idem,

Neue

Testament

An Outline of the History of the Greek Language,

the Koine and the Subsequent

Marburg

Bibelstudien, Marburg

der griechischen

1958.

(Hutchinson University Library), London 1969.

Burton E. de W., Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New burgh 1808. Costas P,S.,

Munich

Leipzig

Greek,

with Particular

Emphasis

on

1936. 1903.

der nachklassischen Griechisch

Göschen,

3rd. ed., Edin-

Band

114, Berlin

(Geschichte der

1954.

1895.

1897.

Idem, The N.T. in the Light of Modern Research (The Haskell Lectures, 1929). London 1929.

1. Works

dealing mainly with Ancient or Modern

to the Koine.

Greek

Treatises of a smaller scope are cited

35

are included as far as they refer

in the appropriate

sections.

GRAMMATICAL

WORKS

Dieterich K., Untersuchungen

Zeit bis zum Döttling Chr.,

schriften Dulton

ON

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYRI

zur Geschichte der griechischen Sprache

AND

Ν

von der hellenistischen

10, Jh. n. Chr., Leipzig 1898.

Die

Flexionsformen

(Diss.

Basel),

lateinischer

Lausanne

Nomina

in den griechischen

Papyri

und In-

1920.

Emily H., Prepositional Phrases in the Papyri

(Diss.), Chicago

1916.

Forster A.H., "The Pronunciation of Greek in N.T. Times”, A.T.R. v (1922), pp. 108-115. Ghedini G., La lingua dei vangeli apocrifi greci

(Pubblicazioni

della

Universita

Cattolica

del Sacro Cuore v 16 pp. 443 - 80.) Milan 1937, Gignac F.T.,

The Language

of the post-Christian

Greek

Papyri:

Phonology

and Accidence,

(Diss.), Bodl. MS. D. Phil. d. 3180, Oxford 1964. Harsing C., De optativi in chartis Aegyptiis usu (Diss.), Bonn Hatzidakis G.,

Einleitung

Grammatiken Idem, Μεσαιωνικὰ

in die neugriechische

v), Leipzig

Grammatik

1910. (Bibliothek.

indogermanischer

1892.

καὶ Νέα ‘EAAnvixa,

2 vols, Athens

1907

(cited M.N.E).

Idem, “Περὶ τοῦ θησαυροῦ τῆς Μεσαιωνικῆς ᾿Ελληνικῆς TAooong”, E.H.B.S. vii (1930), pp. 223-6. Idem, “Περὶ τῆς διαιρέσεως τῆς ἱστορίας ριόδους᾽", Ibid., pp. 226-30.

τῆς ᾿Ελληνικῆς

γλώσσης

εἰς διαφόρους

πε-

Helbing R., Die Kasussyntax der Verba bei den Septuaginta: Ein Beitrag zur Hebraismenfrage

und zur Syntax der Kown, ‘Higgins M.J.,

Greek",

"The

Renaissance of the First Century

111, Berlin

Holm C.E.,

1928. and

the Origin of Standard

Late

Traditio iii (1945). pp. 49-100.

Hoffmann O.-Debrunner

Band

Göttingen

A.,

Geschichte

der griechischen

Sprache

I., Sammlung

Göschen,

1953.

Griechisch- Ägyptische Namenstudien,

Uppsala

1936.

Hopfner T., Über Form und Gebrauch der griechischen Lehnworter in der Koptisch-sa idischen Apophthegmenversion. Denkschriften der K. Wien, Akad. d. Wiss, Phil.-hist.

Kl. 62, 2, (Vienna 1918). Horn R.C., The Use of the Subjunctive and Optative Moods (Diss.), Philadelphia t926.

in the

Humbert J., La disparition du datif en grec du

ler au

Jannaris A.N., An Historical Greek

Chiefly of the Attic. Dialect, London

Reprint

1968.

(References

Grammar,

Xe siécle,

Non-Literaryv

Paris

Papyri

1930.

1897.

in paragraphs).

Idem. "The True Meaning of the υινή", C. R. xvii (1903), pp. 93-6. Kapsomenakis S.G.

(= Kapsomenos)

der nachristlichen

Zeit.

Rechtsgeschichte, Munich

Foruntersuchungen

Münchener

Beiträge

1938.

36

zur

zu einer

Grammatik

Papyrusforschung

der Papyri und

antiken

GRAMMATICAL

Idem,

“Ἔρευναι

WORKS

ON

εἰς τὴν γλῶσσαν

THE

τῶν

LANGUAGE

ἑλληνικῶν

OF

PAPYRI

παπύρων",

AND

NT.

E.E.Thess.

vii (1957), pp.

225-372 Idem, “Die griechische Sprache zwischen

Kongr., ii, pp. 1-39. Munich Koskenniemi

H., Studien zur Idee

Chr., Helsinki

Koine und

Neugriechisch", Ber.

zum xi. Byzant.

1958. und

Phraseologie

des

griechischen

Briefes

bis 400

m.

1956.

Kretschmer P., Die Entstehung der K ine (Sitzungsberichte der Wiener Akademie 143, 10), Vienna

1901.

Kühner-Gerth, Ausfürliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache von R. Kühner, 2. Teil: Satzlehre, in neuer Bearbeitung von B. Gerth, Hannover-Leipzig, i (1808), ii (1904). Kuhring G.,

De

Praepositionum

Graecarum

in chartis Aegyptiacis usu, Quaestiones selectae

(Diss.), Bonn 1906. Liddell H.G.-Scott R., A Greek-English Lexicon. A new Edition Revised and Augmented throughout by Sir Henry Stuart Jones with the Assistance of Roderick McKenzie, Ah ed., Oxford 1940, (cited as LSJ). A Supplement edited by E.A. Barber and others, Oxford 1968 (cited as LSJ-Suppl.). Ljungvik H., Studien zur Sprache der apokryphen Apostelgeschichten

(Diss.).

Uppsala

Idem, "Ur papyrusbrevens Sprak",

(1929),

pp.

Göteborg Idem,

ur Eranos, xxvii

166—81).

1930.

Beiträge zur Syntax

Humanistiska Maidhof A.,

(Sártruck

1926.

Zur

der spätgriechischen

Vetenskapsamfundet Begriffshestimmung

Volkssprache

i Uppsala,

der

Koine,

Mandilaras B.G., Studies in the Greek Language, Mayser E., Grammatik

der griechischen

27. 3),

Wurzburg Athens

Papyri aus

(Skriften

utgivna

Uppsala

1932.

av

Kungl.

1912.

1972.

der Ptolemäerzeit,

i (Leipzig

i906;

i*

Berlin 1923), ii? (Berlin 1925). i? 1934, ii? 1934; 2nd ed.: i? 1938, # 1936. 2nd ed. of vol.

i by

H. Schmoll,

Berlin

Meillet A., Apercu d'unc histoire

1970. de

la

langue

grecque, 7th cd.,

Paris 1943.

(Koine in pp.

241-324). Meillet

A.- Vendryes J., Traité de grammaire comparée des langues classiques, Paris 1924.

Meinersmann B., Die lateinischen Wörter und Namen in den griechischen Papyri (Papyrusinstitut der Universitátsbibliothek in Heidelberg, Band i, Schrift 1), Leipzig 1927. Meisterhans K., Grammatik

der attischen

Inschriften, 3rd ed. by E. Schwyzer,

Berlin

1900.

Miller C.W.E., "Note on the Use of the Article before the Genitive of the Father's Name in Greek Papyri , A.J.Ph. xxxvii (1916), pp. 341-8. Milligan G.H.. “Hellenistic Greek". Moule C.F.D.,

An Idiom-Book

Moulton J.H., “Grammatical

The

of New Notes

Year's

Work

Testament Greek,

from

Papyri,

in

C.S.,

1015

2nd ed.,

the Papyri",

The

Evpositer vii (1903), pp.

37

Cambridge

1950.

C. R. xv (1901) . pp. 31-8: 434-42;

(1904), pp. 106-22; 151-5. Idem, "Notes from

(1916), pp. r25-B.

104-21.

xviii

GRAMMATIUAL

WORKS

Idem,

A Grammar of New

Idem,

“Hellenistic Greek",

ON

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYHI

Testaemnt Greek, i Prolegomena, The

Year's

Work

in

C.S.

AND

NT.

3rd ed., Edinburgh

1913

(1414),

pp.

1908.

187-92;

1914

(1915), pp. 165-9. Moulton J.H.-Howard W.F., A Grammar of New

Testament Greek, ii, Edinburgh

Moulton J.H.-Milligan G.,

Greek

The

Vocabulary

of the

Papyri and Other Non-Literary Sources, London Moulton J.H.-Turner N.,

A Grammar of New Testament

Nachmanson E., Laufe und Formen

der magnetischen

Palmer L.R., "Prolegomena to a Grammar (1934), Idem,

pP.

Chr.,

of the post-Ptolemaic

Φωνητικὴ

pias, Athens Papadopoulos

Athens

the

1952.

Greek, iii,

1963.

Syntax, Edinburgh

inschriften, Uppsala

of the post-Ptolemaic

A.,

τῶν

Papyri:

1904.

Papyri , J.Th.S., xxxv

Accidence

νερξλληνικῶν

ἰδιωμάτων

τῶν

᾿Ιδιωμάτων

and

Word-Farmation,

Kvnpov,

Jwörrarnonu

London

καὶ

Ixa-

1929. Γραμματικὴ

βορείων

τῆς

Νέας

᾿Ελληνικῆς

Γλώσσης,

1927.

Pernot H., Études sur ja langue des Évangiles, Philintas M., 1927.

Illustrated from

1914-1929. 2nd ed., London

170-5.

A Grammar 1945.

Pantelidis

Testament

1929.

Γλωσσσγνωσία

καὶ

Paris

᾿λωυσσογραφία

1027.

᾿Ελληνική

[=

P.T.E.)

3 vols,

Athens

Preisigke F., Wörterbuch cer griechischen Papyrusurkunden mit Einschluss der griechischen Inschriften, Aufschriften, Ostraka, Mumienschilder usw. aus Ägypten. Vollendet und

hzb. von Emil Kiessling. Vol. 1 (1925), vol. ii {1927}. vol. iii ( Besondere Wörteriiste, 1931), vol. iv, Heft NB and SB. Psaltes S.B...

Grammatik

I (1944). Berlin

der

1914-1927. Cited as

Byzantinischen

Chroniken,

WB. Sce also entries under

Göttingen

1913.

Psichari J., "Essai sur le grec de la Septante", R. EJ. lv (1908), pp. 161-208 ( -- Quelque travaux de linguistique, de philologie et de littérature helléniques i (1930). pp. 831-01). Radermacher L., "Besonderheiten der Koine-Syntax",

W.S. xxxi (1909). pp.

Idem,

Neuen

Neutestamentliche Grammatik

Lietzmann), 2nd ed., Tübingen

(Handbuch

zum

Testament

1-12.

herausg. von

H.

1925.

Regard P.F., La phrase nominale dans la langue du Nouveau

Testament, Paris 1919.

Idem, © ontribution à l'étude des prépositions dans la langue du N.T., Paris

1919.

Robertson A.T., A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Lighr of Historical Research, 3rd. ed., New York 1919. Rossberg C.,

De praepositionum

(Diss.), Jena Rydbeck

Graecarum

in chartis Aegyptiis Ptolemaearum

aetatis usu

1909.

L.. Fachprosa,

vermeintliche

Volkssprache

38

und

Neues

Testament,

Uppsala

1067.

GRAMMATICAL

WORKS

ON

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYRE

ANI?

NT.

Salonius A.H., Zur Sprache der griechischen Papyrusbriefe, i, Die Quellen, Helsingfors 1927. Schmid W.,

Der Atticismus in seinen Hauptvertretern, Stuttgart i-v (1887-1897).

Schubart W., Einführung pp. 184-226}, Schweizer E.

in die Papyruskunde, Berlin

(Schwyzer),

Grammatik

1918.

("Die Sprache

der pergamenischen

Inschriften,

der

Berlin

1898.

Schwyzer Z., Griechische Grammatik, i, Munich 1939. ii Syntax und syntaktische vollstandigt und hg. von A. Debrunner, Munich 1950. Serz H., Der 1920.

Infinitiv

in der griechischen

Papyri

Sophocles E.A., Greek Lexicon of the Roman

1100, New

York

der Kaiserzeit

and

| bis Diokletian),

Stilistik, Erlangen

Byzantine Periods from B.C. 146 to A.D

1887.

Tabachovitz D., Études sur le grec de la basse époque, Uppsala Thrail Margaret, Greek Particles in the New

Testament,

Leiden

1943. 1962.

Thumb A., "Die Forschungen über die hellenistische Sprache in den Jahren A.P.F. ii (1903), pp. 396-427. Idem,

Papyri",

Die griechische

Sprache

im

1896-1901",

Zeitaiter des Hellenismus (Beiträge zur Geschichte

und

Beurteilung der KO/NH), Strassburg 1901. Idem, "Die Forschungen über die hellenistische Sprache in den Jahren 1902-1904", A.P.F.

iii (1906), pp. 443-73. Idem,

Handbuch der neugriechischen Volkssprache, translation by S, Angus, Edinburgh 1912).

Triantaphyliidis M.A., Νεοελληνικὴ Idem,

"Amravra

MavoAn

Γραμματική,

Τριανταφυλλίδη:

and

ed., Strasbourg

᾿Ιστορικὴ

᾿Ερεινητικὰ

A’,

910.

(English

Eioaywyn, Athens 1938. B', Salonica

Tsopanakis A., Essai sur la phonétique des parlers de Rhodes

1963.

(Contribution à l'étude des dia-

lectes néogrecs), Athens 1940. Tsopanakis

A.,

θεώρησις Tzartzanos

“KOINH

i (1947):

A.A.,

Ῥοδιακὰ

4,

pp.

Νεοελληνικὴ

ἰδιώματα",

138-42;

5,

Σύνταξις

pp. (τῆς

Rhodes

182-5;

1948.

6, pp.

Cf.

Kourmoulis,

4«5.

’ Erı-

223-8, 7, pp. 250-5.

κοινῆς Anporınns),

Athens

vol. i (1946),

vol. ii (1953). Veitch W., Greek

Verbs Irregular and Defective.

Their Forms,

Meanings and Quantity Em-

bracing all the Tenses Used by the Greek Writers with References to the Passages in which they are Found. New Edition (Oxford 1887). Völker F.. Papyrorum

graecarum

syntaxis specimen

(Diss.),

Bonn

Idem, Syntax der griechischen Papyri, i, Der Artikel (Programm

1900.

Münster

i W.),

1903,

Votaw C.W.. The Use of the Infinitive in Biblical Greek, Chicago 1896. Wackernagel

chisch,

J..

Vorlesungen

Lateinisch

und

über

Syntax

Deutsch),

{mit

Basel

39

besonderer

1920.

Berücksichtigung

von

Grie-

GRAMMATICAL

WORKS

ON

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAP'YHI

AND

NUT,

Waldis J., Sprache und Stil der grossen griechischen Inschrift vom Nemrud-Dagh in Kommugene ( Nord-Syrien): Ein Beitrag zur Koine-Forschung (Diss.), Heidelberg 1920. WesselyC., Die lateinischen Vienna 1902. WitkowskiS.,

Prodromus

Elemente

grammaticae

in der

Grazität

papyrorum

der

ägyptischen

graecarum

aetatis

Papyrusurkunden,

Lagidarum,

Cracow

1897. Idem. “Bericht über die Literatur zur Koine, i, aus den Jahren 1898-1902", Jahresb. für Altertumsw. mxx (1904 T.), pp. 153-256,11, "aus den Jahren 1903-1906", Jahresb. f. kl. Altertumsw., mlix (Leipzig 1921), pp. 1-279. Idem,

"De

atticitate

epistularum

privatarum

graecarum

observationum

specimen,

Aegyptus xiii (1933), PP. 529-41. Wolf K., Studien

zur

Sprache des

Malalus, i, Formenlehre, Munich

1911, ii

Syntax, Munich

1012. Wuthnow H., Die semitischen Menschennamen in griechischen Inschriften und Papyri des vorderen Orients (Studien zur Epigraphik und Papyruskunde i 4). Leipzig 1930. Zilliacus H., Zur Sprache griechischer

214-21] Idem,

Zur

(Societas Abundanz

Scientiarum

Familienbriefe des iii. Jahrhunderts n. Chr. | P. Mich.

Fennica,

der spätgriechischen

Zwaan J. de. "The Use of the Greek

xiii 3),

Helsinki

Gebrauchssprache,

Language

(1922), pp. 30 ff.

40

1943.

Helsinki

1967.

in Acts", The Beginning of Christianity, ii

RESEARCH

IN THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYRI

1. Since 1778, when the first papyrus! reached Europe, thousands of papyrus texts have been brought to light, and an equal number still await publication. Scholars began to excavate eagerly in Egypt with the hope that some new discovery would enhance our knowledge of Greek literature. Though expectations have not been entirely fulfilled, these scholars have succeeded in giving us a fair number of literary pieces, hitherto unknown, which belong to Classical scholarship.” 2.

Their labour,

however,

has been

well rewarded

1. Charta Papyracea graece scripta Musei Borgiani Velitris,

by the light shed

ed. Nicolao

Schow,

on

Rome

1788.

to Greek

liter-

The text is re-edited in SB 5124. 2. For an account

of the discoveries

of the papyri

and

their contribution

ature see W, Schubart, Ein Jahrtausend am Nil Berlin 1912; idem, Einführung in die Papyruskunde, Berlin 1918; A.S. Hunt, "Papyri and Papyrology", J.E.A. i (1914), pp. 81-92; 'dem, “Twenty-Five Years of Papyrology , J.E.A. vii (1922). pp. 121-8; FG.

Kenyon, "Greek Papyri and their Contribution to Classical Literature", J.H.S. xxxix (1914), pp. 1 ff.; Idem, “Fifty Years of Papyrology , Actes du Ve Congrés intern. de papyrologie (Brussels, 1938); B.P. Grenfell, "The Present Position of Papyrology", The Bulletin of the John Rylands Library vi (1921); K. Preisendenz, Papyrusfunde und Papyrusforschung, Leipzig 1933; C.H. Roberts, “The Greek Papyri", The Legacy of Egypt. pp. 249-82,

Oxford 1962; B.R. Rees, The Use of Greek Turner,

Greek

Papyri:

(An Inaugural Lecture), Cardiff 1960; E.G.

An Introduction, Oxford

1968;

H.I. Bell, Egypt

(from Alexander

the Great to the Arab Conquest), Oxford 1948, For the literary papyri several lists have been compiled; see especially J. H.M. Milne, Catalogue of the Literary Papyri in the British

Msueum, Roman

London Egypt,

and

#927, and R.A. ed..

Ann

Arbor

Pack, The Greek and Latin Literary Texts from Greca1965. ji

SR 2-4

RESEARCH

IN THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYRI

the age between the death of Alexander the Great and the Arab conquest. The historians have taken advantage of this source to broaden their know-

ledge of political, social, economic, and cultural development in the ancient world.! 3. The contribution of the papyri to the history of the Greek language was recognized first by theologians who were concerned with the ınterpreta-

tion of biblical

texts. They

found

abundant

material,

worked out their views concerning the difficulties and

had

and

from

it they

controversies

which

arisen from the “abnormal” use of Greek in these texts. In particular

they found that the influence of “Semitisms” was considerably less been supposed, for the simple reason that words and phrases,

than had formerly

explained as Hebraistic, were seen to constitute no more than current vulgar usage. [t must be noted that the N.T. Grammar of Friedrich Blass, which

first appeared 4.

in 1896, represents a landmark

in N.T.

study.?

After the theologians came the philologists who considered the language

of the papyri for its own sake. Since the last decades of the nineteenth century, and especially at the beginning of the present century, important books and articles have appeared, which are genuine contributions towards the formation of a more accurate evaluation of the language of papyri. Outstanding among these works is Mayser's Grammatik, a lasting contribution to the interpretation of the language of Ptolemaic papyri. It supplies copious details of the various constructions, and gives an abundance of material concerning the phonology. Mayser spent forty years working on the 7 volumes of his Grammar which involves an exhaustive examination of the Ptolemaic

papyri. This standard work

will always

remain

an

indispensable reference book, and no subsequent writer on the same subject can fail to be grateful for the range and thoroughness of its material. Mayser's work ts not

only

a

catalogue

of instances

referring to the

grammatical categories which he examines, but also an attempt to interpret them; and Mayser

seldom

fails to give the right interpretation.

t. From the papyri, M. Rostovizeff achieved brilliant resuits in his Social and Economic History of the Hellenistic World, 3 vols., Oxford 1964. 2. This Grammar was revised later by A. Debrunner (4th ed., 1913), then thoroughly revised and augmented by the same author (7th ed., 1943). It has recently been translated into English by R. Funk (1961), thus giving the English-speaking students of early Christian literature a valuable instrument of study. The English edition is paragraphed identically with

the German

10th ed.

(1959)

(see 42

bibliography).

RESEARCH

IN THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAPYRI

$$ 5.8

5. In addition, there are other valuable treatises dispersed in philological periodicals! along with grammatical observations ranging over a wide area of papyrus literature. But their fragmentary character and their small relevance limit their value. 6. It is true, however, that there is no standard Grammar to cover the post-Ptolemaic papyri, and such a lack becomes more noticeable because the non-literary papyri of the Roman and Byzantine periods are highly important in the history of the Greek language. In the papyri of those periods appear alterations of phonology, inflexion and structure, all of which constitute a unique language which deviates from Classical speech, yet has similarities with the vernacular of the present day. The lack of a standard Grammar has been overcome to some extent by Kapsomenakis' (afterwards Kapsomenos) Foruntersuchungen, which remains an instructive instance of grammatical research and is of great help in the interpretation of papyrus texts. Kapsomenos also wrote a series of critical notes on texts of Roman and Byzantine times, having given us elsewhere a detailed exposition of materials and references concerning the history of the Greek language (see Die Griechische Sprache zwischen Koine und Neugriechisch). Papyrology is also much indebted to H. C. Youtie, who, apart from his publications of papyri and related texts, presented valuable observations concerning the language of papyri.? 7. Other scholars have shown enthusiasm in dealing with the language of papyri, and have presented their "prolegomena" with the intention of completing a Grammar in time. None of these plans has been fulfilled. 8. Anyone who undertakes the publication of papyri is well aware of the difficulties and problems arising from the inadequate knowledge we have of the language of papyri; and some tend to be satisfied when they give masses of references (sometimes irrelevant) to Mayser's Grammatik, while others confuse phenomena of phonology with those of morphology, or actual errors with writing conventions. But worst of all are those who restore papyrus-texts in accordance with the Attic norm, thus destroying the main

1. Papyrı are especially

and

B.A.

van

served by a number

Groningen,

Papyrological

2. See for instance his Textual Criticism viii (Ann

Arbor,

1951),

of periodicals;

Primer,

Leiden

for particulars

1965,

see M.

(London, 1958), the commentaries

and the sets of critical notes

43

published

David

pp. 38*- οὔ. in

in P. Mich.

T. A.Ph.A. each

year.

ἢ 8

RESEARCH

purpose of publication,

IN

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

PAT'Y HI

which is to present the text faithfully as it came

from the writer’s hand.! Editorial blemishes, along with the simple errors of reading, have now been collected in the Berichtigungsliste (abbr. BL),

but there are still many

undiscovered

errors, apart from

the ambiguities

created either by the bad state of preservation of the papyrus,

factory interpretation of linguistic phenomena,

by unsatis-

or by inaccurate decipher-

ment of the papyrus texts. Such is the situation from the grammatical point of view and, as Youtie says, “a grammar remains a chief desideratum of

papyrology

to this day”.?

|

4, Though there is some similarity between the language of papyrı and the Attic language the two are by no means identical: nor is Koine ihe standard on which the Grammar of

papyri must +

Cf. Youtie,

be based. Text.

Criticism, p. 49.

44

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

NON-LITERARY

PAPYRI

9. Before proceeding to the investigation of our subject we must define our sources and briefly describe their nature. Under the heading of “nonliterary papyri” we include any papyrus texts which do not relate to Classical or Biblical literature. In particular, non-literary papyri cover a large selection of texts including (a) documents relating to public affairs (Codes and Regulations, Edicts and Orders, Meetings, Official Acts and Inquiries,

Public Announcements, Reports of Judicial Business, Petitions and Ap-

plications, Declarations to Officials, Nominations and Appointments, Contracts and Tenders, Receipts, Orders for Payment, Accounts and Lists), (b) documents relating to private affairs (Agreements, Receipts, Wills, Disownments,

Memoranda,

Invitations,

Agenda,

Questions

to

Oracles,

Gnostic

Charms, Horoscopes) and (c) private and official correspondence From this list it becomes obvious that the papyri cannot be treated as a single unity. Whereas the language of the papyri in general belongs to the Greek “lingua franca"

sequence

of its time, each document

of the category

to which

shows

special characteristics as a con-

it belongs.

10. At first glance the language of the non-literary papyri appears simple; on further examination it is found to present problems of great difficulty and complexity, due not to the difficulty of the vocabulary, or the construction of the language, but to the fact that we must supply through guesswork what the writer often took for granted and could therefore omit, or include in his personal way. 11. If we could define the language of papyri as the spoken Koine, of which we have numerous examples in the N.T., we should not need to bother ourselves further. But the question is not so plain as it first seems. The most obvious complication is the lack of homogeneity, which would be obtained if the writers were all of the same calibre.

12.

in general, the language of non-literary

papyri

may

be subdivided

into two categories: the official and business language represented by public documents, and the "popular" language represented by private correspondence? The boundaries between the two must not be made too rigid, as I. Cf. the contents

of P.Se/. i and ii. and

E.G. Turner,

Greek

Papyri, pp.

129 ff.

2. This distinction can be regarded as bzing similar to the difference between Modern Greek purified

ἰκαθαρεύουσα)

and

the

spoken

[δημοτική)

45

language.

δὲ

12-16

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

NON-LITERARY

PAPYHI

we often find that an official document can betray a more “vulgar” character, while a letter written by an educated person can be entirely in accordance with Attic standards. On the other hand, the documents

to private and only is natural, of private sender

affairs are inclined to present a more or the letters remain to represent the spoken as the fundamental purpose of the letter is communication which is a substitute for

and

recipient. Thus

the letters give

which

refer

less official language, language. This in fact to function as a form conversation between

us positive evidence

of every-

day speech, especially in the colloquial form, in so far as they avoid the influence of bureaucracy, formula, and teaching. 13. The official language has little to offer for discussion. It is in general repetitive and routine! constructed on special principles and full of the stereotyped phrases which always characterize bureaucracy. But occasionally these documents do give adequate evidence for phonologv, though to a lesser degree than do the private documents. This is due to the fact that the writer, though he may have been careful to copy the traditional orthography,

could

not

avoid

the general

trends

of the language.

14. Some of the official documents, such as orders, proceedings, and petitions, are writtenin epistolary formulae and in consequence reveal the characteristics of the private letters. I5. The style of a letter depends on its purpose. The business letters, for example, have a stylistic pattern which is entirely absent from the family

letters. Both are based on a simple language whose differences in phonology,

morphology,

and

syntax

are

immediately

obvious.

The

writers

are

mainly workmen, businessmen, and farmers, who, like any people of this kind, did not always use their finest tools even if they possessed them. Their language is colloquial as one would naturally expect it to be. As a result, it is replete with elliptical expressions which are either conventional, or influenced by individual preference. Parataxis and asyndetic constructions are phenomena commonly encountered. Redundancies and above all deviations in phonology and accidence may be found in abundance throughout these texts. 16.

Letters

[. Cf. Youtie,

favour

Text.

prepositional

Criticism,

n. 34.

constructions.

and

prefer

the

analytical

THE

mode

of expression,

LANGUAGE

rather

GF

than

NON-LITERARY

the earlier

PAPYRI

synthetic

st 16-19

constructions.

This

is a feature familiar in the language of papyri in general, common to the Hellenistic and N.T. authors: a tendency to put new life into the expression of certain grammatical categories that show the wear and tear of time. 17.

The infinitive with or without a preposition is in full use; the preference

for ἐάν, ἕνα, ὅτι -clauses

pendently

without

15 remarkable;

relation

the genitive absolute is used inde-

to the main

sentence;

the case of the

object

is not chosen in accordance with the Classical rules; in particular the dative

is replaced by the accusative and to a lesser degree by the genitive, while

the vocative tends to be assimilated by the nominative;

the negative μή

predominates in some cases where the Attic norm would require ov; the Attic declension, Attic future, and optative tend to be largely eliminated. The most revolutionary changes are to be found in the morphology of the noun and verb. The new formations are as a rule a result of analogy. 18.

Much

course an

can

be said about

Egyptian

the style and

donkey-driver

the content

did not write

or a royal official; neither did little Theon (P.Oxy.

of the letters.* Of

the tongue

of a scholar

119), or a soldier (B.G.U.

423), or the penitent son (B.G.U. 846), or a schoolboy (P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575), or the wife who is complaining because her husband remains abroad in spite of the fact that she is suffering at home (P.Lond. 42).? But their lan-

guage reveals a simplicity without artificiality, and a variety of forms and structures

which

indicate

that each

sender

did

his

best

to write

as lively

a letter as possible. In almost all the letters the conversational phraseology is noticeable. This becomes apparent when direct and indirect discourse are mixed; when the infinitive is replaced by another mood; when the imperative is treated as a substitute for the infinitive, Further parenthesis and anacoluthon can quite easily be distinguished from the Classicizing structure of a rhetorical style, often used by Hellenistic authors. 19.

The letters follow certain patterns which constitute the epistolary for-

1. Cf. J.C. Winter,

1933; J. Lindsay,

Life and Letters in the Papyri,

Daily Life in Roman

Egypt,

Ann

London

Arbor

(Univ.

of Michigan

2, These letters have been widely quoted as an illustration of the daily life. the stances, and trials and tribulations, under which these people used to live.

47

Press)

1963. circum-

$8 19 - 20

THE

LANGUAGE

OF

NON-LETERARV

PAPYRI

mulae! and vary according to the writer and the time. The salutatory expressions, especially, may enable us to give a more or less accurate date to a letter. 20. In conclusion we must warn whoever ‘tries to discover the qualities of Classical prose in these writings that he will certainly fail. Instead, this

language

distinguishes

itself by

its simplicity,

t. For particulars see E.Y. Exler, The Form of the Ancient Epistolography

(Diss.),

Washington

1923;

B. Olsson,

49

variety

and

flexibility.

Greek Letter: A Study in Greek

Papyrusbriefe,

pp. 9-22.

NEW

TESTAMENT

AND

PAPYRI

21. The similarities between the language of the N.T. and the papyri were not recognized before the end of the nıneteenth century, when the first papyri began to receive systematic publication. Pioneer in the comparative investigation of the Janguage of these two types of texts was Adolf Deissmann, who, with his Bibelstudien (1895) and Neue Bibelstudien (1897), laid the foundation stone for new research.! He himself prepared an excellent work (Licht vom Osten which appeared in 1908, when papyri had already presented sufficient material for investigation. J. H. Moulton followed closely behind Deissmann and confirmed Deissmann's conclusions with the aid of independent research. He produced a series of articles which he published in the Classical Review, but above all there stands his comprehensive and valuable Grammar of N.T. Greek (Prolegomena) (ist ed. 1906), which still, after more than sixty years, provides an adequate introduction to the language of the N.T. and papyri. 22. Both Moulton and Deissmann were decidedly opposed to the view that the peculiarities of N.T. Greek were due to the influence of Hebrew, for the simple reason that most of these peculiarities are widely scattered throughout texts which have no Semitic connections. The old view, however, could not be completely forgotten, because N.T. Greek has certainly been influenced by the Semitic language, quite apart from the fact that a number of usages, which can be regarded as good Greek, were affected by Semitic

tendencies. A thorough examination of this question has been elaborated by J. Vergote in his article “Grec Biblique”, Dict. de la Bible, Suppl. viii, 1938. The author points out that "Du moment qu'une expression non classi1.

M. Brunet

de

Presle,

publishing

the

Paris

papyri

(1863), noticed

the specialcharacter

of the Greek language by that time (see introduction of P.Par. 481155 B.c.]), but no one prior

to Deissmann

2. Translated 1927.

seems

to have

paid

into English

as Light

from

much

attention

the Ancient

3. Cf. C. R. xv (1001). pp. 31-8; 434-42: ΧΝ graphy under Moulton.

to

Brunet's

East by L.R.M.

(1904), pp. 100-12;

remarks. Strachan,

London

151-5. Sec also biblio-

4. Cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk. $ 4 (with bibliographyi for particulars on this question. C.F.D. Moule often speaks on Semitisms (see esp. pp. 171 ff.). and in the Grammar by MoultonTurner one can see that Semitism is given more significance than it really deserves (see

index s.v.) . Similarly Zerwick, Biblicu! Greek. trans. into English by J. Smith, does not hes. itate to classify a great many constructions as Semitisms, although he himself admits that they are found in Classical Greek and the popular language of the Hellenistic period (!).

τὸ B. Ὁ.

Mandilaras.

The

Verb.

in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

4

$88 22 - 26

NEW

TESTAMENT

AND

PAPYHI

que des papyrus peut trés bien étre un égyptianisme et non pas un vulgarisme, il n'y a plus aucune raison de nier l'influence sémitique dans la méme expression, lorsqu'elle se trouve dans le Nouveau Testament". This is absolutely true. But the author exaggerates the “autochtone” influence by quoting parallels from texts written in Coptic, which can show the influence of the Greek element, given that, the existence of certain phenomena has been verified before the Coptic was recorded (iii/a.p.). The Greek language was predominant throughout the Hellenistic world, as we would naturally expect, and even within the Roman period. The problem lies in the fact that the Greek and the Semitic languages possessed parallel usages which developed

in a similar

manner

but independently.

23. Papyri exhibit certain features jin common with the N.T., and these are numerous and clear enough for us to determine the. position of the language of the papyri in relation to N.T. Greek. 24. Papyri are very revealing with regard to the phonetic changes. N.T. mss. show a number of these changes, and especially those which were apparently completed

by a.p. 300:

the change of εἰ tox, at to e, ox to v, the

interchange of n and ¢, and loss of the quantitative distinction between long and

short vowels.

Papyri

however

go further, presenting various changes

which are not found in the N.T. text. For example, both the diphthongs and consonants show a great variety of interchangeability, which is not found in the N.T. On that point Egyptian influence must be taken into consideration.

25. With regard to the inflexional system of the noun, N.T. tended to keep the Attic norm, with the exception of the so-called Attic second declension, which was dying out everywhere in the Hellenistic vernacular. Jn the early N.T. mss., as well as in the papyri, we find substantives ending in -pa inflected in the same way as those ending in -ooa, -Aàa. 26. Concerning the third common with the papyri. singular of the -"ns nouns cápkav, odAmyyav, xeipav,

declension N.T. Greek has many features in For instance the N.T. adopted the accusative ending in -'5v.! The N.T. also has -av for -a in γυναῖκαν, etc. These formations are frequent in

1. This form was already known in Attic (rpınpyv, Δημοσθένην etc.). Papyrı extended further the την accusative to the perispomena (“Διοκλῆν, "EpnorAnr etc.) and to the oxytone adjectives (ὑγιῆν, ἀσφαλὴῆν etc.). 50

NEW

TESTAMENT

ANI) PAPYRI

§§ 26 - W

the Koine and have led to complete assimilation of the singular number of the third declension by the first in Modern Greek. 27. The accusative plural of the vowel stem nouns follows those of the consonant stems: βότρυας Rey. 14 : 18; ἰσχύας Matt. 14:17; Boas John 2:14. 28.

Assimilation

of the nominative

with

the other cases

cf. ἡ ὠδίν 1 Thess. 5:3. Confusion of the cases in general

is not unknown;

is as common

in the N.T. as it 1s in the papyri. 29. Conjugation: In the N.T. and in the papyri the unaugmented forms, especially of compound verbs, are very frequent. To be precise ev- remains unchanged and o:- often appears unaugmented. Unique to the papyri is the fact that the syllabic augment can be sometimes omitted. In the formation of the tenses we may observe that the papyri are more revolutionary. However, both the papyri and the N.T. show a tendency towards new pres-

ent formations patterned after the stem of the aorist: κρύβω, νίπτω (instead of vita), ἀνοίγω etc., as in Modern Greek. The aorist is influenced by the imperfect and perfect (2nd singular in -es, and 3rd plural in -aoı) in its inflexion, and by the future in its formation (cf. ἔδωσα). Certain nonsigmatic aorists became s-aorists by analogy with the future, and certain thematic aorists (i.e. ending in -ov) received the endings of the s-aorists (i.e. -a) of the type εἶπον - εἶπα, so ἔβαλα, ἔλαβα, etc. (see 317 (2), (14)). The Attic future is in the process of dying out, and maintains itself only in a few cases of several verbs in -ἰζω. These features are found as often in pa-

pyri as they are in the N.T.

|

30. The verbs in -,« gradually disappear, yielding to the -« formations. Cf. δεικνύεις John 2 :18; ἀπολλύει John 12 :25; ὀμνύει Matt. 23:20. This formation according to the thematic verbs is very often exemplified (a) in the imperfect: ἐζώνννες John 21:18,

(b) in the aorist: ἔστρωσαν

Matt. 21:8

(&* D), and (c) in other moods, as in the infinitive: ὀμνύειν Matt. 26: 74, and the participle: ἀπολλύων Rev. 9:11. The verbs in -vuvaı are replaced by other thematic verbs which have the same meaning: xopralw for xopévνυμι, ῥήσσω for ῥήγνυμι, σκορπίζω for σκεδάννυμι; cf. also ἀμφιάζω (Doric in origin), which, together with the similar Hellenistic form ἀμφιέζω, takes the place of the older ἀμφιέννυμι. For the formations of the -u verbs in papyri

see 8o ff. The

similarities

with AI

regard

to the inflexion

of εἶναι,

δξ 30 - 34

NEW

διδόναι, τιθέναι, and ἀφιέναι parallel innovations.! 31.

There

TESTAMENT

AND

are continued

PAPYHI

and

increased

is, still, the use of tenses and moods.

The

by a number of

verb is found

to be

used by both sources in the same way, with reference to the verbal “aspect”. The optative is only vestigial in the N.T.; in the papyri it is confined for the most part to stereotyped expressions. The infinitive 1s in full use in both,

although the N.T. shows a greater preference for analytical constructions than

do

the papyri.

The

future indicative

is introduced

in both

the N.T.

and the papyrı in places where it would not be permissible in Classical Greek, i.e. after iva and final μή, and usually with the aorist subjunctive as a variant. The imperative appears in both the N.T. and the papyri to exercise a function which for the most part recalls the Classical usage. Its asynde-

tic construction, however, is confined to papyri exclusively. The participle is to be found in both categories of texts preserving its Classical use to a great extent. In both the N.T. and the papyri the future participle appears

less frequently than in earlier times, an idiomatic

use diverging

notably

while the genitive absolute exhibits

from

the

normal

Classical

usage.

As

such, it occurs frequently in the papyri and the N.T.

32. In considering the common

vocabulary of the papyri and N.T. we

find it so extensive that N.T. lexica have been of great use to papyrologists, and the Wörterbuch to N.T. scholars, contributing greatly to a more precise interpretation of N.T. Greek.* 33. In the case of the words found only in the N.T., or only in the papyri, it is obvious that these words were used for the particular needs of each idiom. 34.

It must

be noted,

however,

that the use of similar

vocabulary

in the

papyri and the N.T. is not in itself sufficient proof that the language is identical. In fact the N.T.,like the papyri, follows the general trends of the lan-

guage of the Hellenistic period. An exception must be noticed with reference to words

used by N.T.

1. See Blass-Debr.-Funk,

writers and

their followers

which

employ

a

$5 94-9.

2. See examples discussed by Turner in Greek Papyri, pp. 151-2, and W. Barclay in "The New

Testament

and

Perspective, Oxford

the

Papyrı”, an article in The

1965, pp. 75-81. "m

52

N. 7T. in. Historical and

Contemporary

NEW

TESTAMENT

AND

PAPYHI

88 34 - 35

different meaning from that found in Attic Greek. They are the words which were limited to the vocabulary of the new religion: ἄγγελος, ἅγιος, ἐκκληaia, etc.! In particular that which gives us the chance to draw certain conclusions is the relationship in structure between the Greek of the N.T. and that of the papyri. At this point the evidence confirms the fact that the language of the N.T. and the papyri is based on the same vernacular. 35. To conclude, we could say that both in normal features and in peculiarities N.T. Greek has its closest parallel in the language of the papyri. In so far as the papyri use the popular form of Greek, it is obvious that the N.T. on the other hand presents this form of the language too. It could not be otherwise; the Holy Ghost spoke the language of the people. However, it must not escape our attention that the writers of the papyri were ordinary people who often wrote carelessly,? while the writers of the N.T., realizing that they were writing not only for their contemporaries but for posterity as well, paid more attention to points of personal style.

1. See introduction of Bauer’s Lexicon

(English transl., pp. ix m.

2. On this point I am not referring to the official

after fixed patterns.

33

documents which were mostiy composed

ASPECT

AND

TIME

OF

THE

TENSES!

36. The language of the papyri has preserved all the tenses of the verb as found in the works of the Classical writers, but their use is considerably limited owing to the encroachment of the synthetic verbal forms, i.e. the infinitive and participle, upon the territory of the finite verb systern. Aspect depends not only on the use of the particular tense, but also on the meaning of the particular verb involved. Sometimes too, adverbial expressions in the sentence point to a differentiation of aspect, which the tense alone could not determine definitely. Other factors which can create a special situation in which “aspect” is differentiated are (a) the use of compound verbs, (5) the personal style of the writer, and (c) the kind of document. These observations arise from the consideration of verbal usage in papyri, and this usage presents some notable developments which are discussed in detail in the chapters dealing with each tense separately. 37.

The most prominent function of a tense in many languages is to indi-

cate the time of the action in relation to some other time (often the time of

speaking or writing); it expresses, in other words, relative time. In the language of the papyri in particular, this distinction of relative time is not always clearly expressed. The time is sometimes precisely determined, sometimes not, so we often see that in one passage the writer expresses the temporal antithesis between two tenses, only to abandon it in another. He does not always neglect the temporal distinction out of ignorance, however, but sometimes out of a desire to articulate some other more important point than the temporal one. For example, in the sentence yapriov καθαρὸν μὴ εὑρὼν! πρὸς τὴν wpav eis τοῦτο €ypaja P.Gen. 52 (verso), 3-5 (mid. iv/A.p.) the time is present:"I am now writing on this paper”, but in καὶ ἄλλοτε ἔγραψα P.Lond. 237, 3(c. A.D. 346) the time is past: "I wrote”. So also in διὰ mpoτέρας ἐπιστολῆς ἐδήλωσα σοι P.Oxy. 1668, 8-o (iii/A.D.) the tense refers to

the past: "I informed you”, but in οὐκέτι! ἐδήλωσάς μοι P.Flor. 338, 14-15 (i/A.D.) the aorist ἐδήλωσας is equivalent to the English present perfect. thus it refers to an action related to the present: "you have not informed me further". Similarly ots ἀπέστειλα "whom I sent" P.Ryl. 238, 3 (a.n. 262) refers to past time, though in many cases, especially in letters, ἀπέστειλα refers to present time (— Epistolary Aorist, see 345). Thus the same tense (even 38.

of the On

the

same

verb)

can

indicate

other

hand,

the

writer

1. See in general Schwyzer,

different can

express

temporal the

Gr. Gr., ii, pp. 256 ff. (with Jit.).

ΟἹ

same

situations. temporal

point

ASPECT

AND

TIME

OF THE

TENSES

$8 38 - 40

by using different tenses. E.g. καὶ νῦν yap arovlo “now I hear" P.Oxy. 1680, 12-15 (iii or iv/A.D.) (equal in sense to English present perfect) corresponds

to ἤκουσα yap ὅτι κῖται "I have heard" P.Lond. 413, 11 (c. A.D. 346). 39.

With

verbs

of "saying",

the temporal

distinction

between

the imper-

fect, aorist, and perfect has well-nigh disappeared. All these three tenses, including the present occasionally, can express similar (if not identical)

nuances of time. E.g. é£éraxa yap καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι δυνατόν ἐστιν... "they said” P.Lond. 404, 8(c. A.D. 346); viv δέ μοι &Aelyev ὅτι τὸ ἐφήμισυ €5e5|καμεν "he now said to me" P.Oxy: 1668, 9-11 (iii/A.p.), with εἶπεν ydp μοι ὅτι οὐδ᾽ οὕτως συνέθεντο "for he said to me" 14-15; εἴρηκά aov wre “δὸς ἐμοὶ «éplua" “I said to you" P.Oxy. 1683, 20-1 (late iv/A.p.). In a like manner one can hardly detect any difference of time between εἶπεν, εἴρηκεν, ἔλεγεν in P. Ross.-Georg. iti 4, 15; 17; 22 (iii/A.D.).! The change from one tense to another

involves

questions

of style, which

tend

to invalidate

the effort of

some grammarians to find a sharp distinction between ἔλεγεν and εἶπεν. 40.

To

cite another

comma is mine) yet the second that the tenses conclusion that

example:

τραχώματα

ἔσχον,

καὶ δεινὰ ] πέπονθα (the

P.S./. 299, 6-7 (end of iti/a.p.) the time of both verbs is past, verb is morphologically perfect. One could easily decide here are identical in function, and proceed further to the the tenses (i.e. aorist and perfect) had become equivalent

by that time. The point, however,

is that the writer wants to separate the

two actions, and stress the importance and the consequential nature of the latter.* Such an explanation

cannot

be given, however,

for all cases where

1. The text runs as follows: συνέβαλα yap ᾿Αφροδισίῳ | rw δόντι τὴν ἐπιθήκην '"ImSai καὶ efn(ev) | ὅτε “εἴ τι ἐὰν χρίαν ἔχῃ, δώσω αὐτῷ ^, καὶ 'Iat|8wpos ὁ rot Harταπέ μοι εἴρηκεν ὅτι | “γέγονας μὲν πρὸς Σύρον στρ(ατηγὸν) καὶ ἐτάξατο αὐτῷ | δοῦναι... |... love εὐδόνηκα (= εὐτύνηκα) δὲ δῶναι αὐτῷ ro κιθώνιν | καὶ τὰ ἄλλα, μήπως ἀνῆλθας- ἔλεγεν yap | 6 Πετασὸνς ὅτι 4 u'Bévi μετὰ Kompidans | εἷς τὸ πλ[οῖ)ον (14-24).

2. See Blass-Debr.-Funk, § 101, under λέγειν where it is stated that a certain distinction between λέγειν and εἰπεῖν was still felt, as, for example, that which emerges from the com-

bination εἶπαν a genuine

λέγοντες; cf. Luke

element

12:16; 20:2, Such a combination is not, however,

of the language of the papyri.

3. Such views have been expressedby some grammartans; the whole question of the relationship between aorist and perfect is discussed under the appropriate chapters: see

324-7; 418. 4. Cf.

Hom.

πολέμῳ.

Od.

Similarly

xvii

284-5:

Soph.

Ph.

τολμήεις

μοι θυμός, ἐπεὶ κακὰ πολλὰ

928-9:

οἷα

μ᾽

32

εἰργάσω

πέπονθα

| oU ἡπάτηκας.

| κύμασι

καὶ

88 40 - 43

ASPECT AND TIME OF THE TENSES

aorist and perfect run parallel. In the passage, for example, γεινώσκιν ce θέλω ὅτι Tas ἐπιστολάς, as ἐδήϊλωσας διὰ τῆς ἐπιστολῆς, καὶ τὸ βιβλίον, ὃ δέδωκατίἠ, τῷ )roó! Πατταπέ, πάντα ἐκομιϊσάμην P. Ross.-Georg.iii 4, 6-9 (iii/A.D.)

there is ἃ noticeable inconsistency with reference

to the use of tenses: δέ-

Swxas is historic (= past) as is ἐδήλωσας, while

ἐκομισάμην is resultative

(= present)? 41.

From the above instances, it becomes obvious that (a) the tense varia-

tion with regard to time is widespread, and (5) in the tense-usage

writers, aspect was their primary tion of time

was

frequently

consideration,

to which

of these

precise indica-

subordinated.

42. There are many examples in the language of papyri which show that the aspect of the verb was denoted not only by different verbal formations, as for example by compound verbs indicating perfectiveness,? but also by certain verb/adverb combinations. 43. A glance at the standard Grammars of Attic and N.T. Greek will provide superficial evidence for the fact that Hellenistic writings and the Attic norm diverge with regard to tense and aspect. For example, Goodwin (M.T.,

pp. 16-18) lists g uses of the aorist tense in Attic, Smyth (Gr.Gr., pp. 429-34) exemplifies the tense further under 14 uses, while Schwyzer (Gr.Gr., 1i, pp. 280-6) has included all the divisions of the aorist under 10 sections. On the other hand, Robertson (Grammar of the Greek N.T., pp. 835-42) lists 11 uses of the aorist in N.T. Greek; Blass-Debr.-Funk (§§ 331-4) 6; similarly Moulton-Turner (pp. 71-4) 6; Moulton in his Prof. (pp. 129-40) mentions 5 uses of the aorist; Burton (M.T., §§ 35-57) enumerates 8 with some subdivisions, and Mayser (ii*, pp. 139-45) refers to 4 uses of the aorist in the Ptolemaic papyri. In examining the uses of the aorist in Classical and Hellen-

istic Greek we see that the latter (more than Classical Greek) enhances aspect at the expense of time. This is due to the development of the aorist towards an aspectual tense. 1. rw rov: so in the ed. pr. without explanation. There is apparently some confusion between dative and genitive as the complement of δίδωμι. Notice that by that time δέδωμι was constructed with the genitive (likewise in Modern Greek). 2. For further discussion

see 335 ff.

3. We are using the term “perfective” (and perfectiveness) here to denote the aspect nor: mally expressed by the Greek perfect, i.e. state or result ensuing from the action, as opposed to the aorist aspect of performance or completion of the action.

56

CONFUSION

OF

TENSES

§ 44

44. Confusion of tenses.’ Confusion of the tenses was, in fact,

a phenomenon

related to the development of certain tenses (in particular the aorist and the perfect). We must bear in mind, when dealing with confusion of tenses, that most language systems admit variant possibilities, so if one distinction (say of time) is suppressed tn a particular context in order to permit the expression of another distinction (say aspect) which is more important in that context, there is no confusion. True confusion — in the sense of an indiscriminate use of alternative forms — arises in particular circumstances,

especially, for example, in written languages which differ from the spoken language. And this is the case of the language of papyri, which represents, more

or less faithfully, the spoken

language.

For instance, a certain

writer confuses aorist and perfect, thus producing a hybrid form, because the perfect was not part of the system of his spoken language (or, if he was not a Greek,

because

his knowledge

of Greek,

in general,

was

imperfect).

In a papyrus of A.D. 381 (= P.Gen. 70, 18-19) we find the form ἐμισθώκαμεν, which is obviously a hybrid form resulting from a combination of the aorist ἐμισθώσαμεν and the perfect μεμισθώκαμεν. So also ἐϊπλήρωκα found in P.Oxy. 2729, 21-2 (iv/A.D.). Similar is the case in SB 5216, 10(i/a.p.): here the form is [y ἔγραψαν and the error corrected by the writer himself betrays a confusion between perfect and aorist.* But corrections of this type (syntactical) are not common in the papyri; most corrections are merely orthographic. The extreme paucity of syntactical and morphological corrections as opposed to the frequency of orthographic corrections would seem to indicate that the numerous uncorrected "errors" in the use of tenses are not due to carelessness on the part of the writer,.but rather to the fact that a certain development of the tense in use is involved, and such a use of the tense has sometimes been considered faulty because it is erroneously compared to the Classical norm, or to English. From the point of view of the Greek, the writer has not substituted one tense for another by mistake,

for each tense is normal and “has its specific idea". * One can talk of con-

I. This chapter has been included in my Studies in the Greek 2.

[ γ] ἔγραψαν ed.pr.

(=B.S.A.A.

xiv. p. 194), also SB

Language. pp. 11 ff.

5216; P.Primer65, but yéypaóav

(noted as revised reading) P.Sef. 104. Similarly [ δ ἔδωκεν P.Oxy. 2768, 11 (late tii/A.D.). 3. Some sporadic instances of this kind reflecting the relationship between aorist and perfect are quoted in 418. 4. See Robertson,

p. 830.

27

£8 44. 48

CONFUSION

OF

TENSES

fusion (or substitution) of tenses only where a particular instance contravenes the regular usage of the period in which it occurs as established by

a sufficient number of examples, as in γέγραφα used in the stereotyped expression γέγραφα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ διὰ TO μὴ εἰδέναι αὐτὸν γράμματα in papyri of i and ii/A.D., while ἔγραψα becomes the regular form in this case after i/B.c. 45. Nevertheless, we occasionally find an inconsistency with reference to the use of the tenses. In the following passage, for example, the doubts of the writer in his effort to use the right tense are marked by crossing out one tense (i.e. the aorist) and using another (i.e. the present): καὶ αὐτὸς οὖν καθ᾽ ἡμέρα (ἡμέρας«ν» ed.)|axedod τι mvvÜdvere(— -ται) περὶ σοῦ | ἑτοίμως]| ὅτι “οὕπω [ἦλθεν ἔρχετε (= -Taı)” P.Jews 1575, 11-13 (early iii/a.n.). Neither ἦλθεν nor ἔρχεται is correct according to the intended meaning, which seems to require the perfect. The intention of the writer to denote the correct aspect of the verb (i.e. completion) has led him to use verbal forms purely as indications of “time” (i.e. past/present). His attempt, however remarkable it may

be, is unsuccessful

(he is a schoolboy after all).

46. In conclusion we can say that, although there are some sporadic abnormalities in tense usage in the papyri, there is not, on the whole, any true confusion.

It follows

that the tense

usage

of the language

of the papyri,

even when it differs from that of Attic, is no less rigorous. In a leiter of the ii/a.p. (= P.Oxy. 1482, 3-13) we can see the function of the tenses illustrated perfectly : γράφω σοι iv" ἰδῇς ὅτι λελικμήκαμεν | τὴν κριθὴν...1...]... ὁ Ζεὺς γὰρ ἔβρεχε καὶ ἀμάχητος | ἦν 0 ἄνεμος, καὶ [Japes οἷδε ὅσα πεποςήγκαϊμεν ἵνα εἰσχύσωμεν ὅλως μετενέγκαι τὰ dÀÀa | σὺν θεοῖς. ' E£cβησαν δὲ τοῦ ὅλον ἀρτάβαι An... | τεορύτων κατέφθακα ἀρτάβας B/... | ᾿Εξήτασα δὲ περὶ τῆς θειμῆς τοῦ xoprov | τοῦ ἐφετινοῦ, ἐπράθη δὲ ἐν τῇ κώμῃ €€ | ἑπτὰ δραχμῶν τὸ ἐγώγιν. 47.

Here the writer wants to say that he writes this letter to inform his master that

they have winnowed the barley, and that it was raining at the time of the work and that

Panares knows what they have done, and that the whole yield was 38 artabae. of which he has reserved 12 1%, and that he inquired about

the price, and

that

the load was

sold in the village at 7 drachmae. 48, The tenses here precisely express the writer's intentions. One can find in the papyrus documents numerous passages exhibiting the same precision as that of the above text.1

1. See also P.Giss, 20

(beg. of ii /a.D.)

: Private letter.

58

CONFUSION

OF TENSES

65 49. 50 (2)

49. The frequency of the occurrence of various tenses is determined not only by the structure and usage of the language, both of which vary from period to period, but also by other factors, such as genre and style and the ability and mental attitude of the individual author. The occurrences of the tenses are illustrated in numbers in the following diagram containing the tenses of 434 examined texts from W. and M.Chrest. It is worth noticing that from all these texts only one contains all the seven tenses of the indica-

tive, i.e. P.Tor. 1 (= M.Chrest. 31), a petition

of 116

B.c., consisting of x

cols. = 310 lines in all.

Century | Texts | Present

| Imperfect} Aorist

Perfect}

Future

Pluperfecd F.Perfect

li/B.c.

| 43

66

20

66]

45

17

6

I

lü/B.c.

| 46

95

28

92]

55

34

21

5

i/B.c. | 20

36

2

i6 | 27

6

1

I

58

144

27

90

53

I

0

li/4.D. | 133

378

45

| 390 | 130

114

11

0

li/A.D.

| 70

210

Ig

| 222 |

99

74

3

O

iv/A.D.

| 54

167

16

| 209 |

65

64

2

o

V/A.D.

8

19

O

27

9

5

Oo

O

15

50

Oo

50]

25

13

0

O

9

32

4

20

6

4

O

2

1197

161

[1186 | 543

384

45

9

i/A.D.

Vi/a.D.

vilviii A.D.

|

TOTAL | 456 | 50.

Notes on the table: The

03

table is a tabulation of the number

of occurrences

of

the tenses arranged by century. The number of the texts makes it possible to obtain the frequencies. However, such a process would not be, strictly speaking, accurate because the texts differ in their total length. On the basis of the figures, as given

above, we observe

some

interesting cases:

(I) The infrequency of the aorist in i/B.c., compared with the frequency of the perfect of the same period ; this is the only instance of the supremacy of the perfect. Inevitably, this exerted a counter-influence on the invading aorist. From this point on, the perfect ending -aex was applied to aorist forms (see 322).

(2)

It appears that the perfect holds its frequency quite well throughout the period,

39

§ 50 (2) - $0 (4)

CONFUSION

GF TENSES

although it never (except in the i/B.c.) surpasses the aorist. The continuance of the use of the perfect in the papyri is due to its "aoristic" sense (see 470 - 4). In particular we observe that in the vi/A.p. the perfect had been used more frequently than the aortst, since ii/A.D.. This ts due to certain. repetitive uses of the tense, not all of wh:ch can be attributed to Atticistic influence. (3) [tis worth noticing the numerical equality of the occurrence of present and aorist. These two tenses occur more frequently than any other tense throughout the period. (4) Notice, finally, the infrequency of the imperfect (especially in i/B.c.), and the obsolescence of the future perfect in post-Ptolemaic times, its place having been assumed by such substitutes as the simple future or periphrastic expressions.

60

PRESENT! Blass-Debr.-Funk, $8 73-100; 319-30; Chantraine, Morph.*, $$ 234-43; Grönert, Mem. Gr.Hercul., pp. 202 ff.; Jannaris, Hist.Gr., 8$ 849 fT.: 1831-50; Meillet-Vendryes, Gr.Comp., pp. 231-45; Meisterhans,

Art. inschr., pp.

134-9 ; Mayser,

i?, pp. 113-27 ; i*, pp. 126-53 ;

Moulton, Prol, pp. 119 ff.; Moulton-Turner, pp. 59-68 ; Nachmanson, Magn. Inschr., pp. 153-8; Palmer, A Gr. of the post-Ptol. Pap., pp. 122-49; Psaltes, pp. 233 ff.; Robertson, pp. 964-70; 879-83; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., pp. 174-8; Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, pp. 672-737 (lit. Ibid., pp. 415-6) ; ii, pp. 270-80.

I. FORMATION

OF

Thematie

THE

STEM?

Verbs

Contracted

Verbs

51. Verbs in -Gm and -ıao. Verbs ending in -aw are for the most part -yo derivatives of a-stems together with a number of root-stems which did not contain the suffix -re/yo. Papyri continued to use -dw verbs already established in Attic;? further,

a-stem nouns.

few verbs of that

category

E.g. μαζάω « pata: μαζῶν B.G.U.

were

produced

from

1026 (xxii), 20 (iv/A.D.);

τιλάω « rida: τιλήτωι, P.Fay. 131, 18 (li or early iv/A.D.). Two parasyntheta are found in -aw, thus ξυλαμάω « ξυλαμή usually in the aorist infinitive ξυλαμῆσαι (see WB s.v.) and paxpoynpdux paxpoynpws : μακρωγη-

pain (for μακρογηρῴη) P.Cairo Masp. 657089 (verso), το (Byz.).* 52. In papyri the -aw group (along with the -ow) proved itself unproducI. The

selected

bibliography

refers

to both

morphology

and

syntax.

For

full titles

see

Pp. 35 ff. 2. Although tense-formation and inflexion are theoretically distinct subjects, and are in the main treated separately in the present work,

in the development

affect one another at a number of points, e.g. in the transference matic

inflexion, For

this

reason

questions

matter of practical convenience, wherever discussion of stem-formation. 3. See list of the -dw verbs

in Palmer,

of

of the language they

from

inflexion are included

thematic

to athe-

in this chapter as a

they are relevant to or arise naturally from the

A Gr. of the post-Ptol. Pap.. pp.

(22 f,, and consult

WB for references. 4. Cf. μακροβολέω, μακροθυμέω common in O.T. and N.T.. μακροκαταληκτέω, paxpoκομέω, μακρολογέω known to Attic, paxporoudw, μακροφυέω, μακροφωνέῳω, paxpoxpovew

but

«pov[v]x(«]

paxpoypovilw:

P.S.f/. 299. 1t

μακροχρονιεῖν

(end

P,Flor.

206,

10 (vi /A.D.),

of tii/a.o.}. See these words

61

μακροψυχέω:

in LSJ for references.

μα-

88 52 - 54

PRESENT — CONTRACTED

tive compared (1)

with the type in -éw.! This is reflected :

in by-forms

of -aw verbs in -io, e.g.

λικμάω: ἐλίκμα, (see LSJ s.v.;

φισάν[ των P.Lond.

(2)

VERBS

ἐλικμῶμεν ψηλαφάω:

B.G.U. 698, 15; common in O.T.

18; 19 {ii/a.D.), but Accpitw? and N.T., but ψηλαφίζω : ψηλα-

1396. 4 (A.D. 709-714); cf. Anaxil.

44. and

in the transition of -d« verbs into the -éw category, e.g. as

ἀπαντούντων

P.Gen.

55,

9 (mid.

iv/A.D.);

ἀπαντοῦντι

P.Lond.

mt

233, 6 (A.D.

345); διαιτ[ο]Ἱυμένων P.Oxy. 496, 12 (A.D. 127); ἐν] γυοῦμε P.Lond. 246, 5-6; 15-16 (A.D. 346); ἐγγνούμεθα SB 4658, 10 (Byz.); ἐγγυῆσθϑαι (= -εἴσϑαι) P. Flor. 34. 9; 16 (A.D. 342); ἐρωτουμένης P.Cairo Masp. 67089 (verso), 29 (Byz.); μελετουμένην P.Cairo Masp. 67097 (D), 83 (vi/A.D.); προσδοκοῦμεν P.Oxy. 1299, 7 liv/A.D.); προσδοκοῦσιν P.Oxy. 1855, 16 (vi or vii/A.D.); προσδοκεῖν P.Cairo Masp. 67324, B (Byz.); τοὺς τολμοῦντες P.Lond, 245,19 (A.D. 343); and elsewhere in the petitions of P,Abinn.®

53. Conversely we find an intrusion regularly in -éw, e.g.

of the

-aw

suffix into verbs ending

εὐχαρια | rc[u)«v (i.e. εὐχαριστάω) P.Oxy. 1299, 5-6 (iv/A.D.); similarly ποιωμένη (though doubtful) P.Oxy. 1473, 24 (A.D. 201); εὐθυμῶντος (i.e. εὐθυμάω) P.Ross.-Georg. iii 10, 5 (iv-v/A.D.) the usual form of the verb being εὐθυμέω

(sce

WB s.v.).

54. Notice further that some verbs in -ow appear with forms which suggest a present tense ending in -dw, ¢.g. | (n [μιᾶσθαι

248,

B.G.U.

13 (A.D.

1044,

13-14 (iv /A.D.); κοινῆσε [= κοινῆσαι for κοινῶσαι) B.G.U.

70-80).

These examples* point to the beginning of a tendency, which flourished later, especially in Modern Greek, to recharacterize the -€w verbs by using the -dw suffix.® 1. Palmer -éo

2.

759,

Cf.

(op. cit. pp. -óu

124, 131, 134)

gives the following figures

(in total):

-dw 182,

172.

λικνίξω:

λικνιζουσῶν

P,Fay.

102, 30 (ii /A.D.).

3. See also examples quoted by Crönert,

Mem.

Gr. Hercul., pp. 20 f.

4. Add also Rom. 9:16 ἐλεῶντος : ἐλεοῦντος ΒΩ and 18 23 ἐλεᾶτε for ἐλεεῖτε. Also Crönert, op.cit., p. 222 (4). must

have

been

developed

ἐλεεῖ NABN

5. This

tendency

(p. 312)

that there are no examples of -aw verbs in the Byzantine chroniclers.

62

later than

ἐλεᾷ:

the vi/A.p.

as

Psaltes

and Jude notices

PRESENT — CONTRACTED

VERBS

§§ 55. 57

55. -ιάω: Verbs ending in -ιἰάω were primarily produced from -ἰα nouns by addition of the suffix -yd Subsequently, by abstraction of the morpheme -a and its extension to other noun-stems a new derivative type ending in

~aw was created. Papyri have retained the verbs of this category, as they are found in Attic, and in Hellenistic writers. 56. Verbs in -£o. This type of verb originally comprised denominatives in -eyo from o or -e/os stems, and derivatives in -eyo with iterative-causative meaning. The -é« suffix further proved itself quite productive, so it could be added to any noun-stem. At the same time, it was almost exclusively used to form the so-called parasyntheta. The -éw verbs were extremely common in Classical Greek, and in papyri they present a noticeable development. In the Ptolemaic papyri,there are 385 -éw verbs also appearing in Attic, and 221 new formations (107 denominatives and 114 parasyntheta).! In Roman and Byzantine papyri we find 759 -éw verbs of which there are 3 new from simplicia, 76 new parasyntheta, and 51 new verbal compounds.? 57.

Some points of special interest arise with reference to the -éw verbs.

Compounds with moww, of which the first part is not a preposition, were rare in Attic.? These are in some cases derived from, and in others based on, noun-compounds ending in -ποιός. Papyri formation thus producing the following:

made

use

of this

kind of

ἀλευροποιήσομεν P.Oxy. 1454. 9 (A.D. 116); ἀρτοποιήσομεν P.Oxy. 1454, 9 [A.D. 116); see also LSJ s.v.; reÜnxomowuévo(v) P.Ryl. 142, 16 (A.D. 37): τεθηκοποημένων B.G.U. 757, 15 (A.D. 12); καθαροποιήσασθαι P.Cairo Masp. 67097, 32 (vi/A.D.); the active form in Gal. 11, 683; καινοποιούμενα P.Oxy. 237 (viii), 42 (A.D. 89); common in Polyb.; cf. Jbid., iv 2, 4 xexawonoinka: κοιλοποιούμενοι B.G.U. 1134, 13 [10 B.C.); κοπροποιέω O.Strassb, 748, 6 (ii/ A.D.); €uaprupoenoinca P.Lips. 40 (iii), 14 (end of iv-beg. of v/A.D.) with both internal and external augment, but ἐμαρτυρ[ο] ποιεῖτο B.G.U. 1032, 9 (A.D. 173); ἐμαρτυροποιήσατο B.G.U. 970, 3 (A.D. 177); οἰναποιεῖν P.Rev, 25, 4; etc.

1. See Mayser,

17, p. 151.

2. The figures are taken from

3. Cf.

κακοποιέω

λογοποιέω

in

common

Palmer. op. cir., p. 131.

Ar., Xen., and in Altic;

Polyb.;

λογοποιονμένον

B.G.U. 4^ Ii (ii-Hi /A. D.); ὁδοποιέω common δοποιέω

Attic;

P.Tebt. 334, 8-9

πεπαιδοποιῆσθαι

(A.D.

M.Chrest.

200-201).

63

x[a)xomodcv P.Hib. 59, 10 (c. 245 B.C.); P. Ryl.

136,

4 ( A.D.

in Attic; also 372

O.G.7.

(iii), 15 (ii/a.D.)

34);

ἐλογοποιούμην

175 (ii/B.C.); wacdo

παι-

[mocmaaune]

§§ 87. 59

PRESENT — CONTRACTED

(259-258

B.C.):

συμφεροποιησαμένου

1, 27 (A.D. 574);

P.Tebt.

104,

τετεκνωμένης

τεκνοποιεῖσθαι

(not

P.Eleph.

VERBS

included

1,9 (311

in

LSJ-Suppl.)

P.Monac.

B.C.); etc.; [rexvo] ποιεῖσθαι

20 [92 B.c.), the active form in Xen. (See LSJ s.v.): cf. rexvdopac: B.G.U.

v,

50

(ii /A.D.);

νίαποιήσηται

B.G.U.

v,

41

(ii/a.D.):

also

Hellenistic (see LSJ s.v. ); $avepomovεἴ΄ P.Lond. 1708, 70 (A.D. 567?); $aveροποιήσω P.Lond. 1729, 40 (A.D. 584); φανεροποιῶν P.Lond. 1339, 10 (A.D. 710); etc., also Heph. Astr. 3, 37, and Sch. Aristoph. Eg. 1253: χρεοποιούμε[ θα]: xpeοποιουμεῖν Ed. P.Lond. 1391, 3 (A.D. 709-714) (not included in LSJ-Suppl.).

58. By-forms of -éc verbs: The meaning of the -éw suffix is similar (sometimes identical) to that of -edw, so we find certain derivatives having either suffix, e.g. ἀπιστέω is the usual form, as in Attic, but amorevw: amores P.Cairo Zen. 59639, 9 (iii /B.C.); damıorevoas P.Oxy. 237 (v), 5 (A.D. 186); after analogy with

πιστεύω;

ἱκετέω P.Mich.

Zen.

87, 5 (iii/B.C.),

but

ἱκετεύω:

ixer(«]vovoa

SB

5103, 9 (iii B.C.); ixerevovra SB 5357, 8 (v/A.D.); λαοτομέω, (for Aar-): Aaoróμουν SB 4279, 4 (c. A.D. GO); λελατόμητ[α]ι P.Petrie ii 4 (9), 3 (255-254 B.C.); P.Cairo Zen. 59296, 34 {iii /8.C.); etc., but λατομεύω; λελατομεύϊκαμεν Ρ 5.1. 423. 27-8

(iii /B.C.);

mpoorarew:

mpoorarei

P.Lips,

104, 22 (96-95 B.c.): cf. προσ-

rarnoleıw) P.Oxy. 1453, 142. (30-29 B.C.); προστατῆσαι P.Petrie ii 13 [10}, 4; 7 (c. 255 B.C.}; προστατῶν P.Tebt. 20, 5-6 (113 B.C.), but προστατεύω: προστατεῦσαι

[Or προστατεύειν:

are attested

2-3 (A.D. bart)

in Attic;

3B); etc.

P.Gradenwitz

mpoor..ev..

acréw:

(see BW 2,

Ed.)

σειτουμένων

s.v.), but

9-10

(255-224

P.Lond.

B.G.U.

1674,

8 (A.D.

570);

both

73,

4 (A.D.

135);

P. Ryl.

ewvrevo cf. ovrev |. ]s 8.C.]!,

rpoóéw:

[σιτευ!

τάἸς

rerpodnuevov B.G.U,

forms

143.

Schu1111,

l0 (15B.C.; [{ἐϊτρόφησεν B.G.U. 859, 4 (ii/A.D.), but rpodevo : τετρόφευκεν B.G.U. 297, τὸ (a.p. 50); P.S.7. 203, 9; τὸ ( A.D. 87); rerpo φευκέν[ax] P.Grenf. ii 75, 3-4 (A.D. 308); etc.

59. The function of the -éw verbs expresses something connected with the basic noun. Such a meaning can be also expressed by -ἰζω verbs. Moreover, the phonetic identity of the aorists in -nca and -'«ca and the old differentiation of transitive (-‘{w) - intransitive (-€w) verbs from the same stem brought about confusion which led to the interchange of -é€w and-ilw verbs.? Thus: καινέω: καινήσασα P.Thead. 19, 11 (iv/A.D.),if not a misspelled form of καινίcaca, but καινίζειν P.Tor. 6, 32(110 B.C.]; και[νέ] σαντος P.Cairo Masp. 67096, 6 ( A.D. 573-5741. The -ἰζὼ form is also attested in Attic and inscriptions

l. For

references

2. See also Palmer,

from

other

op. cit., pp.

sources

see

142-3.

64

LSJ

s.v.

PRESENT — CONTRACTED (see LSJ s.v.), κερματέω

(so in WB);

but

v,

κερματίζω

B.G.U.

106

in Prm. p. 973 S. Accordingly, μαι;

μακροχρονίζω:

17:20;

32:27,

olixifovras

298); 938, P.S.J.

310);

so

also

τόπο[ ιΪς ( — τοὺς

Hdt. and

B8 (iv/A.D.); 188,

cf.

(iif/a.p.). LSJ

the item in

μακροχρονιεῖν

Hsch.

P.Flor.

g (A.D.

540);

but

WB 296,

οἰκοῦντας

SB

notice

P.Flor.

συμβροχίζω:

700,

4

4490,

21 (vii/a.D.);

κερματόομαι

from

Procl.

must be corrected to xepuarooτὸ (vi/A.D.);

cf.

O.T,

Deut.

i2, 12; οἰκίζω for οἰκέω: ἡμᾶς roU[s τοὺς τὐπουςὶ

P.Oxy.

(see LSJ s.v.)\: συμβροχέω:

συμβροχει[ ϑεῖσαν)]

συμβροχι. wl... B.G.U.

§§ 59 - 61

exepuarouuler)a

but μακροχρονέω in Sm. Job

rois

VERBS

383,

BB (A.D.

owveßpoxiodn

1469,

7-8, (A.D.

σνμβροχηθείσας B.G.U. 232)

from

P.Lond.

σύμβροχος

1367,

2 (A.D.

(Byz.).

60. Verbs in -ó«. These verbs were originally -yo derivatives from o-stems: the -ow suffix was extended also to other stems already in Attic. Papyri in addition to the old forms produced a noticeable number of new -ow verbs on the basis of the general principle of their formation, i.e. from o-stem nouns. We find 94 -dw verbs in Ptolemaic papyri.! of which 36 are new, and 172 in post-Ptolemaic papyri, of which 25 are new. From these figures it becomes clear that the suffix remained productive in papyri, and it continued in use during the Byzantipe period, particularly in the formation of verbs from Latin words.? An example from a papyrus of vii/A.D. points to the beginning of the transformation of -ow verbs to Modern Greek -wvw:

ἐγὼ yàp πληρώννω

cÀovs | τοὺς ἱπποκόμους P.Oxy.

1863,

19-20 (vii/A.p.).'

61. By-forms of the -ow verbs.: As the result of semantic and functional similarities, the -όω verbs came into conflict with the suffixes -({w(partly -a£o), and -aivw which they resemble in function. The result of this functional

1. See Mayser, 2. See

Palmer,

ı?, p.

151.

op. cit., p. 134.

3. See Psaltes. op. cif., p. 325. 4.

The

transition

in verbs from

-ow

to -wrew

has its roots

. -wvpa. verbs. The latter produced a new present ending Roman times, in the following way: The -ov-vvp: verbs

as their aorist resembled

in the development

of the

in -ὥνω already in Graecobecame thematic, i.e. -wr-w

the aorist of the thematic verbs. Also following the pattern

ἔλυσα-λύω are found ἔξω-σα (£orpw-oa, ἔρρω-σα etc.) ζών- [στρών-ω, pwr-w etc.), the present retaining the -»- of theold stem. In the sequel, the pattern ἔστρωσαστρώνω conditioned the development ἠλευθέρωσα-ἐλευθερώνω etc. A similar theory

on this subject has i, pp. 288 f.) but he forms; this obliged Schwyzer, Gr, Gr.,

been expressed by Hatzidakis in Einl., pp. 394, 408 (= M.N.E., has omitted any explanation of the presence of -v- in the -wrw Jannaris, Hist. Gr., ἢ 853 (b}, to dispute the process, See also 1, p. 697.

65 B.

ὦ.

Mandilaras.

The

Verb

in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

27

δὴ 61-61 (11)

PRESENT -- CONTRAUCTEDD

VERHS

relationship was the production of by-forms, some of which retain a difference between transitive and intransitive meaning. E.g. (1) arsepow ( passive) ἀνιερωμένης P.Tebt.60, 10 (118 p.c. |; arıepwaleras) B.G.U. 1202, 5 (19-18 B.c.); etc. factive) Arist. Qec. 1345b, 5 from which πνιέρωσις but

ἀνιερεύω

Men.

(2)

ἀνηλόω:

ἀνηλοῦντι

λίσκω:

Eph.

ἀνηλίσκωμεν

(257-256

1.

P,Oxr.

1143, 6 (c. A.D.

P.S. T. 439,

1}; elsewhere

21 (244-243

ἀναλίσκω

B.C.1; ἀνηλίσκεται

or avg-

ἢ' 5.1.

500,

5

2.C.).

(3 yepow P.Rein. 33, 4 liii/a.D.); and yéuw Herm, 119 (3 iv), 7 (iii /A.D.); νέμον P.Cairo

Hdt,, Xen. etc. (ἐδ, C.P. Masp. 670 97 (D), 42 ( vi /A.D.):

Or youów : γόμωσον P. Flor. 167 (i). 6 {mid iii /A.D.}; 145. 5 (A.D. 254); youapera P.Giss. 54, it (iv-v/A.D.); but yegitw (Attic): yenit P.Fay. 117, 14 | A.D. 1081; γέμεισον P.Tebt, 419, 17 (iii /A.D.); yeu! (ons P.Flor. 195, 4-5 (iii /A.D.). (4) ἐλαφρόω P.Lond. 1345,

(cf. 19:

Hsch. s.v. ἀλεγύνεται): ἐλαφρῴσί α] ν[ τῇ (sic), "4 (a.D. 710); but ἐλαφρύνω in Hellenistic

LSJ s.v.}; ἐλαφρυνθῆναι P.Gen.

14, 22 (Byz.}: cf. Modern Greek

ἐλαφρώσαν᾽ res writers (see

ἐλαφρώνω

and

ἐλαφρύνω.

(5)

ἐλευθεριάζω

Bemaide...

(Attic,

P,Flor.

Hellenistic) in the sense "act like a freeman”: ἐλ[ εὐ) -

382,°7-8

(A.D. 222-223) in the sense “be free", so serving to ἐλευβερόω "set free", Modern Greek cAcvée|

counterpart

as an intransitive ρώνω.

137}, but ἐνεἐν] εχυρούμ[εἶνα P.Oxy. 729, 44 (A.D. “pledge”: (6) ἐνεχυρόω ee χύρασεν P, Petrie iil ab, 10; χυράζω “take a pledge from": ἐνεχυραζέτω, [2-1% (iii/B.C.); see P.Lips. 120, t2 (c. A.D. 89); also ἐνεχυρῶ (future) OT.

Deut, 24:17

(further references

"get fruit

καρπόομαι

(7)

for

in LSJ s.v.).

oneself”

joy the fruits" P.Frankf. 7 (verso), 4 (c. 218-217 B.C.); 1571, 22 (i/B.c.]; Inscriptions and O.T. (see LSJ s.v.). (8) Jash.

340,

καρπιζομένου

B.G.U.

oxevoi (Sic) P.Cairo Zen. 39499, 84 (iii ;B.c.); cf. O.T. Jude. 5: 17: 1: t4; etc, Also σκηνέω (cf. -dw νι], in Xen. An. vii 4, 12); σκηνοῦντι PSL.

oxnvow:

13 (257-256

2.c.).

SB “make a friend”: φιλιοθῆναι (9) φιλιύδω (A.D. 27 1079, B.G.U. φιλιάσαι "be a friend”:

(10) doprow

"load"

τομένα P.Amh.

(passive)

150, 21;

φορτώνω Modern Greek but different function. (11)

"en-

καρπίζω

but

(Attic, Hellenistic),

χερσύω:

! φορτίζω

χερσώσαντες

P.Tebt, 5, 9043( 118 p.c.), also

B.G.U.

195,

φορτίζω

Also

both

having

21-2

Plut.,O.T., and

66

293,

P,Flor.

πεφορτωμένων

39 (A.D. 592].

but φιλιάξω 4658, 1r( Byz), 41); cf. O.T. 2 Chr, 20:37.

(A.D.

and

the

ı61);

15 | vi /A.D.);

"load"

Luke

same

sense

| passive)

inscriptions

πεφορ-

11:45; “to

cf.

load”,

Keyepowpery

(L541;

χερσεύω

PRESENT — VERBS (intransitive

93

62.

in

Soph., Eur.,

xepoevpvow

(118 g.c.];

Verbs in -cibw. The

nouns,

€.g.

63.

68,

-evw verbs

ἁλιεὺς > ἁλιεύω,

duced, -evw, could πιστεεύω etc.!

Plut., etc.:

P.Amh.

IN -edw

δὲ 61 (11) - 64

see LSJ s.v.); κεχερσευμένης P.Tebt.

60,

7 (A.D. 81-96).

were

originally

βασιλεὺς > βασιλεύω,

etc.

be added, further, to - other

derivatives The

suffix

stems,

e.g.

of

-evs

thus

pro-

ἡγεμον-εύω,

In papyri the -evw verbs are found in great number. Mayser enumerates

147, of which 61 are new formations,? while in post-Ptolemaic papyri we find 201 -evw verbs, of which 48 are new.? The -evw suffix (besides the common -éw) could produce derivatives of compound nouns, i.e. parasyntheta. Palmer counts 27 such parasyntheta compared with 107 -edw verbs derived from simple nouns.‘ 64. The -evw ending was considered suitable for adapting Latin loan-words to the Greek language. Thus we have: dypapevw < agraria: ἀμβιτεύω

ἀγραρευόντων

< ambitus:

ἀμβιτεύειν

P.Grenf.

P.Oxy.

ii 95, 2 (vi/a.D.).

2110,

15 (A.D.

370).

ἀννωνεύω € annona (passive! : ἀννωνευύ μενον P.Form. O0.G.]. 200, 20, δεληγατεύω < delegatio: P.Lips. 64, 3; τὸ (c. A.D. 368}. κομφιρματεύω

. Cf.

is

and

Greek

181

(cj.

ed.,

Salonica

dialects

M.N.E., i, pp. 564-8, The by many

ἀρχαίοις

(Crete,

form

scholars. For references οὐκ

ἐρεῖς,

ἀλλ᾽ ἦν ἐγώ.

δὲ 109-114

PRESENT--VEIRCHS

IN gu

is also found in codices of Attic orators (see LSJ s.v.), and post-Ptolemaic papyri: P.Oxy.

285,

tole.

A.D. 50); 526,

3;

1582,

5(ii/A.D.);

P.Lips. 40 (ti),

6; (ii),

15 (end of iv-beg. of v/4.p.]. In compounds: συνήμην P.Grenf. i 12, 19 (c. 148 a.c.): 21, 4 (126 B.C.5; παρήμην SB 7669, 36; etc. ( A.D. 299); P.Cairo Masp. 67126, 59; 67; 74 [A.D. 541). Modern Greek also possesses ἡμουνίαἱ lor ἡμουνί «|

dialectally).

110.

the and

For

person

singular

papyri

rarely

use

the Attic

Sofa

as in ὅποι

ποτ᾽ ἦσθα P.Oxy. 471, 131 (n /A.D.]; also: the N.T.: Mart. 26:69; Mark 14: 67 (but ἧς W), otherwise ἧς: Σ P.Flor. 61, 59 (A.D. 85); P.Oxy. 1489, 7 (late ii /A.D.]; 1682, g (iv/A.D.); maps P.Oxy. 2182, 5 (A.D. 166); etc. ἦσθας P.Flor. 382, 13 ( 4.D. 222-223) is apparently a hybrid form ἧς

The with

form ἦσθα.

111. The 3rd person singular is regularly ἦν as in Attic; sometimes the final -v, IS omitted, as in: rore yàp οὕπω xa|rámAous ἦ αὐτῶν B.G.U. 1674, 7 (i1 /A.D.); ἐφ᾽ ὃν xpávo| v] περιῇ (mepıincv> Ed.) P.Fam. Tebr. 15, 6t (c. A.D. 114); ἡνίκα περιῇ P.Oxy.

68, a1 (A.D. lectally)

131); P. Ryl. 656, 7 (A.D. 300].

after

the

-ro ending

the

3rd

person

Of -av of

of

Modern

Greek

middle-passive

plural

has

verbs, or

ἦτο ( rove dia-

ἦταν

by

extension

ἦσαν.

112. The 1st person plural fluctuates between an analogical formation after yum.

ἦμεν and

ἤμεθα,

the fatter being

So ἦμεν PSA. 302, 28 (257-256 B.c.); P.Tebt. 803, 4 (late ii/B.c.); B.G.U. 1873, 5 (30 B.c.), but ἤμεθα P.Petrie ii 4 (7), 3(255 - 254 B.C.);* SB 9238, 15 (A.D. 197-250); P.Oxy. 942, 3 (vi or vii /A.D.): Cf. foyer P. Mich. 512, 5 (early i ;A.D.]. the e introduced apparently from ἦσθα, (ἦστε), ἦσαν. 113.

The

which

3rd

also

person

has

114. Subjunctive:

plural

the form

is always

ἦταν

Generally it

ἦσαν.

following

follows

the

It is also

ἦτο,

used

in Modern

Greek,

inflexion.

Some

Fre.

normal

traces of the transition from εἰμί to the deponent in the papyri. e.g.

Attic

inflexion can be found

1. See also Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, p. 678. According to Kretschmer, Entstehung, pp. 12 f., it is a Northwest Greek element in the Koine. Nevertheless middle forms of εἶναι in the dialects are late; therefore, they are attributed more to Koine influence than the reverse, 2. Phryn. TEpoV

δὲ

149 designaies χρῷτο

il

ἂν ὃ λέγων,

as ἐὰν

σόύλοικον: ἧς

ἐν

“in vulgari autem diulecto fere ordinatium Moeris

161

4. Cf, ἤϊμεθα μεθ᾽ αὐ τοῦ

Anda

᾿Αττικῶς,

(sic) P.Petrie (for

ἧς

ἀγορᾶς

ἐν ἀγορᾷ, cf.

Lobeck's

est”, With

σύλοικον. comment

λέγε in

οὖν ἦσθα. opdohis

note

ad

hoc.

reference to Koine authors, cf. also

ἧς Ελληνικῶς.

iv 23 (1). 7 (ce. 246 8.c.),

μετ᾽ αὐτυῦ!.

78

corrected

by Wilcken into

tva.

ἦι

PRESENT — VERRS ὅπως

dvaywriaros

opo

P.Baden

48,

IN -ye

12 (126

afpe) P.Lips. 110, 14 (prob. iti-1v/A.D.). ἦσθα for ἧς is found in ἐὰν δὲ μὴ δυνατὸς

15-17 (244-243 Β.(.}; similarly 84), Fea misspelt for ἦσθα.

$8 114-119

p.c.}: and Foda...,

similarly

ypayo

| poe

ἐὰν δὲ μὴ Fea, εὑρηκώς P.Lond.

115. The 3rd person singular is often

ἵνα

ἀμέριμνος P.Hib.

78,

897, 9-10 (A.D.

found with a final -», i.e.

ἦν {written {vr} by some edd.). The form is not simply an orthographic variation of the regular #4, as considered to be by some scholars.! Matters of meaning and construction are involved, which lead to an assimilation of the 3rd person singular imperfect with the 3rd person singular subjunctive.’

[16. The other persons ion, Notice, however:

of the subjunctive regularly follow the Attic inflex-

iv’ ὥμεθα εὐεργετημένοι P.Fam. Tebt. 37. 22 (A.D. 167) contrary to the usual formula: iva “per εὐεργετημένοι. ope0a, in addition to the Ist person singular

opa,

points

to the

deponent

117. Optative: The Ptolemaic

inflexion

papyri

of the

verb.

retain the Attic inflexion

(never εἶεν) in the 3rd person plural. In Roman and however,

thematic forms

appear

in the 3rd

person

with

εἴησαν

Byzantine papyri,

singular, e.g.

ὃ μὴ eloırn Stud. Pal. xx 35, 7(A.D. 235) = SB 5294 influenced obviously by the stereotyped expression 6 μὴ yeraıro, Similarly à un eto. P.Oxy, 1680, 8 (iii or iv/A.D.); ὦ μὴ «te P.Lond. 991, t9(vi/A.D.) in place of the usual formula

5 un

ein

to

which

it

is equivalent

phonetically.

118. Imperative : ἴσθε:

ἴσθει

P,Tebt.

with

adscript

58.51

(111 /B.c.) || ἔστω

the

papyri;

also

ἔστωι

.:*

P. Mich. 182, 41 (182 B.c.?); ἐξέστωι Ptolemaic

throughout

papyri

a

new

form

P. Mich.

appears

for

243, the

3 (A.D. 3rd

person ar

5| A.D. 255); B.G.U. » in the imperfect

419, 13(A.D. 276-277), to the imperative.

119. /nfinitive: The infinitive is always

due

41-54);

probably

etc. In post-

singular,

i.e.

nrw

off

to

extension

of

the

εἶναι, or its phonetic equivalent (e)ive.

1. So Horn, op.cit., pp. 28f.; Mayser, i?, p. 86; Gignac, p. 805. 2. For

further discussion

3. See Mayser,

see 538.

i?, p. 87.

^. This irregular use of the adscript « is also found in verbal forms of the indicative and optative; it is due to a tendency to recharacterize endings of verbs (and of nouns) by the

addition of this & ἀνεκφώνητον

(so called by the ancient Grammarians,

79

see Phryn. 46).

κξ 119. 122

PHRESEN'T - VERBS

IN - pe

The form εἶν P.Tebt. 316, 80 (A.D. 99) is apparently an abbreviated form, and it must be written εἶν(αι): elv«ao in W.Chrest. 148. 120. εἶμι : This verb is not popular in papyri, nor is it frequent in Koine in general. Notice especially that in some of the N.T. Mss. forms of εἶμι have been replaced by equivalents of ἔρχομαι or ἦλθον" in meaning. In papyri it preserves, wherever attested, its Classical inflexion.* Yet, the infinitive of compounds in -ivaı for -téva« occurs occasionally in papyri and inscriptions.? The form -iva« is certainly the result of analogy after ἔμεν, ere,

(0.4

121. 5ua«

Only

in composition.

E.g.

κάθημαι P.S.I. 407, 5 (ili /B.C.) ; κάθῃ P.Oxy. 33(verso) (iii), 13 (A.D. 180-192); likewise Acts 23:3, but κάθησαι Attic; κάθηται P. Mich. 466, 48 (A.D. 107); see also Crönert, op. eit., p. 263; καθήμεθα P.Oxy. 1854, 10 (vi or vii /A.D.); κάθηνται: Crónert, foc. cit. The other grammatical categories are formed as

in Attic.*

122. ine: This verb is usually found in composition with àv-, ad-, παραφ-, προ- in papyri; in addition καθ-, auv- in the N.T. The thematic forms of the verb are strongly felt in papyri as well as in the O.T. and N.T. E.g. αφίω P.Princ. 73, τὸ (iii/A.D.); αφίω and συνίω often in the O.T., whence Modern Greek ἀφίνω, Also ἀφέω (ἀφεῶ Jannaris, Hist. Gr., $ 960a) Sext. 32, 32. adieıs (adıeis Ed.) P.Cairo Zen. 59495, 5 [iii /B.c.); ἀφιεὶς also appears in Attic, but contracted adeis Rev, 2:20, and Exod. 32: 32. ἀφίομεν P.Cairo Zen. 59467, 10 (iii/B.C.); cf. Luke 11: 4 (NTABCDE): -eper the other MSS.; ἀφείομεν Inscr. Ponti ii 401, 15 [i/A.D.). adiovaw: cf.

1. See

Mark

4:36

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

2. See Crönert,

Nachmanson,

op.cit.,

$ 99

( PS

DW):

Rev.

11:9

(v.l.

ἀφήσουσιν),

3rd

plura!

(1).

pp. 253 f.:

Mayser, i?,

pp. 126 f.; also Jannaris.

Hist. Gr., $251;

Magn. Inschr., p. 157.

3. See Crónert, foc. cit., and Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 177. 4. Cf. Phryn. 415 “Πολλιανὸς ἀκούσας ὅτι χρὴ σὺν τῷ € εἰσιέναι λέγει". εἶτα ὑπέλαβε xai τὸ εἰσίτω εἰσιέτω δεῖν λέγεσθαι Phrynichus' observation conversely explains. the form -tvau

for

-cévac.

9. Sce Schwyzer, Gr. Gr.. i, pp. 127, 668, 679-80; Gr.,

6. See

$ 994;

word

Blass-Debr.-Funk.

ἀφήνω

in

& 100.

Andriotis, op.

cit. 8o

Mavser, i?, p. 108, 123: Jannaris, Hist.

PRESENT — VERRS IN -μι

58 122 - 128

middle-passive: mpotovra. P.Cairo Zen. 59151, 4 [256 2.C.); ἀφέονται P.Mich. 174. 6 (A.D. 145-147); cf. ἀφέωνται John 20:23 and elsewhere,' but ἀφίονται Matt. 9:2, 5 (D).

123. Imperative: ädıe P.Oxy.

1758,

12 (ii /A.D.).

124. Optative or infinitive forms

are not attested in our collection.*

125. Participle: rapadiwr P.G.M. ii xit, 347 (A.D. 346) , but athematic ras quoted by Crónert, op.cit., p. 258.

ovrieis,

συνιέντα, παριέν-

126. ἵστημι: Besides its athematic forms, found regularly in the Ptolemaic papyri? this verb has produced certain by-forms based on the stem of certain tenses, thus: «ἰστάνω {from torvavac).* As a rule in the infinitive and participle: avo(i]oraνειν P.Petrie ii 37 (2a) verso, 14 (iii /B.C.) ; ἀφιστάνιν (= -av) B.G.U. 1127. 19 (8

s.c.);

165)

(A.D. 280,

281;

adse[7rav] ew B.G.U. 7 Javecy

127. Middle-passive forms

(A.D.

158);

189,

1074,

4

always

toravópevos C.1.A, iv 6306 [a] φιστανομένη

καὶ

20 (4

B.G.U.

14

5,

C.P.R. x afa]

1130,

(32

(A.D.

date);

(no

B.G.U.

καθιστάνειν

542,

15

Aristeas

275].*

in the participle: B.C.);

ἐξιστανομένη

B.C.) ; ἀφιστάνειν

20

P.

συνιστανόμενος P.Oxy. Ryl. 117, 22 (A.D. 269);

727, 25 (A.D. ἀφιστανομένου

154); P.S.I.

292, 15 (iti /A.D.]; ἐξιστανόμενο!s) P.Oxy. 1405, 24 (iii/A.D.); (in full) C.P.R. 20 (i), 6 (A.D. 250); καθιστί αἸνάμενοι (sic) P.Amh. 70, 4 (between A.D. t14117), κατιστανομένων (sic) B.G.U. 747 (verso), 1 (4.D. 139). For examples of -ἰστάνω in the N.T. see Blass-Debr.-Funk, ὃ 93.

128. -cardw

-@ from

the subjunctive iori. This form? frequently stands as

1. ἀφέωνται

is incorrectly

accented

according

to Jannaris, Hist, Gr., $ 960, who suggests

ἀφεῶνται. 2. Cf. Crönert, op. cir., p. 258 3. See Mayser,

(3); Schmid,

Atricismus, ii, p. 26.

i*, pp. 1:22 f.

4. Modern Greek has preserved this form in παριστάνω. The

transformation avooraivw, 5. Cf. 6. So

-&v«

verbs

into -alvw, occurs

-ἄνω suffix,

following the

also under the form { λεσταίνω :

συσταίνω.

Moeris also

of the

in

200:

ἱστάναι

Modern

' Arrixcs,

Greek:

ἐφιστῶ,

(aravew

᾿Ελληνικῶς.

παριστῶ,

συνιστῶ.

81 B. G.

Mandilaras,

The

Verh in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

6

$8 128 - 132

PRESEN — VERBS T

IN -μὶ

a variant of -ιστάνω in the N.T. (see Blass-Debr.-Funk.$ 93); it often occurs in Koine writers.! From the papyri: καθειστᾷ

(καιθϑειστᾷ

καθιστῶντα

728,

P.Par. 51,

4 (ii/a.c.);

P.Ant.

42,

22

21 (A.D. 70); στῶν

"n to

A.D.) 129.

542);

23,

B.C.);

(imperfect:

καθειστῶσιν 228;

ἀποκαθείστα

συνειστᾶ

Ibid.,

καθιστᾶν

Fdd.)

14;

P.Tebt.

(imperfect) P.Oxy.

2349.

plural imperfect) SB 4512, 77 (167-134 B.C.); συνι-

17 (iii [A.D.);

προσιστῶν

P.Lond.

1383, 7 (c. A.D. 709); ἐφιστῶν-

Edd.) P. Merton 76, 23 (A.D. 181). The transition of -ἰστάω

group

appears in the forms παριστούντῳ[ν] SB 7241, 43

and

11 (163

καϑιστῶν Aristeas

904, 5 (v/A.D.);

συνείστα

συνίστων (3rd

[(ἐφιστῶ(ν} 'r -éw

P.Par.

14 (159 B.C.); cf.

ἀποκαθιστᾶν P.Oxy. (A.D.

P. Ryl. 604,

the

Wilcken)

oravw / -ordvonai,.

These

forms

ἀφιστοῦμεν (Arab.).

are

P.Oxy.

2270,

developments

of

18

(early

-ἰστάνῳ.

So

v/

amo-

ordvona P.Gen. 53, 21 (mid. iv/A.D.); cf. xaraordvovres Acts 17: 15 (P5 D: D* has xa&iardvovres); ἀποκαταστάνει Mark 9:12 (N*D: -τιστάνει B*); ἀποκαταστάνεις Acts 1:6(D).

130.

στήκω:

It is a Hellenistic formation from

the

perfect

ἕστηκα:

it occurs

in the O.T., N.T., and some Koine writers, as well as in papyri. E.g. ἐπιστήκων P.Mich. 515, 2 (late iii/A.D.); στήγων [= στήκων) P.Lips. 4 (ii). 4 (end of iv -beg. of v/A.D.). 131.

στατίζω:

Eur.

(see LSJ s.v.). This form

It

is a denominative

form

is extinct

It occurs rarely in post-Ptolemaic στατέξοντος (= στατιωνίζοντος LSS),

στατός

already

found

in the wdrks of Koine

in

Soph.

papyri as a synonym of ἴστημι: στατίζοντι P.Oxy. 2130, 21 ; 23 (A.D.

65, t (iii or early iv/A.D.); erari£orro

for

and

writers while 267);

ararilovra P.Oxy. 2187, B (A.D. 304).

132. κεῖμαι: This verb supplies the perfect passive of τίθημι, and is inflected as it is in Attic.* It occurs mainly in composition with avri-, dzó-, Oid-, €y-, ἐπί-, παρά-, mpó-, ὑπό- (in addition dvd-, ovy- in Attic). In the Ptole-

maic papyri it is found in the 3rd singular of the indicative, the infinitive, and the participle.5 Post-Ptolemaic papyri contain some more forms, e.g.

1. See Jannaris. Hist. Gr., ὃ 962. 2. Cf. Modern same

Greek

combination

στέκω στέκομαι, a hybrid form from στήκω with στένω. From the

Modern

Greek

has produced

the present

t, pp. 314 f., has suggested στέκω ἐστήκω according formed by analogy with ἔπεσα.

10

στήνω. Hatzidakis,

3. See Jannaris, Hist. Gr., $ 965; Hatzidakis, Einl., p. 390: Blass-Debr.-Funk,

4. See Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, p. 679; Jannaris, Hist. Gr., 8$ 900-3. 9. For examples

see

Mayser,

i?. p.

125;

Crünert,

82

M.N.E.,

urerw revyay thus

(n ii κεν

(followed by Wilcken, see Witk., £pist. 50, introducing

in

a

private

letter an archaism

which is completely incongruous to the style of the writer who, after all, shows a marked preference

for the perfect

tense. 206

PERFECT

IN - xa

$8 435 (3) - 435 (7)

P.Cairo Zen. 59502, 4-5 (iii /a.c.), characterized as “dorische Perfektform " by Mayser [i*, p. 96), have been formed as if the verb was thematic. (4)

ἴστημι:

forms

Thematic

the perfect

variations

usually from

also occur in the perfect of ἵστημι. This

the stem

orn-, occasionally

ora- appears (presumably after analogy with those stem ora-); cf. passive perfect ἔσταμαι and infinitive

anéatnx{[a] P.Mich. Zen. 52, 11 (250 B.C.); ἀπέστηκα καθέστηκα P.Oxy. 902, 3 (c. A.D. $65); P.Cairo Masp. προξστίηκα!

142-143).

B.G.U.

From

1819,

4

the stem

(£arnwas): παρέστηκας

(60-59

ora-:

P.Petrie

B.C.);

edeoraxa ii 20

(4),

15

P.Par. 59, 1-2 (159 &.C.]; 67089 (verso), 30 (Byz.}; B.G.U.

11

(258-257

B.C.);

καθέστηκεν

(252

P.Mich.

191,

3

(A.D.

the stem

ora-:

1788, 7 (i/B.c.). 8.C.):

From

oureoraxas P.Fay. 109, 9 {early i/A.D.). ἕστηκεν P.Bour, 20, 25 (A.D. 350); P.Lips. 38 [i), 3 (A.D. 390); 486,

verb

the stem

forms which have the éordvac (for -ἐστακένᾳαι).

ἀποσυνέστηκα

B.G.U.

however

Zen.

eveornke | P.S.4.

71, 3 (246-221

B.C.);

P.Oxy.

1869, g (vt or vii/A.D.); P.Cairo Masp. 67294, 1 (Byz. ; walp}dornxey P.Hib. 47, 15 (256 B.c.); προέστηκεν PSF. 522, 5 (248-247 B.C.); συνέστηκεν P.Par.

65, 9 (146 B.c.); P.Tebr. 61 (a), 164 (118-117 B.c.); owveornule)v P.Oxy. 653. rt (A.D. 160-162}; P.Bour. 20, 7 (A.D. 350). From the stem ora-: κατέστακε P.Oxy.

528,

21

(ii/A.D.].

{ἐστήκαμεν): καθεστήκαμεν P.Hib. 82, 14 (239-238 B.C.) ; παραστήκαμεν P.Cairo Zen. 59201, 3 (251-230 B.c.). From the stem ora-: παρεστάκαμεν B.G.U. 1741, 1% (64-63 B&B.C.); owveoraxapev P.Lortd. 255, 10 (A.D. 136). ἑστήκασι): καθεστήκαοιν 1877, © le. A.D. 488);

20

(n),

20

(5) λέγω: They are

(A.D.

P.Oxy. P.Cairo

1876, 7 (c. A.D. 480); [καϑε)] στήκασιν | P.Oxy. Masp. 67294, 7 (Byz. ; ἐφεστήκασι P.Fay.

222).

In addition to the -Ka perfect, some aspirated forms formed probably after analogy with εἴληφα, eiAnxa 7.

eipnxe P.Fav, 123, 19-20; 22 (c, ipnxe B.G.U. 597, 23 (A.D. 75). (6)

δλλυμι-ὀλλύω

faj

ἀπόλωλε

(am-]

P.Mich.

(a)

attested. the like:

Fe

A.D.

amoAwiu,

Zen. 34, 6,

are and

100); Ib)

15 (254

εἴριχε

SB

9249,

12

(il-iliA.D.);

anoAwdexa.

B.C.); cf.

ἀπολωλένα[ι)

P.Oxy.. 486,

32 (A.D. tac}: lin full) P.Cairo Masp. 67160, 18 (A.D, 508); ὀλωλότα P.Oxr. 1873, 7 (late v/A.D.); ἀπολωλύτων Stud. Pal. v 6, at lili /A.D.). (b) dmoAu'|Aex δ) P.Osl. 151, 10-11. (i-ii/A.D.); [aso] λελωκέναι (for -Awde-) POxv. 1716, 12-13 (A.D. 333); ἀπολωλεκέναι P.Lips. 35, 15 (c. A.D. 375). (7) 77.

ὄμνυμι-ἀμνύω (stem »/«): ὀμώμοκα P.Petrie ii 46 (δ), 6 (200 B.c.); 26-7 (A.D. 223); ὁμόμεκα B.G.U. 549, 21 (28-27 B.C.): duo pena

251, 29-30

(A.D. 44);

478.

44

(A.D.

132);

1030, 22-3

(A.D. 212) ᾿ώμόμεκα

P.S.J. 1338, 16 (A.D. 212]; συνωμόμεκα (sic) P.Sel. 328, 25 {a.D. 25}: vexa (Sic) P.Tebt. 298, 80 (A.D. 107-108). ὁμωμήκεμεν

P.Par,

40,

13

[152

B.C.}

133}. 207

ὁμομέκα

[per]

P.S.J.

P.Oxx. P.Oxr.

53, 26-7

συνομώ(ad.

132-

IN τὰ

PERFECT

- 437 §§ 435 (7) Aspirated forms :

ὀμῴμεχα P.Tebt. 316, 293, 25; 26-7 (c. a.D. ὁμόμακα

19,

and

26, ὠμύμεχα fbid., 104 (A.D. 99); συνομόμεχα P.Tebt, 187); ὁμώμοχα P.Ryl. 82, 17 (A.D. 113) alternated to

ὁμώμοκα

by

different

hands.

(8) τυγχάνω: In addition to the regular ka- perfect from the stem τυχ- we find a new -ka formation from the stem τευχ-, e.g. τετύχηκᾳ P.Oxy. 2343, 9 (A.D. 288); τετ[ὑχηκα P.Lond. 412, 15 (A.D. 351); but cf. rereuyviavr P.Oxy.

91, 19 (A.D.

187), παρατεί rev] xéva« A.P.F.

maparereuyöra

P.Oxy.

113,

14.

ii (1903), p.

(il /A.D.);

125, 11

émrerevyóras

(A.D.

B.G.U.

332,

124-125); 6

fii-mi/

A.D.).

436. Perfect in -a (second

perfect).

Apart

from

the

regular

forms

of the

second perfect the papyrt exhibit certain formations of this tense which present a number of variations of the verbal stem. Some of these variations have

been

attested

in Classical

Greek, others

are

later

developments.

E.g.

(ἢ) ἄγω: (a) aynyoxa: avaynıyoya P.Petrie ii 4 (5), 3 (255-254 B.C.). I\mploaaynyoxas P.S.I. 511, 10 (253-252 B.c.); συναγήγοχας P.S./. 375. 5 (250-

249

B.C.].

araynyoxer

P.Lilie

(itt /B.c.);

7,

17-18

καταγήγοχεν

naraynyoxa! μὲν

(b) aynoxya: P.Oxy. 284,

(iii/B.c.);

P.S.I.

P.Mich.

Zen.

28,

ἀπαγήγυχέμ

16

P.Cairo

Zen,

28-9

(256

18 liii/B.c.);

59368,

18

pe

P.Cairo.

Zen,

li-Hi /A.D.);

(2)

λαγχάνῳ

rarely because

the of

καταγιωχέναι has for the

Attic

«iàyxa

its regular

P.Tebtr.

most

part

(see 430

1

B.C.).

(240

the xxii

dyeioxev B.C.);

SB

ayıyoya form: 3, 5 (ii /A.D.).

9050

émayeieoxlev)

470,

6

(A.D.

the poetic

(3)! ). The

ayeioya

fi), 5 (i-ii/A.D.); P.Fam.

4 (A.D. 129); καταγήοχεν P.Cairo Zen. 59328, 145 (248 B.c.). ἀπαγηύχασιν P.Cairo Zen. 59275, 11 (251 B.C.); cf. καταγειοχέναι 17

50626,

(iti /B.C.].

an orthographic development of 14 (A.D. 45}: παραγείωχα Stud. Pal.

aynoxer P.Cairo Zen. 59762, araynoxer

40b,

Tebr.

25,

P.Lips.

105,

λέλογχα,

and

111-113).

and

former

lonic

perfect

is apparently

preferred

reduplication.

437. In examining perfect forms in the papyri we can see the appearance of new perfect formations of verbs which occur in Attic in other verbal forms but not in the perfect, or have a perfect form as simple verbs, but lack perfect formation as compounds. To be precise, out of 102 -xa perfects of our collection, 26 of simple verbs and 23 of compounds are not attested in Attic, and out of 34 a-perfects, ı of a simple verb and 27 of compounds are unknown in Attic! Thus:

1. The check has been made on the basis of LSJ.

208

NEW

438. Cases in which simple verbs:

PERFECT

FORMAT,

δὰ 438 - 442

no perfect at all is attested in Attic. -«a perfects of

ywviaxa, npynwa, BeBooxnxa, ἤλπικα, Matt, 22:4), εὐτάκτηκα, ηὐχρήστηκα,

form

NS

occurs).

κέκλικα

(Polyb.

ἠργολάβηκα, ἡτοίμακα (Polyb, iii 72,6; κεκάθαρκα, κέκαρκα, κεκίνηκα {middle

xxx 13, 2),

κεκοπίακα

(Rev.

2:3), λελίκμηκα,

ἰμε)μέτρηκα μεμίσθωκα {but μεμίσθωμαι iS frequent), oi(an-) κονόμηκα, olvoποίηκα, πεπολυώρηκα (present also unknown from Attic], πεπόνηκα [but πεπύνημαι OCCUrS], werörıza, σεσήμαγκα (It occurs in. post-Classical writers), ὑπερηφάνηκα, πεφοίτηκα, Keyeipina, κεχειρογράφηκα.

439. -xa. perfects of compound ανήγγελκα,

διεγγύηκα,

verbs, their simplicia attested in Attic:

κατεγγεγύηκα,

παρείλκυκα,

παρήλκυκα,

ἐμβεβάτευκα,

ἐμπε-

φάνικα, ἐνώχληκα, παρηνώχληκα, ἀπέσχηκα, κατέσχηκα, προπέσχηκα, ἐγκέκληκα, παρακέκληκα (though often παρακέκλημαι), ἐγκέκλικα (Plut. Sull. 1), κατακέκλυκα, mpuaxexUvQka, ἐκλέλικα, ὑπομεμένηκα, κατανενόμικα, κατανενόηκα, ἄνοικοδόμνκα, προσωικοδόμηκα, προσωϊ(οἹ φείληκα, ἀντιπέπτωκα, ἀποπέπτωκα, ἐμπεπόληκα

6

{Attic

[(ii/B.C.]),

ἡμποόληκα),

ἐξύβρικα,

. Cases of minor ἥλκνκα

(Attic

κατέσπαρκα,

κατέφθακα,

συναφέασταλκα,

reÜéAnwa

(5.16.

437.

ὑποκεχειρογραφηήκα.

or special divergence from

εἴλκυκαὶ;

ἀπητέτεικα

(Attic

Attic:

ἠθέληκα);

ἔθυκα

(Attic

τέθνκα).!

In

these examples the -xa part of the formation ts not affected, the different forms being due to the special treatment of the reduplication (for particulars

see 420,

425).

441. Cases in which Attic attests an -a perfect: yeypadnxa

Or

yeypadexa

442. -α perfects of compound

[Attic

γέγραφα).

verbs,

their simplicia

attested

in Attic?

ivayyyoxyu, draynjyoya, waraynyoxa, προσαγήγοχα, cuvayyyoya, πρυσαγήωχα, ὑπακήκοα, mpnonda, dınyeypada, ἐπιγέγραφα (but -μαι IS frequent), xarayéypada, napemıyeypada, ὑπογέγραφα (past participle very frequently), ἀποδέδηχα͵, προκεκήρυχα, διακέκοφα (but διακεκοῴφότας in Xen. Cyr, ni 3, 66), ἀντιλέλογχα (avrecAnya in Dem. 40,3), ἐπι πέπομφα, eianénpaxa (middle form occurs], mpoarerayn (also in O.T. Dun, 2:4), ómoréraxa, συντέτριφα (passive frequently],

1. eduxa for τέθυκα indicates replacement of the seduplication and this occurs also in other instances, see 478. 2. The fact that many so it does not have any offers some statistical ferent formation from

by

the syllabic augment,

compounds in papyri are not attested in Attic may be accidental, significance as regards the formation of the perfect, but it merely conclusions. Nevertheless, ἀντιλέλογχα contains a perfect of difearly Attic efAnya. Notice. that Ackoyxa is Homeric and lonic.

204 B

G.

Mandilaras.

The

Verb

in the Greek.

Non-Literary Fapyri

id

ἂν 442 - 445 (1) ἐντέτυχα

(also

verninya

occurs

THE in

inscriptions

{present

in

Isoc.

ENDINGS

also

OF THE

of i

'B.C.),

unknown

froni

PERFECT

ἀνενήνοχα,

Attic),

ἐξενήνωυχα,

and

vice

παρενήνοχπη,

versa.

Tpocu-

é€axada

(war-

14. 7; 351.

443. From the above cited examples of the new perfects we can draw certain conclusions indicative of the history of the perfect tense: that both the -«a

and

-a

perfects

(more

of compound

than

of simple

verbs)

had

an extreme development in post - Classical compositions, and especially in the language of the papyri. This further means that the perfect could be used in cases where the Classical writer would have used the aorist.! The wide use of the perfect was its swan-song: soon afterwards its principal sense disappeared, and the tense ended up with a simple historical meaning, as can be seen in the conflict between aorist and perfect (see 470 ff.). Then the aorist proved itself strong enough to supplant the perfect and establish its unique usage in Modern Greek. The aorist in Modern Greck (and to a lesser extent in Classical Greek) is often used where the English idiom uses the present perfect. The

Endings

of

the

Perfect

444. Second person singular in -£c, -a¢ (or -ἡς). The appearance of the ending -es in the 2nd person singular instead of the regular -as (rare in the Ptolemaic papyri, somewhat more frequent in the papyri of our era) is clearly due to the general trend of the language to arrange the various endings of the past tenses according to the same model. The second aorist (as well as the imperfect) gave the pattern for this innovation. Both these retained the 2nd person singular -es from the 3rd person singular -e and for the same reason this predominant ending -e played a basic part in the change of the 2nd person singular -as to -es attested not only in the inflexion of the perfect, but also in that of the s-aorist (see 319). Such a change proved itself so strong that it continued through the Byzantine period down to Modern Greck, where it was established entirely in the s-aorist. 445. The evidence from (1)

papyri

is as follows:

-as: σι

εἰ

ληῴας

l. For discussion

P.Hih.

54,

20-T

on this subject

(c.

see

215

4061

H.C.];

ff. 210

KEXPNIANS,

δέδωκας

P.Par.

44.

4.

1

THE

ENDINGS

OF THE

PERFECT

$$ 445 (1) - 445 (4)

(153 B.C.]; εἴρηκας P.Oxy. 744. 11 (τ gc.) r158, 15 (iti; A.D.) ἐγ]νώκας P.Osl. i1 50, 5 (1-0 /A.D.); reßeAnwas P.Warren 15, 7 (D 'A.D.); παρείληφας P.Oxr. 91, 18 [A.D. 187); órepg φάνηκας P.Oxy. 1676, 16-17 (I /A.D.).

(2)

-es: ἀπέσταλκες

Andes

B.G.U.

P.Oxy.

ἢ ρώτηκες

1141,

29-30

(14-143

742, 4 (2 B.C.);

P.Oxy.

1155,

6-7

B.C.),

σεσήμανκαις (A.D.

with

{

104);

areornAxas

-wes)

οἷδες

in

B.G.U.

P.Mich.

line

12;

rapei-

1078, 9 (A.D. 30};

203,

28

(A.D.

98-117);

476, 17; 477. 28 (both early ii/A.D.); P.Tebr. 568 (it or early iii/A.D.); B.G.U. 261, 23 (ἢ/aA.D.7); P.Oxyr, 1067, 20 [(ii/A.D.) P.Mich. 514, 8 (iii /A.D.); P.Oxy. 2275, 7 (ist half of iv/a.n.); P.S./ 1161, 5 (with οἶδας 11) [1v/A.D.); P.Oxy.

1083,

13

(late

iv/A.D.;

P.S.l.

742,

7

(v-vi/A.D.);

P.Oxy.

1897,

10

(early vi /A.D.); P.land. 23. 3: 11 (vi or vii/A.D.); ἠγόρακες W.O. 1056, 5 (A.D. 113): yeypadnmes P.Wärzb. 21, 16 (di /A.D.); δέδωκες P.Oxy. 12095, 17 (ii or

03, 30 [iv /A.D.); P.Lips. 1280, 7-8;

1

(vi/A.D.);

23

89, 3 (c. end of iv/A.D.);

εἴρηκες

(ii-ii /A.D.);

P.Oxy.

514,

12

Note:

The

numerical

obvious from

ending

-a«

appearing

(4)

the

did first

not by

of

cited

live

the end

ἤρηχες

B.G.U.

(iii/A.D.); Foxes iii-iv/A.D.).

superiority

instances

longer

P.Form.

8 (ii or iit /A.D.];

(tit/A.D.);

πέποί qees P. Mich. 514, 17-18 ἠξίωκες P.Lips. 110, 11 (prob. (3

2149,

than

In

Ji/A.D., the

P.Mich.

17

216,

510,

(ii-lii /A.D.?):

28

-es contrasted

addition,

the

of 1, 8.C., reached

abt,

P.Mich.

the ending above.

293, 2 (v-vI ; A.D.]; εἴρηχες

(A.D.

with

we

observe

while

the

206);

the

-as ts

that

-es

the

cnding.

vii ’A.n.

-ns:

The 2nd person

singular ending -5s appears sporadically in the papyrt.

So eipnuns P.Par. 32, 16 (162 B.c.}. The form is considered as pluperfect by Mayser, i*, p. 82, and thus read for εἰρήκεις, i.e. due to orthographic confusion of ἡ and «.! But the -ns ending of the perfect is attested elsewhere, e.g. διαγεγράφης P.Merton 61, 1 (8 B.c.); notice otöns P.Lond. 410, 13 (c. A.D. 346);

P.Gen.

54, 3 (mid.

iv/a.n.); P.Ross.-Georg.

v 8B, 5 (Iv-v/A.D.),

where

there is no orthographic confusion with oldas;? cf. also ἐσχήκη (3rd singular) P.Tebt. 116, 21 (late il/n.c.). The ending -ns 1s probably due to analogy after the passive aorist -(8)5«. l. The Avda,

σιτάρια με

Sob

context, an

however,

es 'yadarlelraı

καὶ vac

τὸ τὸ

ὕὑδωρ', μέλει

μέ,

ἔτι καὶ

de rà

favours

the

perfect:

m| epi

cir |

ἐνετείλασ

καὶ ἐπι ! Anema,

λελήσθαι "ex

τὰ

εἰμήκης

γιρώ On

μέτρα Awyxe

oxere, |

ad οὗ ab ὑμῶν

- -olle}

' τῶν

ulli.

Oleriwr

(5-10),

In

Anal

καὶ

μὴ

addition,

ἀπελήβάν ειν]}

τὰ

δυνασθαί there

is

no confusion of 7 and e elsewhere in the whole text, Witkowski. Eprt. 37, observes that εἰρήκης (he reads εἴρηκης) stands for ecpywes (cf. 445 (4}}. thus he himself con-

siders

this form

2. Cf. Wilken,

due

to

4.P.F.

ii

the orthographic (1900).

p. 3993. 2

confusion

of ἡ and

«.

8$ 446 - 448

(1)

THE

ENDINGS

OF

THE

PEKFEUT

446. 3rd person plural in -av, -acı,! and -ov, -ovm. The ending ταν for -acı in the perfect is well attested in the papyri. The earliest examples date from the first half of the ii/B.c., and instances from inscriptions of Asia Minor go further back to the iii/B.C., e.g. mapeiAndav O.G.1. 229, 38 (246-241 B.c.). The -ay form is also attested in the inscriptions of Pergamum (see Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 167; Meisterhans, Att. Inschr., p. 184), the O.T. and the N.T. (see Roberston, pp. 336 f.) 447. According to Sextus Empiricus the form is an Alexandrianism: παρὰ τοῖς ᾿Αλεξανδρεῦσι “ἐλήλυθαν καὶ ἀπελήλυθαν" (Adv. Gramm. 213). This statement made some grammarians dispute the genuineness of -av in the texts of the N.T.,? but the appearance of it in other localities besides Egypt, and its frequent occurrence in the papyri permit us to accept that it was widespread in the Greek language. So the -av ending was neither a mere Alexandrianism, nor a “vulgarism due to the occasional lapse of an early scribe”,? but it was an innovation after the analogy of the thematic aorist, a fact which was also supported by the reverse movement, 1.6. the intrusion of the perfect ending -ac into the aorist (εἴπασι etc., see 322). 448. We enumerate the evidence from the papyri as follows: (1)

-av: ἐνκαταλέλυιπαν SB 6002, 13 (t /B.C.7); etAnday P.Par. 25, 19: 25: [163 B.C.); P.Lond. 17, 23 (162 8.c.); B.G.U. 1118, 22 (22 B.C.); P.Mich. 333-4. 11 (A.D. 32).

ἐν βέβληκαν

P.Par.

ed. pr.)

P. Tebt.

30,

τευχαν

Witk.)

/bid., 39 and

72,

159

54.

4

16

(30

(114-113 (H6

g.c.);

B.C.-A.D.

40

47.

(111

B.C.);

B.C.):

43;

ic. cf.

1532

B.C.)

δέδωκαν

P.Sel.

ave νήνεχαν

P.Tor. 104,

B.G.U.

10

emßeßnixar)

and

κατέσχηκαν

κεκυρίευκαν

yeypadar

14):

8-9

er

Ted reugen

[Witk.: (Crónert:

P.Tebt, 61

(b), 226

τ, 23

B.C.) ; ἐγλέλιυκαν

(117

(b> B.C.))

1053

(u),

(118-116

warayerpadar

14-15

[13

B.G.U.

B.C.);

-[κασι) év«e»-

aic.); P.Tebr. 1001,

παρείληφαν

B.G.U. 1121, 45 (5 B.C.); 338, 22 (A.D. 100-101): 133, 17 (A.D. 1532}: Stud. Pal. xxii. 48, 22 (A.D. t52); ἀποδέδωκαν B.G.U. 1200, 20 [1 B.c.); erudeiwar P.Ryl. 147, 17 (A.D. 39]; λέλονχαν P. Mich, 32-35, 19 lA.D. 47), but Arkoryacı in another

copy

of the same

text

(contract),

that

is PS f. ooa

ycyovar

1. See Schwyzer, Gr. Gr, 1, p. 6665; Mayser, i*, pp. 84 f. ; Crönert, ep.cir.. p. 210;

ΒΟ

C.

Blass-Debr.

Funk, § 83 (1): Jannaris, Hist. Gr., καὶ 067; Psaltes, pp. 212 f.;. Kapsomenakis, Kerunter., p. 75 fn. 1 (with [it ; Thumb, Hell, p. 170; Mandilaras, Srudies in the Gr. Lane., pp.

13 ff.

2. See

Robertson.

3. See

Moulton,

p. 43h, Prof.,

p. 52.

THE 597,

19 (A.D.

raxav) 107);

P.Amh. ἔφθακαν

ENDINGS

75): eipnxar

125

B.G.U.

(inir.)

P.Oxy.

(late

1293,

25

OF

THE

595,

13

i/A.D.); (A.D.

PERFECT (c. A.D.

70-80),

adeinav

117-138);

88 448 (1) - 451

P.Oxy.

ἀφήλπακαν

722, 6

peremyeypadav

[=

ἀφήρ-

(A.D.

B.G.U.

91 328

or (i),

6 (A.D. 138-139); ἐλήλυθαν SB 9025, 8 (ii/A.D.) ; καεκίνη [xav P.Oxy. 528, 13-14 (ii/A.D.); ἀπήτηκαν P.Oxy. 530, 4 (ii/A.D.); πεπλάνηκαν P.Oxy. 119, 12 liiliL /A.D.);

παρέστηκαν

P.S.l.

95,

14 (liil /A.D.];

δέδω[ κίαν

P.Erlangen

116),6 (iii /A. D.) ; ἀναδέδωκαν, P.Lond. 251,6 (mid. iv/A.D.); em ἰδέδωκαν 408, 16-17 (mid. iv/A.D.); παραδέδωκαν P,Amh. βέβληκαν P.Vars. 29, 6 (vi/A.D.); oldavr Pland. dav

(2)

(sic)

SB

3558,

3

Ino

113

(No.

P.Lond.

142, 12 (after A.D. 341); xara23, 13 (vi or vii /A.D.] ; πέπεμ-

date].

-acr: εἰλήφασι

5 (257

P.Petrie

1 24

(3),

B.C.); ἐξυβρίκασιν

ἃ

(270-269

B.C.);

P.Cairo Zen. 59080,

προειλήφασιν

11

P.Cairo Zen.

59060,

(257 B.C.) ; συντετρίφασι P.Col.

Zen. 21, 2 (257 or early 256 B.c.]; ἐξειλήφασι P,Col. Zen. 270 li), 17 (256 B.c.); P.Col. Zen. 54. 17 (250 B.C.); arny |yeAraoı, εὐὑρήκασι P.Cairo Zen. 59145. 16-17; tB (256 8.C.); καταπεφρονήκασιν P.Perrie ii 4 (b), 17 (255-254 4.C.); πεποιήκασιι

P.Cairo Zen. 59330, 4 (248 B.C.); προσωικοδομήκασι P.Petrie ii 12 (1j, 12 (241 B.C.); καταπεπλεύίκασι P.Cairo Zen. 59367, 23-4 (240 B.C.): γεγόνασιν P.Cairo Zen. 59433, 31 liii /B.C.) ; πεπράχασιν P.Cairo Zen. 59623, 15 (iii /B.C.);: εἰσπεπράyaow

PS.

κασι P.Eleph.

608,

7

17, 21

(iii/B.C.);

(223-222

ἐσκάφασι

B.G.U.

1531,

8&.C.); éyBefAsjkam

ı

P.Lille

(iii/B.C.) ; xarafieBAy-

ii 12, 8 (21B nm.c.):

παρειλήφασι B.G.U. 1211, 11 (end of iii/B.C.); ἐντετεύχασιν P,Par. 63 li), 23: (vii). 198 (164 8.C.); κατεσχήκασι, προστετάχασι P.Tebt. 5, 47; 50 etc. [118 a.c.)

449. The -acı ending is almost entirely confined to the Ptolemaic papyri: it appears rarely in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, e.g. « }tAjdac B.G.U. v, 58 (li/A.D.); wehelvyaow] P.Giss. 40, 16 (A.D. 215); γεγόνασιν P.Lond. 408, 10 (mid. iv/a.n.), probably under literary influence, as -av is the regular ending in both papyri and N.T. 450. To sum up, the perfect in papyri presents plainly the strong intrusion of the aorist endings in its inflexion. The phenomenon further reflects the close affinity between the two tenses (see 324 ff.). It is noteworthy that the -av ending entered the inflexion of the perfect before the 2nd singular -es appeared for -as in the same tense. This is probably due to the fact that the ending -av was strengthened by several allied cases of it occurring in the same person of other tenses (i.e. pluperfect, aorist passive, imperative). The ending -ay came to be popularly considered the characteristic suffix of the past tenses, whence it was also extended to the second aorist and imperfect

(see 277, 317 f.). 451. The endings -ov and -ouci. Some perfect forms betray the influence of the endings of other tenses, e.g.

219

ἂκ 451 - 452 (3)

PERFECT

MEDDLE - PASSIVE

πέπρακον B.G.U. 22, 21 (ab. 114} with second aorist (imperfect) endiny:! εἴληφον P.Vind. Inv. voBos, 26 (iv A.D.) is apparently built on the aorst ἔλαBov; re θελήκοναι P.Anih. 130, 10-17 (A.D. 70) Is formed after the present ending -ü0ugt.

(1) Similarly, the formation rersuxynger in an inscription of Pergamon zer, Perg. Inschr., p. 187 Anm.) has the present ending -nper.*

Perfect

Middle

(Schwet-

- Passive

452. The stem of the perfect middle-passive is in general the same as that of the -«a perfect. The endings are attached directly to the reduplicated verb-stem, consequently producing euphonic changes of the consonants in succession according to Attic norm.? Irregularities or developments. attested especially in the papyri * are noted within the articles which follow: (1) aipew: with ep- as a rule: areipnane P.Flor. rihy (h), 26 (a.p. 212); P.Lips. 5, 4 (A.D. 203); 26

(A.D.

99);

mronipesar ἤρηται I,

%

συνδιίρημε

B.G.U.

P.Tebt. (A.D.

613,

10

397.4

153);

B.c.); eraripyralıl

T0nn

pnaedl

εἰρησθαι

(2)

αἴρω:

of

a]

-σ-

συνῆρμαι

(3)

P.Lond. ἀλείφω:

ἱπαλήλειπται

ἥλιμε

P.Jews

τ

34

38

12

cf.

(A.D.

ἀνίρημαι

WIth

retention

of

the

P.Oxv.

38, 6 {A.D.

(A.D.

212);

ἐπανείμηται

31, 22

(A.D,

138-161).

100,

19:

2%

41.

Jhid.,

character 40-30);

-e-.

PL Flor,

P.Fehr.

45,

t9

23h].

1912, 15;

P.Lond.

βίων.

gurvdcerpnpar

r2

(A.D.

133;

40-1

22

(A.D.

(c.

(ALD. A.D.

1231:

cf.

]1). 138-161),

συ ῆρᾳσθαι

and B.G.U.

with

insertion

975,

15

(A.D.

123).

(mid.

(for

P.Oxv.

23,

27,

47)

with

ἀνείρηται

ih).

7-8

C.P.R.

P.Lips.

255,

148);

127.

(A.D.

138-161)

L164

+5): P.Lips. 27, 15 (A.D. ἧρται

(A.D.

^ -ἠἡρηπβεὶ)

συνμῇρσμαι

q03.27

P.Flor.

P. Fior.

(

I.

(A.D.

P. Lond.

(118 "pn

P.S

τ,

1v /A.D.).

ἀληλιμμαι)

(ij.

14

P.Ovyr,

(A.D.

328,

τι

(ni

D.).

127).

|. This reflects further the aoristic sense of πέπρακα :; sec P.Oxy. 1072, 3-4 ( A.D. 37-41); τοῦς, 8-9 (ii/A.p.). The aoristic sense of πέπρακα is lurther exemplified by the hybrid form erpaxaraı (for πεπρακατεὶ in P.Oxy. 1160, 11 (late iii or early iv/A.D.Y; cf. Marr τ. ; 46 TÉTDUNEY

3. The

| but

ἐπώλησεν

phenomenon

Di.

of transfer of present

endings

Ic perfect

is also attested

outside

the

papyri (cf, yeyoves, reri pakec quoted by Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, p. 767). 4. For the euphonic changes ^. For the attestation

pp.

of the perfect

forms

of the middle-passive

in Attic see Smsth,

perfects

1532-3.

214

in the Ptolemaic

Gr. Gr., papyri

$3 400-411, sce Mavyscr,

PERFECT

(4)

ἀριθμέω:

fhid.,

ἡρίθμημε

WISE

- PASSIVE

$§ 452 (4) - 452 (13)

P.Oxy. 84, 7 (A.D. 316), with epryan| ular (2nd hand)

22.

(5) δηλόω: δὲ δήλωται B.G.U. 741, 35-6 (A.D. 143-144); |mprö]Jeöykwra: ἢ Flor. 47, 13 (A.D. 213-216); wpodedyAwrar C.P.R. 19, 16 (A.D. 330): cf. προδεδήλουται M.Chrest. 361, 12 {A.D. 300). δεδήλωνται

P.Lond.

1201,

(113

tin

P.Amh.

8.c.);

full}

(6)

διαιτάω : διήτησαι

(7)

δύναμαι;

2

(for

δεδύνημαι

(116 31,

8.C.); 17

P.Oxr.

1869,

P.Land.

1204,

9

rob),

(vi or

3

(22

(9)

vii/A.D.].

-o- inserted

εἴλκυσμαι with inserted -o- as in Attic; see Mayser, i*, pp. 96 and 153.

λαμβάνω:

ἐμπεριεί

[28]

B.C.).

τεδύνηται ( - de-) P.Jews 1915, 26 (c. A.D. 330-340). Forms with are attested in the Ptolemaic papyri: see Mayser, i*, p. 155. (8) ἕλκω:

27;

g.c.).

δεδιήτησαι)

P.Oxy.

δεδήζλωνται)

(88

with retention of the -p-: ἀνείλημπται

λημπται

B.G.U.

194,

14-15

(A.D.

P.Oxy.

899, 37 (A.D. 200);

177).

(10) λέγω: (a) εἴρηται B.G.U. 836, 12 (A.D. 527-565); P.Oxv. 136, 34 (A.D. 583): 129, 7; 1165, 4 (both vi/A.D.): 1843, 0 (vi or vii /A.D.); 138, 28; 30 (A.D. 610-611); eipnre P.Oxy. 1862, 33 (vit/A.D.); (properly) P.Oxy. 1864, 8 (vii: A.D.); P.Lond. 77, 74 (end of vi/A.D.]; 1338, 5; 34 (A.D. 709); 1350, 9; 1357, Q9; 1380,

15; 23

27,

(all A.D.

710);

emipnray

74

B.c.);

P.Oxy.

rat

P.Tebt.

(b)

λέλεκται

P.Lond.

(c)

διείλεκται

(Of

(Il) μετρέω: μέτρημε

(113

1338,

22-3;

καταμεμέτρηται

(A.D.

διαλέγομαι)

μεμέτρημαι

fbid.,

15

P.Freib,

709);

B.G.U.

P.Amh.

P.Oxy.

P.Oxy.

138,

7, 6

(251

5

35

26,

14

(104

(12) ῥώννυμι : see

Mayser,

i,

p.

B.C.);

1-2

&.C.);

P.Par. 43,

ἔρρωσαι P.Cairo B.C.); ἔρρω[ σαι

eppwraı

P.Grenf.

1488, 16-17; eppwpeßa

3

τι

(A.D.

(A.D.

ii 36, 21

12

123);

107,

Zen.

50426,

4

(A.D.

185):

[pel -

παραμεμέτρημαι

PJbid.,

7.

cf. μεμετρήσθημεν 396, 6 (A.D. 186?),

P. Mich. 395 (i), 5 a confusion of the

B.c.). t34;

also

P.Grenf.

(95 B.c.):

(both

710).

(11 /A.D.).

ἔρρωμαι

ii 36, 6

P.Cairo

P.Giss,

Zen.

39251,

1

(232

B.C.);

59251,

1

(252

(95 B.C.).

Zen. 59021, 2 (258 B.C); 59036, P.Eleph, 13, 1 (223 or 222 B.C.).

1582,

P.Cairo

(154

12

mpoerpn:

B.c.).

B.G.U. 579, 5 (A.D. 203); (A.D. 183): so also μεμετρηθϑ ) P.Mich. perfect and aorist passive. P.Rein.

1350,

v/A.D.);

610-611).

(A.D. 220-221];

μεμετρήμεθα

neuer[p|nvrac

16 (late

(A.D.

1080,

104,

2125,

1873,

32

9 (257

20, 25

(beg. of ii/A.D.];

P.Oxr.

ii/A.D.). 3 (260-230

B.c.);

59036,

10 (257

B.c.);

SB 6Ho|,

lui/R.c.).

ἔρρωσθαι

(

- -aBe)

ἔρρωνται

P.Oxr.

(13) ogueioo:

P.Par.

1252

43,

(verso

ceanlpelwpat)

0

(154

ii), 37 so

B.C.).

(A.D.

288-295).

abbreviated

215

as

a

See

rule:

also sec

154. P.Oxv.

243,

46

§§ 452 (13) - 454

PEHRIPHRASTIC

PERFECT

(A.D. 79): 713, 43 (A.D. 97}; P.Tebr. 296, 22 (A.D. 123); 374. 26 P.Gen. 201, 26; etc. (A.D. 170); B.G.U. 46, verso (A.D. 193); etc. (14) τελωνέω : rereAlarnra) abbreviated in “receipts”.

453. From the occurrences sions follow:

B.G.U.

453,

τὸ (A.D.

(A.D.

131);

144): etc. [t appears usually

of the perfect passive in papyri certain conclu-

(1) The 2nd person plural is not frequent, and when it occurs (three times in our collection: ἔρρωσθαι, προείρησθαι, πεποίησθαι) it ends. with -a« apparently because of confusion with the three persons of the singular and the 3rd person of the plural. (2)

εἴρηται appears in papyri from the vi/a.n. onwards.

(3)

The 3rd

person

plural

xara: ; elsewhere -vra«

and

in -ara« appears occasionally

only

in the stereotyped rera-

periphrastic

(see next chapter).

(4). The -s- appears regularly in stems which originally ended in -o- (as τελέω: reAeo-) or after euphonic changes occurring upon the addition of the endings. This -s- is occasionally inserted by extension, as in ἐπιμέμνησμαι P.Oxy. 791 (c. A.D. 1), συνῆρσμαι (see 452(2) etc.). This extension of -o- is further attested in some active forms: διαιγνωσκέναι SB 7601 (c), 12 (A.D. 135); yeyóvaapev B.G.U. 1198 (ii), 13 (5-4 B.c.). Conversely, omission of the -o- is attested in κατασεσημὴμ μένα (for -σεσημασμένα) P.Oxv. 117:

(5)

Two verbs of our collection, that

the persons

of the perfect

is ποιέω and peorruja, occur in all

passive.

Periphrastie

Perfect

454. In Attic perfect middle- passive formed a periphrastic 3rd person plural of stems ending in a consonant or of stems adding -o-. This practice is followed by the papyri, especially the Ptolemaic,! and is often extended beyond the limits of the Classical language. So in addition to that of the 3rd person plural, periphrasis ıs also attested in the 3rd person singular, e.g. ἐστὶν... ἀπηργμένη P.Lille 26, 2 (ii/n.c.); ἐστὶν δὲ menaibevuéivos P.S.I. 124.

15-16

(lj B.c.);

etc. Periphrasis

1. Sec

Mayser,

Dehr -Funk,

ıı!,

$ 352

περισυνκεχωρημένον...

can

p.

be also formed

223

(with

(with ht.}.

with

For

ἐστι"

the perfect

periphrastie

Diti. 216

P.Tor.

1

(1). 24

(116

B.C.):

participle active. (For

conjugations

in N.T

sec Blass-

TIME.

ASPECT.

AND

OCUURRENCES

OF

THE

PERFEGT

δὲ 454.

458

further discussion see under “Periphrastic Pluperfect”, 501 ff.). Moreover, forms of εἶναι with a present participle can form periphrases analogous to those in the system of the perfect.! 455. Periphrastic forms are attested outside the indicative. They occur more frequently in the Ptolemaic than in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, where periphrasis is confined to such examples as: ἐὰν...

|]...

1

μεμηνυκώς

P.Tebt.

297,

11-12

(c.

A.D.

123);

ἐὰν

δὲ

Fr

(for

#)

| πρ͵ατετεκνωκζώΣ)ς B.G.U. v, 45 {it/A.D.): tv' ὦ | evepyernadvos P.Oxy. 2234, 24-5 (A.D. 31); ἵν᾽ ὦ εὖ ἐνενεργετημέν[ος] P.Lond. 177, 26 (A.D. 40-41); P.Ox). 486, 16 (A.D. 131); iv’ ὦ εὐεργετη μένη P.Oxy. 2411, 37-8 (prob. c. A.D. 173); ἵν᾿ d|u]er ums |σσο]ῦ εὐεργ(ετημένοι) P.Lond. 363, 9 (late i or ii/A.D.); etc. occurring persistently in "petitions"; c & βεβοηθημένος P.Oxy. 2342, 32 (A.D. 7

102); similarly P.Mich. vos SB 7987,

(1)

11

174,

Periphrasis of the future

H.

TIME,

19-22 (A.D.

(A.D. 81-96);

ASPECT,

γεγραμμένα

perfect

AND

145-147]; ἐὰν ... 1...

ἧς περισπασμέ-

ein B.G.U.

(A.D.

326 (i), 15

189-194).

is often attested in the papyri (see 525).

OCCUHKENCES

OF

THE

PERFECT

456. The precise nature of the notion of time in the perfect is unclear. Perhaps at first it was just the perfect tense and was timeless (analogous to the “Aoristic Present" and the "Gnomic Aorist”). By this hypothesis it would have come, by degrees, to be used only for present time, a restriction which

the rise of the pluperfect

would

have solidified and made clear.

457. The aspect of the perfect combines in itself that of the present (which is durative) and that of the aorist (which is punctiliar, regarded as finished), and thus it denotes the continuance of the effect of a completed action. This is the picture of the perfect as retained by Greek from Indo-European,

but later (within the Greek) this aspectual notion could be expressed by the present indicative of ἔχω and the aorist participle. Because of this use, ἔχω became an auxiliary (see LS/ s.v., B iv) and so constituted the starting point of the periphrastic perfect active.

458. The perfect is still in full use in the Ptolemaic papyri*(as well as in the N.T.). and conforms

I. For

particulars

2. This chapter

see

almost entirely to late Classical and

Blass-Debr.-Funk.

is included

in my

book

Hellenistic usage.

3 333. Studies

217

in the

Gr.

Lang.,

pp.

τ

ff.

x 458

TIME.

ASPECT,

AND

OCCURRENCES

OF

THE

PEREECYE

The ill/g.c. papyri show roughly an equal proportion of the number of the aorists and perfects !n use; that is in 42 letters of this date there are 78 aorists and 91 perfects. But when we examine the official documents we find the aorist used more frequently than the perfect. Thus,

in 43 texts of W.Chrest.

+ M.Chrest. there are 66 aorists and 45 perfects. In the ii and i/B.c. papyri the perfect obtained

a wide currency

in comparison

with the other tenses in

the indicative. This is due (a) to the repeated use of the same le. ἀπέσταλκα,

γέγονα,

γέγραφα,

δέδωκα,

εἴληφα,

εἴρηκα,

perfect forms,

ἐνήνοχα,

ἕστηκα,

ἔσχηκα, πέπρακα, τέθεικα, etc., and (^) to the fact that the perfect had begun to compete with the aortst on whose territory it had trespassed.! In examining the numbers which arise, we find that in 24 letters of the in nc. there are 20 aorists and 66 perfects (but in 46 official documents of W.Chrest. | M.Chrest. of the same period there are 93 aorists and 56 perfects), and

in

14

letters

proportion

of the i/B.c.

agrees

with

there are

17

the results obtained

W.Chrest. 4 M.Chrest. dated from perfects. Counting the aorists and we find that there is a great

aorists and from

20

26 perfects. ( This

ollicial

documents of

the ijn.c., that is 16 aorists and 27 perfects of the post-Ptolemaic papyri,

decrease

in the occurrences of the perfect

and

increase in the frequency of the aorist. The ratio of the aorist to perfect is 2 to r. By ΠῚ and iv/a.n. the perfect shows a considerable reduction and in the collection of Christian

papyri of this date by G. Ghedini

(containing

44 letters) there are the perfects: {(παρα-) δέδωκα (XI 11}. εἴρηκα (XXXIX 10), €erjvoxa. (Xi 7), ἀπέσταλκα (XXVI 13), εὕρηκα (il 7). ἡπάντηκα (XXXIX 19), προπτέθεικα

(XXIX 30).

eroAunka we

find

(xliv

UAT.

from

P. Sef,

i,

only

ρημαι,

οἶδα

(four

times), pepe nua,

7).

12

8 altogether.

perfects:

δέδωκα,

tnepyda yea,

In

28 "AU,

πρόκειται,

letters

of

γέγονα,

πέπονθα,

the

προὴ-

and

84 aorists,and this gives an aorıst to perfect ratio of 7 to 1. In the Abimnnacus Archive (iv/a.n.) we find the following data: in yo letters there are 113 aorists, 28 perfects; in r4 petitions 44 aorists, 22 perfects; and in 8 contracis there are 35 aorists, 17 perfects, the ratio of aorist to perfect for the total number being roughly 3 to ı. The apparent increase of the use of the perfect relating to the aorist in the iii/s.p. papyr! is due to the repetition of the same verbs. e.g. (ava/ém-}déswxa is used 18 times and οἶδα 17. Thus the total number of the perfects becomes 34 If we ignore the repeated forms

and this gives a ratio

of aorist to perfect

the same as that of the in /a.n.

of roughly 6 to

ας almost

papyri.

|. Fhe interaction of these two tenses is wellillustrated by the introduction of the endings of the aorist

into

perfect’s

inflesion.

See

especially

2148

"The

endings

of the perfect”

p44

IT.

OCCURRENCES

OF

THE

§ 459

PERFECT

459. The occurrences of these two tenses in 1,194 texts (private and official documents) are tabulated in the following diagram: Date

by | Letters ! | Private ?

century

Public ?

Private and!

| TOTAL

Occurrences

documents | documents | Official documents

Aorists | Perfects

42 in/ B.C.

13

31 43

129

24 7

11/B.c.

23

46

100

14.

78

g!

22

9

48 | | 66 |

45 45

20

60

15

5

12

32

| 93 |

56

17

26

10

18

i/B.c.

6 20

50

18 11 1/A.d.

19

58

106

53 11/A.D.

61 133 Witk.

10

16

27

30

20

7

24

57

18

| 93 | 9o 154 |

23

1. From

3

Epist.. 1-72 (68 letters examined)

+

other letters selected. 2. From

P. Sel. i, 1-87;

3. From

P.Sel. ii.

^. From

M.Chrest.

+

170-200 +

P.Ahinn. 44-65.

W.Chrest.

219

270

P.Sel.188-169

56

61

45

153

57

1 390

130

+ P.Abinn.

3-43 + 200

§ 459

OCCURRENCES

OF

ΕΓ

THE

PERFECT

[oma rt | TOTAL] onen documents Aorists | Perfects

99 17 iii/A.D.

47 70

233

80 27 iv/A.D.

21 54

182

14 2 v/A.D,

5

8

15

29

| 14

vi/A.D.

[I

15 25 vii-

| 3

viii/A.D.

TOTAL

55

3

| 384

127

227

220

9

40

456

1,194

III

56

44 117

23 41

222

90

234

55

92

48.

58

23

209

65

26

7

3

4

14

10

27

9

35 |

12

57

23

22

17

50

25

gt

22

12

8

18

7

20

6

MEANING

ANID USES

OF

THE

PERFECT

SE 460 - 461

460. The above figures show at once the different character of private and official documents in the use of the two tenses. For example, private letters favour the use of the aorist throughout the time of the papyri. From the numbers of the occurrences, we can see that the aorist was gradually

strengthened. while the perfect was becoming less frequent. Some perfects which came down to later times consist of stereotyped forms which were established in official documents. In Byzantine times the perfect seems to have been replaced by the aorist to a great extent. This is due (a) to the aoristic sense which the perfect had developed, and (b) to the perfective meaning which the aorist possessed. Consequently, the two

tenses became

identical in meaning. Writers had lost consciousness of the difference between aorist and perfect, and this is even reflected in compositions of men of letters. Hesychius, for example, often interprets a perfect by referring to its corresponding aorist (cf. ayjoya: ἤνεγκα, avaréraAkev: ἀνέτειλεν, ἀνηρήμεθα, ἠρωτήθημεν,

ἀπῆρκεν.

ἀπεδήμησεν,

βεβίωκα'

ἔζησα,

etc.). The

intermixture

of the two tenses brought about the disappearance of the perfect for the simple reason that the aorist could be adapted to the verbal system more readily than the perfect. In special cases, however, the language makes use of the periphrastic perfect, a formation which in fact has its origin in Classical Greek, but it did not gain favour in the language of the papyri.

It.

MEANING

AND

USES

OF

THE

PERFECT

461. The basic meaning expressed by the perfect tense is that of Attic: that is, the perfect denotes an action already accomplished for the present time (the action

stands,

in other

words,

complete),

or

still

remaining

in

its

consequences. In the Jatter case (the resultative perfect} the tense is narrative in itself, but is used to underline the consequences of the act, in which the writer is pre-eminently interested; thus the perfect becomes emphasis,

suitable

for

ordinary

conversation,

and

as

such

the tense of

1s found

often

in Attic. This usage is more extensively represented in the Koine compositions, among which the papyrus texts hold the first place because of their less elaborate style.

Classificatton

nf

the

Perfect

The perfects found tn the papyri can be classed into the following categories: 221

88 462 - 464

INTENSIVE

PERFECT

462. Intensive perfect: probably the original use of the tense. The perfect in active or passive form with certain verbs of emotion, state of mind, or condition (βεβούλευμαι, γέγονα, εἴθισμαι, εἴωθα, ἔρρωμαι, ἥσχυμαι, κεῖμαι (mpóκειται), οἶδα, κέκτημαι, πέπεισμαι, πεπλήρωμαι, πέποιθα, τέθνηκα etc.) has

wholly the sense of the present. The punctiliar component of its meaning is dropped and only the durative remains, the loss being due to the change in meaning of the verbs. (The aoristic present and the proleptic aorist express kindred εἰ

αὐτὸς

τε

notions). ὑγιαίνεις

ἐστίν) P.Cairo βαιδέως

pe

Zen.

τῶι

160

ἥσχυνται

ἐν τῶι

ἐπιδεδο Ϊμένον

Tops

τὰ

59426,

5...

B.C.);

καὶ

βασιλεῖ

πεπείραμαι πλεῖν

E.g.

εἰς πᾶν

Anıra

2-3

gor

(260-250

| τὸ

σοι

ὑπόμνη[μαὴ

P.Sel.

ἰδ.

101, 8-9

P.Tebr.

γέγονεν

P.Petrie

χρήπιμον μοι

λόγον

B.C.); ἐάν γὰρ

συσταθήσεσβαι

| συμμεῖξαί

ulm)

kara

58,

n

Ul

ἐμαυτὸν 25-6; (130

28-30

(elsewhere

σὺ

παραγένηι,

(1).

4-5

ἐπιδιῆοναι

(in

yap

βεβουλεύμεθα

B.C.];

als

καὶ

λόγον

πέπεισμαι

(mid.

P.Par.

προσπέπτωκεν B.C.);

KATO

ill 'B.C.):

49,

7-9

Παῶν

(c.

ava!-

ἐἑκαπάᾶάσαι

τὸ

ἐν τεταλμεβ] al

P.Grenf. i 30, 3-4 (103 B.C.]; καλῶς be γέγονεν τὸ ταχὺ , avrov ἐλθεῖν P.Oxy. 743, 41-2 (2 B.C.) ; d οὐκ ἥωθα ἔσθειν P.Giss. Bo, 6 (ii /A.D.); ἀνάγκη μοι γεγένηται

δηλῶσε P.Lond. 403, 6 (c. A.D.

346).

346);

κέκτημαι

ἀρούρας

P.Lond. 238, 5-6

(A.D.

463. Though these perfects are divorced from their own present stems, they have not all become independent presents, for sometimes the notion of past time is underlying, while at other times a resultative force of the verb can be perceived. Nevertheless ofda, the old present perfect, is preserved to a great extent, and ἔρρωμαι is repeatedly used in the Ptolemaic papyri under the stereotyped expression ec ἔρρωσπι... ἔρρωμαι δὲ καὶ αὐτός. 464. There are some exegetically interesting examples of the intensive perfect in the papyri. This is the case where two actions are performed, the former expressed by the perfect, and the latter by the present or future. The perfect expresses a present state, the present or future, that which con-

tinues from now on. E.g. τέθειμαι τὸ | ὁμολόγημα καὶ εὐδοκῶ πᾶσι τοῖς zpoκειμένοις) P.Oxy. 725, 61-2 (A.D. 183) = I have made

this agreement and

from now on I will consent to all the aforesaid provisions; παρείληφα τὸν παῖδα... | [xat] ἀπογράψομαι P.Oxy. 1206, 20-1 (A.D. 335) = I hereby ceive the boy... and 1 shall register him. The meaning expressed by the fect! is also underlying an immediate connection of the past with the ture, a sense which could be given by the present tense. E.g. περιέχων |. English also uses a perfect

in this formula 2422

"1 have

received

the sum

of...

reperfu| «ws

EXTENSIVE

OR

EFFECTIVE

ὑποτέτακται (= ὑποτάσσεται) P.Oxy.

PERFECT

ἂξ 464 - 467

129, 3-4 (vi/a.n.) = couched as follows.

(1) Examples of the intensive perfect are also attested in the Koine writers. Polybius, for instance, employs the form ἔσχηκα, πέπονθα and πεποίηκα in a present sense,’ and so also the O.T. and the N.T.? 465. Extensive or effective:

denotes

the continuing

effect on

subject

or ob-

ject of an action which was begun in the past and may or may not have been completed by the time of speaking or writing. The perfect does not say exactly when the action began, though this may be gathered from the context. The implication here is that, even if the action itself has been completed, its effect, at least, continues into the present and frequently beyond the time of speaking or writing into the future. E.g. πεφύτευται δὲ wai ἡ ἄμπε]λος P. Petrie i 29, 4-5 (ill /B.C.) = the vineyard too has been planted; βέβρεκται yap | πᾶν P.S.J. 422, 24-5 {iil /B.c.) = everything is wet; καθότι... γέγραφεν P.Hib, 66, 3 (228 B.C.); καὶ ἀπόντος pov πεῴφρόντικα ὑπὲρ σοῦ P.Par. 45, 2 [153 B.C.]; περὶ ὧν παρα] γέγονεν, ὑποδείξας P.Goodspeed 4.

{1-|2ὼ

μέληται

(mid.

P.Grenf.

ii/B.c.);

ii 36,

γηται P.Ryl, 233, 5-6

οὐθὲν

11-13

| ἡμῖν

(05

κακὸν

B.C.);

ἐπύησεν,

τὰ μέλαθρα

GAA’ ἐκ

τῶν!

τῶν θυρίδων

ἐναντίον

... 1...

(ti/a.D.); οὔτε yap εἴἸρηχε ἡμ[1}ν ἀγόμενος

ἐπιμε-

ἡρμολό-

ἵνα ἀπολυθῇ,

adda αἰ φνιδίζ. Jos εἴρηχεν ἡμῖν : σήμερον: γνώσομαι yapiec ἀληθῶς λέγι P.Far. 123, 19-24 (c. A.D. 100) and οἶδα yap ὅτι ποιεῖς | πλέον τὰ εἴρηκά σοι P.Lond. 413, 20-1 [c. A.D. 346); διμήνου δὲ 9pynxa ὧδε P.Oxy. 1160, t4 (late iii-early iv/A.D.). The form εἴληφα (especially when compounded with the prepositions σύν, ἐξ, mapa) gives a good example of the meaning of the extensive perfect, as it often expresses the sense of ἔλαβον combined with ἔχω.

466. A particular use of the extensive perfect ts found in contracts, where the tense serves to indicate that the action is taking place now, though the

persons entering into during which ἡμοληγῷ

104, 37-9

the agreement transfer themselves to the future time

the contract ἔχειν

τὴν

is to be valid.

φερνὴν...

(92 B.C.) -

...

...

and

E.g.

καὶ τέθιμαι

i| rnv.

I have deposited

συγγρα] φὴν xv| pialy

P.Tebt.

the contract which from

now

on is to be valid forever; ameaxzgkapuev... of πεπρακότες ἐν τῇ ἐνεστώσῃ ἡμέρᾳ P.Lond. 1722, 33-4 (A.D. 573) - we the vendors are receiving... on the present day.

467. Resultative: expresses an action which took place in the past, but whose

consequences reach the present in some way, or are understood as present 1. Cf.

A.

Schoy,

pp.

75

2, Cf.

Moutton-Turner,

ff. pp. 82

f.

225

PERFECT

RESULTATIVE

$3 46-7470

s, it is the importance of the action for the sake of emphasis. In other word enting its results as existing before that the writer wants to stress by pres the Attic orators

was already popular in our eyes. The resultative perfect in the rtance) and continued to be so (to indicate an action of special impo od. The N.T. writers use only a per-

less literary texts of the Hellenistic peri by tradition, the same verbs being fect which is already well established ar, is fond of the resultative perfect, employed repeatedly.! John, in particul characterized by his love of emphaan effect of his peculiar style, which is to stress the abiding significance of sis and solemnity, and his tendency everything.” ect is frequent, especially in the let468. In the papyri, the resultative perf execution of an order, and therefore ters where the sender reports on the it is often found in the 1st person. E.g. δεδώκαμεν

PSE

12

333,

(256

B.c.);

δέδωκα

| Πτολεμαίωι

τητ]α (o]9 Bavavoiar P.Lond. 28, 6-8 (c. 162 B.C.): ἐλευθερᾳιό τηκα (Spaxpas) ἀνθρώποις P.Par. 49. 3-4 (c. 160 8.C.); ἀπέσ

τὰς

| (Bpaxpas)

| erredeı|n]a πᾶσιν 9 P.Par. 59, 1-2

| τὴν βοῦν TaÀdv | ruv σίτου dp(taBas} B' Ibid., 6; τετίμηκα (159 B.C.); ἡγώρακα λεsee especially P.Oxy. 1482 (ii /A.D.): τρία juvav P.Par. 58, 3-5 (154 B.C.); 528 . P.Oxy μέν 7-8; κατέφθακα 10, ἀποτέθεικα 21, λικμήκαμεν 3; 5, menoxar» κεν 20; xdv με 13-14; TemU rev 18-19; πέπρα (ii /A.D.): οὐκ ἡλιμέμ)ε II, καικίνη P.Oxy. 114, 3-4 (il Or iil /A. D.) ; ἐξέτακα xaréaraké ue 21; πεπλήρωκα Tor | τόκον

P.Lond.

404, 8

(c. A.D.

346); so also

ém8ébuxa

very

common

in petitions.

in the "Extensive" category 469. The resultative perfect is often included N.T. Greek. The attestation of the tense by scholars dealing with it in the two uses under particular of the tense in papyri allows us to separate the ng effect (= extensive), headings in order to distinguish between the lasti Continual and Perfective and the emphasis of the effect (— resultative): cf. Aorists, 341, 335 respectively. feature of late Greek. 410. Aoristic: This function of the perfect is not a τεκμαίρομαι Even Plato in Crito 44a has given the perfect an aoristic sense: νυκτός where the ἔκ τινος ἐνυπνίου, ὃ ἑώρακα ὀλίγον πρότερον ταύτης τῆς have normally statement of a definite point of time in the past would required the use of the aorist.? In fact,

I. 2. CT. Moulton-Turner,

Socrates

meant

to

emphasize the

p. 83.

3. Notice that Attic often uses the perfect of verbs denoting “to see”. or “to hear . Sec Mandilaras. Studies in the Gr. Lane., pp. 15 ff.

22

AORISTIC

PERFECT

&§ 470 - 472

present vividness of his vision, and this thought made Robertson call this perfect "Dramatic Historical", and separate it from his "Aoristic", the “mere punctiliar preterite".! This distinction of Robertson’s is rather superficial, because in most cases the aoristc perfect is characterized by a "Dramatic" nuance. On the basis of this point of view we treat both Robertson's categories under the above heading. 471. It is not always easy to detect the aoristic function of the perfect, especially because the writer's point of view may often differ from our own. In addition, by misleading ourselves with parallels in other languages we are likely to give the aoristic perfect too great an extension. In any case, we must bear in mind that the aoristic perfect is not merely a preterite,

but has something in particular to underline. For instance, in P.Oxy.

1676

(iii/A.D.) a certain Herculanus writes to a relative of his (probably his sister).

and complains that she did not come

to his boy's birthday : οὐ παρεγένου

is τὰ γενέσια | τοῦ παιδίου μου (11-12). The reason is (as Herculanus states) that she might have had more important bus'ness; that is why she neglected them: ἀλλὰ πάντως xpeirrolva εἶχες" διὰ τοῦτο ὑπερη φάνηκας ἡμᾶς (15-17). The perfect ὑπερηφάνηκας seems at first sight somewhat awkward, as the writer refers plainly to events of past time. Obviously, Herculanus is annoyed because of his sister’s absence, and, by using the perfect, he wants to indicate that his feeling of having been shunned still persists. In another letter, P. Mich. 514,9-11 (iii/A.D.), we read : οὐκ ἔλαβα αὐτοῦ τὰ δηπόσειτα ὅτι

ἠσθένηϊκα “1 did not receive his deposit because I was ill”. The sense in this context is that the writer states the reason for failing to receive the deposit, and

that was

the fact that

he

was

ill, a situation

to the past. Does the use of the perfect 472. The context

alone, as we have

here

which

imply

seen in both

that

passages,

refers

"he

obviously

is still ill"?

is not sufficient

to permit us to take a given perfect regarded in the following situations : with an aorist symbolization, (6) when of the past action to present time, and

as aoristic. The perfect can be thus (a) when the perfect is connected the context denotes no relationship (c) when there is indication of past

time. Criterion (a) is not always

sentences

valid;

where

aorists and

perfects

are used side by side must be treated with caution because the writer may be indicating a special meaning; (6) is often uncertain because the context alone

1. Cf. Robertson,

pp. BgB-qo2.

223 B.

G.

Mandilaras.

The

Verh in the

Greek

Nom-Literarv

Pupyri

5

δὲ 472 - 474

AORISTIC

PERFECT

may mislead us. There remains criterion (c), which is strong enough to trans-

fer the perfect to the sphere of the aorist. Indeed, the perfect tends to become a mere preterite when a definite point of time in the past is stated or otherwise implied: ἀπέσταλκα αὐτὸν πρὸς σὲ τῆι § Tov Φαρμοῦθι P.Petrie i$ 2 (2), 5-6 (221 BC. τῆι δὲ ιἰθ τοῦ αὐτοῦ μηνὸς | ἤλκυσμαι λαμπαδάρχης B.G.U. 1256, 10-11 (ii 5,6]; ἡ ré | δὲ) ἐντολὴ | ἐγδέδοται ἡμῖν eis τὴν ἃ τοῦ ᾿Αϑύρ P.Par. 65, 18-19 (146 B.C.);

τῆι

yas... Aoujevor δέδωκε) P.Tebt.

κ τοῦ

Φαῶφι

...

| κατακέκλυκεν

ἀπὸ

τῆς

«tA, P.Tebt. 49, 4 ff. (113 g.C.); τῆι ἢ

ὑπαρχούσης

τοῦ 008

pat βασιλικῆς

... |...

IT. ὁ émixka -

wor... 5... ἐξεϊλήλυθεν em τὴν |... 7] μητέρα μου... δέδωκα ||. αὐτῆι πληγὰς | mArous.... 5... καὶ ! κινδύνων (for κινδυνεύει)ϑ τῶι ζῆν 283,

5-15

(93

or

60

B.c.);

λελικμήκαμεν

τὴν

xpiv

...

τῇ

η

P.Oxy.

ι482, 3-4 (il /A.D.); ἐλήλυθα τῇ ς΄ τοῦ ᾿Επεὶῴφ | μηνὸς καὶ ἐξεκενώσαμεν τῇ m τοῦ αὐτοῦ μηνός B.G.U. 27, 6-8 (ii or iii /A.D.): doa ὠφείλαμεν σιτικὰ δημὸ ae, μεμετρήκαμεν τῷ [Tau | [unn] B.G.U. 515,5-7 (A.D. 193); Cf. ἀνατέτικα ( > ava-

τέθεικα)

|. τὴν

στήλην μηνὶ Χοιάκ Gr. Inscr. (Milne) 9282,

12-13

(iv/A.D.). Notice

mapaxAnBeis, κύριε, μνήσθητί pou τῆς δεήσεως As | κατ᾽ ὄψιν σοι πεποίημαι P.Giss. Univ.-Bibl. 21, 3-5 (it/A.D.) = I beg you, my lord, to remember my request which I make to you before your face: the writer of this letter is apparently

referring to that time in the past when he himself asked Heracleides (the reciptent of the letter now) for a certain favour, of which he reminds Heracleides through the letter; cf. κατ᾽ ὄψιν i [86] σοι ἐνετειλάμην P.Oxy. 1070, 15-16 (iit /A.D.). In B.G.U. 874. 1 (Byz.) the aoristic sense of the perfect is clear: ἄλλοτε γεγράφηκα (sir) ὑμῖν = once I wrote to you. This last example confirms the reading:

ws

καὶ

dAAo

γεγράφηκα

αὐτῇ

P.Oxy,

1858,

6

[vi or

vii/A.D.).

473. The perfect is used as a narrative tense especially in letters of second century

A.D.

E.g.

γινώσκιν σε [θὲ] Aw ἔτι (= ὅτι) εὐθὺς ἐπιβέβη «a te ᾿Αλεξάνδρηαν, εὐθέως ἔμελκε ( - μεμέληκε) ἐμαὶ περὶ : τοῦ mpay{a}paros οὗ ue ἡ ρώτηκες P.Oxy. 1155, 2-7 (A.D. 104}; γινώσκειν ole] θέλω ὅτι διὰ τοσούτον Xpovov οὐκ u πέσταλκα σοι

P.Oxy. 1481, 2-3 (early ii/A.D.):see also the use of the perfect in P.Oxy. 528; 1482 (both ii/A.D.) where the perfecis beiray an eoristic sense parallel to their resultative

force.

Also

ii or early iii/A.D.). In fulfil a special purpose,

ἐξερχόμενος

petitions

δὲ λόγον

too,

to emphasize της τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως αὐτῷ ὁρμώμενος τείαν P.Oxy, 1204, 19-20 (A.D. 299).

the

μοι

δέδωκας

use of the

P.Oxr.

aoristic

1483,

perfect

4-5

(late

seems

to the act, as Inunrpiaros τις |’ Okfvpryyetτετόλμηκεν αὐτὸν ὀνομάζειν εἰς Öeranper

(1) It appears that during the ii/4.n., in particular, the perfect competed with the aorist, and this conflict becomes apparent in their morpho logy too

(see 418).

474. The aoristic perfect is also found 226

with certain verbs such as γέγονα,

|

EPISTOLARY

PERFECT

$8 474 - 477

εἴρηκα, εἴληφα, ἐλήλυθα, πέπρακα and εὔρηκα which to lose their durative meaning, and become merely Greek βρῆκα from εὕρηκα). No strict uniformity can for these verbs, as they may be used thus ın one writer,

are particularly liable punctiliar (cf. Modern be suggested, however, though not in another.

475. Epistolary perfect: an idiom found exclusively in the papyri,! and expressing the sense of the aoristic perfect combined with the meaning of the resultative perfect. In the epistolary perfect, as in the epistolary aorist, the writer imagines himself to be present when the letter is read. The perfect, however,

stresses

the presence of the writer more

than

the aorist; in

other words, it removes not only the time of writing to the time of reading, but also the writer himself to the side of the reader. Thus areoraA[x]a σοι Φίλωνα φέροντα ἐπιστολήν P.Lille 17, 3-4 (iii/B.c.) means "I sent you Philon,

and here he is bearing my letter”. Similarly καθάπερ [éypa ]/as, ἀπέσταλκά σοι P.Petrie iii 42 (Ὁ 9), 2-3 (mid. iti/B.c.)— I sent it to you — and now you have got it — according to your request. 476. The most common verbs in the epistolary perfect are: ἀπέσταλκα, yéypaba, πέπομφα corresponding to the epistolary aorist of the same verbs.

Mayser, ii!, p. 183, mentions also ἀνείληφα, δέδωκα, ἔσχηκα, ὑποτέθεικα attested mostly in agreements. The perfect here is simply resultative, and must be separated from the perfect of the former group, which is found only in letters (thence the term

"Epistolary").

As resultative, the perfect expresses

the completion of an action, the beginning of which is put in the past (the time of reading). The epistolary perfect may have begun as a deliberate usage by educated writers (cf. [Isoc.] 1,2), but by the time of the papyri it has become customary and is used unconsctously as can be seen from the fact that it only occurs with certain verbs. 477. The epistolary perfect is followed, as a rule, by the future indicative, or a final clause (usually tva εἰδῆτε), or a final infinttive, or a final participle. E.g. γέγραφ᾽ avra]

iueiv,

tva

eiönra

| AroAkwriw:

σέ, Γλαυκίαν... χαριεῖ viv

1. Some #

weak *

aor

|...

ἀκούσας

ἐπειπέπομφα

aneoraAka a

οὖν

of

tovde

τὸν

r

Th

L1

-re)

P.Par. P.Par,

κοινολογησόμενόν αὐτοῦ

| αὐτὸν

traces

[—

παραγγείληις καί, mavra

the epistolary

περὶ

ὧν

συνλέξαι

perfect

Anyone. r

227

43.

4

(154

46,16-17

σοι

8.C.);

(153

γέγραφα

B.C.);

P.Goodspeed 4, 7-9

mapa γέγονεν,

ὑποδείξας

P.Oxy.

30-1

(2

in

Attic.

are

743.

attested

σοι,

ὅπ[ως

ἀπεστάλκαμεν

(mid. Ibid.,

πρὸς

ii/s.c.); 10-12;

ra

B.C.).

Notice

an

Cf.

|Isoc.]

1.2

$8 477 - 481

ITERATIVE

excessive

usc of

the

epistolary

ἐπιστολῆι P.Cairo Zen. 59036,

PERFECT

perfect

20-1

in

(257

ὧν

yeypadauer

σοι

ἐν

τῆι

ἐτέ[ρ]αι

'

B.c.).

478. In the post-Ptolemaic papyri the epistolary perfect does not appear as frequently as in earlier times; this is du? to the general decay of the perfect. The idea of the epistolary perfect was then expressed (a) by the present: γράφω,

πέμπω,

τῶ, θέλω

(απο-,

em-)

στέλλω,

or

(σε γιγνώσκειν), παρακαλῶ

expressions,

(b)

the

aorist:

mainly

which

ἔγραψα,

by

the

made

ἔπεμψα,

verbs

δέομαι,

up common

ἀπέστειλα

ἐρω-

epistolary

and

the

idiom

ἔσπευσα (ἐσπούδασα) γράψαι σοι and (c) by the future πέμψω, e.g. aul τ]ὴν |óé σοι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν πέμψω διὰ Σύρου P.Oxy. 1062, 11-12 (ii/a.n.), and the expressions οἵ καλῶς ποιήσεις.

479. Some

examples

of the epistolary

perfect are found

period, namely in the letters of v or vi/a.n.

in the Byzantine

E g.

ἰδού yeypagnxa τῇ | ἐξουσίᾳ aov tra δώσης αὐτῶν mpov { ὅρον) B.G.U. 1035, 14-16 (v/A.D.); apa γὰρ rn σὲ (sic: σὲ Edd.) ἀρετῇ καὶ ' τῇ μεξφταγξὺ φιλία yeγράφεκα [-- γεγράφηκα for γέγραφα)" θεὸς yàp ὗδεν ὁ ἅγιος οὐ προστασίας ἕνεκεν |

| v lel vloddexa, ἀλλὰ ἐμοὶ φέρετη (.- -raı)

ὁ ὗὖνος P.Oxy.

1872, 4-6 (vor vi/A.D.);

Similarly ἰδοὺ οὖν γέγραφα διαμαρτνρῳύμενος Umlily P.Caire Masp. 67060, 6 (vi/A.D.). The fact that the attestation is in letters written by persons of poor

education at

that

indicates

that

the

epistolary

perfect

was,

nevertheless,

common

time.

480. frerative: notion of repetition or broken continuity (cf. Iterative Imperfect) from a past moment to the moment of speaking. The perfect is often accompanied by adjuncts which underline the initial point, or some intermediate

point in the course:

οὐδέποτε Ul πα] νᾶκις

du

(ist

(1)

εἴρηκα

P.Sel.

κήκοας ἡμῶν

P.Petrie

101,

half of

2-7

ii

{2

(130

P.Hib. 78. 5-6 (G

I0],

B.C.):

I -2

(244-243

(c.

250

πολλάκις

μὲν

R.C.]);

B.c.): καθάπερ bul

yeypada

σαὶ

ἐπεὶ

πλειηνῆᾶκις

an

P.Petrie

i

i [mAeo]aor

11

ypa

{1},

-

2

iii /e.c.).

Notice that in the post-Ptolemaic papyri this iterative sense is expressed

by the aorist: moddaxlils

σὸς Eypa dia.

88, 6 (late iv/A.p.).

P.Oxr.

See

under

1070,

24-5

“Continual

(Il /A.D.) ; πυλλήκις

Aorist”

341

av ἔγμαψα

P.OM.

f.

481. Gnomic: The perfect can be used to express general asserti ons, as in Classical Greek. This use is rare in papyri, e.g. ἀνδράσι yap €owey τὰ τῆς γεωργίας P.Oxy. 899. 18 (4.n. 200). NT. has some instanc es of this use of the perfect (see Blass-Debr.-Funk, $ 344). 208

PLUPERFECT Blass-Debr.-Funk, $3 86; 437; Burton, MT, $5 89-92; Jannaris, Hist. Gr., ἐξ 1876-Bo: Mayser, i*, p. 85; ii!, pp. 207-211; Moule, /diom, p. 16; Moulton, Prol., p. 148; Moulton-Turner, p. 86; Robertson, pp. 903-5; Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, pp. 776-9; ii, p. 288.

482. Introduction. The two perfect tenses, denoting action completed in the past and in the future (i.e. pluperfect and future perfect respectively), are both built upon the perfect stem. These are not employed in Classical Greek! as frequently as the corresponding tenses in Latin, English or German, precisely because the Greeks

were not greatly concerned

with relative time.

The pluperfect had a short life, as its meaning could be expressed by other tenses such as the aorist and the imperfect? 483. The use of the pluperfect in papyri, especially the Ptolemaic, is not frequent, and the tense grows less common in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, retaining its form, for the most part, when it expresses an "Extensive" sense (see 515 f.). I.

MORPHOLOGY

484. Certain morphological subjects related to the formation of the pluperfect have been already examined in previous chapters: see under “Augment”, 231 f., "Reduplication", 416 ff. and “Morphology of the Perfect”, 433 ff. It remains to see (i) the situation of the endings of the pluperfect, (ii) the pluperfect middle-passive, and (iii) the periphrastic formations of the

tense.

The

Endings

of

the

Pluperfeet

485. Ist person singular : la) -εἰν : ἐμεμετρήκειν P.S./, 598,4 (ii /B.c.}; etc. See Mayser, i', pp. 8of. πέπυpexew P.Osl, 152,4 (i-H/A.D.); ἐσχήκειν P.Mich. 476, τὸ (early n/A.D.); A.G.U. 465 {i),6; (ii), 7 (A.D. 137); ἀπε'ληλύτειν P. Mich. 491, 7-8 (ἢ /A.D.); ἀπεστάλκειν P.Oxy. 530, 18 (ἢ /A.D.}: SB 6298, 12 liifa.D.), ἥκειν P.Gen. 31, 15 (A.D. 145146); P.Oxy. 1588, 14 (early iv/a.D.); εἰάβειν [-- εἰώθειν P.Lond. 238, 4 (A.D.

446). (δ) -nr:

φην

ἐνεδεδύκην P.S.4. 34,8,

P.Tebr.

414.

9-10

5 [254-51

B.C.]:

eic. See

wenop-

(il /A.D.).

1, Herodotus, however. shows a fondness for the (descriptive: use the imperfect in the same case. 2, Modern Greek

Mavser, i*, p. Bo:

pluperfect, but Attic writers

has only a periphrasis for the pluperfect, e.g. εἶχα δέσει "I

had tied some-

thing”. or εἶχα δεμένο “1 had something tied". The latter case. as in English, can sometimes be considered as aorist with a participle equivalent to an adjective.

221

δὲ 486 - 490

486.

THE

2nd

person

ENDINGS

OF

THE

PLUPERFECT

Singular:

-eis! ὡμολογήκεις P.Cairo Zen. 59034, δεδώκεις P.Giss. 47, 21 (A.D. 117-138). 32, 16 (162 B.c.) considered

16 (257 B.C.); etc. See Mayser, i?, p. 82; For the form εἰρήκης (for εἴρηκας) P.Par.

as pluperfect by

Mayser,

i*,

p. 82.

see

445

(4).

487. 3rd person singular: (a) -«: προσ aynyoya p.82;

cf.

elyelypada

23,

62

(158

B.C.].

P.Oxy.

939,

21

B.G.U.

488.

in

the

1826

in

(258-257 U.P.Z.

{-κέενι

Mitteis)

ἀπεστάλκει

P.Ant.

post-Ptolemaic

papyri.

(52-51

Cf.

B.C.); etc. See Mayser,

i4;

ἐϊ πι]γράφει

P.Flor.

44,

24,

etc. See

Mayser,

eve] κεχειρήκηι

ἀπεστάλκειμεν

12, p. 83:

"ἐμέν:

(with

i,

P.Lond.

(ii /A.D.);

11 (late iv-early

ἐσχήκει

v/A.D.].

i?,

p. 82; not

superfiuous

:)

B.C.).

PSI

322,

not attested

2

(266-265

or

in the post- Ptolemaic

257-250 mB.c.); etc.

ὁμωμόκεμεν

ἰ --

ἀμ -)

P.Par.

46,

["}

[153

See

papyri.

(b) -nuer: The -nuer ending is uncertain as attested doubtful reading: ἐμεμετρή «nuev P.Tebt. 766, 3-4 (116 notices: "sicherlich -xesuer zu lesen.“ (c)

7

Ed.)

plural :

(a) -ener: Mayser,

13-14.

P.S.I. 665, 2 (itiin.c.):

(i), 41-2

Ist person

135, Wilcken

oweornm

[iv/A.D.);

(b) -n: παρηκολουθήκη attested

P.SH (so

only once andin a 8.c.7); Mayser, i*, p. 83

B.c.).!

489. 2nd person plural: it is

not

attested

imperfect)

in

Luke 2:49,

papyri;

cf.

however

ἤδειτε

(in

sense

equivalent

to

John B: τῷ.

490. 3rd person plural: (a) -εἰσαν not

ἀνεπεπλεύκεισαν

attested

in

the

l. The form is taken as perfect Salonius

in

his

essay

SB

7263.9

post- Ptolemaic (for

(254

B.C);

etc.

See

Mavser,

i?, p. 85;

papyri.

ὁμωμόκαμεν)

Zur Sprache der gr.

by

Witkowski

P. Briefe, p. 20, notices

( Epist. 47); likewise that

"ἑαυτός statt

ἑαυτούς und ὁμωμόκαμεν Sind in der Umgangssprache der selben Zeit gut bezeugt”, and thus he seems to accept Witkowski's point of view that ὁμωμόκεμεν IS a perfect with « for a. Thence both Mayser and Schwyzer excluded the -€y.ev formation of the [51 person plural from their Grammars. But the context makes good sense when

ὁμωμόκεμεν is considered as pluperfect (unaugmented —confusion is already

atlested

in earlier papyri):

παραβέβηκεν

᾿τοὺς

opwous , obs

between o and o συνθέμενοι

πρὸς.

ἑαυτὸς [— -o9s] ὁμωμόκεμεν ἕν τε τῶι "HpakAcian! καὶ rois ἄλλοις ἱεροῖς (12-14) “he ise, Apollonius) broke the oaths which we had given... wapaféBynxev iS aorislic, answering to ἐνκατελελυέπει με ἀποιδημήσας (8-9) (sc, "AmoAAwmos). Thus dpwμόκεμεν is referring lo an act prior to that completed in the past. For such a notion suitable than the perfect.

230

of παραβέβηκεν and at the same time the pluperfect tense is much more

THE

(b) -noav:

ENDINGS

ἐπεποιήκησαν

P.Cair.

OF

THE

10351, 54 (123

85;

el ὠἸθησαν B.G.U. 250, 7 (after A.D.

(c)

-eoav:

ἐξεπεπτώκεσίαν]

PLUPERFECT

P.Tebr.

28,

B.C.);

δὲ 490 - 492

etc.

See

Mayser.

1%, p.

130). 7

(c.

114

B.c.).

491. The -ecav ending was not employed frequently by the Koine writers, as appears from a note of Phrynichus (Lobeck, 149): ἠκηκόεσαν, éyeypadecay, ἐπεποιήκεσαν, ἐνενοήκεσαν ἐρεῖς" GAA’ oU σὺν τῷ ı ἠκηκόεισαν. The evidence from Hellenistic compositions fluctuates between -eıcav and -egav,? and the N.T. has only -eoav: ἤἥδεισαν Mark. 14:40; πεποιήκεισαν (unaugmented) Mark 15: 7. 492. From the instances of the pluperfect, which have been gathered from about 1,000 texts of our collection, we see that there are mainly two morphemes, !e/ and |, in the endings of the pluperfect. This differentiation resulted in Classical Greek from the contraction of the original e with the singular endings, so that the distribution of εἰ and ἡ varied according to dialect (see Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, p. 776). Their distribution, however, in the language of papyri

by no means

reflects dialectal influences, but is due to

other factors. It is evident that -εἰ- predominates in the endings of the pluperfect, and this is in fact an instance of the tendency of the Koine to follow the late Attic patterns. Thus, we have 18 examples of -e:- in the 1st person singular against 9 of -5- of the same person. In the 2nd person singular only the -εἰ- is attested (5 in all, among which ἐγεγράφεις is found 7 times and ἐδεδώκεις twice); this is also a strong argument for rejecting Mayser's point of view (i?, p. 82) that εἰρήκης is a pluperfect (see 445 (4)). The 3rd person singular has 19 -eı- (among which ἐγεγράφει is found 4 times, ἐδεδώκει 3 times, and προσαγηγόχει twice) against 7 -n-. In the rst person plural we have 5 -eı- against one -5- (in doubtful reading though), and one -e-,

the latter (ouwpoxener)

considered

as perfect,

however (see 488

(3)). In

the 2nd person plural we find only one example of -««-, but that in N.T. The

ard person plural has 4 -εἰ-, 6 -7-, and one -e-, and it is the only case where the -5- outnumbers the -er-. This is due to the fact that the -a perfect has only -zoav 3rd person plural (2 examples), while the -«a perfect has -excar

and -5cav in equal number (4 examples

I. Meisterhans, Art, /nschr., p,

of each). The excess of -5- in the

1605, quotes one example:

παρειλήφεσαν CLA.

it Bre

ic),

89 (323 B.c.). Schweizer, Pere. Inschr., p. 187, quotes onc example in -ecav: ἐγεγόνεισαν 8.1.0. 226, τῷ (170 Bc.) and he observes that Polybius employs both endings: τέσαν and

-eırar.

231

δὰ 492 - 501

PLUPEREECT

MIDDLE » PASSIVE

ard person plural must be explained by the fact that in the two verbs concerned which form the perfect without «, 0 precedes the ending and causes a spelling analogy with the aorist passive -θησαν. 493. The 3rd person plural -ecav is rare in non-literary writings, a fact which betrays a deviation from Attic and justifies Phrynichus' injunction to use it instead of the ending -eıcav. The appearance of -5- in the 3rd person plural of the tense apparently displays an analogical formation after the

aorist, i.c. on the pattern

eAud-n, eAud-naav

there

were

arranged

the

pluperfect endings -7, -noav.

Pluperfect

Middle-Passive

494. Ist person singular : περιεβεβλήμην P.Lille ii 6, 6 (222-221 B.c.}; 42, 7 (221 B.c.); P.Far. 12, 18-19 (c. 103 B.C.); cf. περιεβλήμην (haplography for wepießeßAnune) P.Grenf. i 3B, 14

(ii-i/B.C,); 495.

The

etc. 2nd

person

singular

is not

attested

in our

collection.

496. 3rd person singular: owerereAeolro] γραπτο 123);

(-o[85? Ed.)

P.Hamb. 27,5; erleliyparro

P.Petrie

7 (250-24)

B.G.U.

19

(ii), 3-4

497.

The

Ist person plural is not attested

498.

The

2nd

person

plural

is not

ii 3

B.C.);

(b),

etc.;) (A.D.

6 (iit/B.C.); ἐκεκόμιστο, ἐκεκύρω(το)

συνεγέ-

P.Tebr. 296, 19 (A.D.

135).

in our collection.

attested

in our

collection.

499. 3rd person plural : ἐκέκτηντο B.C.); etc.

P.Eleph.

14,

23

Ic. 223

B.C.);

ἐκ ἐκίήτηντο

B.G.U.

992

(ii), 6 (162

500. See also Crónert, op. cit., p. 209 (5), where two examples from Strabo

are quoted, i.e. διαβέβληντο and ὑπερβέβληντο. The -vro ending 1s, evidently, rare, the periphrastic formation replacing it gradually. In the post-Ptolemaic papyri no -vro ending appears.? Periphrastic

Pluperfect

501. A periphrasis for the pluperfect occurs in papyri (as well as in N.T.) 1. See also Crönert, Afem. Gr. Hercul., p. 209 (5). 3. The periphrastic 3rd person plural of the pluperfect middle-passive was already established in the Attic inscriptions from 4to p.c. onwards : sce Meisterhans, Art. datchr., p. 166. Cf. Moeris 196, 29 ἐτετάχατο "Arrikws, τεταγμένοι ἧσαν ᾿Βλληνικῶς,

232

PERIPHRASTIC

consisting with

PLUPEHFE(CT

of the imperfect of the verb εἰμί

the aorist active (seldom

the middle)

δ

501 - 508

and a participial form.! So ἦν and

the perfect

active forms

a

pluperfect active, and ἦν with the aorist passive and the perfect passive (the latter as in Classical Greek) forms a pluperfect passive. Periphrasis for the pluperfect active is confined almost exclusively to post-Ptolemaic papyri. Pariphrasis for the pluperfect middle-passive is attested in both Ptolemaic and post-Ptolemaic papyri. (a) Pluperfect active 502. Ist person singular: ὧν

ἥμην

(ὠνήμην

Ed.)

δι᾽

αὐτῶν

παραμεμέτρηκ] via] P.Par.

8,

7

(120.

».c.).

503. 2nd person singular: ἕν᾽ ἧς

μοι...

χάριτα

mapefas

B.G.U.

48,

7-8

(ii-iii/A.D.);

ἐάν

οὖν

μὴ ἧς

λαβὼν

P.Tebt. 423, 18 (early iii/A.D.); ἡ (:= €) ἧς μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀναβάς P.Lond. Inv. 1575, t6 (early iii/A.D.); εἰ ἧς ἐπιδημήσασα P.Oxr. 1682, 9 (iv/A.D.).

No.

504. 3rd person singular: εἰ δὲ

ἦν

[9] γαμῶν

πρότερος | r|ereAle]urnx[w|s

P.Oxy.

490,

11

(A.D.

127):

dar

ὦ ἀπελευθερούμενος ὑπὲρ τριάκοντα [E]riyg] ἦν ye( ylovas B.G.U. v, 61 (ii/A.D.); jv ἀποσιωπήσας Stud. Pal. v 25 (ii), 4 (iit /A.D.); ἐὰν ἦν παυσάμενος τοῦ ἀχύρου P.Lond. 948 (verso), 3-4 (A.D. 257); cf. ef μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιήσας John 18:

3o (N*). 505. Ist person plural : ἦμεν | διαστείλαντες

P.Lond.

1346,

4-5

(A.D.

710).

P.Jews

1914,

34-6

(A.D.

333°).

506. 3rd person plural : δινὰ

ἦσαν

ypayarıres

(b) Pluperfect middle-passive 507.

Ist person

singular :

ὃν ἤμην | ἐνδεδυμένος» χιτῶνα P.Oxy. διδαχθείς P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575, 16-17

285, 10-11 (c. A.D. (early iii/A.D.].

30);

made

! naugv

508. 3rd person singular : ὃς dv

... ...

συνεσταμένος

|. See Blass-Debr.-Funk, $$ 332-5 periphrastic tenses in general see ktionen

im

Griechischen,

Uppsala

SB

4512,

38-39

(167-134

R.C.);:

ὡς

ἦν

ὑβρισμένος

[with 1.) ; Kapsomenakis, FVorunter., p. 44, fn. 2. On Οὐ, Björck, Fr διδήπκων. Die periphrastischen Konstruand

Leipzig,

233

10940.

ἐξ 508-513

MEANING

AND USES OF THE

PLUPENRFECT

P.Test. 16, 7 (144 B.c.); see Mayser, ii!, p. 225: ἦν womeds P.Flor. 255). cf. ye... βληθεῖς Luke 23: 19. (BLT: al. Bedinueres).

509.

Ist person οἶδας

καὶ

175.

14 (A.D.

plural :

au,

ὅτι

Arms

τέθλιμμαι

(for

ἦμεν)

καὶ

emer

P.FPetrie

P.Mich.

|

emi)

ài 4

512,

(7),

5

τῶν 3

(early

ἔργων

(255-254

τεθλιμμένοι

ἤμεθα,

B.C.) ; πάλαι

ar

νῦν

παντε-

ἀπηλλαγμένοι

καὶ

ἦσμεν

iii /A.D.).

510. 3rd person plural : j| σ)αν

T[«raypéro]

[with

Wi:cken|

P.Perrie

n

45

(ni),

12-15

(c.

246

B.C.):

εἰθ} ι]σμένοι... [Algae P.Louvre 10632, 16. (131 B.C.) ; [ἐσπαρ͵]μέναι ἢ] σαν) P.Tebt. 89, 5 (133 w.C.); ἦσαν... παθόντες P.Tebr. 333, 13 (A.D. 216).

511. A periphrasis for the pluperfect passive was familiar to Ptolemaic papyri (see Mayser, ii*, p. 225), and a few traces of it have survived into our era. The periphrastic pluperfect active is more or less confined to postPtolemaic papyri. Periphrasis here is quite frequently to denote the intensive meaning of the tense.

ll.

MEANING

AND

USES

OF

THE

used

for the active

l'LU PERFECT

512. In meaning the pluperfect equals the aorist (punctiliar) plus the imperfect (durative), just as the perfect equals the aorist (punctiliar) plus the

durative present. Thus it denotes the continuance of completed action (like the present perfect), but up to a prescribed limit in the past. It is "more than perfect" in the sense that it always refers to an antecedent date. [t has

the same range as the perfect between a more or less aoristic meaning. though the aoristic predominates (while at the same time the one tense does

not encroach upon the territory of the other), and its main uses correspond exactly to similar uses of the perfect. Thus, the main uses of the pluperfect may be categorized as follows:

513. Intensive: of less punctiliar force, the durative meaning only remaining. results in a past perfect that is virtually an imperfect (just as the intensive

perfect is virtually a durative present). Cf. Luke

16:20 Aalapos ἐβέβλητο

πρὸς

by

τὸν

πυλῶνα “had

been

prostrated"

(quoted

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

$

317); likewise: ἐ ὡς]

τοῦ

{τὸ}

ἐγῤῦσαί

pe

had put on and was wearing

ἢ περιεβεβλήμην

ἱμάτιον

P.Lille ii 42, 7 (221

234

7...

the

cloak,

Β.Ο}: cf. ὁ re [οὐ Ed.)

which

| περι-

I

INTENSIVE

PLUPERFECT

$§ 513 - 515

εβλήμην (for περιεβεβλήμην) ἀθόνιον P.Grenf. i 38, 13-14 (ii-i/B.c.), and σὺν οἷς περιεβέβλητο ἱματίοις P.Tebr. 230 {late ii/B.C.); xai εἰ, καθάπερ | éméora|A]τὸ um’ ᾿Αρίστωνος, ...|... |... ὑπογράφονται P.Par. 65, 1-8 (146 Bc.) “...in accordance with orders given...", the present ὑπογράφονται pointing to the durative

sense

of

the

pluperfect;

διά

re

τοῦτο

καὶ

ἠξιώκει

ἐ κ]τεῖσαι

τὰς προκειμένας ἀργυ(ρίου) (δραχμὰς) $ P.Tor. 13, 12-13 (136 he had therefore demanded that (Psintaes) should forfeit to 500 drachmae '; εἰ μὴ ἐπινύσως ἐσχήκει τὸ σωμάτιον | rore αὐτὸν ἂν ἀπέστειλα πρὸς σὲ | ἅμα Πλουτάρχῳ, ἡνίκα ἐβαρεῖτο 939, 21-3 (iv/A.D.): the durative sense of the pluperfect is imperfect eBapeiro.

αὖ τ] ὃν

or 83 B.c.) “and him the afcresaid ὃ υἱὸς ᾿Αθανάσιος, τῇ νόσῳ P.Oxy. confirmed by the .

514. The pluperfect of verbs whose perfects convey a present meaning usage

is also intensive ἐρρώμην

(likewise

P.Petrie iii 53

in Classical

Greek).

(q, 4 (ili/B.C.); €£éxeiro.

B.C.); ἐκ[ ἐκήτηντο B.G.U. 992

E.g.:

P.Perrie

ἐκάθητο P.Petrie tii gz {H Sf), 21 (mid. iii/B.C.); εἰώθει eilw}dnoar B.G.U. 250, 7 (after A.D. 130); ἐκέκτηντο

by

ii 16, 4 (mid.

ii/B.c.):

P. Hib. 77, 5 (240 B.C.); P.Eleph 14, 23 (c. 223

(ii), 6 (162 B.C.); maperaßyro

P.Par.

51, 33

(159

B.C.); παρέκειτο P.Tor. ı (iii), 23; etc., παρέκειντο (iii), 20 (116 B,c.); διεστάμην P.Tebr. 22, 4 (112 B.c.); eifioro C.P.R, 1, 19 (A.D. 83-84); «ew P.Oxy 1588, 14 (early iv/A.D.); ἔκειτο B.G.U. 388 (ii), 21 (2nd half of ii/A.D.); εσθειν (= ᾿ εἰώθειν) P.Lond. 238, 4 (A.D. 346); ἀπέκιϊίτω P.Gen. 3, 13-14 (A.D. 175-180); ἐπεκείμην P.Lips. 36, 7; e[mex|ecunv P.Lips. Inv. 348, 7 (both A.D. 376 or 378).

(1)

The periphrastic form

of a continuing

condition

of the pluperfect

can

recedes

background

into

the

be used

where

the notion

(see examples

in

502 ff.). 515. Extensive: — a past behind a past — presents a completed state or fixed condition before and up to a definite time in the past (just as the extensive perfect indicates the same completion, but up to the time of speaking / writing). It is the most common use of the pluperfect, and it certainly reflects the common use of the pluperfect, and the basic meaning of the tense. E.g. ἐπιζητήσαντος αὐτοῦ BufAapia τινα, à ἐδεδώκει μοι óv(Aagoew) P.Lille 7, 6-7 (iiij B.C.) "... which he had given me to keep; " in this sentence there is obviously a duration of the act, nevertheless expressed not by ἐδεδώκει but by φυλάσσειν This distinction has escaped the consideration of Mayser, who classifies the above instance, and similar ones, under the intensive pluperfect (see Mayser, ii?, p. 208). Likewise καταλαβὼν διὰ Πτολεμαίου rpamaitir[ov] MéAnn | τῆι καπηAthi, # τὸ ἱμάτιον ἐδεκώκησαν (= ἐδεδώκησαν) ἐνέχυρον P.Fay. 12, 22-3 (c. 103 B.C.) "...to whom they had given the garment on security". ot ἔγραψ]ἃς μοι], B.C.)

"when

vou

| ἐπιστολὴν wrote

to

me.

ἀπεστάλκειμεν I had

sent

235

P.S.J. you

322,

a letter’;

1 (266-265 λαβὼν

or 2537-250

παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ

διι-

& 515

EXTENSIVE

PLIUPEHEECT

ypador Μηδείωι © «ἐξ ἧς ἐ»δεδώκει (6 ἐδεδώκει Hunt-Edgar) P.Caire Zen. 39036, 3-4 (257 B.C.) "when you take it from him pay to Medeius (the sum), which Siraton had given”, περὶ

δὲ

τῶν

εἴκοσι

| δραχμῶν

ovm a

ἐκεκόμιστο

Φίλων,

Πιστοκλῆς

[γ]ὰρ οὐχ εὑρήκειμεν P.Eleph. 13, 4-5 (223 or 222 yet received them (the 20 drachmae), for we had κόμιστο

time

pointing

back

I received

to

line 2

your letter

ἐκομισάμην

Philon

had

τὴν

not

ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἐπιδὶ) εἸδώκειμεν αὐτοῖς | evdancpav

accusative)

B.C.] “...Philon had not found Pistocles”,

mapa

σοῦ

yet received

P.Amh,

(for

33,

ἐπιστολήν,

"up

not éxe-

to the

the 20 drachmae...”.

12-13

(c. 157 B.C.]

"on

the ground of the written declarations which we had submitted to them’; the use of the pluperfect here comes out clearly if we bear in mind that the submission of the declarattons took place before the time at which the case was being brought to court. The pluperfect suggests that the defendant had acted ignoring these previous declarations. In similar cases, however, the

perfect

is used

(see 468).

tira μὲν | rpomov ὁ ἀδελφὸς aov | AlroAAfa]el[cols | ἐν τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις pois ληστῶν | ἐπικειμένων ἐνκατελελοίπει pe ἀπὸ δημήσας P.Par. 46, 5-9 B.c.]; the pluperfect denoting antecedent action, thus "... your brother left me at the time robbers were to come '. For ὑμωμόκεμεν Jbid., 13 of

same

xat(153 had the

letter see 488.

διὰ πλειόνί ὧν] 6. Χονοῦφις «ἐξ ἧς ἐγδεδώκει

13, 8 (136 or 83 &,c.)

"Chonouphis

presented

length

καὶ and narles

explained οἱ ὕϊτως

at

ὑπακούσαντος

...]..pe.ev|..]|

that τοῦ

ἐντεύξεως ἐσήμπνεν

referring he

had

αὐτὸν

δεδανεικέναι P. Tor.

petition

which

he had

lent... ".

Ψινταέτους,

παραγίνεσθαι

to the

προσεκέκλητο ἐπὶ

τὸ

? καὶ

κριτήριην

διὰ

προ ypap|-

P.Tor.

13,

19-20

(136 or 83 B.c.) “and nevertheless Psintaes did not appear, though an additional summons had been issued by proclamatton to the effect that he should present himself before the ςου τ΄. οὕς

τε

ἡλκύκησαν

whom

they

had

πρὸ

ἐμοῦ

| Aagmadapyas

impressed

BG.U.

as lampadarchs

a time before "the ıgıh of the month when darch, τῆι δέ (B τοῦ αὐτοῦ μηνὸς ἤἥλκυσμαι καβὼς

καὶ

perfect

οὗτοι

πρό

referring

war ἂν τοῦτα εἰς

Taxova

καὶ

περὶ

Tepar

to

an

σε Βέλω

χάριν

πανίτων

ἐπεποιήκησηαν

anlecedent γεινώσκειν,

τῶν

ἐκ 'φορίων

αὐτῷ

τὴν

oT

ἐπιτρηπὴν

ἐγὼ ta

νῦν

δέδωκα

12536,

20-1

me”,

the

(ii/g.c.)

tense

103531,

(notice aca

53-4

the

διαπτολὰς

ἐπειπέπωομφα P.Oxv.

(123

adverb

743.

27-32

to

as lampa(see 472).

B.C.),

the

plu-

mporepnr).

δεδώκειν | αὐτῶν

“those

pointing

he {the petitioner) acted (historical) λαμπαδάρχης

P.Cair.

action

καὶ

before

| To Badiane

πάντα (2

συνλέξαι

B.C.):

δεδώ-

«ev refers 10 an arrangement previous to that expressed by ἐπειπέπομφα and δέδωκα, the two perfects being epistolary or resultative, thus expressing action connected with the present time. οὐ yap

ame AnAvrer

(sich

eis

Mianenis,

Are

P.Mich. 401, 7-0 (n. A.D.). the pluperfect of writing "this letter. (See also 296).

236

nm

τὴν

referring

ἐπιατολὴν

to

time

ταύτην

᾿ ἔγραφον

before

the

time

ITERATIVE - EPISTOLARY

PLUPERFEUT

ἂς 516-518

516. The extensive sense of the pluperfect is sometimes defined by a stated date; the pluperfect then means “someone did something at that date”. When the date is considered as the past time by which the act took place, the aorist is used, as a rule. For example,

we find the use of the pluperfect

in: περὶ

τὴν

ta

τοῦ

αὐτοῦ

μηνὸς

εἰς

τὸ

λογιστήριον

| napaßeßAnxnoav

38-9 {117 B.c.) "on the ııth of the same month they office”; ὧν ἐκεκύρω(το) | | τῇ x Meoopn τοῦ ε (draus) {A.D.

123); but

the

use

of

the aorist

P.Mich. 491, 5-6 (ii/a.p.) “I reached and similar cases (see 332 (1) ).

in

ἐγενόμην

Rome

on

P.Tebt.

24,

had approached the P.Tebt. 296, 19-20

εἰς ᾿Ρώμην

Παχὼν

the 25th of month

μηνί

κε

Pachon ",

517. iterative: indicates repetition or broken continuity before a definite past time which is not always stated but often perceivable from the context. In cases where the temporal point of the past is effaced, the pluperfect becomes equivalent to the imperfect. The iterative sense of the pluperfect can be seen with certainty in the cases where adverbial expressions are adjacent to the tense. A good example of this type is found in Luke 8: 29 πολλοῖς yap χρόνοις συνηρπάκει αὐτόν. [n P.S.7. 435, 12 (258 B.C.) ἐνεχείρησεν οἶκοδομεῖν Zapameiov... καὶ προσϊαγηγόχει λίθους" ὕστερον δὲ ἀπεῖπεν αὐτῶι 9 θεὸς μὴ οἰκοδομεῖν κἀκεῖνος ἀπηλλάγη “... he was bringing stones, but then God forbade him...” the iterative sense of the pluperfect is not quite clear from

the

context.

The

tense

can

be

extensive, thus “had (already)

collected stones”, (1)

The periphrastic ἦλθεν

καὶ

πιάσας

pluperfect αὐτοὺς

sometimes

κατέσχεν

αὐτούς,

betrays an iterative meaning: ἐπιδὴ

ἐπὶ

avxoQarrig

γράψαν!τες P,Jews 1914, 35-6 (A.D. 3357); ἦμεν | διαστείλαντες σου διάφορα εἴδη P.Lond. 1346, 4-5 (A.D. 710).

518. Epistolary: This

idiom

15 confined

to papyrus

letters.

καὶ

Siva

ἦσαι

διὰ τῆς διοικήσεώς

The

epistolary

pluperfect sometimes takes the sense of the imperfect (cf. aoristic imperfect), and other times the sense of the perfect: it occurs almost always with γράφω and its compounds. This particular use of the pluperfect comes from the writer's bearing in mind the time which will have elapsed between the writing and the reading of the letter (see under "Epistolary Imperfect”.

295 f.). Its force could be expressed by an English periphrasis such as “you were on record ἐν

ἦι

letter

as having

dyeypaders

you

were

written”.

E.g.

διυνυσίω.} ἐπιστολῆι

writing

(or

vou

P.Par.

wrote,

237

or

64,

you

1

(1064-160

have

s.c.)

written) .

"in

which

ss 518 - 522

THE

κομισάμενοι

τὸ

r

1

,

4

PLUPERFECT

emdoßer à

-

vreyeypades

(1], 6-8

(1533 B.C.)

σὺ

[δὲ

εξωρμήσεις

συν

10 (114 B.C.]

κατὰ

r

καὶ

LI

you

δερενικίϊ δαὶ

P.Perrie

στολὴν P.Perrie ii 13 (g), 1-2

ii

Jlavaros

4

were

: ὑπὲρ

(258-253

τὰ

LI

s.c.)

avrodopov,

-

to attend

ἐγεγρ|

ὑφ᾽

L

,

αἸῴφεις

(in your

ΠῚ -B.C.);

γῆς

πυννεκριμένα

writing ὧν

writing

125, 8

περὶ

-

=

which you were

Διοτίμωι

CLAUSES

πρησανενεγκειν

"...in which

eis

"about

eyeypader

Φ

αὐτῶν as

SECONDARY

ὑπόμνημα ^

διακηῦσαι

11

ὧν

ποι

zr

IN

ὃ H

P.Grenf.

i

them... "7.

P.Tebr.

18,

letter) '. Similarly

τῆι κβ

"

[ἐγεγράφει

B-

περὶ

μοι

ἐπι-

“he was writing a letter to me;

but notice the indication of time "on the 22nd". This last case points to the fact that the epistolary pluperfect has beconie a mere meaningless cliche

HI.

THE

PLUPERFECT

IN

SECONTARY

CLAUSES

519. The pluperfect can be found in secondary clauses, but almost exclusively in the relatives. The meaning of the tense then is not affected by the relatives, but is defined by usage. E.g. 470. In

relative

περὶ

5

aw

(249

by the sense

of the verb

itself. by the context,

clauses:

eyeypager

P. Petrie

R.C.);

οὐκ

ὅσοι

i

125,

Alolar

8

(mt B.c.);

| r|erayueroi]

[| mapa]

P.Perrie

B.C.); er ὧι ἐγέγραπτο P.Hih, 34, ἃ (243-242 B.C.); 3,75 (alter 241 B.C.]; καθ᾽ a... ἐκέκτηντο P.Eleph. εβεβλήμην

P.Lrlle

ii

42,

7

(221

B.C.);

B.c.); ab ὧν ἐπιᾶ] εἰόώκειμεν

P.Amh.

33,

ders

(with

11

7

Wilcken)

P.Par.

65, 3-6

B.C.);

«a8

à

P.Grenf.

(1460 8.0.): παρέκειτο

(116 8.6:

1

καθὼς...

P.Tor.

ws...

1

(ul. ...

(vj,

ἐώνηντο

we...

ii 45

eludes

(iii),

12-13

(133

B.C.);

(116

g.c);

P.Tor.

ı (ix),

yplaldas P.Tehr, 18, τὸ (114 B.c.); σὺν ii B.C); as μέντοι δεδώκεις P.Giss. 47. 2t

77,

(c.

246

P.Par.

35,

16

12 (C. 157 B.C.) ; vd’ 6 ὑπεγεγρά-

ἐπεποιήκησαν

3

P.Hib.

πρὸς Ar ἐμεμίσθωτο P.Lille 14, 23 (c. 223 B.C.): 5 mepe-

ὑπύσ᾽ amepn| (pn)paolro

[163

ı (iv), 32

or

wafanep

P.Cair,

ἐξ

ὧν

enearalAlro

103531, 53-4

be

mpnernrento

(123 P.Tor.

10 (116 B.C.) ; ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐγε-

οἷς περιεβέβλητο P.Tehr, (A.D. 117-138]; ete.

230

(late

S21. fn conditional sentences: Two passages from 1u/R.c. papyri give two conditional sentences of the irreal, a type where the pluperfect with av is used in the apodosis. The pluperfect is used to denote the completion of the act in the past: εἰ

οὖν

had Sure;

μὴ

not

ἡρρωστήπαμεν

been

.. fd|

something

TAY

ill,

I should

(-a|

would

Dr

85

?

| εἰλήφειν

have

Ed.)

long ago

ar

73.

15-16

taken |; εἰ δέ eioyvor

P.Perrie

have

P.Hib.

been

1

3

(bl,

Ó

(243

... 7... ...

(nt i B.C.)

an accomplished

B.C.)

“if

|

"for

mada had

if

we

Ar τι power,

fact”.

522. Certain conditional sentences have

eav+ pluperfect (periphrastc) in the

protasis.

hy many

This construction

is disputed

238

grammarians

(in the same

THE

way

as they reject

PLUPERFECT

ἐάν-

IN SECONDARY

ἦν). E.g. καὶ ἀνερχέστω

CLAUSES

ἐὰν

δὲ 522. 524

ἦν παυϊσάμεγος

ἀχύρου P.Lond. 948 (verso), 3-4 (A.D. 257) = let him come

up,

τοῦ

if he has

ceased...; vopiun δέ ἐστιν [ἀἸπελευθέρω!σις ἐὰν ὁ ἀπελευθερούμενος ὑπὲρ τριάκοντα [ἔ]τί] ἦν γε[γ]ονώς B.G.U. v, 60-1 (ii/A.D.) = manumission is legal, if the person freed is over thirty years old. In these sentences éay+ pluperfect expresses a future contingency (as in the first example) or a general condition (as in the second). The subjunctive is used in such clauses in Attic. If, accordingly, ἐάν-ἦν (that is periphrastic pluperfect) is to be rejected for ἐὰν ἡ (that is subjunctive), how can we explain éav+ijoav? Cf. ἐπιδίδωμι αὐτὸ τοῦτο φανερόν σοι] ποιοῦσα πρὸς τὸ €àv ἦσάν τι παθόντες ᾿ avdpwrrlılvov μένιν [loc τὸν λόγον ![m]pos rov|s] φανησοί μέϊνους αἰτίους

P.Tebt. 333, 12-15 (A.D. 216).! 523. Similarly «c4- pluperfect (periphrastic) is attested in protases of conditional sentences, the meaning being more or less the same as that of the above

instances;

but, in addition, the sense of completion

of the act in the

past is apparent: 7 (= ei) ἧς μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀναβάς, πάλε] ἤμην διδαχθείς P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575, 16-17 (early iit/a.n.) “if you had come up with me, I should have been taught long ago”. 524. In temporal and causal clauses other tenses are employed, as for example the aorist (see under “Aorist expressing relative time”, 353), and the perfect respectively. In other words, the Greek pluperfect was not similar in usage to the Latin, or English pluperfect, as its main function was to indicate completion in the past, whereas the indication of relative time (as the extensive pluperfect) was secondary. See Mayser. iil, pp. 210 f.

1. Jannaris has argued (Hist. Gr., $ 1987) that the two conditional particles(i.e. e? and ἐάν) became

in every respect synonymous and interchangeable.

239

FUTURE

PERFECT

Blass-Debr.-Funk, § 65 (1b): Jannaris, Hist, Gr. 88 1884, 1897-9; Magnien, Le futur grec, Paris 1912, 1i, pp. 280 ff,; Mayser, i*, p. 155; i, p. 225; Moule, /diom, p. 18; Robertson, pp. gob-7; Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, p. 783.

525. The future perfect is very rare and is confined to periphrastic forms consisting of the future of εἰμί and the perfect participle (active or passive). Only a single example of non-periphrastic future perfect, i.e. πρὸ εστήξομαι P.S.I. 441, 9-10 (iii/B.c.),! is to be found in papyri. The periphrastic future perfect occurs occasionally in the Ptolemaic papyrt,® but it appears to have been dropped from the Roman and Byzantine papyri. In N.T. Greek it is much the same.? In papyri of the Arab period a periphrasis of ἔσομαι (in the 2nd person singular) with ἐπιστάμενος appears to be equivalent to a sentence such as “you will have learnt (heard)", e.g. ἔσῃ yàp ἐπιστάμενος ws, «ἐὰν» ὑστερήσηί «) ...[.«μέλλεις... | βαστάξαι κτλ. P.Lond. 1346, 16-19. (A.D. 710). So also in 1349. 31; 1356, 24-5 (both 4.p. 710); etc. The meaning of the future perfect is also expressed by exw and the future participle passive, €.g. eipnkws... | ὡς ταῦτα αποκρότως ὑμῖν ἔχει δοθησόμενά μοι BU ὑμῶν "having told (your...) that he would have them given me by you without fail” P.Oxy. 1875, 12-13 (vi or vii/a.n.). This kind of periphrasis shows the tendency of the language to use the verb ἔχω in order to form a periphrastic mode that could express the function of the perfect tenses. Such a development has been completed in Modern Greek.

Il. See 2,

Mayser.

ldem,

4. For

15,

p.

ıı!, p. 215

(with

Jit;j.

227.

particulars

see

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

ὃ 65

240

(1b.

SUBJUNCTIVE Blass-Debr.- Funk, §§ 363-383; Burton, MT, §§ 160-173; 188-227; Goodwin, MT, App. i “The Relation of the Optative to the Subjunctive and Other Moods’; so also Apps. ii-v concerning the Subjunctive, passim; Hahn, Sudbjunctive and Optative: their Origin as Futures, New York 1953; Horn. The Use of the Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri, Philadelphia 1926; Jannaris, Hist. Gr., $$ 1909-22; App. v; Magnien, “Sur le subjunctif du grec ancien”, Mélanges Navarre (1935), pp. 437-494: Mayser, i*, pp 86 f.; ii!, pp 232-288; Moule, /diom, pp. 21-3; also “Final clauses" pp. 138-40; "Remarks on iva and wore’, pp. 142-6; Moulton, Prol., pp. 184-94; Moulton-Turner, pp. 03-117; Mutzbauer, Die Grundbereurung des Konjuktivs und Optativs und ihre Entwicklung im Griechischen, Leipzig-Berlin 1908; Robertson, pp. 924-35; 981-0; Schwyzer,

Gr. Gr.,.i,

p. +15

(with

lit.) ; pp.

789-93;

ii, pp.

200-10.

§26. Introduction. The distinctive function of the subjunctive is defined by certain syntactical relationships into which it enters. With regard to the meanings of the subjunctive it has been stated that its fundamental idea stands as “will”! opposed on the one hand to the indicative, which is the mode of positive assertion, and on the other hand to the optative, which signifies possibility or wish. This is the situation of the subjunctive in Classical Greek, and it continued to be similar in papyri, with some innovations in morphology, meaning, and syntax. 527. In examining the subjunctive in papyri, attention has been given to underlining the deviations from Classical usage, and to presenting the use of the mood in relation to N.T. Greek and the Koine in general. 528. We mood

must

notice a factor which played a great part with reference to

differentiations,

i.e. the

manifold

particles

and

conjunctions

which,

though used in accordance with fixed constructions in Classical Greek, lost their distinction of meaning and finally were used indiscriminately. The difference, for example, between εἰ and ἐάν (or ὅτε and ὅταν) first was blurred due to the levelling of subjunctive and indicative; then followed their complete assimilation in meaning, with ἐάν (used even for the potential av) and ὅταν predominant. This development relates to the general tendency (known to many languages) to replace simple words with those having more body.

1. Goodwin,

MT,& 371,

admits that the only fundamental idea always present

in the sub-

junctive is that of futurity, and claims this as the primitive meaning from the idiom of Homer. See also Robertson, pp. 926-8, where he discusses the different opinions of the grammarians about the principal meaning of the subjunctive.

241 B. G.

Mandilaras.

The

Verb

in the Greek.

Non-Literury

Papyri

ip

$8 529 - 533 (1)

S~ERIENCTIVE —

MORPHOLGOGGY

529. In the development of the subjunctive we encounter a confusion between this mood and the indicative, due primarily to phonetic resemblances and to confusions between kindred meanings expressed by different formal categories in both indicative and subjunctive (cf. future indicative and aorist subjunctive). 530. The meanings of the subjunctive have been well summarized by Robertson, p. 928, as: "it (the subjunctive) is the mood of doubt, of hesitation,

of proposal,

of prohibition,

of anticipation,

of expectation,

of brooding

hope, of imperious will." Yet all these meanings can be classed under the. threefold usage of the mood: (a) futuristic, (^) volitive, and (c) deliberative

531. The main features of the subjunctive in the papyri can be enumerated as follows: (1) The subjunctive encroaches on the function of the optative, which especially replaces during the iv-vii centuries 4.n. (2)

It supplements

(3)

It is substituted for the infinitive through

(4)

It is used for the future indicative.

it

the imperative.

the advance

of ta.

l. MORPIOLOGY ! 532. The morphological phenomena which are confined to the subjunctive in papyri can be examined under the following headings. 511 Subjunctives

with apparent short vowels.

There

are many

verbal

forms

which phonetically suggest an indicative, but syntactically prove to be ın the subjunctive (the converse phenomenon is also attested). This is due to the phonetic resemblance of the endings e- !|-n (both often replaced by ı), thus equal to the sound

[1], and -ower || τωμεν, thus equal to [omen].

E.g.

(1) -e or -ı for -g: efva δειακονεῖ P. Par, 23, 23 (163 B.C.); ἵνα μυοβηρεύσει P.Oxy. 200, 3 (late 1/A.D.); μη bis ἐνηχλήσι P.Oxy. 1068, 10-11; 24-5 [iii ’A.D.): deaφυλά ἔνι (subjunctive) P.Lond. 413. 25-0 (c. A.D. 346); μὴ ἀμελήσις P.Lond.

418, 15 (c. A.D. 346): eur... h

dont

{late

14-13

P.Lond,

v.A.D.); {vi

A.O.);

bid, 23; € [ale edayodis 404,

era μὲ

6

[ (

(c. tra)

an)

A.D. ὁ

3401:

κύριος

BaAns

μη

P.Lond. διὲ

| ἐνππαύσι

221...

walt

οὖν (=

243, 26-7 (c. A.D. 346); ἀμελήσις

P.Oxy.

1871,

avanatan)

P.Oxy.

1874,

amnAcons)

Ibid...

nToAnmsS

[

I. Some morphological points concerning rhe subsunctive have already been discussed under the morphology of the tenses in the indicative where the same phenomena are also carricd over ta the subpunactive.

242

THE 17-18;

μὴ

ἀναγνώσι

θεὸς

ἀξιώσι

(2)

-ouev

(—

[:- -on:

-an)

for

B.C.); eira

Ibid,

-wuev:

...

SUYRIUNOTIVE -γνῶσι

OF -gr VERIS Edd.)

P.Oxy.

38 533 (D) - 555 (D) 1837,

2

(early

vi/A.p.);

ὁ

th.

[ἵνα]

ἐπιδὸ

πέμσομεν P.Fay,

per

(ἐπίδωομεν

Wirk.)

P,Par.

48,

21-2

(153

116, 17-18 (A.D. 104): {{]νὰ μὴ δι ὅλου φύγομεν

P.Gen. 39, τῷ (mid. 1v/A.D.): ta... ποιήσομεν (future indicative? see 286 (2]]P.Lond. 230, 19 (c. A.D. 346): ἵνα ἐμβαλεύομεν (for epfadwper).. καὶ πέμψομαι (for

néeppapev?); vn’aD.);,

22-3

(c.

POxy

1871, 9 (late v/A.D.];

ira,..'...

A.D.

100]

aradaßuper

and

iva

σε

fhid.,

fra maßoger

15.

ἀσπάζομαι

CT.

B.G.U.

P.Oxy.

«tiva

...

1081,

3

1855, 8 (vi or

...

€xo

P.Fay.

119,

{Π 1} /A.D.).

534. These orthographic blemishes appear even in texts, the writers of which are aware of the earlier distinction between eı and n, or o and w in other cases. This also reflects another development, 1.6. the morphemic levelling of the subjunctive with the indicative; this phenomenon has become entirely established in Modern Greek. 535. The subjunctive of -μι verbs. (1) δίδωμι: The inflexion of the aorist (and seldom the present) subjunctive of this verb has undergone the influence of analogy due to the fact that in pronunciation the earlier forms διδῷ and δῶ (3rd person singular) were identical with διδῶ and δῶ (1st person singular}. The

new formations

were built on the pattern of the verbs in -ow,! e.g. ὅπως...

δοῖς

P.Febt.

409,

5

(A.D.

5):

βλέπει

δέ,

μηδενὶ

ἄλλῳ

δοῖς

χαλκὸν

P.Lips. 106, 17-19 (A.D. 98] ; cf. óovs (read Seis: subjunctive in the place of imperative) P.Oxy. 1840, 7 (vi/A.D.); so also the orthographic variants: dus

P.Oxy,

2bg

P.Oxy.

936,

(ti), 9 (A.D. 57);* P.Mich. 203, 28 (A.D. 12

P.Fay, 124, 22 bot

P. Ry. -.3

(ul /A.Dp.];?

B.G.U.

816,

17

98-117);

lii/A.D.);

cf.

present

B.G.U.

246.

ἀποδίδυς

(ili /A.D.].

229, 4 (4.0. 38);

P.Princ.

163, 6 (i /A.D.];

16 (above

ave

ys

728, 18 (A.D. 142);

σεν

B.G.U.

741,27

(4.D. 143-14): P.Flor. 1, 6 (A.D.

(Cat.] 51, 12 (A.D. 238); so also dané0 P.Fay. προσμεταδηῖμεν

ηὖσαν

{προσμεταδηῖ

μένουσαν

op. cir. p. 26.

2. 3. In both

passages dds is written δύς (for δός}

be circumflexed as standing for dois. p.

See

Ljungvik,

172.

243

153); CPLR,

112, 7 (A.D. og).

Mitteis)

P.Oxv.

I. See Crónert, Afem. Gr. Hercul., pp. 215 €; Blass-Debr.-Funk, §95

p. 59; Horn,

XAVIE 11020],

155, 4 (ii /A.D.);

the

ng,

34

(A.D.

131),

(2}; Olsson, P. Briefe,

in the ed. pr. The form, however, must

"Ur

Papyrusbrevens

Sprák ', Eranos

33 535 (2) - 538

(2)

THE

SURIUNCTIVE

OF

-μι VERHS

In the same way, analogy has worked to produce the forms yvois,

yvoi

period.

E.g.

attested in both N.T. mss.! and papyri of the post-Ptolemaic ἐὰν

yvois

1155,

13

yvois...

P.Mich.

(A.D. καὶ

479,

104);

17

learly

ἵνα ἐπιγνοῖς

σαυτοῦ

| καταγνοῖς

ii/A.D.);

ἵνα

P.Oxy.

932, 8

P.Oxy.

1062,

emy. That the form also confirmed by ἐμὲ ὑπενέγκη 26 c See also Lobeck,

See

ἔλθὦ]

TOY

müTpova

ἐν

τᾶχι

| μον

πρὸς

: Gnas

P.Amh,

xai

ἐν

Tay

ἔλθω

πρὸς

23

(c.

A.D.

346);

οὔτε

iii-1v/A.D.). aga

κώμης

αὐτούς

αὐτοῦ

P.Lond.

εἶναι

230,

P.Gr. Berol, 49 (b), 5-6 (vii /A.D.].

p. 32.

must be paroxytone, i.e. the same as that of the aorist subjunctive, IS a passage of Romanos the Melodist (viia.D.), τὴν ἐμὴν τιμωρίαν δι 3 (Maas-Trypanis ed.), where the accent thus agrees with the metre. Phryn. 723 for other references.

216

AORIST

(5)

σχῶ

for

similarly

also

παράσχω

παράσχω

(6b), 30-1 So

ἔξω:

SUBIUNCTIVE

[oo]

elsewhere:

χρημάτισον

ἐντυνχί νιν

πάντως

καταλάβῃ

οὖν

542. Conversely

the

aorist subjunctive,

948,

ἐνιαυσίως

ὑπὲρ

τὸν

ἐϊν]οικίου

INDICATIVE

dopov | αὐτῶν

B.G.U.

$8 541 (5) - 546

303,

ἐνιαυσίως

23

(A.D.

xvÀ.

586);

P.Lond.

113

(A.D. 633); see also 363.

ἡ μέλζλγω

iva τὸ iva...

- FUTURE.

P.Fay.

μοι

ἡ

137,

2-4

(e) μεθαύριον

future

(=

P.Oxy.

indicative

et: ἡ Wilcken)

erw

i ἐν

Baxyiabi,

(1/A.D.). 1844,

could

be

5

(vi

used

or

vit /A.D.).

occasionally

for

the

e.g.

ἀσφαλὲς ἐπιγνῶ καὶ areba.rndopiar ἄξω P.Giss. 27, 8-9 (c. A.D. 117); !...Ssafo P.Oxy. 1666, 21-2 (nl /A.D.); iva ποιήσω καὶ ἀποστελὼ BG.U. 19-20

(iv-v/A.D.).

543. This interchange of future indicative and aorist subjunctive brought about another development connected with the morphology of the subjunctive, i.e. replacement of the subjunctive endings by those of the future indicative. The phenomenon was also facilitated by phonetic equivalences (see

533-534). E.g. eva...

διαπέμψεται

P.Oxy,

1068,

5

liii/A.D.);

«tva

por

μαρτυρήσουσιν

shid.,

19, éea(v) | ἔλθουσι P.Lond. 243. 21-2 (c. A.D. 346); au μὴ παύσεται P.Lond. 417, ΤΙ (c. A.D, 345); ἐὰν αὐθεντίσεις τὼ πρᾶγμα καὶ Aaßıs | αὐτοὺς ἐν τῇ mode,

καὶ ἀπαλλαγοῦσιν πρὸς ἀλλέλους B.G.U. 103, 4-4 (vi-vii /A.D.); ἐὰν πιστεύσεις P.Oxy. 1862, 57 (viiJA.D.); ἐνέγκουσιν P.Oxy. 1867, τὸ (vii/A.D.); ἀπέλθομεν ὁμοῦ xai eveyxoper Ibid., 31, corresponding to ... «at φέρομεν (no need for correction to ἀπέλθωμεν and φέρωμεν); notice that φέρομεν is equivalent to ἐνέγκομέν: similarly iva ; ...|ovlvaAAa£ovaw P.Oxy. 1867, 12-13 (vit/a.D.).

544. The morphological levelling of the future indicative and the aorist subjunctive prepared the way for a similar development with the present subjunctive and the present indicative. This had already begun in the Ptolemaic papyri.! It gained considerable ground in the N.T.? and the Roman and Byzantine papyri, and became entirely established in Modern Greek.

545. Further, this development brought about the semantic levelling of the conjunction εἰ and ἐάν, ὅτε and ὅταν, εἴς, 546. In

conclusion,

1. See Mayser.

the

developments

ii', pp. 284 f.

2. See Moulton-Turner,

pp. t15 f.

which

have

been

examined

in

this

$8

546 . 549

SUBHJUNUCTIVE

« SECOND.

AORISTS

chapter resulted from the assimilation of future indicative with the aorist subjunctive. The coincidence of these two tenses brought forth the following developments: (1) The complete dicative.

morphemic

assimilation

of the subjunctive with the in-

(2) The resulting disappearance of the structural distinction in secondary clauses; thus ἵνα, ἐάν, ὅταν could also introduce the indicative.

(3) The creation of new aorists indicative after the aorist subjunctive: ἔδωσα from δώσω {= future indicative and aorist subjuctive); adnoa from ἀφήσω (= future indicative and aorist subjunctive) after analogy with &Avca-Avow (= future indicative and aorist subjunctive). 547. Second aorists. The creation of the s-aorists of the -μεὲ verbs

had an

effect on the development of the second aorists. Attic prose used bot!. second and s-aorists; e.g. eAımov-eAeuba; papyri favoured the latter! basic-

ally to avoid ambiguities from the identical pronunciation of λείπω and Ainw. Thus, even here, it was the aorist subjunctive which required a new formation from the s-theme. E.g. ὧν

ἐὴν

| καταλίψω

P.Mich.

321,

12-13;

15

(A.D.

42);

warudidn

P.Mich.

332

(a).

20 (A.D. 46); καταλίψης P.Oxy. 2153, 22 (lii /A.D.); μὴ κα ιταλίψης μαι (= μὲ] P.Oxy. 120 (verso), b-7 (iv/A.D.); cf. οὐ μή oe | ἐϊνκαταλείψει [77 -λίπη codd.) P.Oxy.

1783,

2

(early

iv/A.D.] ; καταλείψη

Mark

12:10

(NN).

548. As for the aorist ἔλαβον neither the theme Aag nor Any was available for a new s-formation, although some sporadic instances point to an s-aorist which occurs in the indicative and the infinitive (cf. 300 (12)). The language in general kept the theme Aaf of the 2nd aorist, but transformed

the endings according to the endings of the seen

1st aorist. This

in the indicative (see 137 (14)), given that the suhjunctive

can

be well

has the same

endings for both first and second aorists, 549. The aorist nveyrov-nveyra has also the form nreia (ἡνικα) from stem éveuc-, which is found mostly in Tonic writers (see LSJ, s.v. φέρω iv) and in inscriptions dated from iv/B.c. (one example in vi/n.c.) to iii/a.p. Papyri often use the subjunctive (avjavians in addition

to, or instead

of, (av)evéy-

«ns: P.Thead. 23, 15 (*.p. 342); P.Gen. 47, 16 (s.n. 346); P.Lond. 242, 17 1. 1Γ not

in

the

Ptolemaic

Ptolemaic

[see Crónert,

Mem.

papyri.

isee

Mayser,

Gr.

Hercul..

i*, p.

p. 234, In. δ).

218

138), certainly

in

the

post-

THE

SUBIUNCTIVE

IN

MAIN

CLAUSES

ss 540. 553

(4.D. 346); 245, 18 (A.D. 343); 403, 20-1; 407, 15 (both a.p. 346). The form avavixns, Is confined to petitions and contracts. Forms such as ἐνίγκῃς. ἀνανίκης are examined under “Augment”: see 240. 550. Thematic

(D)

changes.

[d]vaveyians P.Lond. 242, 14-15 (A.D. 346): the aorist is formed

as if

from a verb in -aw; cf. aorists indicative in -noa: ἐξήτησα ἐσπούδησα, (see

302 (3), 302 (5)).

|

(2) βρέχηι (read Bpeym) for βραχῆι P.Tebt. τοῦ, 19 (101 B.c.) with retention of the present theme. Similarly ἔρχω for ἔλθω: ἕως örlı) B[a]A[o] [or γόμων (= -ov) τοῦτον Kai ἔρχω P.fand. 22, 2 (A.D. 619-629). Cf. ἔρθω (so also in Modern

Greek)

for ἔλθω;

ἐὰν ἔρθω

πρὸ σέν (1. mpo«s»

oév) P.Oxy.

1069,6 (itii/4.D.) which may indicate a blend of épyw with ἔλθω or simply a phonetic change of «À to ep often attested in papyri and Modern Greek. (3)

Subjunctives

in

-now

corresponding

to

aorists

indicative

in -eaa:

βαρήσω (299 (1); (-)Ἰκαλήσω (300 (2)).

IH.

The

MEANING

AND

USES

Subjunetive

OF

in

THE

SUI'BJUNCTIVE

Main

Clauses

551. The use of the subjunctive in papyri departs from Classical Greek in some respects. The subjunctive undertakes the functions of other moods, and consequently its meaning is differentiated accordingly. In papyri the subjunctive expresses (a) volition (volitive), (5) that which may be the outcome of the present situation under certain circumstances (futuristic), and (c) a hesitating interrogation (deliberative subjunctive). 552. Under

this general heading "Volitive" three subcategories can be listed:

553. Hortatory: in the 1st person to express an invitation or exhortation. This use is entirely missing from the Ptolemaic papyri, while a few examples from late papyri are disputed because of the unstable spelling: aAAa : dwξάξωμεν

τὸν

θεὸν

ὅτι

αὐτὸς

ἔδωσεν

καὶ

αὐτὸς

ἔλαβεν

P.Oxr.

1874,

13-14

(vija.D.). In ed.pr. döwfalwpev is taken for δοξάζωμεν but is translated “we glorify”, while in P.Se/. 168 it is translated “let us glorify’. The latter translation agrees with δοξάζωμεν so suggested

249

in both editions. That

this

$8 553.584

(3)

Boi

rvpEoOBY- IUSSIVE

form is subjunctive is confirmed Christian

phraseology,

and

SURIUNCTIVE

by the fact that text reflects influences of

δοξάζωμεν

as

hortatory

subjunctive

often

oc-

curs in the Christian literature. Cf. also διδάσκωμεν οὖν» τὸ φιλάνθρωπον ὕψος ὑμῶν P.Cairo Masp. 67003, 15 (c. A.D. 522). The ist person in exhortations is supplied by the periphrasts of ades, δεῦρο, δεῦτε and the aorist subjunctive in N.T., e.g. ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος Matt. 7:4: δεῦρο ἀποστείλω ae Acts 7:34: ἄφες ἴδωμεν Matt. 27: 49: δεῦτε ἀποκτείνωμεν

(1)

Mark

12: 7, etc.

The subjunctive in this sense is sometimes

pated

form

554. Jussive:is 2nd person

introduced

by as, a synco-

of ades (see 680 (2)). the subjunctive

of the 2nd

plural) denoting command.

and

3rd

In Classical

person Greek

singular (and the jussive sub-

junctive was not regularly used, the imperative being the only recognized form. But it seems that certain positive subjunctives followed the analogy of the use of the subjunctive in prohibitions,! and this must be the reason for the development of the jussive subjunctive in later Greek. (1)

The jussive

subjunctive

cases where

it interchanges

καλῶς

movjons

(:= -ceıs),

in commands

κύριε

with

can

be

well

the imperative

«πα[ τ]ήρ,

(not

exemplified

in the same

marnp,

as

in

by:

sentence:

P.Abinn.

20),

ἀπαιτῆσαι "AokAgm|d[99]v ἅπερ xpewort μοι! ν] οἰμισμάτια δύο καὶ amooriAns! plole ἐπὶ τῆς πόλεως καὶ παράσχου Ζακάωνι σίτου apraßas δύο P.Gen.

52 (verso), 5-11 (mid.

tv/a.p.):all the three

constructions

(infinitive-

subjunctive-imperative) express an imperatival sense:? σημειωσάτω καὶ μείνῃ P.Oxy. 1833, 5 (late v/a.p.); (2) éü(v)

constructions where the subjunctive is a substitute for the imperative: ἔλθουσι

γενέσθαι

ἔλθε

πρὸς

‘oe οἱ ἀδελφοί,

καὶ n| ἐμψης

πρὸς

ἡμᾶς

P.Lond.

lbid.

26-7;

243.

ποιήσης 21-4 (c.

αὐτοῖς

AD,

346);

ἐὰν δὲ! κατέλαβεν

ποτε (-Belv] τί ποτε Edd...)...:

γράψη

po

τὸ Cuapa (--ζμῆμα) cf.

τὴν Koya

"..let

me

€ [ἃν

καὶ

know”

εὐσχολῖς,

ἔμαθε[ν] ri-

P.Oxy.

1848,

6-8

(vi or

(3)

cases where the plain subjunctive is used after verbs which, as a rule,

take

vn/a.n.);

the infinitive:

|l. See Goodwin,

M7

ἀπα

ν]γ[ σης

61,

to

(mid.

iv/A.p.):

probably

& 250.

2. The note “as if eae had preeceded” ariAns

P.Gen.

tn P. Abinn. 20 referring

is inappropriale. 2j!

to the subjunctive amo-

JUSSIVE

ΝΕΠΗΤ ΝΟ ΤΙΝῈ

sy 554 (3) - 558

depending on the preceding καλῶς ποιήσεις 5-6; notice that this subjunctive is connected with the following infinitive ἀπαί( ν)τῆσαι in lines 14-15. So also παρακ[ αἸλ[ ὦ} τὴν σὴν λαμπρὰν. ἀδελφότητα ypayn μοι περὶ τούτου P.Oxy. 1865, 6-7 (vi or vii/a.p.). This use of the subjunctive is often characterized

as asyndeton. Other verbs following this construction are: ἀξιῶ, ἐρωτῶ,

καταξιῶ,

and

the expression

πᾶν

δέομαι,

ποίησον.

555. The jussive subjunctive is a feature of non-literary papyri, and appears established in iv/a.n. N.T. does not make use of this construction, the tvaclause being used instead.! 556. Some sporadic examples of the imperatival subjunctive in positive sentences during the Ptolemaic period approach the function of the optative.? §57. The use of the jussive subjunctive is confined to verbs referring to the execution of work. It differs from the volitive future in that the latter gives the executor the chance to proceed in due time, while the subjunctive asks the executor to carry out the work in accordance with his wish. E.g. as ἔθος ἔχει τὸ ὑμῶν μέγεθος χαρίζεσθαΐ μον τοῦ Aoyapiov, | ἁποστείλη μοι τὸ ὑμῶν μέγεθος στρογγύλιον ῥεφαναιελαίου ( — ῥαφανελαίου) P.Oxy. 155, 7-8 (vifA.D.): ἀλλὰ

πάντως

A.D.):

«|a]i

ἀπολύσῃ (vt or γνησία

TOUTD

rpuém

ποιήσῃ

αὐτὸν

7

σὴ

|

γνησία

τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ

...,

καὶ

μὴ

λάβη...

|...

i...

ἡ ὑμετέρα

συνχωρήση

Vii/A.D.); εὐθέως xai war λαμπρότης... |... ἀλλὰ

πάντως

adeAborns

τοῖς

P.Oxy.

γνησία

1849,

2-3

ἀδελφότης,

| yaproAapioıs

(vi

OT

vit /

| «at συντόμως

P.Oxy.

1845,

3-5

αὐτὴν τὴν ὥραν... πέμψῃ μοι ἐνταῦθα in σὴ πάντως ἐνέγκη αὐτὸν lel? ἐπυτῆς καὶ κατα-

οὖν καταλάβη

P.Oxy.

1844,

1-5

(vi or

vii/A.D.);

παρασκευάση οὖν αὐτὸν | ἡ σὴ γνησία döeÄdlorn]|s ... ἀποτεθῇν] αι] POxy. 1847, 2-3 (vi or vii/A.D.), with παμασκεύίασον οὖν αὐτὸν Jhid., 5; ταῦτα αὐτῷ πηράσχη P.O«xr. 1864, 7-9 (vii/A.D.); πρὸ τοῦ αὐτὴν ἀνελθεῖν αὔριον παραπκειάσῃη τοὺς

ἀπὸ

Τερύθεως

δοῦναι

P.Oxv.

1937,

1-2

(vi

or

vii/A.D.);

etc.

558. The jussive subjunctive is used particularly in late papyri with abstract

periphrases (e.g. ἡ σὴ διάθεσις, δεσποτεία, εὐγένεια, μεγαλοπρέπεια, TO cor μέγεθος and the like) as subject. In these formulations subjunctives such as θελήσῃ, καταξιώσῃ, παρακληθῇ make polite formulae of request; the substance of the request is expressed by an infinitive subjunctives, or less often by an imperative. E.g.

1. See especially 2. See Mayser,

under

“Imperatival

ii!, p. 230.

iru”, 385

ff.

dependent

on

the

38 558 - 561

JUSSIVE

θελήση ἡ

on

σοῦ ἡ rıulılorns (not

σῇ)

γνησία

vil 'A.D.): cf. πέμψη

πάραυτα

SURIT

[... } ἐλθεῖν P.Oxy.

ἀδελφότης

...

δὲ καὶ of ὑΐμμαχον

(perhaps και[νὰ}} ἡ σὴ (vi or vil /A.D.); etc.

yrgeca

xarafıoan | - -wan) μαθεί rafıwancn σὴν διάθεσις ...

ΝΟ ΤΙΝ 1840, 2 (vi/A.D.];

πηρασκευᾶσαι

P.Oxv,

εἰς τὸν ὅρμον fhid,

adeAdarys

ταῦτα

1846,

t-2

4; καὶ θελήση

ἡποδοῦναι

θελήσῃ (vi

or

waıl...]

POxr.

1850,

1-2

- naBacfor μαθεῖν) P.Oxy. 1871, ἡ (late v /A.D.); xaavexporgae P.Oxy, 1872, 2 (v or vi/A.D.), followed

by καταξιώσατε (-arn Pap.) 7; 9 and καταξίωσον B8; warafiwon ἡ σὴ adeldoins παρασκεύασον P.Oxy.. 1035, 2 (v17A.D.) ; καταξιώση ἡ ὑμετέρα γνησία adeAgoτης... πέμψπι P.Oxy, 18449, 1 (vi or vit /A.D.) ; καταξιώση ἡ σὴ γνησία Anumpo-

της... εἰσελβεῖν P.Oxy. 1851, 1-2 (vi Or vii /A.D.] : cf, ἀλλὰ πάντως τοῦτο πέμψην unc εὐθέως 4. καταξιώση οὖν πάντως ... 2... πέμψαι μοι POxy. 1854, 3-4 (vi Or

vit /4.D.): notice

that

there

is no

mention

of

the

stereotyped

title,

etc.

παρακληθὴτε οὖν ... ποιῆσαι P.Oxy. 1163. 11 (VI /A.D.): παρακληθὴ οὖν ἡ ὑμετέρα peyadonperera κ᾽ αἱ eanli χπαρ] (σασθαι POxy. 1832, 4-5 (v or vi /A.D.): τὰ δὲ δύο ταπίτια παρηκληθὴ αυνήθως |... 1... ποιῆπαι καὶ πέμψαι P.Oxy.

1843,

559. The

13-15

above

expressed when

(vi

or

vii; A.D.);

examples

help

etc.

us in drawing

by the imperative and

the writer is addressing

a line

between

the jussive subjunctive,

his correspondent

the

We

meanings

observe

in the 3rd person

that

instead

of the 2nd he does nothing but change "you" into "your brotherhood, your lordship”, and the like. When "you" is used, there follows the imperative, but "your brotherhood" as subject enables the writer to use the subjunctive. The latter appears usually at the beginning of letters, as if the writer

wants to prepare the ground

for his request, and

in fact, this mode

does

not stress the demand as much as the imperative. Then. having made the preparation, the writer continues by using the plain imperative. So we can

say that the jussive subjunctive constitutes a polite formula ın letters and similar writings, being equivalent to English "would you please do it". 560. It is noteworthy that the jussive subjunctive ıs almost always in the aorist. The present is also found in papyri of the Byzantine period, e.g. τὴ"

xaplır)

xapılırau

7-8

τ[αἸύτ[η|e ποιῆτε de

λοιπὸ"

Tu

ἑαυτῆς

(vor vi/a.n.). See also

561. When

ἐμοί

P. Rass.-Georg.

ἐπίνοδον.

561,

7 m)

Ἢ

10,

27-8

μεγπλυπρέπεια

(iv-v/a.n.), P.Oxv.

1832,

566, 567.

the addressee is God or a person of power, the jussive subjunc-

tive has a nuance of request (or prayer) (already discussed in the previous section), and in some instances this nuance ts further attenuated until it

approaches the sense of "wish". This use is confined to such examples as: “ra

:

-

vtr

4

rnyn

T

ἢ

mm

i

-

armen

wel

τ

r

diAnaropytin

252

wITarer

F

wm

1

ΤῊ

Li

à

ἐμὴν

-

3

| ux.

. |

|

}

SUBJUNCTIVE

ἀκαιρείαν P. Flor. 338, triumph over " by σαι [= σε) P.Lond.

10-12

IN

PROHIBITIONS

[iii /A.D.): wrongly

$8 561 - 563 (3)

corrected into κατανεικήσει “will

Hunt-Edgar in P.Se/. 146; ὁ κύριος ὃ Θεὸς διαφυλά £1 [--- -n) 415. 25-6 (c. A.D. 346) "may the Lord God preserve you’;

o Bleö)s δὲ | διαφυλάξῃ

σε P.Lond.

243, 28-9

(c.

A.D.

346);

éppwne|v]ws

| ce

ἔχετε (for ἔχηται) ! ἡ θία mpovoia P.Gen. 30, 21-3 (c. A.D. 346); καὶ 9: Gleo}s ἀποδίδι [-- -δίδῃ not ἀποδιδοῖ as suggested in P.Abinn. τὸ: see 537 (2) ). alolı πρὸς τὴν €Aen! μωσύνην aov καὶ ἀνυῴῦ {= -oi) ge ets | rà μί[ζ]ωνα P.Gen. 51, 24-7 (mid. iv/A.D.); ὁ 8(«o) s δὲ διαφυλάξη ce Ibid. 35; ὁ Θεὸς δὲ ποιήσῃ αὐτὸν

ἐλθεῖν ev ᾿Αλεξανδρείᾳ P.S.4. 237, 13 (v-vi/A.D.); ὁ Θεὸς ἀξιώσι |-- -on) ἡμᾶς mpoox{uveiv) ἐν oiyia P.Oxy. 1857, 16 (early vi/A.D.); ὁ Κύριος ray ..[.]. cv: [..]va«.

P.Oxy. I9. 12

(Ll

L..]vakg])

τὴν

1857. 3-4 (vi or (vi-vii/a,D.).!

ζωὴν

ὑμῶν

vil,A.D.);

ὁ

ἐπὶ

μήκιστον

Κύριος

ypovov

aflılwon

καὶ

ἡμᾶς

ἀξιώσῃ

ὑμᾶς

P. Ross.-Georg.

iii

562. Subjunctive in prohibitions: Prohibitions are expressed by the subjunctive with μή. This construction is Classical, but its frequency in papyri is extremely high due apparently to the character of the papyrus texts: notice

that it occurs mostly in letters, The 2nd person singular is very frequent due to the fact that most of the texts under examination are letters addressed to individual recipients. The 2nd person plural is also found when

the recipients are more than one; the 3rd persons singular rare. (1)

Sometimes

the prohibition

seems

to be rendered

and

milder

plural

are

by the inser-

tion of the adverbs οὖν or ἄλλως (= in another way; different in meaning to that ἄλλως of Herodotus meaning "at all events, anyway") between μή and the verb: see examples in the following sections. 563. The (lf)

more common μὴ

(οὖν)

expressions

ἀμελήσητ:

see

in the prohibitive subjunctive are:

P.Oxy,

742,

14

(2

B.C.];

P.Oxy.

25-20); P.land. ἡ, 16 (i /A.D.): P.Tebr. 315, 32 (ii jA.D.); P.Par.

18, 4;

11-12.

(ii-iii/ A.D.)

P.Ross.-Georg.

291,

to

(A.D.

421, 1O-11 (iii /A.D.);

tii 3, 4; 7;

L4;

19-20

(iit /A.D.);

P.Amh. 143, 2 liv/A.D.); P.Oxr. 1223. 33-4 (late iv/A.D.); PS 825, 17 (iv or v/A.D.); P.Oxy. 1929. 2; 4 {late iv or v/A.D.): 1871, 6 (late vjA.D.]; 1834, 6 (late v or early vi/A.D.); P.Lond. tang. tg (c. A.D. 709) ; 1374, 12-13 (A.D. 711); etc. (2) μὴ fov) ἄλλως

ποιήσης:

PS.

P.Oxy. 204, t4 (cf. lines 25-6) fit, 10-11 (11/A.D.); etc. (3)

μὴ

πράξης:

|. The subjunctive phrases

such

as:

of Beds

μηδὲ

"wish" φιλάξη.

dyevés

has Bese

499.7 {257-256

[4.D.

22);

pybe

ἄδηξ

survived

in

cywpds τὸν

253

B.c.); P.Tebi.

P.Fav. ον

"wat

Modern

459

(5

8.C.};

110, 34.

(A.D.

94):

P.Tehi.

μη

i dvaAxiuov

πράξης

Greek

(— συγχωρέσῃ

δὲ}

in

certain

avrav)

etc.

stereotyped

P.Oxy. 79 (versol, T5 fil! A.D.). (4)

un

δοέξης

(M; A.D.];

«at

καὶ

μὴ

So£g

(5)

μὴ

Aws

21,

7-8

08); μὴ

δώσης»

μὴ

δώσης un

τῷ

P.Lond.

equivalent

μὴ

ὃ ὡς

μηδέ

ἀφορμήν

κατασχης:

καὶ

κριθὴν

P.Lond.

μὴ

Karacyns

P.Oxy.

P.Oxy, 483,

76

dag

' ray TOF

P.Lips.

15-16

(A.D.

616):

P.Oxy.

1063,

B.G.U.

346,

[4-15

(A.D.

(late

vi

or

8-9

(in

P.Tebr.

17-19

Hpwlöln

ταὐτὸν

532,

115,

μηδενί

106,

εἰρηναρχίην») 153,

11

μὴ

! χαλκὸν

. τῷ

P. Amb.

δὸς

P.Lond.

οὖν

dais

rov

1360,

κλει

πράξης

7101,

‘au

ἀναδῶς

ἄλλως

᾿ἰωαννη

ἄλλω

αὐτὰ

μὴ

τῆς

(A.D.

lorms)

μὴ

(-= δώ-)

τριμήσια

11

| δὲ under:

ἀναγνοὺς

οὖν

nueAnwora

1351,

to

βλέπε

δόσης

αὐτῷ

με

ὅρα

mpoyeyplappera)

ào£m

δοῦναι

&.C.);

!

181-192);

μὴ

πιττά[κίιον

HI ’A.D.)!

(a.p. δύξης

(or

Or

(6)

3-5

| aufn:μὴ aoc

(115

τὸ

IN PROHIBIETIONSN

SE RIUNCTIVE

- 564 δὰ 563 (3)

14-15

2

vi

(A.D. (it

(Byz.):

'A.D.);

καὶ

710).

P Lille

18,

B.C):

un

κατα.

axns Κλέωνα P.Far. 109, 11 (early 1/A.D.); ὅρα οὖν un αὐτὸν κατάσχης B.G.U. 37, 5-6 (A.D. 50); μὴ οὖν : κατάσχηϊ] τὸ mAoiavr P.Hamb. 54, 18-20 (c. A.D. 215];

ἀλλ᾽ ópa

μὴ

κατάσχητε

tor

vm»

A.D.); un κατάσχης (xaracyys in P.Lond. 243. 17 (c. A.D. 346). (T)

In other

d(excadcav) (c

-re)

cases:

μὴ

τούτων

καὶ ἔλθβῳ P.Lomd, Poland.

ἃ,

35

ρέτητν»

P.Abinn.

|

-or}

237,

12-14

(It A.D):

(c. A.D.

Laparlwra

ἄλλα εἰς ἐργασί ar αὐτὸν βάλε P.Oxy.

1581, 5-7

P.Oxy.

τοὺς

23-h;

un

P.lund. 23, pe

14

θελήσης

114, 21 7

(vi!A.D.”);

προσελθῖν

P.Oxv.

P.Par.

οὕτως)

744:

un

an

P.Oxr.

1769,

οὖν ὀλιγοψυχήσητε

11

(Mi /A.D.);

μὴ

μὴ

5-6

ἕως

ar

ndns

ἐν!

o,

12)

rar

ἀργεῖν

μὴ

814,

| 0Q-

o0«v» ἀπρσιωπήπηται , καὶ

ῥέμβεσθαι,

[1 A.D.) ; μὴ αφῆς αὖ τοὺς

67084,

B.C.):

early

fbi,

ἀπαλλάξω

μὴ

αφῆς

ὅλως

ἀρμγῆσε

ἀργῆσε

Fhid.,

27 (I1 or 11 ’A.D.); μὴ οὖν ἀπα3

(Byz.):

μὴ

μη[δ]|ὲν δὲ δράσητε P.Gronf. [1

(tit or

ἐπίσχης

346):

etc!

γένηται

ἀμέλεια [νὶ

ii 77, 38 {Π|-ἶἰν /A.D.);

μηθαμῶς

ἔργηις

ἢ

amnae

ans

(159 B.C.): an’ θαυμάδηις P.S.I. 343, 2 (256 B.C);

P.Flor,

210, 9-10. (II j/A.D.);

νημίσῃης

P.Oxv.

ὀκνήσηις

μὴ

B.G.U.

65,

cf.

τέκτονες

Masp.

II-IZ2

50, 8-9

πέμιψε

100):

cf.

P.Cairo

(vi or vil A.D.)

pow

(A.D.

|

ἡ αἴτησις

ἐπιλαθης

gov τὸν παῖδα μὴ

{Π|:Ὰ.0».}:

αφήσις μοι αὕτως

ραίτητως γένηται μὴ

15

but

| amoÀvags,

ὅλους

121,

P.Ovr.

8,

P.Caro

7-8

1931,

Zen.

συγχωρήσῃ

it 40

non

an

(a),

IO

ὀκνήσης 12

|P.Cairo

a9

o€$»v

Anpnens

P Fay.

{ν τ A.D); μὴ νομίσητε PLS

39231,

[iii ’A.D.):

| P.Petrie

2

(224

(252

B.C.)

P.Giss. B.C.);

Masp.

un

67083,

;

an

37, 8

OKV

47,

ois

aur

(vi-vil/A.D.];

σκύλης

t (Bvz.);

P.Tebt.

421,

τοιγαροῦν!

[μηδὲν ταραχὶ Olas P.Tehr. 315, 14-15 (ii; A.D.]; adda μὴ vrepfi {- -45) ἡ ὑμετέρα evAnfia (for εὐλάβεια: εὐλαβία Wilcken) B.G.U. 103, 7 (vi-vill /A.D.); an

αὐτὰ it

3,

dopeons 14.

P.Mich.

214,

33

(c.

A.D.

293);

μηδὲ

ψυχρεύση

| P. Ross.-Georg.

(HI ’A.D.).

564. The prohibitive subjunctive and the imperative sometimes run parallel: μὴ οὖν περιίδηις ἡμᾶς μὴ καταάσχης Κλέωνα

1.

pp.

For the

18-50.

καταφθαρέντας, ἀλλ᾽ ἀντιλαβοῦ P.SJ 330, 6 [2358-237 καὶ σινπροα γενοῦ Κ͵λέωνι καὶ αἴτησον βί ων. bog,

use of the prohibitive

See also

Horn,

subjunctive

in

op. cit.. pp. 93 ff.

254

the

Ptolemaic

papyri

see

B.c.): 11-12

Mavser

ii,

SUBIUNCTIVE αφῆς

i/A.D.):

P.Oxy. | ὄχλει

1581, αὐτοῖς

5-7 (n/A.D.]: τοὺς τέκτοιες P.Oxy. 120, 25-7 [I /A.D.)i;

P.Oxr.

1898,

1-2

ποιήσῃ

xai

βέμβεσθαι,

$4 564 . 568

ἀλλὰ

eis

μὴ ἀφῆς ἡπόδεξε,

epyaaı'ar

αὐτὸν

ὅλως ἀργῆσε καὶ μὴ ἐπσης

Bade

(= -σαιὴ)' τὸν aira

(vi A.D].

prohibitive

subjunctive

ἀργεῖν

PROHIBITIONS

[early

565. The

μὴ

IN

subjunctive

is also

connected

with

the jussive

in the same sentence: ...

καὶ

GuyTayms

απολυσὴ

αὐτὸν

...,

καὶ

un

συνχωρήση

P.Oxr.

1845,

3-4 (vi or vii’A.D.); μὴ ἀκούσης αὐτῶν wai πέμπεις (— -ns}: (notice the use of the present; apparently it equals the future indicative) P.Oxr. 1862, 32

(vii /A.D.);

etc.

(See 506).

566. The prohibitive subjunctive is occasionally introduced by a verb signifying to "entreat", “beseech”, which moderates the sense of the command: in this case papyri mostly (as in Attic) have infinitive with μή. Here, however,

it is the idea of prohibition which

the writer wants to stress, the

introductory verb being simply a “particle” equivalent “please”.

E.g.

with

παρακαλῶ:

παρακληθεὶς... καλῶ

σε,

|...

κύριέ

μου,

( = ἀπολέσῃς)

in meaning to English

τὸ

[—

μὴ pe

τὰ

κατάσχης (=:

an)

P.Fay.

βάλης

πράγματά

tog,

10-11

|? λύπην

oov

εἰς

P.Oxr.

(early τὸ

1874,

Vo

1;A.D.]; xi

cou

17-18

ἀλλὰ παρακαὶ

amoAnme

(vi/a.D.);

ete.

567. With regard to tenses, the aorist is regularly used, but certain passages

show the use of the present: un ἀγωνιᾷς P.Oxy. 744, 4 (1 B.c.). Hunt-Edgar

suggested aywvido«ns» in P.Sel. 105, which is not acceptable because of the context, which points to a linear action. The present occurs also in: περὶ τῶν βοῶν ; μὴ ἀμελὴς (apeAncon>s Edd.) μηδὲ ϑλεῖβε αὐτὰ P.Tebt, 423, 7-B (early ii;A.D.); βλέπε δαὶ ( - δὲ] μὴ apaplrjarns κί αἱ eve] δρεύσῃς τοὺς ἀν θρώπους] P.Oxy. 1773, 33-4 [iii /4.D.); ἀλλ] ἃ uly ἀμελῆς, παράσχεις | αὐτί ᾧ]

B.G.U. 1489,

1682, 7

12-13

(late

(c. A.D. 300);μὴ ἐνοχλεῖς

iit/A.D.);

[un

ὀλιϊγωρῆς

[δια]

(— τὸν

-ῆς : evoxAe«s) ἀδελφόν

pov

Edd.)

P.Oxr.

P.Ross.-Georg.

iii 19, 10 (vi-vii;A.D.); cf. 361. 568. The

attestation

of μή τ present

subjunctive

is sufficient

to

make

us

reject the attempt of some editors to reform it according to the Attic norm. In fact, this construction is used by extension of the frequent μή with aorist subjunctive, facilitated by the notion of linear action which is involved.

The same construction tive,!

is used

in Modern

Greek

for the present impera-

1. That the present subjunctive was used in prohibitions in the post-Ptolemaic period appears

from

the rules

of the grammarians

in

255

Herodian's

time:

τὸ μὴ

ἀπαγορευτικὸν

οὐ

48 568 (1) - 570

FUTURISTIC

SURJUNCTIVE

(1) In papyri of the Byzantine period we find the construction of μή with the aorist imperative, e.g. μὴ ἀμελήϊσατε B.G.U. 1082, 9-10 (iv/A.D.); P.Jews 1916, 28 (c. A.D. 330-340}; C.P.R, 236, 4 (v-vi/A.D.); P.Flor. 359, B (vi/A.D.); μὴ θελήσατε | P.Icnd. 20, 6 (vi or vii/A.D.); an οὖν ὀλιγωρήσατε B.G.U. 874, 11 (Byz.); etc.

(2)

These

examples,

although

sporadic

and

quite

late,

are

sufficient

to

justify un aueAnola]re of P.Lond. 248, 8 (c. a.v. 346) in P.Abinn. 43 instead of the regular μὴ apedArons.! (3) The construction of μή with aorist imperative was, in any case, irregular, and this is betrayed by an accidental ing passage: ἐὰν μὴ

γράφω

P.Oxy.

1862,

ously

σοι | καὶ βουλζλγεύσωῳ 55-7

(vii/A.D.):

wrote first

πέμψε

η of

slip

τὴν

πέμψης

of

the

ἐπιστολὴν

the

pov, : μηδὲν

is corrected

(=: imperative).

pen in

(See 684

from

follow-

πέμψης

ἐκεῖ

e; the writer obvi-

(1) ).

569. Futuristic subjunctive: The aorist subjunctive is sometimes used to denote that which may be the outcome of the present situation under certain circumstances: παραλάβωμεν

(not

24

EAaddso|» λυπόν,

ἐὰν

dofn

σοι

"let us take " as translated in P.Se/.

τοί 01 vs 408,

τὸ

ἀπόστιλον

12-15

(mid.

(A.D. 346)

|...

ἢ warlres

iv/A.D.);

"and

...

[xai

a] μα

at the same

time

(1) The relationship between been discussed in 540f.

P.Fay.

123,

110, but

em

δυνηθῶ

1 shall

(c.

A.D.

100);

"we shall take"); ἢ rov-

ἀνανέγκωμεν ἐγὼ

13-14 | τὸν

εὐπορεῖ!

be able

future indicative and

δεσπότην σθ]αι

to have

P.Lond.

P.Lond.

238,

the means.”

aorist subjunctive

has

570. The futuristic sense of the aorist subjunctive appears also in negative

sentences introduced by ov un,? which expresses an emphatic

future nega-

tion. This mode of expression is Classical, and occurs occasionally in N.T. (excluding the present tense). In papyri the use of οὐ un with subjunctive does not prove itself as truly established. Mayser, ti', p. 233, enumerates eight examples, and in post-Ptolemaic times we find some sporadic uses,?

συντάσσεται ὑποτακτικοῦ ἐνεστῶτι Philet. 436; so also οὐκ ἐμεῖς ἐπὶ ἐνεστῶτος τύπτης, ἀλλὰ μὴ τύπτε Thom. Mag. 233. See Jannaris, Hist. Gr., App. v, 16 b. -

i. See Horn,

op. cit.. pp.

*

-

Horn,

op.

cit.,

.

:

1

^

,

100 f.

2. On this construction see the chapter 3. Sce

:

pp. 92

in Moulton's Prof., pp.

ff.

256

187-92.

-

μὴ

DELIBERATIVE

SUBJUNCTIVE

$8 570 - 574

most of which occur in Theon's letter P.Oxy. 119 (ii-iii/a.D.): οὐ μὴ γράψω, od | un λάβω 6-7, οὔτε πάλι χαίρω | σε 7-8, od μὴ dalyw, od un πείϊνω 14-15: notice the presents χαίρω and πίνω. 571. Deliberative. Direct or indirect questions about what is to take place are expressed by the deliberative subjunctive. This construction is found in Classical Greek as well as in N.T. In both regions the future indicative can be used in the same sense, because the deliberative subjunctive refers to future time. In the N.T., especially, this subjunctive has sometimes more

a futuristic than a volitive meaning. Cf. ev τῷ ξηρῷ ri γένηται; Luke 23: 31 (but γενήσεται in DK andal.). In many cases the N.T. mss. fluctuate between subjunctive

and

future.’

§72. The situation in papyri presents a distinctive picture. First, in the Ptolemaic papyri the deliberative subjunctive was used only in indirect questions; eight examples are quoted by Mayser, ii}, pp. 235 f., all in dependent clauses. Similarly in post-Ptolemaic papyri : ἐπιζητεῖ ...!... πῶς ἐϊπιθῆταί

μοι P.Flor. 332, 6-8 (li/a.p.); etc. 573. In papyri and N.T., the deliberative subjunctive is sometimes introduced by θέλω (also βούλομαι in N.T.). This construction is known to Classical Greek,* but the picture presented here requires a special discussion. Some N.T. examples are obviously deliberative questions: θέλεις ... συλλέξωμεν;

Matt.

13:28;

βούλεσθε

οὖν ἀπολύσω ...; John 18: 39; ποῦ θέλεις Eror-

μάσωμεν; Luke 22:9; so also in papyri: πῶν (= πῶς) θέλις γένηται; P.Oxy.

2150, 8 (iii/A.D.). We

must notice that in all these

@éAw+subj.

passages

(of N.T. and papyri) the subject of θέλειν is different from that of the subjunctive; in other words we have a deliberative subjunctive depending on the volition of the person addressed. Thus, “we” express a doubt, but we ask "another person" standing outside our situation to direct our action; and our action depends on the other person's will.

The

Subjunctive

574. Fearing. The subjunctive with 1. See Moulton-Turner.

in

Secondary

μή,

Clauses

μήποτε, μήπως appears after verbs

p. «y.

2. See Xen. Hell, iv 1, 12; Orc. 16, 8; Soph. EI, 89; O.T. 651; Ph. Pl. Gorg. 521; Prot, 317: Rep. 306a: Phaed. 95. Cf. LSJ s.v. θέλω.

762:

Ar.

Ey.

36;

257 B. G.

Mandilaras

The

Verh

in tie Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

"Pa

88 374 - 876

SUBJUNCTIVE

IN SECONDARY

CLAUSES

of expression of "fear" or of kindred notions, as in Classical Greek. In the Ptolemaic papyri thts construction occurs after ἀγωνιῶ, προορῶμαι, προσέχω, φοβοῦμαι. In the post-Ptolemaic papyri this construction is confined to such examples as: ὑφορῶμαι δὲ μή τίς μοι ἔνκλησις γένηται) B.G.U. 650, 11 (A.D. 46-47); erAaßorμενὸς τε μὴ, ὡς εἶπεν, καὶ ἔργῳ διαπράξηται B.G.U. 242. 16-17 (A.D. 180-192).

575. A notion of "fear" is also expressed by aorists subjunctive which are introduced by the imperatives βλέπε and dpa, e.g. βλέπε

| δὲ μηδενὶ

[aAAws

ποιήσης]

Spa

un

αὖν

P.Oxy.

ἄλλῳ

dois

P.fand.

αὐτόν: κατάσχης

532,

15

(ii /A.D.};

A.D.); dl’ dpa 6-7 (iv/A.D.).

μὴ

| χαλκὸν

20,

9

(vi or

B.G.U. ἀλλ᾽ ὅρα

warradiyns

P.Lips.

106,

17-19

(A.D.

98);

βλέπε

un

ἄλλως

un

ἐπι-

vi /A.D.).

37,

5-6

(A.D.

50):

un

κατάσχητε

μαι

{.= pe)

ὅρα

P.Oxy.

θλιβόμενον

οὖν 65, 5

mpatns

(iii or early

POxy.

120

iv/

(verso),

(1) The fact, however, that these subjuncttves also express a prohibition makes some grammarians class this construction under the prohibitive subjunctive.? 576. Purpose. Papyri manifest great versatility in expressing purpose. The constructions of iva (örws) with subjunctive, and of the infinitive, the basic function of which is to express goal, constitute the matn methods used. In addition, papyri use some other means to express purpose, e.g. iva (wore) with infinitive (see 775 f.), the articular infinitive (see 806 ff.) the prepositional infinitive (see 839 fT), and sometimes the participle (see 899). Some of these constructions are continuations of Classical Greek, and occur also in other writings of the post-Classical period, while others are found only in papyri. Final clauses introduced by ὅπως av and ws av are strictly confined to Ptolemaic papyri, and especially to official documents.? The main introductory conjunction of the final clauses is ira which, after overcoming ὅπως, came to be the almost exclusive means of expressing final relation. From the examination of 247 letters covering the period of the

1. See Mavser, p. 99. 3. So

Horn,

ii!, pp. 238 f. For this construction

op. cit., p.

3. Sce Jannaris,

tot;

Hist. Gr.,

Moulton-Turner,

§ 1761

and

in the

p. 7%.

Moulton-Turner, 250

N.T.

p. 106.

see

Moulton-Turner,

PURPOSE papyri we enumerate ἵνα and ὅπως: r

Period | iii/B.C. Iii |

Letters. 30 '

the following results referring to the occurrences

n

| 25 | 13

|

14

|

ἢ

I

of

i

/B.C. ' Wn. C. | i /4.D. | ii /A.D.'iii/ A.D. iv/A.D. | V /^.D.jvi /A.D.! vii /A.D. Ä |

EN

iva

§§ 576 - 578

| 13

| 21

BEEN

8.

31

45

9

22

7|

u

16

18 | 25

29

5

| 12.

577. Compare the above figures with those obtained from sentative authors of earlier or contemporary times: Thuc.

Homer | Hat. iva

9

17

ὅπως

145

107

32

.

| Xen.

‘ (whole) (HG ii): 52 |

96

114

156.

|

certain

Polyb.

14

repre-

-

Plato

av)

—

NT.

368

62

746

23

_

58

(I) Notice also that the poets of the Classical period as well as the Attic orators favoured ἵνα and this preference is clearly reflected in the Koine, especially in the private letters and the N.T. The statistics taken from Mayser, ii!, p. 246 and pp. 256 f., show that the proportion of iva and ὅπως is almost the same for the iii-1/B.C.(i.e. 302 iva, 260 ὅπως plus 48 ὅπως d» = 308 total). This, however, has validity only if private and official documents are taken together. From our investigation referring only to private letters of the same period different figures emerge (i.e. 47 letters give 29 iva and 23 örws). It follows then that the excess of ὅπως in Mayser's statistics is due to its frequency in the official documents.

Meanings and constructions of wa 578. Introductory iva. of tva and especially cause in most cases interpreter; both the Often beside the final 1. Cf. Ph. Weber,

It is sometimes difficult to define the precise sense to decide between its final and resultative force, beits sense depends on the orientation of the modern context and syntax are then not in the least helpful. sense of iva there stands a resultative or imperatival

Entwickelungsgeschichte

der

259

Absichtssätze, Würzburg

1884.

$8 578 . 580

INTRODUCTORY

tra

nuance, which blurs the primary meaning of this particle. The principles which we follow to detect the meaning of ἕνα are: (a) When iva interchanges with ὅπως, it suggests a final sense. (b) When tva does not correspond to Classical usage, it suggests a nonfinal force.

(c) When

tva stands for the plain infinitive, it takes the sense of the

infinitive. (d) When tva substitutes for the imperative, or is used after verbs of commanding, ordering, exhorting, entreating, and persuading, it takes an imperatival meaning. The cases where tva introduces a clause can be illustrated under the following headings ;! 579. After like.

verbs

580. these or is The

verbs implying ability, fitness, arrangement, attempt, work. In we have the pure final use of tva as the verbal action appears, “so that one may" reach an aim; this aim is introduced by tra. which govern this construction are:

After cases done, verbs

expressing

wish .

or will, such

as εὔχομαι,

θέλω

and

the

(1) ἀγοράζω "buy", "purchase: see P.Cairo Zen. 39251, 4-5 (252 B.C.) ; P. Hib, 207, 15-18 (c. 260-245 B.c.). (2) ἀλλάσσω (middle) “exchange”: see P.Fay. 117, 20-1 (A.D. 108). (3) ἀνδρίζομαι "he a man”: see P.S.f. 402, 3-4 (mid. Wi /B.C.). (4) amoAvouac "be released”: sce P.Oxr. 11605, 11 (vi /a.D.). (5) ἐκworry "cut down: see P.Fay. 114, 14-16 (A.D. 100). (b) ἐκτινάσσω “shake out : see P.Fay. 117, 19-22 (A.D. 108). (On the meaning somenos, ἔρευναι, pp. {4} ffi. (7) ἐκχώννυμε (passive

of the verb see Kap"be removed: see

P.Fay. 110, 4-6 (A.D. 94). (8) ἐπισκενάζω "make preparations’: see P.Oxr. 1220, 12-14 (I /A.D.}; cf. Acts 21:15 where the verb is intransitive, (9) Aruralw "form into a lake": see βίων. 110, 11-13 (A.D. 94). (10) παρέχω "give, grant”: sce Ρ ΚΙ. 238, 4-8 (A.D. 262]. (11) ποιῶ "do": see P.Oxy.. 14H82, 7-8 (li iA. D.); P.Flor. 135*, 6-8 (A.D. 264); P.Oxy. 123, 1t-12 (liii or iv/A.n.). So also in the N.T.: Rev. 3:9; 13:12; 1%, 15; John 11:37; Col, 4:16, (12) axarıreo "dig: see P.Fay. t 10, 8-9 (A.D. G4). (13) συλλέγω “collect”, “gather”: see P.Flor. 127, 6-7 (A.D. 23b]. (ty) συντηρέῳ «ὦ "hold ^, "protect : see P Gen. 51, 22-3 (mid. ἐν /A.D.]. (13]. τίθημι "put , "place: see P.Oxs.. 742. 5-7 (2 eed. cf. John

1, For

matters

of convenience the sections

are

arranged

on the basis of the verb

of the

main clause. In some cases, however, iva expresses the purpose of the whole action noted by the main clause, and it does not, strictly speaking. depend on the verb of main clause. 200)

dethe

INTRODUCTORY 15:16, See also Mayser,

ii 77, 34-8

ii!, p. 241.

(16)

ἵνα

ὑπηρετέω

ἃ S580 - 583 "be of service”:

see

P.Grenf.

(iii-iv/A.D.).

581. After verbs of motion, and after verbs signifying “to bring” or “to send”. In the first case the intending person is, for the most part, the subject of the governing verb, in the second case the subject of the main verb brings or sends something so that someone may do something. Verbs attested under this heading are: (1)

ἀναπέμπω

"send

up":

see

P.Oxy.

1220,

3-5

(iii/A.D.).

(2)

ἀνέρχομαι

"come up”: see P.Oxv. 1937, 6-7 (vi or vii/A.D.). (4) ἀποστέλλω “send (write, instruct, order) a person to do something”: passim. (4) διαπέμπω (only middle) “send (messages) forward”: see P.Oxy. 1068, 5-6 (iii/A.D.); P.S.I. 1248, 23 (A.D. 235); (5) ἐντυγχάνω "appeal", “plead”: see P.S./. 486, 3-5 (258-257 B.c.); P.Ryl. 81, 17 ff. (c. A.D. 104). (6) ἐξέρχομαι "go out": see P.Flor. 338, 5-8 (iii/A.D.). (7) ἔρχομαι "come": passim. (8) καταπλέω "sail down": see P.Par. 48, 19-22 (153 B.c.). (0) παραγένομαι “arrive”: see P.Oxy. 1855, 8-9 (vi or vii/A.D.). (10) πέμπω “send”: passim. (11) φέρω “bring”, "deliver": see P.Giss. Univ.-Bibl. 20, 36 [151 half of iti/A.D.); P.Flor. 127, 22-6 (A.D. 256); P.Lond. 239, 18-19 (c. A.D. 346); etc. (12) So also with συντυγχάνω "meet", “join”: see P.Oxy. 743, 36-8 (2 B.c.); Mayser. ii, p. 241.

582. After verbs signifying to "have in mind”, "take care", "neglect", "succeed”, “fail”. The verbal idea here expresses the activity of the subject to bring forth a certain result. In this case ἕνα must be taken as consecutive. Verbs of this category are: (1) ἀμελέω "neglect": see P.Oxy. 1666, 21-2 (iii /A.D.). (2) ἀποτυγχάνω “fail”: see P.Oxy. 1841, 4-5 (vi/A.D.). (3) ἐνθυμέομαι "take care": see P.S.f. 436. 9-10 (248-247 B.c.); Mayser, ii!, p. 243. (4) ἐπιμέλομαι "arrange", “take care”:

passim.

(5) ἐπιοσκέπτομαι "visit": see P.Petrie ii 37 (i)

verso, 4-5

(c. 240 B.c.);

Mayser, ii?, pp. 242, 244. (6) προθυμέομαι “show zeal”: see P.Tebt. 23, 11 (119 or 114 B.C.) ; Mayser, ii!, p. 242. (7) προνοέομαι "take care”: passim; see Mayser, li?, pp. 242, 245. (8) προσέχω "pay attention”: see P.Hib. 147 (early iii/ B.C.); Mayser, ii!, p. 242. (9) σκοπέω “look out”: see P.Par. 61, 3 (156 B.c.); cf. Luke 11:35. (10) σπουδάζω “attempt”: passim; see Mayser, ii*, p. 242. (t1) φροντίζω "take care: passim see Mayser, ii', pp. 242, 243, 245: and the like. (12) So also with ὀλιγορέω "neglect": see P.Tebt. 27, 44 (113 B.C.); and cf. Gal. 6, 243 where the verb is constructed with the infinitive on the sense "neglect

583. After

to

do

verbs

something”.

signifying

to

See

Mayser,

"give",

ii!,

p.

“accept”,

242.

"allow",

“prevent”.

The

governing verb expresses an action, the result or purpose of which, introduced

by tva. will follow.

In this case it is not 21

discernible

whether

ira is pure

ἂν 583. 586

IMPERATIVAL

final, or pure consecutive. Most having this construction are:

fra

probably

both meanings

co-exist. Verbs

[1] δέχομαι “accept”: see P.Par. 23, 22-3 (163 B.c.); Mayser, iı!, p. 242 and 244. (2) δίδωμι (also compound with ém-} “give”, "deliver": passin. (3) caw "allow": see P.Oxy. 1838, 2-3 (vi’a.D.); etc. 14) So also καταβάλλω “pay”: see P.Perrie ii 16, t0 (mid. iniB.c.).

584. After verbs letter);

these

signifying to “declare”,

verbs

are

constructed

“inform”,

with

the

“mention”

consecutive

(usually by

tva,

though

the

final sense of the conjunction cannot be excluded from all the instances. In addition iva is determined as imperatival, especially in the cases where the governing verb expresses a nuance of demanding. This construction is found with the following verbs: (1) by

ἀναφέρω

"report : see

letter ': see

P.Perrie

ii

ti

P.Lond. (2),

3-4

232, (mid.

P. Κι!

233, 8-9

13-13 iii

(ii ’A.D.).

(iv’A.D.).

B.c.);

PS

(3) 434.

(2)

ἀντιγραῴω

“inform

anmoypadaopar

"register": see

3

B.c.);

(261-260

Mayser,

it, p. 245. (4) γεωρίζω "make known: see P.Lond. 232, 5-06. (iv:;A.D.). (5) Sylow "declare ": passim. (0) ἐμφανίξω "make known: see P.S.J. 400,2 (iil! B.C.). {7) λέγω "make clear: passim. (8B) μιμνήσκομαι “remind: see P.Lille 8, 11-12 (tii ee): PS 502. 4-5 (247-250 B.c.). (9) σημαύίω "make known: see P.Fay. tig, 20-1 (c. A D. 100).

585. Imperatival ἵνα. "Ira with the subjunctive can be used as a periphrasis for the imperative or the imperatival infinitive. In this case ira can either depend on a governing verb or be used independently. 586. Ἴνα

imperatival

depending

on a governing

verb.

This

construction

is

found after verbs signifying to "request", "ask", “beg”, “beseech”, "1mplore” and the like, or after verbs denoting to “order”, “exhort”, "command ' and

the like.

These

verbs

are

not,

however,

far from

expressing

purpose

at the same time, but it is not the aim of the action but the execution of the action which is expressed by the tva-clause, and which the writer wants to emphasize. In other words the statement of the governing verb is of secondary significance; it is only expressed to soften or exemplify the command and in such a case it equals the English "please". The imperatival ta is found after the following verbs:

1. Cf.

Moulton,

Prol.,

pp.

118

f.; 217;

Infinitive im Griechischen, |. Uppsala, ton-Turner,

pp. 0.4. f. (with

Kalen,

Selbständige

Finalsätze

und imperativische

1941. pp. 19 fT.; Blass-Debr.-Funk. καὶ 387

liti. See also

Bauer's

262

Lexicon

s.v.

tra 2.

(3] : Moul-

IMPERATIVAL

(1)

ageow

A.D.}.

"ask": passim.

(3)

γράφω

(2)

ἀπαιτέω

“command

in

iva

85 586 - 588

"demand":

writing":

passim.

see P.Oxy.

1932,

7-8

(vj

(4)

"request:

see

δέομαι

P.Petrie ii 4 (13, 5-6 (255-254 B.C.); P.Oxy. 1762, 10-12 (ii or iii/A.D.); cf. Luke 9:40; 21:36; 22:32. (5) 5»4ow "tell": passim. (6) ἐντέλλομαι "command ": passim,

(7)

émoréAAw

θέλω "wish": passim. “command”: passim.

"instruct":

(10) (12)

passin.

(8)

épwrdw

"ask":

κελεύω "give orders": passim. (It) mapaxaAéw “request”: passim. etc.

587. The imperatival iva used independently. When

passim.

(9)

πηαραγγέλλω

such governing verbs as

those of the preceding section are not expressed in the sentence, the command

denoted by the tva-clause is presented independently. This has made Moulton-Turner class the imperatival ἕνα under the independent uses of the subjunctive.! The imperatival tva, however, introduces a sentence which is an analysis of the imperatival infinitive (see 756 f.). In the course of the development of the language this fact was blurred and the imperatival ἵνα became merely a substitute for the imperative. (1) This construction is known to the Greek languge since the time of the tragedians,? and it is still in use in Modern Greek in the construction of va with

subjunctive

(2nd

and

3rd

persons)

denoting

a sense

of a milder

imperative. 588. The post-Ptolemaic papyri, as well as the N.T..? make use of the imperatival tva frequently, while the Ptolemaic papyri show a few instances of this construction, in all of which the idea of a governing verb is present.’ See also: καὶ €pia μοι ἵνα dyupatnys padalx|a Signifying "to order " 1s understood

περὶ of ἐὰν | ypiav σχῆς, ἵνα λάβης

P.Hib. 207, 15 (c. 260-245 B.C.) (a verb from the context); ἔγραψα τῷ abeAda ὅτι,

P.Oxy.

1769, 6-7

(i /A.D.]

(notice that ὅτι

is equal to quotation marks, and ira then must be connected καθὼς ἐγραψές μοι ἐχθὲς διὰ πλοῖον, tva μα θη (— let him know)

1. See Moulton-Turner,

with γράφω); | οὖν, δέσποτα,

pp. 94 f.

2. Cf. Soph. O.C. 156-7 : ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα rad’ ἐν a φθέγκτῳ μὴπρ οπέσης νάπει. "Iva + subj. in commands is "an innovation in Hellenistic" according to Moulton, Prof., pp. 178 f. who sets the Sophoclean passage aside as solitary and dubious. The language of tragedians, however, often betrays colloquialisms, and this passage should be taken as such. Cf. scholion on

τως

this passage

ἵνα παραγένῃ

3. Moulton-Turner, ^. See

Mayser,

πρὸς

by

Didymus:

ἐμέ, βούυλομαί

p. 95, claim

nt, pp. 221

the

κατὰ

τὴν

ἡμετέραν

aoc τι σημαίνειν. imperatival

f.

263

tva as

συνήθειαν

See

εἰώϑαμεν

Radermacher,

virtually

λέγειν

N.T.,

a Semitism.

p.

ot-

138.

S6 588 - 590

IMPERATIVAL

Ort wAginy οὐκ €vi εἰς τὸν ὅρμον P.Oxy. Ci.

Luke

20:28

Μωσῆς

ἔγραψεν

1867, 14-15

ἡμῖν,

καὶ οὗτος ἄτεκνος ἦ, iva λάβη ὁ ἀδελῴος

τῷ ἀδελφῷ

αὐτοῦ

iva

ἐάν

(vii /A.D.): γράφω

τινὸς

αὐτοῦ

adeAdos ἀποθάνη

τὴν γυναῖκα

understood. ἔχων

γυναῖκα,

καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ

σπέρμα

(ira depends on ἔγραψε indirectly).

These instances point evidently to the relationship of tva to the infinitive. 589. In other cases, occurring especially in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, the imperatival iva-clause is used as a substitute for the imperative, as can be well exemplified by (a) the construction of {va with the imperative (see 728), (5) the alternation of the tva clause and the imperative, (c) the fact that tva is accompanied by expressions rendering an imperatival sense, and (d) the

fact that the Zva-clause is used as apodosis of conditional sentences. E.g. éméyov τῷ δακὶ τυλιστῇ Ζωίλωι wat eiva αὐτὸν μὴ δυσωϊ πήσης “give heed to the measurer (7) Zoilus; don't look askance at him” P.Far. 112, t1-13 (A.D. 99]: notice the preceding imperative éméyov; cf. Eph. 3:33 ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυraixa οὕτως ἀγαπάτω ὡς ἑαυτόν, ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἵνα φοβῆται τὸν ἄνδρα: tva connected with the preceding imperative ἀγαπάτω, wa οὖν πληρώσῃς | αὐταὺς τὴν τιμὴν καὶ αὐτῆς τῆς ὥρας ἀπὸ λύσῃς αὐτοὺς P.Lond. 243, 11-14 (c. A.D. 346): notice the imperatival nuance of the expression αὐτῆς τῆς ὥρας "immediately. ἐὰν δὲ madi στρατευν' θῆ, tv|a συντηρήσῃς avrov P.Gen. 51, 21-2 (mid. iv/A.D.), ἵνα

used

as apodosıs

dr r4 χρίαν ἔχωσιν

of

the

ἐὰν

protasis.

So

also

ἐὰν araßns

οἱ τὰ στρωϊτῖα, eira abroisfaroyaAnst{cross

τῇ

ἑορτῇ,

is mine:

ἵνα ὁμὸσε

for ἀπαγγέ-

Ans P.Abinn. 311 P.Lond. 239, 21-2 (c. A.D. 346); «| ἵνα] αὐτὰ θρέψης, τὰ μέγιστα μοι | xapli]Zouevos "please look after them, so doing me the greatest favour " P.Gen. 55, 15-16 (mid. iv/A.D.): in. P.Abinn. 30 (= P.Gen. 55) there is no punctuation before ira, consequently the meaning here differs from my translation. (In addition a comma must be put after χαριζόμενος, not a full stop). (I) Note: The tmperativa! sense of iva is well illustrated by the following passage, where iva i5 constructed with the imperative: μνημόνευε οὖν, θεία, ws ζώσης τῆς μητρὸς μου, εἶνα, εἴ Teva εὐμίπκις, πέμπε mans ἐμέ (punctuation is mine). P.Bour. 29, 12-14 liv/a.D.); the meaning "remember, you find anyone coming here, as you used to do when

The writer of this letter (a niece] intended

aunt. to write to me, if my mother was alive".

to use a iva - clause limperatival),

but when coming 1o express the verb she forgot the introductory ἵνα and she used the imperative

that she had already put instead of subjunctive.

590. Causal sense of ἵνα. The question of causal tva is a crux in some passages of N.T.! In general the causal sense of tva must be taken for granted

1. See

Jannaris,

carly Christianity

Hist,

Gr., ὁ 17142

AT.

Robertson,

1927, pp. 40 (fh. Moulton-Turner,

26}

“The

Causal

p. 102.

Use

of In”,

Studies in

REMARKS

ON

THE

USE

OF

iva

$§ 590 - 593

as confirmed by Apollonius Dyscolus (ii/A.D.), who acknowledged the final as well as the causal use of it (cf. Gramm. Graeci ii 2, 382, 2) explaining that iva φιλολογήσω παρεγενήθη Τρύφων is identical with διότι ἐφιλολόγησα... No doubt this was so in papyri as well as in N.T. "Iva as causal makes good sense in the following passages: ἠγωνίασα,

κύριε,

[εὐχαριστοῦμεν

418, 3-5 abounds

ov

μετρίως,

τί ᾧ] Bew...

ἵνα

ἀκούσω

| ὅτι

ἐνώθϑρευσας

|... ἵνα περισσεύη τὸ φόβος

(c. A.D. 346) “we give thanks in you” (different translation

"because

| τοῦ

I heard...

θερῦ ἐν oot P.Lond.

to God..., because the fear of God in P.Abinn. 7); perhaps similar iva

περεισσεύσῃ ἡ ἀγάπη aov Jhid,, 7. Notice that equal to ἵνα) can introduce a causal clause rafıs, i*, p. 243].

in Modern Greek γιὰ va (== διά va (see Tzartzanos, Νεοελληνικὴ Xvi-

§91. Remarks on the use of ἵνα. In the passage ταχέως πρὸ τοῦ ἡγεμόϊνος mapayevod, iva ἄν] δυνασθῶμεν τὸν μικρὸν] ἐπικρεῖναι “come quickly before the prefect, in order that we may be able to have the youngster examined” P.Hamb. 86, 7-10 (ii/A.D.) the curious

ἕνα av construction

if punc-

tuated differently, thus tva, av δυνασθῶμεν,... ἐπικρεῖναι points to the vulgar construction of tva plus infinitive (see 75). Iva

ἄν is Classical

(see LSJ

s.v.), but there ἵνα is an adverb of place and not a final conjunction.) "Iva, however, in the above instance is undoubtedly final, so it must be distinguished from the Classical usage, and be connected with the infinitive which follows. 592. An irregular use of iva appears in the following passage

dation of the editors, e.g. δηλώσας τὴν rovrov πᾶσιν γνώντες συμβάλεσθε αὐτῷ P.Jews 1915, 12-13 (c. A.D. of a in ἕνα» is suggested by Hunt and Edgar in however, makes excellent sense, if ın is considered Meaning

and uses

after the emen-

πρᾶξιν, | 330-340). P.Sel. 160. to stand

καὶ ὑμῖς The addition The context, for ἣν.

of ὅπως

591. “Ὅπως following a verb which is constructed with ἕνα in most instances

has the meaning which tva could have in its place. Ὅπως alone is found only after certain verbs repeatedly attested in official documents. In N.T. ὅπως is confined

almost

to

final

sentences

and

particularly

after

verbs

signify-

ing “to beseech”. |. This construction is also attested once explains it on the analogy of. mecs n.

in the

Zh,

"

Ptolemaic

papyri;

Mayser,

i!, p. 246,

88 594 . 596

MEANING

594. In papyri number

AND

USES

OF

ὅπως

iva and ὅπως are found after the following verbs (the first

indicates

the occurrences

of iva, the second

those of ὅπως,

as at-

tested in our collection); ἀναπέμπω 1/1; ἀναφέρω 1/1; ἀξιῶ 6/3; ἀποδίδωμι 1/1; ἀποστέλλω 11/4; γράφω 34/17; δέομα: 2/2; δηλῶ 5/2; διασαφέω 1/2; δίδωμι

9/1;

ἐμφαυίζω

1/1;

ἐντέλλομαι

9/1;

€

τυγχάνω

2/2;

ἐπιδίδωμ!

1/2;

JmeyseAdopat 11/5; ἐπιστέλλω 3/8; ἔρχομαι 5/1; ἐρωτῶ 5/2; εὔχομαι 6/5; Keλεύομαι 4/1; λέγω 7/1; μιμνήσκομαι 2/1; wapuyyéAAw 2/1; παραγίνομαι 1/2; πέμπω 1006/1; ποιῶ 3/3; πορεύομαι 1/1; συνίστημι 1/1; συντάσσω 2/0; ὑπογράφω

προσαναφέρω 1/1: σπουδάζω 1/1; φροντίζω 10/5.

3/1:

595. The fact that in these constructions both iva and ὅπως depend on the same governing verb points to the tdentical meaning of the two conjunctions.

Numerically, however, the higher frequency of ἕνα is evident. This reflects the tendency of the Koine in general to use iva in all expressions of final relations.’ Consequently the distinction which existed between iva and ὅπως in Classical Greek was blurred, so ἕνα could be used for ὅπως (and vice versa, to a lesser degree);? ὅπως was finally driven out of use. In its develop-

ment, however, it ὀφείλω "to know confused with the "that" in indirect

passed over to the that I owe" B.G.U. interrogative πῶς questions: cf. oldas

sphere of ὅτι (= that): γνοῦναι ὅπως 846, 16 (ii/a.n.), because it could be meaning “how” as interrogative, and yap πῶς αὐτοῦ ἑκάστης ὥρας χρήζω"

"for you know that I need it (him) all the time” B.G.U. 37, 6-7 (A.n. 50). (1)

Such a use led to further restriction of the final örws which

in Modern

Greek

596. Relative

survives

as πώς (= that).4

clauses.

Relative

clauses

in subjunctive

of uncertainty and supposition. Sometimes

introduce

an

element

the relative clause is equivalent

to a conditional clause, as in the case of €]a» τινος χρείαν exnıs

P.Petrie

iii 42 (G 9), 7 (mid. iii/B.c.); etc. so also τοὺς éàv χρίαν ἔχης ὁ δεσπότης pov, παρέχετέ σοι ἐκεῖ P.Lond. 239, 10-11 (c. A.D. 3.46) corresponding to

the usual expression περὶ ὧν ἐὰν χρεία" ἔχης. This relation between relative and conditional clauses produced a hybrid form of conditional clauses I. See also Jannaris,

Hist. Gr.

§§

1761-60.

ὅπως

2. Cf. p ἵνα al. [7 (sic) P.Gor. 12, 4. (end of iii-beg. of iv/A.D.) ὅπως by the writer himself. 3. The final ὅπως occurs in Modern Greek

plication

forms”

after

where

tva

is replaced for

only in the official language, especially tin “ap-

παρακαλῶ.

26b

RELATIVE

in subjunctive introduced

233,

10

CLAUSES

sy 596 - 598 (1)

by εἰ with the particle av (or car)

εἶ τι ἄν... axi. mw (= Similarly ἢ τι (.- εἴ τῇ

P.Lond.

- TEMPORAL

inserted. E.g.

σχῶσιν) P.Oxy. 1068, 20-1 (Ili /A.D.) — 8 re àv σχῶσιν, δ᾽ ἂν δῆς P.Gen. 46. 12 (A.D. 345) ; εἴ τι eae... dvadwans

(A.D.

345);

etc.!

597. The general relative clauses almost competing with ἐάν in the Ptolemaic

invariably contain

papyri,

but

the particle ὧν

it disappears

almost

en-

tirely from the post-Ptolemaic papyri.? Contructions without av (edv) are rare, and they are confined to such examples as : περὶ ὧν βούλη | κέλευέν μοι P.Lond. 405, 13-14 (c. A.D. 346); similarly περὶ! [ὦν βούλει xe[A]evé μοι P.Gen. 50, 17-18 (c. A.D. 346); dvriypaot ( - -ψον)

περὶ ὧν βαύλῃ ypade

P.Par.

P.Gen, 46, 22

62,

15-16

(mid. iv /A.D.), but with ar: περὶ ὧν dv βούληι,

[175

B.C.);

and

similarly

περὶ

ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῆτε,

γραψατέ

| μοι

P.Grenf. ii 36, 14-15 (07, B.C.) ; περὶ ὧν Av αἱρῆσθε, ypa deré μοι P.Lips. 104, 13-14 (96-95 B.C.) ; wat σὺ᾽ dr, ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς, ypade μοι P.Oxy. 743, 38-9 κέλευς περὶ ὧν ἐὰν βούλει (=-An) P.Lond. 231, 14 (mid. iv/A.D.).

(2 B.c.);

598. Temporal? Temporal clauses in subjunctive are for the most part accompanied by the particle av. It is only with ἕως and πρίν (and its variants πρὶν οὗ, προτοῦ) that àv can be omitted. The present subjunctive occurs with ἕως (dv), μέχρι dv, ὅταν, ws av, and it denotes an indefinite continuance in either past or future. The aorist subjunctive appears with the other temporal conjunctions, and it points to a definite. future event preceding or following (according to the

meaning

of the conjunction)

the action

of the

the main verb. In particular the temporal! clauses in subjunctive are introduced by the following

temporal

conjunctions

(or

adverbs).

(The

following

entries

are

arranged alphabetically). (I)

&xp:

none

in

papyri,

9 in NT.

1. See P.Abínit. 58, note on line 10, where more examples of this construction are cited. Wackernagel's explanation (Kleine Schr. ii, pp. 994 ff.) that the collocation εἴ τις (or τι) av (or cav) isthe Doric ar τις (or re) κα Atticized by the Koine seems most improbable. It is merely a substitute for ὃ τι ἄν due to the semantic equivalence between relative and conditional clauses, 2. For

ἐάν instead of ἄν in relatixe-conditiona!

clauses see Deissmann,

3. See Mayser, ti!, pp. 268-75. Moulton-Turner, pp. 110-14.

4207

N.B..

p.

13.

$3 598 (2) - 598 (14)

TEMPORAL

CLAUSES

(2) aAxpels) dv: none in Ptol. pap.; 1 in N.T.; 2 Univ.- Bibl. 20, 27-8 (ist half of it/A.D.); P.Oxr. (3)

axpıls)

of

(di) - none

in

Ptol.

pap.;

in post-Ptol. pap.:! 120, 13 (iv /A.D.j.

none

in N.T.;

see B.G.U. 1676, 9-11 (ii; A.D.); P.Oxy. 1668, 12-14 lend of iii/A.D.); P.Oxy. 1833. 5 (late v/A.D.).

4

in

see P.Giss.

post-Ptol.

(i; A.D.); PS

pap.:

299,

11-12

(4) «rar: 3 in. Ptol. pap.; r in N.T.; 2 in post-Ptol. pap.: see P.Oxy. 491, 14 (A.D. 126); P.S.7. 299, 17-19 (end of i :A.D.): cf. emar é[éy]wes ( - ns) P.Gen.

46, 7 (A.D. 345): so P.Abinn. 59: ἐπάναγκες (5)

ἐπειδαν:

2 in

Ptol.

pap.;

none

in

(6) Br,

ἔστ᾽ av: none in Ptol. pap.; none 11 (A.D. 247); P.Oxy. 120, 14-16

WB.

N.T.;

none

in

post-Piol.

pap.

in N.T.; 5 in post- Ptol. pap.: see P.AmaA. (iv/A.D.); P.Flor. 213. 8 (A.D. 235): 242,

8-9 (A.D. 254); 247, 8-9 (A.D. 256). (7)

ἕως;

indic ?) (A.D.

7 (aor.),

in

99);

1 (pres.)

in

post-Ptol.

pap.:

119,

(c. A.D.

I2-I5

22-3 (lit /&4.D.) : cf, ἕως.

Ptol.

see

pap.;

t1

P.Far.

100);

iaor.)

tit,

118,

αἱ dicopuyes ὕδωρ

in N.T.;

13-14

10-12;

(A.D.

24

μὴ ἔχουσιν

(A.D.

ἕως ore: none in

Ptol.

Ptol. pap.: see P.Oxy.

pap.; none in N. T. (but

1838, 3; 4-5

(10) ἕως οὖ: none in Ptol. pap.; pelovas

Θμοινεφώβθεως,

affair is investigated

P.Flor,

ἕως

οὗ

" P.Oxr.

μέχρι:

(12) μέχρι in N.T.

none ἄν:

in

3

Ptol.

faor.),

pap.; ı

ζητηθὴ

(with

1. The

ὁπηνίκ᾽ ἄν:

ἐάν for àv)

examples

from

3

(aor.)

none

(pres.)

in

the

in

tn

Ptol.

post- Ptol.

oh,

in N.T.;

1

(aor.)

in

ἕως ὅτου 3 times}: 5 ın post-

1867, 13-14 (vil /A.D.].

ὅλων

πρῆγμα

“..

(vir ar vil /A.D.) ; an

in

post- Ptol.

Ptol.

pap;

post-Ptolemaic on

pap.:

(aor.)

pap.: see

letters; the items have been also checked rences referring to the Ptolematc those referring to the N.T. through

18-20

P.Oxs.

maperéykac τοὺς until

the

ἀκούσης

whole

αὐτιὼν καὶ

ἐκεῖ, ἕως ot, ὡς εἴρηται, γράψω oe "do not whatever there, until, ax aforesaid, I write τὸ D.] In both passages the meaning of ἕως οὗ is not agree with the information quated by Moulpapyri las occasionally in N.T.) ἕως of is final.

(13) μέχρις oc: none in. Ptol. pap.; one pap: see P.4then. 21, 17 (A.D. 132). (14)

ro

1833, 6-7

1 (pres.

112,

133, 8-10 (A.D. 268).

11 in N.T.; 2 in post- Ptol. pap.:

πέμπεις | τίποτε {τί more Edd.) listen to them or send anything you P.Oxr. 1862, 32-4 (vir /A. temporal | - until), thus it does ton-Turner, p. tit, that in late (11)

(vi /4.D.);

(aor.),

tto);

(8) ἕως av: 44 [aor.). + (pres.) in Ptol. pap.: t8. faor.) post- Ptol. pap.: see P.Lond. 237. 12-14 (c. A.D. 346). (9)

6

95-96);

one

pap.;

none

in

in N.T.;

in

papyri

are

taken

the

basis

of

(aor.]

(but

28,

ἡνίκα

15-18.

from H'B.

pap.;

àv

once);

(A. p. 85);

our

collection

εἷς pp.

none

in post- Ptol,

The numbers

papyri are taken from Mayser. Moulton-Turner, pp. rra-113.

2068

in NT.

post-Ptol.

one

N.T.

P. Athen,

3 (aor.)

5

B.G.U.

of

193

of occur260-75.

and

CONDITIONAT.

SENTENCES

SS 598 (14) - 599

702, 23 {A.D. 151]; P.Giss. 53, 3-4 (iv/A.D.); 255, 7 (A.D. 599); A.P.F. v (1913) 38g

(verso),

223,

18.

(15) ὁπόταν: none in Ptol. pap.; none in N.T.; 2 {more in WB) pap.: see P.Lond. 246, B-9 (A.D. 346); similarly Jbid., 16-18. (16) ὅταν: 19 (aor.), 20 (pres.) 4 (aor.], 2 (pres.} in post-Ptol.

in Ptol. pap.: see

in post-Ptol.

pap.; 82 (aor.), 333 (pres.) in N.T.; P.Fay. 109, 1-2 {early i/A.D.); P. Rjl.

233, 2-3 lii/A.D.); P.Flor. 142, 9-11 (A.D. 264); P.Oxy. 1656, 26-8 (tii /A.D.): P.Gen. 52 (verso), 11-13 (mid. iv/A.D.); P.Oxy. 1868, 2-3 (vi or vii/A.D.). (17) πρίν: none in Ptol. pap. (instead of which πρὶν (5) or πρὸ τοῦ with infinitive occur); none in N.T. (at least in the critical edition, while twice in codd.): ı in post-Ptol. pap. (more in Horn, op. cit., p. 128); see P.S.I. 1080, 4-5 (iii /A. D.?). (18) πρὶν o2: none

Inv.

No.

1575,

(19) προτοῦ:

in Ptol.

18-20

pap.;

(early

none in Ptol. pap.

ı in post-Ptol. κατακρατήσωσιν

post-Ptol.

in

N.T.:

ı in post- Ptol.

(see πρὸ rod +

pap.: warafiwoy οὖν πάντως, | τὴν γῆν, πέμψαι uoc P.Oxy.

(20) ws dv: 49 laor.), 10 (pres.) in

none

pap.: see P.Lond.

iii /A.D.?]. infin., 860

(1]]; none

προτοῦ [πρὸ τοῦ Edd.} τὰ tiara 1854, 3-4 [vi or vii/A.D.).

in Ptol. pap.; 2 (aor.}. 1 (pres.)

N.T.; none

protases of conin the Ptolemaic N.T.! "Av for éar or parenthetically

in expressions such as dv σοι δοκῇ, av θέλῃ ὁ θεός.

Mayser,

in

pap.

599. Conditional sentences. The subjunctive occurs in the ditional sentences introduced by eav. "Hv appears rarely papyri, but never in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, nor in the occurs occasionally and especially in connection with rıs

I. See

in N.T.:

Date

ἐᾶν

ar

κἂν

Letters

i/ A.D.

6

I

—

13

ALD.

10

2

I

21

lii/A.D.

14

I

I

38

IV/A.D.

15

3

—

48

νίαν,

—

—

I

r1!

vI/A.h.

1

—

2

27

VIl/A.D.

5

-

=

37

TOTAL.

51

7

5

195

ii!, p. 275:

Moulton-Turner,

200

p.

113.

$$ 600 - 602 (1)

CONDITIONAL

600. From

of 193 letters dating within

an examination

SENTENCES

the first 7 centuries

of our era we find the following data concerning the introductory conjunctions eav and av: 601. In late papyri a confusion between the introductory conjunction appears

in the constructions

of ἐὰν with

lit.), and

of ec with

vice

versa

indicative

(see

the subjunctive,!

Mayser,

ti’ p. 284, with

e.g.

εἰ δὲ οὖν ἐπιμένητε τῇ αὐτῇ Eemnpiu μεταγνῶναι ἔχετε P.Grenf. ii 82, 16-17 Ic. A.D. 400]; εἰ μὴ ἡ χεὶρ τοῦ θεοῦ βοηθήση P.Ross.-Georg. iti 12, τ (vi /A.D.); etc.*

602. The conditional sentences are examined in this study according to their apodoses.

Thus,

for:

(a) The apodosis

in the present

indicative

see 217.

(b) The apodosis in the future indicative see 4or. (c) The apodosis in the imperative see 730. (d) The apodosis in the infinitive see 765. (1) Protases introduced by εἰ av (ἐάν) with subjunctive belong to relativeconditional sentences, so they are examined under the “Relative Clauses", see 396 f.

1. See

Moulton-Turner,

2. See also

Horn,

op.

p.

(16

eit.. p.

31:

Jannaris,

Hist.

270

Gr.,

αὶ i088.

OPTATIVE

Blass-Debr.-Funk, 13; Goodwin,

$$ 85; 384-6; Burton, MT,

MT,

$8 12-17

Origin as Futures, New

York

(esp. App.

δὲ 174-9;

Chantraine.

i}; E.A. Hahn,

1953; C. Harsing,

Subjunctive

Morph.?, and

De Optativi in chartis

$8 310-

Optative: their

Aegypttis usu, Bonn

1910; R. de L. Henry, The Late Greek Optative and its Use in the Writings of Gregory Nazianzen, Washington 1943: Horn, pp. 143 ff.; Jannaris, Hit. Gr., 88 1923-5 (esp. App. v) : Mayser, ii,’ pp. 288-96; Moule, /diom, pp. 23; 136; Moulton, Prol., pp. 179: 194-9; Moulton-Turner, pp. 118-33 (with lit.) ; C. Mutzbauer, Die Grundbeutung des Konjunktivs und Optativs und ihre Entwicklung im Griechischen, Leipzig and Berlin 1908; Robertson. pp. 325-7; 935-940; Schwyzer, Gr. Gr., i, pp. 793-7; ii, pp. 319-38 (esp.

*Der Opt. in nachkl. Zeit", pp. 337 f. with lit.) ; F. Slotty, Der Gebrauch des Konjunktivs und Optativs in den griechischen Dialekten, Götlingen

1915.

603. Introduction. Although it has been accepted in general that "wish" is the fundamental meaning of the Greek optative, the whole matter has been a source of controversy among the grammarians,! since there is no ground for assuming that “wish” was the primary function or even an essential function of the optative.? The question arises from the fact that the optative with ἄν was used to express a future possibility or potentiality, a meaning which could be also expressed by other verbal modes, e.g. the future indicative or the imperative. In addition, the subjunctive or the indicative, when transferred to the past by dependence on a verb of past time, could be represented by the optative. In both cases, the notion of "wish" is entirely absent from the functions of the optative. 604. The so-called optative of indirect discourse was no longer to exercise much influence on post-Classical compositions. The papyri show only a few instances, which are virtually limited to the Ptolemaic period,? while an equal number of instances attested thereafter are to be attributed to the documentary papyri which, under a literary style, follow the patterns of the Attic norm. In non-literary writings, the optative appears to be signally retreating

1. On this question see Goodwin,

MT.

2. Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 197, where reads

tva

χρηματισθήσοιτο..,

τισθῆ

σοι τὸ ὑπόμνημα

(=

P.Tor.

U.P.Z.

$$ 375 ff.

he is misled, 1

(il).

162).

31-2

A

(116

however, B.C.)

similar error

by a bad transcription, i.e. he

instead

of the

is found

in

correct

the

iva

form

xpnua-

ἀσθειἡ-

σοιμι P.Grenf. i 60, 40 la.n. 581) a restoration which has no ground. 4, Mayser, ii!, p. 294, cites 6 examples of the “Oblique Optative , and 5 of the optative in indirect

discourse.

271

$8

604 - 605

OPTATIVE

- ISTHODUCTION

before the subjunctive or the indicative.! The obsolescence of the optative is shown by the fact that writers attemptingto tmitate Attic are zealous to use the optative, but do it incorrectly by the Attic standard that they are,

trying to follow, e.g. tva τοῦτο εἰδέναι ἔχοις | ἐπιστέλλεταί σοι P.Oxy. 891 16-17 (A.D. 294) ἐπίι|δ[Πδωμί σοι τάδε ra €vypada...|... iv’ ἰδέναι ἔχοις P.Thead. 57, 5-6 (a.p. 317). Notice also the use of the optative in P.Bour. 20 (A.D.250):

dpiogs τίνι δέοι 21; ἵνα ply] ὁ παῖς... δυκοίη

36; εἰ yap

κἂν mpo[s]

tt βραχὺ τῆς χορηγίας | τούτων παραμελήσειεν, δυνήσεται κτὰ. 40-1τι € μή... προσαγάγοι...ἧ... ἐπιδίξειεν..."... ἐνταχθείη 46-8, the whole text betraying an Atticizing

style.

Similarly,

ἵν᾿]

ddvac

ἔχν,

ev τῇ

ὑμετέρᾳ

εὐδοκίμησιν

(for -μήσει) ! ἀναφέρω ra πάντα P.Oxy. 1830, 15-17 (vi/A.D.).* Next to ἕνα etδέναι ἔχοις Stands its variant iv’ εἰδείης attested regularly in petitions or official documents; see P.Oxy. 2228, 38 (a.n. 283°). Add ἐρρωμένον σε ἀπολάβοιμι P.Herm. Rees 6, 33 (iv/a.p.) against the stereotyped epistolary expression εὐχόμενος ἵνα σε ἀπολάβω. So also, in é€[p]pwudvov ae ἡ θίᾳ πρόϊνοιᾳ [δι]αφυλάξιεν P.Lond. 411, 27-8 (mid iv/A.p.), and similarly, P. Ross.-

Geor

iii 9, 22-3 (iv/A.p.) the construction is contrary to the usual διαφυ-

λάξη σε ἡ θεία πρόνοια. Appearance of optatives is characteristic of letters of the fourth century a.p.: see for example P.Herm. Rees Nos. 2; 3; and 5.

605. Apart from

these cases in which

the optative is used

under Atticist

influence, but in a manner contrary to the Attic norm, we find it in indirect questions and parenthetical clauses (see 653). In main clauses the opta-

tive is connected for the most part with expressions of wish,* notwithstanding the fact that wish could also be expressed

1. See example

in Mayser,

by other modes

of verb such

ii!, pp. 202-3.

?. Horn, op. cif., p. 143, argues that ἔχοις may be an error for ἔχῃς (the Edd. note: |. ἔχει (or £yn)). Certain examples of the optative can be explainedas due to misspellings, since, by thal time, the signs οἱ. «, ἢ were homophonous, but not all the optatives cited above fall under this interpretation. This further means that such forms as ¢yors were deliberately used by the writer as optatives. 3. We can assume £yv to be optative because when v is substituted for another spelling it normally represents oi, not « In); so in the Ptolemaic papyri [Mavser, t, op. too ff.;

108 ff.). In the post-Ptolemaic papyri, confusion of v with εἰς « and other signs representing the sound |i] is attested, but such a confusion seldom occurs in verbal forms. ^. Jannaris, Hist. Gr., App. v, p. 563. notices that this mood received the specific name of "Optative" as it happened to be retreating from any other function at the time the first professional grammarians appeared.

272

OPTATIVE - MORPHOLOGY

as the future

indicative (see

under

“Volitive

$8 605 - 609

Future",

589

ff.), subjunctive

(see 557), imperative (see 629 ff.), and infinitive (see 756 ff.). And thus, at first came a confusion and interchange among these cognate moods. The presence of many equivalents led to a struggle with the inevitable result that the strongest prevailed. As a matter of course, it was the optative that disappeared. An attempt of the Atticists to re-establish it, reflected in papyri of iv/A.D., was without result. The optative remained in stereotyped expressions of wish, especially in Biblical imitations,

but as a distinct mood,

had

been lost since the beginning of the Christian era. Meillet remarks:! “La perte de l'optatif traduit une diminution dans la délicatessé du grec. C'est une élégance d'aristocrates qui s'est perdue."

I.

Present

MORPHOLOGY

(and

Second

Aorist)

606. Thematic verbs: The personal endings of the present (and second aorist) preserve the same form as in Attic. In late papyri (vi/A.D.), -ot- is occasionally replaced by -v-, a phonetic equivalent. The picture of the endings, as obtained from our texts, is given below. Here we include both active and middle-passive forms: 607. ist person singular: (a) μάθοιμι P.Gen, 1, 15 (A.D. 158); εἴποι ple P.Oxy. 2133, 6 (late iii /A.D.); καταλάβοιμςι P.Lond. 213 (verso), 9 (iii /A. D.) ; ἀπρλάβοιμι P.Herm. Rees 6, 33 (1v /A.D.) ; cf. ἐπείπαιμι P.Par. 63 (iv), 115 (164-163 B.c.) with thematic ending, and τυχοίην P.Oxy. 2237, 17 (A.D. 498} according to contracted verbs. (b)

xapılolunv

P.Eleph.

13,

8

(223

or

222

B.c.).

608. 2nd person singular: (a) μεταλάβοις, διαλάβοις P.Par. 64. 37: 43 (164-160 B.C.); χαίροις P.Oxy. 526, 1 lii /A.D.]; 933, 1 (late ii/A.D.); 112, 1 (in or iv/ A.D.); xatpus P.Oxy. 2274, 1 (it /A.D.); χαίροις P. Ross.-Georg. iid 4, ı (lit /A.D.); so

also

Masp. (b)

ἔρχοις 609.

P.Srrassb. 37.

67028, 20 χαρίζοιζο»

P.land, 3rd

ı

lili/A.D.);

(c. A.D.

551);

P.Cairo Zen.

13, 25

person

P.

Jand.

cf. oxoins

59032,

2

(257

12,

1

P.Oxy. B.c.);

lilior iv/A.D.);

939.

τὸ

etpos

P.Cairo

(iv/A.D.].

etc. ; trove

SB

2048

(ii /B.c.);

(iv/A.D.).

singular:

(a)

ἔχοι

P.Cairo Zen.

\gobo,

1, See A. Meillet, Apercu d'une histoire de la langue grecque?,

1

(257

8.C.); 59251,

!

p. 280.

273 B. G.

Mandilaras,

The

Verb

in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

is

§§ 609 - 614

OPTATIVE

- PRESENT

ANI) SECOND

AOKIST

(252 B.C.); etc.; εἶποι P.Oxy. 472, 20 (c. A.D. 130), 294?); ἔχν

P.Oxy.

1830,

μέλλοι, δέοι, mpooayaypı

21

(A.D.

555);

16 (vi/A.D.); P.Bour.

20,

διαλάθοι

P.S./. 285, 11 (A.D.

&a$v Adrroi P.Bour. 25, 16-17

11; 21;

47

(A.D.

350);

τύχοι

(iv/A.D.);

P.Lond.

1686,

etc.

(b) vyévow[o P.Petrie iii 42 (H 8f), 16 (mid. i;B.c.); βούλοιτο P.Eleph. 13, 4 (223 or 222 B.C.); λέγοιτο, ἀποφαίνοιτο P.Par. 2 (1), 12: (7), 19 (Hi /B.C.) i mpoayovro P.Lips. 119 (verso ii), 6 (A.D. 274). 610.

ist person

Bovluev.

plural.

P.Herm.

Rees

(a) 5,

ἐπιβάλλοιμεν

27-8

(b)

xapıloiueda

P.Cairo Zen.

611.

2nd

plural

(b)

χαρίζοισδ᾽ ἑαυτῶν

person

(a)

P.Tebr..

28,

12

(c.

114

B.C.);

amoAa-

(iv /A.D.).

59056,

not

7

(257

8.C.}:

etc.

attested.

P.Grenf. ii 36, τὸ (05 B.C.) ; ἔλοισθε

P. Monac. 12, 40 (A.D.

590-591). 612.

3rd

person

P.Bour.

20,

P.Oxy.

1106,

(b) D,

6

plural:

(A.D.

7

(a)

350);

λάβοιεν

P.Hamb,

καταμάθοιεν

P.Fay.

29, 20

14

(ii),

(A.D. 19

89);

(A.D.

παράσχοιεν

222);

ἐπιμένοιεν

(vi/a.D.).

μηνυτρίζοιντο P.Cairo Zen. 39015 13 (162-161 B8.c.).

(verso), 3 (259 R.C.):

arriAaBoiwwro P.Var.

“μι verbs 613.

δίδωμι:

(a)

-om-forms:

aorist:

for this verb Present

ἀποδοίηνίν)

there are

three

διδοίη (3rd person

P.Ant.

42,

25

(A.D.

variants, e.g. singular) 542);

P.Leid.

drodoiln|»

B,63

(164 B.C.);

P.Lond.

1716,

4

(A.D. 5707); (in full) 1774, 15 (A.D. 570} |idoins P.Oxy. 1587, 8 (late iii/A.D.) ; amodoins SB 5656, 20 (A.D. 568); and accordingly γνοίης P.G.M. i IV, 2108 (iv/ A.D.) | δοίη P.S.T. 328, 6 (257 B.c.); P.Lond. 113 (1), 21 (ve/a.D.). (8)

-oc- forms:

Present

(162-161 B.c.); P.Lond. 3, 21 (iv/A.D.). (c)

-wa-forms:

The

διδοῖς

24 ending

PSF

421,

(verso), 25 -wnv

(161

occurs

8

liti’e.c.) |. διδοῖ

m.c.); aorist:

δοῖεν

occasionally

in

P.Par.

30,

P.Herm, the

12

Rees

Ptolemaic

papyri {see Mayser, i*, p. 88), replaced by -oin» in the post-Ptolemaic papyri. In fact, -ocyv is the earlier; -wv is asporadic and short-lived analogical forma-

tion, which failed to prevail over the earlier, and itself died out, The ending -oiny gained ground because of the fact that it resembled the corresponding ending of the -cw verbs.!

614. δύναμα: : δυνα[ζ{ {μην B.G.U. 1246, 3-4 (ili/B.c.): δύναιντο B.G.U. 25 (prob. ii/B.c.); δύνεσθ᾽ av (== δύναισθε av) B.G.U. 74, 6 (λα. 1. For discussion on the relationships between Gr., i, pp. 794 f.

274

1244, 167).

these three formations see Schwyzer,

Gr.

“μι VERBS 615.

«iui:

616.

ἵἴστημι:

P.Lond. 617.

20

see

mapacraiy

P.Cairo

Masp.

1676, 59 (A.D. 566-573);

olda:

«Sins

(=

B.C.);

τίθημι:

Bein’

619. Aorists

VERHS

$& 615 - 622

117.

(258-257

618.

- CONTRACTED

-eins)

P.Lond.

εἰδέησαν P.Par.

in long

67003.

408,

20

(mid.

P.Cairo Zen,

15, 59

vowel:

25

Ir.

A.D.

522),

παρασταίη

(see also 126 f.).

(119

mapaßain

iv/A.D.);

59060,

εἰδείης

4

(257

B.C.).

483,

85

(A.D.

PS.

495,

B.C.).

P.Lond,

615];

συμβαίη

P.Lips. 29, 5 (A.D. 295): P.Lond. 1698, 8 (mid. vi /A.D.); etc. ; cf. 306 (4). 620. Contracted

verbs: The

only

contracted

verbs

attested

in the optative

are those belonging to the -é« group. Their endings have the forms -οίην, -ois, -ot, -oinoav(see Mayser, i*, p. 88). The and and 3rd persons singular respectively

endings -oígs and -oin for the are attested in post-Ptolemaic

papyri: ποιοῖς P.S.f. 333, 16 (256 B.c.), but (iv /A.D.]. μαρτυροῖ P.S.F. 49, 2 (vi'A.D.); 8oxot P.Bour. 20, 36 (A.D. 350).

εἰ ύδαι nolvoline P.Oxy.

71.

17

P.Herm. (A.D.

Rees

303),

2, 28-9

but

δοκοίη

Koine replaces sometimes -oinv by -wn» on the analogy of (δι)δώην. Cf. the usual replacement of -wny» by τοίην discussed in 613 (3).! 621. S-aorist. Aorist active has -ats, in the 2nd person and -«ı in the 3rd person

singular

in the Ptolemaic

the post-Ptolemaic papyri.

The

papyri,

while

preference

τείας

-eiev. respectively

in

for the latter endings (so pre-

ferred in Attic) must be attributed to Atticist influence. The evidence from the papyri runs as follows: 622.

τοί person

A.D.);

and person: (it

singular:

ἀσθενήσαιμι

B.c.);

(a) -aıs: P. Ath.

-αἰμι:

P. Monac.

ποιήσαις

66,

2-3

| rloAunoaye

4,

33

(A.D.

P.Cairo

(228

mg.c.];

P. Ross.-Georg..

Zen. 59251, etc.

P.Hamb. 27, 1 (250-240 B.C.).

(b)

-nas:

P.Lips.

3rd

person:

(a)

-av:

38

ὑποδείξαι

(ij,

P. Par. 54,

3

(A.D. 35

4 (252

ἐπερωτήῆσαις

(ii /B.C.); ἀποσυστήσαις κελεύσειας

ti 43.

17

{πὶ}

581).

390];

{164-160

B.C.); P.Lille P.Petric

ποιήσιας B.C.];

ii

17

P.Flor..

ἐπιχωρῆσαι

17,9 fi},

20

384,

42

P.Tor.

{vii}, 24. (116 a.c]. (b) -eue:

δόξειε

or 385); δύ &iev 1. See Crönert,

Mem.

P.Tebr. 326, 13 (c. A.D. 260); δόξειεν, P.Lond. SB

9197,

14-15

Gr.

Hercul.,

p.

(A.D. 214.

275

317

or 318];

ποιήσειεν

1728, 17(A.D. 384 P.Flor. 83, 9-10

1

sS

622 - 626

S-AQRIST

- AORIST

PASSIVE

(iit-iv/A.D.); 284, 12 [A.D. 538); ποιήσιεν C.P.R. 19, 24 (A.D. 330); mpoorafıer P.Oxy. 2106, 26 (early tv/A.D.); 1878, 3 (A.D. 461): advol rep} ἡσιεν P.Lond. 1246, 20

(A.D.

345]; διαφυλαξιεν

P. Ross.-Georg.

1119, 23

(1v /A.D.]); so also

B.G.U.

984,

26 (iv/A.D.), but Wilcken suggests óédvAa£c( - -£y) ἐν! [δι] αφνυλάξιεν P.Lond. 411, 28 (mid. iv/A.D.); παραμελήσειεν PBour. 20, 41 (A.D. 350); ἐπιδίξειεν fhid.,

47: ὀχλήσιεν P.Oxy. 2194, 10 (v-vi /A.D.); ἐπιχειρήσειεν P.Lond. 113 (i), 53 (vi /4.D.); P.Monac. 14. 74 (A.D. 594); ἐθελήσειεν P.Lond. 1727. 47 (A.D. 583-584). 623.

i51 person

38,

35-6

plural:

{rit

-atwev:

xarag

τοχήισαμεν

[for

-χήσαιμεν

Witk.]

P.Tehr.

s.c).

ard person: P.Oxy. 1411,

car éy| καλέσειαν 16 (A.D, 260).

P.Oxy.

2110,

44-5

(€. A.D.

1535];

πειθαρχήσπιαν

624. Note: Contrary to the post-Ptolemaic usage, N.T. follows the normal καἰ and -acer endings, thus reflecting the Hellenistic usage (see Blass-DebrFunk,

8 853).

625. Avrist passive. The post-Ptolemaic papyri have preserved some aorists passive in -ecny revived under the Atticist influence rather than continued from older forms. The Ptolemaic papyri have οφθείην

P.Lips.

64,

AnGins

P.Lond.

234,

ἀ| διϊκηθείη also

B.G.U.

649

46

P.Cairo

4

308];

Masp.

(v. A.D.

67089.

140);

P.Ryl.

P. Monac.

13, 60

(A.D.

43 1, 47

(A.D. (A.D.

P.Oxy.

βουληθείης φανείη

117,

(A.D.

574);

384, 237;

269);

105

(9), 8.

lv /A.D.?). (A.D,

καταβληθείη

186); P.Oxy.

20, 48 (A.D. 350): ἀπολειφθείη Mosp. 67001, 22 (A.D. 514); πει-

(Byz.];

15 (A.D. 370): 383-584):

030, 15 (iv /A.D.); Bore

P.Flor.

P.Oxy.

24

P.Bour. P.Cairo

(verso), 25

P.Oxy. 2110,

1727.

δυνηθείης

iv /A.D.);

iv/A.D.]); ἐνταχθείη (A.D. 472); εὑρηθείη

ὀφθείη!ν}) P.Lond.

P.Monac,

(mid.

ζητηθείη

(vi /A,D.); βυυληθείη βυυληθείημεν

(c. A.D.

17

983,

(10);

2106, 24 learly P.Lond. 179, 15 pudein

of such forms. E.g.

P.Amt. 91, 9 (vi-a.D.).

ὑφθείης

see

no example

see

καταγιωσβείη

P.Lond. also

δυνηθείημεν

θ

P.Lond.

1712, τῷ

1795,

8

(A.D. 509);

ff.

P.Oxy.

1460, 3

(A.D. 2098);

394).

626. Notice the form βουληθείοις P.Form. 255, 4 (vi/s.n.). Strictly speaking. this has nothing specific to do with the aorist passive although this particular form in which it occurs is an aorist passive. With reference to this formation, we observe that it is a contamination or blend of athematic

and thematic forms facilitated by the identical pronunciation of oc and Cf.

«to

1. See

for

εἰὴ

IN

n.?

117.

635.

2. The writer may have had a mistaken impression that the sound | ı | occurring in an optative ending should à

-

d

be spelled

-7-.

270

δὰ 627 - 631 Il.

THE

SYNTAX

OF

627. Volitive optative. The optative by the standard

Grammars

THE

OPTATIVE

without av in main clauses is presented

under

different

names,

e.g. desiderative,

tive, expressing wish, optative proper, etc. The optative

without

used in Attic to denote an attainable wish. This use of the mood

voli-

av was

1s well at-

tested in the Ptolemaic papyri,! and continued to be marked in the Roman and Byzantine papyri, especially in later times (iv, vi and vii/A.D.) where it held

its own

in the living language

in stereotyped

expressions

such

as

(kn) γένοιτο, δοίη, (297) εἴη, χαίροις and the like. E.g. 628.

γίνοιτο, γένοιτο

(neg.

μή):

ἀλλὰ

βελίτι...7.

ἐκείνων

yévoir[o.

ws]

θέλω

P.Petrie iii 44 [Η 8 ἢ, 15-16 (mid. iii /8.C.}; ὑμῖν δὲ γίνοιτο! κρατεῖν P,Par. 26, 50-1 (163-162 B.C.); ὑμῖν δὲ γένοιτο [γένοιτο U.P.Z. 9) κρατεῖν P.Par. 39, 15 (161160 B.C.); τὰ πράσεις (SO Witk.: πράσσεις Letr.], μὴ ἐπιγέν στο (émy[c]v[ ot] vo Wilck.) P.Par. 45. 8 (153 B.C.); γένοιτο δ᾽ ἐμέ oc ἐπελ᾿θ[ οὔσαν] (επτα 8|... .] Ed.) πρρσκννῆσαι P.Giss. 77, 8-9 (iii /A.D.): μὴ γένοιτο αὐτῇ τοῦτο μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν; τελευτήν P.Cairo Masp. 67151, 178-9 (A.D. 570}.

629. Γένοιτο often constitutes the closing of a prayer or a charm, thus expressing the volition of the person involved towards the fulfilment of his

purpose. Under the same circumstances

γένοιτο is used in Modern Greek.

This form is the only attestation of the

optative in Modern

Greek

and

is

due apparently to the language of the Church.’ 630. In papyri parallel to γίνοιτο, γένοιτο stands

μοι ὑγιαίνοντι with εἶναι and

an

infinitive

ein

especially

in

ein μέν

following (e.g. διοικεῖν, οἰκονομεῖν, κύριον

the like). See:

P. Petrie i 21, 4-5;

ΠῚ 5 (a),

tror (both

237

&.C.);i 19, 24-5

(225

B.C.);

P.Lond.

219 (b), 5 (ii/B.c.); P.Cair. 10388 (123 ΒΟ); P.Oxy. 104. 8-9 (A.D. P.Lips. 29, 4-5 (A.D. 295); P.Lond. 77. 14 (end of vi/a.n.); εἰς.

ἼΩΝ

631. In other cases ein complemented by an infinitive constitutes an expression equivalent εἴη

1. See

ó€

ao

Mayser,

to the optative of the verb in the infinitive, e.g. | εὐτυχεῖν

1", pp. 28

καὶ

ἐπιτυνχάνειν

ἐν

πᾶσιν

PSLI

495:

23-4

(258-257

B.C.)

65 are

γένετο,

f.

2. There are 38 examples of the optative See Moulton, Pre£., p. 194.

in wishes

277

in^ N.T., of which

μὴ

δὰ 631-634 εὐτυχοῖς

ταὶς

καὶ

VOLITIVE

OPTATIVE

Similarly

καὶ

ἐπιτυγχάνοις.

διατελεῖν

P.Oxy.

939,

6-7

ein

διὰ

(iv /A.D.)

παντὸς

ἡμᾶς

χάριτας

ayo

[λογοῦν-

--: ὁμολογοῖμεν.

632. Such expressions as (ὁ) μὴ γένοιτο and à μὴ εἴη, used paranthetically, constitute a formula of wish or prayer to avert disaster; thus they express

the sense of ἀπεύχομαι. They occur in contracts, leases, wills, and the like. E.g. (D ἐὰν

(6) un γένοιτο: δέ,

τινί,

6 μὴ

μὴ

xai ἐάν, 0 μὴ γένοι[ ro], συμβὴ B.G.U.

yttvorro,

γέν[ ο]ιτο,

aBpoxos

ἄλλα

διὰ

γένηται

οὕτω

μοι

C.P.R.

349,

' δεδόχθαι

22

741. 32 (A.D.

(A.D.

P.Cairo

266):

Masp.

143-144);

ol ὁ] x

67112,

ed

[ὅ]βρι

51-2

(A.D.

567). (2)

6 μὴ

ein:

ἐὰν

δέ,

ὁ an

201};

ἐὰν

δέ,

12-173

(A.D.

295);

ἐν τελείῳ

P.Hamb. eipı, περ

ὁ

μὴ

xai ἀἁβροχικῷ,

ἐκ

| pov συμβὴ

τι. πάθω

διαφορᾶς

εἴη,

συμβαίη

δ᾽ un

68, 15 (after A.D. 550);

€x | ἀπείη,

θρώπινόν

ein,

εἴη

ἀπαλλαγῶσι an

P.Grenf.

77,

15-16

ανθρώπινον

1689,

i 57, 1t

κυρειώτερης φανείη P.Lond. P.Oxr. 125. 16 (A.D. 560),

P.Lond.

μοι

P.Lond.

ἀλλήλων

18

P.Oxy,

P.Lips.

(A.D.

(A.D. 561];

572);

24,5

1473, (A.D.

similarly

εἰ δέ τις,

ὦ μὴ

991, 19-20 [vi /'A.D.]; cf. εἰ δέ, and ἐπὰν δέ, ὅπεμ amevyouai, ar-

(end of vi /A.D.J.

633. These expressions by their frequent occurrence give the impression of much commoner use of the optative than was really the case. In Christian letters, we often find the expression ἐρρωμένον ce ὁ Θεός (Or ἡ θεία πρόνοια) διαφυλάξειε!: see P.Lond. 411, 27-8 (mid. iv/A.p.); P.Ross.-Georg. iii 9, 23 (iv/A.D.);etc., the optative being often replaced by the subjunctive d:advdAdén. Similarly, éppwipévov σε ἡ Oia πρόνοια φυλάξα[] P.Heid. 6, 24-6 (iv/A.b.): -a« against the usual 3rd person

singular

ending

-eer

(see 622 (3)); conse-

quently the form φυλάξαι must be taken as an infinitive depending on such a verb as εὔχομαι, which is understood. (1)

The

papyrus:

same

notion

ἐρρωμένον

is expressed σει

[...] θ᾽

by the optative

ὑπόνοια

διαφυλαξιεν

in a badly ado,

[...]

preserved

B.G.U.

984,

26 ff. (iv/4.n.).? See also 622 (3).

634. The optative expressing wish is found, in particular, with the name of

|l. The word θεός is interchanged with ἡ θεία πρόνοια which has its roots probably pagan epistolography; see Hercher, Episralographi Graeci, p. 389: letter of Julian Priscus.

in to

2. Schubari suggests διαφυλάξειν and Wilcken reads | ὁ θεὸς «lad brommacr> διαφυλαξι ἐν xrA, Tnese emendations prove themselves unnecessary, and the transcription im the ed. pr, 15 correct,

since

it is supported

by

parallel

278

passages.

VOLITIVE

OPTATIYE

$5 634 - 636

a god as subject (in pagan compositions), or the word not certainly, of Christian letters). E.g. σοὶ δὲ ὁ Σάραπις

12 (162-161

διδοῖ

P.Lond.

B.c.); U.P.Z.

24

(verso), 25

(16r

@eds

m.c.);

(indicative,

similarly

P.Par.

if

30,

15, 45 (156 B.c.); notice that invocations to Sarapis

and [sis are expressed by optative, and similar invocations expressed again by the optative are to be found in Christian compositions. [t appears that the optative was connected pre-eminently with religious matters. Cf. also «väalnord

σε! δοῖεν

αὐτὸς

rej ὦ τρισμέγιστος

| Epuzs

A.D.); θεὸς μοι paprupot P.S.I. 49, 2 (vi/A.D.); φιλεῖ[:] P. Herm. Rees 2, 30-2 (1v/A.D.).

P.Herm.

Rees

καὶ | θεοὶ

3,

20-3

[m]apeifv | σοι

(iv/

mpoa-

635. Another class of documents in which the desiderative optative is used is that of declarations made upon oaths. The expressions in which the optative occurs are formulaic consisting of : (l1) ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ (deiw) ὅρκῳ (also in the tst person plural ἔνοχοι εἴημεν): see P.Oxy. 239, 12 (A.D. 66); P.Ryl. 82, 14 (A.D. 113); B.G.U. 581, 12 (A.D. 133); P.Oxy. 82, 7-8 (mid. iii/A.D.); 1261, 11-12 (A.D. 325); 1265, 23-4 (A.D. 336); P.Lond. 1247, 16 (A.D. 345); P.Amh. 140, 17-18 (A.D. 349): 139, 20 (A.D.

350); P.Lond. P.Lond.

301,

(M.Chrest. (2)

1793, 15

(A.D.

340)

εὐορκοῦντι

17-18

as

(4.D.

138-161)

9 €vox[o]s

μέν

μοι

ed ein

472);

P.Flor.

ἢ ἐνσχίε] θείη

εἴην (or

τῷ in

τῷ

288,

τὸ

(vi/A.D.)

ὅρκῳ rightly read

etc.; by

cf.

Mitteis

ὅρκῳ,

the

plural

εὐορκοῦσι

μὲν

ἡμῖν

εὖ εἴη):

sce

P.S.I. 515, 16-17 (251-250 nB.c.); P.Perrie ii 46 (a), 5 (200 B.c.); P.Oxy. 253, 22-3 (A.D. 19); 260, 16 (A.D. 59); 263, 16-17 (A.D. 77); P. Ryl. 108, 19-20 (A.D. 10 111]: etc.!

(3) This use of the optative apparently derives from the official language of earlier times, as it is found in inscriptions dealing with oaths or manumission decrees.? 636. The optative expressing wish is also found in the verbal form χαίροις

used as salutatory formulaic opening of letters. Xaipots is exclusively confined to post-Ptolemaic

letters,

although

it is infrequent, being

often

re-

placed by χαίρειν or χαῖρε. It is noteworthy that most of the examples of the optative χαίροις are found in letters of the tn/a.p.,? but the infinitive yac1. See examples quoted by Mayser, i1!, p. 290, and Horn, op. cif., pp. 149 f. 2. Cf.

Buck,

The

4. The optatives e.g. in Aratus,

Greek

Dialects,

yaipe and

χαίροις

Callimachus,

etc.

ἃ

176. appear

to

279

a

limited

extent

in.

Heilenistic

writers,

$5 636 - 639

POTENTIAL

OPTATIVE

pew which was contending with the optative xatpoıs, was to be established as the main salutatory expression (see 727).! The retreat of the optative χαίροις before the infinitive χαίρειν is seen tn the following blend of constructions, χαίροις

ζΧαιρήμονι

having in mind

τιμιώτατε

the common

P.Princ.

71,

1

(iti/a.p.):

the writer

apparently

expression χαίρειν following the dative of the

person, wrote Χαιρήμονι instead of Χαιρῆμον. At the same time, the imperative yatpe appears and holds a fairly important place in the private letters which date from the ii/4.p. up to the iv/a.p. (see especially 727).* 637. The

examples

yas,

xUpié

{ΠῚ /A.D.); $17,

1

of yaipow pou

χαίροις,

(iD /A.D.);

mo|A|Àa,

᾿ἱέραξ

P.Lond. τέκνον

from 144,

P.Oxy..

| χαΐρ]οις,

1 (itt Or Iv/A.D.);

τ

χαίροις, κυρία pou

638. Potential optative.

The

1

pou 111 4,

papyri

U /A.D.7j;

1063,

κύριέ

P. Ross. - Georg.

the

(10

P.Oxy.

optative

χαίροις

as

follows:

KaÀókaipe

(li or HI /A.D.);

P.Flor. 1

run

|xallpoıs

tyo

(verso),

ı

A.D.)

xurpors,

᾿ἀφυμυοῦ

112,

(A.D.

P.Oxy.

326,

πολλά

P.Tebr.

204);

χαίροις

P.land.

1

12,

E (iil or 1v/A.D.).

with av in main

clauses

is used to

denote what could or would happen tn the future on the fulfilment of a supposed condition which may or may not be explicitly stated.?

639. The fact that certain expressions employing the potential optative possess variants

with

other

moods

makes

the potential optative possible. In other

accurate

definition

of the sense of

words, the expression εὖ av ποιή-

cats of the Ptolemaic papyri is definitively replaced by εὖ (καλῶς) ποιήσεις in Roman and Byzantine times: this process suggests that the basic sense of the potential optative had come to be understood as the expression of futurity,

quate

and

therefore

to replace

a substitute

it. So εὖ (καλῶς)

such

as

av (09r)

the

future

indicative

was

ποιήσαις complemented

ade-

by the

1. ft is worth mentioning that out of 81 letters in P.Se/. we tind 53 examples of yarpew, 2 of χαῖρε and none of χαίροις. Particular attention must be paid to the fact that several

letters of the iii/A.D. lack any salutatory form. On the other hand, official correspondence. and all letters of the pre-Christian period always use χαίρειν. In Witk., Epist. (72 1n number) covering the ti-t g.c.,we find only χαίρειν», namely 22 examples from inm... 21 from ii/B.c., and 8 from iig.c. 2, See also Exler, The Form of the Ancient Grech gen zur Geschichte des griechischen

Letter, pp. 33 f.; Gerhand, "Untersuchun-

Briefes 4. Die Anfangsformel , PAifulagas

pp. 34 ff. Ghedini, Lert. crist.. p. 60; Horn. op. eit., p. 174. 4. See Moulien-lurner,

p, 122. ad

[xiv (1905).

POTENTIAL

OPTATIVE

$§ 639 - 642 (1)

participle (or the infinitive) is found in P.Hib. 64, 8-9 (264 ».c.);

P.S./. 320,

4 (258-257 B.C.): 504, 4-5 (257-256 B.c.); 603, 13-14 (iii/B.c.); δ. Mich. Zen. 6, 2-3 (257 B.c.); P.Cairo Zen. 59251, 4 (252 B.c.); P. Hib. 131 (c. 245 B.C.); 66, 2-3 (228 B.c.}; and elsewhere in the Zenon Archive.! So also καλῶς av

ποιοῖς P.S.I. 333, 16 (256 B.c.).

|

640. The particle av does not seem to have been an essential adjunct of the potential optative, as there are cases, already in the iii/B.c., where it is absent from this construction. The instability of av facilitated the replacement of the potential optative by the future indicative. As ed (καλῶς) ποιήσεις comes as a substitute for εὖ (καλῶς) av ποιήσαις there is no ground for detecting

any difference in meaning between the two expressions.* The futuristic sense of the potential optative is plain in the passage: τὸ χρήσιϊμον προδαγγέλλων οὐκ dv | παυσαίμην P.S.I. 441, 23-5 (li/B.c.) = οὐ παύσομαι. Similarly yaρίζιο ἄν P.S.I. 376, 3 (250-249 B.C.); etc., but χαριεῖ elsewhere, e.g. P.Co/. Zen. 41, 3 (c. 254 nR.C.); etc, or εὐχαρισίτήσεις P.S.F. 424, 16-17 (iii/n.c.). 641. The optative with av is also used to denote some thought, the occurrence of which is merely envisaged as possible. E.g. τεκμήριον δὲ 1 καὶ dv, es ἐν οὐδενὶ B.C.); καὶ

καὶ

yàp

αὐτοὶ

τούτων ἐκ [τῶν] γεγραμμένων σοι ὑπὰ Atorvaiou : dadapors τῶν καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς παραίτιος γέγονεν P.Par. 64, 41-4 (164-160

δύνεσθ᾽ | -

ἂν ἄλογον

ein

δυναισθεὶ

[bid., 8;

408);

6 οἷδας

| Lav

ἰδίης ἢ ἢ a8, σὺ ἂν εἰδίης

These casion, 642. The (lI)

few

χαρίζοιο 3

(250-249

i,

PS. B.C.);

8.c.} 64.

cf.

ἂν μὲν

τοῦτο

ἂν...

ποίησον,

P.Lond.

however,

occurs

dv as apodosis

φροντίσας

Mayser,

εἶναι

are,

optative

42, 13-14 (156 6 av in U.P.Z.

1, See

acc

examples

potential

δ᾽ av μοι 3765,

αὐμφορόν

μόλις

also

8

δ᾽ ἂν

bearing

18-20

literary

74,

6

P.Oxy.

ἀποστῖλαι

(mid.

(A.D. 1469,

[ εἰ οὐ

167); 3

(A.D.

σὺ

av]

iv/a.p.).

language

befitting

the oc-

'n the following cases:

(258-257

χαρίξου

curiously

BGU.

καὶ εἰ βέλις

408,

of a protasis

gg,

«|

δυνηϑείημεν

καὶ

an

expressed 8.C.); τοῦ

πάνυ

(or

σώματος

imperative

understood):

δή

μοι

i ἐπιμελόμενος

with

χαρίζοιτο

χαρίζοιἄν P.SJI. P. Par.

Ar, but xagíQoico»

p. 292.

2. Horn, ep. cit., p. 155. suggests that ar ποιήσαις indicates a more polite form. Robertson, p. 938, seems to accept Gildersleeve^s statement, Svatax, p. 137. that the use of ar, in general, moderates the vehemence of the optative. 201

SS

OPTATIVE

UENTIATL.

PIr

- 646

(2)

642

(2) εὖ (wads) ar ἔχοι as apodosis is common in letters, especially in salutalory expressions introduced by εἰ ἔρρωσαι, e.g, εἰ οὖν of rws πολιτευσόμεθα |

aAAnAnıs, καλῶς ar ἔχοι P.Hib. 63, 10-13 ic. 265 B.C.) ; εἰ ἔρρωσαι, εὖ ἂν ἔχοι P.S.l. 331, 1 (257 B.C.); καλῶς ar ἔχοι, ei dppwoa PS. 560, 1 (253-252 B.C.); εἰ ἔρρωσαι, καλῶς av ἔχοι PS]. 364, 2 (251-250 B.C.); εἰ ἔρρωσθε dv ἔχοι P.Petrie ἢ 10 (a), 7-8 (224 B.C.); εἰ ἔρρωσαι καὶ ra ἄλλα

eorlır, (3

εἰὖ

av

ἔχοι

PSA.

Similarly

with

ein

415, av

2-3

τὸ

| mavres, σοι κατὰ

καλῶς νοῦν |

(m /B.C.).

δέον

or

ein

av

ὡς

θέλω:

εἰ Eppwoat

wat

τἄλλα

σοι

κατὰ Tpamor συναντᾶι, ein ἂν τὸ δείον (sich P.S T. 3092, 1 (242-241 8.C.): εἰ δὲ ἐρρωμένως aot καὶ τἄλλα κατὰ λόγην ἐστίν, τὸ δέον ar εἴηι P.Par. 42, 2 (156 B.c.); εἰ

ἔρρω

σαι

καὶ

1-2

(223

or 222

13, ὡς

βούλομαι

Àoyor

τὰ

P.Perrie

amnvrüi,

B.C.) ea

εἴηι

ἔρρωσαι,

λοιπὰ

am

B.C.); mi

ἄν,

κατὰ

33

n,

ὡς

τοῖς

ἔρρωμαι

λόγον

εἰ ἔρρωσαζι}

δέ

1-3

ἐστίν,

καὶ

{in :B.C.];

θεοῖς

καὐτὸς,

evyo

εἴς

ἄν,

ein

τἄλλα

ἂν

σοι

sımılarly

μένη «is

ὡς

ἐγὼ

xarà εἰ

P.Lond. P. Par.

44,

P.Eleph.

ἐστίν,

ἐρρωμένωι

διατελῶ

βούλομαι

«θέλω

Aoyar

κατὰ

2-4

(168

42. 1-2

εἴη ἄν,

τῖλλα

(133

B.c.).

643. The potential optative as apodosts ts also found in the following conditional σὺ

sentences: δὲ

(9)

P.Par.

64,

n]v]«

a[v]

B.G.U.

983,

eU

μεταλάβοις

37-B rsp

(164-160 [ἐπ͵]

3-4

(c.

vo!

A.D.

ws

Tomor

αὐτοῖς

μερίζων,

iios

we

οὐκ

ἂν

λυπηθείης

B.c.). [βῆμα

cov

xaraévyo]li,

εἰ

an

σῴο]

δῖρα

al δι] κηθείη

τι

140].

644. The potential optative is occasionally used to denote an imperatival sense. In this way instructions or orders are presented in a tone milder than that of the plain imperative. In Homer and Attic the optative without av Was sometimes used to express exhortation (Hortatory Optative).! This use

was

entirely

abolished

in.

post-Classical

Greek,

where

the

optative

proper became almost exclusively a mood expressing wish. Then the optalive with dy was considered capable of expressing a command. e.g. μᾶλλον

αὐτοὺς

yap

δὴ

nmpnfugpias

xac

knÀÀnr

φείδεσθαι

| olt

Tor

P.Fay.

evar

20

till,

ἡγεμόνες

18-19

καταμαῆπιεν

(A.D.

222):

av

Imperial

pe"

sans

Edict.

645. Such a use ts, however, rare, as the imperative and the subjunctive could be used in commands and exhortations (see 553 f.). 646. The optative with av is sometimes tions e.g. 1. Cf.

H. xxiv 149 of ἔποιτο

yepurrepos, and

2. The first traces of this use appear Gr,,

App.

in

Xen.

found

in

An. iii 2, 37 Χειρίσοφος

Attic. See Goodwin

v, 12a.

282

rhetorical.

MT.

direct ques-

μὲν

ἡγοῖτο.

§ 234: Jannaris,

Hist.

THE καὶ

παρὰ

τίνος

ἄν πολλῶ 274); καὶ

P.Lond.

OPTATIVE

ἂν εἴποι

xrA.;

δικαιότερον |... ἀπόντος γὰρ τίς

1658,

6-8

IN SECONDARY

P.Oxy.

472,

20

CLAUSES

(c.

A.D.

S8 646 - 649 (5)

130);

τούτους

πῶς! οὐκ

βιοῦν mpodyovro; P.Lips. tig (verso ii), r-6 (A.D. τῶν ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἂν θελήσιεν προσομιλεῖν i | olor;

(iv/a.n.).

647. The de'iberative

subjunctive

this construction

571

(see

also

may

substitute for the

optative in

ff.).

648. The optative in secondary clauses. The optative is found in secondary clauses in a way which betrays a literary influence, or in constructions which have become stereotyped, so that the real sense of the mood has been blurred. 649. The optative in protases introduced by εἰ (rarely ἐάν) denotes a meaning which could be equally expressed by the subjunctive or the indicative. Horn,

p.

161,

notes

that

the

optative

in this

case,

expresses

a “possible

contingency”. Such a meaning is, however, difficult to detect through the examples which he quotes (pp. 161 ff.). On the contrary, it appears from the apodosis (i.e. indicative future as a rule, indicative present, imperative, infinitive} that these examples are merely future conditions. In addition, the facts that (a) the protases are stereotyped expressions, and (ὁ) the sentences occur almost exclusively in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, oblige us to consider the use of the optative in this construction as a revival replacing the

subjunctive (or

(D

εἰ Bovdndeiqu:

the

future

γειγνώσκων

indicative). Examples:

| ὡς, ef μὴ βουληθίης

τούτους ἀποστῖλαι, ave νεχθὴ-

σεται εἰς γνῶσιν ταῦ αὐτοῦ κυρίην pou P.Lond. 234, 16-18 (mid. iv/A.D.)i εἰ δὲ | βουληδείης σὺ 6 μισθωσΐ apevos ] -.. 12... é&etvad μοι P Flor. 384, 104-6 (v/A.D.?); ἐξεῖναι δὲ | [ἑκατέρῳ ἡμῶν ἑτέρῳ γάμῳ προσομιλεῖν, εἰ BovAn-

dein P.Lond. 1712, 17-18 (A.D. 569); εἰ δὲ βονληθείημεν ...| φανησόμεθα (2)

εἰ

δὲ

κτὰ.

(3)

τῷ

| θείῳ

δύξειεν : εἰ

P.Lond,

ὅρκῳ

P.Monac.

1, 47-9

δὲ

δόξειεν

ἡμῖν

ἐνάγειν

1728,

17-18

(A.D.

584

εἰ eópeBetg: εἰ εἰ ὑ]ρεθείη

. |xajra

(A.D.

ao,

μηδὲν

|...

μὲν

! | ὠφελήσει,

παρέξει

or 585).

γνώμην

τῆς

βουλῆς

13-14 {iv-v/A.D.): apodosis : ἀναμερισμὸν yercal θαι) ἢ ἀποίητος ἢ ὀξόμενος ἐξ αὐτοῦ ..., ὁμολογῶ ἀλλάξει A.D.); εἰ εὐρεθείη öfos «TA,

... πρῷτῳον μὲν ἔνοχοι

574}.

| ἐπὶ τῷ με ἀλλάξαι

cropacbe’s

P.S.1. 684,

in line 12; εἰ eupeßein ὄξος gor C.P.R. 144, 8-10 [v-vi; σοι P.Lond.

ggg,

11-13

(A.D.

538). (d) (c.

εἰ εὕροις: εἰ οὕτως A.D.

(5)

εὕροις,

μὴ

πρήπχης

P.Cairo Masp.

67028,

19-20

ei παρ] ἀσταίη

ὑμῖν,

551).

εἰ παρασταίη:

καἰ τε]λεῆσαι 16-17

' ἔχοντα

(wali

πὶ ρ]οσί ἐϊδρᾳμον | πρὸ]ς ! |...]s ὅπως, ἐλεῆσαι 7)

pe

Klar] ἐκδικ[ σαί με P.Cairo Masp. 57007, (c. A.D. 322) ; ὅθεν παρακαλοῦμεν τὸ ὕψος ὑμῶν ἐνορκοῦντες ! wara τῆς alyılas

283

δὰ 649 (5) - 649 (Il) Τριάδος,

A.D.

εἰ

εἰ

εἰ (car)

συμβαίη

Bain

τινὰ

ἐξ

εἰ

ἑτοίμως

aou

ἡμῶν

ἔχω

21

μοί

«TA,

. τι συμβαίη

Ibis), 28

σοι}

|...

(7)

εἰ

P.Lond.

γενηθὲν

89),

ἐπίδειξιν,

εἰ

παρέξομαι

P.S.J, 298,

χρεία

mi...

(A.D.

with 16

συμβαίη

εἰ

8-9

de

(mid.

συμβαίη

27-8 got

pe

(A.D.

καὶ

(sic:

(kJ,

vi: ward

583);

boalewr]

εἰ

P.Par.

perhaps

(A.D,

γενέσθε

25

1351 : apodosis

ἀντίγραφα

in fine

39;

(A.D.

γένοιτω

P.Lond.

20

γένωιτο

ξήτησις

1164

ἀπέλθατε

137,

ἄνωθεν

(iv /A.D.]; εἰ δὲ χρεία

mTpnknvparnpn

εἰ

γενεσῆεένθι

νυ.

μὴ

ef τις γένοιτο P.Lond.

umevy|5]-

εἰ δὲ συμ-

616).

yervorra

ἐνδέχεται,

yernıro

(8) εἰ (amoldorgr!: δίδωμι ἐκποιῆσαι (vi A.D.): 1774,

εἴς}

ἧπερ

ao ful’

1731,

ἡποκαταπτήσιν

Ir.

366-573].

2051;

1638,

566-573):

24-5

(A.D.

5 (A.D.

PLond

P.Lond.

er διπλῶ

31-2

20,

καταφρονῆσαι

| A. D.

67004,

59-60

μοι ἀνβρώπινην,

δώσει.

mapacyeiv

εἰ xpria

καλῶς

(A.D.

| τὸν

ὑμηίων

γένοιτο ov

(vill), 31

Aev,.

ab

42-4

ἐμὲ

21,

τί ]

xypovc

Masp.

1676,

P.Lips.

... N

1711,

ὦ

P.Par.

ὅπερ

|.)

eb

(c. A.D. 6001;

dom

Ta

P.Caira

PLond.

καβίστημι

καιρῷ

CLAUSES

παγάρχη

ety, συμβαίη

...

wore

...

(ypela)

παρέξει;

€av δέ, 6 μη παραβῆναι

ἐπεξελθεῖν

ta

προστάξαι

ce alo|r[n|e

συμβαίη

IN SECONDARY

mpoaragar

παρασται ἡ],

μπι, κληρονόμον A,D.i:

OPTATIVE

mapagrain,

3522);

(6)

THR

ἔχω

212);

εἰ

τοῦ ἀπελθεῖν

1032,

9-10

P.Oxr.

237

παρ᾽ ἐμαυτῶ χρεία ὑμᾶς

εἷς

γείνοιτο,

wl...

las

(vi-vii’A.D.).

εἰ un ἀποδηί η]ν ὑμῖν ra εἰρημένα) κεράτια... P.Lond. 1716, (4-3 A.D. 5707): similarly P.Lond. 15 (A.D. 5701.

adpectav am 119 (i), 21

(9) εἰ ποιήσειεν: εἰ μὴ τοῦτο mom σειεν eras τῶν opiate: cae ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἡμερῶν πον ως . ἀναπεμφθήπεσθαι | P.Flor. 83 9-13, (ili-iv/A.D.]; εἰ μὴ τοῦτο may σιεν, ἀπολέγεσθαι πὐτήν C.P.R. 19, 24 (A.D. 930): ἐξ ἂν 5€ τοῦτο] μὴ ποιήσιας, ὑπεύθυνος

ἔση

σύ

re

«rd.

P.Flor.

384,

31-2

«TÀ, as ei IS the regular introductory ποιήπειεν,

rattan

€Topws

ἔχαμεν

ποιήσιιμεν,

P.Gaodspeed

p...

ue.

por

da

OSIS

iS

902,

2,

μὴ

φανείη, μηδὲ

φανείη τὸ

τῇ καὶ

49-10

(c.

εἰ

A.D.

ἀθ 5}:

ἐν

οἰωδήπωτε

καιριῷ,

εἰ

Aurftadhapins

haveını

er

τῇ

τινατὴ

pou

φανείην

τις,

ὦ

136,

33

36

εἰ ὦ δὲ

237

(A.D. ἐν

ἐκ

r6-18

εἰ

dave

ἐμπὸα-

ef ra

ἀληθῆ

186); εἰ δὲ ὕστεά327);

the

apo-

πληρῶσαι

P.Oxy.

κυρειύτερος

φανείη

[vt/A.D.]; ἐπε

ποσάτητι

εἰ

προσή] xo|voa:

(A.D.

| gov 19-20

3031;

eceoßlaı]|

1601;

ἐγγράφως

|

Qul,

διπλὴ

(A.D.

3381:

369).

μὴ

(v1, 8 (A.D. 83,

(AD.

(A.D.

τοῦτο]

εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτο

12

érép|uo

22-3

αὐτῶν

εἶφι,

P.Lond.

284,

$| avetay

P.Oxy.

μὴ

23,

318,

P.Oxy,

πωλῶν

ant

P Ox,

κατηγραφὴ

δέ

χρεωπτηῦντα

εἰ δέ

ἐκτίσω

e

P.Tebr.

ro πρᾶγμα

οἰκίᾳ

read

ἢ προκηατεσχημένωον

i11’A.D.):

ἐμπόδιον

P.Flor.

P.Hamb.

πρυπήῆκην

(prob.

κρίσεως δεῖσθαι

|ve|ég|v] er

παρασχεῖν

-Eoper)

ἑτέρω

€aco[ Par]

missing.

|

better

particle in this construction;

ἐγγνηταὶ

παρέξωμεν

(10) εἰ φανείη : εἰ δὲ er.

οἱ

(v/a.D.?);

τι

«TA,

ἡποπληρώσω, "| ap|adeidats>

P.Lips.

103,

1}

(Arab.}. (1)

εἰ

64,

40-8

P.Oxy.

odterye

μὴ

πφθείης

τούτο

aD.

3081,

ei γάρ

1101,

22

(A.D.

367-370).

ypewatine

P.Loud.

ef

(c.

δ

1727,

τετελευτηκὼς

43-3

(4.0.

ris ἢ

ἡπτίη

memes... παραλιμπάνον

apodosis : οἰκῆσαι καὶ

χρεωπταύμειος

564-584).

284

ι[πμήσταχθήσει |

weded eb

- ὀφθείη

|] m...

P.Lips.

παραλαμβάνων)

24-3;

εἰ oddeinte)

Lu

πηιήπσα σθαι

THE

OTPTATIVE

IN

INDEREUT

DISCOURSE

$8 650 - 653

650. The optative is also found in protases which cannot be classed under particular verbs, as in the above examples. Such cases are as follows: οὐ

δύνανται

P.Hamb.

B.G.U.

λέγειν, τὴν

29,

13-15

969

li), 24-5

15 ff. (A.D.

158);

1411,

16-17

βιβλίᾳ

C.P.R.

ἔχοι

wali|

δίκην,

(A.D.

(A.D.

εἰ un

(A.D.

5

θαρσήσῃ

λάβριεν

εἰ 8€

1417}:

ἔχοι,

εἰ

μάθοιμι

ride

εἰ παρείδηιεν

(A.D.

...

314);

βιβλίπ

τὴν

παρὰ

πενθήμερων

...

τί ἢ παρ]

εἰ yap

' {καὶ

(A.D. 367-370): notice

ra

μὴ

πειθαρχήσιαν

260),

233,

εἰ μὴ

B9);

τῶ]ν]

perpiv

ἀγγελίᾳ,

τῶν

1,

P.Oxr.

ἐπιδίδωμι

παρὰ

προσείτω

the interchange of the optative

dypamar

PGen.

πειραθήσονται

ἰδιωτῶν

| πέπυιθεν,

τὸ

ἐπανορθώ] σωΐμαι

rovrov καλλιέργειαν, ris

ἐπιτρόπων

εἰς

ride τὰ

' [ατρατιώτ] ἢ τι

P.Oxy.

1101,

17-19

and subjunctive in the

protasis; ἀναγνωσόμεθᾳ, εἰ προστάξιέν aov. τὸ μέγεθος P.Oxy. 1858, 3 (A.D. 161); εἰ δὲ ἀπολειφθείη καὶ μὴ παραστήσω, ἐγὼ αὐτὸς οἴκοθεν pl 7]ep [alerted ἀποδώσω P.Lond. 1793. 15-16 (A.D. 472): notice the interchange of the optative and subjunctive

in

the

χλῆσαι αὐτήξν» 23

!Byz.);

εἰ

protasıs:

εἰ δὲ

wal,

ὡς

εἰκός,

(apodosis : παρεσκεύασα zarayrwuhlein

τις

! €£

πειραθείῃ

in line 26)

ἡμῶν

ὡς

τις

τῶν

P.Cairo

Aada

[sic]

μετὰ

ταῦτα

Masp. 67089

κομισάμενός

mapo-

(verso),

τινα

καὶ

μὴ

φηνερώσῃ | τῷ 4 τ]έρι., παρέξει P.Lond. change of the optative and subjunctive

1795, 8-10 (vi/A.D.] : notice the interin the protasis, εἰ yap ἐπιμένοιεν, πλῆθος

ἐπιστήσεται

7

τούτου 581);

καθαρὸ

ποίησι!

POxy,

καὶ

δέ

(5s

P.Monac.

ἐμφυτευτικὴν

1100,

ἀποσώβησιν,

εἰ ἐπιχειρήσειεν

γνώσεται τὴν

στρατιωτικὸν

14.

οὐδέν

74-5

ὁμολογίαν,

{viiA.D.);

ed

ᾧ ἐμὲ

μὲν

(A.D.

de

παρασχεῖν

ὠφεληθήσεται

504);

παρέξει

εἰ

εἰ

P.Lond.

δ᾽ ἕτερος 485,

83

τοῦ ἐξ

aadernaaus

περὶ

P.Manac.

33 (A.D.

ἐπιχειρήμηατως,

ἡμῶν

(a.p.

4.

rhe

mapaBnig

616).

See

ἐπὶι-

ταύτην

also

651. The optative in indirect discourse. The optative in indirect discourse

403.

cor-

responding to the subjunctive or indicative of the direct has little scope in the papyri, which have a preference for direct discourse. The same is the case in the N.T., where only Luke occasionally employs the optative.! The examples from the papyri are virtually confined to the Ptolemaic period.’ and even there the indicative is used after verbs of “saying” and "knowing".

652. This optative is again found in later papyri, where it emerges from the influence

of Atticism.

ὡς ἔλεγεν

Ταπίιν

P.

b,

*

Monac.

1 lax

2-02

1

i. See

τὴν erayoperne

31-2

IA.D.

. . nuhey

653. The optative

see

τ € TE

583};

reÜufonkérac

so

also

, λέγοντας

phere

7

4b-8 nT:

in indirect. questions.

Blass-Dehbr.-Funk,

2. For examples

E.g.

ii!', pp.

203

€

v onim

Isolated

§ 346,

Mavser.

acra Tap

f. 2605

ὅτι Bovducra

nya

you

J|

a

μετενεγκεῖν,

nente

00-5...

καὶ

“ ? Meares.

examples

of the optative

in

ἂν 653 - 656

THE

OPTATIVE

IN

SECONDARY

CLALSES

indtrect questions occur in the Ptolemaic papyri (= Mayser

ill, pp. 294 f.).

Add that the potential optative also can be found in indirect questions, e.g. μὴ ὀκνῶν ypade nut Kat τί av σοι ποιοῦντες yapıloiunv P.Eleph. 13, 7-8 (223 or 222 n.c.); ypade δὲ καὶ od ἡμῖν ri av σοι | ποιοῦντες χαριζοίμεθα P.S.I. 526, 19-14(c. 250 B.c.). Even in the Ptolemaic papyri the indicative is contending with the optative in this construction, and the indicauve is frequently used in the post-Ptolemaic in such examples as: ewußern ᾿ τῶν napov[ r]evv kogvéa|é]er B.G.U. 347, 12-14 (A.D. 171); ἐπέθετο , πόθεν

εἴην

m|a]pl

η]ρηκὼς

τὸ

πρὸ

papyri. The optative is found

... o... μοι ἡ ! σὴ

κίμενον

ἀξίωμα

4351); ἐπιζητοῦντί σοι τίν] es] ein cav γεωργοί P.Lond. τησα

τὴν

P.Cairo

αἰτίαν Masp.

The 654. Final:

ἣν

67087,

ἐπὶ

τοσοῦτον

10-11

Optative

There

the Ptolemaic

&

(A.D.

in

is no certain

papyri.

[τρόπον

εἰ [a|ggu| εἴο] ἔχοι ὁ [mails ἐμμέλεζια eyypaldws διλιῶσαι P.Oxy.

1265,

11-141

(A.D.

1249, 4-5 (A.D. 345): ἐπερώ-

xan ?ligrws

ἐλυμήναηιτη!

ὁ

καρπὸς

541).

Other

Secondary

example of the

Isolated examples

optative

Clauses ın final clauses in

of this construction in the post-

Ptolemaic papyri occur in the stereotyped expression

ἵνα εἰδέναι ἔχοις or Its

equivalent iv’ εἰδείης, (see 604) and are attributed to Atticism. 655. Relative:

The

optative

in relative clauses

has an indefinite sense, and

it occurs in “petitions” under the stereotyped expression eis 6 τύχοι μέρος rou σώματος (Mayser, ii! p. 295), parallel to

eis ὃ ἐτύγχανεν] P.S.I. 542.

9 (rit/B.c.), or eis 6 ἔτυχεν P.Guroh 8, 12 (210 R.c.). Such a use of the opta-

tive is not attested in the post-Ptolemaic papyri. 656. Temporal : No examples of the optative in temporal clauses occur in the Ptolemaic papyri. An isolated example of post-Ptolemaic times, πρὸ τοῦ

[εἰσέϊλθοις B.G.U. 814, 14 (ii or iii/A.D.) is classified by Horn, p. 146, under "the

Optative

in Temporal

Expressions".

This

use

is, however,

contrary

to the usual construction of πρὸ τοῦ with infinitive, or with subjunctive (see 598 (12)). The document, on the other hand, is a private letter, so that it is difficult to accept influence of Atticism on it. The most obvious explan-

ation then,

is that τοῖς stands

|. The optative here has assumed «me to athematic forms (cf. 117).

for -n-.

the

augment

2Bb

{cf. 239}. It also presents extension of

THE

OPTATIVE

IN SECONDARY

CLAUSES

$8 656 (1) - 658 (I)

(1) An earlier example, i.e. ὅτε δὲ καὶ τύχοι P.Teht. 24, 65 (117 B.c.) is probably related to the formulaic εἰ (οὕτω) τύχοι attested also in the N.T.! and late papyri: P.Lond. 1902 (recto), 5-6 (vi/.p.); 1686, 21 (a.n. 565). 657. Conclusion: In general we see that the optative does not hold a real position in the language of the papyri. The use of it in Classical Greek ts sometimes reflected in compositions showing influence of Atticism. Its disap-

pearance must be seen in light of the general trend of Hellenistic Greek to get rid of the optative because this mood, with its distinct vowel system. could not accommodate itself to the morphology of the other moods. Since the notion of the optative could be perfectly expressed by other verbal forms, such as the future indicative, the subjunctive, and the imperative, it was a

matter of course that these verbal forms undertook all the functicns of the optative, which thus was left to fall into disuse. 658. The retreat of the optative is already marked in the compositions of Heilenistic authors. We can form some idea of this retreat on the basis of

the occurrences of the optative (per roo pages), as presented in the following figures? Xenophon Plato Strabo Philo Polybius Diodorus

Thus

Siculus

13

the decay of the optative even in writers whose

is apparent

(1)

330 250 76 66 37 Atticized style

is remarkable.

The use of the optative in papyri is, in general, a matter of literary

style, and the same is true in the N.T., where only Luke seems to be fond of the optative, because of his general tendency to indulge in Atticisms.?

1. See Blass-Debr.-Funk, $ 385 2, The figures 4. See

are taken

Moultan-Turner,

from p.

i2). Meillet,

Aperu.

131.

287

p. 276.

IMPERATIVE Blass-Debr.-Funk,

§ 387;

Burton,

MT,

8$

180-4;

Chantraine,

Morph.*,

G.Guendet, L'imperatif. dans le texte grec et dans les versions gothique,

58 914-23;

armenienne et vieux

slave des Evangiles, Paris 1924; W. Heidt, "Translating New Testament Imperatives" Cath. Bibl. Qu. xiii (1951), pp. 253 ff.; Jannaris, Hist, Gr. 58 1926 8(b); O. Jespersen, The Philosophy of Grammar” London, pp. 313-5; E. Kieckers, “Zum Gebrauch des Imperativus Aoristi und Praesentis ", 7.F. xxiv (1909), pp. 10-16; Mayser, i?, p. ög; ii, pp. 145-50; 229-32; Moulton, Pro/., pp. 171-84; Moulton-Turner, pp.74-8; Moule,

/diom,

pp.

135-7;

F. W. Mozley, "Use of the Present

J.Th.S. iv (1903), pp. 279 ff.: L. A. Post, A.J.P. lix (1938), pp. 31 fl., Robertson,

i, pp. 797-Bo4;

and Aorist

Imperative ἡ,

"Dramatic Uses of the Greek Imperative”, pp. 327-330: 941-950; Schwyzer, Gr. Gr.,

ii, pp. 339-44.

659. Introduction. The imperative is the mood chiefly used to express commands and prohibitions (although other moods are also used for this purpose).

In the papyri the imperative can also express a request

or a wish,

thus overlapping the function of the optative. It is very often found in alternation with the future indicative or the subjunctive and serves as substitute for the infinitive in certain cases after expressing will, wish, coercion. 660. In general, the imperative enjoys wide currency because of the conventional style of the papyri, and in particular of the nature of such documents

as edicts, orders, petitions and applications, orders for payment, private or business letters. The letters especially are full of imperatival forms which express the attitude of the writer towards the recipient; therefore the imperalive usually stands in the 2nd person singular.

Il.

661. The verb-stem does

MORPHOLOGY

not present

any modal

characteristic

in

the impe-

rative; it is in general the same as in the indicative (see appropriate chapters). 662. The endings of the imperative present some interesting developments as they show (a) intermixture between present and s-aorist endings, and (δ) the influence of the infinitive. which

also has a jussive use.

Thematic

Verbs

Uncontracted present and second aorist 663. Active. The endings of the present and second aorıst retain, for the most

part, the form of Attic inflexion. Certain developments 288

fit into the phone-

UNCONTRACTED PRESENT AND SECOND AORIST

$8 663 - 665

tic situation of the period, or into the course of general developments, such as confusion between first and second aorıst. In detail the attested endings, as in the papyri, are as follows: 664. The 2nd person singular of the present and second aorist is generally e. The papyri provide no evidence for setting the position of the accent in those second aorist imperatives which had been oxytone in Attic. Blass-Debr.Funk, referring to the N.T. Greek (and accordingly to the language of papyri), lay down the law “ide, λάβε but ἐλθέ and εἰπέ (op.cit.,$ 101 under ὁρᾶν). This differentiation is reasonable because it distinguishes the imperatives from the paroxytone forms of the 3rd person singular indicative and of the infinitives ἔλθαι, εἶπαι with which they could otherwise have been confused phonetically. Modern Greek (ἰδές, '8é and "més, "mé, beside λάβε point to the likelihood of a different distribution: ide, εἰπέ, but λάβε, ἔλθε. E.g. (1)

εἰπέ B.G.U. 388 (ii), 20 (2nd half

of ii/A.D.); P.S.J.

εἰπέ(ι() P.S.]. 836, 15 (vi/A.D.); ἱπέ P.Oxy. πρόσειπε P.Lond. 409, 27 (c. A.D. 346). (2)

410e P.Oxy.

1065,

P.Tebt. 315, 17-18;

4

(iii/A.D.);

1837,

P.Lond.

973, 4;

15 (early

243,

27

(c.

8 (vi/A.D.);

vi/A.D.); A.D.

411, 5 (both ii/A.D.); 412, 3 (late ii/A.D.);

346);

1668, 21

ἄνελ!θε

P.Ross.-Georg.

iii 4, τὸ (iij/A.D.); av[«A]lU« | P. Ross.-Georg. iii 7, 3-4 (ili /A.D.); ἅπελθε 1683, 9 (late iv/A.p.); Siedle) P.Ross.-Georg. iii 21, 7 (vi-vii/A.D.);

P.Oxy.

so also

P.Oxy. ἔσελθε

(iii/A.D.).

(3) 87,

évev|«« P.Oxy, 1148, 9-10 (i/A.D.); so 12 (beg. of ii/A.D.); (in full) P.Tebr.

(4)

ἔκβαλε

(5)

ἰδέ B.G.U.

P.Oxy.

744,

10

1079, 28

ἀν[ ἐΐνεγκε (dv[d]|vey«e 315, 35 (i1/4.D.).

Ed.) P.Hamb.

(1 B.C.).

(A.D. 41);

P.Hamb.

86, 4 (ii /A.D.); etc.

(6) λάβε P.Par. 59, 16 (159 B.C.); P.Oxy. 1668, 7 liii/A.D.); Ad«Be» P. Ross.Georg. iii 3, 22 liii/A.D.); (in full) 11, 8 (iv-v/A.D.); ἀνάλαβε P.Merton 23, 9 (late ii/A.D.); κατάλαβε P. Ross.-Georg. iii 23, 1 (beg. of viii /A.D.); παράλαβε P.Oxy. (7)

742,

mapdoyes

2

(2

2.C.).

P. Ryl.

238,

10

(A.D.

262).

665. Note: Occasionally the ending -e» occurs in the present, e.g. κέλευεν P.Lond. 405,14 (c. a.D. 346); so also the second aorist €veyxev (eveyxe{y} Edd.) P.Oxy. 1297, 16 (iv/a.D.). That «eAevev is imperative and not infinitive (the latter is accepted in P.Abinn. 11) is apparent from the context:

«ai περὶ ὧν βούλῃ | kéAevév μοι εἰδέος ἔχοντα πρὸς |... 13-14; Cf. καὶ περὶ βούλει «é[A]eué μοι,} κύρειε A.D. 346).

ἀδελφέ,

ἡδέως | ἔχοντι

P.Gen.

50.

[o ]v

17-20 (c.

289 B. Ci. Mandilaras.

The

Verh

in the Greek

Non-Literarv

Papvri

IH

AOWHWIST

SECOND

AND

PRESENT

LNCONTRACTEL

$8 666 - 675

Active Present

and second

666.

“τὰ

person

P.Ross.-Gearg. 667.

dorist

and

singular

iii 1, 12

person

-érw:

ἐχέτω

P.Hib.

54,

15

(c.

245

BC);

λαβέτω

(ili 'A.D.): etc.

plural

-ere. ypa dere,

B.C.); etc. So also the adverb etc.; cf. Mast. i1: 28.

δεῦρο

βαδίζετε

P.Lips.

has δεῦτε:

104,

13-14,

P. Mich. 214, 29

29 (96-95

(c. A.D.

293};

668. 3rd person plural -érwoar The 3rd plural has always the Attic-[onic ending -cav in both Piolemaic! and post-Ptoleniaic papyri, e.g. ἐνμενέτωισαν {sich P.Mich, 185, τ (A.D. 72]; xaradepérwoar | P.Oxy. 1415, 1 (late 111/A.D.); eic.

Middle Present

and second

669.

2nd

P.Tebt.

aorist

person

421,

670. 4rd

4

singular

-ov: ἀλλάσσον

[iii ’A.D.);

person

singular

24

(c.

P Fav.

20

P. Mich.

214,

γενέσθω

P. Ryl. 238, 2 (A.D. 202); P.Flor.

203];

μὴ

B.G.U.

1680,

ard

person

plural

-ἐσθωσαν;

9

.. «γενέσθω P.Flor.

of

the

contracted

673. Contracted present.

elc.

lili/A.D.);

332,

φυλασσέσθωσαν

la).

yenod

verbs

(see

It follows

13-14

ἐρχέστω (ii ’A.D.);

P.O,

013 (0224 B.C.];

237

89); προσγενέσθωπαν P.Oxy. 1414, τῇ (A.D. 270-275). The ending -σθωσαν occurs also in the aorist middle and present

108);

142, 4 (A.D. 204); etc.

671. and person plural -eode: ἀνδρίζεσθε | P.Petrie ii 40 ode P.Lipss. 104, 28 (96-95 B.C.). 672.

(A.D.

etc. -ἐσθω ἐρχέσθω

A.D.

117,

under

the

(vllt),

30

yive-

(A.D.

passive, and in the

corresponding

the rules of the Attic norm.

chapters).

Some

con-

tracted forms as apepipry, θάρσι, λυπίσθω and the like are explained merely on the basis of phonology. 674. (a)

ao

Active

second

person singular

192}; ἐρώτα B.G.U.

1079,

-a:

21

(A.D.

ἀγωνία P.Oxy. 41);

33

(verso)

(i),

13 (a.p.

180-

etc.

675. Middle and ard

person person

1. See Mayser,

inscriptions Magn.

Inschr.

singular -w: πειρῶ P.Caire Zen. 59251, 8 (252 B.C.); etc. plural -woar: ἐάσθωσαν P.Tehr, 61 (bl, 233 (118-117 B.C.) ; etc.

i2, p. 89

after

the

p,

149:

(with lit. j. The

injg.c. : see Schweizer,

ending -τώσαν

Meisterhans.

Perg.

Inschr., 200

p.

Art. 167.

is

entirely

Inschr.,

p.

established

167,

in the

Nachmanson,

“μι

VERS

δᾷ 676 - 680

(2)

676. (b) -éw Active second person singular -e [-ἢ, or -ἰ, all three being equivalent phonetically); μὴ ἀθύμει P,Amh. 37, 7, τὸ {il /B.c.); ἀκολούθεε B.G.U. 1079, 10 (A,D. 41); etc. 3rd person singular -w: ἐπιτε λείτω P. Athen, 14, 6-7 (a.p. 22); etc.

677. Middle and person singular (2 B.C.);

ard

ποιοῦ

person

-oó: ¢maxonot

P.Ross.-Georg.

singular

maptvoyA«ica»8w

ij

P.Sel. 2,

29

-efo@w: un | Aumic@w

P.Tebr.

44,

9

(c.

roO

101,

12

(ili/A.D.);

P.Gen.

B.C.];

(130 B.C.);

P.Oxy.

743, 43

etc.

51,

ro-11

(mid.

iv/A.D.);

μὴ

etc.

2nd person plural -eiade: Au'neioße P.Grenf. ii 36, 9-10 (95 B.C.); etc. 3rd person plural -εἰσθωσαν ; ἀπαιτείσθωσαν P.Oxy. 1414, 2 (A.D. 270-275];

etc.

678. (c) -ow Active ard 679.

person

plural:

Middle: δήλου

P.Oxy.

“μι Verbs

συμβιούτωσαν 113,

30

P.Oxy.

496,

8

(A.D.

127).

lii/A.D.).

(Present

and

Aorist

Active)

680. The endings of the -;& verbs in the imperative plainly show traces of the intrusion of the endings of the thematic verbs. This is, in fact, a development which reflects the general tendency of the -zı verbs to adopt the endings of the thematic verbs, thus falling into the conjugation of the verbs in -w. 80: (D ἀφίημι has present adıe P.Oxy. 6758, 12 (i /A.D.] λύετε, ἀφίετε whence adie (cf. adiw, 122), and aorist ados on the analogy of δός, Cf. conversely δές P.Meyer 22. analogy ol ades, θές.

on the pattern Ave P.Oxr, 1346 (ii/a.D,?) 3 {ΠΠ|-ἰν j A.D.)! on the

(2) Note: The imperative ἄφες is occasionally used as an ımperatival particle, thus with an infinitive, or asubjunctive following? forms a periphrastic imperative, e.g. ἀλλ᾽ ἄφες αὐτὸν χαίρειν P.Amh. 37, 10 (ii / A.D) ; ἄφες ἐγὼ αὐτὴν Bpnınow

P.Oxy. 413,

184

(u/A.D.);

literary

text;

239, 16 (c.A.D. 346). In late papyri (so also in Modern Greek)’ e.g. καὶ

1. The form δός is still preserved in Modern 2. So

in the

N.T.

(Matt.

7:4}

besides

ades

yerovra

ἄφες is found as Anßlwloılr]

(for

γένωνται)

P.Lend.

in the syncopated form ἄς of ὀνελάται μίαν ἀρτί ἀβην]

Greek. Cf. Modern

Greek {{{δὲές for ἰδέ,

δεῦτε, dye, dpa,

3. For particulars see Hatzidakis, Einl., pp. 16 and 309. Jannaris, Hist. Gr., αὶ 1916, does not accept the derivation of ds from ἄφες, but he argues that the process was éagor-éare> aoe> as. The weak points of this theory are; (a) how the accented ἐ- of face could be dropped (dace in fact is a syncopated form of ἄφησε), and (45) papyri have not vet shown

201

$85 680 (2) - 684 κριθῆς

(1)

FIRST

P.Amh.

153,

P.Ross.-Georg. (3)

ard

iii

7.8

‘late

22, 9

person

AOKIST vi or

ACTIVE

vit. A.D.);

(vti'a.p.): see also

plural: aderwoar

B.G.U.

ada

{ - aAda)

comments

597.

23

ds ἔλθω

/Jbid.,

(A.D.

pp.

καὶ

εὕρω

89-90.

75).

681. δίδωμι: In addition to the regular form 5os,! iand the stereotyped amoóos "deliver ", replaced partly by ἐπίδος in Byzantine papyri) the post- Ptolemaic

papyri have -δὲες P.S.I. 967, 21 [i-i 16; (in full) 420, δέτε: ἀνάδεται ( —

(A.D.

682.

108-109),

especially in compounds (for 8és see above); so amades /A.D.); wapddes SB 9251, 4 (it-ili A.D.) ; ueraóes P.Tebt. 416, 22 (both i1/A.D.). -re) P.fand. 9, 34 (H/A.D.); mapla] deve B.G.U. 360, 7-B

but παράδοτε

P.Herm.

Rees 7, 12

(1v 'A.D.); etc.

εἰμί:

and 3rd

person person

8 (257 (n),

singular: ἴσθει singular:

12

(ti or early

13

(A.D.

345);

(I)

With

adscript

(2

New verb

ἤτω

stem

First aorist

(usually

[252

51

(111

with

B.c.).

adscript

B.c.); P.Grenf.

1 27

iit/A.D.);

P.Flor.

167

-2: ἐξέστω

P. Mich.

243.

P.Oxy.

| P.Flor.

(3) 3rd person (A.D, 176-180); .

58,

(1),

-ı):

see

P.Cairo Zen.

ti), 5 (tog

τῷ

(mid.

2.C.);

iii A.D.);

59050,

POxy. P.Lond.

36 233,

etc.

form

11-11 /A.D.?); The

ἔστω

B.C.); 59251, 9

P.Tebr.

with

533.

166, n-

5

11

(late

(A.D.

ıs probably

3

(A.D.

41-54);

ii or

early

iii ’a.n.):

B.G.U.

419,

(A.D.

276-277).

the

imperfect.

255); due

B.G.U. to

extension

plural: ἔστωσαν C.P.R. 1, 22 (a.D. SB 8265, 3 (c. A.D. 335 or 945).

etc.

1!3 of

n of

83-84);

See

PS.

also

118.

276,

1325,

24

10

active

and person

singular: -(a)ov.

This ending is regularly employed in the Ptolemaic papyri, and continued

to be equally in use in the post-Ptolemaic

papyri,

besides other variants.

(1) So also εἶπον [imperative of εἶπα) {εἰπὸν is accepted by Blass-Debr.Funk, § 81 (i) } P.Oxv. 1063, 4 (1 or inia. D.); P.Lond. 410, 18. (c. A.D. 346). (2)

eveyxov

(Imperative

of

ἤνεγκα)

P.Giss.

Univ.-Bibl.

20,

36

(ist

half

of ii/

A.D.): P. Mich. 214,20 (c. A.D. 293); €vixov P.Oxy. 121, 17 [HI /A.D.); €riy «ov P.Tebt. 421, 6-7 [i /A.D.); avererkor P.Giss. Univ.-Bibl. 21, τὸ (il /A.D.); ἀνένεγκον P.Princ. 103, 5 Iv /A.D.]; ἐξένεκαν B.G.U. 229, 4; 230, 4 (both i-i; A.D.j-

684. 2nd person

(1)

-€

the

form

singular

gage

(one

£aaov

twice attested,

and

ἄφες

1. So always

in the

is in our collection, dated in

vi/A.D.); on

is frequent.

Prolemaic

papyri:

Mavser,

202

ı?, p.

174.

the

other

hand

as is

FIRST

AORIST

ACTIVE

δᾷ 684 (1) - 685

The ending -e is employed on analogy with the present and aorist ending -e. There is no example of this ending in the Ptolemaic but it occurs quite frequently in the post-Ptolemaic papyri, established in Modern Greek. It is apparent that the ending -e present and second aorist contributed to this development. This is

by such examples as zepiuewllovje writer himself erased (2)

ov and wrote

P.S./.

1100, 28 (A.D.

second papyri, and is of the proved

161) where the

e.

-a:

The ending -a: in the 2nd person singular, although it:is equivalent phonetically to -e, has its origin in the infinitive; it is, in other words, an infinitive which has taken the place of the imperative in structure. (For discussion see under "Imperatival Infinitive", 756 ff.). Examples: πέμψαι

in ἐὰν

πέμ!σαι larly

δοκῇ

in aidv

πέμψαι

σοι,

πέμψαι

| ro ἀπόχο(ο)ν P.Fay.

σοι δώξη,

mepiocı

P.Ross.-Georg.

v 5,

αὐτῷ τὸ

ἐλᾶς

P.Fay.

(iii /A.D.);

123,

11 -12 (c.

117, 6-7

διαπέμψαι

(A.D.

[διάπεμψαι

A.D.

100);

108);

simi-

Hunt-Ed-

gar) P.Tebt. 315 (= P.Sel. 127), 20 (ii/A.D.); προνοῆσαι ἰπρονόησαι Edd.) P.S.I. 821, 2 (ii-iii/A.D.); θελῆσαι (Beinoaı Edd.: θελήσαι Mitteis) P.Oxy. 893, 7 (late vi or vii /A.D.); καταξιῶσαι (xarafiwoat Edd.) P.S.J. 1430, 7 (vit /A.D.); φροντίσαι P.Oxy. 1929, 3 (late iv or v/A.D.); cf. Barrıcaı «ai ἀπόλουσαι βαπτίσαι καὶ ἀπολοῦσαι) Acts 22:16, as παρενέγκαι in Luke 22: 42.

-ev This form ending -ov.

(read

(3)

E.g.

presents

κατάγραψεν

a blend

P.Oxy.

327

(in

of the present ending -e with BL

i), 2

(late

i/A.D.];

the aorist

mapavyiÀev

SB

7331,

7 (end of i - beg. of it/A.D.); dpev P.Fay. 435, 2: 3 l[it/A.D.); πέμψεν SB 7572, 5 (prob. rst half of ii/A.D.); («é»veudev Edd.)! P.Fay. 126, 5 (ii or iii /A. D.); P.Ryl.

242,

6

(in /A.D.);

B.G.U.

948,

10;

11

(iv-v/A.D.);

Si ypadev

(with

the

augment: cf. 239: διάγραψον BL 1 154) P.Flor. 254, 13 (A.D. 259]: κατήχευσεν P.Lond. 239, 9 (c. A.D. 346); γράψεν P.Strassb. 35, 8; 17 (iv-v/A.D.); B.G.U. 948,

(4)

7

liv-v/A.D.);

φρώντισεν,

χάρισεν

SB

6270,

19;

28

The ending -ev appears occasionally in the present

(vi-vii/A.D.).

and

second

aorist

(see 665). Notice the form γράψα for γράψον P.Meyer 22, 9 (iii-iv/A.D.) on the pattern λέγε : λέγετε whence γράψατε : ypaıba. Cf. ἀνάστα,

διάβα

and

the like, 690 (1). 685. 3rd person singular : |.

The

text

runs:

λαλοῦντος

περὶ

σοῦ

ὅτι.

“πέμψεν

κτήματος..."

293

ἐπὶ

τὴν

mevÜepa

oaov

ya ριν

tot

ξξ 685

(1) - 688

(1)

(sic)

(1)

-arw:

FIRST

εἰσενεγκάτω

P.Oxy.

1872,

3-4

AOHIST

ACTIVE - AORIST

P.Ryl.

(v or

77,

37

vi/A.D.)

(A.D.

with

MITFDLE 192);

an

etc.

cf.

μὲ

adscript

-ı.

ave χυρησάτωι

(2) -érw: In addition to the regular ending -arw we find occasionally the ending -erw in the post-Ptolemaic papyri. This ending is apparently employed after the present / second aorist ending (cf. 2nd person singular -e for -or).

E.g. ἄλλα ξέτω B.G.U. 597, runolo)erw (v-vi /4.D.),

10-11

(A.D. 73}:

ἄνα rxaoéra

POxr.

121, 7-8

liti A.D.)

P.Mever 22, 5 (0-1 /A.D.); Cf. éxw«Aewe rw P.Oxy. 2193, 11-12 a quotation from Job 36° 19, while the text of the O.T. has ἐκκλινάτω.

686. 2nd person plural: There is no deviation from the normal ending -are! throughout the period of the papyri. Cf. καταξιόσατῃ (for -woare) P.Oxy. 1872, 7: 9 (v or vi/4.p.), and συνκρωτήσαταί pot P. Ross.-Georg. iii 18, 9 (vivil/ 4.D.), in both of which a matter of phonology is involved. 687. 3rd person plural: The ending of the 3rd person plural presents same development as that of the 3rd person singular,? thus: (lI) -arwaav: amarıoarwoar eTggarwcave βίων. 110, 15; (2)

-«ἐτωσαν

σπουδαπέτωσαν

P. Mich. 333-4, 18 (A.D. 27 (A.D. 94); ete. P.Fay,

112,

ι8

(A.D.

32}:

Aculoleracar,

the em.

aq).

(3) -avtTwy : This Attic-HIonic form of the 3rd person plural ending is found only in rapaxeipoypadnoarrwr, ὑπακουσάντων P.Lond. 359, 1; 5 (late {ἢ 4.D.), 1.6. in two instances from the same papyrus. This zorm is foreign to the general development of the imperative endings, and it must be attributed to the individual preference of the writer. 688. Aorist middle (1)

2nd

person

ἄσπασαι

935, 22;

singular : It retains

B.G.U,. 423,

18

1676, 32; 38

(ii !’a.n.);

(both

the ending P.Oxy..

in/A.D.);

114.

δέξε

-aac 16;

in a few

930, 26 (both

POxr.

1158,

7

verbs,

as:

ii or ili A.D.);

(iii A.D);

δέξαι

P.Lond. 236, 7 le. A.D. 346); P.Oxy. 1932, 5 (v/A.D.)5; so also unobefe P.Ox, 1838, 1 (vi/A.D.) and eó£e P.Oxy, 1874, τα 18 [vi /A.D.) ; κόμισαι P Hib. 54, 17

(c. 245 B.c.); P.Oxv.

The -e in phonetically.

tig. 11

(ὑπό)δεξε

and

(ii or ti /A.D.);

εὖξε

must

P.Flor.

be taken

162, 7 (c. A.D, 260);

as

equivalent

to

eic.

-aı

1. Modern Greek, having adopted the ending -e for the 2nd singulaz, has thus changed -are to -ere of the 2nd person plural on the pattern of the present endings -«, -ere.

2. See

Mavser,

ı?, p. 89; see also 685 f.

294

AORIST

(2)

2nd

person

PASSIVE - LONG

plural: ἀσπά a«ao»58ai

VOWEL

(— -oße}

AORIST

P.Oxy.

— $& 688 (2) - 691 (1)

1681,

24-5

(ili /A.D.).

689. Aorist passive (1) and person singular -& or -rı (after dissimilation: αἰδέσθητι P.Giss. Univ.-Bibl. 21, 8 [ii/A.D.); διαλάγηθε P.Giss. 17, 13 (n/A.D.); cf. S[ifadaynrn B.G.U, 846, τὸ (ii/A.D.]) due {most likely) to analogy of the commoner dissimilated forms ; ἐπιμελή 0«nr»« P.Oxy. 744. 6-7 [1 8.c.} pedo Ogre P.Giss. Univ.Bibl. 21, 3-4 (ii/A.D.]; Pens 1926, 16 (mid. iv/A.D.]; πειράθητι P.Perrie HORE (2), 4 (mid. 1101/B.C.J. (2) 3rd person singular: ἀπίο) δοθίητω ϑιήτω)] P.Oxy. 1864, t4 (vii /A.D.).

P.Oxy.

1863,

at

[vil/A.D.);

ἀποδίο) -

(3) 3rd person plura!: It has only -rwoar according to the general tendency of Koine to employ this ending instead of -rrwr in all imperative 3rd person plural forms, e.g. πεμφθήτωσαν, κατασχεθήτωσαν P.Marmarica iv, 21; v, 36; vi, 24 (A.D. 190-191?};, παρειορυγήτω σαν P.Oxy. 121, 6-7 lili j/A.D.]; ὑποστρεφέ-

twoay

P.Giss.

690. Other

40

(i),8

long-vowel

(1) ἔστημι

and

(A.D.

aorists

215).'

without

gradation

ἔβην

and person singular: evora P,Mich. 210, 4 (ii or early iit /A.D.]; ἀνάστα P.Lond. [21, 621 (iii/A.D.?); 122, 99 (Iv-v/A.D.), and accordingly araßa SB 9120,

12 (i/a.D.); P.Hamb. 87, 6-7

(beg. of

διάβα P.Fay. 110, 15 (A.D. 94),

and

ii/a.p.);*

used as aorist imperative of ὑπάγω, Cf. and even the presents τρέχα, devya and

and

person

plural:

συνπαράστατε

P.Lond.

similarly twa

SB

Modern Greek the like.

7452,

121, 441

(iii /A. D.?];

P.Arhen. 62, 11 l(i-ii /A.D.),

6 (not

later

ἀνέβα,

than

κατέβα

etc.,

iii /A.D.).

(2) ἔγνων γνῶθι P.Far. 110, 16 (A.D. 94); γνῶθει — P.Amh. 145, 15 (c. A.D. 400); ἀνάγνωθι P.Bour. 20, 17; 31 (A.D. 350); ἐπίγνοθι P.Fay. 112, 14-15 (A.D. 99); avy y' va

P.Oxy.

1860,

13

γνώτω

P.Oxy.

(vi or vii /A.D.). 123,

05

[ii Or iv/A.D.).

691. Perfect active (1) οἶδα and

person

singular:

fcdı

P.Oxy.

2190,

44

(late

i/A.D.);

1. If the doubiful letter « has been transcribed correctly, we must the ending -érwear, which is common in papyri.

P.Merton

accept

an

24,

9

(c.

influence

of

2, Such forms as éufla and κατάβα are attested in Attic drama. avafa is included here because only this form is found, and it is of the same type as -ora. Strictly speaking, ἔβην is ἃ root-aorist formed to a root ending in long vowel.

295

88 691 (1) - 695

MEANING

AND

USES

OF THE

A.D. 200); P.Tebt. 424, Ὁ (late iii/A.D.); ard

person

plural: ἴστωσαν

(2) Middle The perfect of ρώννυμι and

P.Fay.

20

IMPERATIVE

P.Oxy. [ii),

is confined

τὸ

to

2156, (A.D.

t3 (late

iv or v/A.D.).

222).

the salutatory forms éppwao!

ἔρρωσθε.

II.

MEANING

AND

USES

OF

THE

IMPERATIVE

692. The imperative is frequently used in papyri, and this is. due to the na-

ture of the papyrus texts, which literary compositions. In papyri, a plest way;? and the imperative was papyri, where the verbose style is imperatival

modes

consisting

693. The imperative,

lack the sophistication which we find in writer will ask for something in the simat hand for this purpose. In Byzantine plain, the imperative retreats before other

of cognate

moods

or

periphrases.

in general, is used to express a command,

and this

command can range from the strictest order to the humblest prayer. A nega-

tive command (= prohibition) can also be expressed, although not as frequently as the positive command, for the reasons that prohibitions were confined, for the most part, to the subjunctive. 694. The tenses of the imperative. The distinction of “aspect” between present (linear) and

aorist

(punctiliar)

is well

illustrated

in the use

of

these

two tenses in the imperative. This distinction, in fact, is widely observed in all periods, and

is still clear in

Modern

Greek.

695. Present. The present is used to express a command to do something constantly. The notion of continuity is sometimes exemplified by means of adverbial

expressions,

e.g.

t. éppwoo occurs, according to our collection, in letters ascribed to a date not later than the Hi/A.D. Its attestation in P,Oxy. 120. 26 brings the date of this papyrus (iv/a.p. by the Edd.) tn doubt.

2. Cf. the simple way with which Homer addresses the Muse at the beginning of the Jliad using the smperative. as we learn τιμᾶ,

ὅτι

proportion Matt,

6:0;

from

εὐχεσθπε

of Luke

This

surprised Protagoras,

Arist. Poet. οἰόμενος

imperatives

xix 5 ri yap ἐπιτάττει

with

who

did not

dv τις ὑπολάβοι εἰπιὼν

which

Christ

11:2.

296

"Myr

enjoined

hesitate to blame Homer,

ἡμαρτῆσθαι dede

Bea;

ἃ

Πρωταγόρας emCf. also the large

us to address

“Our

Father”,

THE

TENSES

OF THE

IMPERATIVE - PRESENT

§§ 695 - 699

4

ἀκολούθει δὲ Πτολλ] αρίωνι πᾶσαν ὧραν B.G.U. 1079, 10-11 (A.D. 41); ἐρώτα αὐτὸν | καθ᾽ ἡμέραν Ibid., 21-2; γράφε μοι συνεχῶς P.Flor. 332, 18 (iı/a.D.).

696. The sense of continuing to do something is often implicit in the context itself, e.g. μὴ οὖν ὀλιγοψυχήσητε, | ἀλλ᾽ ἀνδρίζεσθε P.Petrie ii 40(a), 12-13 (224 B.C.) = do not lose heart, but continue to be brave; so ἐπιμέλον in the common epistolary formulaof the Ptolemaic papyri means “take care of yourself, and con-

tinue to do so”, e.g. see P.Petrie ii 11 (1), 8 (mid. iii/B.c.);

P.Par.

46, 21-2

(153 B.c.); P.Tebt. 55, 9-10 (ii /B.c. or later); P.Oxy. 805, 6 (5 2.C.); 743. 43 (2 B.C.); also ἐπιμέλεσθε δὲ | ξαυ] τῶ]ν iv’ ὑγιαίνητε P.Sel. 104, 11-12 (i/B.c.).

697. The present may express an action which also enters the future. This inevitably results from the continuity denoted by this tense. The futuristic notion of the present appears in such examples as: ἐπισκοποῦ

sisters

Öle]

too;

keep

watch;

43-4

(2

| καὶ

cf.

τὰς

πειρῶ

similarly

B.C.);

ἀδελφάς

βλέϊπε

P.Sel.

ἐπισκοπεῖν ἐπισκοποῦ σατὸν

ἀπὸ

101,

12-13 (130

P.Cairo Zen. | rovs τῶν

σοὺς

59251,

wärrels)

᾿Ιουϊδαίων

B.C.) =

look after

(252

B.c.) = try

8

(for πάντας)

B.G.U.

1079,

P.Oxy.

24-6

my

to 743,

(A.D.

41)

= beware too of the Jews; μνημόνενε οὖν, | θεία, ὡς ζώσης τῆς μητρός pov, €tvo, ei riva εὑρίοκις, πέμπε πρὸς ἐμέ P.Bour. 25, 12-14 (iv/A.D.) = remember me then, aunt, as if my mother were still alive, and if you find someone, send him to me.

698. The futuristic sense of the present imperative is suggested by the complementary sentence which may consist of: (1)

(G

a future

9), 8-10

ἥδιστα

| ἔχων

indicative:

(mid. ws

émío|[r]eAAe,

iii/B.C.); χάριτας

ἐπέστελλέ

λήμψομαι

ποιήσομεν

yap

| [| n]àvra

P.Petrie

μοι

ἡδέως

ἔχοντι,

τὰς yap

ἐντολάς

P.Oxy.

1664,

10-12

(iii /A.D.);

ili 42

aov

apepilurn

(= -μνει) οὖν, πάτερ, χάριν τῶν μαθημάτων | ἡμῶν" φιλοπονοῦμεν καὶ ἀναψύχομεν' | καλῶς ἡμέε[1]ν ἔσται P.Oxy. 1296, 5-8 (iii /A.D.), and (2) other futuristic expressions: ypade δ᾽ ἡμῖν καὶ ov, ἵνα εἰδῶνμεν P.Petrie ii tr (1), 7-8 (mid. iii/B.C.); προσδόκα ἡμᾶς τῇ Ky πρὸς σὲ γεινοϊμένους P.Flor. 127,

2-3

(A.D.

256);

naxpoj[v]x[«]

οὖν,

ἀδελφή,

dypers

| od

dv με

θεὸς

εὐοδώση

πρὸς] ὑμᾶς P.5.I. 299, 11-12 (end of i/A.D.); σπούδαζε | δὲ δηλοῖν Zueiv ... | . καὶ αὐτὸς δὲ κέλευε wept ὧν day βούλει, | ..., iva καὶ ἡμεῖς Ta κελευόμενα παρὰ τῆς διαθέ σεώς σον μετὰ πάσης προθυμείας ὑπουργῶμεν P.Lond. 231, 12-16 (mid, iv/A.D.); similarly περὶ ὧν βούλῃ, | xéAevév μοι (xeAevev P.Abinn. 11) εἰδέος ἔχοντα (sic) P.Lond. 405, 13-14 (c. A.D. 346); wept 1[ὧ]ν βαύλει, κέ Aleve μοι |... ἥδέως | ἔχοντι P.Gen. 50, 17-20 [c. A.D. 346); περὶ δὲ ὧν βούλι, wéAeve μοι

ἡδέως

ποιοῦντι

P.Gen.

55, 23

(mid.

iv/A.D.).

699. In prohibitions the present imperative is used to forbid either the con-

297

&§& 699 - 701

THE

TENSES

OF

THE

IMPERATIVE - AOKIST

tinuance of an act already in progress, or the performance of an act in the future. In the latter case the aorist subjunctive is normally employed, but the present imperative ts occasionally used and, in virtue of its linear aspect, it puts less insistence on the implementation of the prohibition at a particular point of time; it is thus less peremptory in tone than the aorist subjunctive. E.g. μηθενὶ

émrpémn|ev]e

...

i...

| *p]aooew

τε

P.Tebt. 6, 43-4

(140-139

B.C.)

-- do

not allow anyone to do anything; [μη] auge, aAA ades. αὐτὸν χαΐρειν P Amh. 37, 10 (UH /B.C.); μὴ λυιπεῖσθε ἐπὶ τοῖς χωρισθεῖσι' ὑπειλαμβάνοσαν φονευθήσεσθαι P.Grenf.

ii 36,

9-11

(95

B.C.)

= do

not

grieve

expecting to be killed; similarly, ἄλοιποι 104, 27-8

ἁπλῶς

(96-95

P.Tebr.

ponsible about

B.C.)

400.

xareyyva

(92

...; μηδὲν

me;

μὴ

or

49

δίσταζε

epuryfeis,

B.C.)

γλυ

dÀvmoi) no

P. Mich,

κύταται͵

way

401,

ἐν

the

departed;

| γίνεσθε περὶ

rov Kouwros

- in

περὶ ἐμυῦ

ἀδελφὲ

(=

under

over

ἐμοῦ

tod Κόμωνος

make αὐτὴν

were

P.Lips.

πρὸς

μηδὲν

K. son of K. res-

10 (11 /A.D.)

μηδενεὶ

they

-- do not

Avme

worry

P.Lond.

In.

No. 2102, 21-2 (Ii /A.D.) = ... do not grieve her in anything: μὴ ὄκνι poe | [γράφειν P.Oxy. 030, 1-2 (1! Or II /A.D.]; μὴ δὴ προς Gel wu] ireivov τὸν αδελφὸν

τοιηῦτος

γίνου,

λυπίσθω

700. Aorist.

δὲ

The

ἀλλ᾿ ἃ ypade

ἡ [ψυχή

aorist,

aov

ὅτι

σ)υνεχέστερον πηνῖς

P.Gen.

in contrast

P.Flor. 51.

367,

10-11

to the present,

13-15

(mid,

(ill /A.D.);

μὴ

iv /A.D.).

is used

to express

an

order, the execution of which is urgent and must follow without delay. This sense results from the punctiliar aspect of the tense, and the context will determine how much stress is carried. It may be a mere request, or a strong

demand. On the basis of the special meaning arising from the context, the imperative aorist

is used

to denote:

701. Request, e.g. dpwra σε xat παρακαλῶ σε, 744. 6-7 (1 8.0.) ; un | τοίνυν γενέσθω μετέωρον, στήρια P.Flor. 332, 846,

with

[0

(n /A.D.];

13-15

(11 /A.D.];

similarly

empeAndinrd τῷ παιδίῳ P.Oxy, iva ka γὼ μὴ σκυλῶ εἰς rà δικα-

mapaka[|A] ὦ σαι, μήτηρ, δ, TaAay nri po B.G.U.

διαλάγηβι

ἡμεῖν

P.Giss,

17,13

(n / A.D.)

--

be

friends

me.

This kind of imperative is occasionally introduced by a verb of “entreaty” , thus resulting in an asyndetic construction.! Such a construction is found with

the

following

verbs:

(1) αἰτέομαι "request": passim. (2) dfiow recto, 20-3 [iii /B.C.); etc. [3)] ἐντέλλομαι

1. See

Ljungsyik,

Beitr.,

pp. 97

f;

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

2098

“beseech”: see P.Perrie ti 36 (a) "command :see P. Mich. 219, 5-7

ὃ 458.

!

THE

(A.D. 296).

TENSES

(4) ἐρωτάω

OF

THE

IMPERATIVE

"beg : see B.G.U. 423,

- AQGRIST

11-12

δὲ 701 - 704

lii/A.D.); P.Mich. 49t,

Q (ilJA.D.). (5) καταξιόω "demand" ":see P.Oxy. 1071, 8 (via.D.); 1:871, 5 (late v/A.D.); 1935. 2 (vi/A.D.); PS. 973, 4 (vi/^A.D.); etc. (6) παρακαλέω "entreat ": see P.Giss. 12, 4-7 (Roman); 2t, 12-13 (beg. of ii /A.D.); etc. cf. ı Cor. 4:16; 1 Thess. 5: 14; Heb. 13: 22; τ Pet. 5: 1. (7) σπεύδω “hurry: cf. Luke 19: 5 (D).

702. Instigation (or concession) (especially in the 3rd person;

Subjunctive,

553

cf. Hortatory

f.), e.g.

καὶ τοὶ ὑ)ς ἐϊλαι] vas τὸ δεύτερον | [ὕ] δω[ ρ] Aov|ojarwoav, xai διαβα eis , Ato»[ υ]Ἱσια[δαὺ] P.Fay. 110, 14-16 (A.D. 94); so also ἐπιστησάτωσαν in line 27; ὥστε οὖν, τέκνον, peAn'odtw oo te... P.Oxy. 930, 18-19 lit or ili /A.D.); pel Aq] oaτω oo οὖν, ἀδελφέ, περὶ τοῦ γράμματος τῆς [ὑ]Ἱποθήκίης P.Oxy. 1666, 17-18 (li /A,D.]) ; φροντίς σοι γενέσθω ...1... παρασχεῖν ra | ἐπιτήδια ἢ Αγ] 238, 2-5

(A.D. 262), with παράσχες in line 10; so also P.Flor. 142, 3-53 (A.D. likewise with φρόντισον: see P. Ryl. 78, 26-7 (A.D. 157); P.Achmim 8, (A.D. 197); P.Flor. 127, 10-11 (A.D. 256); P.Oxy. 2114, 11-14 (A.D. 316); κατὰ τὴν ἐντολὴν ἀποδότω P.Bour. 20, 16 (A.D. 350) = let her give them according

to

the

power

264): 15-16 etc.; back

of attorney.

703. Order, the immediate execution of which is demanded; see in general P.Hib. 54 (c. 245 B.c.); Lucius Bellenus Gemellus' correspondence (= P.Fay. 110-121 (c. A.D. 100) ); the letters in P.Abinn., while Victor's correspondence

(P.Oxy. 1844-1850, and the letters which follow up to 1875 (all vi or vii/A.D.)) show

clearly

the retreat

of the imperative

before

the jussive

subjunctive.

or the imperatival infinitive. So: ταχέως ... | mapayevod P.Hamb. 86, 7-8 (1/A.D.]) = come here quickly; νῦν Ὁ μελησάτω σοι λυτρώσασθαι τὰ ἐμὰ παρὰ Lapa πίωνα (sic)! P.Oxy. 114. 1-3 (ii or ii1/A.D.]; so also ὅ κἂν νῦν ποιήσατε, ἵνα | py μετὰ στρατιώτου ἀναγκασθῇτε τοῦτα ποιῆσαι P.Flor. 137*, 6-8 (A.D. 264); κἂν ws, δέσποτά μοι, ἀντί γραψόν μοι ἐν τάχει P.Oxy. 123, 7-8 (iit or iv/A.D.) — nevertheless, my son,* answer my letter quickly; viv κόμιπον διὰ Tıuodenu P.Ross.-Georg. iii 6, 13 (iv/A.D.).

704. In general, the use of the aorist is very common. Such aorists as azoστειλον, δήλωσον, ἔνεγκον, θέλησον, karafiwoor, παρασκεύασον, ποίησον, σπού-

δασον, φρόντισον are well attested and fall under one of the three categories discussed separately above.

1. Cf, Modern Greek genitive in -a for -os of the masculine nouns of the 3rd declension. 2. The word δεσπότης is not used wrillen from a notary ta his son.

strictly in

299

the

sense of "lord".

The letter here ts

88 705 - 709

RELATIONSHIP

BETWEEN

PRESENT

AND

AORIST

705. In prohibitions, the imperative aorist is rarely used, and always in the

3rd

person,

¢.g.

μὲ ouvixopnoarwı

P.Oxy.

1872,

3-4 (v or

vi/A.D.).

706. An isolated example offers μή with the 2nd person singular following, e.g. μὴ οὖν ap[é]Aga[o]r P.Jews 1915, 36 (c. A.D. 330-340) against the usual construction μὴ apeAnons. The fact that such a construction is nowhere else attested in the papyri, and is entirely absent from the N.T., makes us doubt the accuracy of the transcription.’ For un+2nd person plural see 568 (1). 707. Relationship between present and aorist. seen when both tenses stand together. E.g.

βλέϊπε

B.G.U.

caróv

ἀπὸ

1079, 24-9

τῶν

'loubaiwv

but

(A.D. 41} = beware

ἰδὲ

Difference ἡ

(=

εὖ

of aspect

δύναται...

too of the Jews,

is best

ὑπογραφῆναι

... see if you can get

it signed. This is well illustrated by a number of passages from the N.T, Cf. ἄρον τὸν κράββατόν aov καὶ περιπάτει John 5:8; μείνατε ὧδε καὶ γρηγορεῖτε Mark

14: 34; δὸς ἡμῖν σήμερον Matt. 6: 11, but δίδου ἡμῖν τὸ καθ' ἡμέραν Luke 11: 4.3 Similarly, in the papyrt, besides the usual aorırt ἀπόστειλον there occurs the present

ἐπίστελλε: ἐάν

coner γὰρ

Tavra.

τινος

χρείαν

ἔχηις

. i|... ].as

ἡμᾶς

€mailrledde,

ποιή-

P. Petrie iii 42 (G 9), 7-10 (mid. iii /B.C.); so also περὶ τῶν ἀπὸ

πατρίδος σοι χρειὼ δῶν, κύριέ μου, ἐπίστελλέ μοι ἡδέως ἔχοντι, τὰς yap ἐντολὰς cov ἤδιστα | ἔχων ὡς χάριτας λήμψομαι P.Oxy. 1604, 9-12 (in /A.D.), but ἀπ|6στει] |Acy μοι

ii /B.C.]; μοι

τὰ

τὴν

ὄνον,

ἀπόστειλον

μέτρα

τῶν

χρέαν

πρὸς

yap

με

| ἔχομεν

[ αὐτῆς 1 P.Perrie

P.Perrie iii 53

ofoviwy

P.Par.

32,

22-4

P.Par. 49, 29

(c. 160

B.c.]; etc., so also in

Àov

P.Lond.

413,

por

708. From

aura

13

(c.

A.D.

Ik), 2-3 (102

B.C.);

ii 42

(b),

(lit/B.C.);

(mid.

ἀπόσ{τειλ[ ἢν

ἀπόστειλον

the post-Ptolemaic

1-3 πρὸς

ἐμέ

papyri, ἀπόστι-

346}.

these examples it appears that ἀπόστειλον expresses

a command

to perform an action which is completed by the performance— so the aorist is

aspectually the appropriate tense. ᾿Εἰπίστελλε means "write and let me know”, it is not the writing of the letter that constitutes the completion of the act, but the giving of the information so that the recipient of the information can take the further necessary action—hence the need for linear aspect. 709. The distinction of aspect between present and aorist has been blurred with certain verbs. So the imperative present of εἰμί, i.e. ἔστω, seems

press an aspectless notion. I. Mn

with

(Fr. 453) 2. See

imperative

aorıst

to ex-

E.g.

was

not

popular

in Attic,

whence

μὴ ψεῦσον

of Sophocles

1s parodied by Aristophanes in μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς ἐπιούσης ἐλπίδος Th. 870.

Moulton,

Eimn., p. 274;

Moulton-Turner, pp.

$ 242. 21}.

77 f.; Zerwick-Smtth,

Biblica! Greek,

RELATIONSHIP

BETWEEN

PRESENT

ANI)

AORIST

§& 709 (1) - 710

(1 ἔστω: ἔστω τὸ δέρμα αἴγειον P.Cairo Zen. 59060, 8 (257 B.C.) = let the leather be of goatskin; ὅπερ κύριον | ἔστω P.Lond. 233, 12-13 (A.D. 345) = let it be valid. (2) ἔχε: Similarly with ἔχω, the present ἔχε, ἐχέτω is often used in punctiliar action,! e.g. ἐχέτω δὲ | καὶ ἱματισμόν P.Hib. 54, 15-16 (c. 245 B.C.) = let him be dressed: the letter contains instructions to a certain Ptolemaeus to execute

some orders, all of which βαρέως

ἔχε

pov

τὰ

(Bin number)

γράμματα

are expressed

voudelroür[r])a

(ii/A.D.) = but do not be offended

ae

by my

by the aorist; ἀλλὰ μὴ

P.Lond.

Inv.

No.

2102,

26-7

letter of admonition.

(3) φέρε: There is no aspectual difference between φέρε and éveyxov in P. Mich. 214 lc. A.D. 293) : éveyxov | ἐρχομένη moxdpia ἐριδίων δέκα 20-2 ; φέρε καὶ τὰ Aoyxia | μου 25-0; φέρε καὶ τὰ τοῦ παπυλίω)νος σκεύη 26-7; £veykov ἡμῶν warte τὰ ἡμάτια ἐρχομένη 30-1; ἔνεγκον ἐρχομένη σοῦ τὰ χρυσία 31-2; Cf. κατάλαβε τὰ πρὸς με ἐν τῇ πόλει, φέρε δὲ | ἐρχάμενος καὶ τοὺς εὐπόρους ἀνθρώπους P.Ross.Georg. iii 23, 1-2 (beg. οὗ viii/A.D.): notice the punctiliar notion of φέρε. (4)

γένωσκςε

is frequently

given by the writer

used

(= I would like you

to the more polite formula “you (mid.

in letters

as an

introduction

to know),

to information

whence it is equivalent

γινώσκειν ce ϑέλω while γνῶθι is used

in the sense

find out”. E.g. γίνωσκέ ue... ὠικονομημέ[ νον] P.Petrie ii 11 (2), 2-3 iii/B.C.); etc. γνῶθι ei memório|ras ὁ [ἐ)]λαιών P.Fay. 110, 16-17 (A.D. 94).

Notice that the 3rd person singular μανθανέτω is used in the place of γινωσκέτω, the latter being unknown in papyri (see 714). (5) ἔρχου and ἐρχέσθω seem to have replaced ἐλθέ, ἐλθέτω in such cases as ἐρχέστω μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν | Növros P. Mich. 214, 29-30 (c. A.D. 293) = let Nonnus come with you; ἐρχόμε |v[o]s δὲ ἔρχον is O«oyevióa P.Tebr. 421, 12-13 (iii/ A.D.) =

when

you come,

come

to Theogonis;

ἐὰν θελήσῃ Αἰῶν

στρατεύσασθαι,

ἐρχέσθω

B.G.U. 1680, 9 (iii/A.D.); cf. ἐξαυτῆς πάντα ὕπερ] θέμενος ἐλθέ (read EAde) μοι eis τὸ ἐποίκιον | διὰ ra συμβάντα P.Oxy. 1065, 3-5 (ili /A.D.), and öde» 6 ἐρχόμένος | ἔτοιμος ἐλθάτω ws προοσεδρεῦσαι μέλλων P.Oxy. 123, 19-20 (iii or ἐν! A.D.) — wherefore let the one who goes go prepared to attend the sitting.

710. From

these examples

we see that, although

there is no difference in

aspect between present and aorist, there is a difference in function. "Epyov implies "you could come”, ἐλθέ (or ἔλθε) "come in any case”; in other words, the present leaves the choice to the executor of the order, which choice the aorist denies.

1. In Modern Greek ἔχε is also used as aorist, which ts lacking. 2. Φέρε is also punctiliar

in Modern

Greek:

301

cf. dép!

ro por

"bring

it to me”,

δὲ 711 - 716

THE

PERSONS

OF

THE

IMPERATIVE

711. The persons of the imperative. There is a predominance of the 2nd person singular due to the fact that occasions for using this person occur far

more often than for using the other persons. From our collection we count 464 2nd singular forms, 41 3rd singular. 47 2nd plural. and 32 3rd plural. 712. The ist persons singular and plural are occasionally expressed by means of periphrasis, otherwise the subjunctive of the same persons is used. 713. 2nd person singular. This person is used indifferently, whether one addresses a person of high or low position.

714. 3rd person singular. It is used when permission or concession is expressed by the writer. In late papyri, the 2nd person is occasionally replaced

nouns

by

a periphrasis consisting of the 3rd person of the verb and such

45 ψυχή. διάθεσις and

μανθανέτω τοίνυν ἡ an διαθεσις Or

γινώσκειν

P.Oxy.

1872,

the like. E.g. P.Oxy, 1833, 4 (late v /A.D.] equivalent to yırware

σε

θέλω;

ui

avr

3-4

(v or

vi/A.D.).

yopnodtax

(sc.

y

on

διάθεσις

Stated

in

line

a]

715. 2nd person plural. This person is used when the writer addresses more than

one

person.

So,

ἀνδρίζεσθε

κτλ.

in

P.Petrie

11 40

(a),

13 (224 B.C.),

addressing several citizens stated at the beginning of the letter by name; γινώσκετε in P.Par. 32, 5-6 (162 B.c.), adressing Ptolemaeus, Appollonius, twins, and brothers; ἔρρωσθε in P.Grenf. i 30, 11 (103 B.c.), in which a gov-

ernor addresses two persons mentioned by name and "the other soldiers"; un λυϊπεῖσθε «TA. in P.Grenf. ii 30,9 ff. (95 B.c.), addressing by name six persons; συνκαταστήσατε «rA.in P.Sel. 104, 8-9 (i/B.c.), from a physician to the priests and the stolistae; see also P.Tebt. 59 (99 B.c.); P.Lips. 104 (96-95 B.C.); etc. From the iti/4.D. onward, we see traces of the plural of politteness.

So in P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575 (early im/A.n.), a son writing to his father uses the 2nd person singular of the imperative: σπούδασον 14, μνημόνευσον 17,

ἧκε IQ, €ppwoo 24. At the end (lines 27-8), however, and in a postscript, the son writes in the 2nd person plural: μνημονεύσατε τῶν περιστεϊριδίων ἡμῶν. Similarly, the 2nd person plural is used by a certain Alypius (=P.Flor. 137* (A.D. 204)) addressing Heroninus, the steward of Thraso. 716. [t also seems that the 2nd plural is occasionally used in official letters. So καταξιώσατε P.Oxy. 1934, 9 (vi/a.n,) in a letter (= receipt) issued by a

village scribe to the oeconomos. Similar is the case of P.Oxy. 1875, 10 (vi or

vii/A.D.), a letter of request (καταξιώσατε)

302

and

of P. Ross.-Georg. ili 15.

IMPERATIVE

AND

OTHER

MOONS

δὲ

716 - 719

3; 4 (vi/a.p.), a Christian letter (καταξιώσατε). But the 2nd person plural continues to be used to refer to several persons: see δεῦτε P.Mich. 214, 29, (c. A.D. 293); ópovricare P.Grenf. ii 77, 15 (iii-iv/A.D.); θελήσατε P.Oxy. 1930, 3 (vi/a.D.); P.Ross.-Georg. iii 10, 26 (iv-v/a.n.). 717. The transition from the 2nd person singular to the 2nd person plural passed through periphrastic expressions such as dpovrís σοι γενέσθω instead of φρόντισον: see P.Flor. 142, 3-4 (A.D. 264), or μελησάτω σοι: see P.Oxy. 1666, 17 (iii/A.D.), etc. This expression could mitigate the harshness of the 2nd person singular. In late papyri, we find both numbers mixed,

although the writer addresses the same person. So θέλησον P.Oxy. 1831,6 (late v/A.D.), but BeAnogrfe in line 12; also καταξίοσον P.Oxy. vi/A.D.), but καταξιόσατη (= -woare) after one line.

1872, 8 (v or

718. Relationships between imperative and other moods. The meaning of the imperative could be expressed also by other verbal modes, even in Attic. The future indicative, the subjunctive, and the infinitive were occasionally used to express kindred notions with the imperative. To these imperatival modes we add the iva-clause from the papyri and N.T. usage. The alternative or mixed usage of all these expressions is widely attested in papyri. During the history of the language, the prohibitive imperative was first replaced totally by the subjunctive (see 562 ff). In Byzantine papyri, the popularity of the jussive imperative was limited, its function being expressed by the subjunctive or the future indicative; whence both subjunctive (= νά clause in Modern Greek) and the future are regularly used as imperative in Modern Greek. 719. Imperative-Future indicative. The future indicative expressing command

or prohibition

has already

been discussed in 396. The relationship of these

two modes of expression

is well illustrated in passages

together.

where

both occur

Cf. their

inter-

change in P. Rev. 54, 15-19 (259-258 B.C.) mapa[x Jaraornaoven de ot πριάμενοι τὴν [e]e$v|...|..]... καὶ πα[ρα]σφραγιξέσθωσαν τὰ a[mo8]o | ya ka[t τ]ῷι ἀνηλισκομί ἔ]νωι παρακολουθείτωϊ σαν]; similarly πέμσις | τὼ κλιδὶν Kat σήμανόν

pu P.Fay 119, 19-20 (c. A.D. 110); ἀγό!ρασον τὰ ὀρνιθάρια τῆς εἰορτῆς καὶ πέμσις αὐτά

P.Fay.

118, 15-17

(A.D.

100);

cf.

πέμψε

μοι! κέρμα

P.Oxy.

1220, 6-7 (iii/A.D.), with πέμψις μοι τοὺς | ἐκχυσιαίους ἥλους in lines 15-16; so also θέλησον οὖν, [etc. | ... καὶ με] ριμνήσεις P.Iand. 13, 8-10 (iv/A.D.). The equivalence of the imperative and

the future indicative 1s well seen in con-

393

δὲ 719 - 725

IMPERATIVE

AND

OTHER

MOOLS

ditional sentences where both modes constitute the apodosis of the sentence (for examples see 730 ff.). 720. Imperative - Subjuuctive.

The subjunctive took the place not only of the prohibitory imperative, but also of the jussive imperative (for discussion of the subject, see under "subjunctive", 554 ff.). 721. Imperative - Infinitive. The relationship between

these

two

moods

is discussed

under “Impe-

ratival Infinitive”, 756 ff. 722. Imperative - (va-clause.

See 585 ff. 723. Salutatory expressions in the imperative. Papyrus letters exhibit various verbal forms as opening or closing formulae, which stand, for the most part, in the imperative. These formulaic expressions are strictly confined within a certain period of time, whence they can constitute evidence for dating a letter. They also vary according to the kind of the document. In the closing formulae, we find the rather formal expression in letters and more often in petitions, complaints, and applications εὐτύχει. This is to be found mainly in Ptolemaic papyri, while the post-Ptolemaic papyri favour the compound διευτύχει; see for example the petitions in P.Abinn. 724. Other formulae of the Ptolemaic period are öyiawe and ἔρρωσθε, neither of which appears in later times according to our collection. It is &ppwoo which holds its own virtually up to and including the third century A.D. Roughly from the n/a.p. onwards, the infinitival expression ἐρρῶσθαί ae evxopac. makes its appearance and overtakes €ppwoo. Notice the example eppwol # Jo B.G.U. 27, 20 (ii or iii/A.D.), which indicates a blend of the two forms ἔρρωσο and ἐρρῶσθαι. From the end of ı/B.c. up to the iti/#.c., we find the expression aozá£ov and, in lesser proportion, the aorist ἄσπασαι within the second and third centuries a.p. Both these expressions are characteristic of family letters. 725. A picture of the most common salutatory expressions can be seen in the following diagram, based on the letters of P.Se/. i (79 in number) and Witkowski's Epistulae (72 in number). 304

Century 3

SALUTATORY

EXPRESSIONS

IN THE IMPERATIVE

εὐτύχει

ὑγίαινε

es.

:

Total

6|

14|

20

9/34]

43

2 ἃ 4|ı6|

20

6 [26]

32

| B.C.

o|6|

6

4

15

1 /A.D.

5|

8

5

5

ll /A.D.

εἰ

Iti / A.D.

2

4

li /R.c.

113]

4

Jı|ı)

Total

iv/A.D.

TOTAL

Total

3| II

I

2|6|

8

| ıJı|

726. In the opening formula

2

à

ξ

Letters

ξ

11/3]

ξ

EN

x

iii /B.c.

Σ

ἢ

88 725.727

Tota Ε

ξ

Total

|12|

[10

IO

BI

21

2

118

18

128

28

1

[4

4

{7

7

[22

32

[29] 39/68

79 72 |151

of the letters, we notice here the imperative

χαῖρε. For χαίρειν see under “Infinitive” , 767. 7127. Χαῖρε is characteristic of the post-Ptolemaic letters. It appears in the i/A.D. and holds its own up to the iv/A.D., competing, at the same time, with the optative χαίροις. H. Koskenniemi, in his study on the Greek letters! p. 164, enumerates the following data concerning the occurrences of χαῖρε

and yaipos in letters of the first four centuries A.D.:

CENTURY |]

i/A.D.

xaipe

I

χαίροις

|

ii/A.D.

Π-Π| /A.D. | Hi /A.D.

3

—

6

I 3

| πιεῖν (αν.

| TOTAL

10

6

21

10

3

22

1. Heikki Koskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr., Helsinki 1956.

395 B. G.

Mandilaras,

The

Verb in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

20

ss 728 - 730 (1)

THE

SYNTAX

OF

THE

IMPERATIVE

728. The syntax of the imperative. The imperative is found only in main clauses. A few sporadic instances of ἵνα with imperative present a blend of two constructions, i.e. the imperatival tra-clause with the imperative, e.g. ἐνετειλάμην σοι καὶ v ἐπιστολῆς ἀνηλάτης, γέμισον αὐτὸν οἴνων ὧν εὐρίσκις,

πέμπε

àoré

P.Herm.Rees

μαι

moos

P.Ross.-Georg.

Wi

ἐμέ

aAÀgs [ ws] ἵνα, ἐὰν ἔχις μον P.Rein. 35

P.Bour.

7,

12,

12

3

25,

13-14

(1v jA.D.);

γένηται πρὸς σὲ Acoowopas [lii-iv /A.D.) ; etra, εἶ τι va

liv /A.D.]; tva

δια

ἵνα ἢ ἀπολυσόν μαι

τῶν

ἀντιγράφων

ἢ mapa-

σημα[ ν͵]͵ατέ

μοι

(vi/A.D.}.

729. In some cases, the imperative includes in itself the sense of a protasis. Such a construction is characteristic of colloquial style; it occurs in Greek

of all periods, and is known from other languages too.! E.g. πίστευε δὲ τῷ [@]e(@) καὶ wavy P.Gen. 51, 12 (mid. iv/x.n.) = if you believe in God, He will cease. 73%. In relative-conditional sentences, the imperative is often used as apodosis, holding its normal use in a main clause. In these constructtons present and future conditions are distinguished only by the form of the protasis. When the imperative in the apodosis is present (twice attested collection), the protasis has iterative (or general) meaning. E.g.

(1)

in our

Imperative aorist in the apodosis: ἐὰν

τι

dem

ἀνηλῶσαι,

dos,

mapa

δὲ

ἡμ|

ὧϊ"

«oui εἰ

ἰκυμι is

Edd.)

P. Híb.

34,

8-10 (245 B.C.); ἐάν re δύνη ..., δὸς ἐργασί alr P.Oxy. 742, 10-12 (2 B.C.): ἐὰν ἀναβαίνῃ ra κτή νη, yenlı]oor αὐτὰ Baxaroy καὶ ξύλον Pfav. 118, 22-3 (A.D. [10); dar ue θ᾽ ὑγίας ἐκπλέξης carav, ταχέως πρὸ τοῦ ἡγεμό νος mapayerıı P.Hamh.

P.Tebt. μοι

Bh,

7-8

415.

αὐτὰ,

[I

’A.D.):

16-18.

καγώ

enu

(ii’A.D.)!

σε

ἐκπλέξω

μὲν

ἦν

ἐάν δὲ fhid.,

axoAnr

σέ

AynS,

τι κατέχῃ

10-21;

ἐὰν

8€

σε

_..

aed

διαπέμψαι περὶ

Be

πρὸς

ἰδιάπεμψαί

rat

da

ἐμὲ

Επᾳ.]

πανήματος

| cet

ἔχη καὶ μὴ ἔχης ἐπὶ trav mapnrros, γραψόν μοι, καὶ | yw] {(xatyw Edd.) σε τὰ |r|]Or ὡς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ πρώτην [|π]παλλήάξω fhid., 22-1 dar δὲ καὶ τινὰ ἔχης |.

. |. agen,

P.Oxy. 114,

ἐὰν

3310, 28 14-15

1218,

(tl

(ii

201];

ἐὰν

θελήσης

3451;

€

[ale

ἔχης

ni

ἀποστιλὸν

pot

P.Oxvy.

30

(mid.

Jespersen.

The

fhid.,

ἀρκεσθὴ

ηὗτινος

εὐκερί

ro

swe 0 2.545 ἡμᾶς

P.Lond.

P Lond.

237,

30-1

120,

11-12

Philosophy

εἰ δὲ

wep un,

af Grammars, 3 ib

pp.

P Lond.

340);

poe

314

f.

ra

tae

P.Mich.

εὐτυχῶς

γράψον

βέλεις,

πώλησον

26-7

A.D.

[IV /A.D.]) 7 ἄν

μήγε,

pact

243.

av

wee

δεῦτε

ypayinv

(c.

πέρι

χρήζης

av...

mpns

(v/A.D.);

33-7

mar

...

ἐλῆς

amootiAor

prot

οὖν an περὶ

enpnre

δοῦναι

εὐσχολῖς,

P.Gen.

ὦ.

ἐαν

"A. D.]).

A.D.) ; ἐὰν

ἐστιν,

34.

ı nrereyxe

(11 /A.D.); or

B-9

doxoby

I, See

aaa

[c.

ψέλια

δήλωσον

214,

27-9

414, A.D.

wae

ónÀunor

20) -ἡ 3.401

35.

20

P.Oxv.

Ic. ear

ὠπείπερ

ἐπιδημήπης,

P.Gen.

POxv.

(€.

;

μέλι ἐ

jene

A.D. A.D. dot

σοι,

ἐ] ἔτασον

(mid.

iv:

THE A.D.) ; εἰ δὲ ἀντιλέγει τῷ κυρίῳ pou P.Gen.

SYNTAX

OF THE

IMPERATIVE

welp]t τὴν dm0800ec ν᾿ τοῦ ἀργυρίου, παράσχου τὴν yiplalr 79 + P.Lond. 422, 10-11 (mid. iv/A.D.]; ἐὰν διὰ ἀμέλιαιν

τινα καταλάβη, ' σπούδασον P.Oxy. 1223, 6-8 (late bes eis τὴν ἀλλαγήν, καταταξόν μοι αὐτὸ P.Oxy.

(2)

$§ 730 (1) - 731

iv/A.D.])i 9 τι l — εἴ ri) ἔπεμ1862, 49-50 [vii /A.D.).

Imperative present in the apodosis: περὶ

ὧν av αἱρῆσθε,

θέλης,

μοι

ypade

P.Oxy.

por

113,

ypalderé

P.Oxy.

30

743.

μοι 39

P.Lips. 12

[1/A.D.): notice

104,

B.C.);

the

13-14

Cf.

περὶ

(96-95 δὲ

indicative

in

B.C.); «v.

ὑπὲρ

ὧν dar

θέλεις,

δήλοι

καὶ

σὺ

the

protasss.

731. The imperative is also used as apodosis of conditions expressing "thought" (δοκεῖ), "ability" (δύναμαι), "will" (θέλων. In these constructions the imperative is understood as the complement of the verb of the protasis,! e.g. ἐὰν δὲ θέλης, γράψον uox is equivalent to. So also: éav δὲ θέλῃς γράψαι, γράψον pot. E.g. ἐὰν δυκὴ aou, πέμψαι (for πέμψον) do xi σοι, κὐριέ prov, πέμψε μοι ἐρωτηθεὶς

ὄχλη σὸν

Jıooxaupor

P.Far. κέρμα καὶ

123, 11 P.Oxy.

ἔκιπραξον

(c. A.D. 100]; 9 (-- «c ἡ Edd.) 1220, 5-7 (It /A.D.]; ἐὰν δὺ en P.Oxy.

269

(ii),

3-6

(A.D.

57):

ei τι ἐὰν Öurnoare, συνλέξατε ἀργύρια, | μέτρησον αὐτά, καὶ γράψατέ μοι P.Jews 1916, 24-5 (c. A.D. 330-340); cf. ἐὰν δύνῃ ἀναβῆναι P.Oxy. 932, 7-8 (late in: A.D.) equivalent to ἐὰν δύνῃ ἀναβῆναι, ἀνάβηθι: see also 764; ἐὰν δὲ θέλῃς, γράψον μοι P.Ryt. 229, 22 (A.D. 48): εἰ θέλεις, ἀπόστειλε A.D.): ἀπόστειλε is imperative, but xarafji]lwoor aveveywov P.Princ. 103, 5 (v/A.D.): ἀποστῖλαι is

ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς P.Oxy. 2153, 19 (iit: 7) ταῦτα ἁποστῖλαι ἣ γοῦν ravra infinitive (for further discus-

sion see 760): η [ εἰ) βούλι, ἀποστιλὴς μοι P.Gen. 52 (recto), 6 (mid. iv ’A.D.]: 6 θέλις Aaßaı, ἔστ' av ἔλθη ὁ α deddos ἡμῶν P.S.I. Bag, 15-16 (iv 4.0.2]. Cf. 763.

1. There

is a comparatively

avOnaere,

θέλετε

μαραθῆτε

similar

construction

in

Modern

Greck,

e.g.

θέλετε

δέντρα

Politis.’ ExAoyat 36. Sce Tzartzanos, NeneAAgquing δύντπξις, i?,

p. 2qh.

307

[INFINITIVE

1,

General

Works

Scle.t Bibliography: Aalto, Studien zur Geschichte des Infinitivs in Griechischen. Helsinki 1433; Allen, The Use of the infinitive in Polybius compared with the Use of the Infinitive in Biblical Greek «Diss, Chicago 1907; Bacinschi, Z’infinitif et les movens de son remplacement, etude de syntaxe. historique et comparee. Bucharest. 1446; Constantinides. De Infinitivi Linguae Graecae. vulearis forma et use (Diss.). Strassbourg 1878: Burguiére, Histoire de lÜinfinitif en grec,

Paris

1650;

Cildersleeve,

"Contributions

to

the

History

of

the Articular Infinitise |, T.A.PR.A. ix 11878), pp. 5-19; Idem, “The Articular Infinitive in Xenophon and Plato”, 4.J.Ph. ii 11882), pp. 193-202: Granit, De infinitivis et participiis. in inscriptionibus. dialectorum Graecarum quaestiones. syntacticae, Helsingfors

182;

Hatzidakis, M. N.E., i, pp. 585-609; Hesseling, "Essai historique sur l'infinitif grec,

Etudes de philologie néo-grecque de J. Psichari iBibl.éc. des Hautes, études XCIh ; Hewlett, "On the Articular Infinitive in Polybius ,.— A.S.Ph. xi. cio, pp. 26-90; 440-50; Jannaris, Hist, Gr. §§ 2062-98, and especially App. si; Kalen, Selhbsrandige Finalsätze und imperativische infinitive im Griechischen, Uppsala 1041; Kasselring, Beitrag zum Aussterbeprozess des Infinitivs in Neugriechischen, Munich 1906; Kjellman, £a censrrücrion. de l'infinitif dependant. d'une. locution impersonelle, Uppsala 1913. Krapp, Der substantivierte Infinitiv abhangie von Prapasitionen und Prapositionsadverbien in der historischen Gracitat (Diss.), Heidelberg 1852; Kurzova. Zur syntaktischen Struktur des griechischen “Infinitiv und Nebensatz , Prague 1968, Michaelis, De infinitivi usu Thucydideo, Halle 1886; Moorhouse, "The Origin of the Infinitive in Greek Indirect Statement”, A./ Ph. lxxi (1955), pp. 17-83. Mutzbauer, Das Wesen des griechischen Infinitivs und die Entwicklung

seines

pp. 3537-84 R.Ph.

Gebrauchs

(with Jit.};

1xx (1944). pp.

Chicago

bei

Homer,

Vendryes, 113-33;

1916;

"L'infinitif.

Vataw,

The

Use

Schwyzer.

substantivé of the

Gr.Gr.,

dans

la

i.

pp.

langue

Infinitive in Biblical

Bo4-10;

it.

de

Lysias"

Greek

(Diss.},

t8yb.

n

With

Blass-Debr.-Funk,43 4388-410; Moulton,

Bonn

Prof.,

pp.

202-20;

ii,

Reference

to

N.T.

Greek

Robertson. pp. 368-71; 1050-95: Moulton-Turner,

With

pp.

Reference

Burton,

134-10;

Moule,

ta

Papyri

/diom,

MT, pp.

$8$361-417; 126-9.

Cf. Schw yzer, Gr. Gr, n, pp. 383 f. “Der Infinitiv in nachklassischen Zest und in Neugriechischen"; Mayser, 7, pp. 90; 114; til, pp. 216-20; 206-339; Kapsomenakis, Morunter., pp. 31, 131; [dem, “ἔρευναι, pp. 32 f.: Mandilaras. ““Epevva εἰς tv yAmaacuyv τῶν μὴ φιλολογικῶν Athena κν (1961), pp. 169-765.

παπύρων

208

: Τελικοὶ σύνδεσμοι μετ᾽ anapep@atov ,

INFINITIVE

732. Introduction.

The

Greek

- MORPHOLOGY

infinitive received

δὰ 732 - 739

its fullest development

Attic. The infinitive had the disadvantage of expressing neither number person,

and in many

cases,

not even

time.

In addition,

in nor

the infinitive served

to complete the notion of the governing word, and it was that word which

defined the functions of the infinitive. So after certain verbs the infinitive is called “declarative”, being equivalent to a ὅτι / ws clause (= ὅτι infinitive), while after other verbs the infinitive is conventionally called “prospective”

(or final, or resultative), being equivalent to a wa (ὅπως, ws)-clause. 733. In the post-Classical period, a tendency to resolve the infinitive into a finite mood introduced by the appropriate particle appears, and in this way

precision of number, person, or time could be obtained. This tendency had already begun

in Attic.!

734. The infinitive in the papyri is seen to hold its own, although analytical constructions with ἵνα and ὅτι are developed into serious rivals. Its wide use is mainly due to the development of the articular infinitive with or with-

out prepositions. I.

MORPHOLOGY

735. The infinitive presents various morphological

peculiarities, which may

be referred either to the verb stem or to the endings, or to the combination of these.

736. Verb stem. The stem-formation

of the

infinitive generally

reflects the

morphology of the verb in other moods.

737. Retention of the augment (see 239). E.g. ἐνΐ e]vrvxetv P.Oxy. (c. a.n. 288),

the augment

being cancelled

already

2343, 7

by the writer himself.

738. Retention of the augment is also found in the formation μετῆλθαι, quot-

ed in 755 (3). 739. Notice the form apocecyew P.Oxy. 1678, τὸ (iti/A.b.}) which implies either the present mpocé{a}yerr or the aorist προσ{ε)σχεῖν. Similarly the temporal augment of ἀνήλωσα Is retained In ἀνηλῶσαι P.Hib. 54, 8(c. 245 H.C,);

etc.

I. See

Jannaris,

Hist.

Gr...

App.

vi,

τῇ.

100

ss

740 - 744

740. The ally

a

MORPHOLOGV-VERB

infinitive false

of zveyxor / ἤνεγκα

“de-augmentation

,

e.g.

STEM

(IN

compound)

nerarıyanı

presents

for

occasion-

μετειέγκαι

P.Lond.

236, 12 (c. ^.n. 346): see 240. 741. The infinitive of ἔδωκα is, as a rule, δῶναι in the post-Ptolemaic papyri: a single instance of δῶνα! is found in. M. O. 1152, 4 dated to the end of the

Ptolemaic period. The other examples are confined to the Roman zantine

periods.

P.Fay.

and By-

See:

a09,

4

'early

19 A.D;

AGE

98,

13

fi A.D);

824,

13.

lA. D.

35-361:

Stud. Pal. xx 3,0 (A.D. 100]; P.Giss, st, 16-17 (A.D. 1181; 6g, 10 FA.Ὁ. 1185-1109); P.Gen. 28, 15 la.D. 137); P.Osl. 51, 5: 1, 12 {both ii A.D.); BG.L 326 In,

14

(A.D.

189-1094);

P.Ross.-Georg.

P.Erlangen

ἢ

124

P. Merton 4,

21

(No.

116],

305.

oU- 117);

4

(c.

P. Mich,

2343,

11

(late

ji/a.p.}; SB

with

δοῦναι

A.D):

19:

P.Merron

7907,

B

P fund.

15-15

P.Oxr.

fe. A.D.

(WALD):

288),

cf.

Edd.)

P.Oxy.

both

δῦναι δῶναι

SR 5247. 24 (A.D. 47); μεταδῶναι P.Oxy. gia, 39 (A.D. 10097).

amoóarac

(not

123,

31

(i

papyri

δοῦναι

P.Mich.

P.land.

23,

it occurs

346

(bi. 6 (aD.

13 (vi or

δοῦναι P.Oxy.

2114,

in such

vil

α.0.}:

14 (A.D.

16);

examples P.Oxr

ἐνδοῦναι

variants: or tv

γυῦναι

yraver

744. Some

P,Perrie

B.G.U.

P.Par.

u B

846,

21

{28},

16

stem-formations

13

i246

(i A.D.],

(bist, 26

arramo-

AD.)

mapa

papyri;

in the

1859,

12

(late ἢ

2 (vr or

vil

lo

1v /A.D.);

A.D.Ὁ: mapa-

316); 2347, 8 (A.D. 3621.

743. δῶναι is a formation modelled on formed on the pattern δοὺς-δοῦναι. So: Payrpürai

B.G.U.

{ἐπιζδι»δήνα|ι

as:

2276,

P.Oxr.

PS.

-$o«ó0»rad

742. The Attic δοῦναι is the regular form in the Ptolemaic post-Ptolematc

(i A.D.

350). So also B.G.U. 35, 7

émsarale

and

being orthographic P.Oxy.

7.

28, 9 (late ii A.D);

111}:

(A.D.

24

68,

{{Π-π|1 τα. D.I;

98,

22 fiit-iv’a.n.); P.Gen. 11, 10 l/A.D. P.Lond 361 (recto), 9 (late t A.D;

448,

70-801,

A.D.

18.

A.D.)

16 ΠΠ

roBo, 11: (ili; A.D.7]; 236, in compounds: amudurıı (A.D.

B3,

(ii

yravac.*

BOL).

next

ta

dvayrotvar

γνῶναι

(c. A.D. 600); 21,

result from

Conversely P.Oxv.

(see Mayser,

743.

i,

yrodvar

was

iB

Be):

p.

(2

140); emı-

48 (A.D. 61h.

the specific use of the endings.

In

these cases, stem and ending are so fused that it is dificult to treat them entirely separately. The following examples will illustrate the point. For tn-

stance, ἐφιδῆσαι for ἐφιδεῖν (éd-after ἐφυρῷ) I. See

Mayser,

i*, p.

140,

2. See

Mayser,

i*, p. 140.

and

Cronert,

Mem.

10

Gr.

P.Teht. 751, τὸ (early ii/m.c.) 15 Hercul..

p. 251

fn. 2.

MORPHOLOU Y - VERB. STEM

δὰ 744 - 746

a thematic formation modelled on ποιῆσαι and the like. In a late papyrus we find even δυνηθῆσαι for δυνηθῆναι P.Oxy. 1944, 9 (vi or vii/A.D.). Simi-

larly ἀγαγῆσαι P.Par. 36, 12 (163-162

5.c.); ἀπρβῆσαι P.Tebt. 800, 36 (142

B.C.); λαβῆ[σ]αι P.Oxy. 937, 18 (iii/A.D.).! The form εἰδῆσαι P.Perrieii 15 (1), 10 (241-238 B.c.) is produced after the future εἰδήσω on the pattern AvowAlcaı.?

745. Notice the form ἀναιβηκέναι (= aveß-) P.Princ. 16, 16 (158 n.c.?), which implies an aorist indicative ἀνέβηκα (as in Modern Greek), having adopted the perfect ending -eva: because of the ending -«a. In the same way we can explain the infinitive [ev Jevxevar (of ἐνήνεγκα) P.Lond. 406, 11 (c. A.D. 340). The perfect ending -éva: appears also in ἰδαίνε (= ἰδέναι) for ἰδεῖν 3 (not for εἰδέναι); the text has καὶ [ov κ)αταξίί[ῳ] τὸ φῶς τοῦ ἱλίου ἰδαίνε P.Jews 1917, 7 (c. A.D. 330-340).* Probably such forms as βαρεθέναι P.Oxy. 1872, 4 (v or vi/a.p.) betray an influence of the perfect ending on the aorist passive; the Edd. however take this form as an orthographic variant, so they write Bapedevar for βαρεθῆναι. 746. Confusion of endings brings about irregular formations in the contracted verbs. Thus the infinitive of verbs in -όω has the ending -οῖν instead of -otv in the post-Ptolemaic papyri.5 E.g.

1. Kapsomenakis, Korunter., p. 91, fn.2, reads λαβῆϊ v lac, connecting the form with active aorists which have the ending -nraı of the aorist passive, e.g. παρασχῖναι P.Gen. 62, io (mid. iv/A.D.) ; cf. εἰσελθῆναι, συνανελθῆναι, θανῆναι in Byzantine literature (Kapsomenakis, foc. cit.). In contradiction to this supposition come the aorists in - ἦσαι quoted above. Further, we have information about a future AaByow: see Cramer, An. gr. Oxon.

1 p. 268 ἔστι λαβῶ περισπώμενον θέμα... xat 6 μέλλων τοῦ λαβῶ Aafrjow. If we bear in mind the form εἰδῆσαι (see above) corresponding to future εἰδήσω, we can accept λαβῆσαι

corresponding

to

future

λαβήσω.

Cf. also

the aorist

indicative

«eAußf ao Jer

P. Ross.-Georg. iv, Anh., 6 (A.p. 619-629). 2, The s-aorist infinitive εἰδῆσαι is found sce LSJ s.v. εἴδω (B). 3. This

was

pointed

out

first by

in post-Classical compositions; for references,

Kapsomenakis

(Vorunter.,

p. 9t, fn. 2), who

further

showed a relation between the aoristand perfect participle in such forms as εἰδότες ἐκφυγότες, ἀπελθώτα and the like. This latter argument is, however, disputed by Palmer. (for iàores), Grammar, p. 2, who sees in these examples no confusion of tenses but merely orthographic variants. 4. The

Ed.

cbserves

that

the

writer

has

confused

εἰδέναι

with

cdeiv.

5. Infinitives in -oiv for -οὖν are not attested in the Ptolemaic papyri

311

/see Mayser,

i?, p.

$8

746 - 749

THE

dAdormot:

ἐξαλλοτριοῖν

ENDINGS

OF

P. Mich.

322

THE

INFTINTYIVE

(aj),

30

(A.D.

46);

ἐκσαλλοτριαῖν

P.Mich.

321, 22 (A.D. 42); βεβπιοῖν P. Hamb. 62, 17 |A.D. 123] ; βιοῖν P.Mich. 174, 12 (A.D, 145-1471; δηλοῖν P.Lond. 231, 13 (mid. iv/A.D.1; μαστιγοῖν P.Oxy. 1643. 11 {A.D. 298) ; pradow P. Mich. 322 (al, 42 (A.D, 40); ἐκμισθοῖν P.Oxy, 1705, 14 (A.D. 2908); μεταμισδοῖν P.Lond. 1168, ᾧ 12 (A.D. 44): P. Merton 76, 39 (A.D. 181); etc. πληροῖν P.Oxy. ong, 5 (v/A.D.]) ; amomAnpaiv P.Oxy. goo, τὸς 18 (A.D. 322].

(1)

This

infinitive in -oiv is apparently

ποιεῖν etc.: cf. ἐπιμελῷσθε aipwrat

for

αἱρεῖται

tracted

Verbs", 51f.

a formation on analogy with rorei-

for ἐπιμελεῖσθε

| P.Oxy..—

496,

15

B.G.U. 1078, 11 (A.n. 39); and

(a.n.

127);)

see

also

under

“Con-

The endings of the infinitive 747. Present (second aorist) infinitive in -ev. There is no certain example of this form in the Ptolemaic papyri.? Some scattered instances in the third century papyri foreshadow this development, e.g. xaipev P.Petrie ii 13 (13).

ı (258-253 B.c.) and λαβέ: P.Lifle ii 12, 11 (218 8.c.). In the Eudoxus papyrus we find ἐλλεῖπεν 3, 19 and ἔχεν 11, 16 (before 165 B.c.), and in a few papyri of the end of the i/B.c. the forms: yatpev (xaipev Ed.) B.G.U. 1208 (i), 1 (27-26 B.c.); φθίρεν (not φθίρεςινν as in P.Sel.

(13 B.C.); τροφεῦεν B.G.U.

1058, 26 (13 B.c.).

748. In the post-Ptolemaic

papyri

3)

B.G.U. 1052, 27

.

infinittves in -ev are quite

xaipev SB 7331, 2 (end of i-beg. of ti/a.p.);

frequent, e.g.

P.Lond. 920, τὸ (A.D. 178}:

P.Oxv.

1751, 2 (late ii or iii /A.D.j; ὑγιξνεν B.G.U. 27, 3 lii or ili /A.D.] ; so also verer (for ὑγιαῖνεν) | P.Berl. Zill. 12, 4 liii-iv/A.D.\; μὴ d voryev SB 5888, 2-3 (no date); so also the aorists arrıAaßev P.Lond. 230, 23 (c. A.D. 3401; einer P.Oxy. 1033, 11 [A.D. 392), and the contracted verbs evdowéy [.ev Ed.) P.Mich. 322 (a),

414

(A.D.

451;

Ol KO FO HEY

[ -««i»v

Ed.)

P.Fam.

Tehr.

13,

55

(A.D.

[747-114].

749. These infinitives in -er are most probably hybrid formations produced by a blend of the infinitive in -e and the imperative in -e. They reflect further the functional

110, with lit. in fn, oit. V.

Cf.

Stud.

In these

two

toms, doubted 2. See

Masser,

Pal,

relationship

rj, while

between

they occur

those two

modes

occasionally in the N.T.

(see under

“Im-

[sce Blass-Debr.-Funk.

xiii. p. 35.

instances

It is interesting to note

the genuineness 1, p.

τὸς

€,

that

of ὦ in rhe ed. pr.

p. ge.

412

the Edd., struck

by the new

forma.

THE ENDINGS

OF THE

INFINETIVE

peratival infinitive”, 756 ff.). In other words

S8 749 - 752

χαῖρε and yaipev, dyiatve and

ὑγιαίνειν etc. were blended into χαῖρεν and ὑγιαῖνεν respectively, and this prepared the way for rpodevev, εὐδοκέν, etc.! Cf. ὀφίλω πέμπε P.Oxy. 1929, 9 (late iv or v/a.D.), where the imperative has taken the place of the infinitive (the Edd. however read πέμπεειν"). 750. First aorist infinitive in -ev. The ending -ev of the present infinitive was extended to the first aorist, facilitated by the fact that the second aorist had occasionally adopted this ending; cf. also öoüvev P.Harris 158, 4 (v-vi/A.D.). Similar

in form,

but different in origin,

is the aorist imperative

in -ev,? see

684 (3). The following examples are infinitives: θελήση

ἡ σὴ

ἀρετὴ

τετόλμηκας)

κἂν dprec γράψεν

ypayev,

πέμψεν,

P.Strassb.

θέλησον

πέμψεν,

35, Β

(iv-v/A.D.) ; eropunzas

ποιῆσεν

B.G.U.

948,

7;

(for

10;

11;

13-14 liv-v/A.D.); μὴ ἐάσῃς αὐτὸν λαλῆσιεν P.G.M. iil (ostr.), 4-5 (c. A.D. 40]: οὐκ (sic) εὗρον ri ποιῆσεν («Dpov τι text), θέλησον οὖν ἀντιγράψεν μοι P. Harris 158, 3;

(rj, 2

320,

(V/A.D.);

7

5

(v-vi /A.D.); ἀλλὰ

μὴ

οὐ καλὸς

motis μὴ

ἀἁμειλήσης

τοῦτων

| θέλον

πέμψεν

amoorider

τὰ ἄνιλωτρα

(-εἰνὶ

Edd.)

P.Mich. PJena

+,

(v-vi/A.D.).*

751. Perfect infinitive in -ev. extended

to perfect

stems,

The ending -ev (see 747 and 750) was further e.g.

avri«y]eyp[ a] ev. P-land. 53 (111) , 6 (A.D. 96-98) ; πεπράκεν C. P. R. 220, 4 (Ó/A.D.V; e£w κονομῆκεν (ἐξ ῳκονομηκένζαι» Mitteis) M.Chrest. 88 (m), 32 - (im). 1 (c. A.D.

140);

μὴ

εἶδεν

γρά(μματα)

for

(μὴ

εἰδέναι)

P.Tebt.

397,

29

(A.D.

198] *.

In these examples we do not have omission of -αι of the ending -evai, but replacement of it by -ev; so the custom of some Editors to write -ev Is incorrect. 752. Infinitives in -eı and -A. This form results from the tendency to omit the final -v, a phenomenon which occurs also in other words. This formation

I, The -e- of the ending cented

-er Is the short

« of the imperative ending

-« and it must

be ac-

accordingly.

2. We think it a matter of convenience to separate the imperatives in -«v from the infinitives in -er by using the accent on these forms accordingly, i.e. ποίησεν |imperative), but

ποιῆσεν 3. For

(infinitive). discussion

pp. 92 f. (with 1. See

on

the

subject

of the infinitives in

Tite}.

Kapsomenakis,

foc. cit.

313

-ev

see

Kapsomenakis,

Moruauter.,,

ss 752 - 754 (4)

THE

ENDINGS

OF

THE

INFINTTIVE

is well attested in Modern Greek (cf. θέλω γράψει and the like, of the literary language), while the traces of it appear first in the papyri. E.g. εὐρίσκει

P Mich.

A.D.l;

rats

202,

κυρίαις

(i-1v /A.D.) ; also μὴ

Kanne...

[€|xnoban

15

(A D.

pov

in

2...

the

εὔχομ] αἱ σε

παρὰ

‘Aga

aorist: ἔφη

καὶ

ἀπηδώσειζυ»

105),

μητέραις μὴ

πέμψι

ἐκχωρήσπει

P SF.

συνέστηκεν

P.Bour.

Edd.)

[ἀποδοθῆήζναι»

P.Oxw.

2208,

Ed.)

5

P.Mivh.

(late

ec

χαίρει

P.Amh.

1266,

6-7

20,

753. The aorist passive ends occasionally ἀποδυϑῆ

ὑγιαίν]

[καὶ σίου

7

42

(A.D.

lA.D.

528,

3-4

(i:

P.Berl.

Zill.

12,

1.2

30, 44

(viii

(169-104

A.D.];

in

B.C):

the

future:

350).

in -n instead

312,

PLOwy,

341:

of -graı, ἐρημωβῇῆ

e.g.

{ἐρημωθϑῆξναι»

voa.D.).

(1} These forms offer the first traces of Modern Greek infinitive in - used to form the periphrastic perfect passive, e.g. ἔχω Aufn etc. 754. Confusion of the endings of the infinitive appears in. the following cases: (i)

-av

xn|2

for

οὖν

-ac:

éroiga

a| «liv

δείξειν P.Grenf. iM

IO,

πέμψιν

24-5

i 53, (1v-v

μοι Stud.

καὶ

mpoap[ εἴν}

32-3

/A.D.);

Pal.

xx

B.G.U.

(iv/A.D.]; oU

xai

223,

5

810,

18-19.

[6]eAgaure

θέλη

[read

...

οὐκ

(1/4, D.) ; φθάνημεν

...

πέμψιν

αἰθέλη

-

^ amo-

P. Ross.-Georg.

φβέλει)

ἡ

κυρία

μου

(vi-vil /A.D.].

These infinitives betray an intrusion of the future ending -ew into the aorist. Cf. also the ending of the future middle, e.g. ἐν τετάλμεθ[α«] ἀσπάσεσθαι

P.Grenf.

i 30,

3-4

(103

B.C.).

(2 The converse is, however, more frequent, ἐπελεύσασθαι P. Mich. 230, ὃ [A.D. 18); etc. παρέξασθίαι. P.S.I. 118, 17 (A.D. 25-37): eic. ἔσασθαϊ.} P.Oxy. 260, 11 lA.D. 59); παρέσασθαι

(3)

epyaaaa| Pla

PSF.

ἀναλήμψασθαι 180-192]. These forms

βίων. are

873.

&

(A.D.

20

til,

14

functionally

290].

(A.D. and

e.g.

P.Tebr.

connected

222);

with

411,

αἀντιλημῴπσθαι

syntactically

τὸ

ἐπανεέναι

P.land.

(n /A.D.); in

line

33,

7:

12

(A.D.

futures.

The confuston between the ending of the aorist and the future is clear

in the hybrid id)

-(e)uev

exornmer Ed.)

θα ι] P. Mich. ἐπε λεύσεσίασ),

form for

-eur:

BG.U,

P. Monee.

(A.D. 61).

194, 20-1

ἢ,

917, 79

20 !a.D.

(A.D.

348i;

ηἢ53]:

μήτε

ἐγκαλεῖν

ὀφελείσειεν

[-σει

μήτε εἰν

ἐγκαλέσειεν Ed.)

P. Monac.

ι-σε{ε}ν 12,

44

(A.D, 590-501].

These forms

may

be accidental

orthographic

314

errors arising from in-

THE

INFINITIVE

OF

THE

SECONDS

AORIST

$6 754 (4) - 755(7)

version or repetition of the -e, or hybrid formations resulting from a mixture of the ending -eıv with -ev.! 755. The infinitive of the second aorist. Certain second aorists present a transference to the first aorist in the indicative (see 317 f.). This transference is further reflected in the infinitive, e.g. (1)

εἰπεῖν almost

always

in the Ptolemaic

papyri

{Mayser,

ı!, p.

135);

so also

P.Oxy. 2187, 16 (A.D. 304); etc. ἀντειπεῖν P.Oxy. 237 lv), 13 (A.D. 186); προσειπεῖν P.Lond. 409, 3 (c. A.D. 346); P.Oxy. 2156. 5 (late iv or v/a.D.}, but,

(2)

εἶπαι : ἄνεῖπαι

ἐνεγκεῖν

is

P. Petrie

it

32

predominant

(3).

in

3

the

(238

B.C.).?

Ptolemaic

papyri.

(Mayser,

ı?,

p.

136).

In the post-Ptolemaic papyri it occurs in such examples as ἐνεγκί εἴ] ν P.Grenf. ii 77. 35 liii-iv/A.D.); ἀπενεγκεῖν P. Mich. 217, 24 (A.D. 296); P.Lond. 1714, 46 (A.D. 570); εἰσενεγκεῖν P.Oxy. 136, 27 (A.D. 583); κατενενκῖν P.Oxy. 1068, 6

[(ii/A.D.];

προσανενεγκεῖν

P.Grenf.

i 64,

3

(vi

P.Oxy. 2239, 15 [A.D. 598). But ἐνέγκαι elsewhere, with some orthographic 119,

8

P.Oxy. (3)

(ii-iii/A.D.);

1223,

13

dee

νέγκε B.G.U.

(late iv/A.D.):

ἐλθεῖν is the regular

form

the

post-Ptolemaic

papyri.

But

μετῆλθαι

ı

ἔρθε

P.Oxy.

P.Tor.

625,

μετανίγκαι in both

(v), 27

(116

AqBu

(5)

βαλεῖν : follows

But

ἀμφιβάλαι

φαγεῖν:

φαγεῖν

But

φάγαι

συνεισενεγκεῖν

variants such as ἀπενέκαι (beg.

P.Lond.

236,

of

ii1/A.D.] i

12.

P.Oxy. avevéyxe

Ic. A.D. 346).

(Mayser,

i?, p. 136)

B.c.]; cf. epde for ἔλθαι in οὐκ

and

in

€ σ᾽ χόλασαι

1929. 6 (late iv or v/A.D.).

But

Cf.

vii/A.D.);

28-9

Ptolemaic

(4) Aaßeiv:so always in the Ptolemaic larly in the post-Ptolemaic papyri.

(6

or

(if not

imperative) mostly

PS.

φαγῖν

1 Cor.

1266,

P.S.J.

: à θέλις

the

second

t2

(vill

837,

16

papyri

λάβαι

(Mayser,

P.S.J.

829,

1*, p.

15.

137},

and

simi-

(iv / A. D.?).

aorist.

/A.D.:.

(iii-iv/A.D.);

P.Oxy.

1852,

10

(vii /A.D.);

11: 20.

(infinitive?i:

ἀνικαλύψαι

(sic)

αὐτὸν

καὶ

dayar

P.Oxy.

1297,

9-10

(via. Dl.

(7)

μαθεῖν:

καταμαθῖν

(iv A.D). μαθεῖν But paée P.Oxy.

t. See

Kapsomenakis,

2. εἶπαι and

P.Fay.

i14,

11

(A.D.

100);

P.Oxy. 1926, ἡ (vI/A.D.]; 1867, 1929, 9 (late iv or v/A.D.].?

Korunter.,

ἐνέγκαι already

had

1

aaßlil»

P.Lond.

244.

7

(vil /A.D.].

p. 93. first aorist inflexion

in Classical Greek

(especiallyin fo-

nic).

4. in

Μάθε is infinitive (for μάθαι) preceded line 6 of the same papyrus.

by

315

iva (see especially

775):

cf. Epße

far

ἔλθει

δὲ 755

(8) - 758

(8)

INPERATIVAL

ἀγαγεῖν

ayayiv

But afaı P.Oxy. A.D.),

a form

P.Lond.

1864, 12

which

415,

10

(c.

A.D.

346);

(vıl:A.D.); so also awafar

involves

Il.

8;

INFINITIVE

not

MEANING

only

OF

change

THE

etc.

P.Oxy.

of ending

1866, 5 (vi or vii/

but of stem

as well.!

INFINITIVE

756. The imperatival infinitive. The infinitive is often found in Homer for the 2nd person imperative;? this use became characteristic of formal or solemn utterances. The infinitive was also used for the 3rd person imperative; this is especially characteristic of legal orders, laws, maxims, official commands,

and

the like. In the former

case the subject (if expressed)

and

predicate are in the nominative, in the latter normally in the accusative. It is a matter of dispute whether the infinitive in this construction is dependent on such verbs as λέγειν or κελεύειν, which are not expressed but understood, or is used absolutely, thus expressing the verbal idea of its nomina] stem. 757. In papyri (less so in the N.T.) the imperatival infinitive is well attested. It occurs

frequently

in official

documents,

edicts,

and

regulations,

and

is

also frequent tn private letters. The functions of the imperatival infinitive can be examined in the following cases: 758. The infinitive runs parallel with the imperative. This construction is known to Classical and N.T. Greek,* and is quite frequent in the papyri, especially

in officia! orders

and

the like.

E.g.

παρεχέτω δὲ ι᾿Ηρακλείδης δΔημητρίαι | saa προσήκει... εἶναι δὲ ἡμᾶς κτὰ. t, 4-5 (1Π| B.C.) ; ἡ εἰ σοίδος ἄκυρος ἔστωι [καὶ | ἀποτεισάτωι ὁ

P.Eleph. ἐπελθὼν

ἐπὶ rau... |... ἣν δ᾽ ἂν ποιήσηται ...üxvpor εἶναι καὶ μ[η] θέν ἧσσον a[v|vrz« fora: mod εἶν] (reading alter Mitteis) P.Grenf. i 27 fii), 3-6 [10 B.C.); ἐάσθωσαν κρατεῖν, τὴν δὲ (yl) [σὴν] ἀποκατί α[στί ἤϊσαι P.Fehr. ΟἹ

(b),

1. For

233

ayayyanı

2. Cf. παῖδα ἂν 241-2.

(118-117

B.c.);

ete.5

Interchange

of

infinitive

and

imperative

is

sec 744.

δ᾽ cuni

λύσπιτε

φίλην,

+. For further discussion Gr. Gr., ii, pp. 380-3.

on

4. Sce

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

& 389.

2, See

Mayser,

i,

pp.

303-5.

the

τὰ δ᾽ ἄποινα

imperatival

δέχεσθαι

infinitive

IH. 1 20.

in Classical

See Monro.

Greek

Hom.

Gr..

sce Schwyzer,

IMPERATIYAL attested in some

late papyri, e.g.

σκεῖν

P.Oxy.

(= -axeiv]

1866,

INFINITIVE

πέμψον...

4-5

(vi or

|...

88 758 - 761 καὶ guvrafaı

...

καὶ

παρα-

vii/A.D.).

759. In other compositions, especially in private letters, the relationship between the infinitive and imperative cannot be determined from obvious juxtaposition of both moods in the same sentence. If, however, we compare certain instances in the infinitive with similar ones in the imperative, we can detect their equivalence. For example, the passage dua τῷ σε Aafiv τὸ ἐπιστόλιν συνελθεῖν P.Tebt. 34, 3-4 (c. 100 B.c.) corresponds to such instances of later times as ἅμα τῷ λαβεῖν pov τὴν ἐπιστολὴν αὐτῇ apa | ἄνελθε P.Tebt. 411, 3-5 (ii/A.D.); ἅμα τῷ | λαβεῖν σε ταῦτά μον τὰ γράμματα! γενοῦ πρὸς ἐμέ P.Tebt. 421, 2-4 (ilifAa.D.), etc. So functionally ἀνελθεῖν is equivalent to dveA@e and γενοῦ. Similarly ἐρωτηθεὶς (ἐρωτηθεῖσεα» HuntEdgar in P.Sel. 121),! ἡ κυρία pov, ἀνόκνως | μοι γράφειν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, ἵνα κἀγὼ ἀμε!ριμνότερα διάγω P.Lond. Inv. No. 2102, 8-10 (h/A.n.)but a few lines later (21-2) the writer used the imperative in a similar expression: ἐρωτηθείς, ἀδελφὲ γλυϊκύταται, ἐν undevei αὐτὴν λύπει: SO φροντίσαι

οὖν

τοῦτω | πάραυτα

ῥρωῆσαι

P.Oxy.

1929,

3-4

(late

iv

or

v/A.D.), while we usually find φρόντισον; γνῶναι τὴν ὑμετέραν ἀγαθὴ δεσποreta. OTt...P.Oxy. 1866, 1 (vi or vii/a.D.), against the common γίνωσκε, γινώσκειν σε θέλω, θέλω μαθεῖν and the like.?

expressions

760. The close relationship between imperative and infinitive can be well seen in constructions where the imperative is coordinated with an infinitive in place of a second infinitive, e.g. εὖ πυήσις διῶξαι τοὺς σκαϊφήτρους ... |... wot... |... ὑπόσχεισον καὶ διαβόλησον P.Fay. 112, 2-5 (A.D. 99] ; καλῶς | οὖν π[ο]ιήσις ἀπελθεῖν, |... καὶ δέξε P.Oxy. 1158, 5-7 liii/Aa.D.); wxarag|i]wooy 7 ταῦτα ἀποστῖλαι ἢ γοῦν ταῦτα ἀνένεγκον P.Princ. 103, 5 ‚v/A.D.),

or when an imperative follows a verb which normally takes an infinitive. 761. Verbs which are thus found with a following imperative are those expressing

i. For

“entreaty”,

the agreement

e.g.

of the

participle

with

the

noun

to which

it refers

see 877.

2. The Edd. read ἀγαθὴςν» δεσποτείαζν» and observe: “yrava is probably elliptical, for it is at any rate unnecessary to suppose an omission of a verb..." Apparently there is a mixture of two constructions here: γνώτω 9n... and γνῶναι rar...

317

$8 761 - 764

IMPERATIVAI.

INFINITIVE

δέομαι, See P.S.4, 352, 7-8 (254-253 B.c.); P.Oxr. P.Jews 1926, 15-16 (mid. Iv; A.D.) ; cf. .dets 21: 39; [2 (1i /A.D.]; P. Mich. 491.9 (t /A.D.); cf. Luke 14: 12, 4-7 (Roman); 21, 12-13 (beg. of ii/A.D.); P.Merton 24, 12-13 (c. A.D. 200); P.Jews 1929, Off. Cor. 4: 16; 1 Thess. 5:14; Heb. 13: 22; 1 Pet, 5: 1.

i295, 10 (ll or it/A.D.); ἐρωτῶ, see B.G.U. 423, 1118: παρακαλῶ, See P.Giss, B.G.U. 846, τὸ litjA.D.): (mid. iv/A.D.) ; etc.; cf. i

762. The imperatival infinitive is sometimes dependent on a verb signifying “to

command”,

"say",

"wish",

etc.,

which

is

understood,

or

stated

somewherein the text. [t it difficult, however, to decide whether a governing verb is to be understood, especially when the infinitive represents a 2nd person imperative, and consequently the subject or predicate is in the nominative. For instance : ev οἷς ἐὰν σοῦ

προηδέηται,

Gurzpoo γενέσθαι

αὐτῶι

ws arflopoAoyn(aonévax|

ὑπὲρ

gov οὕτως ὡς ὑπίἐρ) μοῦ P.Oxv. 743. 33-5 (2 B.C.): there is no governing verb; In φέρε δὲ ἡμῖν καὶ τὸ μέρ[ οἱς τοῦ Acxvou, δούς (read dois)! xai πάντα ra Tupia als)

φέρων

βίΟχν,

1840,

the subject

of the infinitive

δοῦναι

aad’ ws

| a

1848,

δοῦναί

ἔθος

5-6

(vi or

ὁσιωτάτου

μοι τὴν

κέλευσιν

vii /A.D.),

ἀνδρὸς

δοῦναι

7

τοῦ

[vi’A.D.)

construction

is the nominative αὐτοῦ

where

: the

the

ὑσιωτᾶτον

line

αἱ ὑ] τί ὦ] justifies

3

καλῶς

the

{φέρων

arépos

use of

διὰ

the

that

δοῦναι) ; so also

τοῦτο

ποίει

implies πρᾶξαι

τὴν

P.Oxy.

κέλευσιν

infinitive

τοῦ

πρᾶξαι,

763. In some constructions, occurring especially in “petitions”, the idea of a governing verb has been weakened so much that the infinitive seems to he used quite independently as if it takes the place of a finite mood. E.g. ὕστερον

δὲ mpog |eAnAuferaı

αὐτὴν

er

τοῖς elr@anäle

σειν P.Oxy. 1607, 9-ı1 (I A.D.). ἐπῆλθαν οἰκίᾳ μὸν καὶ ἢ τι εἶχον er μηδὲν εὐρηκέναι με ἀπὸ τῶν συλληθέν

(— P.Abinn. had

47;

τῷ

τὸν ἀριθμὸν 1

the

wai

€ dg αὐτῷ

ὑπηκού-

τῇ αὐτῇ οἰκίᾳ βασταξαντες καὶ μέχρι Sevpou , των P.Gen. 47, 7-10 !A.D. 346); the Editors

construction

is as

ı [m|poßarwr

καὶ

if a "verbum

declarandi"

preceded.

ἐπῆλθίαν so

observe:

| τῇ ὁ mois

ἐμῶ]

ἐννήα

elsewhere

fewlaveny ,

καὶ

ἀγρῷ

τῶν

πφηρπακέναι

ἄλλα

in petitions: cf.

/bid.,

1

Ηλείαν :

ὡς

τούτων P

τρία 13-15

τὴν L]

|xelipavres

mpofata etpav

! kovupa|v 1

P.Lond. ἐν

«alt

τῷ

μὼν

[mlpog[av|a

403, 8-10

ἀγρῷ

τῆς

areAaviar []

fi

(A.D, 340):

Nappov

Beals

πεποιζηΣκέναι,

764. The imperatival infinitive is often used as apodosis of conditions expressing “will”. This construction is parallel to that which expresses the apodosis in the imperative (see examples in 730 ff.). In both cases we have a

1. δοῖς is subjunztive

used

in the place

of the imperative:

318

see 335

(13).

IMPERATIVAI.

INFINITIVE

δὲ 764 - 769

structural shortening in which either the imperative or the infinitive preponderates. The original complete order can be seen in the following ınstances: ἡ {= plov also ddes

εὖ ἕτερον θέλις λέγειν, λέγε P.Par. 44, 5 (153 B.C.); καὶ ἐὰν θέλῃς eis óvou[d τὸν | χρηματισμὸν ποιῆσαι, moinror P.Merton 23, 7-9 (late 1/A.D.); so ἀλλὰ θέλις αὐτὸ rwÄnlcalı], πώλησον, θέλις αὐτὸ ἀφεῖναι | τῇ θυγατρί σ[ου!, P.Tebr. 421, 8-10 (iii /A.D.). Cf. 731.

765. Here the apodosis is expressed ἐὰν doxn σοι, πέμψαι

by the infinitive:

| τὸ ἀπόχο(ζο)ν ᾿Ιἰσᾶτος καὶ | παραλάβωμεν

τὸ

ἐλάδιον

λυπόν,

ἐὰν δόξη σοι P.Fay. 123, 11-14 (C. A.D. 100), aiav ov δώξη, πέμσίαι αὐτῷ eAàs (ἀρτάβην) a καὶ εἰκθύδιν, ἐπὶ | χρίαν αὐτοῦ ἔχωμον P.Fay. 117, 6-8 (A.D. 108): ἐάν σοι οὖν domi, κύριε, ἐλθῖν πρὸς ? ἡμᾶς καὶ εὐθέως γείνεται τὸ ἔργον P.Lond.

404, 6-7 (c. 4.D. P.Lond. 235, 20-1 τῷ

κυρίῳ

μον

P.Gen. 79+ imperative,

346); ἐὰν xeAlevalns, | ἀνελθῖν μοι (for με) ἐπὶ τὰ κάστρίαἹ (iv/A.D.]; cf. εἰ δὲ καὶ ἀντιλέγει... | παράσχον τὴν xip| ajv

...

|...

καὶ

| σιδερῶσαει

αὐτὸν

καὶ

παραδώσῃ

P.Lond. 422, 10-14 (mid. iv/A.D.) : notice infinitive, and subjunctive respectively.

the

σοι

[alu] 'τὸν ]

juxtaposition

of

766. Some constructions are related directly to the imperatival infinitive. First is the eptstolary infinitive yacpew!, which stands as an opening formula of the papyrus letters. It occurs regularly from the iii/B.c. up to the iv/a.n. Thereafter it is very rare (if not extinct), as ıt was replaced by other salutatory expressions, especially ἐρρῶσθαϊ ce εὔχομαι. 767. Xaipew in papyri is to be regarded as one of the independent uses of the imperatival infinitive. Similar is the situation of χαίρειν in the N.T., although in some passages it appears to depend on a verb of “bidding” (γράφω, λέγω etc). which is, as a rule, understood.? In papyri χαίρειν is often preceded by such expressions as: πλεῖστα, πολλά, ἐν κυρίῳ, ev θεῷ, ev κυρίω Gea. 3

f

a

768. The imperatival tnfinitive is the origin of the as

the

585 f.).

former

was

replaced

by

the

analytical

769. The imperative

in asyndetic constructions

t.

Lexicon

For

tit.

3. See for

see

Bauer's

particulars

s.v.

2

imperatival

construction

iva in so far with

ta

(see

must also be related to the

b.

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

§ 389:

p. ταῦ.

319

Burton,

AT,

& 388;

Moule,

/diom,

ἐλ

769 . 773

THE

INFINIFIVE

OF

PURPOSE

imperatival infinitive, as the cases resemble each other in function and often

correspond to one another in structure (see 701). 770. The infinitive of purpose. As in Attic, the infinitive can express the purpose of the act denoted by the governing verb. In papyri this infinitive is found in particular with μέλλω and with a variety of verbs of motion, e.g. (ava-, dta-, εἰσ-)βαίνω, γίνομαι in the sense of "arrive", ἀπέρχομαι, (épyopat, only with tva ἡ ὅπως), ἥκω, πορεύομαι etc. Purpose is also expressed by the infinitive with the article in genitive (see 817), or the prepositional infinitive (see 843). Other verbs which take the infinitive of purpose are (ἐπι-)δίδωμι, (ἀπο-, ἐπι-στέλλω,

as in Attic.

771. In certain constructions the complementary infinitive has a perceptible nuance of purpose, as may be seen from the tendency to replace it by ira with subjunctive. Such infinitives are those constructed with verbs signifying to “try”, “have in mind”, “take care”, “attempt”, “manage”, like öo-

κιμάζω,

ἐπιμέλομαι (also

σπουδάζω,

σπεύδω,

in a conseculive

sense),

πειρῶμαι,

προάγομαι,

τολμῶ.

772. The infinitive of result. The infinitive with ὥστε (or ws) is used to express

a real or possible result, as in Attic. This usage is well attested tn the Ptolemaic papyri but it is considerably more fare in the post-Ptolemaic period. It holds its own in stereotyped expressions such as ἐμίσθωσεν... ὥστε and the infinitive, which occurs especially in "leases". Similarly προσδεχόμ[ε)fa διμισσωρίαν,

ὦστε

ἕως | σήμερον

μηδέναν

ἀπολεϊλύσθαι

Or 1i/A.D.) — ... it so being that up till today a 6€

ἀνέπεμψας

οὐκ

ἦν

τοσαῦτα

wo re

nobody

Kat ἄνθρωπον

B.G.U. 27,

has been Kat

ὄνον

12-15 (ii

released; kajTapym-

θῆναι P.Flor. 176, 5-8 (λιν 250); ἔσχιστα πέπονθεν ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων are λεμόνων καὶ ἀθέων, «a|T]e, ὡς erws εἰπεῖν, avay κασθήῆναι P.Jews 1915, 7-9

(c.

A.D.

330-340).

773. So also with ὡς; φροντίς σοι! γενέσθω ὄνους δύο... 1... συνωνήσασθαι | τῆς aftas τιμῆς, ὡς μήτε τὸν πι πράσκοντα ζημ'οὔσθαι μήτε ὑμᾶς ζημίαν πλείονα!

ὑπομένειν

P.Flor.

142,

3-9

(A.D.

264)

=

vendor lose nor do we suffer any serious loss:

...

so

that

neither

does

the

κατεσχέθην νόσῳ | ἐπὶ πολὺ

ws un δύνασθαι μηδὲ σαλεύεσθαι P.S.I. 299, 3-4 (end of iii/4.n.); so also f " ud τραχώματα ἔσχον kat δεινὰ πέπονθα ἔτι τε Kat ἕτερα u[épln τοῦ σώματος] %

|. Sce

Mayser,

ı1!, pp. 297-302.

320

iva WITH

THE

INFINITIVE

δὲ 773-775

ὡς Kal ἐπὶ τομὴν ἥκειν ple] ὀλίγου Ibid., 6-8; ἐνόσησαν δὲ mar τες ot Kara τὴν οἰκίαν ... | ... ὡς μηδὲ ἔχειν ἡμᾶς ὑπηρεσίαν Ibid., 14-16. 774. Elsewhere, ὥστε has retreated before ἕνα, which is seen as having aconsecutive sense besides its main notion of purpose. This development arose from constructions where wore could express an intended result, so similar to purpose.! That the distinction between ἕνα and wore was blurred is further reflected in late papyri, where «ore stands as final, e.g. μ[ελη ]σάτ[ ὦ] σοι οὖν, ddeAdE, περὶ τοῦ γράμματος THs ὑποθήκ[ns wlore αὐτὸ ἀπαρτισθῆναι καθὼς ἔθος ἐστίν P.Oxy. 1666, 17-18 (ili/A.D.) = so, brother, take charge yourself of the deed of mortgage, to have it prepared in the customary way.

Notice that μέλει elsewhere is constructed with infinitive or iva-clause. Similarly ἐδήλωσα τῇ εὐγενείᾳ oov! wore

...!...!... ἐπέχειν P.Lond 231, 3-6

(mid.

iv/A.D.), while the usual construction of δηλῶ is with plain infinitive or tva-clause παρεκλήθη ὁ δεσπότηςς» pov... | ... ware ἐνδοῦναι P.Princ. 137, 1-2 (v or vi/A.D.). "Dore is even used for the imperatival iva: ὥστε ἀναζητήσῃης ἐν τῇ πόλει Κρόνιον | κουρέα οἰκοῦντα ἐκῖσαι, καὶ ἀπαιτήσης P.Gen. 79+ P.Lond. 422, 4-5 (mid. iv/a.p.) without governing verb. On the other hand, the consecutive sense of tva brought about the feeling that it could precede the infinitive as could ὥστε. 775. “Iva with the infinitive expressing result is a construction post-Ptolemaic compositions.? E.g. εὐχώμετά

σε

(=: εὐχόμεθα

(A.D. 57); παραγενοῦ 8-10 (ii/A.D.); καθὼς τῇ

ὑἹμετέρᾳ

oe)

| tva.

καλῶς

ἔχην

(= éyev)

αὐτῇ

| μεγαλοπρεπίᾳ,

| iva

P.Merton

63, 18-19

iva, av | δυνασθῶμεν, τὸν μικρὸν | ἐπικρεῖναι P.Hamb. B6, παρεκαλέσαμεν τὴν ὑμετέραν δεσποτίαν iva, ἄχρη ypad| ὠμει μὴ

ἀπολῆσαι

P.Oxy.

1835,

1-2

A.D.]; [πρὸς ἡμᾶς xara?lAaBe ἵνα ἀπαλλάξαι τὸ πρᾶγμά (683, 2 (mid. vi/A.D.); «tva! τελειῶσαι P.S.I. 836, 11-12 πρᾶξαι

confined to

πέμψαι

νεώτερον

vi;

αὐτῶν ᾿ἐλθεῖν' or vii/

Classical

writers

καὶ

early

χώματα

to

δύο

v or

P.Oxy. 1939, 3-4 lvi or vii /A.D.); πέμψον μαι τὸν Àoyov | ἵνα καὶ ἐμοῦ AL Al éyye) abrops' ... 1... xai: δυνηθϑῆσαι (sic) P.Oxy. 1944, 6-9 (vi

1. Such a use is not unknown

αὐτοὺς

(late

co (for cov) P.Lond. [vi/A.D.); ἥτησέν μοι

(see

φυλάξαι

Jannaris,

and it appears to be well attested in N.T. Greek, often

under

idiom,

p.

notoriously

sharp

line

142,

observes

between

that

purpose

the and

Semitic result;

mind

see

also

was

Ta

Hist.

Gr., App.

Semitic influence.

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

unwilling

vi, 8)

Moule,

to draw

a

§ 391.

2. See Ljungvik, Studien, pp. 40-2; Beitr., pp. 46-9: Burguiére, Hist. de l'infin., p. 180; Mandilaras. '"'"Epeuvar... ". Athena Ixv (19611, pp. 159-76. 421

B. €i. Mandtlaras,

The

Verh

in the Greek

Non-Literarv

Papyri

21

st 775 - 781

ira

A.D.];

430

πέμψαι

Ip.

with

yap

315,

τὸ xpens,

INFINITIVE

.,..

len

«as

20-351

ὅπως

δι᾽

αὐτηῦ

anparad

po^

P.Alex.

Inv,

iByz.)].

the infinitive is attested

avaranı

P.Tehr.

THE

γραμματηφήρον

15), 3-4

776. "πως exe

τὸν

WITH

|ölmws

Tor

(it: A.D.

τούτου

less frequently, e.g.

am@atyra

pera

καταναγκασβῆναι

φρουρᾶς

| 7

τυχῶν yapıras ὁμοληγήῆσπι

Tow

τῶ

αὐτὴν

P.Oxy.

18854,

(1) "Ira with infinitive appears occasionally in popular

apytepi

τόπον

πέμπιν

ἀποδοῦναι

11-13

(A.D. 5041.

writings outside the

papyri.! 771. A nuance of result is also perceptible in complementary infinitives depending on certain verbs, e.g. those denoting ability, fitness, like δύναμαι,

εὑρίσκω, ἰσχύω, φθάνω. The consecutive sense of the infinitive ts apparent, as the basic idea is "to be in a position to do something". 778. Similarly verbs which denote "to accept", "agree", "decide", like ἀνέχομαι, διαγινώσκω, ἐπιδέχομαι, ἐπινεύω, κρίνω, ψηφίζομαι take the infinitive which expresses a consecutive notion,as these verbs indicate an action the result of which follows. These verbs

mostly in "leases", "petitions", “agreements” and

"confirm". sometimes governing are found

similar kinds of official

and legal documents. 779. The infinitive expressing result can be also found with verbs which signify "to take care", "prepare", "be ready", like ἐπιμέλομαι, ἑτοιμάζω, φροντίζω, and the expressions ἔτοιμος γίομαι, ἑτοίμως ἔχω. In this case the result is conceived but not actual.

780. The infinitive used absolutely. The so-called infinitive absolute after ws is known

to Classical

language.

It

occurs

only

twice

in

the

Ptolemaic

papyri. e.g. ἧπερ σὺν Bean ἐλπίζω

πε

εἰπεῖν

memetaoue| Pla PLS

αστεφηνωθήσεσθαι

781. In the post-Ptolemaic

P.Cairo

papyri

302, b

Zen,

1242-241

5yobo,

it is confined

7

[257

B.C.1; σὺν

δὲ Benin εἰπεῖν,

5.6].

to such

examples

as: σὺν

θεῷ φάναι P.Flor. 127, 2 (A.D. 256); ὡς ἔπως εἰπεῖν PJews 1915, 8 (c. A.D. 330-340): ὡς εἶναι Is common in “accounts” expressing the total amount of the expenses: P. Lond. 247, 10 (v/s.n.); P.Oxy. 1830, B; 13 (vi/s.n.)i etc. 1. Sce examples 7. See

Mavser,

quoted

by

Ljungsik,

Joc. cif.

[᾿ς p. 302. 322

n

ss 782 . 184 (4) I.

SYNTAX

OF

Infinttive 782. The infinitive as subject.

THE

IENFENITIEVE

without

As

the subject

Article

of a sentence,

the infinitive may

stand

with or without the article. In this chapter we deal with the anarthrous infinitive which supplements impersonal verbs or impersonal expressions. In addition, some references

have been made to the articular infinitive, when the main verb happens to take both constructions. Among the impersonal verbs, in particular, ἐστίν or combinations of ἐστίν with adjectives or substantives often take the infinitive. A relationship between this construction and the tva-clause, similar to that which ts attested tn the constructions of the finite verbs, Is to be found in a series of impersonal expressions, whether they be simple verbs or combinations of ἐστίν. This becomes more explicit in the text of the N.T., which prefers the analytical sentence to the infinitive to a greater degree than do the papyrı. 783. The infinitive as subject of ἐστίν (~ it appears, is possible) is certainly Classical; it occurs frequently in papyri, although it disappears at a rather early date.

(1) The construction of ἐστίν is familiar to Biblical texts. There, as in the papyri, it is mostly accompanied by the negative οὐκ. The person for whom the action is not passible is expressed in the dative or in the accusative it is connected with the infinitive directly (subject of the infinitive).

if

784. In documents of later times the dative is replaced by the genitive. (

With

ü

13

acc.

(roy,

οὐκ

gore

(2)

With

214

and 10-81

üvaxu

BC

καὶ

110%

BU.

(3

Without

2

Ir,

2533

εἰσιέναι N

35.

BUCH, ἔστιν

30-1

{iv

foll:

ἀλλ᾽

fe. 253 6.60.1

dan

dat. and 7);

infin. pe

al AV

P Par,

47,

indication cf.

οὐθέν

P. Petrie A.D)

ἃ πότε

El£rora

of

the

ἐμὴ 16,

b

152

σοι

person:

|earalı

nb

ἢ

p.c;

mponóuwrnadat

ποεῖν

reading by

P.Petrü

Hunt-Edgarj

γραῴειν P.Tebt. 760,

gelilor

dimid,

ταὐτὴ

B.C.

αὐταῖς ἔστω

Ἰέσται

ἔπτιν

θεύδωρων (revised

lc.

ἐσ τίν

émarayxov

ἧσσον

wat

23-4

infin. foll.: mnAAa

μηθὲν

ἔσται

ant

ποιεῖν τυχεῖν

συῦ

17-18

P.Grenf. P.Petrie

αἱ

rpnararnonlı]

ἐὰν

e

The |

δὲ

PSH

015

dic,

Phid.,

3-4:

óvopgate

297,

(215-

it 27. 23-4

4

P Gren.

IviA.D.”:

also from the N.T.; οὐκ ἔστε φαγεῖν 1 Cor. 11:20, οὐκ ἔστι νῦν λέγειν Heh yg: 5 (4)

With gen. and infin. τοῦ B«ob υὖν ἐστι

tions;

foll.: αὐτοῦ βοηθῆσαι

yap

P.Cairo

323

ἐστιν, .. Masp.

ἐκδικεῖν

07077,

12

COMMON (Bvz.}:

in "petibut

à co,

THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT

8& 784 (4) - 786 (7) ἔχει βοηθῆσαι P.land. τὸν

19, 5 (vi or vii/A.D.); and

ἐλπίζω

eis

θεὸν

ὅτι

A.D.).

See also 375.

ἑκάτερον

ἔχει

785. The infinitive after compounds (N)

ἔνεστι

36, 6-7 (2)

"it

is

possible’;

further following a én-clause:

' προβῆναι

P.Grenf.

i 64,

waworepor

σοι

6-7

!vi or

viij

of ἐστίν

ὅταν

μηδὲν

ἐνῆν

δηλῶσαι

P.Heid.

(A.D. 98-117).

ἔξεστι "it is permitted";

with dat. and infin. foll.: ἐξέσται

δὲ

τῶι Bov ido-

μένωι ὑπερβάλλειν P.Eleph. 14, 23-4 (c. 223 B.C.); μὴ ἐξέστωι οὖν τῶι μεμισθωμένῳ | πρὸ τοῦ χρόνου ἐγλιπεῖν P,Merton 10, 14-15 (A.D, 21); καὶ μηδενὶ ἐξεῖναι

mapafleivat τι P.S.I. 1263, 9 (ii/A.D.); οὐκ ἐξέστε | μοι ἐντὸς [τοῦ] χράνου προλιπῖν P.Michael. 24, 20-ı (A.D. 296}; οὐκ ἔξεστιν οὐδενὶ ἡμῶν παραβῆναί τι P.Gen.

11, 13

(A.D. 350); μὴ ἐξιεἴναξ μοι τοῦτον

377).

αποβαλέσθαι Ρ. 5.1. 287,

15-16

(A.D.

|

(3) With acc. and infin.: ἐξέσται ἡμᾶς λαβεῖν καὶ xpygparícao0|o«] P.Lille 26, 6 (iii /B.c.); ἀ[λλ' ἐϊξέσται «ai | Θεύδωρον καταλειφθέντα ταὐτὸ ποεῖν P.Petrie

ii 13 {19), IO-II (c. 255 B.C.) :a[AA'] al.}... δοῦναι; Luke 20: 22,

ἔσται Ed.; cf. ἔξεστιν ἡμᾶς

(4) πάρεστι “it is possible", "it ts in the power in the Classical language). οὐδὲ πάρεστιν dtadopas

P.S.4.

238,

3-4

[ἡμῖν

CDW

of someone to do" (so also ... !... and σοῦ καταλαβεῖν

(vi-vii /A.D.).

The infinitive after combinations of ἐστίν with adjectives (1)

ἀκύλουθον

20,9

(A.D.

P.Oxy. (2)

(3)

350};

2110,

ἄμεινον

better

for

“it

similarly

2t "it

is suitable, lA.D.

is

us not

ἀναγκαῖον

right":

Ibid. ,

"it

22-4;

οὐκ

ἔστιν

...

und’

better”:

ἄμεινον

fy

P.Heid.

is necessary, ...

it 39

(A.D.

257):

foll.: ἀναγκαῖον

(4)

δεινόν

P.Petrie (5)

ii

δίκαιον

also jv

essential”;

γινώσκεσθαι

ἀναγκαῖον

εἶναι

"it

ts

dreadful,

4

(6),

15-16

“it

is

acc.

P.Freib. 7, 11

right”:

πρῶτον

τὸ

un

ὃννατάν

σασθαι δυνατὸς

ab:

"it is possible"; αὐτῇ

nuliv

P.Bour.

ἔτι

mpafar

τι

δίκαιον

with (251

infin,

B.C.);

Acts

| àpéae

yap

“it was

foll.

regularly:

but

Polyb.

ἐστιν

‘ev

ἐστίν σε

132, 11-12 the

articular

I, 4, 4.

ὄχλωι

ατιμάζεσθαι

..c.). δὲ

ἐπὶ

equivalent

P.Lond.

ἡμᾶς

avay'xalev

13: 46;

μηδ᾽ ἐᾶσαι

terrible" : & vor’ (255

ὑποσχέσθαι (n/A.D.).

τοῦ

παρόντος

προστάξαι

Inv.

No.

to ἐστίν 4+ infin.: 2102,

25-6

(7) ἐνδεχόμενον "it is possible”: ἐὰν ἐνδεχόμενον ! te αἰξιώσειν P.Grenf. i 14 la), 4-6 (270 or 233 B.C).

324

| P.S.I.

346,

P.Flor. 332, 24-5 (n /A.D.).

"it is not possible to bring" P.S.f. 375, 2 [250-249 el

ὁρίσαι

| σε ἦν γνῶναι P.Flor.

λαληθῆναι

παραλιπεῖν

ὅλως

2 (255-254 B.C.) ; δίκαι [ὃν ἐστι καὶ ἡμᾶς ἀνταποδοῦναι (6)

...

anxolAovov

(i), 3-4

ὑπομνῆσαι P.S.I. 1335, 26 (iil /A.D.) ; ἀναγκαῖον infin.

«arıv

370).

to promise",

ἔστι yàp ἀναγκαῖον

[axo|Aov|80ov|

οὐ δυνατὸν

εἴη

wopi-

B.C.). also personally :

(ii /A.D.). μηθέν

ce

ἐνοχλήσειν

μηδ᾽

THE

INFINITIVE

(8) ἐπιτήδειον "it is necessary, P.S.J. 3531, 8-10 (254-253 B.c.). (9)

εὔκαιρον

9-10

"it

Ic. 250

iS

ἐστιν

proper >

ware

aot

οὐκ

ἔσται

ἐπιτή decor

εὔκαιρον

ἐστιν

waravei pn

{ἀποστεῖλαι

P. S.I.

526,

appropriate, worthy": [i«]av|o|v (7) ἐστιν s. [amo2411. 50-1 (prob. c. A.D. 1731; afew [personally) : ade bog

προσαιδρεύειν

(11) πρησῆκον

"it

1919, 14-15

P.Oxy,

120,

is fitting:

21

(iv /A.D.].

προσῆκον

| ἐστ

ἀλλήλων

μι) μιήσκεσθαι

P Jews

fc. A.D. 330-340).

(12) χρήπιμον "it is useful, advantageous’: it is useful to give (the ass) back" P.S./.

787. The

δὰ 786 (B) - 788

B.C.).

(10) ἱκανόν "it is δυϑήναι ?] P.Oxy. TÉ

suitable”:

AS SUBIECT

infinitive after combinations

χρήσιμον elr{ac] ἀποδοῦναι 367, 12-13 1231-250 R.c.).

of ἐστίν

“that

with substantives. In fact, the

infinitive has an explanatory sense in most of the following examples. (lI)

ἔθος,

With

συνήθεια

dat.

130,

or

34-5

βοηθεῖν

(A.D.

Polyb.

25:

16.

ἔθης

with

but

συνήθεια

P.SI. (2

αἵρεσις

1273.

infin.

1487);

cf.

10:

r infin.

12

foll.: ἔθος the

John

"having

20-30

ἔστιν

fa.D,

18:

the

ἐστὶν

μὴ

«frac

καλλίστην

ἔθος

plain

(vi-vii/A.D.);

ἀπολύσω

is”.

foll.: ἔθος "Popaias

οὐκ

following

1345. ὑμῖν

custom

and

ἢ B,

ro?

era

“the

gen.

᾿Ῥωμαίηις τοῦ

has

... ἐστὶ

χαριίζεσθαί

παρασχεθῆναι

infinitive:

N.T.

... ἔθος

rica

P.Oxy.

συνήθεια

tra-clause:

yàp

ἔστι

Acty

7 (A.D. ἐστι

338):

συνελθεῖν

συνήθεια

ὑμῖν,

iva

choice:

aipeme

ἔσται...

7...

ἔχει

αὐτῇ

P.Oxy.

260).

(d)

infin.

(ἐστιν) ae

86,

δὲ

καὶ

3).

and infin. foll: εὐχὴ wine P.Michael. 29,

waipos

Pland.

ἄνθρωπον

ὑμῶν

(3 εὐχή "desire", "will; with gen. | παρασχεῖν "their desire is to supply amooreiÀanc

μηνύεσθαι

μεταπορεύεσθηι

“itis

PS]

time;

226,

3-4

with

liv/A.D.];

cf.

foil.

(as

καιρὸν

in

αὐτῶν ἔστι ulvor 18-20 (iv /A.D.Ἢ.

Attic);

εἶναι

πλεῖν

καιρόν Polyb.

«P ναι

i, 49,

3;

with τοῦ t infin. foll.: κπιρὸς ἔστιν τοῦ παρασκευάσαι P Harris 112, 9-10 (v/ A.D.) ; so also in the N.T.: o καιρὸς (sc. ἐστινὶ τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρῖμα I Per. 4:17. (S) κάματος (ἐπτι»} “it is a labour: «aparoc. ἐστιν καταλαβεῖν τὸν λόγον "it is a labour to grapple with the accounts”: P. Merron 46, 7 (late iv/A.D.J. (6 xeeuos "honour", "it is fitting”: πῶς jfele «|oo]uoc ἦν καὶ ma[ 15a elvxepws τυχεῖν C.P.Herm, 119 (verso iii], 14 (A.D. 257); so also Classical. Cf. ols

(T)

κήσμως

apa

δὲ icipla €£ ὕπνου

clause 788. The

[se.

ἐστὶν")

[ἐστίν]

"it

καλῶς

is

ἧι auvayeay P.Rer. ἐγερθῆναι

foll. in

the

Rom,

τοῦτο

time"

ὁρᾶν

‘as

Thuc.

commonly

42, 3 1230-259

13: 11, but

ἦλθεν

I 5.2.

in

the

Classical

B.C.1; cf. ἡ wpa

Bepioar

ὥρα Rev.

N.T.

infinitive used as subject of the impersonal γίνεται

325

language): ὅταν

(se. ἐστίν) 14:

15;

Yan ὑμᾶς also

ἕνα -

kt 788 (1) - 790 (2)

THE

INFINITIVE

AS SUBIECT

(1) This verb, and combinations of it with adjectives or substantives,! are parallel to ἐστίν in their construction and are virtually aspectual variants of

ἐστί

.

γίνεται “it is allowed, PSF. 402, 8-9 (mid. 160

B.C.);

«ar

possible", "it appears: yeeéabac pot... iii/B.C.); γίνεται yap ἐντραπῆναι P,Par.

γένηται

ἡμᾶς

μὴ

ὑπογύως

| aramdeir

11’A.D.), Likewise in Modern Greek, but Acts 10:25 [= εἰσελθόντος τηῦ [lérpov).

P. Arf.

ws δὲ ἐγένετο

... βραδῦναι 40, 20-30 le.

135,

10-101

τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν

(early

rov. Πέτρον

(2) γίνεται with adjectives plays a role similar to that of ἐστί, E.g. avayxatór μοι ἐγένετο προσαγορεῦσαι P.Oxy. 123, 4 (iii or iv/A.n.). In the following instances we see a subordinate clause instead of the expected infinitive. E.g. ὅτι

δὲ ἠπίστατο γράμματα ἡ γυνὴ δῆλόν σοι ἐγένετο P.Oxy. 2111,8 (c. A.D. 135); δῆλον ἐγένετο ὅτι συνήθως | διάγεις Ρ. 5.1. 1445, 6-7 (iltfa.n.). Also φανερὸν γίνεται followed by the infinitive or ὅτι (duorı)-clause (Mayser, ᾿ς p. 308). (3)

γίνεται with substantives: ἀνάγκη rat... P.Lond. φροντίς:

(equivalent to Classical and Hellenistic ἀνάγκη éori): ἀνάγκη μοι yeyernκίατα]σί τ] σαι P.Jews 1913, 8 (A.D. 334) : ἀνάγκη μοι γεγένηται δηλῶσς 405, 6 (c. A.D. 346); γρά afi] P.Gen. 50, 12-1 lec. A.D. 346]. φροντίς aor γενέσθω ... 0°... 1... παρασχεῖν P. Ry. 238, 2-4 (A.D.

262). xpeia! μήποτε

χρεία

γένηται

xaralmAevaat

με

P.Berl.

Zill.

789. The infinitive after expressions with ἔχειν. The clause tn this case (Blass-Debr.-Funk, καλῶς ἔχειν “be σε P.S.. 1312,

9, 9-10

(A.D.

68).

N.T. usually has a tva-

§ 393 (5)).

well", "be fine’: καλῶς ἔχειν 7-B lii /B.C.]); καλῶς δ᾽ ἔχει

ἔκρινον σε...

| γράψαι καὶ da racacta: per ἐμοῦ μένειν P,Cairo

Preis. 44, Ὁ (it JA.D.].

790. Also personally (a) With substantives: (lI) (vi

ἀνάγκην ἔχειν or vil /A.D.).

(2)

ἐξουσίαν

ἑφαπτεσθαΐ

|.

For

iar in

the

φαγεῖν

καὶ

the

ἔχειν Tives

N.T., πιεῖν

various

I

“be

bound

ἀνάγκην

ἔχειν

“be

able”:

the

power",

ἐνγαίων

P.Tor.

"have αὐΤῶν

to’:

e.g.

ἐξουσίαν

Cor,

4:41.

constructions

ἔχω

οὗτοι

of

θεῖναι

yirerac

326

Sohn

τὴν

in

10: 18;

ἐξυυσίαν

the

[1 16

N.T,

un

κλεῖσαι

see

P.Oxy.

ἔχειν

μηδεμίαν

| viii] . 25-b

ı

ἔχουσι

arabBos|ra]|y

B.C.)

οὐκ τὸν

Moulton,

1865,

ἐξουσίαν

τινὰ

. ΤΠ ΙΕ

very

ἔχομεν οὐρανόν

Prof.,

10

famil-

ἐξουσίαν Rey.

pp.

te:

16 f.

b

THE INFINITIVE AS SUBAEUT (3)

συνήθειαν

(A.D.

(4)

110);

σχολὴν

(c. 160 (5)

"be

ἔθας

ἔχειν

accusiomed':

ἔχονσι

“have

ἔχομον

λαμβάνειν

spare

P.

αὐνήθιαν

Ryl. 238,

time": οὐκ

ἔχω

6

πέμπιν

(A.D.

σχολὴν

P.Fav.

r18,

I4

49,

32

262).

ἀναβῆναι

P,Par.

B.c.).

χάριν

P.Lond.

(b)

ἔχειν

cf.

$8 790 (3) - 791 (4)

ἔχειν

409,

(6)

ὥραν

787

(7)):

“take

19-20

pleasure

(c.

A.D.

ἔχειν “be

of the

wpav

ἔχειν...

With

adverbs:

(7)

ἀναγκαίως

ἔσχον

in’:

ἀεὶ

yap

ἐγὼν

χήάρει.

ἔχω

φιλειάσειν

mam

(cf.

ἐστέι

346).

right

age

περι

. πρὸς

(for)", "be

τέμνεσθαι

αὐτὸν

old

enough

P.Lond.

καταντῆσαι

24,

P.Oxy.

to”

11-13

wpa

(163

1666,

6-7

a.c.).

(i /A.D.).

791. The infinitive after impersonal verbs (1) δεῖ "it is necessary", "one must’, "has to". In particular it expresses the idea of the compulsion of duty, or of a necessity. E.g. δεῖν φασιν ὑπάρχειν P.Petrie 1 29, 16 (ni/B.C.); ἐάν σε δὴ (ó«é»g Edd.) ro εἱμάτιόν | cov θεῖναι ἐνέxvpov P.Fay. tog, 5-6 fearly i/A.D.]; denn ἐπισταλῆναι P.Tehr. 341, 4 (A.D. 140-141}: ἐδέησεν ... |... 0vvayayetv P.Oxy. 1412, 11-12 [C. A.D. 284); δεῖ yap ! τῶν] φίλων xai a[e]i ... ! ... φροντίζειν PSJ 1246, 1-3 lili A. D.); ἐδέησεν ἡμᾶς ἐπιθεῖνε P.Oxy. 1915, 10 (C. A.D. 330-340]: 8€ μαι ἀνελθεῖν P.O xy, 120, 20 (iv/A.D.); ἔδει τὴν ὑμετέραν... παΐδευσιν ἀντιποιηθῆναι P.Oxy, 1165, 2 (vifA.D.). τῇ

(2) δοκεῖ "it seems, appears", “is resolved, decided : οὐκ éBofer | οὖν μοι χρήσιμον εἶν[αἱ PS 363, 11-12. (251-250 B.C.): ἔδοξεν ... 1... γενέσθαι P.Oxy. 1068, 15-16 (iii /A.D.); οὐ δέδοκται γὰρ ἡμῖν alyw P.Oxy. 120,25 (iv/A.D.); etc." also personal: μὴ dofns ue ... ! ἡμεληκέναι P.Tebt. 413, 6-7 (ti or in/ A.D.). With tva-clause foll.: ἔδοξεν ἵνα αὐτὴ λάβη P.Oxy. 1847, 5 [vi-vir/A.D.]. (3

μέλει

"take

care”,

"see",

"bear

in

mind”;

with

dat.

and

pres.

or

aor.

Od μοι πέμψαι καὶ πυθέ σθαι P.Oxy. 930, 11-13 (itor In /A.D.): so also μελη cary aoi τε καὶ τῷ παιδα ᾿Ιγωγῷ σου... |... παραβάλλειν fbid., 19-20; μελησάτω σοι λυτρώσασθαι P.Oxy, 114, 2 [1 or H1/A.D.); [μέλλει ξημιωθῆναι βιῶχγ. 1933, 16 (vi’ap.}. With dat. and iva-clause foll.: μελέτω δέ σοι wai [ilra τὰ [wliva μὴ

πλείονος

HICB.C.);

a4

(252

πωλῆται

Cf.

B.C.).

lra

κειώματα

τοὺς

ἐν

(4)

With

“it

Classical):

τελευτῆσαι

τινὶ

dat.

ac

ὥπως

6 πως

πώληται

and Ta

μὴ

in

cuymopiohye

P.Sef.

örws-clause παιδία

δίκας

204)

ἐπιμελές

aur pal.

..

λέγωμεν

2-3 (237 δύνασθαι P.Oxy.

Ot,

...

(A.D.

327

703, P.Cairo

σοι

dratpaduwav,

PAmh.

13:1,

acc.

πρηηπεσαφξὶν

8.C.); [συνέβη P Lead, 24. 22 Im

éarw

loll.) μελησήτω

|...

I...

P.Tebr,

σοι

happens , “comes about ; with ur

P.Caira Zen, 39060, B.C.]: συμβαίνει un arten

(wrongly

rpomae

ὑφαντῶνι

συμβαίνει

(also

ἕνα

8-13

ὅπως (early

etc.

δὲ

περὶ

iij/a.D.).

infin,

foll.

amoalolraßnen:

ἡμῖν ayanıanaı PS 333, (163 8,02; dar δέ rm...

12601;

(late 50251,

ayopacdy

μάλιστα

or dat. and «ab...

174-5 Zen,

1

{256 συμβῇ

δὲ 791

(5) - 792

(5)

(9)

THE

συμφέρει

INFINITIVE

“it is expedient’,

AS

"it is

SUBJECT

useful

to":

ouwrdepı

...

|...

[oe] καφῆναι

P.Fay. 112, 17-18 (A.D. 99); οὐ συμφέρει ij ἀγοράσαι P,Ryl. 244, 11-12. (ili /A.D.); Cf. συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν John 18:14; with iva-clause foll.: roéro | συνφέρι eiva μὴ ἀπόληται P.Oxy. 1220, 18-19 (iii /A.D.), but in fact the iva-clause serves as an explanation to τοῦτο. "Iva-clause after ovudépe is in full use in the N.T., e.g. συμφέρει yap σοι iva ἀπόληται Matt. 5: 29; συμφέρει αὐτῷ, tra «peuaot? Matt. 18: 6.! (6) χρή "it must”, "has to", "ought usually with acc. and infin. foll.: χρῇ

to" (as in the Classical language); δὲ καὶ ı [vea] dew μοι P.Hib. 54, 19-20

(264 B.C.); xe[9 | ἡμᾶς παραγενέσθαι P.S.4. 607, 8-9 ypade«w μοι P.Michael. 16, 3-4 xai μὴ ἁπλῶς μάχαισθαι P.Oxy.

(iii /B.C.]

(ij or iii/A.D.); χρὴ 120, 4-6 liv’a.D.].

...

; ἐχρῇ σε, ἀδελφέ,

|

...

κἂν

dra χωρῖν

792. The infinitive after verbs taken impersonally (1) δηλοῦται “it is provided, shown, clear": ἐδη λώθηι ... ποιήσασθαί μοι αὐτὸν |... |... T7 ἐκτεῖσαι P.Fay. 11, 13-16 (c. 115 B.c.); ἐδηλοῦτο... [.. ἀπολελύσθαι (2)

P.Sel.

διέγνωσται

μελητὴν

315,

12-13

(A.D.

“it is decided”;

παραγίνεσθαι

P.Tebt.

188).

with 17,

acc.

2-3

and

(t14

infin,

foll.:

διέγνωσται "τὸν

€m-

B.c.).

(3) ἐκποιεῖ “tt is allowable"; with dat. and infin. foll.: οὐ ! yap | αὐτῶι νῦν malporrı οἰκονομή σασθαι P.S.f. 410, 15-19 (iii/B.C.); and infin. foll.:μὴ ἐκποιήση τοῦ ἔρχεσθαι P.S.T. 968, 15 (1/A.D.).

ἐξεποίησεν with τοῦ

(4)

τὸ

ἐνδέχεται

P.Oxy. (5)

1853,

"it

is

8

possible’;

(vi or

οὐκ

ἐνδέχετε

(>=

-Trai]

vii/A.D.).

μὴ

εὑρεθῆναι

χρυσίον

|

κεκέλευσται “orders have been given"; μεταφέρεσθαι B.G.U. 15 (i). 9-11 (A.D.

κεκέλενασται 194).

...

1...

|...

μὴ

(6) (ἐπι-) κέκριται "it has been decided”; with dat. and infin. foll.: ἐπικέ κριrai μοι μὴ καταβῆϊναι P.Tebr. 284, 2-3 (i/B.c.): with gen. of the agent and

acc. with infin.: κριθὲν ὑπὸ τῶν... ἐπάρχων τῆς δεούσης αὐτὰ τυχεῖν €navopBw:oews P.Oxy. 237 ( viii], 30-1 (A.D. 89}; with acc. and infin. foll.: κέκριται γὰρ τὸ

μέγα

(7

χωρίον

| ὅλον

wapayyeéAcra:

rapgyyé( λθαι)

λεται

325,

τοῖς

1-3

φυτευθῆναι

“orders

l'A8eupet

...

ἀναβῆναι

ὑπί] ἱγεγραμμένοις

(iii/A.D.);

βοη

P.S.J

are given”; ...

1334, with

22-3

dat.

P,Tebt.

[συνε]λθεῖν

12,

(iii /A.D.).

of person

and

24-5

B.c.);

...

θεῖν m[a]p[a]yyéA«A»erac

(118

|...

P.Jews

καὶ

the infin.

foll.:

[wa] pay

ἀναζητῆσαι

1915, 4 (C.

γέλ-

B.G.U.

A.D. 330-

340) . (8)

προσπέπτωκεν

"news

has

come : προσπέπτωκεν

yap

Παῶν

ava

πλεῖν

P. Sel.

tor, 8-9 (130 B.C.). (9) συγκεχώρηται "it has been allowed", "is granted”; it is exclusively found in regulations side by side with ἐξεστεν; with dat. and infin. foll.: rots ev στραrein...

Ι. Cf.

οὖσι

συνκεχώρητπι

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

$ 303

διατίβεσθα[ 1] B.G.U.

111.

320

v, 96

(ii ]Ακ.Ὁ.].

THE INFINITIVE AS COMPLEMENT (10) φαίνεται “it appears", P.Oxv. 37 102); ἐὰν

αὐτῷ

(as

in

Modern

1497,

ἐκείνην

2

(c.

ἀσχοληθεὶς

A.D.

279).

Yayurras

Also

VERT

Greek):

(ii), 7-9 (A.D. 49); [ἐάν φαίνηται γράψαι φαίνεται μισθῶσαι P.Cornell 10, 29-30 (A.D.

P.Oxy.

| ἡμέραν

"seems"

OF THE

μοι

φαίνεται,

ἔχειν

P.Oxy. 2342, 38 (A.D. 119); Jaivera δεδόσθαι

parenthetically:

| συμμεῖξαί

$8 792 (10) - 796

P.Par.

ὁ δέ, φαίνεται, 49,

24-6

(c.

τὴν 160

B-C.).

793. The infinitive as complement of the verb. In the papyri, the verbs which take the infinitive as object are in general the same as those of Classical Greek. The infinitive is, in fact, a pre-eminent element of the language of the papyri, and is abundantly used in every kind of document. In particular, official writings follow the Attic norm, while compositions of a popular style tend to reinforce the infinitive by adding the article τοῦ or even a final conjunction (iva, ὅπως) before it: this indicates a tendency to devaluate the synthetic forms of the infinitive. The reinforcement of the infinitive contributed to its long life. On the other hand, analytical constructions introduced by iva or ὅτι developed into considerable rivals of the infinitive; this can be best seen in constructions where iva or örı-clauses run parallel with the infinitive. These analytical constructions are more frequent in the post-Ptolemaic than in the Ptolemaic papyri, and many of them make their appearance in the first centuries of our era, thereafter gradually gaining wider currency.

794. Certain verbs such as γράφω, δοκιμάζω, ἐλπίζω, ἡγοῦμαι, λέγω, pavθάνω, olda, φημί are combined with an infinitive corresponding either to a iva- or to a örı-clause. In the latter case the most common tense of the verb of the orı- infinitive is the perfect. This double function of the infinitive led to an extension of the negative un to infinitives following verbs of “perception”, “believing”, “saying”, and “showing”, with which it almost entirely supplanted οὐ. The most frequent usages of the infinitive are classified under the following headings, with reference to the governing verbs. 795. "Iva-infinitive.! The infinitive may be used with verbs meaning "to want

or "wish", like βούλομαι, θέλω, αἱροῦμαι, ἐπιθυμῶ. The tva-construction is also

attested

after

θέλω.

79%. With verbs of “ordering”, “commanding”, or “persuading”, like γράφω,

|l. We use the term iva-infinitive to indicate the infinitive which when

resolved corresponds

to a finite mood with ὅπως (dv), ws, tva (= prospective infinitive), and ör-infinitive when it is equivalent to a finite mood introduced by ὅτι or ws(= declarative infinitive}. See 732.

429

ss 796 - 800

ica - INFINITIVE

avayxalw, diayopevw,

διαστέλλομαι,

yeAAw, (προσ-, συν-)τάσσω

etc.

ἐντέλλομαι,

The usual order

ἐπιστέλλω,

κελεύω, παραγ-

is the accusative of the ob-

ject, and the infinitive. In addition to the infinitive a iva-clause may follow, especially with γράφω, ἐντέλλομαι, ἐπιστέλλω, when they denote “command”. In this group are also included verbs like παρασκευάζω, ποιῶ, πράττω εἰς. The verbs

of commanding

are also constructed

with accusative and

the in-

finitive passive. This construction 1s to be regarded as more in accord with Latin than with Classical Greek usage. In this case the idea is that something is to be done without specifying the person who is to effect the action! 797. With verbs or "asking", "claiming", "imposing", "declaring", or “saying", like αἰτῶ, ἀξιῶ (with the preps. xara, πρός), δηλῶ διασαφῶ, λέγω, μετα-

δίδωμι, φημί εἰς. Verbs of “saying” or “reporting” are usually constructed with a örı- infinitive, but where a request, or exhortation, or command is expressed, the tva-infinitive is used. The complement of these verbs can be also

direct

speech

(this appears

more

often

in the N.T.).

In addition,

the

tra-Clause may be used as a substitute for the infinitive. 798 With verbs signifying “to request", "ask", "invite", "beg", “beseech”, “implore”, or "urge", such as αἰτοῦμαι, δέομαι, δυσωπῶ, ἐρωτῶ, καλῶ, παρακαλῶ and the like. Very often these verbs present a parataxis which is com-

mon especially in private letters, where the writing reflects a conversational style. This mode of expression brings out the attitude of the writer, while at the same time it has the tone of a prayer. This is also known to the Classical language

(cf. Xen.

Cyr.

v 1, 29), and

is common

in the N.T.

799. With verbs signifying “to wish", "pray". Here εὔχομαι occurs very frequently, either at the beginning of letters: πρὸ μὲν πάντων εὔχομαι ae ὑγιαίνειν; or at the end: ἐρρῶσθαΐ ce εὔχομαι. Apart from these stereotyped expressions, εὔχομαι Is also used with accusative and the infinitive in more literary language, while the popular speech prefers the ira-construction. 800. With verbs meaning “to allow”, "permit", and also the opposite, "to prevent”, "hinder", or “forbid”, like ἀφίημι, ἐῶ, ἐπιτρέπω, συγχωρῶ, araγορεύῳ,

(ἐπι-Ἰκωλύω

"Orr-infinitive.

The

1. Cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk,

etc. infinitive αὶ 392

corresponding

(4). 330

to a ὅτι- clause

is used:

Arc

- INFINITIVE

xt

801 - 806

801. With verbs of “perception”, “recognition”, or “knowledge”, like ἀκούω, γινώσκω,

μανθάνω,

οἶδα,

πυνθάνομαι

etc.

The

usual

construction

is

accu-

sative with the infinitive; in negative sentences un prevails. A orı-clause may also occur. The iva-infinitive can be used with yuwonw, μανθάνω. οἶδα (as in Modern Greek), but in a different meaning. 802. With verbs of "believing", “thinking”, like διαλαμβάνω. δοκῶ, ἡγοῦμαι, νομίζω, may

οἴομαι,

follow

πείθομαι,

πιστεύω, ὑπολαμβάνω with

πιστεύω,

διαλαμβάνω,

ἡγοῦμαι

ὑπολαμβάνω,

κρίνω,

wıth

καλῶς

the

ὑπονοῶ

νομίζω,

and ὑπονοῶ. Here again

(especiallv

(with the expression

δοκῶ,

expression

οἴομαι

etc. A ore-clause (οἶμαι),

πείθομαι,

the iva-infinitive is attested ἀναγκαῖον

ἡγησάμην),

κρίνω

ἔχειν ἔκρινον: Cf. καλῶς ἔχειν" ὑπέλαβον: in both

cases καλῶς ἔχειν takes the iva-infinttive), πιστεύω. 803. With verbs of "saying", “reporting”, like ayyeAAw (also compound with ἀνά, ἀπό, eis, πρός), ἀναφέρω,

suv-)ypadw, (ava-,

δια- λέγω, etc. The

ἐκ-,

ἀποκρίνομαι, ἀπολογοῦμαι, (kara-) Bow, (ὑπο-,

npoo-)óéyouat,

örı-clause

is attested

with

finitive is used with verbs implying 804. With verbs of ';showing” finitive),

διδάσκω,

ἐγκαλῶ,

(προσ-ἡ μαρτυρῶ, ὁμολογῶ, συγχωρῶ,

(ἀπο-,

usually found

ἐν-,

τι

ἐπι-,

these

mapa-,

many

κράζω,

ὑποτίθεμαι,

of the above

verbs,

(avrı-,

φημί, φράζω, The

iva-in-

a command.

or "indicating", like δηλῶ (also with tra-inὑπο-) δείκνυμι,

πποφαίνω.

The

participle

15

verbs.

805. With verbs meaning “to hope”, "expect", "promise", “swear”, "remember”, like ἐλπίζω, μιμνήσκομαι, ὀμνύω, ὁμολογῶ, ὑπισχνοῦμαι. With these verbs the future infinitive ts the most common construction. As they all refer to future action, they can also take a or«-clause with future indicative or a tra-clause with subjunctive.! The

Artreular

Infinitive

806. Without prepositions. The articular infinitive makes its appearance in the early days of the Greek Janguage. The language of Homer shows the

first steps in its development, which is completed by the Classical where

the articular infinitive is even found

1. So also

in

Modern

2. For particulars

Greek:

ἐλπίζω

see P. Burguiére,

inflected.*

và ..., ar ἐλπίζω Hir,

de Finhn.. pp.

331

ὅτι

(ws)

tow f.

Pa...

period,

$s 807 - 809

THE

ARTICULAR

INFINITIVE

807. The infinitive, once this development had brought its substantival meaning to the fore, appeared as subject or object of a sentence.! 808. Outside to be due to employment flexibility in after having Koine.

this rudimentary use, the spread of the articular infinitive seems conscious ratiocination, to the increasing tendency tewards the of abstract nouns in varied relations; and so it gained great the Attic writers, especially in Thucydides.? Through them, and enriched its functions, the articular infinitive passed into the

809. The articular infinitive analysed into a final clause introduced by the article is common in the non-literary texts of the late Byzantine period. E.g. và δεηθῇ πρὸς κύριον τοῦ va μᾶς δώσῃ νῖκος Georgillas (Legrand i 169-225), 259 I(xiii /A.D.); κραυγάξω Θεὸν τὸν παντοδύναμον τοῦ νὰ σᾶς εἰρηνεύσῃ Ihid., 304;

va

ὁρμήσουσι

τὰ πλευτικὰ

τοῦ νὰ ἔχουσι

περάσει

Chronicle

of Morea,

393;

θέλετε τοῦ νὰ γενῇ Ibid., 425: οἵ. θέλω τοῦ và σχολάσω Ibid., 1199; ἄρχισε và μάχεται Ibid., 1216, ἀπέστελνεν ... τοῦ νὰ μαθαίνῃ Ibid., 1049-50. 810. Note.

A

very

significant

feature

of the

articular

infinitive

is found

ἂν

τοῦ in

the translation of the Bible into Modern Greek of the sixteenth century, where forms like τοῦ χωρίσει, rod dayei, τοῦ κάμει, τοῦ φυλάξει, τοῦ γεννήσει, τοῦ σκοτώσει, τοῦ δουλέψει, τοῦ δώσει, τοῦ συμπαθηθῆ, τοῦ πράξει etc. indicate that the artic-

ular infinitive was still an element vived in Modern Greek.'

of

the

vernacular.?

It has

likewise

sur-

1. A picture of the various uses, with statistics, is given by Burguiere, op. cit., pp. 120 ff. 2. Gildersleeve,

"On

the Articular

3. Cf. Anagnostopoulos,

“Περὶ

τοῦ

Intinitive",

T.A.Ph.A.

ἄρθρου",

Arhena

ix (1878), pp. 5-19.

xxxiv

(1922),

p. 208; Hatzidakis,

M.N.E., 1, pp. 585 ff. ^. Cf. from the vernacular:

ἀργυρὸ

τὸ μιλήσης

xai χρυσὸ

τὸ δὲ μιλήσνης

(Proverb from

Chios); μὲ τὸ φαγεῖ καὶ μὲ τὸ mei δὲ φοροῦν γερὸ Bpaxi (Proverb! ; there is a difference however, between $ay«t and φαγητόν, also πιεῖ and ποτὸν, similar to that which we find in the German "Essen-Speise", "Trinken-Trank". The articular infinitive also survivesin the following phrases: τὸ ἔχει rov (= ἡ οὐσία) "fortune"; τὸ λέγει rov "his eloquence”: μὲ ἄγριον ἰδεῖν (= ἡγρίᾳ

ὄψει)

τὸ γλυκὺν τὸ δεῖ

aov

(= ἰδεῖν)

καὶ τὸ δεῖ παρηγοριά ναι "it is a consolation even to see Similarly

τὸ εἶναι τὸν

(= ἡ ὕπαρξις

αὐτοῦ) ; τὸ δεσμεῖν

"your

sweet face"

(you, someone,

καὶ λύειν;

τὸ

λύσει

(Cyprus);

something) ", καὶ

τὸ

δέσει:

ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος εἰς τὸ εἶναι (Itterary). So also ἡ θανή frora τὸ θανεῖν, τὸ deyyet, and τὸ φέξει, and in the plural: ra φεγγειά, τὰ δῶσα, having adopted the declension of the neuter nouns. Cf. the French "l'avoir, le boir, le diner, le manger, etc." Apart from these occasional instances, the common use of the articular infinitive 1s found under the form {μέ} ro va + subjunctive, or τὸ πῶς, τὸ ποῦ in both direct and indirect discourses. Modern

Greek

has also created

articular

new

neuter

nouns

In -ka

infinitive.

33:

which

have

the function

of the old

THE

ARTICULAK

811. The articular infinitive

INFINUTIVE

SS 811-814

exhibits a wide currency

in the language of the

papyri.! It appears, as a rule, in the genitive, which

seems to play a mani-

fold part, even as subject. In view of the evidence we obtain from the papyri we may say with certainty that the articular infinitive was widely used, and it was so too in the N.T., at least by the more literary authors (Luke, Paul, Peter).? 812. The

articular

infinitive

is epsecially characteristic

of the official style

of the papyri, but is by no means lacking in writings of popular character. $13. Nominative of the articular infinitive. With ἐστίν or γίνεται the articular infinitive serves as the subject, and is, as a rule, explanatory. E.g. τὸ μὲν οὖν | μὴ ἄριστον

δέ

εὐκαιρεῖν

ἔστιν

TO

σοι

...

| οὐχ ἡμέτερον

|...

|...

1...

farm

PSF.

πέμπειν

374, 6-B

B.G.U.

(250-249

rome

(tt),

RC):

18-21

tii}

B.C.); καλῶς δὲ γέγονεν τὸ ταχὺ | αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν P.Oxy. 743, 41-2 (2 B.C.) : ὅπερ ἐμοὶ δι᾽ εὐχῆς ἐστιν τὸ σὲν . ἐρρῶσθαι P.Mil. R.Univ. 24, 4-5 (A.D. 117): πολλὰ δέ | pe ἤπειξε πρὸς τοὺς “ἐμοὺς γενέσθαι, πρῶτον μὲν τὸ δι᾽ «man τ[α]ῦ αὐτοὺς θεάπασθαι, εἶ τα τὴ βούλεσθαι mpó | χειμῶνος κατηπλῖ par τὴν Alyurror P.Oxy. 1681,

12-19

[ii

'A.D.);

ro...

|...

αἰκείαν

ὑπομένειν

P.Oxy. 1186, 2-5 (Iv/A.D.); ὑμέτερον οὖν ... ἔστιν 4 (v or vi/a.D.)i χρεία ἐστὶν ro φιλοκαληθῆναι αὐτό A.D.)

20,

i

also

without

18-20

814. The

the

article:

εὐχὴ

αὐτῶν

ἐστὶν

...

|...

diiepun

τὸ napnıwena Pland. P.Oxy. 1846, 3 (vi or

ἐστι

onlrar

πηρασχεῖν

16, vii]

P.Michuel.

liv/a.D.?).

accusative

of the articular

infinitive.

After

verbs

which

regularly

govern the plain infinitive one sometimes finds an articular infinitive in the accusative.

The

use of the article emphasizes

the substantival

function

of

the infinitive, in addition to making clear the relationship between the governing verb and the infinitive by indicating the immediate dependence of the latter on the former. The accusative of the articular infinitive occurs rarely in the Ptolemaic papyri, but quite often in the post-Ptolemaic, and is hardly used in the N.T. outside Paul.” E.g. neider|a]}

| τὸ παραχρῆμα

διαστολὰς

δεδώκειν

κνήσης πεμιττὸν

1. For

: τὸ

βαδίσαι

τὸ un «AB[iv. P.Heid. ἡγαῦμαι

P.Berl.

eis

Taxova

iv 51, 6

Möller

P.Tehr.

10, 3-5

768,

P.Oxy.

16-17 743,

Moulton-Turner,

140.

333

28-9

τὸ

γράφειν

| - SB

7347.

30-2)

καὶ 398; Votaw, op. cit., pp. 10 ff. p.

(116

fil/A.D.J;

use of the articular infinitive in the Ptolemaic papyri

2. Cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk. 3. Cf.

συνσχεθῆναι

B.C. 2); ἐγὼ (2

om

αὐτῷ

B.C.):;

μὴ

..

MEE

In /A.D.);.

am-

similarly

see Mayser, n!, pp. 321-24.

$& 814 - 819

IHE ARTICULAR

P.Oxv. 235,

24

1070,

3-4

12-16

(I /A.D.];

(iii ’Aa.D.): also

A.D).

ra

Anaare

tod

[=

[sce

A)

Bent

τὸ

πρόνοια

ἡἠνάνκασει

368

[1);

ἀναγκαῖον

εὐφημότερυν

lii /A.D.) ; €mrava τέθεικεν

A.D.) ; ἡ μὲν

but

INFINITIVE,

yap

ἡγησάμην

ἡγησάμην

perereyκαι τὸν wapefer

τὴ

ἐμὲ

705-706)

ro

τὸ

σοι

1428,

πέμψαι

νράψαι

PS.

amo λαβεῖν

P.SJ.

παραυτὰ

aormacaodur

μή

|xjopror

...

ἀνελθεῖν

τὸ

286,

P.Oxy. 7

ce

P. Rl,

PSS.

13335,

7-8

liii-iv:

1682,

6-8

liv.

(VI /A.D.3 ; μὴ

ode

ape-

P,Princ.

170,

4

lvi /A.n.].

815. The genitive of the articular infinitive. This case appears in a wide range

of usages in both official documents and private letters. We observe that many variations occur, and that the same meaning can be indicated by different

816.

forms.

A completely new function of rou+infinitive (instead of ro + infinitive.

or the plain infinitive) is to be found

in cases where this has been adopted

in the place of the subject of an impersonal verb or expression. [n the development of this construction τοῦ began as a reinforcing particle, and gradually assumed the character finitival expression.

of an element closely associated

with

the

in-

817. The most widespread use of the articular infinitive in the genitive is as an expression of purpose, derived from its epexegetical and consecutive sense. This sense can be also denoted by various constructions, and in particular the prepositional infinitive is highly effective for this function. E.g. 818. After impersonal verbs or expressions: éfeipyaata:

veg@at

σαι

[ant

POxr.

1333,

12-1353

4-5

detrar

πρ]͵]οσῆκεν

βῆναι

1870,

(1)

τοῦ

86,

7

P,Tebt.

P.Heid.

(A.D.

(Iit /A.D.};

776,

i1 39

418); [δέ ]ov

22-3

[3},

learly

11-12

but

of ἔθος

"B co»

ἔστιν

i/8.C.];

lil /A.D.];

ἔχοντες τοῦ

ge

τοῦ

ἔθος

μὴ

ἐστὶν

ἐπίι

τοῦ

wo mrew

καὶ

...

ἰἐπ͵αινεῖν

l...

)λανθά-

παρασχε-

πωλεῖν

P.S.I. P.Oxy.

(v/A.D.].

Notice the curtous use of τοῦ tn ἀναγκαῖον ἡγησάμην τοῦ προσαγορεῦσέ P.S.4.

826,

2 (1v-v/A.n.)

corresponding

to ἀναγκαῖον

οὖν

ἡγησάμην

παρα-

καλέσαι 2 Cor. 9:5, and ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι τὸ μὴ παραλιπεῖν und ἐᾶσαι Polyb. 1 14, 4. rouapparently

ἡμᾶς

σοι ἁπαντᾶ(ν)

stands

P.Jews

for τό.

Likewise

1927, 53-4 (mid.

εἰ θέλημα

Θ](εο)ῦ ἐστιν τοῦ

iv/a.D.).

819. After substantives or verbal expressions: In the Classical language the articular infinitive in the genitive follows a noun which governs this case, and is equivalent to a ἕνα or ὥστε Clause. Generally, it does so in the papyri. except that it may correspond to a óre-clause. The latter case, representing an epexegetical function of the infinitive, is exclusive to the papyri, while 334

THE

in

the

N.T.

the

choice

ts

αἴτιον τοῦ μὴ γενέσθαι... χρείαν

ἔχων

[τοῦ]

(|...

ARTICULAR

INFINITIVE

limited

a

to

[ἀπόδοσιν]

] Ed.)

ἵνα

ss B19 - 821

or

wore-construction.

(= ὅτι -clause)

γράψαι

πρὸς

σέ

P.Hib. 73, 18

P. Petrie ii 2

(4). 5

E.g.

(243 n.C.;:

(c. 260

B.C.);

with Witk. 12: [σοι] suggested by Smyly, opposed, however, to the following πρὸς 0€; Cf. χρείαν ἔχετε τοῦ didaoxev Heb. 5:12, but χρεία ἐστὶν τὸ φιλοκαληϑῆναι

αὐτό P.Oxy. 1846, 3 (vi or vii/A.D.}, or without the article: διὰ τὸ χρέαν ἔχειν ... | συνθεῖναι P.Lille 15, 2-3 (242-241 B.C.); cf. οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γραῴφειν ὑμῖν 1 Thess. 4:9. The constructions of χρείαν ἔχειν in N.T.

vary between

the genitive

of the noun, the plain infinitive, and the final clause {see Bauer’s Lexicon s.v.}. It is obvious that the genitive of the articular infinitive is treated in the same

way

as the genitive of the noun.

τὴν πᾶσαν

σπουδὴν

πόησαι

| ro |ü ἀφεθῆναι

P. Petrie ii 13 (19), 8 (¢. 255 B.c.]; so also with σπεύδω (see 825}: φώβωι rod δώσειν εὐθύνας (= ὅτι- (Ια 56) PJews 1912, 64 (A.D. 41); [τὴν] δὲ ἀπόδιξιν ᾿

τοῦ εἶν[ αἱ (= örı-clause) ι5.}. 454, 16-17 (A.D. 320): οἱ τοῦ χειροτονεῖν κύριοι P.Oxy. 888, 2 (A.D. 287); cf. τοῦ ἐνεγκεῖν ταῦτα κύριος ὑπῆρχε Polyb. xxix 9, 9; [ae oul σι} realyle τὴν εὐοδέαν τοῦ ἐλθεῖν P.Mich. 203, 19 (A.D. 98-1171: οὕπω εὕρηκα | [ε]ὐκαιρεί[αἷν τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Jbid., 9-10; τῆι ἐλπίδι τοῦ ταχειόν σε ἐπανήfew

P.Gron.

by Thuc.

18, 7-8

i

[iii-iv/A.D.).

This

construction

after

ἐλπίς

is already

144 és ἐλπίδα τοῦ περιέσεσθαι, Cf. also τῆς τε τοῦ νικᾶν

ἐλπίδος

ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι

149, 10; ἐλπίδος τοῦ διαγωνίζεσθαι ἰδίά., ii 35, B. So also in the N.T.: τοῦ μετέχειν I Cor.

used Polyb.

9: It; πᾶσα ἐλπὶς τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς Acts 27:20, but ἐλπίδα

δε

ἔχοντες... μεγαλυνθῆναι 2 Cor. 10: 15, and even with ör-clause foll.: ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι ὅτι καὶ αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται Rom. 8: 21. With tva-clause foll.: ἐλπείδα àé

ἔχομεν

P.Amh. 405,

| εἰς

144,

19-20

χλῆπαι

τὸν

B(eo]v

19-21 (A.D.

ἡμῖν

[v/A.D.}: 3481;

P.Oxy.

820. The articular

ἵνα

(ra

| πρόνοιαν

ἐξεδόμην μὴ

2415,

αὐτὸς Kal

014-15

τὴν

ἡμῶν

ἀσφάλιαν

aurl|os]

ποίσει

| τοῦ

| προῴφασιι'

μὴ

ayn

{ποιζήΣσει ἔχειν

Tob

Edd.)

μέρος

πίτεῖν

BGU.

καὶ

Ta perd-

(vi-vi/a.D.).

infinitive in the genitive is used

particularly

with

expres-

yap

erifm

sions indicating time, e.g. ἠἡμέρε

εἰσὶν τοῦ

βαλεῖν

P.Princ.

73, 6

(ii ja.D.}:

xepos

ἐστιν

τοῦ

P far.

11.7 dal or Iv/A.D.): 9 «nipos rolul etgac@(ale P.Jews 1928, 3 (mid. 1v ’A.D.]; «nipos €aTw τοῦ παρασκευάσαι P Harris 112, ἡ (víA.D.); ὅτε καιρὸς γένηται rue

δοβῆναι

P.Oxy.

Eccles.

3:8:

article:

ἦλθεν

2410,

from ᾿ς,

ζω λοιπῆν

καιμὸν

τις

ὡς

wnipog

3

the N.T.: awaıpos

εἶναι

ἐπὶ

[vi-vit/A.D.); 6 καιρὸς

τῶν

νεκρῶν

ἀποστεῖλαί

ÀAoyor

ἀχθῆναι

σε

also τοῦ PSI

Polyb.

ἐδεῖν

nee σε

yorro P.Col.

Tau Zen.

aule h,

| x ope T 4

1257

P.Oxvy. B.C;

445

the

ἄρξασθαι

κριθῆναι

821. With verbs of bearing, hindering, Att, oxvéw, karamapvo. E.g. nex

from

ı Per.

«ai

226,

Hr,

δοῦναι

3-41

2:

17

Rev,

τοῦ Φιλῆσαι

but without 11:

1.

{ἐν /A.D.Y: cl.

and

also

the

voyer-

ἐγένετο

".

preventing.

1877.

O.T.: καιρὸς

7

«aenrreg

le. τοῦ

etc., thus

ALB. un

881:

areyopgat,

ex iÀvaee

OTéipenr

P Gen.

κω»-

TOU

μὴ

ih,

4

s&

821-828

THRE

(A.D,

207);

μὴ

oxvnoys

ARTICU

τοῦ

ets

LAR

INEINITIVE

οἶκον

amoorei

λαι

P.Tebt.

752,

2-4

{early

iij

B.C.), but μὴ ὀκνήσις ' οὖν προσελθῖν P.Oxy. 1769, 7-8 {ili /A.D.); ᾿ἐνκόμματα ποιεῖ τοῦ μὴ συντελεῖσθαι ra épya’ P.S.f, 500, 7 (257-256 B.c.); also {παρέχει περισσὸν τοῦ ἀντιλέγειν) Ibid., 7. Similarly in the N.T.: μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ἄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς Acts 14: 18.

822. With θέλω: The verb θέλω is usually constructed with the plain infinitive, or tva-clause; τοῦ

σοῦ

γνῶναί

προσκυνῆσαι i common βούλονται

rod followed σε

θέλων

by the infinitive seems

P.Fay.

123,

5-6

(c.

A.D.

100);

pleonastic, e.g. cf.

also

μὴ

θέλων

τοῦ

Romanos If] L 303 (vi/A.D.].! Θέλω with τοῦ and infinitive foll. in the folk literature of the Byzantine period : so also βούλομαι:

ἐμὲ

τοῦ

θανατῶσαι

Dig.

823. With verbs signifying to “be

Akr.,

212

(x/A.D.).

able”, “arrange”

and the like, thus ἔχω,

ἐκποιῶ, εὐπορῶ etc. (εὐπορεῖν would normally take a genitive noun, this fact facilitates its construction with τοῦ and infinitive). E.g.

and

t^ ἔχι τοῦ ; π[ωλ]εῖν B.G.U. 830, 19-20 {1..0.}; σῆαι P.S.I. 968, 14-15 {i/a.D.) πᾶν ποίησυν τοῦ

ἐὰν δὲ | μὴ ἐκποιήση τοῦ ἔρχεσὲ ἀπε νέγκε B.G.U, 625, 28-9

(beg.

P.Flor.

of ii1/A.D.);

iv' εὐπορῆς

τοῦ γραί φειν)])

μοι

367,

B-9

(iii A. D.I.

824. With verbs signifying to “hasten”, “try”, "seek", "help", "persuade" and the like; often very little of the final sense is left with these verbs, while

LE

the consecutive meaning becomes 825. tive

E.g.

With σπεύδω and expressions of σπεύδει! (notice that σπονδή with geniis Classical]: σνσπεύδειν ἡμῖν τοῦ μὴ ' ἀναιχθῆναι PS.J 340, 15-16. (257-256

B.C.);

σπουδὴν

aac το]

P.Phil. ie, A.D. the

obvious.

ποιήσασθαι

ἀφεθῆνηί

45,

27-8

346):

article

...

ae P.Pertrie

(end

cf. also

: τοῦ 1 13

λαβεῖν 0191, B

of it 'a.D.]: ἔσπευσα

παρακαλέσαι

ας

τοῦ

τυῦ μὴ

ἔσπευπα

[ὦ

Jbid.,

10-20;

253

B.C.):

προσειπεῖν

σαι

συγχωρηθβῆνπι P.Lond.

232,

τὴν

ἔσπευσα

Polyb. 11

πᾶσαν

σπουδὴν

σπεύσαντες

(iv

3234,

τοῦ

πόη-

αν |eAPir

P.Lond.

409,

1, but

without

3

A.D. I.

826. With ζητῶ; ζητῷ [+ lot ἐλευ P. Mich. 203, 17 lA.D. 98-117); also with the plain infinitive or tva-clause foll. in the N.T. cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk, $ 392 ft)

a.

827. 23, B28.

[205,

I.

With 7

(257; With

3-4

Maas-Trypanıs,

συνεπιβηπλλυμπιεὶ

συνεπιβαλήμενης

τοῦ

ἐντυχεῖν

αὐτῶν

P. Mich.

Zen

B.C. !. μιμοῦμαι;

[Nor

DI

Sarert

οὐκ

πὲ

ἐμιμησήμην

Tu) — üm&oam»ür

A Di.

Romam!

Melodi

Cantica,

430

Oxford.

146%.

τὴν

υἱῶν

pou

P.Oxr.

THE

ARTICULAR

INFINITIVE

δὰ 829 - 837

829. With [xarlafıw: ὅπως καταξιώσῃ με rov. εὐὑρεῖ[ν᾽ P.Jews 1927, 7 (mid. iv/A.D.); nfiwoas | ue τότε τοῦ συγχωρῆ᾽ σαί ue σοι P.Princ. 9B, 11-13 (iv/A.D.). 830.

With

προσδοκῶ:

προσδόκα

τοῦ

κάμε

831.

With

ἐνθυμοῦμαι; μηδ᾽ ἐντεθυμῆσθαι

With

πείθω: πεῖσαι

ἐξελθεῖν τοῦ

P.Mich.

παραγενέσθαι

215,

22

P.Lond.

(ii /A.D.). 42,

20

(168

B.C.) : cl.

μὴ

ave-

B.C.). 832.

πειθε

αὐτὸν

τοῦ | ἐκτός

τοῦ

γράψαι

μον

P.S.I.

εἶναι

et

833.

With

(158

s.c.).

mpocddopat:

340,

P.Oxy.

προσδεομένου

18

1295,

(257-256

10-11

(it

or ui/aA.D.};

πεῖσαι,

trac

! δέ μου

τοῦ

περιποιῆσαι

P.Lond,

23,

11-12

834. With verbs of motion. This is rather rare in the papyri, where the plain or prepositional infinitive is preferred. On the other hand, this construction is common in Hellenistic writings and in the N.T. Greek. E.g. ἀποσχιοϊθῆναι

ἀπὸ

Ἡρακλείδου | τοῦ ἀναβῆναι

B.C.?); cf. ἠξουσι λαοὶ πολλοὶ... 28; τότε παραγίνεται 6 'Inooös ...

P.Tebt.

yor ἦλθεν τοῦ μὴ μόνον ἐκπεσεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις

835. With

verbs signifying "care"

ἀλλὰ πᾶν ἐ[ μοὶ €or jac πεῴρον 13-14 (c. 255

or "neglect".

Cf.

τοῦτο

«lyo[v]

where

με ἀμελεῖν με τοῦ γράφειν

κατὰ

the

κινδυνεῦσαι

τισμένον τοῦ σὲ γενέσθαι ἄλυπον

B.C.] ; μὴ δόξης

17-19 (i-ti/A.D.) τοῦτο.

15-17

(197 or

173

ψυϊχὴν

genitive

τοῦ

of

ποιῆσε

the

Polyb. it 55, 4.

E.g.

(i/A.D.); τοῦ ὑγιαίνειν ἐπιμέλου P.Columb. 493, U τοῦ βαλεῖν P.Oxy. 934, 9 (1li /A.D.); μὴ | ἀμελήσης 1-124 (late iit /A.D.) ; μὴ οὖν αἰμελήσεις τοῦ τοῦτο (v/A.D.); μέλει [[ἡ]μῖν τοῦ γνῶναι P.Grenf. ii 92, sionally μὴ ἀμελήσης is completed by μὴ apa ποτὲ tive.!

753,

ἐκζητῆσαι... καὶ τοῦ ἐξιλάσκεσθαι Zech. 8: τοῦ βαπτισθῆναι Matt, 3: 13; likewise wap’ aÀc-

P.Petrie ii 13

σοι B.G.U. 665

(in),

(19), 11-13

(A.D. 49); μὴ οὖν dpeAtons τοῦ ἐνοχλῆσαι P.Oxy. 1159, | ποιῆσαι P,Amh. 144, 14-16 3-4 (vi or vii/A.D.). Occaθέλης followed by the infini[τ]ὴν

διαϑήϊκην

infinitive stands

P.Athen.

in apposition

62,

to

836. The dative of the articular infinitive. The use of the articular infinitive in the dative is much rarer than in the other cases. The dative article with infinitive seems to be pleonastic, It shows occasionally an influence from Latin. The prepositional infinitive (διὰ 76+infinitive mostly) is more common in the same sense, 1.6. to express the reason or the cause of an action. 837. The dative article with infinitive serves sometimes as an explanation of the preceding statement. This construction is confined to such examples as: l1. See examples

quoted

by Ljungvik,

Beitr., p. 9o.

337 B. G.

Mandilaras,

The

Verb

in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

22

ix 837 - 839

THE

ἰτ͵]ῶι

22,

δὲ

un

14-15

ἡμᾶς

1163

ἀύνασθαι

κτὰ,

25... 7-10

αὐτῶι

173};

1411,

401,

ὡς

5-6

πρακτῆρρι

ὁμιοδίκτην

᾿υἰφύγχιν

τ͵] ὦ ἐμὲ

ὑπὸ

B.C] ; κατεγνωκὼς P Lond.

Te pudews [διὰ

σὺν

22-4

Qumodilopalc],

(A.D,

POxv.

εἶναι

ARTICULAK

αὐτῶν

τῆς

ἀθυμίας

γυναῖκας

116-111

μετήλλαηαχεν

ἡμᾶς

B.C.]):

εἶναι

ἐπειδὴ

αποκλεισᾶν

260);

ὑπεμ'

των

o6 δεπώποτε

τῆς γῆς ταύτης,

μὴ

ἐκδεδωκέ

vac

ἡμῖν

δι΄ ἐμὲ

αὐτοῦ

δύναστε

P.Oxy.. τῷ

wai...)

εὐχερῶς

PSF.

1104,

προσὶί σ)ίεσθαι trois

| ἡμετέρας

17-21 τὴν

μὴ

παρεσχέβη

τὸν τῆς με

P. Par.

ἐξομολογήσασθαι

βούλεσθαι

2235,

adyiv

βιὸν

ἀδελφ[α͵]ν

πυντελίας

τῷ unÀecara

χεῖραν

μὴ

τῷ

yalp]

τῶν

καὶ

τῷ μὴ ἔχειν μὲ συνεξελεύθερην

ταύτας

[A.D.

τῶι Ic.

INFINITIVE

(c.

A.D.

δεξιάν SB

τῆς

κώμης 346);

5273,

19

(A.D. 487].

838. With kirövros, κινδυνεύω the infinitive is equivalent to the dative of relation. In both examples quoted below the complement is {nv used apparently

for the substantive

just

usual

the

treatment

ζωή

(Bios).

of κινδυνεύειν

In this with

case

the

construction

is

the dative.!

δέδωκα (for δέδωκε) αὐτῆι πληγὰς πλήους εἰς τὸ (€&) τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματος καὶ κινδύνωι τῶι ζῆν P.Tebr. 283, 12-15 [93 or 60 n.c.)i καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν pov Ovrwdpis ovAußor res tpavpatiacay [NC]. ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐκ τούτου τῷ ξὴν κινδυveu εἰν P.Teht. 304, 10-14 (A.D. 167-168); cf, also καὶ κινδυ[ νεύει} μὲ τῷ βίωι P.Heid.

217,

22-3

{i/B.c.).

(1) The articular infinitive tn the dative is found only once in the O.T. eAaAnca ἐγὼ ev καρδίᾳ μον τῷ λέγειν Eccles. 1: 16. Aalto, p. 57. prefers ἐν rw λέγειν. It is also found once in the N.T.: οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου, Tw μὴ εὑρεῖν 2 Cor. 2:13. The mss. Ὁ and E have ἐν τῷ μή. which is correct according to Blass-Debr.-Funk, $ 401, but M* C* have τοῦ un. Most probably we are to accept the latter reading, which is evidently confirmed by the papyrus text. Cf. θέλων ἀποῦδναι (-ovar Ed.) ras ἑκατὸν δραχμὰς οὐχ εὗρέ σε, τοῦ δέ σε μὴι

εὖ ρεθῆναι

ἀποδέδωκε

αὐτὰς

ἄνω Üov B.G.U. 595, 4-7

(c. A.D. 70-80). 839. The articular infinitive with prepositions and adverbs. In papyri the prepositional infinitive is very frequent; it has gained considerable ground in comparison

with

Attic

usage

simply

because

the earlier

final

and

causal

constructions had suffered a loss of expressive force, so the prepositions which expressed the same or a similar notion when governing a noun extended their function to constructions with the infinitive. There was, in fact, a popular tendency towards forceful expression which was obtained by the excessive use of prepositions. The following example gives us a clear idea

I. Mayser,

ii, p. 323. classes

this

special

usage

338

under

the

heading

“instrumental”.

THE

ARTICULAR

INFINITIVE

δὴ

839 - 840

of a superfluous use of the prepositional infinitive in the place of a final clause: ἐμὲ de... ἔχειν tolirjoy γνήσιον vior πρὸς τὸ μένει αὐτῷ τὰ dro Tljs

διαδοχῆς

τῆς κληρονομίας

P.Oxy.

1206, 8-9 (A.n. 335).

840. In the following list we have included all the prepositions and adverbs which appear constructed with the articular infinitive, in Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Hellenistic writers, papyri, and N.T.! Note:

+

= attested;

Preps.

and

—

:= not attested.

advs.

Hdt.

Thuc.

Xen.

Hell.

Pap.

N.T.

ἅμα

+

dat.

—

—

+

+.

+

—

dvev

+

gen.

--

—

+

+

+

—

ἀντί +

gen.

+

+

+

4.

+

_

ἀπό

+

gen.

-

+

+

|

—

=

anvorarw

+

gen.

_

_

—

+

--

—

ἄχρι

+

gen.

—

—

4

4

um

—

διά

+

gen.

--

—

L

+

ΝΗ

_

διά

+

acc.

--

+

4

+

+

_

diya

+

gen.

--

-

—

+

—

=

ἐγγύς + gen.

—

+

+

+

--

-

+

+

+

+

+

2E

eis +

acc.

ἐκ +

gen.

-

4

+

+

+

+

+

gen.

--

--

--

+

-

—

ἐν +

dat.

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

gen.

-

-

+

+

+

+

ἔξω +

gen.

-

+

—

+

-

—

ἐπί + dat.

-

+

+

+

+

-

+

+

+

-

—

ἔμπροσθεν

ἕνεκα

no

ἐπί +

acc,

ἐπίπροσθεν

+

gen.

—

_

_

+

_

ΝΗ

ἕως

+

gen.

—

—

—

4

4

n

I. The

have

figures of the

been

obtained

prepositional

through

infinitive

Krapp's

Der

in

Hdt.,

Thuc.,

Xen.,

and

the

later writers

substantivierte Infinitiv, while the N.T. occur-

rences have been taken from Blass-Debr.-Funk, $8 402-4.

339

38 840 - 841

THE

Preps. and advs.

ARTICULAR

INFINITIVE

Hdt.

Thuc.

Xen.

Hell.

Pap.

N.T.

xara

+

acc,

—

4

—

4.

—

—

pera

+

gen.

—

+

—

+

+

--

wera

-d-

acc.

+

-

-

+

+

+

+

gen.

-

-

+

—

—

—

pexp +

gen.

—

+

+

4

+

--

ὑμοῦ

+

dat.

-

-

-

4-

--

—

rapa

+

acc.

—

l

—

4-

+

+

περί -+ gen.

+

+

+

+

+

-

μεταξύ

περι

+

acc.

_

-

+

+

--

—

πλὴν

+

gen.

—

—

_

+

+

-

πήρρῳ

+

gen.

—

—

_

4-

--

--

πρὸ

|

gen.

—

+

i.

4

+

+

moos

+

dat.

--

--

+

+

4

_

πρός

+

acc.

-

+

+

+

+

+

ὑπέρ

+

gen.

-

—

4-

4

+

—

χάριν

+

gen.

--

—

—

+

+

—

xwpis

+

gen.

—

—

—

+

+

—

841. It is evident that a great number of uses of the prepositional infinitive had been adopted by Xenophon, who found this tendency already present in Thucydides. The Hellenistic writers formulated still more constructions, most of which also appear in the papyri.! In particular, eis τό with the infin-

itive has gained a great flexibility in the papyri, and presents a wider usage than is shown in the N.T. This construction has been considered by N.T. Scholars, as a unique idiosyncrasy due to Semitic influence,but this assumption must be rejected, as the papyri also show this usage. Nevertheless, ἐν τῷ with the infinitive seems to have suffered from Semitic influence as both its

1.

The articular infinitive with or without

of Byzantine

guage,

times.

Its formation

but its usage

follows

betrays

the patterns

a preposition the stage

is still preserved

in

of the development

of the papyri,

This

writings

of the lan-

is illustrated

by

the

follawing exampies taken from the Chronicle of Morea: χαρὰν μεγάλην ἔλαβε τὸ ἀκούσει τὸ uavrdro | + apa τῷ ἀκαῦσαι) 349: διὰ τὸ Aror ἔμπα τοῦ καιροῦ |: da τὸ εἶναι) 582; τὸ ἰδεῖ ὅτι ἐτύφλωσεν

ὡς

εἶδεν P].

4154-5;

ἐκεῖνος

διὰ

τὸ

τὸν

πατήρ

ἀπέθαναν

Tov,

(-= διὰ

340

εὐθέως

τὸ

ἐμίσσεῴε

θανεῖν : ài

am

ἐκεῖ[

οὗ ἀποθάναν

dpa

P).

τῷ

1161.

ἰδεῖν:

THE

AKRTICULAR

INFINITIVE

δὰ 841 - 845

treatment and its meaning differ from that of Classical Greek and papyri! 842. The phrase διά παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν Heb. 2:15, represented as attesting the construction

of Sa

with

τοῦ 4 infinitive,?

has

not

been

listed

in

the

above

statistics, as διά refers to παντός, [n other words, this phrase means διὰ παντὸς (SC. ypovov) τοῦ Cav (= τοῦ βίου) = during the whole time of their life (literally), throughout

This adverbial papyri.

life. Cf. Modern

Greek διὰ βίου in the same meaning.

expression διὰ παντός Is widespread in the language of the

Cf. B.G.U.

87,

17-18 (il/a.0.); 27, 3 (ii or iii/A.D.); P.Leid.

(a.p. 423-450); P.Cairo Masp. 67097,

28

Likewise ὑπὸ τοῦ παντὸς αἰῶνος P.Jews

843. The are:

predominant

meanings

and

relationship

16

(vi/a.p.); 67118, 32 (vi/4.n.); etc. 1912, 51 (A.D. 41).

expressed

by

the prepositional

cause (διά, ἐκ, Ev, ἕνεκα, ἐπί, παρά, ὑπέρ, χάριν), purpose

πρὸς, ὑπέρ)

Z,

of time (ἅμα,

infinitive

(ets, ἐπί, περί,

ἕως, μετά, μέχρι, po).

844. In some instances the subjunctive is found instead of the infinitive following a preposition and the article. This usage may be explained by the particular

treatment

of certain

prepositions.

For

example

πρό

by analogy

of

πρὶν rj was extended into πρὸ τοῦ ἢ with the infinitive. In the form of πρὸ τοῦ it is found constructed occasionally with the subjunctive. In this construction

πρὸ τοῦ is regarded as a conjunction, as in Modern This opened

δι». μέχρι

the

way

: μέχρι

to

τοῦ

ἀποδοθῆι

τὼ (—70) μὴ ἐρημωθὴῆ 845. Prepositions

are

kindred

found

(see

constructions

with

P.Grenf. 1 35,

2 (99 B.C.);

(ἐρημωθῆεναι» also

Greek

Edd.) P.Oxy.

in combination

other

598

(1)).

prepositions,

πρός : πρὸς

2268, 5 (late v/a.n.). with

the

indicative.

E.g.

rplols τὸ ... ἀποπληρώσω (subjunctive?) xot ... ὁμολογεῖν P. Rein. 113, 24-7 (A.D, 263); διὰ τὸ καὶ ἐνταῦθα εὑρέθη mwaArjoas! καμήλια κλεψιμέα P.Gen. η0-: P.Lond. 422, 14-15 (mid. 1iv/A.D.). Anırregular case is the apparent use of a prepositional

optative.

E.g. πρὸς

TO

μηθεὶς

τῶν

ἐκτὸς

ὀχλήσιεν

αὐτῷ

P.Oxy. 2194, 10 (v-vi/A.D.). Such a use is rather difficult to justify syntactically, while the acceptance of a transposition of the letters « and « gives ὀχλήσειν

for

oxAnoaı

(?)

(see

622

(3)).

I. Moulton-Turner, pp. 8 f.. are inclined 10 give Semitism it really had with regard to this construction.

2. Blass-Dehr.-Funk,

καὶ 403.

3-4!

much

greater

significance than

$$

846 - 849

(3)

THR

INFINTTIVE

WITH

PREPOSITIONS

846. “Apa with Julive "at the same time", "together with", “as soon as”, “when”; equivalent to a participle expressing time or condition. It is also very frequently used by Hellenistic writers (115 times by Polybius: see Allen, p. 33). The aorist predominates. E.g. dpa

τῷ

σε AaBiv

ra ἐπιστολιν

apa

τῷ

δεθῆναι

apa

τῷ

καταβῆναι

σε

ταῦτα

Gi γεῖν

pou

ὑπὸ ᾿Ισιδώρου ! Ὡρίωνα

τὰ γράμματα

ἀποπίπτει

τὰ

πτερά

συνελθεῖν ...

...

“Ὥρωι ἔφυγεν

συνέβαλον)

PS.

| γενοῦ

πρὸς

ἐμὲ

P.G.M.

1 IV,

P.Tebt. P.Oxy.

93,

3-4

P.Tebt.

803-4

34,

2190,

3-4 42-3

(11/A.D.):

421,

2-4

Tec.

100

(late ἅμα

B.C.);

i/a.D.);

τῷ

(11:/A.D.];

Aafßeir

dpa

τῷ

(tv/A.D.).

847. “Avev with genitive “apart from”, “without”. There are only two examples quoted from the papyri of Ptolemaic times, i.e. avev τοῦ δοῦναι P.Tebt.27, 73 (113 B.C.); ἄνευ τοῦ ἐπιγραφῆναι P.Gen. 21, 7 (ii/n.c.). Polybius uses it Once: ἄνευ τοῦ παραβῆναι xxii 13, 8, while such a construction is not attested in the

N.T.

848. ᾿Αντί with genitive "instead of". A solitary example of ἀντί with the anarthrous infinitive! is quoted by Ljungvik, Beitr., p. 3 (= SB 6944, 5) avr Eerr[i] δεέστερ[ ov | ἀναβῆναι τὸν Νεῖλον (Edict of Hadrian, a.n. 136). Contrary to this reading, however, a copy of the same edict appearing in P.Os/. 78 reads

καὶ

P.Tebt. 849.

viv

ἐνδεέστίερον.

With

the

article:

ἀντὶ τοῦ

τοῦτο

ποιῆσί|α]ι

27, 102-3 (113 n.c.).

Ara with

accusative

"for", “because

of”,

“on

account

of”; equivalent

tO πρὸς τό, evexa τοῦ + inlinitive, and Classical are j- participle. Negative un. In general it is used to denote the cause of an action; it is very common in certain types of documents such as "agreements", “leases”, "declarations", "petitions", etc. (1) With the anarthrous infinitive: "arg στρατιώτῃ (öpaxpas) e B.G.U.

P.Princ. 102, 8 (iv /A.D.) |r|o?; A.P.F. xii (1937). yous (2)

wou With

P.Hib. (3

... τὰ

«οὔ,

The

γενέσθαι

1165,

+ infin. foll.:

χρείαν}

7-9

8.c.);

expression

ed. pr.) "Apwμὴ δυνασθέ μαι

(cf. Wilcken: Ich bezweifle auch das | à |a in 8 Geht p. 233, fn. 515; ταῦτα δέ por εἴρηται | διὰ τοὺς yewp-

P.Oxy.

(203-262

διὰ Dee) were ἰὀιαδέδω were 535, 13-14 111 ’A.D.]; [dela

ἔγραψε.

ὑπὲρ

4-5. yap

etc.

See

αὐτοῦ

[vl / A. D.]. ἔχω

&áa

Mayser, ...

dia

τὸ

retrop

ἐπιδεδημηκέναι

ii?, p. 330. τὸ

μὴ

εἰδέναι

αὐτὸν

γράμματα

Is stereotyped: see P.Grenf. ii 17, 8- (136 B.c.); P.Amh. 37, 05 (ii B.c.); PS. 902, 17-18 (1 /A.D.); 905, t6 (A.D. 26-27): 911,0; 17 (A.D. 56}: etc. dea τὸ ἐπηρεῖ-

I. Cf. Similar construction

in Hát.

ı 120: vi 32, and perhaps

344

vii 170,

THE σθαι

; οὐκ ηδυνήθην

...

κατεὰλ

διὰ τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις

xat]

βίαιος

148}; [A.D.

διὰ

τὸ

INFINITIVE WITH θεῖν

P.Fay.

PREPOSITIONS

123, 7-9

(€. A.D.

| ἐστάσθαι P.Oxy. 2351, 601-3

δοκεῖν

αὐτὸν

| ἀρχοντικὸν

»$ 849 (3) - 850 (1)

t00|;

ἐκπράσσειν

αὐτοὺς

αὐθάδης

τῷ ἔθ] εἰ

(A.D. 112];

εἶναι

P.S.J.

1323,

6-7

(A.D.

᾿

147-

of δὲ | τοιοῦτοι ἀφείθησαν διὰ τὸ γρησίμ[ου)ς εἶναι P.Oxy. 2340, 8-10 192); ἀξιῶ διὰ τὸ ἅπορ[]ν με εἶναι P.S.I. 1245, 29 (A.D. 2077); xai τῆς |

παραδόσεως

γράμματα

μάτων

P.Oxy.

287];

ἠναγκάσθην

3-4

(v/A.D.);

ἐμὲ

ταύτην

1260,

ἐποίἰ

τὸ

285);

...

διὰ

ἀποστῆναι

ἀποδοῦ ν[ αἱ

ἑατῶι

διὰ

(A.D.

ἀποστῖλαι

Bein’ σον

ὃς 6' ἂν ληφθῆ, (Roman).

σΪω

14-17

ἑτέρω

αἴτιος

i πεπληρῶσθαί

διὰ τὸ μὴ τὸ

ἐμὲ

ἔσται

τὸ

τῶν

P.Oxy.

888, 5

τούτων

P.Princ.

103,

Zruuovos’ | διὰ

[τ|9

ἔχειν

μηχανῆς

P.Oxy.

διὰ

πάντων

χρίαν

τῆς γεωργίας

γεωργῷ

pe

παρεῖναι

1941,

5-9

ἑἐξακολονθεῖν

> ἀναλω-

(v/A.D.).

θάνατον

(A.D.

Cf.

O.G.f.

also

il 598

850. Εἰς with the anarthrous infinitive, containing mostly the aorists φαγεῖν, and πιεῖν, is found in a few instances (cf. Ljungvik, Beitr., p. 4), e.g. ἔχω ὀλίγον ἐλάδιον ἡμῖν εἰς dayiv P.S.J. 837, 16 (iii-Iv/A.D.); παράσχου eis mtv... otvou διπλᾶ ὀγδοήκοντα P.Oxy. 1945, 2 (A.D. 517). These forms φαγεῖν and πιεῖν were regarded as substantives apparently confused with those in -i(o)v.! The following treatment of a substantive and an infinitive indicates a tendency to assimilate the infinitive to the corresponding noun: eis βαφήν

P.Oxy.

1293, 24 (A.D.

117-138),

There are, moreover, some

but eis βάψαι P.Oxy.

sporadic

736, O(c. A.D. 1).

instances where the plain infinitive is

used after the preposition eis without being ζεῦγος βοῶν eis ἐπαντελνεῖν | 7d κτῆμα

thus

assimilated: παραλαβεῖν'

P.Oxy. 1675,

10-12 (iii/A.D.).

(1) Ets with accusative expresses purpose or result, and it ts equivalent to πρὸς to+infinitive, rod +infinitive, ἕνα or wore-clause, with which it is often interchanged. It may also indicate the purpose or aim for which a request

is made. Negative un. E.g. ἀντιλαϊβοῦ

αὐτῶν

{Π|1.8.{.};

δανεισαμένων

xaÜ'

ὁπόσον τε

δύ'νηι

' οὐκ

eis τὸ

0Aa

σώιζεσθαι

χρήματα

ets

αὐτοὺς

τὸ under

P.S.J. 405, ὑστέρημα

11-14

γενέσθαι

P.Tebr, 786, 7-9 [c. 138 B.c.); εἰς / τὸ ἑατρεύειν προσάγουσιν P.S.J. 1275, 1-2 (ii /A.D.); καὶ κελεῦσαι ἕτερον |... |... dvr ἐμοῦ εἰσδοῦναι, ets τὸ bern θῆναί pe P.S.L 1243, 22-5 lA.D. 208); eis τὸ φρον[ τέ]δα ποιεῖσθαι ... | το εἰς τὸ προστῇναι κἀμὲ

P.Oxy.

2121,

72-9

ἀπερίσπαστον...

ras...

€e[vep]yeatias

(A.D.

γενέσθαι

...

5...

209-210);

P.Lond. 9...

εἰς

932, τὸ

τῶν

4-7 (late tit/a.D.); καὶ ποίησον ἐκ mavrayóbl«v ἀμεληθῆναι [6] i ποτισμὸς τοῦ x«5r[ov| P.Ryl.

I. On φιλί

*

this L]

basis certain

etc. Sce

[4

a

old

infinitives a

7

*

have

also Bio.

313

survived 1

δάνεια... 19-20

ἀποδιδόναε

[A.D.

δι[κ]͵]αίων

att];

τυχεῖν

eis

TA

δέωμαι |

P.Oxy.

2133,

ἐν rayτῇ γενέσθαι εἰς τὸ |an) 239, 6-8 (mid. ili/A.b.), but

in *

Modern

Greek:

τὸ

3

φαγί,

#

ro

3

δὰ

850 (1) . $52

THE

Tov

ποτιαμὸν

var

αὐτηῦ

5-7

(A.D.

φθῆναι

be

expected;

εὐπορίαν...

280);

P.Oxy.

pamiwra

αὐτὸν

would

τὴν

JINEINTTIVE

γράμματα

1261,

11

Masp.

καὶ

|...

(A.D.

67077,

PREPOSITIONS

Tarra

μηδὲ

ἐπενεκῖν

| £a]

1836,

10-12

os

προχωρεῖν

(eneveCy»xiv

τὰ

τῷ

wpa

μὴν

325);

| ππολυθῆν͵ ac] P.Lond.

P.Cairo

WITH

παρὰ

εἰς

τι

Edd.),

εἰς

ceavr[o]?

[1v /A.D.);

τὸ

μήτε

αὐτῷ τὸ

ἐμ

mpa.faı βοηθῆσαι

ἐκποιηβθῆ-

POxy.

1642,

μηδενὶ

pep

eis

τὸ

τὸν Za-

εἷς

τὸ

σωθῆναι

(Byz.)?

851. 'Ex with genitive “from”, "because (of)". In particular it denotes the causal factors underlying an action. It is equivalent to διὰ τό infinitive which replaced it in the post-Ptolemaic period. Negative μή. E.g. φανερὸν Bé σοι ἔσται ἐκ τοῦ τὸν airov συναχθήσεσβαι y

δὲ

...

!..,

συνχώρησις

ἐφαίνετο

^ παρὰ

Tode

P.S.I. 502, 30 qvem

(257-256

rercÀec uev m

ex

τοῦ

B.C]; | μηδὲ

τὸν δεσπόξοντα τῶν κτήσεων | Θράσωνα emdcdwwevac αὐτὴν SB 4512, 77-81 (167134 B.C.) ;: οἱ δὲ avrrogaavres «€ ἢ r0«v» ἐγβησόμενον κίνδυΪνον ex [T]ov προσ |«]6pnevxévai ἡμᾶς P.Tebr. 24, 30-1 (117 B.C.); &' ἣν αὐτέων. ἐξησθενηκὼς | ἐκ τοῦ μὴ

«ara

Àoyor

aravrar

τῶν

σπώρον

P.Tebt.

50,

33-3

(112-111

B.C.).

852. "Ev with dative “in”, "because" (causal); is also found with a temporal meaning "during the time", "when". On this construction, a Hebrew influence

reflected mostly in the text of the N.T. has been accepted by N.T. Grammars.*

Such a construction occurs, however, in Classical

Greek, e.g. un ἀδίκει ἐν

τῷ ἐρωτᾶν ... ἐν δὲ τῷ διαλέγεσθαι omovdaln Te καὶ ἐπανορθοῖ τὸν συνδιαλεγό-

μενον Pl. Theaet. fairly well attested

167e, and is known in the

papyri.

λογίζεσθαι

| κ᾿ αἰ]

πράγματος

later writers;? in addition it is

E.g.

ev τῶι παραπορεύεαθαι τὴν Ba’ σιλέα by” P.S.f. 354, 12-14 (254-253 R.C.): τῷ

to

“during the time the king was passing τίς yap οὕτως ἐστὶν ἀνάλλητος 3 vmdpos’ ἐν

diadopav

εὑρεῖν

P. Par. 63

iin-ivj,

94-6

(164-163

8.C.]: ἐν τῷ Bé . ue πεμισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην | συντυχεῖν 'AnodAAw(eia) P.Oxy. 743. 35-7 (2 B.C.); ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ[τ] ἐπιλελήϑεσθα[ “because they have been forgotten ^ P.Oxy. 2418, 3 (v or vi/A.D.); er τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿ἤρακλεοπολιτῶν “on my way back from Heracleopolis” P.Merton 46, 2 (late vi/a.D.}; cf. ἢ πρὸς σὲ i | vad beans |rov θεοῦ γνῶσις ἀνεφάνη ἅπασιν ἡμῖν | ler τῷ τὴν] κυρίαν ἀνασφῆλαι ἐκ τῆς καταληβούσης i [αὐτὴν νόΪσον P.Oxy. 939, 3-6 liv/ A.D.):so in P.Sel, 163: | ὠστε) Edd. The emendation of Hunt-Edgar contravenes the sense under which ἐν with dative and infinitive is used in papyri,

1. In later Greek eis τό was combined with a va- clause (equivalent to the infinitive}. Cf. a passage from a romance of xil’a.D.! ἠθέλησεν eis τὰ v' ἀποδημήση μακρά wou va £tvıreudn

Belthandros

and

Chryssanza,

2. For particulars sec Moulton, 4. See

Allen,

38-9.

Likewise

in

Modern

Prof, p. 14; Moulton-Turner,

op. cif. p. 37.

341

Greek.

pp. 144-5.

THE while

77a

INFINITIVE

WITH

ὥστε of the ed. pr. is correct

PREPOSITIONS

both

in structure

δᾷ 852 - 854 (3)

and

in meaning

(see also

f.}.

853. Ἕνεκα with genitive “because of” (causal), “in order to" (purpose); equivalent to a tva-clause. Negative μή. Without the article in an obscure and most probably elliptical passage: $m(eMéypajá σοι ἕνεκεν τῶν ἀπὸ Tavρίν[ο]ν | ὑποδέξασθαί σε P.Lond. 421 (verso), 5-7 (after A.D. 322 to mid. Iv/A.D.). With τοῦ: un

δύνασθαι

αὐτὰ

| [παρέΪχειν

ἕνεκα

τοῦ

ἀποθνήισκειν

P.Tebt.

B.C.); ἕνεκα τοῦ τὴν Αἴγυπτον eis εὐδίαν ἀγαγεῖν O.G.f. go, τι τίο]ῦ py... I... πεπτωκέναι P.Tebt. 66, 77-8 (121-120 B.C.); ἐξωτιάσϑαι

(=

ἐξωδιάσθαι)

με αὐτοῖς | evAoyeir,

ἀλλὰ

P.Mich.

191-2,

ἵνα τούτῳ

14-15

χρῶνται

(A.D.

B.G.U.

60);

759,

2-3

(226

[ii/B.C.); ἕνεκα ἕνεκα τοῦ... |

οὐχ

ἕνεκα

τοῦ δοκεῖν

140, 31-2

(A.D.

119).

854. 'Erc with the anarthrous infinitive depends on a verb of motion and indicates purpose (not found in papyri): aroor[akelis ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως

Πτολεμαίου ἐπὶ τὰς παραβολὰς τῶν [δικ]ῶν λαμβάνειν O.G.I. 41, 4. "Eni with dative occurs frequently in the following cases: (1)

In leases, loans of money, acknowledgements, agreements, and the lıke,

it denotes the reason for a statement “on the basis of”, “on condition that”,

“in accordance with”; Classical ἐφ᾽ à, ἐφ᾽ wre. Negative un. E.g. ὁμολογῶ

ἐσχηκέναι}

P.Prine.

154.

7-10

map{a}

[A.D.

gov...

545);

I...

t...

elsewhere : οὖς

ἐφ᾽ ar

καὶ

(adr Ed.)

καθίστημι

ἐμὲ

| ἐμβῆναι

ἐπιτρόπους

|...

. ἐπὶ τῷ aur|o los τρέφειν κ[ αἰ} ἱματίζειν τὸν... vior P. Ryl, 153, 18-21 138-151); δίδομεν ... |... ἐπὶ τῷ αὐτὸν ἀντιλαβεῖν P.S.]. 1231, 10-12 274); ἐπιδέχομαι modwaoaodar....!|...1...1...1,..,emitro par... |... ἱσ[ασϑίαι xai]

dmevéeyl[ xaa8 ja. P.Oxy.

1632,

8-14

(A.D.

ἐπαντλῆσαι Ρ.5.1. 1078, 7-14 (A.D. 356); ὁὀμ[ολ]ογῶ . ἐπὶ τῷ τοῦτον εἶναι P.S.]. 287, 6-8 (A.D. 377);

353);

---

| eri

[w]apleAndérar so also P.Oxy.

|

(A.D. (A.D. ποιήτῷ

με

παρά cov 1891, 4-8

(A.D. 495]. (2)

It denotes

result or purpose (cf. eis ro, ὑπὲρ τοῦ t infinitive).

διατάσσεται

ἐπὶ τῷ

καὶ els dyyovous

i ἐλθεῖν

B.G.U.

v, 51-2

(ii/A.D.);

E.g. οὐκ ἠξίωσας

. I... aim τῷ δηλῶσξ | μοι P.Oxy. 1216, 10-12 (ii or iii /A.D.); οὐδεμιᾶς poc ἀφορμῆς em αὐτοὺς περὶ αὐτῶν kara| ÀAecrouévgs ἐπὶ τῷ καὶ αὐτοὺς ὅσα ὀφείλει

(3)

ὦ πατὴρ

davea

ἐπὶ

| τῷ

ἁπλο([ῦν)

τῷ

...

ἐπιγεινώσκειν

With

verbs

...

ἀποδιδόναι συνηγηβῆναι

P.Tebt.

of emotion

P.Lond. 932,

18-19

[A.D.

P.Tebt.

15-16

(A.D. 206);

319,

11

signifying

340,

(A.D.

δισσο(ν)

ypalder)

Sul acpy σασθαι

ἐπὶ

248).

"admiration",

"pity", etc., it denotes cause. Negative un. E.g. 315

211);

Ὁ

ἀν

"wonder", "hatred",

$8 8.54 (3) - 855

THE

κατεπληπσήμην B.C.];

un

ὀλιγωρίαν

δαυμάσηις

ἐχάρην

ἐπὶ

531,

lA.D.

4

τὴν

τῶι

pe

INFINTTIVE

ἐπὶ

ance em

rit

ainfendu

70-Bo):

ἐπὶ

(168 hody

(4)

With

g.c.]; [110

βεβαμυμένοι

Or

κέναι

1T Tw

verbs

opanloa|

πλοίῳ

τῷ

thid.,

ἐμὲ

τῶι

pyder

γεγραφέναι

| ἀπελθεῖν

PEleoh.

13,

μὲν

τῶι

PSS.

3 (223

ἐρρώσβα[ἰ})

or

σε

P.S J. 502, 8

343.

222

2-3

B.C.];

εὐθέως

τοῖς

(257-256

(256-245

so also θεοῖς

B.C.) ;

B.G.U.

εὐχαρίστουν

so also ἐπὶ δὲ τῶς μὴ πηραγίνεσθαί πε... !... ἐπευχαριαστῶ P.lat. A I-: Witk. Epist. 36), 8

em

τῷ

also

with

P Lond.

of motion ἐπι

προσκυνῆσαι

B.C.);:

PIREPOSTTIONS

Νικόλπουν

P.Lond. 42, 10-11 [168 B.c.j; πηδίζαμαι Fhil., 12-14. with 3-6

WITH

(ae)

py...

λυποῦμαι;

ny.

Ne.

1361,

it indicates ἐλθεῖν

P. S.I,

... b-H

purpose. 1128,

αὐτὸν

rerengern

ἐλοιπήθημεν

1-2

Àeiar

P.Tebt.

ἐπὶ

23,

Ty

oF

np-

ἐπὶ

τῷ

ἐμὲ

{Roman}.

E.g. (VI;

A.D.) ;

arnAlenr

ὃ.

(5) A solitary example of ἐπί with accusative must be included in this group. The spelling “to” may of course be equivalent to "ro": παρελθὼν ἐπὶ τὸ (τό Edd.) ἀναδήσασθαι

τὸν στέφανον P.Oxy.

1252 (verso, il), 20 (A.D. 288-295).

Nevertheless such a construction ıs also found in the Classical language: κατέπλησσεν ἐπὶ τὸ Boßelon:, καὶ δεδιότας αὖ ἀλόγως ἀντικαθίστη πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸ θαρσεῖν Thuc. ii 65,α.} (6) From the number of the instances enumerated above, it becomes clear that nowhere has ἐπί with the infinitive a temporal meaning. However, in P.Oxy. 294. 3-5 (A.D. 22) we read: [... em τῷ γεγο] vera ἐν ᾿Αλεξανdpia [τῇ ... τοῦ ὑπογε)] γραμμένου μηνὸς ἔμαθον «7À.] translated by the Edd. “on my arrival in Alexandria”, etc. This conjecture has been accepted by

Milligan,

Sefections

13, and Olsson, P.Briefe, 17, but by no means corres-

ponds to the language of the papyri. We should more probably accept ἅμα τῷ γεγονέναι, Which not only fits the lacuna but also gives the required sense

of the passage precisely. 855. "ἕως with genitive is used to denote

the point of time up to which

an

action goes, with reference to the end of the action "until", “till”, or less frequently

to denote

purpose “tn order to”. The papyri favour

the use of the

prepositional infinitive to denote relations of time in the scale: πρὸ τοῦ, ἕως τοῦ, μετὰ ro +infinitive. However ews with subjunctive is preferred. The construction

is confined

to the Ptolemaic

papyri, e.g.

ἔχειν σ᾽ ἕως τοῦ κομίσασθαι "vou keep it until they bring” P.S4. 521, 13 [2482.17

B.C.);

ewe

Toy

ἡμᾶς

ypayiat

P.Teht.

746,

2t)

(24

B.C.)

1. For eri with the articular infiniltve in later writers cf. Krapp.

340

.

συνέχομαι

δ᾽

ἐνταῦθα

Der subst, Infin., pp. or f.

THE

, «ws ἕως

τοῦ τοῦ

αἰσθάσθαι πορίσαι

B.C.). Cf.

ἕῳς

τι

τοῦ

INFINITIVE

P.S.I. καὶ

552,

WITH

28-9

ware. veyxeiv

ἔχει

P.S..

PREPOSTTIONS

(269-268 P.Var.

598,

13

A

δὴ 555. 857

or 231-230 (

c Witk.,

were widely (v/A.D.): ws

with the

πρρσμένειν 16-17

{168

(ii /B.c.).

856. Mera with the anarthrous infinitive is quoted four Beitr., pp. 4 f.) combined

B.C.?);

Epist. 36),

infinitives φαγεῖν,

times (cf. Ljungvik,

πιεῖν, and

ζῆν, which

treated as substantives. The passage from P.Oxy. 1931, 4-5 ἀνθρωπος οὖν peta τὴν αὔριον ἀνέρχεσθαι Παμούθιον τὸν

προνοητήν, ἀπαίτησον

αὐτόν

considered by Ljungvik as revealing a constru-

ction of era with the anarthrous infinitive, does not indicate such a construction, for μετά is to be connected with τὴν αὔριον = after tomorrow; the same text has εἰς τὴν [α]ὔριον πέμπῳ in line 7; cf. also Epxoue | μετὰ τὴν αὔριον φέρον (= -«v) B.G.U. 1035, 16-17 (v/A.D.); the infinitive ἀνέρχε-

σθαι is dependent deleted.

on ἀπαίτησον, so the comma

However,

an instance of such

a

after mpovonrnv must be

construction

P.Jews 1914, 15 (A.D. 335°): καὶ peta τούτους where Bell proposes to add ro after pera. (1) Mera E.g.

with genitive “with”, “also”,

μετὰ

τὸν

τοῦ

καὶ

λύχναν

κίνδυνον

μετὰ

ἐκδέξασθαι

| rov. εἰσελθεῖν

can

be

ἐγβαλῖν

taken from

ἀπήλθασιν πάλιν,

“including” (cf. ἅμα τῷ + infinitive).

P.Merton

P.G.M.

ΟΣ, 22

ill,

(A.D.

ı2-ı3

42);

λέγεται

δὲ

wut

ets

(iv/A.D.].

(2) Μετά with accusative serves as a temporal designation “after”. There ıs no doubt that πρὸ roö-+-infinitive prepared the way for this construction, which is used consequently in a narrative sense instead of the aorist participle. E.g. pera ro δέξαι ... ! pera ro γράψαι "after having accepted ... and written P.Goodspeed 3, 1-3 (HI /B.C.}, οὐχ ὑ πεμείναμεν τὴν βίαν αὐτῶι δοῦναι | pera To

προσαγηοχέναι

λεικμῆσαξ

10-11

ue

τὰς

ἑαυτῶι dAwrias

(A.D. 346); μετὰ

γράψαι... ἐπελθεῖν

P. S.J. 9039,

o 1

|...

P.Tebr.

| ἀφήρ]πα[ σε]ὴν

δὲ

παρεκλήθη

equivalent

ἱκανοὺς

τὸ εἰπεῖν deamornks> τοῦ

τὸν

σε P.G.M, pou

(vi /A.D.) ; €f. μετὰ

to. παυσαμένου

768,

10-12

ἐμὸν

P.Princ.

(?) | σῖτον

(late i1/B.C.);

μέχρι

ἀἁποκαταστῆναι

ἐπισχεῖν μέχρι

τοῦ

137,

V

τοίὃ] U 'γιαίνοντά

(vor

δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι

P.Lond.

vi /A.D.):

τὸν θόρυβον

τὸ 238,

τὸ ἐμὲ μετὰ

τὸ

Acts 207

101,

4-5

[130

σε παρηγενηθῆναι

347

(Cf.

ἕως

τοῦ with the

we come to the general session” | μέχρι τοῦ ἐπιλαβεῖν P.Tebt. 717,

σε fw Japayerdoduı

P.Sel,

pera

θορύβου,

μέχρι τοῦ εἰς κοινὸν συν ἐδριον ἐλθεῖν “until P.Tebr. 798, 26-7 (u/B.C.); μὴ ἀποστῆναι

τοῦ '

B.c.?};

i IV, 578 liv/A.D.]; μετὰ

857. Μέχρι with genitive “until”, “up to” (temporal). infinitive). All the examples are in the aorist:

8-9

(116

P.Tebs.

765,8

B.C.]; P.Tebr.

καὶ

οὐκ

(153

B.C.7];

ἡἠβουλήθηι

7608, 13-14

(116

μέχρι

(sich 2.0. ?}:

I

Ss

857 - B60 (1)

THE

el?

μέχρι

In

| ἀπολιβὴ

a

275,

POxy,

πληρωθῆναι

χρόνον

IXFINTTIVE

WITH

PREPOSITIONS

P.Tchr.

20,

17-18

23-4

(A.D.

06.

TOY

τοῦ

μέχρι

B.C.) ;

110

fe,

858. /lapa. with accusative "because"; equivalent to dia τό, erexa τοῦ with infinitive. Negative un. It occurs once in Polybius (xxix 27, 12) and twice in the O.T. (Gen. 29 :20; Exod. 14:11) in a causal sense (cf. Allen, p. 42). From papyr!: mapa

4

ta

fi

de

ἐγδημῆπαι

5.6:

456,

7-H

᾿᾿ἀπολλώνιον

wat ἐπιτετίμητηαι

1253-2732

Ach,

B.C.)

corresponding

B.C.):

παρὰ

ro μή

to

παρὰ

rap

τὴ

crema

ἔχειν

"because

τὸ "FA

tote

περὶ

Ayen

[rot]

αὐτοὺς

Apollonius μέ

τοῦ

abroad ^

Epuólaor

εἶναι

"Fidgea

ἐπιτηδευμα

is

‘am'aynpatew

P Par.

ys fete jac Gre

3h,

13-14

P.Fat. E,

P.Flor.

P.Sf. 438,

205,

P.ST.

(163-162

165-1;

(156

2 (vıjA.D.},

859. Περί with the anarthrous infinitive occurs only in abbreviation in the docket at the end of a few late Byzantine letters (cf. Lyungvik, Beitr., p. 5). (1)

Περί with genitive ts common

the meaning of “about”,

in. petitions, payments, and the like, under

"concerning",

“so that”.

[t is equivalent to a ὡς

(tva) -clause, as is shown by the use of both constructions in the same sentence. It does not appear in the N.T. Mayser (ii!, pp. 326 f.) classifies this construction in the Ptolemaic papyri under three heads: absolute, adnominal, and adverbial. The same applies to the use of περὲ } infinitive in later times. E.g. whe

|)

μὲν

able

τοῦ

gie |

περὶ

μὲν

αὖν

τοῦ

Zen.

28,

577

(253b

[140

B.C.] ; ἐτύγχανον

HIT o

P Heid.

15,

eniala)vaallau.

κηαταλειφβηναι

τὸν

B.C.];

mem

aH

ypa

dw

P.Cuiro

mirar,

Len.

γνώριζε

rau...

... γεγραφηκως πέρι

τοῦ

(i /5.C.] ; yeirl wa

6€

[κε

DE

3unhio,

οὐ

5-4

δυνατὸν

ἐπιμέλεσθαι

προυνοηθήῆναί ae... ᾿ περὶ

τοῦ

[257

ἂν

B.C.) ;

ἔτι

P.Sel.

P. Mich. 101,

2-4

καὶ ὡς δοθῶσιν

κατακεκλῦσβαι

τὸ

πεδίον

pe καὶ οὐκ ἔχομεν P.Tehr. 560, 3-7 {late ii -8.c.}; similarly with γράφειν and ils compounds: A,Grenf. ii 48, 13-16 (mid, 1.0.0.1: P.Oxy, 2230, 4-6 (A.D. 1164}: PSH 1039. 11-14 111.A.D.): POxy. 1475.43 1a.D. 207]; alter ὑπόμνημα, κολAgua ; P.Tehr.

792, 7-9

EM

A.D.):

8

late

i

(0.1014 with

Rech,

P.PAH,

ἐντέλλημπι,

44),

opodoym:

2-3

(ALD.

crereidag

1371: πεμι

P.Oxy. 2409, ταῦ

xupi

nro

P. Phil. 32, 2-3 lend Of 1/A.D.] ; men de τοῦ rabra ope καλῶς γείνεαθβαι émepua τηθεὶς ὑπὸ aan τὠμπλόγησι POvr, 2350, 28-30 |A.D. 223-2241: similarly P.Lond. 251, 8-9 Imid. iv τὰ DLE.

860. IToó with the anarthrous (vi or

vil/s.n.):

Editors

are not

πρὸ yap

sure

infinitive is attested once in P,Oxr. 1855. 15

BÀen|eo']. but

about

the reading

(1) Πρό with genitive is always dominant tense is the aorist. E.g. ἀπελθεῖν

mpo

rov

ἢ

row

the

λυγὼ

papyrus

they

is badly preserved and

suggest.

temporal, equivalent to πρὶ" (7). The

στ

δεῖνι

319

PSE.

the

413,

4-1

1250-255

RC,

men

pre-

τοῦ

THE

INFINITIVE

ἢ after πρὶν 7 (see 598 iii /B.C.);

ἐὰν...

WITH

PREPOSITIONS

$8

(17) -[19] 1; πρὸ τοῦ ce amoönun σαι

ἀποστέλλωντα

ulm jo! τοῦ βασιλέως, πρὸ

860 (1) - 861 (2)

δ... 416. 3-4 (mid.

τοῦ

etoayßyralı]

avrais

ras δίκας P.Hal. τ, 147-8 (mid. iii/B.c.); ὕπως ocv | συνλαλήσω πρὸ τοῦ | pe καταπλεῦσαι P,Tebr. 755, 8-10 (early ii /B.C.) ; τὸ κελευσθὲν ἐσκεψάμην σὺν ὑμεῖν πρὸ

τοῦ

eis ὑπομνήματά

nic]aofa(c] 1-2

(vi/A.D.);

δοῦναι P.Oxy. John as

pe

‘we’ | ταῦτα

t: 48;

πρὸ

τοῦ

1937,

1-2

πρὸ

equivalent

τοῦ τὸν to

ἥκειν

αὐτῇ

| αὐτὴν

ἀνελθεῖν

2228,

31

(A.D.

(SC. τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ αὔριον

2837) ; πρὸ

ἀδελφότητι

παρασκευάσῃ

εἶναι

mapa

σοι John

τοῦ $iax|o-

P.Oxy.

τοὺς

lvi or vii/A.D.]. Cf. also πρὸ τοῦ κόσμον

πρὶν

ΡίΟχν.

ἔγραψα

ἀπὸ

1842.

Τερύθεως

σε Φίλιππον φωνῆσαι

17: 5, where

πρὸ

rov

stands

ἡ.

861. Πρός with the anarthrous infinitive in P.Lips. 37, 15 (A.D. 389): ἐξαφῆςκαὶ v 7]pós [7]etv (reading by Wilcken, A.P.F. iv (1908), p. 469). If the reading is correct, πεῖν for πιεῖν gives another instance of the plain in-

finitive after a preposition (cf. 856). (1) Πρός with accusative: With verbs of motion to indicate direction towards an ultimate goal. Thus purpose (or to a lesser degree result) 1s always predominant. The expression πρὸς τὸ εἶναι or γίνεσθαι is commonly used by the post-Classical writers to indicate purpose or result.’ E.g. dm[dcre]|Aov μοι τὴν ὄνον, χρέα yàp | ἔχομεν ‘adris’ πρὸς [ro] τὸν xoprovi 7| ἣν] | ταχίστην κομισθῆναι} ᾿εἰσκομίσαι᾽, κτὰ. P.Petrie it 42 (b), 1-4 (mid, iii 8.0 ἐνκόπτεις σιμον

| καλὰ

καὶ

P.Alexandr.

4,

ἐν τοῖς

| λοιποῖς

πρὸς

1-5

[Π||8.6.};

ἀνα

τὸ

μὴ

πλεῖν

| γίνεσθαι

τῶι

...

πρὺς

|...

| βασιλεῖ τὸ

τὸ

χρή-

καταστεῖσαι

(καταστεῖλαι Wilcken) τοὺς... ὄχλους P.Sel. 101, 8-11 (130 B.C.) ; ἄχϑῆναι acτὸν ἐπὶ σὲ πρὸςτὸ (τὸ) Eros ἀκόλουθον γείνεσθαι P.Tebt, 304, 17-18 (A.D, 167-168): τῶν ὄνων χωφορούντων πρὸς τὸ ὅπου δεῖ τὸν your BaAkelodaı P.Oxy. 1361, 15-16 (A.D.

280];

(A.D. 300]; . πρὸς

ἐπιστα!λεὶς

...

|...

πρὸς

ἔμελλον γὰρ ἀνελθῖν ἐπὶ τῆς

|...

| wpos

ro

Tw

nel...

ἐκδικηθῆναί εὐχαριστῆσαι

με P.Oxy.

τὸ

ἐπιθεωρῆσαι

| πόλεως P.Lond. 1843,

P.Merton

καὶ ἀποδύρασθαι 411,

20-4

15-16

(vi

[ν or

τῷ

ἰα.Ὁ.}: vii

8y,

| ἐμῷ

4-10 γεούχῳ

πέμψαι

μοι

/A. D.) .

(2) With verbs signifying to "give", "deliver", "declare", etc., to denote purpose. This construction occurs especially in legal documents, e.g. auvem Aaußavov αὐτῶι πρὸς ro τὰς |... ἀρούρας πρὸς τὸ μὴ (A.D.

30-40);

(A.D. 254); 14-16 (A.D. P.S.f, 1039,

1. Cf. .

Krapp.

᾿αὐτῆς

Der

Wilcken:

| εἰσαχθῆναι P.Hib. 41, 13-15 ἐϊλαασώματα ἐπακολουθῆσαι

σνστηϊσαμένων,

mp[ols

τὸ

| δύνασθαι

αὐτὸν

(c. 261 B.C.] ; ποτίσαι P.Merton 11, 12-15 P.Oxy.

1187,

14-16

emölidw| μεὶ τὸ ὑπόμνημα πρὸς τὸ ἀνα γραφῆναι αὐτὸν P.§.f. 164, 287); so also P.Harris 135. 7 (v/a.D.); δηλῶ πρὸς ! τὸ μὴ λαθεῖν 19-20 (iHi /A.D.]: παραδοῦναι ... πρὸς τὸ μηδεμίαν ἐνέδραν ...

subst. εὐθέως

[nfin., Ed.:

p. 33. ᾿εἰασκομίσαιν

319

Wilcken:

δια κομίπαι

Ed.

:& R61 (2) - 862

THF

INFINT

FIVE

WITH

PREPOSTTIONS

. γενέσθαι P.Oxv. 2114, 014-160 ! A.D. 316, ; ἐμὲ δὲ... mapacyety Ta ...waÄnpin mpos τὸ ... ... παρέχειν P.Oxy. 1626, 18-20 (A.D. 325), ὡμολογήσαμεν meas TO ... κρατεῖν P.Oxy, 2270, 4 learly v A.D.j; mpos γὰρ τῷ ge γνώμα[ε] μετεπεμψαμηv P.Oxy. 1947, 10-11 (yv A.D]; πρὸς Tu... sn. εἰδέναι ἐσήμανα POvy, μην

1473.

1-12

πηρηακηλῶν

(vi

aia

or

vil A.D.|;

Tavror

pou

mpos

Tor

τὸ

γνῶναι

γραμμάτων

τὸν

ἐμὴν

P.Oxr.

δεσπότην

18653,

12-13

ἐχρησά-

(vi

or

vil;

A.D.!.

(3)

The expression rà πρὸς τὸ ζῆν "what is necessary in life" P.Par. 63 (iv),

102-3 (164-163 article. This

B.c.) 1s a prepositional

expression

is commonly

phrase substantivized by the neuter used

in the O.T. and N.T., to which

obviously it owes its survival in Modern Greek. Aalto, pp. 49 and 72, says that this idiom "gibt. ein hebr. "Lebens-mittel' mihjáteká ( = quae ad victum

sunt

necessaria)".

(4) With dative. Wnh the verbs εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, to express close engagement in 7 ΝΗ "d the sense of “being intent on”, "determined to", “at the point of", "about to”, "busy with". This is very rare in the Hellenistic writers; Polybius has two instances (1 50, 1 and iii 71, 1). while the N.T. exhibits none. In papyri: ἦμεν

πρὸς

tat...

ἀναλαμβάνειν 21-2

γεωμετρεῖν

PS. f, 333,

[251-250

B.C];

3.

πρὸς

PLS.

(256

502,

B.C);

tale]

28

Dune

mpaogew

(257-256 δὲ ...

21-2 [c. 246 &.C.); eiui yap πρὸς τῶι ἀπυδημεῖν B.C.]; IHalar πρὸς τῶι ἀναπλεῖν P Alex. Inv. 411. run

gu|..

| wAecegan

ταύτης

ful passage due to the cAeropan, but Mayser's

(5)

νυνὶ

Ó€

τῶι

πλεῖν

mpogs

T an

ἦμεν

In the meaning πρὸς

τῷ

μὴ

ovans

P.Tebr.

corruption coniecture

araAanßareır

PS I. 1242,

εἰμί

24,

πρὸς

B.C.) ; εἶναι rw

Aap

ἐγινομεθα

ἤδη

Raver

πρὸς

rui

PS A, 362,

— P.Petric

n

45

(iv).

P.Perric ii 42 (b), 5 (mid. im; (p. 481, 7 [{Π|08.0.}} ἤδη πρὸς

308-40

(117

B.C.)

(this is a doubt-

of the papyrus; the Editors suggest avyσυγκλείεσθαι (ii', p. 429) seems probable}: Pfand.

11-12

02,

53-1

[ui iB.C.) ;

Beets

δεῖ

ἤδη

πρὸς

(i’B.c.-1/A.D.).

of “besides”. “in addition”, e.g.

Bovdedfar

ταῦτα

uoi

Ardorac

"apart

from

the

fact

not want to give me these things” PS./ 53153, B-g (ni-iv/A.D.); wat toils] mapa ποῦ μένειν PS. 1239, 18-10 (A.D. 4:430]. Cf. χωρὶς

that

he

mpos rad}

τῷ aw Infini-

did

tive.

862. 'Ynép with genitive "for the sake of", "so that". Negative μή. It is indeed rare in the papyri, which

prefer

the

constructions

πρὸς To, περὶ

Toü-+in-

finitive in the same sense. When it is used it seems sometimes pleonastic, having the function of the plain infinitive or a iva-clause. Further, as some of the examples show, it passes aver into the meaning “on the subject of",

"about".

E.g. 40)

TRE ἀπηγγελκότος B.C.];

ὑπέρ

ὑπὲρ

INFINITIVE τοῦ

τοῦ μηθὲν

ὑπόμνημα

ὑπὲρ

τοῦ

| ara |xoudicat

τοὺς

ἀπολελύσθαι ὀφ[εἰλειν

(113 B.C.); μετέδωκα

WITH. ae

"so

PREPOSTTIONS ἐκ

that

ὑπὲρ τοῦ πέμψαι μοι μὴ

εἰληφέναι

τελώνας

ὑπὲρ

τῆς he

xatoyns

may

owe

P.Princ.

(—

πρὸς

τοῦ

μὴ

to

ἐκ 862 - 864 42,

nothing"

26-7

#.Tehr.

{169 27, 65

19, 2 (ii /B.C.); ἐπεδώκαμέν σοι

un)

| Buyla

P.Lond.

U.P.Z. das

46,

4

γενέσθαι

(163-162

P.Oxy.

n.c.:

44,

14-15

(end of 1/A.D.) ; (v|asvrgv mapaoyeiv ... ... ὑπὲ τοῦ δύνασθ]αἱ a|uror | omy |peτήσασθαι P.Oxy. B6, 12-14 (A.D. 338); ἐθέμην |... ὑπὲρ τοῦ σὲ ἔχειν τὸ ἀοφαλές

P.Oxy.

1041,

9-10

(A.D.

381].

863. Χάριν with genitive, "because of", "for the sake of". Negative un. No example from the N.T.; from the papyri: χάριν

τοῦ

μια.θώπεις

! μὴ

προνοηθῆναι

yap

P.Tebr.

τοῦ διασείζειγν

27,

35-6

lıı3

καὶ ἀργυρίζεσθαι

B.C.);

νοθεύων

P.Mich.

τὰς

174. 9-10

κυριακὰς

(A.D.

145-

147).

864. Χωρίς

with

genitive,

“apart from”,

"without" (= avev

τοῦ + infinitive).

Negative un. lt is rare in the papyri and missing from the N.T. A striking use

of χωρίς with the genitive of the infinitive is found in the official documents, in which it provides a stereotype’ form of expression to denote distinctions or exceptions to what has been stated. E.g. [7 Ἰθέτησεν μηθὲν

| xwpis

ἧσσοι χωρὶς

τοῦ ....

ἄκοιρον

προγεγραμμένα

τοῦ τοῦ

εἶναι P.Oxy.

αὐτῷ

! μὴ

δοῦναι

P.Tebr.

| μένιν ra διωμολογημένᾳ

P. Mich. 2134,

194, 25-6 2B

(c.

A.D.

756,

1-3

le.

PS.J. 903, 24-5

(A.D.

61);

170);

so

χωρὶς also

in

174

8.0.2);

(A.D. 47),

τοῦ μένειν P.S./.

A.D.); B.G.U. 839, 17 (il /A.D.); πειρῶ μέντοι, ἀδελφέ, ra | xarà χωρὶς “τοῦ ἐπὶ κινδύνωι τς. 0... mpd €ac P.Gron. 17, 16-20 (ni

1263,

a£ or

καὶ χωρὶς

κύρια

ra

10

(ii /

διαθέσθαι, 1v/A.D.).

PARTICIPLE Barret.

“The

[mperatival

&& 136; 411-25;

Bolling,

Participle", Exp. The

MT, $& 418-63; Gillis, Greek Bapt. Sein.), 1937;

T. lix

Participles in

Hatzidakis, Finf..

the

p. 144;

Mayser,

ii', pp.

Rhodius,

165

f.; Blass-Debr.Funk.

Baltimore

1912;

Burton,

Doctrinal Epistles of Paul (Diss. of S-W.

Idem,

τῶν Metoyàv', P.A.A. iii (1928), pp. 634 l'emploi et l'histoire du participe grec, Album Hist. Gr., §§ 2100-70;

(1948). pp.

Participle in Apollonius

Glotta it

(1910),

p. 300; Idem, “Περὶ

ff.; Hesseling, Quelques observations sur Kern (Leiden 1903}, pp. 69 ff.; Jannaris,

169-76;

339-60;

Meecham,

“The

Use

of the Par-

ticiple for the Imperative in the NL. T. Exp. T. lviii (1947), pp. 207 f.; A. Mirambel "Participe et gérondif en grec médiéval et moderne", 8.5.2. lvi (1961), pp. 46-79; Moule,

/diom,

Robertson, Fathers,

mour,

pp.

99-105;

pp. 371-6;

Chicago

Moulton,

1095-1141:

1915;

Schwyzer,

Prof.,

pp.

Robinson,

Gr. Gr., i, p.

“On the Use of the Aorist Participle

Williams,

The Participle in the Book

of Acts

221-32;

Spatax

Moulton-Turner,

of the Participle

810;

in Greek",

ii, pp.

pp.

in the

385-409

150-52;

Apostolic

[with Tit.) ; Sey-

P.A.Ph.A. xii (1881), pp.B#-ob;

(Diss.}, Chicago

1904.

865. Introduction. The use of the participle is very firmly entrenched in the papyri. Here the participle shows a great wealth of usages shared with both Classical and N.T. Greek. The genitive absolute in particular appears as a very common construction, just as it is in the Hellenistic authors.! In Modern Greek vernacular the participle has been limited to two forms (i.e. -vras and -évos),” the former acting more or less as an adverb corresponding to the old adverbial participle, the latter taking the nature and meaning of an adjective. The beginning of this development is seen in the papyri, where the participle shows a tendency towards an indeclinable form, due to the fact that it was treated in the same way as the infinitive. The evidence which testifies to this view is set out in the sections dealing with the gender, number

and cases of the participle (see 876 ff.). 866. The participle as rendering the function of an adjective must agree in gender, number and case with the noun which it designates. In general it does so in accordance with Classical Greek, but often it betrays an incongruous

treatment,

which

becomes

apparent

uncertainty under all three headings appear Gr., § 1181

in the

later period.

Traces

in late Greek (Jannaris,

b); furthermore the N.T. presents

many

examples

of

Hist.

of these ir-

regularities (cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk, § 136). A still clearer picture can be obtained from the papyri, which give substantial evidence on this question.

Il. See especially

Bolling.

The Partie.

in Apoll,

Rh., and

Moulton,

tz

C t

2. For particulars see Hatzidakis, Eiml., p. 144: Idem, Glotra

Ein,

p. 114.

i ftgrol, D. 300.

PARTICIPLE

- MORPHOLOGY

$4 867 - 870

867. In papyri the participle tends to reduce its adjectival function, and con-

sequently to abolish its inflexion (the latter points to its Modern Greek form). This is because the participle was associated with the infinitive, with which it was often interchanged. Beginning with Classical Greek, certain verbs

were constructed with the infinitive and also could take the participle with some difference of meaning; in later times the number of these verbs was considerably increased, abolishing any distinction between the two construc-

tions. This established a sense of identity between the infinitive and the par-

ticiple and finally produced an indeclinable form of the latter in -vras,! found in the papyri of the first centuries of our era.

T.

MORPHOLOGY

868. The verb in the participle presents the same characteristics of morphology as those already examined under the tenses of the indicative, though in smaller proportion. Deviations from the normal form of the verb occur mainly in the post-Ptolemaic papyri. The morphological situation of the participle can be illustrated as follows: 869. The augment of the aorist indicative is occasionally transferred to participal forms

(for examples

see 239).

On

the other

hand

the reduplication

(syllabic, or temporal in compounds) is occasionally dropped, e.g. διοικημένα P.S.I. 333, 16 (256 B.c.); εὐδοκιμηκότα P.Leid. B, 25 (164 2.c.); περισκεπασμένων P.Jews 1915, 24 (€. A.D. 330-340); etc. (see also 424). 870.

Deviations

of the tense-stem

the participle; so ra [xA]erévra 322, 27 (a.p. 216) after the 137, 11; 140, 11 (all A.D. 34); eBpexnoav P.Giss. 60 (v), 12

in the indicative are equally

retained

in

B.G.U. 454, 19 (A.D. 193); τῶν κλεπέντων B.G.U. morpheme xAen-; cf. ἐκλέπη P.Ryl. 134, 13; so also Bpexevrwv P.Flor. 331, 6 (iifA.D.); cf. (A.D. 118). Notice the form τὰ σπερμένα P. Mich.

121 (rl), x, 1{a.D. 42) due to the phonetic

change of ap to ep (see also 305).

Forms of the future and aorist participle middle-passive of λαμβάνω occur with the insertion of -p- e.g. λημψομένων P.Cairo Masp. 67001,28 ( 4.n. 514):

1. For

particulars

on

B. G.

Mandilaras.

The

the participle

in »rras

see

Blass-Debr.-Funk,

$ 136.

(with

Itt).

353 Verb in the Greek

Non-Literary

Pupvri

23

χὰ 870 - 876

PARTICIPLE - MORTHOTL.OG Y

ληφθέντας B.G.U. 372 (ii), 11 (A.D. 154): etc. These forms reflect the indicative forms with -u-, e.g. future λήμψομα! ; aorist ἐλήμφθη P.Strassh.

5, 18(A.n. 262); etc. Notice the form ἐπιδοθήντων P.Oxy. 2131, 4 (A.D. 207) with extension of -5- from -@n» and which it was phonetically regular.

the other

forms

of the paradigm

in

871. In the participle, as in the indicative, a number of verbs normally forming a second aorist, either present s-aorist forms, e.g. ἀποδράσαυτος (306 (9)): ἀνακράξαντες

(306 (11)); εἰδήσας P.Tebt. 762, 20 (late iii/n.c.), or replace the

thematic vowel of the second aorist by -a-, e.g. evpas (Wilcken's reading) P.Par. 51, 10 (159 B.c.) and yevayevos, which is quite frequent; so also &Adpevos (for διελόμενος) P.Oxy. 2283, τὸ (A.D. 586); and similarly BoAd; μενοι

P.Par. 48, 10-11 (153 B.c.), which has the parallel form βουλαμένω found in inscriptions

(see

36, 20 (162-161

872. Some

Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 182). Notice vouilavra B.c.), a mixture of νομίζοντα

with

P.Par.

νομίσαντα.

athematic participles have transferred to the thematic, e.g. exóc-

δων (92): δυνόμενος

(102); παραφίων

(125); ὑποτίθοντας (140 (3)): ἀγεύων

(148); ἐμπι( μ)πλῶν (152); προϊομένου P.Mich. 182, 27 (182 su.c.?); δοῦντες (not 8olvivres) P.Tebt. 420, 6 (iii/A.p.) after analogy with the -éw verbs. 873. Confusion of contracted verbs is attested in certain forms which are found repeatedly, e.g. roAucörres common in the "petitions" of P.Abinn. Similarly ἀπαντοῦντι, ἀγαποῦντας, διαιτ[ο]υμένην, μελετουμένην all according to the -ἔω verbs (for references see 52 (2)). but ποιῳμένη P.Oxv. 1473. 24 (A.D. 201): εὐθυμῶντος

P. Ross.-Georg.

tll 10, 5 (Iv-v/A.n.).

874. Certain forms of the aorist participles show an influence of the perfect (this becomes clearer in the aorist indicative in -«a (see 307 - 309)). E.g. aveveyxoot for ἀνενεγκοῦσι B.G.U. 1010, 5 (219 n.c.”): also conversely: κεχορηγηθέντα for κεχορηγημένον P.Tebt. 61 (b), 298: 301 (118-117. p.c.) and

ὑποίδε]δειχθέντων

SB 4512, 83 (167-134

μι}

875. Aorist participles in -7es (-wv, -ras) for -vzes (-vrwv, -vzas) respectively are cited by Kapsomenakis (Vorunter., p. 91, fn. 2) as examples of con-

fusion between aorist and perfect. Palmer, on the other hand (Granmiar, p. 2), finds in these forms “nothing more than orthographic variants”. 1.

SYNTAX

OF

THE

PAHTICIPLE

876. In this chapter we examine the agreement 351

of the participle with its sub-

SYNTAX

OF

THE

PARTICIPLE

δῷ 876 - 878

ject. In general we find striking solecisms which have arisen, for the most part, from a decreasing awareness of the participle as an inflected form agreeing with its subject.! 877. Gender. The masculine participle is used with reference to a feminine noun. This occurs especially in the nominative, and equally in the genitive, but rarely in the accusative. E.g. (1)

Nominative:

P.Ryf

151,

news

...

ἡ κυρία

“Hpats

5-10

(A.D.

μήτ(ηρ)

pou

P.Amh.

P.Lond.

1081,

5

250);

κ[ο]μισάμενος

P.G.M.

Inv.

(it-itt/a.D.}; ii XXXVI,

γυνὴ 40);

...

113,

No.

15

2102,

Ταῆσις

1013,

157);

(ii /A.D.);

| κώμης

B.G.U.

(iv/A.D.};

εἰσελθὼν B.G.U.

(A.D. 8

ἀπὸ

( -- -νἡ

263

...

ἡ ὑμολογῶν

3

1...

ἐρωτηθεὶς

SB

lii or iii /A.D.); τούτω

συνλαβὼν τετελευ-

for ἐπιστείλασα

καταϊμένων

τοῦὔῦτω (not

καὶ 54-68);

[ἐρωτηθεῖσζα»

ἐπιστείλας

...

814,

καὶ

...

15 (A.D.

4451,

Ed,,, B.G.U.

3-5

(A.D.

af πέτραι ἀκούσαντες

for τούτου as in P.Abinn.

51) τυχὼν (sc. ἐγὼ ἡ AdpyrAta) P.Lond. 240, 18 (A.D. 346); cf. P.Lond. 241, 20 (A.D. 346) καὶ τοῦτο rvxcv both “petitions " belonging to the same person

(1.6. Aurelia) (2)

but written by different hands.

Genitive : τῶν δὲ τροφῶν

B.G.U. P.S.f.

7-8

ὄντων

1078, 5 (4.D. 39); so also 903

(Add.

(A.D.

65);

p.

ἐκ

XVID,

19

παραθέσεων

B.G.U.

912, 43

P.Fay. (A.D.

91,45

47);

εἰδότος

for

εἰδυίας

(A.D. 99) ; τῆς ἐνεστῶτος ἡμέρας

τῶν

ἐπιδειχθέντων

dpovpwy πολλῶν óvi| r lev P.Tebt. 406, 28-9 a χθέντων P.Oxy. goo, 13-14 (A.D. 322);

(A.D. 33);

γυναικῶν

P.Amh,

: μὴ

εἰὀόότων

79, 29-30

P.S.4,

iv. A.D.

82,

186):

(c. A.D. 266); τῶν ἡμερῶν ... olu|rἐμοῦ (sc. AvpyAtas) ameroüvros pou

P.Lond. 240, 7 !A.D. 346); so also ἀπαιτοῦντος P.Lond. 241,8 (A.D. 440], another “petition” of the same person, written, however, by different hands: χωρηγηθέντος i παρ ὑμῶν πάσης τῆς καθημερινῆς τροφῆς P.Lond. 1730, 14-15 (A.D.

5385}.

(3)

Accisative:

τῆι

ἐλευθεροῦντα

P.Oxy.

1348

βνσιάζηντα M

(late

.Cirest.

for

ϑθυσιάζουσαν

ahi,

[I

{a.D.

P.Ryl.

460) ;

CÍ.

112 ro

Ic),

14

πρᾶγμα

(A.D.

τὸ...

250);

λεκθέυτα

iii/A.D.).

878. Number. The plural participle can stand for one person. This construction has many parallels in Homeric and Classical Greek, where a considerable number of substantives are used in the plural either exclusively or in alternation with the singular. It is also found in the text of the N.T. (BlassDebr.-Funk, ὃ 141). On the other hand, the singular is also used with reference to the plural. E.g.

I. See examples Debr.-Funk,§

from

136,

late Greek

and

from

in Jannaris, post-Ptolemaic

40[. (fn. 21. 335

Hist, Gr., ἃ 1181 papyri

in

b, from

the N.T.

Kapsomenakis.

in Blass-

Vorunter.,

pr.

$8 878 (1) - 879

SYNTAX

OF

THE

PARTICIPLE

(1) Use of Ist person plural for Ist person singular. larity arises from

the lack of consistency,

In this case the irregu-

the participle alone or the main

verb alone being ıst person plural, instead of both, e.g. ὁρῶντες δέ ce καταρραθυμοῦντα ὥιμην δεῖν καὶ νῦν emoreiAac σοι P.Hib. 44, 4-5 (253 B.C.) ; cf. ἐρρώμεϑα δὲ καὶ αὐτός SB 6804,3 (iii /B.C.) ; πρὸς σὲ | ἀφεστάλ-

καμεν ἀξιῶν P.Cairo Zen. 59214, 9-10

(2)

Use of the singular participle for the plural, e.g. πυνθανόμενος for (murdaropevo) γράψαι | [ook "on hearing of

asked

(3)

(254 B.C.).

me

to write

to you"

δέ ae εἶναι érie[x]y 5 ἠξίωσάν τινές pe τῶν φίλων your kindly disposition some {of his) friends

P.Cairo Zen.

59192,

4-5

(255

B.C.).

Use of the plural participle for the singular e.g. farıv δὲ ἡ oia P.S.I. 1080, 5-6

| [»p]os τῷ ᾿Ισίῳ (iii /A.D.?); notice

ἐχόμενα (for ἐχομένη) οἰκίας KAavb[i avo also the lack of agreement in gender.

(4) Lack of agreement between article and participle. The use of the singular participle with the article in the plural is due probably to confusions, e.g. rois φι'λοῦντι pressions

1773,

(5)

τῷ

P.Lond.

Inv. No,

φιλοῦντι,

τῇ

1575, 22-3

φιλαύσῃ,

Similarly

(early ii/A.D.] rots

after the

ἀναδιδοῦντί

σὺ

(=

usual exoo)

P.Oxy.

17 (ili /A.D.).

There are also several examples contined to the post—Ptolemaic

which betray a breach

of concord

in both

number

and gender.

these examples the irregularity may be due to association with of different gender and number. E.g.

papyri

In some of

a synonym

émeu'adg uv ἐπιστολὰς δυναμένου (sc, τοῦ γράμματος) P.Oxy. 528, 11-12. [ii] A.D.) ; this becomes apparent in line 16 of the same letter: τῶν σῶν ἐπιστολῶν

ἐσσφραγιζμένα

(sc. γράμματα), Note that these examples

ment

too.

in

case

In

the

following

passage: gegen μένοι

involve lack of agree| ro ]|v μακαρίου

dmo-

ara|À]ou λέγοντες τοὺς 1 ἀσθενοῦντας μὴ παρορᾶν P.Jews 1915, 14-15 (c. A.D. 330-340), the participle λέγοντες is in accordance with ἡμεῖς, if it is not a mere slip of the pen with no grammatical implications.

879. Cases. The participle presents a great instability in the use of the cases. There are many examples of striking incongruities which in the last analysis show that the participle tended to lose its inflexion (a phenomenon which recalls directly the situation of the infinitive). The papyri give clear evidence

for this view in using a prepositional participle in the same way as they use a prepositional

infinitive.

E.g.

356

SYNTAX

OF

THE

PARTICIPLE

$8 879 - 879 (3)

é[ve]xa τοῦ ἐκ τοῦ τοιζούτον καιροῦ ἐμανυτήν re καὶ τὸ παιδί[ον olov | διακεκυβερνηκυῖα καὶ εἰς πᾶν te | eAnAudvia ... | καὶ δοκοῦσα P.Lond. 42, 14-18 (168 B.C.) followed by σὲ δὲ μηδ᾽ ἐντεθυμῆσθαι τοῦ παραγενέσθαι 19-201: καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνήθην διὰ τὸ ἐμὲ | μετρείως ἔχοντα P.Lips. 108, 5-6 (ii-iii/A.D.), See also

under

"Participle

for

Infinitive’,

712

ff.

The predominant case is the nominative used instead of oblique cases. Thus : (10) Nominative for genitive: βαλὼν 1 ἡμᾶς P.Petrie i1. 4

καὶ ᾿Αρήου P.Lond. 31, 8-9

B.C.);

'Avra(ov

οὖσα ἐν κώμ[]

(162

...

B.c.);

τοῦ

334,

δὲ Κότυος

| μὴ

βεβουλημένου

amo-

P.Tebt. 22, 7-9 (112 B.c.]; Mappeious roroxzÀ. οὐ aroxaca' nuevos P.Tebt. 41, 4-11 c.

γυμνασιαρχῶν

P.Lond.

required

ἀδικούμεθα ὑπὸ ᾿Απολλωνίον τοῦ ἐργοδιώκτου ép(1), 2-3 (255-254 B.C.|]; συνπαρόντες Χρυσίππου |

δοῦναι τὰ σπέρματα ἀναβαλλόμενος γραμματέως |... | παρ[αἸγινομένου

IIQ

the

B.G.U.

16-17

(A.D.

1189, 2 166);

(1

ὧν ἐμοῦ

B.C. - A.D.

I);

οἰκίας

μέλλοντος ἐλθεῖν

for

8; διαθήκη ! Ψεναμούνιος Apmolnpäros ... 3... γράμματα ius PLS, 1040, 1-5 (iii/A.D.); παρὰ Αὐρηλίας ... HM P.Lond. 240, 3-4 (A.D. 346}. Notice καταντήσαντος yap | eis τὴν πόλιν Σοκονώφεως | xac “Ὠιπεως τῶν ἐξ ὑμῶν | καὶ ὑποδεικνυ ὀντίων P.Tebr. 59, 3-6 (99 B.c.) where the writer himself corrected

ὑποδεικνύων

(nominative)

to

ὑποδεικνυόντων

(2) Nominative for accusative and vice versa: μὴ καταγίνεσθαι (sc. deut} φοβουμένη (for φοβουμένη") τοὺς

| τὴν

ἀλήθειαν

λέγοντες

P.Par,

τὸν [ [... ] παρ᾽ ἡμῶν ὧν P.Tebr. ματί

194);

Aws

pov

mapaypa![$é]vra

avrove

...

ἀπολέσας

|...

ὄν

47,

111,

3-4

(c.

δύνασθαι (sc, μὲ) ἐν αὐτῶι P.Lille ii 9, 2 (iii /B.C.]; πρὸς 152

B.C.);

yelvwowe

᾿Αμμώνιον

12,2 ff. (118 8.C.}; so also τὸν τόκον τὸν [ὁ Πν ὁ ](for

ὧν:

τιθέντες B.G.U.

P.Fay.

31-3

[genitive].

ὄνέταΣ»

1122,

(A.D.

Edd.)

14-15

95-96);

P.Oxy.

513,

22-3

(13 B.C.) :; μένφομαΐ

τοὺς

φιλοῦντες

(A.D.

σαι peya-

P.Fay.

119,

26

(c. A.D. 100); 118, 26 (A.D. 110); τὰς ὑπο[ κ]Ἰε[ἱμεῖναι P.Gen. 48, 5 (A.D. 346); ov δέδοκται yàp ἡμῖν alyw | τι δυστυχοῦντες (for δυστυχοῦντας or δυστυχοῦσι) P.Oxy. 120, 25-6 (iv/A.D.), but οὐκ δός τέ ἐστιν mpocaibpevew | κτῆσι, μάλιστα ἐπεὶ

ξένης

. |... x«obvra[s (3)

wai

| mapa.

τῇ

ov ra! (for we) P.Gen.

Nominative

11, for

2-3 dative

τάξι

ὄντα

(for

P.Lond. 411, 9-10 (A.D. and

ὧν]

fbid.,

21-3;

so

also

(mid. iv/A.D.); Aupnkor

στρατιώτης

...

! xaroı-

350). vice

versa:

λίαν

oot

χάριν

μεγάλην

ἐσχήκαμεν

σημήνας ἡμῖν P.Par. 42, 3 (156 B.c.); τοῖς ὑπογεγραμμένοις ... μαχίμοις | oderλοντες P.Tebt. 76, 7-8 (112 n.c.); ἡ πρᾶξις ἔστωι | Φιλουμένηι ... πράσσουσα P.Amh. 49, 5-9 (108 g.c.]; ἐντέταλταί μοι wapada! Buy στρατιώτας | ἐκπορθῆσαι

aulrovs P.Tebt. 37, 11-15 (73 B.C.); ἐργάτες (= -aıs) xomrovres ξύλα P. Mich. 127 {ii), 36 (A.D. 45-46). And conversely dative for nominative: éppwas μοι͵ κύριέ μου vdrep, εὐτυϊχοῦντί μοι P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575, 24-5 learly iii/A.D.); similarly εὔχομε τὸν παντοκράτ[ οἾρα Θεὸν | [o ]u[ wc] ὑγιένοντί σαι... | ἀπολάβης

rà map ἐμοῦ γράμματα

being confused

with

P.Lond. 244, 3-5

the usual expression

357

εὔχομαι

(iv/A.D.};

the whole sentence

ὑγιαίνοντά σε ἀπολαβεῖν

«ra,

δὰ 879 (4) - $80 (4)

SYNTAX

Accusative

for genitive >

.. κατανέμηντα μὸν eis

TOv

ποιοῦντα

ao

σαι

B.G.U.

P.Oxr.

ı20

230,

‘ras

t3

le.

βοῦς

(0.240

1666,

5-6

A.D.

Σοκμήνιος

4-5

τινὸς

B.C.) ; ἤκουσα

IN /A.D.);

P.Oxy.

(verso),

20-1

PARTICIPLE

(2 Ὁ), 3-4

846,

στρατευσάμενον

P.Lond.

THE

eöpoper

P. Petrie ti 32

€vpovra

λεγιῶνα

OF

περὶ

τοῦ

μετὰ

...

παρὰ rolu....

|.v-

μεικροῦ

(iH/A.D.);

[iv/A.D.];

βυυκόλων Παυσανίου

αἰκείνον

ypappa

τὸ

τῶν

σὸν

| ws

ἔργον

|

araüibaaworra

3461.

(5) Accusative for dative and conversely : lt is found especially in stereotyped expressions of the letters, and is due to certain factors of the sentence structure. For instance : wehever μοι εἰδέος

(.—

ἡδέως)

ἔχοντα

P.Lond.

405,

14

(c. A.D.

346);

cf. however,

«é[A]evé μοι, ... ἡδέως i ἔχοντε P.Gen. 50, 18-20 lc. A.p. 346). When the dative appears, as in €ppwoo μοι, κύριέ pou πάτερ, evry χοῦντί uoi P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575, 24-5 learly iti/A.D.) for εὐτυχῶν there is usually another dative

nearby,

and

but

dative

no

1680,

(6)

3-5

this

may

well

occurs

[in

or

in

have

influenced

εἰ ὕχομ]σαι

aradsdörre

3-5

( mid.

oni

2-4

47.

P.Gen.

5...

the structure vycatirov

τί

of σε

the

participle,

ἀποληβεῖν

P.Oxy.

iv/a.D.}.

Dative for genitive is confined τοῦ

...

P.Oxv.

ıv/A.D.};

17537,

12

[it

AA. D.

Αὐρηλίου

παρὰ

340];

(A.D.

to such examples as: τ...

QAa[o

]viov

ED

γεουχοῦντι

|...

, γευυχοῦντι

49,

P.Gen.

etc.

(7) All these incongruities appear to reflect the early stages of the process by which the participle active gave rise in the spoken language to the indeclinable adverbial form in -vras of Modern Greek.

880. The -vras present participle is well attested in the post-Ptolemaic papyri and Byzantine literature.! This participle plays almost the same role as it does in Modern Greek. Notice: πάντες

ras

ὀφείλομεν

| στεφανηφωροῦντας

καὶ

Bovfuratrras

θεοῖς

πᾶσι

εἰδέναι

^ xag

P.Oxv. 1021, 14-18 (A.D. 54); Σαραπᾶς ... καὶ Ἑρμᾶς ... καὶ Nivvos . μὴ Exorras πᾶν | πρᾶγμα πρὸς ἐμὲ P. Ryf. 113, 9-13 (A.D. 133); κατὰ Tor πόλεμον

705,

33-3

(v 'A.D.);

συμμαχή

(A.D.

παυτες

200-202];

καὶ

ἔτι

ἄκωντας

καὶ

etc?

1. See

Hatzidakis,

Glorta

2. See

Kapsomenakis,

ti

(1510],

Vorunter.,

p. 300.

pp. 41

vür.

driy[ml

f. (fn. 2).

358

„..

for

5...

ἄκοντα

πανηγυρίζοντας

dreyan

P.Athen.

P.Oxy.

69.

6

$$ 881 - 885 ill.

USES

OF

THE

PARTICIPLE

881. The participle used as substantive, adverb, attributive, and predicate is often found in the papyri. In general, the participle follows the pattern of the Classical construction in these uses. It also shares certain idiomatic uses

with

the N.T.

882. The attributive participle. The participle as attributive with or without the article is equivalent to a relative clause. [n the case of the anarthrous participle the noun (subject or object) precedes it, and as a rule appears without the article. When an anarthrous participle follows a noun with article, it represents not a defining or distinguishing relative clause, but a relative clause conveying additional information or a further description. This recalls directly the Classical norm. Such a use is not to be found very frequently, and is entirely absent from the N.T. E.g. λαμβάνει...

|...

ἀπέστειλα...

οὖσα

{for

γυναῖκα

aplraßas)

οὔσης)

...

|...

προσφερομένην

B πγορασμένας P.Cairo Zen.

ἐν κώμ[ῃ

883. In particular the participle

P.Lond.

334,

of εἶναι

16-17

when

P.Eleph. 59192,

(A.D.

used

1, 2-4

8

[255

(311

B.C.):

B.C.) ; οἰκίας

166).

attributively

is

pre-

ceded by the article in the Ptolemaic papyri, e.g. ev τῆι... οἰκίαι τῆι | οὔσηι P.Tebt. 39, 7-9 (114 B.c.) (cf. Mayser, ii*, p. 347) which share it with ber of N.T. uses (cf. Moulton-Turner, pp. 151 f.). 884. Without

a num-

article:

Piha... |... προσενεχθέντι P.Giss. Univ.-Bibl. 20, 36-7 (ist half of ii /A.D.); τὸν ἐξ ἀρχῆς λόγον |... ἔπεμψά σοι ud’ἕν γεγραμμένον, κεχω!ρισμένον P. Ry. 233, 9-11 (ii /A.D.); τοιαύτην οὖσαν ἀγαθήν P.Lond. Inv. No. 2102, 28 (ii /A.D.); un

βαρέως ἔχε μου τὰ γράμματα voußerour|rJa σε fbid., 26-7: . Δισκᾶν | un ἐκδεχόμενόν σου τὴν παρουσίαν P.Flor. 332, 4-6

ρωσα

! [αὐτὸν

(Hi-1v /A.D.);

885. With article: apposition. E.g. of

Te

ferne

! oc

[τα]ὺς

μισθοὺς

...

!...

ὄντας

ἐν δραχμαῖς

ἐστάλην {πρὸς (ii /A.D.) ; ἐπλή-

P.Grenf.

ii 77, 4-6

etc.

The articular participle preceded by the noun stands εἰσπλέοντες

P.Cairo

Zen.

59021,

9-10

(258

&.C.) i xapray

in τοὺς

συντελουμένους PS. 333, 14 (256 B.C.]; Δημητρίου τοῦ ἀποδιδόντος aoe τὴν | ἐπιστολήν P.Cairo Zen. 59192, 1-2 (255 B.C.) ; similarly ᾿Ηρακλείδης ὁ ἀποδιδοὺς σοὶ τὴν | ἐπιστολήν P.Oxy. 292, 3-4 (c. A.D. 25); "Hpwva τὸν more nyovp evov) P.Fay. 110, 26 (A.D. A.D.] ; οὐ ἀδελφοὶ οὖν

04]; κωμοκατοικοΐ εἰσιν of €[xo|rres οἱ ἐνέγκαντες αὐτό P.Oxy. 1068, 8-9

399

P. Rl, 235, 7-8 lt’ (iii /4,D.]; γράμ anra

ἂν 885. 889 (1)

[SES

ta B5Àoóvra

po

OF

P.Oxy.

THE

123,

PARTICIPLE

5-6

(ΠῚ or iv/A.D.):

1938, 2

(vi/A.D.);

etc.

886. The participle with the article stands occasionally as adjective followed by the noun which it qualifies. E.g. peltja τὸν γεγμαμμένον \aBovans

[αὐτὴν

odldimcadiov) P.Gen.

62,

vn laoouv

P.Lond.

6-7

μισθὸν

P.Grenf.

POxy.

939,

5-6

234, 13-14 (mid.

(mid.

iv/A.D.];

ii 77,

τοῦ

23-4

Üiii-ivy/A.D.);

liv/A.D.];

1v /A.D.];

διὰ

ἐκ τῆς

τοῦ

dro σταλέντος

τοὺς διαφέροντάς

πρηειρημένου

Παύλον

xara-

μοι

τεχνίτας

P.Lond.

232,

g-10

[tv / A.D.) i τὸν" νῦν στρατευθέντα τίρωνα P.Lond. 237, 31 (c. A.D. 346); τοῦ [map |ovrlos) μηνός P.Lond. 245. 7 (A.D. 343); also τοῦ ὄντος μηνός P.Lond. 403, 5 (A.D. 346); both expressions παρόντος and órros occur frequently in official documents;

8-9

(A.D.

similarly

350)

τῆς...

εἰσιούσης

ἐνάτης

νέας

ἰνδικτίηονος

P.Gen..

11,

εἰς.

887. When the participle precedes the noun it ts often separated from it by the insertion of a word or phrases, e.g. τὸ

ἐπενεχθησόμενον

B.C.];

τοῦ

B.C.);

τοῦ

τὰ

map

ἡμῖν

ἡμῶν

δοθέντος

γινόμενα

γεγραμμένον

συνάλαγμα

διαποατελλημένου [τῷ

| παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ

mu

ἔργα

P. Par.

| maióapiov P.Lond.

δίῳ...

P.Oxy..

( sic)

wopeatov

1220,

7-8

P.Oxy.

33 1666,

65,

[1-12

(146

(aj,

18-19.

(101

12-14

(ill / A.D.) ;

(ii/A.D.).

888. The participle is used as a substantive, and as a rule is preceded

article, as in Classical τῶν

viv

addruevov

P.Lille 29 τ]. 139

τοῖς

Greek.

B.C.];

28

| o [mos

muviavowevors

P.Cairo

E.g. Zen.

(ui /B,c.); τοὺς τὸν

καὶ

39060,

5

[237

δὲ ἀπειθοῦντας

am@ouvra

σῶν

by the

...

αὐτῶι

'...

τῶι

τῶι

ὀφλόντι

eravayralere

B.C.|];

P.Tebr,

πέμπιν

P.Teht.

Σαμαπίωνι

315,

τὴν

30-1

διαβεβηιῶσαι

δίκην

hi, 46 (140(i /A.D.):

P.Giss, Univ.-

Bibl. 20, 31-2 (18st half of i1/A.D.]; τὸν ' μέλλοντα ἐνεγκεῖν τὸ σῶμα P.Grenf. M 77, 34-3 {ili-iv/A.D.). Notice also τοὺς ra τοιαῦτα τολμοῦντες {sic}, a Slerea-

typed

expression

in

the

"petitions ",

889. Is some cases the articular participle has been entirely substantivized. This use is not as frequent as in Attic; it is scant in the Ptolemaic papyri,! but well attested in late papyri, especially from the iv/4.p. onwards. The

participle as a substantive (1)

especially

to such

ἀνερχόμενος ὁ “the one who goes up ^, "the messenger";

yopevou

πρὸς

καιρητὶς

(.—

A.D.]

1. See

ts confined

and

Mavser,

ὑμᾶς -Beis)

mponxÜmgv καὶ

elsewhere;

inl, pp.

viv

ypadar τοῦ

so also

am

avepyouévov

ὁ €pyapevos

ı72 f. abo

P.S.4. 299, πρὸς

2-3

ὑμᾶς

“the one

lend

P.Oxy,

who

goes

examples

τυχὼν [τοῦ of

as: à |vep-

ii /A.D.);

123,

3

P.Oxy.

(itl

ev

or

evi

123,

I5;

THE

PARTICIPLE

USED

19 [ui or 1v/A.D.); cf. the phrase See Bauer's Lexicon s.v. (2) ra

ἀποστελλόμενος ἀποσταλέντα

ὁ “the

in

(3) ἀσθενοῦντες ἀσθενοῦντας μὴ

i/B.C.)

A SUBSTANTIVE

as a substttute

messenger”:

the sense

of

"gifts":

for

— $$ 889 (1) - 889 (11)

“the Messiah”

P.Oxy.

1223, 3-4

P.Oxy.

1872,

6

in N.T.

(late iv/a.p.), (v or

but

vi/a.D.}.

of "the sick people": dmooro[A]ov Adyovres {= -vros) τοὺς | παρομᾶν P.Jews 1915, 14-15 (C. A.D. 330-340) corresponding

to ἀντέχεσθε τῶν ἀσθενῶν τ Thess. σοντα τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας. Cf, the early

AS

in

the

sense

of

5: 14. Cf. SG. 596, 16 perfect: noßernwores P.Tebr.

ἑατρὸν θεραπεύ188 (late ti or

“poor”.

(4) γεγραμμένα ra "the written directions”, “records”: P.Eleph. 2, 13 (285283 B.c.); P.Lille ii 13, t1 (iii/B.C.); also in the present: ra γραφόμενα B.G.U. rors lii), 24-5 (ii /B.c.); so also P.Giss. 57, B (vi-vii/A.D.); in the aorist κατὰ Ira γραφέντα “instructions” P.Lond. 234, 10-11 (mid. 1v/A.D.); so also P.Lond. 405. 7 lc. A.D. 346); 245. 17 (A.D. 343); P.Thead. 23. 14 (A.D. 342] ; and elsewhere in P.4binn. In the sense of “letter”: P.Oxy. 1843. ı (vt or vii /A.D.); 1852, 1 (vi or vii/A.D.); and elsewhere in Victor's correspondence, where ra γραφέντα is interchanged with γράμματα Or γραφήν. So also κατὰ ra mpolyeypapμένα "the conditions above written” P.Fay. 91, 28-9 (A.D. 09] ; rà ἐγγεγραμμένα

“what

has

been

written

Á

",

"written

ea

provisions ; see

P.Gen.

46, 25

(A.D.

345]; 11, 14: 17 (A.D. 350). (5)

δεδογμένον

(6)

δέον

ro,

τὸ

“fate”:

δέοντα

ra

TG

i δεδογμένῳ

"what

one

P.Oxy.

ought

to

120,

6-7

do”: εἴπω

(iv /A.D.).

τὸ

δέον

P.Oxy.

1165,

10 (vi/A.D.); so also B.G.U. 432 (ἢ αὐ, τὸ (A.D. 190); SB 5357. 15 (v/A.b.); etc. In plural: ra δέοντα P.Cairo Zen. 59251, B (252 B.c.); P.Petrie i$ 11 (1), 6 (mid. iii /8.C.) ; B.G.U. 251, 4 (4.D. 81); 183, [7] (a.D. 85); 717, 18 (A.D. 149); it occurs (7T)

frequently

διατρίβοντες

living

in

late

papyri: for ref. see

of: πρὸς μὲν

in a foreign

city”,

τοὺς ἐν ἀλλο]

WB

s.v.

δέω.

τρίᾳ πόλει διατρείβοντας

"foreigners"

B.G.U.

267,

10-11

€rar

(A.D.

...

199).

(8) εἰνημένα ra “what one has said”, “the spoken words”: P.Oxy. 4 (A.D. 186); A.P.F. ii (1903), p. 125 (b), 20-1 lii fa.D.); P.Flor. 309,6

B.G.U.

1094,

ἀεχθέντα

13

P.Strassh.

(A.D. 525); SB 5656, 22 20,

7

(A.D. 568);

etc.;

(10) ἐργαζόμενοι of “the workmen” (so μένων P.Ryl. 233, 2 (lifa.D.); ἐδώϊκαμεν {iii /A.D.);

of

καθῆκον

epiyaloule lvoe. fbid.,

τὸ

237 (viti, [iv/a.nD.};

the aorist

ra

(iii /A.D.].

(9) εἰσάγων ὁ “the introducer”: τῶι εἰσάγοντι τοῖς... ı {148-247 B.c.], elsewhere ὁ εἰσαγωγεύς (cf. Mayser,

(1l)

in

"those

"duty " (so

15-16.

also in

also τοῖς Cf.

Modern

δικασταῖς B.G.U. it’, p. 346).

1248,

in Modern Greek]: τῶν ἐργαζοἐργαζομένοις P.Oxy. 1668, 10-11 τῷ

ἐργαζομένῳ

Greek):

Rom.

4: 4.

τοῦ καθήκοντος

! anlalı-

| rovvr Jos P.Oxy. 939. 16-17 (iv/A.D.); ra καϑήκοντα P,Tebr. 105, 51 (103 B.C.); 40. 21 (117 B.C.); P.Oxy. 1121, 14-15 (A.D. 295); so also in the expressions: κατὰ

117):

τὸ

καθ[ηκ]ον

xarà

1203, 3

rà

P.Tebt.

καθήκοντα

43,

P.Lips.

7

(118

27, 24

(late 1'A.D.j.

361

g.c.);

lA.D.

P.Amh.

123):

70,

τι

mapa

(between

τ

A.D.

114-

xa |P5«ov P.Oxy.

SS 889(12)889 (24)

THE

(12) κελευόμενα (mid. tv 'A.D.1;

[5

(1), 6

1837,

3

CNED

AS

A SUBSTANTIVE

ra "commands ^, “orders: rn κελευόμενα P.Lond. 231, 15 SB 4400, 10 {νη τὰν}. in the perfect: ra κε κελευσμένα B.G.U.

(i), 14-15 (A.D.

659

PARTICTLE

[A.D.

learly

194);

also in the aorıst [τ ja κελευσθέντα

B.G.U.

v). A.D.);

1829,

597-399?] ; 1854,

(13) vaya £oneca cf. Hdt. ! 33;

rà. “customs, ¥ 42.

(td) παρὸν

"the

ro.

passive: [τὰ |] κελευσθέίν]τα

228-220;

9

(C.

A D.

"usages

present

{so

362

(vj ‚u

>: W.Chrest.

also

in

70,

Modern

(A.D.

12

ΤῸ

215):

P.Oxy.

tvi" A.D.].

12

Greek):

P.Perrie vi yi ft), 2-3 (mid. inig.c.]; P.Oxy. 1860, ro mapov P.Giss, 47, 15 (A.D. 117-138); SB 53113, 28

B.G.U.

157-56 B.C.J;

ἐπὶ

rov

| map?rros

11 (vi or vil /A.D.); πρὸς [vii /A. D]; ἐν τῷ παρόντι

P.Tehr. 423, 14 yearly in, A.D.); P.Oxy. 1070, 45; 50 fili ’A.D.}! «ara ro παρὸν P.Tebr. 28, ἃ (c. ity B.c.); POxr. 711, 2 (c. 14 B.C.]: 727, 21 1 (A.D. 154). (15)

πιπράπκων

ὁ

142,

6-7

264);

(A.D.

(16) πεπραγμένον

“the

vendor’:

cf.

70,

6

ra-o

μήτε

τὸν

πι πράασκηντα

ξημιούοθαι

P. Flor,

πριήμενος.

"actions " : P,Strassb.

41, 7 (C. A.D.

2501:

B.G.U.

1024

ἐν), 17 liv/A.D.); P.Cairo Masp. 67131, yg: 23 (vi /A.D.]: also in the aorist: ra πραχθέντα P.Lond. 408. 13 (mid. Iv /A.D.|; τῶν πραχθέντων P.Lips. 40 (ii), 9g

(end

of

iv-beg.

(IT) πρέπον

τό

πρέπον

enrir

πάντα

τὰ

"the

P.Oxy.

ὁ

v/a.D.]. right

mo,

πρέποντα

(18) πριάμενυς πριάμενος

of

"the ὁ

ἣν

"what

/A.D.];

ἐλευθέραις

ιΑἀβίνναιος

(19) στρατηγήσας

thing”,

24

ra

. γυναιξίν

"the

48,

fitting"

C.P.R.

purchaser ': ras P.Gen.

is

πρέποντη

δὲ

18-21

30

the 18-19

(sic)

345!

;

ex-strategus |: Νεμεσιανωῦ

expressions:

r121,

{ii),

Bours

(A.D.

in

P.Oxy.

11

[A.D.

ὡς

245];

[vi/aA.D.).

ἐντεῦϑει

παρέ Außer

cf.

o

τοῦ

orparnyraarrus

ὁ

fimpütckuv.

P.Oxy.

513, 4-5 (A.D. τ}: Anda ... στρατηγήσαντι P.Oxy. 1664, 18 (ili /A.D.); and similarly many participles indicating degree or position of the ἄρχων type. Very

common:

βασιλεύων,

κωμαρχήπας,

γραμματεύπας,

οἰκονομήσας,

τοπαρχήσας,

etc,

(20) συμβὰν

τὸ, ra-vra "what

has

happened " {so also in Modern

Barra PLSSf. 299, 3 (end of ii /A. D.) ; to

ra

συνβεβη «ora.

ra γεγονός

common

(210) συρτηαχθέντα

ra

P.Par..

48,

5-6

throughout

P.Oxy. [153

the

1065, 5 (mr/A.D.] ; it corresponds

B.C.);

history

"terms "^: P.Oxy.

of

1847.

3

cf.

ra

(23)

τεκυῦσα

texotaav

ἡ

P.Lond.

“the Inv.

authors,

mother” No.

2102,

while

(so

in

27

in

(vi or

the N.T.

Attic

γινόμενα

the Greek

drama:

Luke

9:7

and

language.

vii/A.D.).

(22) συνειδὸς τό "conscience": ὑπὸ κακοῦ auvedsros A.D.] : οὐ καλῷ συνειδήτι χρώμενοι P.Flor. 137*, 3 (A.D. frequently in Hellenistic as ἃ noun.

Greek}: ra oup-

P.Oxy. 592, 22-3 {ΠῚ 264), ro συνειδὸς occurs

only

see

Paul

LSJ

uses

sv.

this word

rékrw]:

τὴν

[ih "A,D.).

(24) φιλῶν 6, φιλυῦσα ἡ "of relatives”: ἀσπάξομαι τοὺς φιλοῦντας σε P.Mich. 401, 19 lit A.D); simderly B.G.U. 27, 18. fit or itt /A.D.); 932, 8 (n-ni /A.D.); 625, 35 (beg. of ii ’A.D.): P.Lond, Inv. No. 1575, 22-3 (early 111/a.D.): P.Ow. i075, 39 ΠΗ ἰὰ. ἢ.} and elsewhere.

362

SI

PPELEMENTARV

(25) ypeworougera

ra

τὴν

χρεωστουμένων

! διάλυσιν

μένα

PiJews

τῶν

1915,

"liabilities ^,

21-2

Ic.

PATICUICIPILE

“arrears”

P.Oxr.

A.D.

ἂς 889

Iso

71,12-13

220-440]:

P.Oxy.

890. Supplementary (predicative) participle. The

also (A.D.

in

Modern

303];

1853.

(25) - 894

11

τὰ

Greek): ypewaruc-

(si or vii ’A.0.).

participle may

play the part

of a predicate and agree with either the subject (nominative), or with the direct complement of the governing verb (oblique case). In the first case the participle

is found

with

verbs

expressing

existence,

like

εἰμέ,

γίνομαι

(ὑπάρχω, προὐπάρχω In the N.T.). Eu and γίνομαι form, in fact, a periphrastic tense;! these two verbs occasionally possess a sense of impersonality or possibility, and place of the infinitive, e.g. σὺ

&iwaros

exurn

ef

διοικῶν

P.Amh.

35.

πειβαρχυῦσα

alu|rod

αὐτοῦ

Tu

κιν ἢ

P.Caire

42-3 ὡς

(132

the participle

Zen.

39060,

B.C); αὐτοῖς

1!

(237

[élorw

wpnon|xo|r

ὑπαρχήνταωιν

following

ἔστιν

δέ 104,

In particular the supplementary participle categories of verbs: 891. With an

verbs denoting

action",

κάμνω,

and

Anyw,

related

“continuance”, meanings, e.g.

παραμένω,

παύομαι,

&.C.];

eae

ardpos,

13-15

take

raid

T|a|pa

the

οὕτως

Φιλίσκωι

xuptidetougar

(92

is found

to

A

ἰπολλωνίαι

γυναῖκα

P.Teht.

seems

per

B.C.}.

with

"interruption ', and

the following

“cessation

of

ἁλίσκομαι, didyw, (δια-)τελῶ, (amo-)

προσδοκῶ,

οἴχομαι,

τυγχάνω.

892. With verbs of "emotion" such as χαίρω, εὐχαριστῶ (also in the N.T.), ἀγανακτῶ, λυποῦμαι, ὀργίζομαι. The infinitive is also attested. The N.T. ıs decidedly inclined towards the latter construction (cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk. § 415). Nevertheless αἰσχύνομαι is constructed only with infinitive, and Av-

ποῦμαι takes ὅτι besides the participle. 893. With verbs signifying to "manifest", “be hidden”, “be evident", "report”, "show" like (ἀπο-, ἐπι-)δείκνυμι (and infinitive, or örı-clause), δηλῶ (also with infinitive and tts equivalents), Aavéavw (also with örı-clause), φαΐνομαι (rarely with the infinitive), ἀναφέρω. 894. With verbs of “perception” and “cognition” the participle is well maintained in the papyri and N.T. The ore-clause may sometimes replace the

I. On periphrasis in general see Bjork, "He διδάσκων die periphrustischen Konstruktionen im Griechischen (Skrifien, Καὶ, Him. Vet.-samf, i Uppsala 32, 2 119401) : also Blass-Debr.-

Funk, § 352 [with lit.!; Mayser, ii’, pp. 223 f.

363

ἂς 894 - 896

SUPPLEMENTARY

PARTICIPLE

participial construction; a difference in meaning (not always intelligible) may be given if the infinitive is used. The latter is more common with verbs of cognition. Verbs of “perception” express some sort of “seeing”, like βλέπω (also

with

the örı-clause),

θεῶμαι,

θεωρῶ,

κατανοῶ,

ὁρῶ.

᾿Ακούω

is to be

listed in this group but its construction is not frequent with the participle; the papyri as well as the N.T. have much limited this construction in favour of the infinitive or örı-clause. Verbs of cognition share also other constructions. e.g. ἀγνοῶ (also with ὅτι), γινώσκω (also with infinitive, ὅτι, ws), γνωρίζω

(also

with ὅτι and

even

ἵνα), ἐπίσταμαι

(also

with

infinitive ὅτι, διότι),

εὑρίσκω (also with infinitive and ὅτι), καταλαμβάνω (ὅτι in the N.T.), μανθάνω, (usually with clause).

infinitive

or

örı-clause), οἶδα

(also

with

infinitive

or

ὁτιώς-

895. The participle is often used with ἔχω. In this case ἔχω plays an auxiliary role, forming thus a periphrastic tense as in Modern Greek. This is a phenomenon which occurs entirely in post-Ptolemaic times; see P.Oxy. 2190, 32-4 (late i/a.n.); 2342, 15 (A.D. 102). A few parallels can be found in the N.T. (cf. ἔχε pe παρητημένον Luke 14: 18). 896. Apart from the above uses, the participle is sometimes treated in an idiomatic way, which is parallel to some extent in the N.T. (cf. Blass-Debr.Funk, § 419). First we find the participle with the indicative or imperative, in a construction where it would be just as possible to use coordination with καί. E.g. ἐλήλυθεν... | ... λέγων P.Fay. 123, 15-16 (c. A.D. 100) equivalent to ἦλθεν

...

καὶ

εἶπεν.

Similarly

ἐνιγίκον

Epy| ὁ ]p.svos

P.Teht,

421,

b-7

(ili/A.D.)

and éveyxov | ἐρχομένη P. Mich. 214, 20-1 (c. A.D. 293); πέμπων δὲ δήλωσον P.Oxy. 1223, 28 (late iv/a.n.). Pleonastic participles are sometimes found

after ἀποκρίνομαι,

ἐρωτῶ, λέγω. There is some doubt whether this use in

the papyri is related to Biblical Greek (indeed, it points to some sort of Semitic background).! In the Classical construction ἀποκρινόμενος εἶπε Plato, Pror. 314d the general word “say” is finite, and the special word

“answer”

1s participle.

In the papyrus-construction

ἀπεκρίθησαν ἡμῖν φή-

σαντες P.Par. 35, 30 (163 R.c.) the general word is participle, the special word finite; cf. ἀπεκρίθη λέγων Mark 15: 9 etc.? Similarly ἀποκέκριται ...!... τοιαῦτα

Il. See τς

λέγων

and

ἀντιλέγω

Moulton-Turner,

Hence

the

translation

pp.

145

in the

λέγων

P.S.1. 340, 5-6; 8 (257-256 n.c.); and from

f English

Authorized

364

Version

“he

answered

saying .

ADVERBIAI,

PARTICIPLE

δ

896 - 900

later papyri: ἐντέγραψας Aéy[ o ly B.G.U. 523, 5-6 (undated); ἠρώτησε λέγων B.G.U. 624, 15 (A.D. 284-305)! The addition of a participle of a cognate, or the same verb is quite rare. Such constructions appear in rade λέγει ... ᾿Αμμωνία ... καὶ ... | ᾿Απολλωνία ... καὶ ' Hpádx[ Alea... καὶ ' Hpats ... at τέτταρες λέγουσαι P.Giss. 36, 10 ff. (135 B.C.); ἐγὼ δὲ ἔφην αὐτῷ | λέγων P.S.I. 12-13 (iii/A.D.);

(see 709 (5)).

897. Construction of participles combined without conjunction show an asyndeton which reveals a certain feeling for style. Examples are found only occasionally in post-Ptolemaic papyri. E.g. ἀλλὰ ἄλλοι | ἐλθόντες θέλοντες Geis |... | ..., κατελθὼν...

αὐτὸ συνφωνήῆϊσαι PSF. 91, 8-11 (ii/A.D.); den|... ἐχρησάμην P.Oxy. 1666, 7-10 (iii /A.D.).

898. Adverbial participle. Participles of this kind are used to express relation of time, manner, cause or concession. With regard to the participle of purpose (Classical future participle), papyri seldom use this construction, which is replaced by the infinitive, or kindred constructions (see 771). The sense of time, manner, etc., is not expressed by the participle in itself, but is supplied fróm the context, or else from some added particle such as apa, εὐθύς,

ἕως,

μόλις,

ποτέ,

viv

(= time),

οὕτως

(= manner),

καίπερ,

καίτοι

(= concession). 899. A participle of purpose occurs in the passage: προσῆλθον αὐτῷ | αἰτήσων P.Graux 4, 8-9 (A.D. 248), in contrast to the usual construction of verbs of motion with the infinitive. Purpose may be expressed by the participle fol-

lowed by ws, e.g. οὕτως δὲ ἀκριβολογήθητι πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα ! ὡς χειρογραφήσων τὸν βασιλικὸν ὅρκον P.Freib. 7, 3-4 (251 B.c.); purpose is also expressed

by the participle in place of the infinitive, e.g. ἀπόστιλόν | μοί τινα... | παραμέvovra (= παραμένειν) P.Oxy. 120, 11-13 (iv/A.D.): see especially 712 f. The interesting point in this example is that purpose appears to be expressed by a present participle. 900. The

participle expressing a relation

κατεργασάμενος

|. The

text

according

' ἀπέδωκα

to ed.

pr.:

P.Cairo

πολλὰ

Zen.

yap

365

of time is very common. 59021,

μὲ

6-7

Npwrnae,

(258

λέγων,

&c.);

ὅτι

Eg.

ἐμβαλόμευος

δηυλεύσω.

$3 900 - 903

ADVERBIAL

DE

ἀπόστειλον

P.Freib.

3-4

7.2

(251

B.C.);

(A. D. ,8-117}:

122, G-10

A.D.}:

(c.

A.D.

μόλις

100):

εὗρον

αὐτόν

γενοῦ

ἐμέ

2-3

(256

λαβών

cov

THY

τὸ Act

P.Oxy.

wav

[ao lo»

1482,

1295,

P.Tebt,

39154.

ποτέ

γράψας

P.Oxy.

πρὸς

Zen.

ἕως amroAafliv

€xfernaas

σπάσω}

P.Caira

PARTICIPLE

I-4

or

in A.D.):

(tit;

A.D.) :

(m /A.D.]; ... ἧκαι Ifor ἧκε imperative) Also the stereotyped phrase ἐπερωτηθεὶς of any sort, receipts, etc. (see 340 {3)).

σοι

P.Tebr.

€Afla

P. Heid.

γράψω

315,

μαῖα}.

πάντη

2.

γεωμέτρησον

ἥσθην

πάλιν

(ti'a.D.); rode

(it

421,

ἐπελθὼν

ἐπιστηλὴν

τιμ[ als

ra βιβλία ἄνελ de

14

5-6

τῆς

B.C.];

36,

P. Fay.

13-18.

πέμψασα

(ii;

amo-

ὑπερθέμενος

un:

P.Oxv.

POxy. 120 (verso). «puoÀoygca common

1065,

3-4

4-5 (iv/A.D.). in agreements

901. A virtually hypotactic relation may also be expressed by a paratatic construction, the participle being replaced then by the indicative followed by καί. The papyri provide adequate evidence of this kind of parataxis, which becomes common in post-Ptolemaic times. Such parataxis is due, not toa striving after a vivid narrative style, but to the influence of popular speech, reflected mostly in letters. E.g. ἔλα Bow 1079,

mapa 6-9

4-15. οὖν

τοί

(A.D.

41):

11 /A.D.);

rc

goO9 xai

αὐτοὺς

καὶ

“ApaBos

ἔπεμψα

ἀγρῦς

αὐ Bloels

arreypa ἥκουσα

fis

ἐν

20-2

(1v/A.D.];

ya

ov

P.Lond.

| σοι

καὶ

τὴν

' ἐπιστολὴν σον

ἔφαγαν

καὶ

ἔδωκα

418,

P.Lond.

πιρέδωκεν

12

(t.

243,

καὶ

ἄρουραν P Orr.

A.D.

9-11

aurn{r)

irn

ἀνέγνω. καὶ

528,

3465];

le.

346);

καὶ

ἐλυπήϑην

αἀπήλθην

14-05

ἠξίωπι

A.D.

Πίστῃ

καὶ

B.G.U.

P. Hanh.

(H/A.D.); αὐτοὺς

καὶ

πρηπέεικεν

ὑπεδέξατη

„..

06,

ἐξήτησα neny

γὰρ

κασα

o ᾿ἰπᾶς

P.Lond.

2.1,

elc.

902. [n addition to the relation of time, some passages express a nuance of condition, or purpose, as often this can happen in Classical Greck. For example: (1)

Time - condition:

ποῦντες en

οὖν

τελευτῶν

εὐρίπκομεν

ἔγραψα

mov

19,

P.Lond.

five

πηλλήκις

(2)

Time-purpose ; éréareMe]|

and

give”

PS.

333,

903. The participle may

7-8

xni δ᾽

gov

καὶ

ἀνα πλέηις

Cycadvev,

νοῶν,

...[Terwör rendered

PLilfe

10

[1068

No.

pes

igi,

B.C.);

15373

2

(218

B.C):

prnpover aur

17-18

AnroAdlwrins

(early

δὲ

ἐπισκο-

| ἐρχόμενος

Wi: A.D.).

πριάμενον

δυῦναι

“to

buy

mc.

express the manner or circuntstances in

A temporal

sense

is easily felt in

a number of

E.g.

Carros ar

yap

(256

be used to

which an action takes place.

these cases.

καταλείπει

P.Lond.

εἰς

ὑγιαίνων

φρυνῶν

ἔχοντα) by

Beaus

"with".

ἀπελθόντος P.Cairo

P.Grenf.

P.Hib. Also

54,

Zen.

i 21,

2-5

P.Perrie

400

17

39426,

5

t

B.C.);

(120

lc. 245

aé[q%|x[éc]

n

por

(rq)

(260-250

amola]|

B.c.): here οὕτως

. 7

μηδὲν

(c.

B.C.)

215 ;

reAov

R.C.]

rade

...

the participle ἔχων

(for

;

ws

διέθετο

6...

must be

με... €yovra)

|

ALVERBIAL. B.G.U. 814, 16 (ii or iii/A.D.); (iv/A.D.). Likewise ἄγων and

PARTIOIPLE

s& 903 - 906

ἔμεινα ἔρημος alnjöera ἔχουσα P.Bour. 25, 11! φέρων exercise the same function: παραγενοῦ

.. Non ἄγων καὶ τὸν ποιμένα P.Hib. 55, 2-3 (250 B.C.) ; ἀπέσταλκα σοι Φίλωνα φέροντα ἐπιστολήν P.Lille 17, 3 {iii /8.c.). Elsewhere ἀποπεπτώκαμεν | rAavapevas (sie) ὑπὸ τῶν | θεῶν καὶ πιστεύοντες | τὰ ἐνύπνια P,Par. 47, 27-30 (c. 152 B.C); ra ἄριστα] πράττων P.Oxy. 292, 12-13 (c. A.D. 25); περιϊιεπύησε λέγον |-: λέγων) P.Fay.

111,

8-9

(A.D.

95-95);

iva

ἔχων

ὑπογύως

ἐν

μνήμηι

τὰς

τιμὰς...

|.

ἔχηι P.Ryl. 233, 12-13 (ii /A.D.), ἐρωμένον (sic) εὐτυχεῖν B.G.U. 423,4 (ti A. p.): mepiperr[ ovje οἷα δεῖ πράττων P.S.L. 1100, 28 (A.D. 161); πένθος ἡγούμην νυκτὸς κλέων ἡμέρας δὲ πενθῶςν» P.Oxy. 528. 8-9 lii/A.D.); so also éppaj of] αἱ ! ὑμᾶς

εὔχομ(αι)

εἰ 6

SayJov

ras

P.Oxy.

1668,

324-5

(il /A.D.);

ἔἶ p] poco

μοι

διὰ παντὸς εὖ mpáo[c]ovaa P.Oxy. 120, 26 liv/A.D.); εὔχομε τῷ Ale) ὦ ὑγιένουσάν σε καὶ εὐθυμοῦσαν ἀπολαβῖν τὰ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ γράμματα P.Bour. 25, 4-6 liv; A.D.)

etc.

904. The participle expressing cause is used as it is in Classical Greek. However are, οἷον, ofa never occur; ws is the only particle occasionally combined with the participle. E.g. οἱ δὲ

ἄν θ[ ρω)] ποι ἀγανακτοῦσιν

P.Cairo

Zen.

59021,

20-4

...

(258

οὔτε

mB.C.];

duva μένοι

ei;

προειδὼς ἀσφαλῆ

τὴν

χώραν

τὴν

ἀποστέλλειν

ἐγδοχὴν

οὖσαν

atio

P.S.1. 349, 8 (254-253 B.C.); ἀμηχανῶ οὐκ εἰωθὼς peintelilv P.Giss. Univ.- Bibl. 20, 12 (1st half of ii/A.D.]; [ov] τε προσεϊκιίνησα θεοὺς φοβουμένη cov τὸ | perewpov P.Flor. 332, 11-13 (ii/A.D.]; ἀγωνιῶμεν yap μὲ (= an) [βλ] ἐπου ]σαΐ σε

P.Giss. 17, 12-13 (ii /A.D.); τὰς yap ἐντολάς cov ἥδιστα | ἔχων ὡς χάριτας λὴμψομαι P.Oxy. 1664, 11-12. (iii /A.D.); θαρὸν yap τῇ σὲ (for o5) ἀρετῇ |... yeypadexa P.Oxy. 1872, 4-5 (v or vi/A.D.). With ws: cf. Mayser, ii?*, p. 63. From post-Ptolemaic

times: πέμψωι

rac

Nyepl ὄν}

ws

alge|'Aotvra

τῆς

εἰσπραζ ξεως]

"for neglect of the collecting" P.Teht. 289. 8-9 (A.D. 23); ws ἱκανὰ BAamro μένων xai κινδυνευόντων “on the ground that they were incurring serious losses" P.Oxy. 44, 8-10 (end of i/A.D.); ws elilöoras ὅτι "as we know that” P.Oxy. 123, 17 liii or iv/A.D.).

905. The participle expressing condition is by no means common, because papyri and Koine authors developed the ἐάν (av)-construction to express all kinds of conditional sentences. Only a few examples of conditional participles are found; they belong to the Ptolemaic period, and are confined to stereotyped expressions. As a rule they show a temporal sense too. E.g. χαριεῖ οὖμ μοι σαυτοῦ larly

τυῦτ[ο

μὲν

B.C.]; τοῦτο δὲ ποήσας cf. Mayser, ii*, p. 64.

906. Concessive.

τε

ποιήσας

Papyrı,

ἐπιμελόμενος ἔσει

dan

ἡμῖν

μοι

P.Cairo Zen. 50251,

BeBof ει 7ηθηκώ[:]

κεχαρισμένος

P.Tehr.

3

(252

P.Cairo Zen.

50,

15-16

B.C.) ; simi59272,

5. 1251

(late ii /B.c.);

Koine and N.T. employ καίπερ, καίτοι OF kat ταῦτα

367

ss 906 - 907

GENITIVE

ABSOLUTE

before the participle. The adverb πλεονάκις is also a word indicative ofconcession. Papyri in particular favour the genitive absolute to express concession (see 908). E.g. ἀπηιτημένος

πλεονάκις

ἀπαιτούμενος

οὐκ

ὑπ᾽] e| μοῦ

P.Hib, 30, 15 (300-271 μένου ὅτι οὐκ [257

B.C.);

nBou οἵ.

| ἀπέδωκε)

PLile

ii

17,

! οὐκ ἀποδίδωσιν P.Lille

&.c.);

Aero,

P.Par..

P.Fay.

11, 20-1

acrovuev[oc].

ἀργύριον

35,

28

(163

8.C.].

3;

25,4

(both 221

B.c.j;

i 30, 6-7 (218 B.c.); similarly

(c. 115

B.C.). Otherwise: pawo-

δοῦναι P.Cairo Zen.

Also

rafaperos

μοι

ὅτι

59041, "épyout€.

11-15 οὐ x

]«A»8us P.Lond. Inv. No. 1575. 9-10 (early iit /A.D.); καίτοι μὴ BovdAopevos P.Oxy. 1666, 7 (Wi /A.D.); ἐπιθυμῶν οὖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς | τῷ ἀναπλόῳ καταντῆσαι περιεκλεῖσθημεν "though I longed to pay you a visit on the voyage up we were

restricted"

fbid.,

11-12.

907. Genitive absolute.! This construction of the participle is well attested in both Ptolemaic and post-Ptolemaic papyri. The participle in the genitive is usually found in official documents to indicate the date, e.g. βασιλεύοντος, carparmevovros and the like. [n the Christian papyri (but also in pagan compositions) the expression θεοῦ θέλοντος (βοηθοῦντος and the like) is quite frequent. E.g. ἐκ τούτην ἐλπίζω ταχὺ mpoxoloac τῶν θεῶν θελόντων B.G.U. 423, 17-18 (ii /A.D.); θεῶν συνλαμβανόϊντων ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐπὶ [τὸ] | κομψότερον ἐτράπη P.Oxy. 935. 3-5 (Hi /A.D.); Bewer οὖν βουλομένων ... |... πειράσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς γενέ! [oF] as

P.Oxy, 16656, 15-17 (}}κ.Ὁ.}. In other cases: ἐπιζητεῖ viv ... |... πῶς elmϑηταί μοι ἀπόντος σου P.Flor. 332, 6-8 [ii /A.D.); τοσαύτας ἡμεῖν ἐπιστολὰς Beeren |ψάμην κοὐδεμείαν μοι ἀντεγράψαται, τοσούτων | καταπλευσάντων P.Lond. Inv. No. 2102, 6-8 (ii /A.D.]; ἵνα θερμῶς λουσώμεθα χειμῶντος ὄντος P.Flor. 127, 6-7 (A.D. 256); τῆς τιμῆς, ὅταν i αὐτὰς ἐπιδεωρήσω, εὐθέως | σοι ἐξοδιαζομένης

P.Flor, 142, 9-11 (A.D. 264]; πολλάκις μον ἐπιστεί Aavrds σοι καὶ χάρτας émaroλικο[ὑς ἀπο]! στείλαντος, ἵν᾽ εὐπορῆς τοῦ ypal dew} μοι, σὺ οὐδὲ ὅλως ἠξίωσας P.Flor.

367, 6-9

{Π|ῤ4.0.}];

ἐχάρην

μεγάλως

κομισάμεινός

aov

ἐπιστολήν, δύντος

μαι αὐτὴν τοῦ μαχαιρὰ (perhaps Μαχαιραὶ P.Oxy. 1676, 4-6 (ili /A.D.]); εἴ mos δυνηθείης || πρὸς ἡμᾶς) ἀφικέσθαι, τοῦτο τοῦ καθήκοντος | ἀπία] τοῦντ]ος P.Oxy. 939, 15-17 (iv/A.D.); ἀπέσπασας( σας) αὐτοὺς τοσούτων ] | af δικημ]) ¢τῶν

τοσούτων

"Hpwva

τὰν

γεναμένων

ἐλβήντα

ἐν τῇ

| pera

τῶν

κώμῃ

P.Lond.

408,

σῷ [ν]ὶ γραμμάτων

6-7

μὴ

(mid.

iv/A.D.);

| εὑρεθέντος

ἐξέτασαν

ulo]v

ἐν τῇ

ἡμετέρᾳ μουὶ κώμῃ P.Gen. 54, 12-15 (mid. iv/A.D.); | e|] μοῦ μὴ παρ] d]vros ἀλλα τῆς γυναικὸς || ulorys μενούσης ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, τινὲς xaxovp'γοε νυκτὸς λῃστρικῷ

rporw

I. Cf. Mayser,

ἐπήλθαςν»

ii*, pp.

P.Lond.

65 - 77

245,

{with

8-10

lit.).

(A.D.

368

343).

|

GENITIVE

ABSOLUTE

$§ 908 - 910 (3)

908. The participle of this kind may exercise the function of the adverbial participle, i.e. express time, cause, condition, or concession exactly as in Classical Greek. Long narratives are sometimes carried on with a succes-

sion of genitives absolute. Cf. ὅτι ἀποδημοῦντός cov καὶ τῶν ὠνῶν | un ἐπιδεδεγμένων ὑπὸ τῶν τελωνῶν | unde μὴν ἄλλων mpocepy| ομ]έμων ad τοῖς {{πολλάκις ] πολλάκις προκηρυχθεισῶν ἔλαβον P.Oxy. 44, 18-22 (end of i/a.p.). 909. Nevertheless, it is easy to observe that this construction does not fol-

low the Classical patterns with regard to the relation between participle and main sentence. For instance, we may find a participle in the genitive absolute, although its subject plays some part (as subject or object)! in the main sentence. This is due to a tendency to use the participial form independently in the same way as the infinitive appears with its subject in accusative, though it is identical with that of the governing verb. 910. The genitive absolute is found (1)

Nominative;

(cf.

Mayser,

ii?,

with reference to: pp.

68

f.);

furthermore,

aneora

Any

εἷς

τὸν

ὑπὸ coi νομὸν μόνος |... | ἐμηῦ αἰτησαμένου τὸν vopov P.Giss. 11, 4-7 (A.D. 118); πᾶν ποίησον οὖν͵ κύριέ pou | ἀδελφέ, σοῦ κατερχομένου Aafliv τὸ κέρμα | καὶ aya-

pace μοι P.Oxy. 1775, 11-13 [iv/A.D.]; €ypudá ποι οὖν τῇ χρηστότητε ὡς εἰδόros pou P.Lond. 411, 16-17 (mid. iv/A.D.]; ὅπως συνχωρήσης ... |... δυναμένον σου P.Lond, 232, 11-12. (iv/A.D.); ἀπελθόντων ἡμῶν ἐκῖσαι εὐρήκαμεν P.Gen. 534, 31 (mid. 1v/A.D.); vyiévovroc «a»ov καὶ ev 8] υἱμοῦντος προσδέξη Ta ἐμὰ ypalplara P.Gen. 53. 7-9 (mid. 1v/A.D.]; πγροφυλήκων ... |... | avaζητούντων etpav P.Lond. 403, |... [e$9pov]. P.Lond. 407, τ|ὧν (2)

κατάλιψαν Accusative

P. Lond.

:

406,

εὐχαριστῶ

11-13 (A.D. 346); the same: 7-8 (A.D. 340]; τῶν γωνέων 5-4

ra

Ic.

A.D.

κορίω

ἐμοῦ ἀναζητοῦντος μου τελεύυτη ] σάν-

340].

Σ᾽ εράπιδι

"ὅτι

μου

κινδυνεύσαντος

«i$

θαάλασ-

σαν |! ἔσωσε εὐθέως B.G.U. 423, 6-8 (11/A.D.]; ἐμοῦ ἀπετοῦντος pou τὼ χρέως τῶν χρεωσ]τῖ μοι, ἀπέκλισέν με P.Lond. 240, 7-8 (A.D. 346); cf. μὴ ἔχοντος αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι,

ἐκέλευσεν

αὐτὸν

Mart.

(3) Genitive, so that the Aavros σοι... |... l|...

P. Flor, 367, 6-10

18:

25.

pronoun becomes pleonastic: πολλάκις pov ἐπιστεί av οὐδὲ ὅλως ἠξίωσας ... |... peprnoßai μου]

{iiifa.p.}, though

the remoteness of the participle on the one

hand and the emphasis on the other excuse the repetition of pou: cf. μον yeypadnxaros 00: .„.. eee |... οὐδέποτε ὑ{πα|! κήκοας ἡμῶν

P.Hib.

78,

1-6

(244-243

|l. The construction by which subject

or object of

the

main

waco vanis [= ἐμοῦ)

B.C.).

the

subject

sentence

of is

the

genitive absolute is

also found

in Classical

the same as the

Greek, especially in

Thucydides.

369 B. G. Mandtlaras,

The

Verb in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

24

$8 910 (4) - 914 (4)

PARTICIPLE

Dative:

τοῦ

δὲ

εἶπα αὐτῶι μὴ ἐμὲ τὸν ἀγρὸν μου εἶπέν ros

αὐτοῖς

ἰδοὺ

ἀδελφοῦ

oov

FOR

INFINITIVE

συμπεσόντος

uoc

|...

| xat

ἀξιώσαντός

pe

---

| ἀξιοῦν P.Par. 49, 10-10 (c. 160 B.C.); περιερχομένου] pov | μοι P.Gen. 49, 8-10 (mid. iv/A.D.); cf. ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦν-

ἄρχων

...

προσεκύνει

αὐτῷ

Mart.

Q:

18.

911. Replacement of the genitive absolute by accusative is attested in the papyri (no example from the N.T.). E.g. καὶ ὑμῖν δὲ γράφοντας ! ὑπὲρ ὧν αἱρε[ἴσ͵]θε, ws πᾶν n[ploPvporepov τελεω! θ]ησόμενον P.Grenf. i 30, 7-9 (103

B.C.). A true accusative absolute occurs in the passage: δόξαν ἡμεῖν ἔγραψα P.Oxy. 44, 10 (end of 1/a.p.). Still more often papyri employ the nominative absolute:! μεταπεμψάμενος (sc. ἐγὼ) οὖν Χαρίδημον ἐρωϊτώμενος ἔφασεν P.Cairo Zen. 59140, 5-7 (250 B.C); καταντήσας (sc. ἐγὼ) οὖν | πρὸς τὸν γεωργὸν ...] ... εἶπε B.G.U. 1873, 7-9 (i/B.c.); ἐγὼ μόνος πάϊνυ ἐμαυτὸν τηρῶν ὑπὲρ τὸν aoldaAnv

mace

ἐλέσχε

τοῦ

κόσμου | περὶ

ἐμὲ

γίνοντε

| P.Oxy.

1298, 6-9 (iv/a.n.).

IV.

RELATIONSHIPS

BETWEEN

PARTICIPLE

AND

OTHER

MOONS

912. Participle for infinitive. The close relationship between these two moods is exemplified by the fact that both can be freely used in constructions where Classical Greek would choose either the participle or the infinitive. This produced a consequence of great importance for the Greek language, as it prepared the way for the participle to lose its inflexion. 913. First comes the use of the participle after prepositions (see examples quoted in 879), a construction which proves by itself the plausible connection between infinitive and participle. 914. Very often infinitive and participle occur together both are dependent on the same governing verb. E.g. παραγέγραμμαι

εἰληφέναι

...

᾿Απολλώνιον

τῶι

! xac μὲν

πμάκτορι

...

ws

OldeiAwr)

ὑποθέμενος...

: συμβαίνει

trop πλείω

|...

+

1. This construction

goes

favour

vi

it:

ef.

Cvr.

Li

back 1,

31:

1

to Classical Hell,

iv 1,

Greek, 24.

pp. 105 ff.

370

For

...

καὶ

L]

where

and

δίπλειον !

(07), 2 ff. (258-253

[δια] τρίβειν ἐν τῆι χώραι,

δὲ ἔξω τε σκηνοῦντα | «]at γεγαμηκότα καὶ τέκνον 256 B.C.); xapiet : σὺν σοὶ αὐτὸν εἰσαγαγὼν καὶ T7

lópayuüs)

P.Petrie ii 13 χρόνον

in a sentence,

8.C.):

'Ayvrirar

“ὑπάρχον P.S.I 340, 8-11 (257προστατῶν αὐτῶν for [αὐτοῦ ^

Xenophon

particulars

see

L)

-

especially

à

-

scemsto

Kühner-Gerth,

11,

PARTICIPLE probably)

xai

ἐπὶ τῶν

FOR

προσαγωγῶν

INFINITIVE

! μηθὲν

ἄνευ

$8 914 - 919

σὸν

ποιεῖν

P.Tebr.

20, 4-7

(113

B.C.); καίτοι ἢ μηδὲν λαβόντα ὑπολαμβῖ ἄγεις ! [5 Al μεληκέναι; POxy. 2276, 13-14 (late it to ıv/A.D.). This construction is fairly frequent with καλῶς ποιεῖν: καλῶς

ἂν ποιήσαις ἐπισκεψάμενος

fen.

59291,

6.7

(251-250

ἀναβῆ ve B.G.U.

1676,

ἡμᾶς

B.C.);

11-13

καὶ μὴ mepieideiv

καλῶς

apr

ποιήσις

(li /A.D.).

^| παραπολλυμένους

An

Bur

μου

τὰ

P.Cairo

γράμματα

καὶ

.

915. The participle is also found with verbs such as δοκῶ, εὔχομαι, ἀποστέλAw or impersonal infinitive. E.g. μὴ

δόξης

pe ἡμεληκότα

xulpio τινα

expressions,

Bew

...

evyouae

which

POxy.

P.Oxy,

[παραμένοντα

μοι

113,

16

2276, P.Oxy.

originally

were

(1 /A.D.);

29-30 120,

constructed with the

ἐρρωμένην

ae «é»v

(late ill 10 ıv/A,D.);

11-13

(iv/A.D.);

(read

σ᾽ er)

ἀπηστιλὴν

παρακαλῶ

δὲ

καὶ

! pot a£io

| alo, τόν] δημάσιον ταβουλάριον | κελεῦσαι ἀποσταλῆναι ἐπιθεωροῦντα (Class. ἐπιθεωρήσοντα: Pap. ἐπιθεωρεῖν or ἐπιθεωρῆσα) P.Oxy. 2268, 14-15(late v/A.D.].

Notice

ἀλλὰ σὺ etxavos el διοικῶν

(for διοικεῖν) P.Cairo Zen. 39060,

916. With verbs also constructed motion (ἀποστέλλω,

πέμπω

r1 [257 B.C.).

with the infinitive. For instance verbs of

and the like), which

usually in the language of the

papyri take an infinitive of purpose, are nevertheless particularly liable to

take a participle in this sense. Verbs of perception (βλέπω, θεωρῶ, ὁρῶ and the like) share both structed

with

cognition

constructions,

the

infinitive

(γινώσκω,

or

while

ἀκούω

örı-clause

On

δοκιμαζω, ἐπίσταμαι,

is the

more

frequently

other

εὑρίσκω,

hand,

con-

verbs

olön) prefer

of

the par-

ticipial constructions, as in the N.T. 917. With (I)

other

verbs:

γράφω: γράφεις | Gavpatwe P.S.J. 502, 11-12 (257-256 B.c.); ypide . exarra P.S.f. 616, 8-9 (iii /e.c.) corresponding to a ér-clause.

(2)

ἐῶ: σὲ

ἐάσω

(3)

κωλύω:

οὐ

nmparrovra κωλύει

εἰσιόντα

τι

P.Tebt. αὐτὸν

289,

καὶ

6-7

οἰκοῦντα

(A.D.

23).

P.Bour.

20,

918. Infinitive for participle. This construction is less common verse treatment of the participle in place of the infinitive. usually

take

a

participial

construction

are

...

sometimes

33

(A.D.

750),

than the conVerbs which

found

with

the

infinitive. 919. The infinitive instead of the participle is found with the following verbs: ἄρχομαι: ἤρξαντο τρυγεῖν τὴν dumedov P.Oxy. 1859, 4 (vi or vii'A.D.); βλέπω: αὐτὸν [|a]r«a» BAémec ὁ περίβλεπτος ἀργυροπράτηϊς] κατελθεῖν | ἐπὶ ᾿Αλεξανδρειαν P.OxY.

1844,

P.Fav.

20

2-3

(li),

[vi

14

Or

(A.D.

vil / A.D.) : κάμνω;

222):

συνηρῶ:

471

περικέκμηκα

συνεῖδον

γράψαι

τὰ

καὶ

κλῖνον

ἀναλήμψασθαι

προσκυνῆσαι

P.Oxy.

|

$$ 919-922

PARTICIPLE

1855,

1

φανερὸν

4-6

(vi or

vit/A.D.J;

FOR

τυγχάνω:

ποιῶ:

φανερὸν

00

. ποιῶ,

(W/A.D.);

φανερόν

cor

ποιῶ

INDICATIVE

τυγχάνεις

ἔχειν P.Grenf.

ii 57, 8

adeAde,

τὸν

Tifeptvor

evpy

were

κεκτῆσθαίΐ

με

P.Cornell

t9, 5

(A.D.

168);

P.Mich.

206,

(A.D.

298}.

920. Participle for indicative} It is certain from the papyri that the participle is sometimes used for the indicative in a particular way which reveals genuine popular speech, as this construction mostly occurs in letters or writings of less educated people. E.g. εὖ οὖν πυήϊσας ἐξαυτῆς πέμσις αὐτὸν ἐξαυτῆς P.Fay. 113, 10-12 (A.D. 100); εὖ οὖν ποιήσας κομισάμε!νός μου τὴν ἐπιστολὴν | πέμσις pu P.Fay. 114, 3-5 (A.D. 100); [εὖ οὖν] πυήσας σκέφη βίαν. 116, 3 (A.D. 104) for εὖ οὖν ποιήσεις. Notice that all the three instances are found in the archive of the same person, i.e.

in the correspondence

of Lucius Bellenus Gemellus. An

interesting example of

this usage is the following passage: ἐὰν δὲ ἀδωσιτικ σι ἐν τῇ ἀποδόσι τῶν mponeıμένων, ὡς ἐπάνω δεδήλωται, €£ov| ros τῷ Φατρῇ ἐντὸς τοῦ χρόνου ἑτέροις | μέταμι-

σδοῖν P.Oxy. 2351, 58-61 κληθείς,

κύριε,

μνήσθητί

(A.D. μου

τῆς

112), where ἔξοντος stands for ἐξέσται, δεήσεως

In παρα-

PGiss. Univ,-Bibl. 21, 3-4 (ii/A.D.)

the

participle ts equivalent to παρακαλῶ σε, which ts common in letters under stereotyped expressions. Also πρὸ μὲν πάντων τὸ προσκύνημά gov ποι! ὦ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν καὶ εὐχόμενος {for εὔχομαι)Ἠ P.Lond. Inv. No. 1375, 2-3 learly iii /A.D.); so also ἀνε[ί[νεχθήσεται εἰς γνῶσιν τοῦ αὐτοῦ κυρίου pou | δουκὸς ὡς σοῦ τὴν ἀπαίτησιν τοῦ δεσποϊτικοῦ οἴκον ἐνεδρεύσαντος iv/A.D.]; similarly yılyrconır ce θέλω... ὡς ἀπὸ

καμήλια) (mid.

"I wish

iv/A.D.);

you

to know

δυναμί €v]ov

pou

τὴν κ[ α] κουργίαν wlejmoıngerou 412, L1-12 (A.D. 351].

that

the

xat

r[a]g

camels

(equivalent

P.Lond. 234, 17-20 (mid. ἐμοῦ ἀπειὶστὶ αἱ λμένα [sc.

were sent”

dredifels

ποιεῖν

to ὡς odros

...

P.Gen. | ws

55, 6 ff.

τούτου

πεποίηται)

τήνδε

P.Lond.

921. The converse treatment which comes under the heading of asyndeton (familiar in the N.T.: cf. Blass-Debr.-Funk, § 462), is also attested, e.g. οἱ τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων συνείδησιν εἰσήνεγκαν

123,

13-14

{ili or

| rois κολλήγαις avrov, εἰσῆήλθαν P.Oxy.

iv/A.D.).

922. Participle for imperative. Such a use of the participle is indeed rare in the papyri, while some passages from the N.T. show that participial forms may be used there in an imperatival sense.? The only possible support from the papyri is obtained from the stereotyped ἐπιμελόμενοι iv’ ὑγιαίνητε equi-

1. Cf. Moulton, Prof., pp. 222-5, where participial forms

from papyri and N.T. are shown

to stand for the indicative. ?, Cf. D. Daube, Participie and Imperative in

First Epistle of St. Peter (Macmillan,

1 Peter

(appended

1946), pp. 467-88),

372

note in E.G. Selwyn, The

PAHRTIUIPLE valent

to

ἐπιμέλεσθε

tv" ὑγιαίνητε.

FOR In

IMPERATIVE

fact,

the

S§ 922-024

participle

ἐπιμελόμενος

(-voL)

is a fixed expression dependent on καλῶς ποιήσεις (-cere) which is not always stated in the sentence because of brachylogy. Cf. καλῶς δ᾽ ἄμ ποιήσαις ayopaoas... |... δοὺς ... | ἐπιμελόμενος P.Cairo Zen. 59251. 4-7 (252 B.c.), but e[v] οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται ἀντιλαμβανόμενοι καὶ ὑμῖν δὲ γράφοντας (= -vres), | ὑπὲρ ὧν αἱρε[ἴσ]θε, ws πᾶν π[ρ)οθυμότερο» -ελεω [θ]ησόμενον, ἐπιμελό[μενο]ι δὲ καὶ ἑαυτῶν, | ἵν᾽ ὑγιαίνητε P.Grenf. i 30, 6-10 (104 B.C.). In this passage the participles ἀντιλαμβανόμενοι, γράφοντες, ἐπιμελόμενοι apparently render an imperative sense. It is, however, conceivable from the

context that the phrase καλῶς ποιήσετε may be understood. The fact that in letters ἐπιμελόμενος has sometimes ἐπιμέλου as parallel, e.g. ra ἄλλα σαυτοῦ ἐπιμε(λόμενος), | iv’ vytacrns P.Tebt. 12, 12-13 (118 B.C.); 19, 14-15 (114 B.C.), and

elsewhere; but πρὸ πάντων

σατοῦ

ἐπιμέλου, (ἐπιμελοῦ Ed.) iva öylıarlens

P.Baden 35, 27 (4.D. 87) and similarly P.Tebt. 55, 9-10 (ii/B.c. or later) does not indicate that ἐπιμελόμενος is a substitute for the imperative; it is merely a matter of style by which a command is expressed hypothetically by means

of a participle.

923. In the passage

καὶ | ws av τοῦτο

nomens,

ἀξιώσας

avrov

[με]ταπέμ-

ψασθαί με P.Petrie ii 1g (1a), 6-8 (iil/B.c.) ἀξιώσας is to be taken as epexegetic, equivalent thus to ἀξιῶσα!. The imperatival sense of the participle is apparent in the following example: ev οἷς ἐὰν προσδέησθέ | nov, ἐπιτάσσοντές μοι προθυϊμότερον διὰ 59, 8-11 (99 B.c.).

924. Moulton,

τὸ ἄνωθεν

φοβεῖσθαι | καὶ σέβεσθαι

Pro/., pp. 223 f., seems to be convinced

use is fairly common

τὸ ἱερὸν P.Tebt.

that this participial

in the papyri. In view, however, of the evidence of the

papyri we are far from making a generalization. [t i$ certain that some participles betray an imperatival sense, but this can be explained by the fact that the participle was tending to be used independently. In addition, as the

infinitive

was

probably

render

often an

used

for

imperatival

the

imperative,

so

the

sense, as it was often

the infinttive.

373

participle

could

interchanged

with

APPENDIX SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

YIIOYPTEION NOAITIEMOY KAI ENIETHMON TO MH

PHMA ΕΙΣ ΤΟΥΣ 9IAOAOTIKOY?

EAAHNIKOYE IIAIIYPOYZ

Y Ho

BAZIAEIOY

I.

MANAHAAPA

II EPIAHVIZ EK

TOY

ATTAIKOY

IIPOTOTYTIOY

Ἢ

ἐργασία αὕτη ἀναφέρεται εἰς τὴν μορφολογικὴν Kai συντακτικὴν θέσιν τοῦ ρήματος εἰς τοὺς μὴ φιλολογικοὺς παπύρους. Ἔχουν ἐξετασθῆ παπυρικὰ

κείμενα,

τὰ

ὁποῖα

καλύπτουν

περίοδον

χιλίων

ἐτῶν,

δηλαδὴ

ἀπὸ τοῦ τέλους τοῦ δ΄ αἷ. π.Χ. (τὸ ἀρχαιότερον παπυρικὸν κείμενον μὴ φιλολογικοῦ περιεχομένου χρονολογεῖται εἰς τὸ 411 π.Χ.) μέχρι τῆς ἀρnis τοῦ η΄ ai. u.X. Ἔλήφθησαν ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν οἱ πάπυροι ἀμφοτέρων τῶν περιόδων, Πτολεμαϊκῆς καὶ peta - Πτολεμαϊκῆς, διότι Kat’ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον εἶναι δυνατὸν νὰ ἀνιχνεύσωμεν τὴν ἐξέλιξιν τῆς ᾿Ελληνικῆς γλώσσης ἐπακριβῶς καὶ νὰ ἴδωμεν ποῖα γλωσσικὰ φαινόμενα τῶν μεταγενεστέρων

470

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

χρόνων εἶναι ἀποτελέσματα τάσεων τῆς γλώσσης, al ὁποῖαι παρουσιάζονται εἰς προγενεστέραν περίοδον. ᾿Επίσης οὕτω καθορίζονται τὰ γλωσσικὰ φαινόμενα, τὰ ὁποῖα ἐμφανίζονται τὸ πρῶτον κατὰ τοὺς μετα-Πτολεμαΐκοὺς χρόνους" πρὸς τούτοις παρουσιάζονται αἱ γλωσσικαὶ ἰδιομορφίαι Exdστης περιόδου. Βασικῶς οἱ Πτολεμαϊκοὶ πάπυροι εἶναι γεγραμμένοι εἰς τὸν διαμορφωθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων τῆς περιόδου γλωσσικὸν τύπον τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς διαλέκτου. Εἰς τοὺς παπύρους τῆς ᾿Ελληνορρωμαϊκῆς περιό-

δου εὑρίσκομεν

γλωσσικὰς

ἐξελίξεις,

αἱ ὁποῖαι

συγγενεύουν πρὸς

ἀνά-

Aoya φαινόμενα τῆς Ἑβραϊκῆς καὶ Αἰγυπτιακῆς γλώσσης. Δὲν δυνάμεθα ὅμως νὰ καθορίσωμεν τὴν πραγματικὴν ἢ φαινομενικὴν ἐπίδρασιν τῶν γλωσσῶν αὑτῶν ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ελληνικῆς, διότι εἶναι δυνατὸν νὰ ὑπάρχουν παράλληλοι τάσεις καὶ εἰς τὰς τρεῖς γλώσσας. Τὰ παπυρικὰ κείμενα, τὰ ὁποῖα ἐξετάζονται ἐνταῦθα, δὲν εἶναι δυνατὸν νὰ δοθοῦν ἀριθμητικῶς. Κυρία πηγὴ τῆς ἐρεύνης εἰς τὴν παροῦσαν ἐργασίαν εἶναι al ἐπιστολαί, δηλαδὴ κείμενα τὰ ὁποῖα ἐπηρεάζονται ἀπὸ τὰς γλωσσικὰς ἐξελίξεις' ἄλλα κείμενα, τὰ ὁποῖα προδίδουν ἐπίδρασιν τῆς μορφώσεως τοῦ γραφέως εἰς τὴν σύνθεσιν τοῦ λόγου, ἔχουν σκοπίμως παραμερισθῆ, διότι ἀποκρύπτουν οὕτω τὴν πραγματικὴν μορφὴν τῆς κοινῆς ὁμιλουμένης, τῆς ὁποίας ἧ παρουσίασις εἶναι ὁ σκοπὸς τῆς παρούσης ἐργασίας. "Eviote ὅμως γίνεται χρῆσις ἀριθμῶν, ἀναφέρεται δηλαδὴ ὁ ἀριθμὸς τῶν κειμένων, τὰ ὁποῖα ἐξητάσθησαν καὶ οἱ προκύπτοντες ἀριθμοὶ ἀναφορικῶς πρὸς τὴν συχνότητα ὡρισμένων τύπων. Συγκεκριμένως εἰς τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τῆς σχέσεως ἀορίστου καὶ παρακειμένου λαμβάνονται ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν 1.200 κείμενα (BA. §§ 456 κέξ.). ᾿Ἐξετάζεται ἰδιαιτέρως τὸ θέμα τῆς σχέσεως τῆς γλώσσης τῶν παπύpov καὶ τῆς Καινῆς Διαθήκης (BA.88. 21-35). Τὸ συμπέρασμα εἶναι ὅτι ἡ γλῶσσα τῆς Καινῆς Διαθήκης εὑρίσκεται ἐγγύτατα πρὸς τὸ γλωσσικὸν ἰδίωμα τῶν παπύρων. Τὸ κεφάλαιον “ποιὸν ἐνεργείας καὶ χρονικὴ BaOpic" (BA.§§ 36 κέξ.)

ἀποτελεῖ εἰσαγωγὴν εἰς τοὺς “χρόνους.Ek τῆς χρήσεως τῶν χρόνων εἰς τοὺς παπύρους προκύπτει ὅτι ἡ ἔννοια τοῦ ποιοῦ ἐνεργείας ἦτο σαφὴς εἰς τοὺς γραφεῖς, ἡ δὲ διαφοροποίησις τῶν χρόνων ἀποβλέπει εἰς τὸ νὰ τονίσῃ ἀκριβῶς τὴν ἔννοιαν αὐτήν. ᾿Αναφορικῶς πρὸς τὴν χρονικὴν βαθμίδα τοῦ ρήματος ἀνιχνεύεται εἰς τοὺς παπύρους ἀποκλειστικῶς ἡ πρώty ἔνδειξις συγχύσεως τῶν χρόνων. Τοῦτο θὰ ἀποτελέσῃ ἐν συνεχείᾳ σημαντικὴν αἰτίαν πρὸς νέαν διαρρύθμισιν τοῦ ρηματικοῦ συστήματος τῆς “Ἑλληνικῆς γλῴσσης. Εἰς τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος καὶ τοῦ παρατατικοῦ (DA. §§

377

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

51 κξξ.) παρουσιάζονται λεπτομερῶς ol ποικίλοι σχηματισμοί, ἰδιαιτέρως δὲ τονίζονται αἱ ἰδιομορφίαι, δηλαδὴ τὰ σύνθετα ρήματα τὰ ὁποῖα σπανίως ἁπαντοῦν εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν γλῶσσαν καὶ οἱ νέοι σχηματισμοί. Πρὸς τούτοις ἀναφέρονται τὰ ρηματικὰ ἐπιθήματα, εἰς τὴν συχνὴν χρῆσιν τῶν ὁποίων ὀφείλονται τὰ νέα παράγωγα ρήματα, καὶ 7] κατάστασις ἐν γένει τῶν ρημάτων £ig -μι. Τῶν τελευταίων τούτων ρημάτων ἡ εἰκὼν δεικνύει ἰσχυρῶν τάσιν τῆς γλώσσης và μεταφέρῃ τὰ ἀθέματα ρήματα eig τὴν θεματικὴν συζυγίαν. Ἣ τάσις αὑτὴ διαφαίνεται εἰς κείμενα προγενέστερα τῶν παπύρων, ὁπωσδήποτε ὅμως εἶναι σαφὴς εἰς τὰ παπυρικὰ κείμενα τῆς μετα-Πτολεμαϊκῆς περιόδου. Eig τὸ ἑπόμενον κεφάλαιον ἐξετάζονται αἱ σημασίαι τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος καὶ αἱ ποικίλαι χρήσεις, τὰς ὁποίας ὁ χρόνος οὗτος εἶχεν εἰς τοὺς παπύρους (PA. 88 175 κέξ.). Ὃ ἐνεστὼς μὲ σημασίαν μέλλοντος χρησιμοποιεῖται συχνά. Ἢ χρῆσις αὐτὴ εἶναι βεβαίως γνωστὴ καὶ ἀπὸ ἄλλας γλώσσας, προδίδει δὲ τὸν δημώδη χαρακτῆρα τῆς γλώσσης τῶν παπύρων. “Ex τῶν λοιπῶν κατηγοριῶν τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ὁ γνωμικὸς ἐνεστὼς εἶναι σπανιώτατος. Τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ τὴν ἔλλειψιν φιλοσοφικῆςδιαθέσεως εἰς τὰ παπυρικὰ κείμενα. Εἰς τὸ κεφάλαιον “αὔξησις, (BA. 88 231 κέξ.) ἐξετάζονται αἱ περιπτώσεις τῆς χρήσεως ἢ παραλείψεως τῆς αὐξήσεως, ὡς ἐπίσης ἧ ἐσφαλμένη χρῆσις τῆς αὐξήσεως, φαινόμενον τὸ ὁποῖον εἶναι ἀποτέλεσμα τῆς ἐπικρατήσεως τοῦ συνήθους, καὶ ὡς ἐκ τούτου ἰσχυροῦ, μορφήματος τῆς avξήσεως. "TH ἀστάθεια ἐξ ἄλλου ὡς πρὸς τὴν χρῆσιν ἢ μὴ τῆς αὐξήσεως ὀφείλεται εἰς ποικίλους λόγους" βασικῶς συνετέλεσεν ἡ ἰσχὺς φθογγικῶν νόμων, ὅπως T] ἔκπτωσις τοῦ ἁτόνου ἀρχικοῦ fe] φθόγγου, καὶ τὸ ὅτι αἱ ρηματικαὶ καταλήξεις ἀφ᾽ ἑνὸς καὶ τὸ θέμα τοῦ ρήματος ἀφ᾽ Etépov ἧσαν στοιχεῖα ἀρκετά, διὰ và προσδιορίσουν τὸν “χρόνον. Ἢ ἐξέλιξις τῶν καταλήξεων ἐξετάζεται ἐν ἀρχῇ εἰς τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τοῦ παρατατικοῦ (PA. $ 277). ᾿Εδῶ διακρίνεται ἰσχυρὰ ἐπίδρασις τῶν καταλήξεων τοῦ ἀορίστου ἐπὶ τῶν καταλήξεων τοῦ παρατατικοῦ. Ἢ τάσις αὑτὴ τῆς γλώσσης θὰ φέρῃ τελείαν σύμπτωσιν τῶν καταλήξεων τῶν δύο τούτων χρόνων εἰς τοὺς μεταγενεστέρους χρόνους. Πρὸς τούτοις rapatrnρεῖται ἐπέκτασις τῆς καταλήξεως τοῦ ἀορίστου -σαν εἷς τὸν NapatatiKOV τῶν συνῃρημένων ρημάτων εἰς -ew, μὲ ἀποτέλεσμα νὰ χρησιμοποιῆται ἢ κατάληξις -οὔσαν ἀντὶ τῆς -ovv. Eig

τὸ

περὶ

τῶν

σημασιῶν

τοῦ

παρατατικοῦ

κεφάλαιον

(BA.

88 284

κἐξ.) παρατηροῦνται σημεῖα ἰδιαιτέρου ἐνδιαφέροντος : (a) Εἰς τὴν χρῆσιν τῶν ρηματικῶν τύπων ἔλεγεν καὶ εἶπεν δὲν διαβλέπει κανεὶς τὴν σαφῆ διάκρισιν (ἐκφρασθεῖσαν ὑπὸ Blass-Debrunner-Funk, $ 329) ὅτι ὁ παρατα-

378

mmm 4

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

τικὸς Exppalet TO περιεχόμενον τοῦ λόγου εἰς γενικὰς γραμμάς, ἐνῶ ὁ ἀόριστος ἀναφέρει ἁπλῶς δήλωσιν προηγουμένως ἐκφρασθεῖσαν. "Av τοῦτο ἰσχύῃ

εἰς τὴν γλῶσσαν

τῆς Καινῆς

Διαθήκης,

δὲν ἐπιβεβαιοῦται καὶ ἀπὸ

τὴν γλῷσσαν τῶν παπύρων. Εἰς τὰ παπυρικὰ κείμενα εἶναι προφανὲς ὅτι τὸ ἔλεγεν ὑποδηλοῖ ὅτι ὁ λέγων δὲν ἦτο βέβαιος ἂν ἡ ἐξέλιξις τῆς διὰ τῆς δευτερευούσης προτάσεως ἐκφραζομένης πράξεως ἐπραγματοποιήθη ὡς προεβλέπετο, Evo τὸ εἶπεν ὑπογραμμίζει τὴν πεποίθησιν τοῦ λέγοντος ὅτι

ἢ πρᾶξις ἐξειλίχθη ὡς προεβλέπετο. ᾿Ανάλογος εἶναι ἡ σημασία ἡ ὁποία προκύπτει ἐκ τῆς χρήσεως τῶν ρηματικῶν τούτων τύπων εἰς τὴν νέαν 'EAληνικῆν. Τελικῷς θὰ πρέπει νὰ ληφθῇ ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν ὅτι ἡ χρῆσις τοῦ ἑνὸς ἢ τοῦ ἄλλου τύπου εἶναι ἀποτέλεσμα τοῦ προσωπικοῦ ὕφους τοῦ συγγραφέως

χωρὶς νὰ καθορίζωνται σημασιολογικαὶ διαφοραί. (B) 'O παρατατικὸς εἶχον στερεῖται £v πολλοῖς τοῦ διαρκοῦς ποιοῦ ἐνεργείας. Τοῦτο προεικάζει τὴν ἀπώλειαν ποιοῦ ἐνεργείας τοῦ τύπου εἶχα εἰς τὴν νέαν ᾿Ελληνικήν. (y) Ἢ χρῆσις τοῦ ἐπιστολικοῦ παρατατικοῦ εἶναι

τὴν ὁποίαν οἱ πάπυροι Ὃ

ἀόριστος

νέα λειτουργία τοῦ χρόνου, διὰ

ἔχουν τὴν ἀποκλειστικότητα.

(88$ 299

KEE.)

ἔχει

ἐνδιαφέρον

διὰ

τὰς

μορφολογικάς

του ἐξελίξεις καὶ τὴν λειτουργικῆν tou κατάστασιν. Συγκεκριμένως ὁ ἀόριστος β΄ λυμβάνει τὰς καταλήξεις τοῦ a’, οἱ εἰς «κα ἀόριστοι τῶν ἀθε-

μάτων ρημάτων ἐπηρεάζονται ἀπὸ τὸν ἔνσιγμον ἀόριστον, ἐξ ἄλλου δὲ αἱ καταλήξεις

-es καὶ -ere τοῦ β΄ ἀορίστου

(rapuratikob)

ἀντικαθιστοῦν

τὰς

καταλήξεις -as καὶ -are ἀντιστοίχως τοῦ a’ ἀορίστου. "EK τῶν σημασιῶν τοῦ ἀορίστου διακρίνεται ἡ χρῆσις πρὸς ἔκφρασιν ἀποτελέσματος συνδεομένου μὲ τὸν χρόνον tob γράφοντος᾽ εἶναι σημασία, τὴν ὁποίαν ἐκφράζει ὁ παρακείμενος εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν γλῶσσαν, καὶ ἔδωσε τὴν δυνατότητὰ εἰς τὸν ἀόριστον và ἀντικυταστήσῃ τὸν παρακείμενον, καθόσον μάλιστα ὁ τελευταῖος εἶχεν ἀρχίσει νὰ δηλώνῃ τὸ χρονικὸν σημεῖον τοῦ nu-

ρεθόντος. δηλαδὴ

νὰ ἀναλαμβάνῃ

τὴν λειτουργίαν τοῦ ἀορίστου.

Εἰς τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος ($$ 355 KEE.) ἐξετάζονται κατ᾽ ἀρχὴν οἱ ποικίλοι σχηματισμοὶ τοῦ χρόνου αὑτοῦ. Παρατηρεῖται περιορι-

σμὸς εἰς τοὺς μέσους μέλλοντας ἐνεργητικῶν ρημάτων ἐξ ἐπιδράσεως προφανῶς τῶν ἐνεργητικῶν τύπων τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος καὶ τοῦ ἀορίστου. Νέοι σχηματισμοὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος δημιουργοῦνται ἀναλογικῶς πρὸς τὸν ἀόρι-

στον τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς, μετὰ τοῦ ὁποίου ὁ μέλλων τῆς δριστικῆς συνεδέετο σημασιολογικῶς. "Ev συνεχείᾳ ἐξετάζεται ὁ μέλλων ὡς χρόνος Kai ὡς ἔγκλισις. Εἰς τὸ μὲν πρῶτον μέρος ἐρευνᾶται τὸ θέμα τοῦ ποιοῦ ἕνερ-

yeiuc τοῦ μέλλοντος, εἰς δὲ τὸ δεύτερον κτικὴν

καὶ

τὴν

προστακτικῆν,

379

ἡ σχέσις αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὴν ὑποτα-

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

Εἰσαγωγὴν εἰς τὸν παρακείμενον ἀποτελεῖ τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ dvaδιπλασιασμοῦ (PA. & 416 xé5.). Ἢ γενικὴ εἰκὼν τοῦ ἀναδιπλασιασμοῦ παρουσιάζει μορφὰς ἀναλόγους πρὸς τὰς τῆς αὐξήσεως : eig τινας περιπτώσεις παραλείπεται, εἰς ἄλλας δὲ ἀντικαθίσταται ὑπὸ τῆς αὐξήσεως. ESA ἀντικατοπτρίζεται 1 ἐπίδρασις τοῦ ἀορίστου ἐπὶ τῆς μορφολογικῆς καταστάσεως τοῦ παρακειμένου. ‘O παρακείμενος (PA. § 431 KEE.) ἔχει πλήρη ὀντότητα εἰς τοὺς Πτολεμαϊκοὺς παπύρους. Κατὰ τὴν ᾿Ελληνορρωμαϊκὴν ὅμως περίοδον ὑποχωρεῖ βαθμηδὸν πρὸ τοῦ ἀορίστου. Εἰς τὸ περὶ τῆς μορφολογίας τοῦ παρακειμένου κεφάλαιον ἐξετάξζονται οἱ εἰς «κα fj -α τύποι. ᾿Αναφέρονται οἱ παρακείμενοι, οἱ ὁποῖοι δὲν ἀπαντοῦν εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν γλῶσσαν, καὶ οἱ εἰς -κα συνθέτων ρημάτων, τὰ ὁποῖα ὡς ἀπλᾶ ἀπαντοῦν εἰς προγεveotepa κείμενα. Πρὸς τούτοις παρατηρεῖται νέα διάρθρωσις τῶν καταλήξεων τοῦ παρακειμένου. Πρόκειται περὶ τῆς χρήσεως τῆς καταλήξεως -es εἰς τὸ β΄ ἑνικὸν πρόσωπον καὶ -αν εἰς τὸ γ᾽ πληθυντικόν. Εἰς ἀμφοτέρας τὰς περιπτώσεις ἔχομεν ἐπίδρασιν τῶν καταλήξεων τοῦ ἀορίστου, φαινόμενον τὸ ὁποῖον ὑποδηλώνει περαιτέρω τὴν στενὴν συγγένειαν τῶν δύο χρόνων. Εἰς τὸ μέρος, ὅπου ἐξετάζεται τὸ θέμα “σημασία καὶ χρήσεις τοῦ παρακειμένου" (BA. §§ 461 x&5.), παρουσιάζεται ἡ ἐν γένει λειτουργία τοῦ χρόνου αὑτοῦ. 'Eviorg εἰς τοὺς παπύρους, καὶ Ex’ εὐκαιρίᾳ, ἀπαντᾷ ἡ χρῆσις tof ἐπιστολικοῦ παρσακειμένον᾽ εἶναι χρῆσις γνωστὴ ἀπὸ τὴν 'Atτικὴν γλῶσσαν, δὲν φαίνεται ὅμως νὰ ἔχῃ ἐπεκταθῆ καὶ εἰς τοὺς συγγραφεῖς τῆς ᾿Ἑλληνιστικῆς περιόδου. Τοῦτο πρέπει νὰ ἀποδοθῇ εἰς τὴν ἐπίδοσιν τοῦ ἀορίστου, χρησιμοποιηθέντος καὶ ὡς ἐπιστολικοῦ, κατὰ τὴν περίοδον αὑτήν. Ἢ χρῆσις τοῦ ὑπερσυντελίκου εἰς τοὺς παπύρους (BA. §§ 482 x£E.) δὲν εἶναι ovyvy. 'O ὑπερσυντέλικος ἀπαντᾷ κανονικῶς εἰς τοὺς Πτολεμαΐκοὺς παπύρους, ἀλλὰ περιορίζεται κατὰ πολὺ μετὰ ταῦτα. Χρησιμοποιεῖται μόνον ἐφόσον

τονίζεται ἡ περιγραφικὴ

κατάστασις

τῆς πράξεως τοῦ

ρήματος, ἄλλως ἀντικαθίσταται ὑπὸ τοῦ παρατατικοῦ ἢ τοῦ ἀορίστου. Τοῦτο ὀφείλεται εἰς τὸ ὅτι καὶ εἰς τὴν γλῶσσαν τῶν παπύρων (ὅπως καὶ εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν) ἡ ἔννοια τοῦ σχετικοῦ χρόνου ἦτο δευτερευούσης σημασίας. Εἰς τὴν μορφολογίαν τοῦ ὑπερσυντελίκου ἐξετάζονται : (α) αἱ καταλήξεις, (β) οἱ μεσο-παθητικοὶ τύποι καὶ (γ) οἱ περιφραστικοὶ σχηματισμοί. ᾽᾿Επίσης εἰς τὸ περὶ τῆς συντάξεως τοῦ χρόνου αὐτοῦ κεφάλαιον γίνεται μνεία

εἰς

τῆς χρήσεως

τοῦ ὑπερσυντελίκου

εἰς τὰς δευτερευούσας

προτάσεις.

'O τετελεσμένος μέλλων (PA. ὃ 525) ἀπαντᾷ σπανίως, περιορίζεται δὲ περιφραστικοὺς τύπους. Οἱ Πτολεμαϊκοὶ πάπυροι παρέχουν ὀλίγα 380

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

δείγματα χρήσεως τοῦ χρόνου τούτου, ὁ ὁποῖος φαίνεται ὅτι ἔχει ἐξαφανισθῆ τελείως ἀπὸ τὰ παπυρικὰ κείμενα τῶν μετὰ τὴν Πτολεμαϊκὴν περίοδον χρόνων. Τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τῶν ἐγκλίσεων (PA. $$ 526 KéE.) ἀποτελεῖ τὸ δεύτερον μέρος τῆς παρούσης ἐργασίας.

Ἢ λειτουργία τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς ἐξετάζεται εἰς τὰς §§ 526 k&E. ‘H προσοχὴ ἔχει ἰδιαιτέρως στραφῆ εἰς τὸ θέμα τῆς σχέσεως τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων ἐγκλίσεων (εὐκτικῆς, προστακτικῆς, ἀπαρεμφάτου καὶ μέλλοντος ὁριστικῆς). Τὰ θέματα ἀναφορικῶς πρὸς τὴν μορφολογίαν τῆς

ὑποτακτικῆς κατάστασιν

σιάζουν

εἶναι τῆς

ἐξελίξεις

ποικίλα. ᾿Αντανακλοῦν

Ἑλληνικῆς

γλώσσης

τῆς

ὁπωσδήποτε περιόδου

τὴν φωνητικὴν

ἐκείνης καὶ παρου-

εἰς τοὺς ρηματικοὺς τύπους, al ὁποῖαι θὰ ἐπικρατήσουν

κατὰ τοὺς μεταγενεστέρους χρόνους. Συγκεκριμένως ὁ ἀόριστος τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς διαμορφώνεται μὲ βάσιν τὴν μορφολογικὴν κατάστασιν τοῦ μέλAovtoc τῆς ὁριστικῆς, οὕτω πολλοὶ ἀθέματοι ἀόριστοι ἀντικαθίστανται διὰ τῶν ἀντιστοίχων ἐνσίγμων ρηματικῶν τύπων τοῦ μέλλοντος. Εἰς τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο θὰ πρέπει νὰ ληφθῇ ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν ὅτι οἱ νέοι ἔνσιγμοι ἀόριστοι τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς συνετέλεσαν εἰς τὴν δημιουργίαν νέων ἐνσίγμων ἀορίστῶν εἰς τὴν ὁριστικήν : λύσω (μέλλων Sptot. - ἀόρ. ὑποτ.) - ἔλυσα (ἀόρ. ópict.) οὕτω καὶ δώσω {μέλλων ὁριστ. > ἀόρ. brot.)- ἔδωσα (Góp. Sptot.).

Πρὸς

τούτοις fj μορφολογικὴ

ἐξομοίωσις

τοῦ μέλλοντος τῆς ὁριστικῆς

καὶ τοῦ ἀορίστου τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς ἐπέφερε κατ᾽ ἐπέκτασιν μορφολογικὴν ἐξομοίωσιν τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς καὶ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος τῆς ὁριστικῆς. Αἱ ἐξελίξεις abtai εἶχον ἀποτέλεσμα τὴν τελείαν μορφολογικὴν ξξομοίωσιν τῶν δύο ἐγκλίσεων, ἡ ἐγκλιτικὴ δὲ σημασία ἐξεφράζετο Extoτε διὰ τῶν εἰσαγωγικῶν συνδέσμων. Obto δικαιολογεῖται ὀρθῶς ἡ ὀρθογράqnot; τῆς ὑποτακτικῆς εἰς τὴν νέαν Ἑλληνικὴν ἐπὶ τῇ βάσει τῆς μορφῆς τῶν καταλήξεων τῆς ὁριστικῆς. Ἢ χρῆσις τῆς εὐκτικῆς (BA. 8 603 KéE.) ἐπηρεάζεται εἴς tiva. βαθμὸν ἀπὸ τὰ διδάγματα τῶν ᾿Αττικιστῶν, διότι ἀπαντᾷ κατὰ κανόνα εἰς κείμενα γεγραμμένα ὁπωσδήποτε ὑπὸ μορφωμένων. Εἰς τὰ μὴ φιλολογικὰ κείμενα ᾿ περιορίζεται εἰς στερεοτύπους ἐκφράσεις ἢ εἰς μιμήσεις ἐκ τῆς γλώσσης τῶν κειμένων τῆς Παλαιᾶς καὶ Καινῆς Διαθήκης. Οὐσιαστικῶς ὅμως ἡ εὐκτικὴ δὲν κατέχει πραγματικὴν θέσιν εἰς τὴν γλῶσσαν τῶν παπύρων. ‘O περιορισμὸς τῆς εὐκτικῆς εἶναι κατάδηλος εἰς τὰ κείμενα τῶν συγγραφέων τῆς ᾿Ελληνιστικῆς περιόδου, οἱ δὲ πάπυροι ἀντανακλοῦν τὴν τάσιν τῆς γλώσσης νὰ ἀπαλλαγῇ ἀπὸ τὴν ἔγκλισιν, τῆς ὁποίας fj κλίσις δὲν ἧτο δυνατὸν νὰ προσαρμοσθῇ πρὸς τὴν μορφολογίαν τῶν λοιπῶν ἐγκλίσεων.

481

SUMMARY

IN

GHEEK

Πρὸς τούτοις ἡ σημασία τῆς εὐκτικῆς ἦτο δυνατὸν và ἐκφρασθῇ Ok ἄλλων

ρηματικῶν

ἀκριβῶς

τύπων.

Ἢ προστακτικὴ (PA. & 659 κέξ.)} χρησιμοποιεῖται εὑρύτατα, διότι ἐκφράξει ἄριστα τὸ ὕφος συνομιλίας, τὸ ὁποῖον χαρακτηρίζει τὴν γλῶσσαν

τῶν παπύρων. Τὸ πρόβλημα τοῦ τονισμοῦ ὡρισμένων προστακτικῶν τύrov £peuvütut εἰς TO κεφάλαιον τῆς μορφολογίας. Ἐπὶ τῇ βάσει τῶν Kataλοίπων τῶν ρηματικῶν τούτων τύπων εἰς τὴν νέαν ᾿Ελληνικὴν προτεῖνεται ἡ ἑξῆς διαρρύθμισις : ἰδέ, εἰπέ, ἀλλὰ λάβε, ἔλθε. Ἐν συνεχείᾳ ἐξετάζεται παραλλήλως τὸ ποιὸν ἐνεργείας τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πρὸς τὸ τοῦ ἀορίστου. Εἶναι ἀξιοσημείωτος ἢ διάκρισις, N ὁποία γίνεται εἰς τοὺς παπύρους ὡς πρὸς τὸ θέμα τοῦτο. Ἢ διάκρισις αὑτὴ διατηρεῖται eis τὴν “Ἑλληνικὴν γλῶσσων ὅλων τῶν περιόδων. Παρὰ ταῦτα ἔχομεν εἰς τὴν γλῶσσαν τῶν παπύρων παραδείγματα, ὅπου, εἰς τὴν συγκεκριμένην αὐτὴν περίπτωσιν, ἁμαυροῦται ἢ ἔννοια τοῦ ποιοῦ ἐνεργείας. Τοῦτο yiveται περισσότερον ἀντιληπτὸν εἰς τὴν νέαν ᾿Ελληνικῆν. ᾿Αντικείμενον ἐρεύνης εἶναι ἐπίσης T] χρῆσις τῶν προσώπων τῆς προστακτικῆς καὶ ἢ σχέσις αὐτῆς πρὸς τὰ ἄλλας ἐγκλίσεις, Αἱ ἐκφράσεις χαιρετισμῶν εἰς τὴν προστυκτικήν, ὅπως παρουσιάζονται ἐδῷ χρονολογι-

κῶς, μᾶς δίδουν τὴν δυνατότητα τὰς ἐπιστολὰς τῶν παπύρων.

νὰ χρονολογήσωμεν

μετὰ

βεβαιότητος

Τὸ ἀπαρέμφατον (PA. $8732 κέξ.) κατέχει πρωτεύουσαν θέσιν μέσα cic τὸ ὅλον σύστημα τῶν ρηματικῶν κατηγοριῶν, καίτοι παραλλήλως ἀναπτύσ-

σονται του. Ἢ εἰς τὴν τεύχθη Al

ἀναλυτικαὶ συντάξεις πρὸς ζημίαν τῆς συχνότητος τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάεὐρυτάτη χρῆσις τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου εἰς τοὺς παπύρους ὀφείλεται ἐπέκτασιν τοῦ ἐνάρθρου ἀπαρεμφάτου, τρόπος διὰ τοῦ ὁποίου ἐπεἡ ἐπὶ πολὺ διατήρησίς του. καταλήξεις τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου ὑπαγορεύουν συγχύσεις, ἐπιδράσεις

ἐξ ἄλλων

ρηματικῶν τύπων, ἀναλογικοὺς σχηματισμούς, ἐν γένει δὲ κατά-

stacıv, I ὁποία προδικάζει τὴν ἐξέλιξιν τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου. Εἰς τὸ περὶ τῶν σημασιῶν τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου κεφάλαιον ἐξετάζονται θέματα ὅπως : (a) προστακτικὸν

ἀπαρέμφατον,

(B) ἀπαρέμφατον

τοῦ σκο-

ποῦ, (y) ἀπαρέμφατον τοῦ ἀποτελέσμοτος κτλ. Πρὸς τούτοις ἐκτίθεται καὶ ἑρμηνεύεται fj, ἀνώμαλος σύνταξις τοῦ ἵνα μετὰ τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου, ἡ ὁποία ἀνιχνεύεται καὶ εἴς tiva μὴ φιλολογικὰ κείμενα ἐκτὸς τῶν πακπύρων. Ἢ

σύνταξις αὐτὴ

προκύπτει

ἐξ ἐπιδράσεως

τῆς συντάξεως

τοῦ ὥστε

μετὰ τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου. 'H σύγχυσις τοῦ tva καὶ ὥστε πρὸς ἔκφρασιν ἀδιαφόρως σκοποῦ ἣ ἀποτελέσμωυτος ἐδημιούργησε κατὰ συνέπειαν ἀναταρᾶχὴν εἰς τὰς συντύξεις τῶν συνδέσμων τούτων. "Avagépovtar ἐν συνεχείᾳ 482

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

ai συντάξεις τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου μετὰ προθέσεων ἢ ἐπιρρημάτων συγκριτικῶς πρὸς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν γλῶσσαν, τοὺς συγγραφεῖς τῆς ᾿Ελληνιστικῆς περιόδου καὶ τὴν γλῶσσαν τῆς Καινῆς Διαθήκης. Γίνεται μνεία εἰδικῶς συντάξεων προθέσεων μετὰ τοῦ ἀνάρθρου ἀπαρεμφάτου. 'H σύνταξις αὕτη ἔχει ἰδιαιτέραν σημασίαν, διότι ὑποδηλώνει τὴν χρῆσιν τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου ὡς οὐσιαστικοῦ᾽ ἡ ἔνταξις δὲ τοῦ ἀπαρεμφάτου εἰς τὴν περιοχὴν τῶν οὐσιαστικῶν συνετέλεσεν εἰς τὴν περιωρισμένην ἔστω διατήρησιν αὐτοῦ εἰς

τὴν

νέαν ᾿Ελληνικῆν. Ἱκανὰ παραδείγματα ἐπιβεβαιώνουν εὑρεῖαν χρῆσιν τῆς μετοχῆς (PA. $$ 865 KEE.) εἰς τοὺς παπύρους. Ἢ ἀστάθεια ὡς πρὸς τὴν συμφωνίαν ὑποκειμένου καὶ μετοχικοῦ τύπου ἀναφορικῶς πρὸς τὸ γένος, ἀριθμὸν καὶ πτῷσιν προδιαγράφει τὴν ἐξέλιξιν τῆς μετοχῆς πρὸς ἄκλιτον τύπον. Εἰς τὸ περὶ τῆς χρήσεως

τῆς

μετοχῆς

κεφάλαιον

ἐξετάζεται

f) ἐπιθε-

τικὴ μετοχή, A κατηγορηματικὴ καὶ ἡ ἐπιρρηματική, ὑπὸ τοὺς γενικοὺς δὲ αὑτοὺς

τίτλους

ἰδιαιτέρως ἰδιομορφίαν

παρατίθενται

μνεία τῆς γενικῆς ὡς πρὸς

τὰ

ἐπὶ

μέρους

ἀπολύτου

τὴν συμφωνίαν

μετοχῶν.

Γίνεται

διὰ τὴν συχνὴν χρῆσιν

καὶ τὴν

μετοχῆς

εἴδη καὶ

τῶν κυρίας

προτάσεως.

Καὶ

εἰς τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο διακρίνει κανεὶς τὴν τάσιν τῆς γλώσσης νὰ ἀποστερήσῃ τὴν μετοχὴν ἀπὸ τὴν κλίσιν της. ᾿Ακολούθως ἐρευνᾶται ἡ σχέσις τῆς μετοχῆς πρὸς ὁριστικήν). "Eni τῇ βάσει

τὰς

ἄλλας

ἐγκλίσεις (ἀπαρέμφατον, προστακτικὴν

τῶν

θεμάτων

τὰ ὁποῖα

ἐξετάζονται

καὶ

εἰς τὴν παροῦσαν

ἐργασίαν ἐπιχειρεῖται ἐπ᾽ εὐκαιρίᾳ διόρθωσις χωρίων τινῶν τῶν παπυρικῶν κειμένων. Ἡ διόρθωσις ἔρχεται Wo ἀποτέλεσμα τῶν συμπερασμάτων ἐκ τῆς ἐρεύνης σχετικῶν θεμάτων. Διαρρυθμίζεται ἐπίσης ἡ μετάφρασις cic τὴν ᾿Αγγλικὴν τοῦ ᾿Ελληνικοῦ κειμένου συμφώνως πρὸς τὴν σημασίαν

τοῦ ἐμπεριεχομένου χρόνου ἢ ἐγκλίσεως. Ἔχουν ἐκπονηθῆ στατιστικοὶ πίνακες διὰ νὰ δειχθῇ ἡ συχνότης ὡρισμένων ρηματικῶν τύπων. "Yroypapμίζονται τὰ γλωσσικὰ φαινόμενα, τὰ ὁποῖα προσιδιάζουν εἰς καθωρισμέγὴν χρονικὴν περίοδον, διότι ἐπιβοηθοῦν εἷς τὴν χρονολόγησιν τῶν παπυρικῶν κειμένων.

"EK τῆς παρουσιάσεως τῶν γλωσσικῶν φαινομένων Ev γένει προκύπτει ὅτι N γλῶσσα τῶν παπύρων ἦτο ἡ ὁμιλουμένη τῆς περιόδου ἐκείνης, τροποποιουμένη ἀναλόγως τοῦ βαθμοῦ μορφώσεως τῶν ἀτόμων-γραφέων. Πρὸς τούτοις ἐκ τῆς συγκρίσεως τῆς γλώσσης τῶν παπύρων πρὸς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν, τὴν γλῶσσαν τῆς Καινῆς Διαθήκης καὶ τὴν νέαν Ἑλληνικὴν προκύπτει ὅτι οἱ MtoAcpaixot πάπυροι διατηροῦν πολλὰ χαρακτηριστικὰ τῆς γλώσσης τῶν προγενεστέρων χρόνων, ἐνῶ οἱ μετα-Πτολεμαϊκοὶ πάπυ-

393

SUMMARY

IN

GREEK

pot παρουσιάζουν £v τῇ γενέσει τῶν τὰς ἐξελίξεις, al ὁποῖαι θὰ ἐπεκταθοῦν ἐν συνεχείᾳ, θὰ ἐπικρατήσουν δὲ ἐν πολλοῖς εἰς τὴν νέαν "EAinvicnv. "Ex τούτου προκύπτει ἐπίσης ὅτι αἱ μεγάλαι ἀλλαγαὶ εἰς τὴν ᾿Ελληνικὴν γλῶσσαν συνέβησαν κατὰ τοὺς χρόνους τῆς ᾿Ελληνορρωμαϊκῆς περιόδου. "EE ἄλλου ἡ σημασία τῆς γλώσσης τῶν παπύρων διὰ τὴν μελέτην τῆς γλώσσης τῆς Καινῆς Διαθήκης εἶναι κατάδηλος. Οἱ πάπυροι ἔδωσαν ἀφορμὴν ὥστε và ἐγκαταλειφθῇ ἡ ἄποψις ὅτι αἱ ἰδιορρυθμίαι τῶν ᾿Ελληνικῶν τῆς Καινῆς Διαθήκης ὀφείλονται εἰς τὴν ἐπίδρασιν τῆς “EBpaixfic γλώσσης, καθόσον πολλαὶ τῶν ἰδιορρυθμιῶν τούτων εὑρέθησαν cic κείμενα, τὰ ὁποῖα οὐδεμίαν ἐξάρτησιν ἔχουν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Εβραϊκῆς γλώσσης. Τὰ θέματα τὰ ὁποῖα ἐρευνῶνται εἰς τὴν παροῦσαν ἐργασίαν ἀνήκουν εἰς τὴν Γραμματικήν. Οὐδεμία ὅμως ἀξίωσις προβάλλεται ὅτι ἡ παροῦσα ἐργασία

ἀποτελεῖ

πλῆρη

πύρων᾽ εἶναι συμβολὴ πᾶσα ὅμως περαιτέρω Εἶμαι

εὐτυχής,

γραμματικὴν

τῆς γλώσσης

τῶν

Ἑλληνικῶν

πα-

εἰς τὴν ἔρευναν τοῦ ρήματος εἰς τοὺς παπύρους, κρίσις ἀνήκει ἀσφαλῶς εἰς τὸν ἀναγνώστην.

διότι

ἡ

ἐργασία μου

μένης ἐκδόσεως τῶν συγγραμμάτων

ἠξιώθη νὰ τύχῃ

τοῦ Ὑπουργείου

τῆς

ἐπιμελη-

Πολιτισμοῦ καὶ Ἔπι-

στημῶν, ἐκφράζω δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς θέσεως αὐτῆς τὰς θερμάς μου εὐχαριστίας πρὸς τὸ Ὑπουργεῖον καὶ τὰς εἰς αὐτὸ ἀνηκούσας Ὑπηρεσίας, αἱ ὁποῖαι ἡσχολήθησαν μετὰ πάσης φροντίδος διὰ τὴν ἔκδοσιν. Βασίλειος

484.

Γ. Μανδηλαρᾶς

INDEXES l. INDEX

Act(a) Th

GREEK

ctla

LITERATURE

omíae]

mu

15,

|

Aeschin(es) Acsoptus)s) Anaxil!

!

Aristeas

»

19

521

Eg.

Fr.

36

(Sch.)

870

5

apfud)

Chronicle of Morea,

1199. 1216 Akrlitas),

Dionysius). D 37 Eubíulus) Eurfipides)

212

781)

Isocírates)

Bai! Bog

BBy(

Epir.

Steril.

14,

x

848!

218

B5, 8! 215

34

367)

475*.476 -

7:35

Lyc(urgus) 378.686

809

Lys(ias)

12, 10

367! 756° ; 350 644! 40°

og

811

13)

20 413415 149 284-5

| Leont(ius) Neap(olitanus)

822

V.S.

442

1729 B

B7? |

367! B2

148

Moens 23 161 103 195 197

2h35tr) 1102,2463.266( 101! 158% 4957/8)! 1617 ing!

367! 14

B2

| Isoc(rates) | 1. 2

Htalicarnassensis) 107.

ae.

/ftiad) i IX. XXIV Odí(yssey) xvu

Stob(aeum)

Men

117

42

(Hippocrates)

Hypterides)

1049-3

Galfenus)

Hp.

830(1)!

rs

57

889613} 848!

170

Hom(er)

154-5:582

3.37

vi 32

306(13) . 61(1) θη:

339 3935425

800

vii r4o f.

8

428.1

1 35 120 ii 37. v

57

‚28.18

169-225),

Astr(ologus)

(Herodotus)

1)

706!

963

Orc. 13456. Poet. XIX 5

i

573!

[253

Belthandros and Chryssanza, 38-9

|

Hdt.

126

Th.

Dig(enis)

Heph(aestion)

128

280, 281

Callicrat(idas)

(Legrand

259. 364

i

220

Aristfotle)

Georgillas

336 67(6 3970)

44

Ar(istophanes)

REFERENCES

-

15

t, 79 349b 349

as)

TO

Ar.

386

350

200

126°.337,81'

Med.

78

350

202

357181!

6. 245 τας

205,121

382

683

13. 450. Sect.

σι

436

57

"

307!

Philet(as}

436

Ἶ

138

qa!

568!

385 B. Ὁ.

Mandilaras,

The

Verb in the

Greek

Non-Literary Papyri

25

INDE

Phrvnaichus)

40 149 52 153

1. ἡ. 88

Crit.

44a

210/(21,470

521

373°

317

373°

95 314d

Per.

9

Bı

1

430

2. 4 14: 4

τΒ 4} Bıßin)

40. 3

78714

qU.

uH.

787i11

Fr.

Sin.

(Svmmachusi

aq.

τιῦ gri!

te

sy?

24

INE

b. ἢ Ib, 8

ι.5 377°

Corpus fascriptionum

2051/2) 191! 147

7

64

) xu

[7].

xiv

1002

64

og. 1169:163B:1640

64

I?

315.

03

35714)

Petersburg

T

qu

qr.

41.

4

35.

!3

Adviersus! Gram-

200, 220.

37

122

854 4353/3!

TL

33

;

Hl

20 30

64 446

δ 4}

jM Rosetta ὦ.

363'

Stone. 226.

12 18

117. 6ET zer, Ion7.

386

d

a7" 300:3)

jus

12.12

- 1001.

by

42

δ.

1853

igth

d

Job

iv

442

20 31

270

ER Ig.

136-7 ^1 702 (qaB-rn E53

4, bb

1370

Qo,

Q.C. Q.T. Ph.

Hyg? hia.

62306

341r: 17 R22

89

im

12

IV

26HH,

O.fl.G.

Ei

n.

vim ge, et fat,

Melodist

32.

2, 37

Inser. Pont ( ΝΠ, Latsschev, Inser. antiquae orae sepreitrionalis Ponti Eu

858 438

21

ibo

HI

1.G.Rom,.

37 47 810

p. 9734 8

aui

MH 470. 20 Brite), 8o

448

Pyibaeornis?

Sophiocles}

σι. 4. il.G, αν Ὁ

PG.

Fimptmeus)

mialtcosn)

An,

bar

INSCRIPTIONS

44

ve Prm..

45455)

variarum Chilia-

Qec.

hi i.q

12 2

Big

ἢ

ἢ,

Hell

G.D.1.

2. | 13. 8 Q. ἢ

785.6! 344

vr, VE d.

Bry

72. b

605,

Cyr.

35. 8

27. I5.

3.2 ra. 3

vog.

20 23

Romanos the 2606 € 4 Il 1. 309

Sextius

τὸ

508!

des;

Aeniophon?)

3 J

71.

XXX

Sıextus)

Hio tiii41

35. 4

Iv xxii XXIX.

Prochust

10 1

25o!

Hiistoriarum

57V 072

Sull.

my

Tzietzesı

573° Bayh

Rep. 3qba Theaet.ibzv

rao

231 141

B2

Gorg.

if, 04.

ı 1

306i Bi

Pirthian)

Poly bits} i

Thueisdides)

306!3*

735

Plut(arch)

Mariister)

ran!

732

Phaed. Prot.

Thomas}

143! 41!

413

Plíato)

REFERENCES

rif! 1107 roxy? 257

218 332

Pi(ndar!

TO

ὦ

325 491! Hoi

4394}

58 14}

INDEX

MEW

τε

u

^h

Matt.

Tt

REFERENCES

TESTAMENT

Luke

Heyy

7:

3 ἃ:

299(31.396.791 51 SI

| cont. }

5 23

3171.4!

43563! ryote)

317 266(6).07( 11)

ba? 707

ang: 20) 210 1] 586

33.680121? 2241|! 234 1714] 122 gro)

582 Hiya)

667

au?

367!

Hi 215

575 4151!

τῆν

Bags

27

2!I

70115)

313

Qoi)

;01

40

1η}

438

By

388

30.1381)

$1712) Bin)

410 Ita

211

30. 13811)

242:

4,Hh 5684/2 23:

Afark

"306111 “58

0:

τὶ

I2;

Juin

317614 24425 Boo,

N

2; 30.83 3313 195

234.401

aol

Hef

Luke

1

480

317712)

“44

7060527

480

Bo

159

234

387

TO

INDEX

John

REFERENCES Rom.

{cont.)

12:25

30.137712)

[5:8

ἢ: 21

Big

32

35715)

750

16

380

17:5 18: 14 30

BolT)

2:3 16:18

266f 10)

32(2]*

13: 11

201(5)

14:15

504

573.7871 1)

39 20: 23

Ὧν.

122

21: 18

30.

110

444

δ: 5

ro6

266:8)

7: 28

234 140073)

450 142

0:4

120

- out 4 Sun ^» 1 o

20

333 abi

10: 25

334 701.7061

1: 8 τῇ 5: 9

:6

M

Acts

(cont.)

;Q0! 2!

81g

11

317118

10: 4

8)

11:

18

266013)

12:

τὶ

31

15:

152 Bal 234

2Cor,

120)

yh

2:13 H8:0

85,612)

434 Bıkin!

4:

234 20h

58a

Gal.

761

10:13

aig

4:28

106

;076(19

134

- kh

Eph.

121 344

IT

08 4/2)

uu

“το

20

; R6 (4)

26:4

142

173.19

5;UHí1)

Pg

Phil.

1:22

Cl.

3:3

134

307 344

aab by, s 4041

3134 Hig 266110:

317112!

rob

444

580

2bbig)

810

t Thess. 4:

ἤπια) Arn

--ui anf.

Pr|

142

rR Y D

308

i

1:21

1

Rom.

28 301,76 1.880943)

INDEX

Phi

3: 36

"nem.

Heb.

12.1.12}

2:15

159

24: 17

28:3

429(4)

344

31:17

26616)

842

32:27

39

Josh.

tg

61(8)

Big r38í1)

9:5

384(3)

Judge.

5:17

61(8)

I:

2666)

Ruth

2:109

42914)

2Chr.

20:37

61(q)

Job

35: 19

683(2)

— 1:16

838(1)

12:17

134

13: 22

701,761

134

396

5:12

1 38(t)

4:17

78714),820

511

234

27

317014)

24

32í2)!

2:3 4

Rev.

20 3:9

1:4

367!

Isa.

9:60

01:9

42967 442

122

Zech,

8: 28

O34

ı Macc.

4: 18

5

OQ . Mever

58

»"

14:15

78717)

18

27

bt

O.Strassb, O. Tait

266: 6)

20: 20

858

[4:

Il

858

42:

42

122

23: 11

42044)

450

748.

6

1050.

57

3-4

423

2

117! 19)

5

4452)

152. 4

H!

04.

W.o.

3:24

Da

407 OSTRACA

820

3: 12:15:15

2b7{1)

2:8

OLD TESTAMENT

Num.

S. of S.

7yol2) 122

13

Exod.

B20

Dan.

30.137i2)

11:6 9

3:8

+38 319 580

9: 11

3

Eccles,

701.761

2:19

Jude

Gen.

61(6)

5:12

19

t John

50

17: 20

Deut.

6:16

2:8

ı Pet.

REFERENCES

210(1)

2 Thess.3: 1 2 Tim.

TO

bobs,

PAPYRI A.P.F.

i

(19073), (hy,

B.G.U.

389

p.

123.

2U-1

2, 14-15

Ul

43518) HBG!

H)

221[7)

INDEX

To

REFERENCES

B.G. U.

(cont.)

icant} 103.

4.

(374 363: 71]

r2,

13. :

06147.

114]

[5'1).

:

8

[1]

tt,

2100

334

702151

Hi

273

12]

4u6

10/10),

146),

346

| qo.

28811) area

21(1!,

853

22.

14811?

IL 35.

27.

J

3-6

nhatb65.375

6-7

aua

F4 13-14 0

y Ho.

an02i rc] 2H1

AB. δ᾽ 44014)

741

LO.

43554)

310 37

1431.

45259)

145,

bien!

315 411}

“1 4216101] εἶν 50a

237.

E

54H "80

242.

[6-17 10-20

3 jul

1:

“πη 2)

243.

1170]

2.40.

39 2498.

bi 6.6 6}

uf Rood 135!

211.

qu

250.

[00.514

2l.

201 0W8g9:01

27).

Sui

oti,

hs

42

mmm

44015!

ath

-——

0)

betas a)

mum

13

beat)

241). BO,

11.2.15}

VeRO

17-19

H32

e4084)

02

1 1

. 7-8 13

164,

189.

4:15

»

410 302,4) 34

317/09!

1 [

48,

16043.

183.

421

3.

1602

j9e

Tu

4b.

ΒΒ 4 724 74!

Ι 30.

I“

1 αἹ

prp 4435.4: 135: 5!

INGEN

B.G.U.

To

REFERENCES

{cont.)

cont.)

38H 111, 27 2 4?73

251,

87

43565)

aber, 2b7.

10-11

275.

ads.

2 14-15 24 6-8

241.

8-13

27h.

"m

415.

24H

333

419. 12!.

421.

206:6)

322. Ὁ

73217)

125. 360110,

tl,

127.

201

$42 nz'.

Pe Ue

427.

424.

7.1} 4 251

gans Aula)

332.

312

441.

12-14 13 7-8 2t

(nir,

22

dp

3

31911!

6-8 q 11-12 1h 17-18 ι 8 22-3 ^ ἢ 24-4

10

18 qo3 Qg 10:2!

317614! 01,701

3741 QU

688: 11 Ζῇ

306113! 7 147 Ho 61

549! 3! 342! "ἘΠ αὶ

440+

405

$212!

$53.

ἢ 17 19

in

5111.

BHAI 12) (vl.

275

372111.

151 ὅτο

510

1%

19

407

340! |"! 452 14 277 Brn

7

12 3 7 12-17

{72

317161,

33211!

323.

2

242 ἐγ

307 1 1H.68212?

By $3512) 3182)

goat,

11

104

08

4e

681

1:36

j 45.

63 [jor 2)

514

207

436. 8-4

149.1)

ἢ,

LITER

25

11

©

tea gh, 22104)

819

124

870

418123

19-20 21 26

22H

apod

40 1{π|}

403.

118.082. 2

411).

350. 30,

30

548 303.511 3!

303:

"

a 20 21

90.4432 319 303 Hoi 322

48

700,

347.

aan,

4652]

3167 10i 301

5-b

Hon

Ib

OF

730,

01

41 760}

331.

4

543!

INDEX

B.G.U.

TO

REFERENCES

B.G.U.

(cont.)

532. 538.

13-14

8491)

(cont.) 608.

3201)

279

44811)

5200)

126

342.

279

541.

425! 7)

700.

546.

540! 13.506315)

702,

30981147

317(14)

717.

H89:61

452í11)

7328.

265616)

635(1!

729.

345

741-

535100

424 t? 9 13 997:

69-10 10-13 [0

2

17 . 6

741 B38: 1)

b3211)

45265) 127

747(verso),

278

44801)

338.2) 26516) 40 71]

(1),

2538

(11),

54013)

6835/2)

448: 1)

τ5ῦ{31)..4 1515}.ὕ

680; 4!

367 (41 88

757. 750. 798,

317(16)

B14,

77(1)

57 307

31716) 656

338141

452/11!

310.003

307

ia

3061)

27

102

31706!

319

54002),

3168)

Bib,

5637) 333501)

Bab

Ba,

538

{1

22,

541101)

733 21.823

bay.

24 Hg

24)

535.

340601

647.

130

648,

qb

han.

1}

651.

22111)

bagi.

Beal 12)

66511.

317631!

iia},

30

260516)

682.

26516)

6197.

4171141

241 ob B)

74i

27.

18-10

217

Ho.

18-10 10-20

734 1!

ut,

Ha.

)0 t2

ü23 31713)

432110)

473 ἡ h

H45.

Has

beta,

7 8 14

13

Bb 216,28H111 317165 401!

302

283

INDEX

B.G.U.

TO

REFERENCES

B.G. U. (cont. )

(cont.)

840. 9-10

208

[IO

689,701,76

15 16

505.

13

1027(1).

1

1032.

879{4)

859. 4

135 743

57

1035. 4

317(6)

8-11 11

201 237

14 14-16

864

874. 1

250(1)

ἢ

36

17

16

1351) 479

16-17

435(1),472

216,856

II

s6B(ı)

892,

6-7

2462)

903, 909,

16 22

307 a21(1)

1050, 24

169

O51,

33

169

912, 43

877(2)

1052,

5-7 27

190 747

915.

to

83

917. 20

754(4)

925. 4-5:1| 928,

[01 13-14 [9-20

418.750,864(3)

684(3),750 750 413.542

650

970. 3

37

975. 15

452(2)

983. 3-4

643

τὰ 25

14013) 3212)

ab

522,03(1)

992(1). 6 goB(u), 2

499.514 168

1001, 4

44861)

[4

1010.

60ὅ11{(1}},

874

18-21

813

24-5

88914)

15

877(1)

to24(1v), 26 (v). 17

(3711) aBgt 16)

20

rob

20

3!

1013.

10261xx11),

44901)

1058, 26

747

1073,

10

418

1074.

4 ὃ

126 157,163

5

877(2)

9

445(2)

1078,

Pr

740661)

1079, 6-9

got. 334(1)'

10

406(1),676

9

10-13 521-2

28

66415)

7-8 It

1081, 3

5

δ1(9)

217 [05 266(8) 452(10)

533(2).590

877

1092,

9-10

1085.

5-6

100

1094.

13

8.8)

1097.

17

304

1103, 5-6 393

695 +06tt) 697 ‚707

31-2 32 1080,

334.1)

21-3 24-6 24-9

27

366(2)

5

169

1053(i1), 14-15

‚163

969(0, 24-5

94

41

30

|

421(1)

13-14

396

8

948. 47᾽

gB4,

1044, 5

36811)

[go

INDIEN.

B.G.U.

To

KEFERENCES

(cont.)

B.G.U.

1105.

15-16

1107,

27-0 30

icont)

71

1260,

Ti

253

394 1}

1307. _

14

162 -

1.20.5}

31-2

10

31

3

162

11.

1

44912)

. 1304.

' 15 4405

' 4 4»

zo

409

11-12

401

litt,

10

1117.

15

aba

1371.

22

11186,

22

4115/10)

1576,

p

rhs

hu

att

[121,

38

9-10

1-12 17

UELI

po DEREN

14-15

[127.

10

126

1130, 20

126

ἢ

1134, 13

12 τῷ

[ἢ

44512) r1 08 45}. 40

| rate,

445' 42!

Re.

4002]

τα βία). 14 1200,

20

1201,

5 16-17

oil.

44813)

283

01.

13-15

ol

1-3

223

1)

070.709 5!

6

qz

557 4201 7!

53

741.

03

501

44}. 11

17bh1,. 0

t!

321 Αἰ

q-ri

g

14

ΧΟ)

ıl

41 71}

17375.

Br’

2

7

4-4

2-13

3405

1145. 245

317131

31719) 31713) 274 nt

11-13

106

21-30

1202.

D

17b.

27

7-8

4

T !ipud |

107.7

T

31Hí21

1135. 6

i 1 Hu.

1693.

B7aQl

1122.

Lift,

|

po ay2)

25 .

1635314111,

11}.}

4

ori7)

428

17;HH,

ἡ

135'4'

Bia.

4

43514

18253.

30

eta’

1 ΠῚ

Ὁ i, 321

M3

20:7!

pe

5

fori gl

1

717

iHobini,

448.2

1847.

10

13711)

1857.

"

46h.

ett.

ıı

2173,

mw

1232, 4514

424

41:2

6

188

50. ὦ

82 86

1244.

25

614

pst,

4

1245.

3-4

614

123.

7-0

1248.

1

BH. αἱ

1873

1250.

10-11

20-1

4187

Inna.

472

aly

112 ὦ

v. 24:20 39 |

ll

245

400.7!

ΓΝ ΤῊΝ

B.G.U.

ra

HEFEREN!

E

CPR.

‘eon.

icont.-

233. ἢ 246. CPLR.

M.Chrest

4} ΣῊ] tx)

BIET

L1QUTIV2, Ergrverso C.P.R.

ΒΤ

Uni

3081] 343v

107

40 28-4 42-0. 13 ὦ

d

43 15! 357 0 255

314

281+

340

5635/1!

qr.

gi

7113;

2

132:35/

372 αν iil,

4e 10

273 22151! 118.24

[tv vi.

I3 FI

246.2! 240

2

240.21!

SN

16-17

317.0)

Ib

ὙΠῚ

[.

4

31

Wb Wwe.

C.P.Herm.

22:11

51.112

Bots

2601 FOL

Car.

630

a

41g p)

abr

bay) 4 qot

HD.

34" t! 1171} yatı

ab) 255

15

370121500

P. him.

2|0:21.452:!

bpb

22.049:

12

127

18-10 25-2b

.

207 42:2.

Han

363,6i 66.0812)

45272 22

57

346

17"

S47. 21. 5301

374

22

532611

H-ro

EURE

if

zn)

413 25589

126

she. 2)

τιν Hrn

305

INDEX

P.Abinn.

RHIEFEREN!

( cont.)

P.Amlı.

15-16

P.Achmim P.Alex.

TO

17 (p. 43). (p.

(cout.

77.

17-20

33202!

79. 0i.

29-30 r1

877(2)

48).

go.

13

Q2.

13-18

104,

5986) 421

87. 3

Inv.

411

E

5

366:2) 110

363 4yalın)

304 333

439 (p. 15). |

366-11

P. Alexandr.

4.

340.4)

Ahıfı) 408

363.374 P.Amh.

75:

303 abt

107,

1:22-

352/11)

bio.

tB

433.277

{2

15

87710)

125

(intr)

13°,

13-14

210

96-17

+1,45 1

250034,520 515

131,

21013)

7-8

B-t4

4H

43001)

36072141 zu) 307 abst

44 Boo 37.

448010

THR)

676 243 676, 68012).

07 22101)

bie) 84913)

635(1! 63501)

34s

221(1)

240

44801)

83

bılın) I

3hbi 2)

127 Adgerı)

396

1

420164)

INDIEN.

P.Amh.

To

REFEIUNIGCESN

P.Bert.

(cant.\

ΖΗ.

δ 1 {το}

13.

435!

1:

qoh: 7!

T

p).

16

87 752

1-2

504: 53!

+

738

7

317614) 319

ὦ

499

13.1

200. [2 qnt

250i1).310

iO,

12.

6B! 2?

7;8Bi4

G. 910

n

40 7.5}

242

P. Baur.

20.

200

4 1268

P.Art.

Ong

7

+35'4).752

78611) Hoy

11

702

thy ᾿ 21 22-1

ba

b7b

δ).2)

604.500 7;86i1) 6131}:

25

ym

46

2j

207

41

bo.

A3

qi; boy

ab

suse gl

41 10-8 +7 48

43171141 beta)

835

25,

4-6

ya 277

geil N 12-13 13-14

8o

22

16-17

29,

30:11 3.

42.

P.Brem.

620

| 625

(

342:1!

2)

403.604 22 404.004 buy. 622

40-1

with

P. Baden

612

]

417;6

P.Artlıen.

b

12-14

212

aes

697

720

bu] 380:

D!

ID

11. 7. 44.

11}

75: 53.

LH;

Lb.

nd

P. Bas.

P. Curr,

48.

r1!

ua.

10 543-4 34

T0451. rou HH

P Berl.

Frisk

P.Berl.

Moller

h. Yo.

347

EIC P.Curre

aig

Gonhpecd |

ἐὶ

BL

—

,

5.

EE

pb

UN DEN

P.Cair.

Isidor.

8.

12

Ht)

U.

(-10

ε 4}

16.

27

3M 70.

2.

3

E

qt.

6o Qo-1

j^.

i

"NE

I

5

317

14!

j!

Sly

r.p

Q

132.

5

4317

11'

bro

Kap

ΖΗ

zn

32

317:3!

1)

1.43

(ii.

10}

306c!

15

24-5 a

; hzon7.

10-07

b700q,

3

i} (

0

0

qup

hzod4.

3

sez 7.

hzoH7.

8

pog

10-11!

by

1;

3!

recte,

16

147

(Verso).

10

3!

235

62 3.30

"m je

32 20 +13 Ὁ

jM

211

6700.

12

jn

670096,

ὁ

67097. 28 262

ü42 ΝΗ

14-20

3061151 10:5!

hai,

72 Re

26bihi 52i

67118,

42

0,2

67126.

40:67:74

TIT

67131.

0:23

067151.

22 H

bh

EE

io

h 7060.

3-4 b

ἢ σοί.

Ι

hrazın,

ὑ μι: 4} ] 1

2

aha.

ph

221) 2700

by bg

274

ı 30

67150.

23

48 174

67165.

1H

τῆ

308

κι.

Boe{ν᾽ trad

μη

266i ἐν}

1643 143

176-09

20-1

bzıba.

HHoí 161

pao

7156.

417}

282

306i r2!

642}

4H

01035

3d

2852

bod

42

43

Un)

21!

44

430.5: 44^. 2)

(Du.

bit

ἢ

21 34

(17)... hzeati.

6

books

b19!3!

fala

ı τ

26b

2333

4b 1,317

240: 2 z.B: 41b

7

4304!

.

b4.311

6zo7H.

o4

25

hang.

h7077.

Hu

6200211),

(7003,

ἢ

3171204

625

21

67076.

l'

22

13

(cont.

12 f

Map.

b7001,

Warp.

27;

23

Pils

P Cara

31711 317'!4 317

14

REPRISE Ne ES

LLL

5

P.Cairo

Tur

206 c] 14h piv

17

1.42

21

ar!

12

aub:ἢ.

PydehoN

P.Coiro

Masp.

Dp

Re bh

P Camo

(cont.)

67204.

bh Na

133! 4

I j

sobtb

+35 4

T4531,

15,

yz 208,

Hi

ryan.

rt

EM

fen

Cut

zer,

20-1

177

meres

Ε1-τὸ

gab

30035.

7

bro

30057.

à

2-3 37] l

63211:

Gun

P.

Cairo

67513.

413015!

b721.

μη

h732].

212:

(versos,

tlt

7353.

3186.1

Preis.

1.

40 αν!

we

3ab 7)

4.

22000)

P.Catro

zyory

M

1418/2!

quet

2

266:61

yg

agn.

ry

gib,

2

gu

30107.

3 b

Oy 4385 7! gu

|

{35°05

yu!

verso,

fiz

509021.

452/12!

45.7.4} 210

abso

Ι

J^.

d »-

ι 42

39028.

406512!

30032.

6o

30033.

2481

gri

1-17 :18

VUE

SOLS f-

4-4

qoo

30155.

i

31172.

3

62 01

340902 5.

wi

1242

yah ay.

2

160,30041

1

30151.

(ono BET Qo | 102

ahi Bu 682.7001 1^

qucoBe,

MI

3007.

148) 2) 888

Posg5

30020.

Zen,

5 b Fi H D!

zn

+}:

14.007) 50 1: Hur 17

oni,

$35!2° {}}

67112.

zn:

17

237.

1-2

88}

+5

SOE?

zd

PA

4

auto

2

47

ym.

i

34021 4.

y-10

43

39218.

7

24

300 1-

4006

Mp3».

4

272.3182.

30055.

Ἵ [12.1.2

30271.

7

3350717

(Δ

3027.

I

11} 37

1-2

400

135 Heitor:

pu

bbe 2h y

ISHEN

REFERENCES

(cont.) N t at 01 -J

2

ὦ

Due

4-4.

LOL ' "b

59251.

P.Caire

-

P.Cairo Zen.

TO

59272.

5

39275. 5929!,

3

Zen.

296

59480, 50495.

357(3).905

305 622.640 922

31!

$0500,

3504}

50502.

59304. 4

150

50.351. 503...»

59367,

59368.

59639. 59643, 59064. 59739, 45-6 59742; 27 59753: 66

44912)

72-3

425

59426, !

193 462

59768.

13

1 480,

11 [I-12:13-14

318. 493,

31 8

499 jo!

qo

045

gh P.Col.

452! 12!

2

50453.6 59467.

10

290370.

4

Zen.

6, 3 1b, 12 21,

007

50413.

266(6)

i360

358.358:8) 44812)

P.Columb,

256(2)

ghbih)

39762.

P. Col.

333 266(6)

18

266/65)

59387. 59303.

24060

59633. :

1472

31n

357 (2) +36(1)

39525,

436(1) 266.6) 1.43

30370.

$25 448(2)

59624.

332(2) 26512) 3

162

59023.

43601)

50.3.1

35817) 4350)

59554. 59596.

3176121 310

4

3605/2) 425 61(81

43601)

30618)

51330.

255.

905

39298. 4

50328.

358(1)

3057}

58

1

270

39499.

682.7914)

οδι δ)

39316,

306(1! 122

[37(1)

2 5.δᾳ7.Β8ο(6]

59294. 59296, :

I,

256(2)

3 2

580

ty 13701)

503

(cont.)

2

‚ 17

yb

821

97 44812) 161

44812)

640

428

07

4304

122

un

100,145

[^o

INDEX

P.Col. Zen.

27011), 9.

17

(cont. 15,

448(2)

14-15

15

43601)

363

1165

792( 10)

919

20(a), 7

31616)

1. 2-3 2-4

185 882

+45

758

9

37

2. 8

306í7!

13

B8 4)

1 1-2 2

452(12) 642(3) 295

4

286.009

79211)

P.Fay.

gob

142,

rg, 20(n),

45

515

7

405

7-8

653

I 18-19:22-3:23

409 400

^

2B.

607

23 23-4 L7.

21

21).

b

255

[24

(NO. (No.

B.

ὦ.

Teht.

384

Ln»,

$7200) $5201!

102,

Loft,

44861)

32:2)

"nm

434 “arial

ras,

240

1c),

10

74!

Sirpirhiry

159 747

317:651 348116) ἊΣ pao

55

718

1335 44!

F3. 61

[11

36716)

Ligh,

P. Eud.

P.Fam.

b

188

BB 4)

195.

107. 116),

ΠῚ

34014)

P. Erlangen

[12

τὸ

207

104

79. 0

207

44015)

33212) 25

1350? 34014) 24

B77r2!

249

ἢ

165 69tí1)

JL! 394

44012)

14-15

bP.

9r.

499.51..520 785 (2)

2b. 5-6

P. Ent.

20, 35. 36, By,

205

8

342.44 243 ats 30516!

75402).910

0543)

14.

317(22) 13h

303

19, 5

F3.

Tebt.

44802)

10, 29-30

P. Eleph.

REFERENCES

P.Fam.

(cont.)

54. 17 P. Cornell

To.

a,

Mandilaras,

The

Verh

in tne

Greek

rit, oe

yon

Non-Literary

Pupyri

M

INDIEN

P.Fay.

Te

REE

RR NBS

P.Fay.

Tcont.) Perey,

I1-12

5

110,

4-6

38a

Ha

aa

T4-1h

FO.

15

ἢ Lig, 122.

Aka

11-17

‘cont,

E23.

ph-17

2h

zer}! Ba

27

{5711}. 702 q04

Ag

3-4

Δ 12:1

yon

430/21 622

sch

687i pego: 1) huy. 4}

rh

26 (ie iH

u ü E 11-12 1:14 [3-14

2!

£03

ὅτῳ}

μι

11

043 ha,

4]

ΤΌ

3h

15-16

Buh

1-20

13515.

10-24

qo ]35' 3;

ἢ 10:3:

22

$05

13555!

124.

22

335i 1!

rab.

5

Hai}

128.

5

4317/5)

„Ha

mat,

16

70} {5}

liy.

d

54115!

2:5

684641

I. 3 b 12 13:40

$5200) 514 1r!

(yo 2? 667. 2.

{35-

31

Ἢ Kd t 7 )

113,

“20

It.

g2u

14-16

247 ἡ 231!

qun Sh. 7) Quo

003 17-18

533

‚6-7

684: 2!

14

24.

7

157

31.

10

aq.

τὰν

Q2

7212)

8

17

303

ἀ7.

15

j^42'25!

16-22

RU

Qn.

4

jaoí3!

20

DET qe

31.

22

1521510)

gh.

ru 21 22

gyorg) $17 τ} 4401 6

14

40-1 1$

=f

m

vli

qun

7)

Pas

M

11. re sath τα FI.

4 qouq

ur, hr: 4

hs.H

118,

2^

452: 1}

1

3.

S0

po-14

21

PF le,

4 {>

yy 2

61.

42

qo 2 2653bi

272

19

qun: 7}

E

oH. 448 23% 4315 DIO

7

Ὁ

3,2

He.

9-10

622

jg

719 wey

yt 402

INDEX

P.Flar.

TO

RHEFEREN:

(cont.)

Bs

P.Flar. yy

85.

qi

303

B6.

132 306: u^

781 bag a: 217 380.007 152r! 702 22h 381 28h 3i

172,

y^ tay

535'3)

284,

h22.b4919)

2HH,

63510)

21,3.

bro)

206,

51.50

304.

3001 1!

409.

889:8)

14072)

153.1036; ETE

331. 112.

637

31716»

b

870 884

p^

o2

ἢ

6-8

717 702 "ER

372.407

338

Io0-1]

1:1}

670

boo

13-14

04

Bag ns) 398. 181.007

[ἄγ 15 iH

0905

145.

bi

3)

153

ao

T

1540),

24-5

12,

τῆ

zul

785:

338. 2-4

217 301 361 E

3-H

2b:

166.

858 418

322. 42

380,703

142.

259.

21).

715 8Ho 221

με versol,

(cont. )

101-2

688

ΩΤ ἢ

40.

zus!

δ

2)

407.

DTE

ἐγ 7 11,

qu;

graz!

Ü24

xy

135 360.508

24

7.7.2 20H 28

biz!

bra

TT era

bo

o Hue

shy

7!

640i 11!

625

4 8-0

306

8-0

qu89 δ.

1 16-17

684:3'

s!

P. Form.

Zus 017,417 ba. I

3714

403

INDIEN

P.Form.

TO

REFERENCES

fcont.}

P. Gen.

201.

317619)

2)»

hab

20}.

445'2) 317/14)

344: 351.

3

icone)

8792] +23

2b*3:^!

604.

2b3:6)

goi.

263i

726.

26i

88:18)

87916)

Q101 4)

30.

h)

50,

317119]

(qb,

92

ι 280,

44512)

ἦς

43015)

V{versay,

6107)

;88'4) bos

| 17-20 18-20

q00

It)

bag

12 21-2

Bug

584

33712! 561

706/31

238.3179) 255

baz

set

403.550

32! recta, (verso),

511 3171093 431812) 5

077 qob(1).729 san

{4,211}

11.

87075)

. 8&-10 [{|-1}

NO

M

665.640 2)

751 37-345 373

*

554111

108 217.508! 161

442751) ati ;H 407

yh.

τη “] Hoa:

5

197

grater)

53463) 24

217

131 br:

120

13344504

arzt. Bat

sol

qo; 2 45íu21

317116!

73011) quaint 217

δ}

5356:

(OG

30h

52i 2)

5101

δὴ

1121}

my

20)

ys

2I

Bogie

Dung

104

INDEX

P.Gen.

TO

REFEHRENTENS

(cont.)

P.Giss.

(cont.)

4011},

69812)

8

317(1) 4i D.

3171561 228 238

88914)

47.

233,486. 520

367(2)

343 398014)

250(1)

Ὁ» ὦ" OE

31716) 256(2)

251

61(3).317(6) 25317. 882(4)

223

no ΓΞ

533121

63.

6b.

79 + P.Lond.

870

55413) 886 346 744 597 317109)

70.

4 418

422.

774 73061)

7241 628 162.462

P.Giss,

Univ.

Bibl. 20,

345 4348 200

508(2) BAR 581.68 262)

765

201,

884

689611920 472 408

21.

31710!

452(131

HB. 1)

gio 1) 373 74!

P.Giss.

h83í2) 6409! ro)

P.Goodspeed

701,761

856(2)

333.500

24

5

477

24612?

33715)

9204

405 477 465

θ8{1}.701

48!

an

308 15-1..4921

2501)

12)

P.Got.

154

701,761

11....12 2.10

P.Gradenwitz

P.Gr.

ub

Bero.

2.

4o! b).

53079-310211),

449

405

7

Tee

EN 1 1x

Pee AL.

i II.

fist.

|

HERE

RHE Ν

P.Grenf.

!

ES

à

“Corel, d

Oy,

NI

>

LM auti

n]

hi- 3

u j^

Dj.

g-b

M 150

(ybes

1:5

151 E hi3

P7.

ἢ H-G

Bye

»

29-4

niu

NIIT.

P.Graux

[25 PUT

L3

230 253

31.

!|

231

:

ab.

6 af.

A212: 71

6177

g- 10 0-11

j

445. μη

ny-ın Ih- 618

30407 211 611 [31.152 12!

It)

ἃ

a8.

LET

11-03

2I

Prenf.

Ahr

30,0

4.

NANVT

az!

376.784:41!

PA

fostr,),

XII

272!

3

15-15 by

Hir 458 27;

jh. 23

40:

qd

$7.8 Oe,

18-1

340j' tiih

2I SO.

07

4I

22 "T

319 417 $1"

bon

73.

77. 410

[0-12 L4

266

ey!

[ἢ 24-] 3b»

34H

Spa

34-8

Ar! 315

EM

“ἢ

2

Tiel

has) In,

dt.

bua? EIN

te. job

4 t 4

Bi

5-4

220

H

"tar reete,

p

p

5

10-17

4

| +

2]

80)

242 ubi Fi ib BA BHE „at

744-2) 37 1130 140 frech]

INDEX

P.Grenf.

16-20

864

18,

7-8

$19

8,

12

65^

147-8 167-8

P.Hamh.

4.

2

14 5.

87.

gB6ot1) 21061)

228:242;:2'3 2bo

4 5-8 7-8 7-10 8-10 [4 14-15 5

64

17.

D.

fo,

835

05. 2

P. Hal.

cont.)

57

qa. 3-4

P.Gurob

REFERENCES

P.Hamb.

n (comt.)

9t. 7

P.Gron.

TO

703

5ul 773

wa oe

317(21)

got

317.6)

6-7

6ont 1)

12

bh.

B.

144

6645) 730611

i31

538

ort

o,

5

anbihi

} Ic,

4

236!

15513:

IRF

P.Hurr:s

4104}

Hag

112,0 g-10

7874)

Τὸ

458! 1)

bh, 21

3 40141

135.

7

ahıia)

8. 27

375

158.

421[2)

18

rie

20

412

(ri.

2 4:1 2

23. 36

6401/9)

16,

24.

4

27,

| 4-5 3

20,

i 48

033

b-7

;85i 1)

3-4

7b

4496 405

13-15

650

14

612

agi.

fei, 5!

217.

165 41701.}

21

3176141

34014)

54.

r8-20

62.

17

7406

68.

r5

b32i2)

70,

13-14 21 23

210 330:pi 477

10

6. 24-b

P.Heid.

200. I)

39133). 14

73.

j 309

153. 3-4 36. 3-4

15

τι

[S]

622 — 266i6).2031 T)

5:7

37. 4

750

P. Herm.

36361

74. 4-8

304 213

38

35!

21 818

h

81]

22-2

848

28-0

bo4 bao

20-2

53.

20-3

0.4

4

ho]

2 5

b15

bay 27-8

h. 34 7. 12 P. Hib.

(Qon

ı11-12

3

261.312

BH, 3-4

Rees

850! 1)

bro

404.007 6tii

$

24

1310!

| i

27.

]!

35744

INDEN

P. Hb,

118

UOTE.

HRP

RHR

NC

P Hib.

BS

cant.

:;

102.

ἢ

3h1

131

139

147

382

170

105.45 1 75 7.415

20b,

7-4

207.

153 15-18

ὅτῳ

21

3nR 3Bo

$344

8-10 G- ft)

ΠῚ

V7 2-4]

30-2

41-2

e 2-3 OI

4a.

.

1h

41

2 ἃ,

445! 717

IO.

12-13

2162

tl.

7

Han

8

roh

I

608 537

1

410

14.

B-ı0 27

11 bow

Ib.

4

813

18. 6

τά" 1.

)o. 3

376.784 41

h 9

508 1! 575

22. 2 23. 2

5502! 310

3

0 2! 354

QUO

377.308 2 48}

612:2. hag ;u!

(fy,

5622.64:

20,

+47,

ΕΠ 1

1.13 341 345

4

Big

514.5260 ganz) .80

111]

ri

4452°

13

«ει :.742

14

3637

340. 1053

34. 12

tig 2,7,

. LEP,

45 151! 211}

(8

PIER

Io

21.2

734°

68i

103.τ᾽

12.

2

alg dq!

35

H rri

8 1-20

Pfand,

3412

4 ΕΝ

709 OHH

Γ1-ὦ 1 O- 1 j

r3

37.573001

F5 5-16

P. Helm.

τη (o0

ἐτ-ἢ 4

h

7042 youl

B6 114}

Q2.

3-4

Q7.

02

o.

τ

7+!

lor,

8

105

03. 1260.

7 J

43501!

7

319

INDEX

( cont.)

P. Jews (cont. ) 128,

139.

4

418

8

P.Jews

1575,

15-16

1926,

689(1)

1927,

7 534

$29 BıRlı)

1928,

3

Bao

1929.

6 ff.

7^1

P.Leid,

11-13

761

16

87(1)

34-5

-

P.Jena

REFERENCES

cM

P.land.

IO

157 42912}.869

1912. 22-3

513

20-30

2b6(1)

40-I

250(2) Inv. P.Lille

2,

B42

36,

373

4.

^ 1913.

8

1914.

9510

322.856 306,

1915374

1711}

229

79217! 772

781 31613)

348 442

B78(5).

HEY! 4! 88i 25! Btig

454 78503) nan

ib

l1

180 706

20

56316)

φῇ, Zutat).

45217)

1916,

r8,

TI,

338i 7)

31614) 731 568(1) 3

53512! 51011?

1919,

12 13 14-15

1926,

11

325 2Hb6

2367

1917,

:

494

87912) 35817) 300()

715

244,3)

317(5)

[2,

7B6(ın)

4148/2)

747

84

13.

100

98914)

INDEX

P.Lille

REFERENCES

P.Lips.

tcont.! 1

P.Lips.

TO

17.

4

qa

25. 4

qoo

20.

5

331

qo,

h-7

gob

NI.

2

Cpo2zitt

42.

7

104.513.520

ai),

16:17

2.17 fut, 10 21

qr.

17

30

353. 8

367 (2^

3h. 19-20

$403!

30.

5

312

6j.

3:10 40-73

61 339

ray. 104

35.

630

3.40.4I

15 4 12

221] 313 24025

4

anb:2

F5

1350?

314

37.

61

105.

(

dur.

221:1!

ἐγ χα! 10}

[3-14

597.667.

715

2h-7

rah

2;-H

bug

2H

671

24

667

I

210

6-7

302

17

4361)

lob,

17-19

rou,

4

43H 30335154

313.575 Hzgin

yb Pla,

ὅτῳ τ

11

445/27

16-18

Ill, lg

verso

mni,

870

8

in

134 ELT

erg: BB

1%

h-12

435 4!.b22

4 b

$4552)

22-41:21-5

1...2),

36. 7

qol.

40961!

o6 3H

20-1

ao. {118}

0275

pog.

abra?

317'9)

aiv. 3

34013!

105

1522!

I5

41

73012!

bagbi

q2. au. Sg,

230!T!

L- 109 22

Hay 11} 152/23

5

34

p]-15

15

20. 475

134.3065 7) 23611

4}

24 “ἢ

δι ἢ

T

363!

ph

15! qub

10

30615)

Bay. ἡ

33b

ΣᾺΣ

5

46-8

251

22-4 28-1

3418/2)

4b

E5211

Ban

23

12

130

8. τῇ

27.

p

349! 4: realy 104

[5-15

22.

jo UY,

101

4

5- P.

Q.

tcont.i

12

[14 34163!

4157171.35817'

1-5

b46

Ó

bar

120,

12

61(61

266.

6-7

7.4013)

abi

rj

17

L^

pc

ly

SURG)

P.Lips.

Inv.

318. 7

514

INDEX

ΤῸ

KEFEHENUEN

266i r)

P. Lani.

P.Lond.

255'2) pii 1)

2bo(b)\ qozi t) 105

(cont. | riage thy (ob),

25315;

tary,

306:111

Tiga,

265/61

121,

033 303

24.

205 205 457

1311irecto!,

790

hi

1.44.

SUP

p

121: bo,

verso.

613.0341

ah,

573

122.

44 ΠῚ

bat)

be

54000)

oo

Ognr ri

OGOII!

206

{5

Ι

b37

15-16

351 +55

Suza

«ἢ

dà

170,

BAT

21 z/versol,

tbe,

10

216,

403

yiirectoi,

265113

214 bi,

30

220/10],

4t |

31.

pial,

Hz

42

14

Gp2 3! [5475 ang 208. 11.

25 tag

t

102

231.

21}

102 4Hr A

a5p3 Bote! 854.3! [Qu

boli a

; 4^ 507

870

anu:

iil Hive

+3

5-6

b-8 [3

N

3063 qb

214.

Ci

HH

QIor1'

13-15

584

b I1l-12

12-13 1

b42 2: 416 tn

B25

11-12

Io

24 O30

2:2 zyb 351 ze! hl

14-15

234.

102

χα δι αν δε τὶ 41 {7}. ΕἼ41 T0) 11.1{1|.

179.584 201

(- 10

385 205,

roh

(03

35/'5 yon

[{{}Ὲπ11]

13-14

16-18 17

613.5000

17720

my 22

2.1...

41

12!

12

‘S44 ἰδ

qp Hetty

good as qao $42:

>

‘

INDEX

Ti!

REFERENCES

P.Land, ( cont.)

P Lond. 215.

14-15 M

23h,

7 [2

(cont.)

244.

210 250:11

20-2

OH! 1)

245.

240i 11,740. "EIE, ri!

217.

37 505! 71. 300: 0) 730i 1} Beh

230,

7

2.45,

495.514 2

ἢ πο. 21

7 §-10 IO 17 iB Iq 20-1 5-6

15-14

412.5098: 15! 52:2}

ιἢ-18

412.5η8 115}

4118; τὶ

272

Bagi 0)

Ü6.Li 3: 3173)

363

505

4354)

cia)

342

pry 2),b8o: 23 210.501

4105]

32533312]

34015)

20:12,

aoi 4) 1312]

+24

38a

635i 11

5..τ|4}.7148

407

870r 1! 07712!

148

33716)

01012', [08

410

317127

412

317:16!

Ari 241,

1.8757 857 1" 25]

242.

243.

34014

314.

3bhiz)

720,

207 18-19

IO

28 333:

(qoi

58 304

S11,

3132.

2 ΤΊ, 340813 44} (

781 568 2!

gory)

230,

32:2;

8-9

in

3^

52:2} 374

344

16-17

542.

4475 4310

6^

202 3171350 543 03242 131. {1.558}2᾽

243

353.

87943!

4011.

412

207

4171} 81)" 1.882

344

317.6) 68713)

350. ah1'rectol,

Info gla)

281 277

74! 453 ;

847

INDEX

P.Lond,

TO

REFERENCES

(cont.)

P.Lond.

404. 6 8-10

11-13 13

13-15

217

18-20

217'1,406(1)

910(1)

20-1

31711)

763 414.

549

3171)

465

25-6

33311),561

9710

+4512)

13

31713)

25

16

87

ab-9

243 3061) 7:301

8

39.425.468

415. Bio

7558)

6 7 13-14

$62,788( 3) 889(4) 597. babi 2)

417.

6-8

[4

406. 5-6 . 11

407. 5

7-8

15

408, 67 12-15

13 L4

16-17

18-20

20 409, 3 9 19-20

27 410,

16-18

“84

33311 217.765 “ἢ

6-7

405,

413,

886

20-1

404. 4

(cont.)

663.874

5) 745

7

500

242

1

gtotr)

302(5).317(0)

2

302(3).370(2).

24011).5409

901 533 3! üü 1] qr (

135 "ἢ

907 44!

541( 1), 569

23

33312).88gt r6) 240(1)

44811)

1

641

20,

3353

Jr: 410

7

a

421(verso), 5-7

853

617

445. 15

35712)

755(1).825 3494)

483. 76 85

5634) 403.619.650

195.790( 5)

-

664(1)

683(1)

27-8 28

390

220

44514)

20 20-4

ü

3

ı8 9-10 14-19 16-17

217 4113(1)5.543 3682)

418, 3-5

groft)

13

qin 88.

10-12 11 11-12

᾿

B54. 10-12

339

597. are

gag,

228

87912) 215 9101)

248 861(1) _

949

020

406

go8, 33

535

020,

τῷ

748

924.

8

2663)

145

18-19

221(1) 854(2)

19-20

830(1)

Qa: 432,

604,633 622

it

34-5

verso),

j

3-4

k

304.522

412,

11-12

15

435(8)

yb4. 9-10

375

413.

3-4 1

413(2) 704 3) MA

oir,

ri-12

rab

988,

ri

Qul.

10 L(-20

10-11 Lt

385 48

13

707 413

"m

317í(6! 117 bazla),

649( 10!

INDEN

P.Laned,

To

HEFEHRENUE-

cent.)

P. Lond.

64953)

1-19

QQ. Pond,

cont.)

33H

152! 101

22111

--

/

1032. ge to

317í111

G49) 7!

003

1075.

13 15 2|

49 87.206731

21-2

[157 versol,

1 15H.

53)

5041}

401

222

ΦΉΡ

340 4}

17

Ζίνθι 4}

452/11!

rıtıyihi.

152

1)

3170 1g 452110]

11!

4 qo gh

201

Ck),

40. 7!

rib,

74

452: 101 200131

1177.

18

23b!

12607,

1204.

454

7

152

3!

12th,

12 2*1 !

2.

1383.

12H

1-387,

30112)

1301.

57

1247.

635 1!

13493.

anb)

1240.

053

130b.

32/1"

332.

2706 1)

[.JO.

14)

1547.

Üg M

iot,

6-8

1574.

a gt

1576.

30

13348.

454)

1o!

[527 101 i54

211 10

135.

un

1345

20763) ty

+

3u-bo

200101

1677.

they!

zT;

1:345.

503.5171! 523 201

136 523

I3. HJ. L350,

f

4152:

1 0)

132/101 VUCOPSCO

1551,

I1

1356,

24-5 25:48 41

0

3031 1)

Orb bagi 5]

24

ih,

773

1686,

bog.456

LOG.

az)

roa.

610 Bath)

174040,

otis) 26712)

abi

5054}

gobi 7!

2425

shir)

2091)

6 46:0]

2bi

414

INDEX

P.Lond.

TO

REFERENCES

icont.)

P.Lond.

1712,

17-18

630!1)

46

1716.

4

724

17 17-18

172.

10

173.

14-15

τ}

9

1793.

15-16 17-18

10-12

1530 poe recto.

201

r Hh

709

31353! 250! 1}

395 P. Louvre

625

;86:5j 21,884 δα. 23) H 345

106542,

310

6491111 622

P.Marmarica

iv,

vi:

b22

03,040:21

P. Merton

37 τ7 2)

. 3b.

689141

10,

785/21

TI,

Hhifat

24,

764

613.640: 81

[53

664161

403.0530 o3

1}

2.4.

60111)

O50

701

ha

74!

[03.5530 B50:

2

3-6

qu; 711) 739

210: 4!

1705.ἢ iHa.

B7,B7

699.759

at) H-10

241

4^6 clc.

1727.09 41-2 +4 45 47

1-6

h-H ἢ 8-10 20-1

613

57

1728.

2102,

6198)

33-4 32

(coni)

755°2)

4")

1722,

No,

b25

rH

1714,

fav.

I

317 14! ]

230! r1

ui

317i 04!

656011

3171/61

24b

P.Lend,

Im.

No, 1551, 1575.

6-8

83413]

273

223.020

225

6

9

9-10 [1 12-15

317161

75.

bi

Ho,

gab 22)

2009 27

E ity 16-17 [7

715 303 07.323

715

861: 11

1H-20 19

405118)

[o0

17-18

ΟΣ

74! 26:61

1}

Ash!

715

22-3 87H: 4).B8gi 24) 21 24-5 27-H

715

P.Mevei

δαί 31.8791 31

317 θη!

75

11»

14: τὶ

INDEX

P.Meyer

REFERENUES

P.Mich.

(cont.)

37.

P. Michael.

Zen.

317614)

194.

200 4)

1

15

317(9) 75413) 864

791(h)

202,

15

24.

20-1

79512)

203,

20.

ı8-20

4 g- 10 ι7 19

Brig‘. Bıa

b.

2-3

649

2

12.

1-5

270

204. 8

28.

3-7 20-0

20.

1 9 Uz

104

69o(1)

270

211,

I0:11-t2

316(1)

107

215.

22

214.

4-5 tI 15 20 20-1

224 208 224 684!2) 896

201-212

70917)

26-7 27-9

70009) 73081)

3438: 7! ie

©

57. 7

2 50. 2}

ἢ

907

20

435: p) 310

4

38

87.5 42-35.

|

48

τὶ

aci

21

ry

416

830

6h7.550.716

20-30

jou 5!

30-1 31-2

70019) 70913)

41.

405.0870

186.

919

318(1)

$2.

lo.

47 359

210, 4

436r)

45. 21

71,3

.μ45{2}].535{1}

209. 7

850í 1)

133:6! Lt

319 Big 225.826 819

206, 4-6

303.827

7

752

9-10

142

23.

253

20-1 25-6

16, 3-4

V7.5

853

16

264(4)

LO

(cont.)

191-2, 14-15

685(2)

22, 5 9

P.Mich.

TO

5036/7).20914]

216.

ἢ

31716)

217.

2}

935512)

210.

5-7

220.

26

317(6)

221,

5

31716}

dy

30h7)

230.

4

321111

243.

3

118.682(1)

244. 7

53501)

245. 27

300(5)

250,

25442)

2H

6

44562) 701

INDEXTO

P. Mich.

REFERENCES

P.Mich.

(cont.) 40. 2)

307,

317.

422ía),

410 a46h{t) 1.42 314!)

43013) 43013)

5

418-20, 321,

fcont.}

12-13:15 22 30 42

44

42375.

32.33-5

326, 200.5315 j01.761

43262).

hag

33374.

801 24) 340.

0011]

34»

466 11

233 317ib)

446: h3.

742

317/14)

305.

41717

210

μιω.

315i 7!

152i 11 Ἷ

305/15.

2133

2/111

ub.

30012!

421.

280

428.

Pyare

404.

410 316.Hi

335:5-445! 27

455. 7

tob

pbs,

410

3480 3171611)

230! τὶ

43515) 44512!

333! 1]

ql

Lig

1}

44512)

317: 14)

aln

317 135

410 3)

410

140

405

CIL DIETE

37

376

149% απ. “(εν 8}

117:

5.18 a

P. Mil.

R.

311).

AM

520.

7}

Um,

7

24.

4452:

Mandılaras The

1.

P. Afonac.

335 2!

413 6jurr*

410

ja.

.

r1

Verb

in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

12 a

24^

475. 479-

INDEX

P.Monac.

TO

( cont.)

REFERENCES

P.Oxy.

4, 33 6, 36-8 41-2

3 9. 79 80

(cont.)

622.650

34( ii),

682

652

3740), (ti),

205 205 792110)

38, 39.

45201}

652 161

754(4) 31313)

421(2) 182

40

44

406

30

363

&

290 290.395

. 3!

904 gti 862

74 74-5

qo’

P.O:l.

237 317í(13!

221(1!

68,

221íT! 1{]

343 4356]

74!

535110

443611 οί]

237 233, 485

132.

ı l(xu). P.Oxford

17,

P.Oxy.

:

ban 236!

317014)

$3517)

181

31713! 82,

33(verso) (1). (in),

(1v).

4410).

(ti),

889(23! 250(1)

7l.

7-8 3. I6-1H

563(3! 635 130 δι)

to!

4152147 41524

23h!

251

INDEX

P.Oxy.

TO

REFERENCES

P.Oxy.

(cont.)

Ah,

7

9-10 12-14

gi,

18

7830848 345 B2

445(1)

43518)

184

99.

4

104, 106,

fcont.)

148

122.

123.

630 24

T12.

1

115.

14

340(4) 608.637 435(8)

553(4) 915 233 679.730(2) 114.

317(6) 904

793

BRair)

791 (3) 468 688(1)

799(5)

125.

632(2)

1 26.

299!τ)

115,

128(versol.

246i2)

117.

129.

464

730(1)

6881)

220)

110

452110] 250(1)

230(1)

120,

2

307

701(6)

Bgl3)

730(1) 809.915 5082)

498.6) 786,103

579i21

138,

152(101

88017)

452í 1o)

791(2)

874.)

θῳ112}}.905 (verso),

121,3

goo

t 46. 155.

7914)

237.

4.7.27

237(1V).

317(3)

fv,

HB 3!

68512)

4532110) q2 152t10!

23.5419! T0)

751}

IN DEN

P.Oxv.

Tor

TERFERENGE-

icont.)

P.Oxv.

24 ἵνα).

14

43170

34

(v.

4

Hy

40

200

Fi

fyi),

14 30-1

281.

245

30613

He 41

9H2.

12

42h)

283.

14

pst

284.

3

230

285.

10

5.

407

72

16 21-2

24%

it

23

!cont,'

315 θ᾽

IO-

268

loq

307

11

3! 34

MEE 649 7:572

2H6.

24-5

14

a

201.

10

qti

11

202.

88 7 357°% 401,405 oi

244.

12

241.

30

26b:11]

1-4 q

243.

48

4152/13:

12-13

245.

1]

43:

q- 1}

579

PY

5724

4u1

to

atio

247.9

367

475 13 [4 25.5

034 δ᾽ 23h!

wh

341713!

248.

5

gah gi

239,

3

n

327.

2

b84:3'

4204.

177

joa! adrgia!

251, 29-30

815.7!

253.

24-3

035i21

2bo,

11

754/21

ib

353621

261.

17

[H4

204.

16-17

35:21

11...

184

bHo(2!

2b4.

18

34014!

4171.

48

2hb,

3:20

[42 piu: d

267,

14 25:20

26090), 3-5 5-4

ü

Iy17 OE i thy,

270. 275.

“-Ὁ

278,

472.

4

474.

y nn

9

335i 1!

3

ι 8

pao, jar.

f

37740

3!

37273

Apu

48

34063)

16 32

404

bez

13

475. 44 485-047

7.1

2)

A b yb.baq yabin]

26-7

34 8...

j!

7-8

21

yo

24-5

2

[1 20

4th

ὃ

17-18

37:539 131

217% 740135)

24-4

31412)

Zur:

Bete!

1!

τὸ i

I

4141}.

3

JH.

13-15 [4

9:22:24

20

30661

354 4*3

384

INDEX

(cont.)

REFERENCES

P.Oxy,

H [1 12 [^

pad,

221(1) 678 304

6

724.

3 7:9 [1-12 3-14

4212)

7 45! 1)

h- 7

ri 302

24-0 31-2

‚17 . 12-13

$3563). $4801) 210f

4) 386

{01

41|

363 305

31

33-5

401

158 0}.205

124 “80

395.361

L7

br. [07

. $5 22-3

ἤδη! 109) 870: 2) 184

44 ba

722.

I

495. 2

(cont. }

weh

P.Oxy.

TO

395 363

451

(84

34014) BH fl 14) 127

608,37

4211)

109 408.473 732 221 287 a

5351)

418

61:6) 123

46845219)

85,0

878i5)

664-6)

2 pony. phe

205

(ooE

44512)

468

380

730, 7)

atte

4608

ZU

ghi)

435040478 21 2165 4455

»

$45 222

730(1)

7.8}.

743 205 201

253

417: 5)

260616)

375. 350363! to

22)

r18.682i2)

510! 1)

9-10 ri

ab

220

135 4! 359 HERD a0 13] B!

r4)

452113!

403

302 74021

402.813 εντ τ 7

2 a0! 3097 {Π}

INDEX

P.Oxy.

TO

REFERENCES

(cont.)

P.Oxy.

744.

6-7

7-8 g-10

6891). 701

702

94,

401

79113)

538

IO

664(4)

it

445! 0)

t1-12

(cont, )

688í1!

73!

932.

53512)

56317)

367(5)

933.

153(4)

434

221(4)

935»

608

696 ro

8419(3) 604

6B1í(2) 311

036.

221(1)

540(4)

937.

481

300(12).744

364!

452(9!

900,

902,

317(9! 740

9340,

87712)

749 43564)

649(10)

221(t) 9gO3.

31763!

317103] 317(61 217161

44512)

942,

26712)

112.270

128.746 ἘΣ

POV.

314(2) 46811)

ro ga,

272

1OGL,

II

221[1)

22-3

4357 393

10-20 23

74! 3t7(t2)

267(4) 317614? Ua,

14-18

1042.

23:46

1033.

12 15

boy

1038,

257

79113)

306: 13

28*

27 20-30 41

1039, 4-10

2Hq

11-12

206

2

12:

qo 8Bo

187

3417613!

748

317131

306012)

384

412 412

407

101

INDEX

P.Oxy.

TO

REFERENCES

(cont.)

P.Oxv.

t040(li). 40 1041. 0-10 1054,

[3

1061,

(cont. )

1070.

421(2)

15-16

862

332(1),472 343.480(1)

93

889(14)

325.332(1)

8Bg( 14)

256(1)

343

413(2) 701 1062.

650

164.649(11)

649(1 1) 403,612,650

317(9) 317(9)

683(1)

317(3) 563(5)

889(17)

gon

256(1)

709(5)

366(2)

889(11)

664(2)

412 393 61{2)

889(20!

401 1066,

1067.

535(2)

346

1068,

539° 760 688 N)

332(1) 535(3!

44501)

317(14)

1069,

1 154,

2-5

ribo,

11

370(1) 20901) 033

418.451!

465

248.277

413063) 310)

353

248

1070,

319 345

12-16

423

INDEX

P.Ovv,

TO

REFERENCES

'cont.)

P. Oxy.

L 164.

17:0} abb

1252/verso

nnl,

I

791 (2?

277.

558. 5Ho 1185.

d:

go

6187,

B61í2)

Tigi,

t6,

1203,

265!71 435!3! Hog r1)

1204,

2o

109-20

1206,

290 395

-o

039 393.461

1210,

7:10:13

375

541111

Bao 1] 35/11

— 53

{4 Γ1Ὶ

12773.

20-30 +50

787 [4]

1.73

2I

22-6

340i4! Tir

305 2b1

| 2H,

12

1202.

b-7

33211]

[th

3572!

1247,

473

2b

[1-14

315131

24-4

,

334

22

20-1

11

1[I-12

[265,

F202.

H49'3;

1 261,

814 130731

1186,

4-17 20-0

6)

85415!

250111

15

2 1512)

154.452 /12]

j 7

the,

452i 10) HH

37 20

31719) 31710) 1165,

(t cont.)

24 25 4!

B50

448111 358 4.374

1294, 1245,

Hz

82H

7

gun ghd: 4 25)

20

1213,

30b! 7)

1216,

51/2)

1217,

34904)

302

1218,

bob

445521

31613),701

832

gt

73001)

£206,

221

E220,

δηδι ri

201 753Ὁ]

12047,

bh5

411

1298,

1290. 3 1223,

'

B8: πο fi

1345 13.0

7352

313r 13,080: 1)

8773

1348

Hob

36561) 1220.

53 420 52:2! χ 58.8} 434

303

4241

1361,

13-16

1405,

24

a0 127

INDENTO

P.Oxy.

fcont.) 1.400,

FEEFERENCESN

P.Ovy.

10.

°

tcont.) 408.580 408

t 482.

4710} 14 ft.

qoo

8.7

5

33853) 306

4053

630

408 227

rhe

{1}

3176)

677

73

172

668

310

anbiro:

452/121 248

357161 3050)

424

104

110.367

3Hb

47

24612) j92t10) 142

abz17).564

340! 4?

ICH)

87 384

452612) 278 333

623.641

Hy) 143

615

rb

343

0632: 21

185.514

7

272

33.873

33401!

zur! IND-II

218 300

341)

gg. 305121

309 ang. | ytter,

1 48r, 14252

333

I1

2h02)

18-20

b rí a?

14-13

188 407

67

181

273

473

397 303. 460612) 305 ku

472

34014]

473 333

383

408.3449. 41 j^

458

28

15:2,

85400)

[635.

“05

INDEX

P.Oxy.

TO

REFERENCES

P.Oxv.

(cont.,

1636,

(cont.) 1675,

363

47!

$45(1)}

34014)

200

1642,

850(1)

1643,

746

1644.

168

201 68811)

1662,

349(5)

BAg(24)

1664,

406(1),207

2gg9{1}

904

473 739

332(1)

879í3! [17

398(16)

688(1)

598(1)

889(19) 1665,

38,221(4)

1666,

arolı) 813

688(2) B14 110.503 664(2)

+45(2)

702,774

413.542.582

1667,

39

764

410

367(1)

366(2)

280

1668,

396 358(3])

664(6)

37

5411) 746

2t

39

363 435161 303

889gí 101

598(3) 280 39

r40(2)

889(10)

rob

66 4/2)

541(1)

qu (QUO3

874 (6)

1669,

313(2)

1670,

317(6)

1671,

192

1672.

:

+10

124,0680(1)

396.541(1)

54107

4151451! 34914)

1675,

050

167b

47) (QU 417

47!

{20

INDEN

REFERENCES

P.Oxy.

(cont.)

1766,

4

1768,

4-5

349(4)

r 269.

6-7

88 363(7).821

7-8

1770. 1772.

i1-12

(ςοπι.) 1842.

343

1843.

g2

+5

332(1).353

1-2

144.

1773.

338

1

889(4)

9 11-12

452110 861(2)

15-16

abrt1)

1-5 2-3 3-1 4

557 919 541(1) 96

5

1777 1 783.

565.557

1846.

558 813.8109

1-2 3

4

558

1847. 2-3

1540.

1548.

889(21)

5

357.791(2)

2

92

6-8

1835. 1837,

cuo 4

Sao

-

1834.

in

1833,

LE

1832,

317(10)

560 714

25411).5983!

(243 5641)

558

557

t830.

r-2

358

1851. 1852.

1-2:4

558

1

889141

1853, 6-7

598 10)

1854. 1

317(14)

1-2

3-4

30012)

79214!

54011}

538.5η810)} 101

33301) 319.889í(12)

10

SLM!

1848.

55412)

1

8

775 210

762

2-3

1840.

717 558

557

3

315-5 1841,

54115)

18.45. 3-4 347

1820,

558

703

1844-1850

1775.

860(1]

9

13-15

339

[35

maw

P.Oxv.

TO

1855.

263(33 66411) 53300. 561 564

1 7 ὃ 8-9

gro |. 239 181}.5432} 581

14 15

5401) 533(2).860

E

503

30810l

508 (0)

τὸ

ιἢ 0,

1856. 1

6

1857. 3-4

(41.

127

[21

849125)

52(2)

332(1)

338 561

INDEX

KEFERENCUEN

icont.)

P.Oxr.

14838.

19675,

paged

E3551

472

18309-18735

icont.) 10b

ıÄhH,

308: 16;

:

703

414

i860.

παν 41 bog zi

4337414527)

187n,

Bik

ER E!

742 gg

156600,

1871,

5112!

|o

1550.

—€

ıdbr,

-— 1 πρὶ

«|

558.701

$4500) 41701

344 |] 1,563 (1!

1872.

338

Ste

465

= "A

504) 105 4521101 31! 2171. 31712)

4. 7 15

319 4)

31710! 203;

ι 836...

1865.

bl

$10 lo 8912!

79 B8

omy) 4526101

12

B8qgi 121 3: 738) bg: 2)

.

IO

[2-13

-—— m

Qu i Ht 445503

558.717

358.086

415:} 452: 10%

716

525 44554)

408 ae

19-30 21

209! 11.745

408 81 8 41 7010] L3 [3-04 553 308,332.06881 1! If 353311? 14715 24! rh 17-18 533! 11.506 688:1) τ

543

1864.

685: 11.705.714

308:8),53310)

0

7301)! 27 sbi)

or

— SX

‘

N | -

4

-—

1862,

97 5513!

a

P.Oxy.

Tir

7QOUT)

τῆ 78,

220 Boia)

1880,

186i,

1801, 1867,

242.5309 (01 310 388

428

43514

267, 2,821 304 403.022.050

12 3 22

36h 1) 1730

304

1 BB 4, t1-13

776

18096,

14-20 20-I

393 [Ω]

rdgı1,

4-8

182,

42

T

1900,

uu

[ΩῚ

854r!

INDEX

P.Oxv.

Ta

REFERENCES

(cont.)

P.Oxr.

(cont.)

1915.

10

790161)

2111,

1025.

δ 12

755!7)

2113.

26681

2114.

1927. 1124.

2 3 4-1

759 -— - .

23

I ]

--c

.

7553317537!

|

2121,

72-9

850(1)

2125.

n

452/11)

35 21 23

452(11)

31h

1931,

36317)

ΖΒ

14135.

550.701

1037»

357.Bborn]

2131,

870

2115.

Azofı)

864

2140.

317(14) 1451/2)

2150,

33200)

216,

373 2154.

1038,

731 217 250(r!

2154.

og.

2156,

347

755

Ppa,

1411.

02 691(1)

;

2666 2),3 4011 313161!

1944.

321

317: 14! 2j 2b

2100,

b 15 2f

2H 2111,

2187,

[21 7355! 11

zig,

1121} 2h)

805 4

37-0 47 3271

3-4 211460,

110

2104,

1945. 1063. 2 10b,

131 [11

21354.:

bs. gris 716

(€

393

607 147

stb

1033. [5].

2130,

242 Hab 212 B56

142,

702

. 742

25-7

740.75517) 1930,

317í9) Bbría)

i2)

56-3!

624

[1-14 4 14-16

36361]

68

H5 41

7 8 16

Bats

Ὁ,

3405 4! 140/11 b. 525

21001,

“ἴθι τὶ

21402.

272 zon!

N

21093. 2104.

70H: 21

84

420

3

1.1} 97

347 2.46: 1) S42 bà3121

622.843

INDEX

P.Oxy.

To

REFERENCES

(cont.)}

P.C xy.

(cont.)

2228,

2347,

2230,

2348, 2349,

2232,

2234, 2350, 2235,

2351;

2237.

755(2)

2230,

2407. :

3126/19)

2268,

4

544

2409,5;

gı5

2411, '

861 (2)

31719)

2416,

ι δῇ

2418,

128

2272,

172

2419.

396

2273;

310

2420,

608 (ΠῚ

2609,

2275:

Q2 445(2)

2729. 2768.

2276,

143 742 914 915

2274, ! ΧΙ

228,

871

2339;

310 136 248 143

2349,

P.Par.

10. 12, 13.

849(3)

59 4:11-12 r8, 15

142 98

2542,

805 31716)

L0.

266(6)

2 r (bis),

743 649(6)

4535

743 649 (b

79210) 2343,

38-61 61-3

2210, :

2270,

28-30

317(9) 253.737

22.

14343518) 143,741

2.

130

837

INDEX

REFERENCES

(cont.)

P.Par.

583

(cont.) 46,

533(1) 279 4491)

17-18 21-2 22

47.

285 628 634.613

871

ἢ

445\4.

445(4).486

207 797

143

35

520

906

Bob 13-14

49.

306(1).744

858 1!5 [

366(4) 277

104

_ 199 205,790( 4)

277

401

642(3) 87913) 642(1)

Wen uc

4-

ὅλων

200

465 Som

30,

563(7)

51.

317(11),871

137(2) 230(1) 128 514 215

+30(4)

764

210(2)

Tene 1 t un

45»

445(1!

-

44.

152( 12?) 452(12) +77 642(3)

Ν

43.

Com

P.Par.

TO

211 468 207

220

386

210(2)

200 628

46, 12-14 +77

431

INDEX

TO

REFERENCES

P.Par. (cont.)

(cont.)

63(vi). 173 (vi),

vili),

(IX), (X11). 64.

198

25

[r(2),

102

448121

120), 10

26616)

12

448(2)

310

1315), 2

518

wj.

(17), (Ig),

O41

bo8

1354!

887

472 176

640

21.

60

glace), ti),

2(2), : ii fg),

3-4 +

1771),

465

d 10

10

393.503

2 20

142 622

6-8

81g 405

2361).

2 7

2712).

18

1-2

8

(2b), 3-4 131.3

4abír) 271

786141

7550)

582

(ta)

2b1 261

verso,

14

[20

38(a),

26

266 (6)

yola),

7-8

642(2)

42(b).

432

266(6|

87414)

12 12-173

(194

12 12-153

56371 : 696

13

671.715

14-17

201

22-3

20h

(b). 5-7

boHí2)

250(1)

4-5

6Boí( 1)

103.096

310 112!

fi}. recto,

480 814) 462

4134} 21013)

verso,

8-9

8816)

)23

3701) (2a)

112,501)

3Bh

33004)

(n),

13711) 386

744

514 7084131

φοί4). 15

879(1)

358.903

43000

+72

gz(va),

78413) . 58 835

Igtia),

446,521

747

914 78413)

13-14

(3), 7

194

518

814,825 78401),785!3)

12-13

4148121

35819)

ἢ 10-11

16. 4 6

142.79:1) 215 301),

2 IF. 2

7

513 320

1 10.

1-2

(3H, 1

643

20,

384

538

ho

24(3). :

709(4)

358

han

P.Petrie

2-3

34

1-3 1-4

409 707 86 1(1)

INDEX

P.Petrie

(c). 45/1),

iv), 46(a

(bi.

23-1 20 21,

2

5

(2),

428

agat 1)

125. 8

318.520

Shri41

132.

18

142

4512!

I}.

20

2,1

P.Phil.

44517)

630

101

305°

8

326 142

17

τὺ). 2-3

85901)

32. 2-3

8591)

27-8

35,

25001)

26.10i12-13

abbibl bith}

825 44?

P.Primer

65

P. Princ.

16,

τῷ

745

In.

2

862

25001)

3

ab ΟἽ

3a2(fil, 4

448

70.9

42(09)

verso,

71,

1

bat

36(a)

recto,

143 701

“4.

6

H20

4Hte).

jr

verso,

14

20-3 2 verso. | (verso),

4ga(C141.

13701!

3:5

26bi5

5

4353)

1-2

707 698r 4180

rn

AH

8-10

|(HBIO, 3-5 tb

(2,

(2.

2

IV},

41

Ftd vu), 7

40600.

31,

FIR ἐς iki,

L4

85411!

305

i3. 6

143

(68,

2HUL11

20 2-3

113 707 357'2!

P.Princ.

in the Greek

07

4

Bia

1. 3

230113,:317014"

Ralf. col.

H. 3-4

Non-Citerary

53500)

4

170.

314

g-10

Verb

272

7-10

10

The

ἢ

154.

133 Mandilaras,

6H3(23.731. 700

3n1

142

=>

Byat3!

5

50/21 "E

5

Ἵ

84ot1!

1 1-2

36002

4

8

147.

757102)

4

266(6!

119. 20

314 4538: 7i

21

un.

yah,

ag

7

103. 3-4

+19

31716) 230

4 ro,

124

240

5

io,

28 berg

15-16

(2 verso,

[1-13

396

7-[0

ı Η 7].

gu. 4

475

7

{ει}.

10

1437,

(Got. 2-3

B. G.

357041

pqotcr)

5

8-10 o

2109.

10

64213)

+35(3)

7

241!

7.13 recto

50}. 541a5).

510,520

ty

ill Sta),

(8). 4

425 253 πος τ]

(ii), 12-14

icant.)

53 n, 1:3

Bb ri 4)

22 20

22

20

REFERENCES

P. Petrie

(cont.}

42(6), 5

43

TU

Papyri

41 7.1...

M.

INDEX

P.Princ.

To

REFERENCES

P.Ross,

Roll (coni.) IV, 3

P. Rein.

Georg.

(cont).

317014)

r8,

205

404 $15 342 4526 r1) 2 46(r1)

340(4)

61{3) 728

015 57

P. Rev,

g-11I 16

3 . 19-20 15 15719 18:19

361

396

363(1)

zı9

664(2)

396

680(2)

Georg.

664 (6!

622 Anh.,

40606 1)

[

6-9 7

317(16)

L4

317(12)

Cb

oe

237.322 317(6)

306(12),7.44'

-—]

317106)

7

-

68.4 (2?

338

608,657

-

[

[|

$4554)

Absit) bby (61

=!

1:7 1d 15 19-20 22

92

310,2)

417:2)

Ld

20

666 4353! 677 363(1) 3h3i 1,560367)

87

= Ὁ

iv 8,

B2

c

709(3!

li 23,

-

P.Ross.

396

396,363 787(7) 395

40,356

P Ry.

3h31)

to

310p)

12

o6 412) 2440

14

3172521.503 1)

305 200

3t

200 200

tu

{Ἐ 2} 15:17

14)

Lr)-20 21 44

a0

3o!

7

157,248

553. tt

684i 1!

PELL p2q G1 aegro!

7040

+34

INDEX

P.Ryl.

To

REFERENCES

(cont.)

P.Ryl.

77. 39-40

385

78, 26-7

02

Bi,

17 ff.

82. 2

1. b

7

94. 15 g8{a), 10.3.

108, 19-20

lc). 14 113

114,

9-13

157. 20 2 28

635 351)

172.

15-18

340(4)

174g ff.

581

1557

21

421(2)

à

635(2)

177. | 17]

877(3)

880

240(2)

11-12 rg

285 332(2)

310(4)

535(0)

2 33.

2

127

5-6 7

-

317(14) 731

88o( 10)

465 215

7-8

205

4-14

190

203

22

625

125.

285

220. 4

24

314 (4)

$12

31704)

117. 22

01-12

393

fg. 7

8:9

ae

122.

105 236! 140(2)

29-33

410

*9

119, 10

649(7)

zo-t 102.

13-17 16

{cont.)

885

7-9

302

332(2)

8-9 Q- rl 12-13

541613.3584 804 903

127, 16

421(2)

14-15

215

134, 13 135. 13

305°.870 93

235, 3-4 238, 2

TN

2i

136. $

2-

giri 870

3 4-8 6 10 10-13

814 a 70

7 9t

"02

37 3do 700i3! 65 ,(7).702 202

137.

11

140.

I1!

[42.

16

870 37

[9

321(1)

273 17

58 44801)

219. 242.

8771)

244. Tietz

sqrt) 5371)

143. 47.

151, 5-10

11

6-8 6

277

B5oí(1! AR4:9)

1352.

3-14

317'2T)

215.

14 17.

(53, 54.

(8-21 2

854(1) 188

Ao. 656.

17 7

rati rel

3

Nó r69?

30-2

ii

TARE

395

32

1537.

L4

17

1n

:

363

9 712.

302

P.Sel.

305.363

5905

$35

4!

6

-

3

743

73

304

INDEX

P.Sel.

TO

REFERENCES

26b: r0)

P.S.I.

(cont.)

2.71)

206

93 101,

.

222,480

311.563(7!

859! 1)

620.534

857

212

462,792(8) δοτί1)

154

677 697 44°

104

43517) 130

715

164

449r!

bob

52.

139

105 111,

507

71,

217 217

277 217

[21 126

Be,

77:2]

759 204 4:060

Qt,

897

G5;

B46

127

146

68 121 255 561

150

rob

160

302 52

20

129

1653 8 184. 204 211,

242

Prd,

75412!

ri.

86112)

Lh,

281

551

rita,

164

2075 FOULS)

ri.

25060)

j 08,

3I

url

jd

13

251. 254. 2600.

-

445110)

035:

1 τῇ 5n 156 146

20 20.3097 4112

PIE

5n

22b.

783 04.820

237.

5h

236.

γῆπι 4}

205.

ἔμ)

atts,

i11

287.

5411) 7353 2j

2305

358105), pod

[27

402,

35052!

317:3!

23.

!

24H: 1)

207,

78.415}

702161]

20H.

649i7)

167

250.

158°

BHy

«7,448

0120! 773 40 733

3E. 1357 34

207

ZU

200

40 τ Γ1}} 1 3b

INDEX

P.S.T.

TO

REFERENCES

P.S.T.

(cont.)

290.

IT [1-12

y"

(cont.) 35% 362.

5u08t 31. 698121

363.

14-16

17-19

142

801 (4) 7091 (2)

786(12)

642(2) 313,

8-9

r3

422,

786(6)

326.

4361) 640,642(1)

728,

188

326

329, 430. 331» 332. 337.

358(91 306(3)

64212)

642(3)

273

780

43513)

79114)

861/24)

428.584

104 1092

go 607 30501)

Qoi 2)

480

324.408

143

BR;

„An

620.639.859

78811

349.

83o(r! Q7

43661) 286 121

7472 (3) £3012)

34T.

$3015)

343»

401

Shot) 346,

7805)

bgat2) hots)

348.

485

Anh

34%.

904

o6

350. 351.

42415)

338:

70}1

354.

052

35h,

B48

613 TO

786i 8)

qu 465 33017) +23:

3587) 3

137

INGEN

P.S.f.

To

{cont.)

REFERENCES

P.S.I.

454

424,

(cont.) 326,

786(g) 653

>34

gb

538,

100

339,

430(2)

640

195 221(1)

242.

!

549. 552. 354563. 566,

26512} 345 581

655 143 256(2) 43501)

507.

319

64,

642(2)

5h21.

65

572. 584.

598,

43504)

300f2)

1012

396 48ῳ.

143 642(1)

495.

617

499. 500,

5654]

651

603, 604.

142

607,

791(6)

608,

448(2)

613.

142

614.

211

616,

917(1)

6i(2) $21

Sou.

11-12 20:24 28 30

584 854(3) g17(1)

145

112,861(4) 51

253

639,

26616)

657.

358(6) 2 IT.

288(1)

O65,

2 684. 12,13-14

487 649(3) 135

659,

45 10

639

685,

$3601)

608,

515. 521.

16-17

635(2)

13

522,

5

855 435! 41

524. 6

142

504. 511.

3 17 217. | 5

742.

2 7 8 I0

83

INDEX

P.S.l.

TO

REFERENCES

P. S. I. (cant. }

(cont.)

756. 88 767.

973.

11

B21,

664(1).701

11-14

664(1) B59(1)

1040,

1-5

879(1)

1039.

798. 8

4

109-20

2

861(2)

825. 17 826, 4

1064.

16

187

1067,

26

340(4)

829. 7

1078.

7:14

854(1)

1080, B35,

16

836,

1

837.

16

4

+5

5-6 7

11

I 100,

3 4-5 9 01 01-12 20-1 243 26:27

511}

445(2)

12531.

10-12

854(1)

1239. 1242.

18-19

861(5)

t1-12

86 1(4)

16

1248, 23 1259. 10-11

1-3

850(1)

849(3) 791 (1) 581

896

25

317(3)

1263,

9

785(2)

864

1265,

13

1266,

2

540(1)

1-2

8;nfı)

6-7 7 12

823

1275,

439

837

1260.

10

79213) 316(4)

290 413 290,413 200.401.413 412 412 392 413

1161,

905.

20

74!

246(1)

1246.

72.

216

1109, 15 1104, 7-10

τὸ

16

878(3)

392.684(1).903 413

(Add.p.XVII).

961,

598(17)

28 28-9

12435. 22-5 1245. 29

911. 9:17 939, !

317(11)

139

752 540(1) 75515)

INDEX

P.S.I.

To

fcont.)

REPRE RENCES

P.Tebt.

1312,

789

132.

84013)

1325.

682113)

1333»

8:8

1331.

792/61

1335»

24612)

(cont.

35817) 35 305-413

74:2]

pn

22

79217!

2bb' b!

Wry

308

rE ;B (1!

79212) 518

1413,

413577) 4178} τὴ 18}

1428,

Bayi 4)

1345: 1358, 1412.

814

854(4)

1430.

abit

31763! 317/04!

204 200 {1}

5684: 2!

1445

rapa

P.Sorh.

30

P.Strassb,

870 BB

85413)

2.

sB2

851

24.

516 250{3) Hor (4) 357°

Bi

2502

42 114᾿ 65611"

410 750.806413! U7 19-20

402127

86414) of

80: 382

27.

6o

Kz Hay

5

Baa 11}

452110

ity: 2} 20

84H

499

2H. Bn

203!/2)

206 24. P.Teht.

$0

47:50 Hb 91 e 4 gh

207

qo.

416012)

33. 34.

20255 h1i111 fw Hu)

RAR

14'

(10

37.

057 .

PISTEN

415

750.846

67,

Hog.

3:

INHEN

P.Teht.

TO

REFERENCES

P.Teht.

cont.)

38. ὁ

ΦΌΙ

30.

484 332/21

7-9 (7-20

BHG

4),

21

ft.

etl

13.

17

qo.

4 N.

59.

3375

54.

16

460^ yar

Hg

6’

it)

504] [AH 305

1}

305.361.401

aut? 273 HH

337353495

5-7

yü

I-T

}

513.520

Bsa) 1)

472 Ban

70.2.8} 4211} 375

303 ay

48h

266: 6j

13

307

452

48-4n

4172}

25)

35 435-6 39,40 +3 43:5 51 380-60

904

ha

419510)

41710:

44901]

$3507!

j34

496

118.682

Alb

3484

50

452113?

715

Hj

+-h

6-H B- 1

455

1)

43517! Hak

205

02

B61

Orin) birra

t0 ui

E

696.0922 405 373 413

4 13-15

bo,

48.

1154!

ῃ

„BR,

Ir

J

4132! 1!

Qg- r0

Ι

1}...

879l 1)

55. 6 jh.

|

ai!

Bi

7 ἜΤ

$4.

ty!

cont.

ZN

3171!

Gilad. 1604 thi. 42

43514!

283

250

226 233

448 D] 675.758

34914)

473

4211]

16-78

853

17-18 (Q-21

874

2087401 hh,

7;;-B8

74.

159

1014.

15-16

4459 10)

76. 7-8 89.5

g-10 14-15

20

79:3]

— 1-2:

13-15

al

22-b

510 Bf.

j 88

24-5 24-6

Bayo

of

tt!

102

5031 7! 302 73061:

hb 4 c2 1.000 7301‘ 68 [2

3402

230 Y! 24h!

job 32

INDEX

P.Teht.

TO

(cont.)

KEFEICENCES

P.Tehbt.

315.

(cont)

40g. 5 4r. 375

27-9

26

$357)

412.

227 66.462) 216

110

34004)

43517) 317,

14

367(4)

318,

20

221 649(10)

314,

10

| 440] 413.

6-7

414.

9-10

415. 3-4

287

85 42)

10-11 rb

395 322.

10

177

182

326. 6

306( 13)

622

417. ! 419. 17 420, 6

330.

266(6)

1-20

221(1)

22

332.

317{6)

+21.

7912)

485 318(1)

239 3181) 216 681

637 61í4)

872 30012)

681 900 200

5397

343

739

664(2) 754(2) 3603(2)

206,66.4(3) 316.

533{(1)

759.846

31708)

317(16)

6

240.683(2)

522

1

310

334. 6

317(9) 57"

440,

15-16

854(2)

341.

4

791 (1)

374. 26 380. 7 486,

21

709(5! 423.

7-8

452(13)

503 2 )

r88 340(4)

Gyılı) 198

361:

563(2)

340(4) 392.

4

397.

4

188

470,

6

8

436(1)

340(4)

699

+452(1)

445(21 317(6) 35712)

277 421{1} 751

406.

567

889( 14)

25000)

877(2)

640.

verso

717. 8-9

317(19) 857

INDEX

P.Tebt.

TO

REFERENCES P.Thead,

(cont. )

(cont. 728, 724).

73^.

128

1Q.

01

460 [2]

20.

5

4321)

23. B [4

4 2 2-3 4-6 b

210(3)

. 20

053

‚vo

306(1417.244

834

!

P.Tor,

23

860(1)

173

Aby

. 2-3 . 2

853

17-18

54. 19 37. 5-6

(i), 24

(ii). 13

31-2

liii), 20;23

(iv), 32 (v). 3 27

gu

78402 871

. 20

(vil), (viii). 24 25-6

057 488

(1x).

L40(1)

32

7. 5

ἅτ poy

ut,

830/ b!

;98.

273

792.

859! 1) 363516)

13. 8 12-13

19-20

roti), 21

P.Vars.

20.

857 Boa,

10

6. 20:21

957 Gig

77^.

36

5. 24

856(2)

79B.

3 6

+

A, B —

P.Vuat.

Boa.

16-17 i 7-20

Boa.

21

264.

134. 6-8 P.Thead,

13.

aot

L4.

250(0)

13.

200

rn)

P.Vind.

atts

C.

17

D. E.

13 16-17

250(1) 312,88g(4) 349 404

42112) 604

7-8

24-30

20

33

317511

34.6

443

49

44807

1

30

603*

314

je 550 75513) 622

79062)

HF

726

n 143 39

142 233.515 513 5!5

3170 318(2) 448610

266(9),854(2!

853 229

37014) 28811)

430!2! 612 85H

Im. 19803,

[o2 200 B95

17.

273

Azı

2-4 15-17 B-10

15 16-17

176

39

318(0)

34012) 451

319 333

INDEM

P Vine.

Sip.

LH

284

)

315^

5 Po Warren

Io

7

lc

SB

237 44500!

1

533

14715

443

17

aub

44-75

373

2.58

373

E IEHRESNG EM

cont.)

hg.

τὸ

4135/1)

«τοῦς

14

25000)

4757 1947,

30 10

319 105

oh,

zietc

211

3103. ἡ 59112. srr.

58

5" 16 2h

164 164 BBY! 14)

q216

44

5240. 414 5235. 12

172 ALI

1247.

24

741

3257.

Ὁ

164

35274.

7

146

Herd

W^ur zh.

^7

248

(O0

435 15.4432]

(a

rh,

312-

ree

NL

KT

44°

Io

130

In

037

3401

11%

1976

gang

2048

bok

5337.

8

TI

4650.

20

h15

23

BBG. 8

320),

ἘΠ

227,

᾿)

3538.

4

3024.

| 41

140

yo)

AN 256i 21

n

5

BH 0}

3753!

4

162

3701.

20

84

4211.

j

4274.

4

3H

bÓon2,

13

4481)

4:204.

H

31700

bolt.

ἢ

31716)

1309.

43

^3

6222.

12:14:34

4317.

1:

0).

10

414

έν,

18

1135.

14

317 135

6270,

τῇ

415!.

:373 po

77111 HR

44253

HG.

21 ty

I2,

jo 3H.

3,8H8,. 2-4

748

20: 6), 41710610

Arta

Day,

6

i!

baqk,

12

3n

30617

8

δ 8. 1.14. 22162)

485

bb63,

21

38-4) 77 ;; "1

qo 120 Hat

bog.

3

60414. 5

8

a

HF |

γιδῆς

310

|

a N

724!

32:21 Arial

LEA

45

Ft

253

152: 121,H5B1 101

30091

qu

INDEN SB

TF

'cvont,)

KEFERENOES SB

j241.

:

fcont.)

ἢν rah 42

7241. 7244.

Cu

417119)

5,

449611

gogo,

31601]

qos

239 316ir1)

37710)

i.

pibrr)

grob,

136

(120.

7263,

Doo

d)

0121,

87

4148.

41511!

9152.

134

143

g187,

h22

4301)

7331.

7303.

7308,

143 143 407

gıdaı,

253

Orgy.

“410 [12

737^.

307

q2 49.

7404.

240061)

(9231.

7132:

oun! i)

7563.

3181]

7508,

4051013)

24.

Stud.

Pul,

25:1).

34

Hrs,

437}

u

135°

NX

HH

zboric!,

35716)

1.

b,5,

76000,

εἰ]

vb,

317' 14?

7574.

413515! bli

4} .ὲ}Ὁ

nz

3.

741 117

im

3b40.

2b1

02,

319

7536.

445/10!

221.

zip 424

7660.

202.

:

76h,

path

N

Wr

EI

7817. |

H28

O34

7087.

47074)

Book,

34

Bo 1 4.

22-37,25-6. 28-946

82 (ἢ),

8247, $265,

462

74

7997.

2 jo

1)

64211) 317i tul

22

4 4011) [42

11

321

15

17

317131

3 17

68241

4211101

W.

Chrest.

Bi

173°

1 710} 3:33 [14 4o2:T'

. 6-8

403

ii.

INDEX

OF

SURJECTS

forms

adscript

118,

—,

317. verbs

256(1),

685(1)

373.

316

36

384. 393. 394. 476. 778. 849. 854(1).

Qoo

"Aktionsart" 36 fT., 298. 324 Alexander the Great 2 Alexandrianism 447 anacaluthon 18 analogy 17, 29, 120, 1307, 133(2). 300. 307. 3501, 3650. 36613). 467. 425.

$3504). 43505). 44504). 447. 402. 493. 53511). 53502). 537 4). 54013). 619.

74601).

analvtical

620.

844.

68061),

684 (1).

872

constructions

6Bq.

31

aorist 29, 30. 39. 43. 44 45. 5% 432. $43. 444 447° 450. 451. 457. 458. 459. 400. 47311). 480, 4027, — 403. 501. 512, 516. 524. 541. 5493).

745. 869, 874; —, constatiwe 4133; οὖς contmual 341; -- , endmgs of 317 ἢ: -.. epistolary 205. 314. 350. 475: 47605... first. (s-aorist) 317. 547 fl. 662, 663. 683 IT. 871: --. futuristic or proleptic 350 (τι:

gnonuc 352, Inceptive or meaning

456: ‚ Inzressive for inchoativel pi. 341; and ase of 424 (ΠῚ

-, middle and passive 310 morpholouy of 200 fl;

tive

or

paruiciple

historical

145375

412.

--.

501,

proleptic

462;

745;

—,

perfec-

547

H.. 663

—,

second

ff. 821;

4306,

—, sub

junctive 559. 53501 3 (1). 535 (3), 536. 540

adverbs 839 IT. agenda 9 agreements 9. 188, 340(3). 34014). 381,

554.

492.

tive 323. 335 fl. 341, 342. 350;

of deponent

adverbial expressions

NAMES

452(11).

Aalto (P.) 838(1). 861(4) accent 236 accounts g, 781 accusative absolute git acknowledgments 854(1)

active

AND

IR; --ος narra-

335/10;

Passive

450.

ff.. 553. 699; —. relative time 353

used

to

denote

aorists in -ka 107 ff. Apollonius Dyscolus 590 applications ἢ. 660. 723 appointments ἢ Aratus (Epic poet) 6367

archaism

434!

Aristophanes (Comic poet) 706! articular infinitive : see infinitive Ashmolean Museum Library 105! aspect 31. 36 AL. 978 fT.. 456 fl.. 694 IT. assiinilation 26. 115, 300(2). 372. 44601) asvndetic constructions 15, 31 asındeton

554

athematic

conjugation

139.

140.

173.

538.

Attic 34. 46. 51. 53. 82. B3. 103. 108. 16, 117. 123. 122, 137. 138, 136. 161, 217!. 231, 2453. 246. 250. 261. 265. 266.

aby.

290.

301(1),

300(1)..

304.

303.

312.

313.

3400,

467.

3068,

408.

417.

418.

350'.

314.

557/90).

Bo,

300(3)..

1001 Zh.

310.

311.

32211),

42.

358.

a39.

424.

425.

469.

137,

57. 60. 79. 80. 110, gir. 118. 132, 134. 136, 164, 173. 210, 250. 257. 258, 267(1), 267512),

300.

317.

126.

540

388.

352.

35.

aqq

406,

420.

1275,

4204). 43002). 433. 418. 435. 436121.

137 MH. 452. 454. 475°. 4013. 500%.

482).

402,

522. 539. 5,7. AGG, 568.

37701 596. 604. Gah, Gai. 627. 6441, €63.. 664. O58, 673. 68749). 6no:1)*, 318. 732. Fay. 712. 270. 772. ;8; (4. 793. Bub. 839. BBQ 23);

INDEX

declension

690!1j*;

(7.

OF

25;

.—. future

drama

17, 20;

605.

h37.

hz ἢ

har,

625,

652,

654,

636.

Bs, 866, Bog. 878. BAL, B82, RER, 884, 896. 808, 902. gay, gob, 999. Git. 9125 --. literature ἡ:

scholarship Clauses Codes

—.,

Bes;

contracts

406. Coptic

352;

texts 70351) literature. 09; Blass (E. 3 1A.) - Funk (Fa) - Debrunner Blass 297. ρδ2)}. «4. 280. 03. RI

Brunet

297. 382. 402° writers

2 ,4!

calendars

159

deeds

434'.

500

of Morea

809,

841!

of 28:

cases, confusion ciple 879 tl.

causal clauses — 324: . sense. ol in

Chantraine {P.) 370° Christian. letters 03442;

740 9,

513.

635.

third

26

175

dissimilation

904;

638

18

589

documents, official 14. 35° . pri vate 13 Doric Greek 356!, 360704). 596! perfect 470 dramatic aorist. 451:

phraseelauy

ποτὶ

438.

|

direct discourse disownments ἢ

—. of the parti-

—- . paruciple 3090

)

Deissimmann (X. 21, 22 dehtheration 497!

64603

poet).

44801

426!,

Diodorus Siculus diphthongs 24 (pic

Callimachus

(W.)

declension,

290027.

106°;

1051,

chroniclers

Byzantine

229.

43.

Witt)

de

(E.

Burton

207.

Bg

11

12.

bureaucracy

1735.

9o6 905; —, sentences 399 ff, 649 ff; 411

de-augmentation 24071), Debrunner fA.) 103? declarations. τὸ officials.

21!

CM.)

Presle

de

ὦ,

Chronicle

227°

IR.

Brugmann

72

5409. 632 22

Crónert.

83Bi1)

68311).

3353 113.

of clauses

ji)

cancessive participle conditional participle 217, 406, 52: ff.. . relative clauses

Bell ( H. I.) 856 Belthandros and Chryssanza 850! οι imBiblical Greek 22, 224, 896; talions

1

; see names ῆ.

complaints

8962

mHuence

571, 573. 574-

783 41. 78713). 587161. 788631. 701164), zur 61, 79%. 746, 798, Bob, Brg. 825, B41. Bag. B52, βΒηρμί τ), 8534/3).

412

267 4h; svl259. 418. 424°, compound verbs 250 ffs «τς tem-

Version

Authorized

514. 526, 527. 528. 54014).

37* 37700. 578. 591, 505. 57. 75,1)". 7507. 258, 774!. 780. 789.

100;

730. BOO; -ἰς ne 258 ET;

—, ol preposition labic 20. 233 IF. “το --τος in with prepositions poral 253 fF. 425

NAWES

551. 554. 562. 570.

attrıbutive participle : we participle augment 23r fT.. 275. 416!,. 418. 684/93),

737. 738.

ASNT

492. 301.

. norm

7. 8. 25, 43. )Hdo >. Orators —. redupheation 426 Atticistic influence 30/2). 403.

bog.

SUBJECTS

551

Christians quence

edicts 9. 390, BOO, 737. 848

221

chronological

ditlerence

326:

se-

26

Classical Greek 30. $3. 56, 211. 214. 218, 21g,

227.

“24 Γαὖς 1589, 413.

454

224,

2271.

301,

495. 458.

242!.

932.

215,

410.

yoo.

248

335.345.

jo71

4206. 461,

284.

11.

paz,

436.

413.

467.

4,81.

sutfis

322,

-

τόσην

4H2.

445

421

: See

175

44. 204), 288. 350%. 386 Epic Bt. 103 14. [1}.Ψ epistolary formulae English B2.

359.

jon.

-doc

also

engascements

3135.

1).

ending

381. 464}.

154.

107,

INDEX

OF

SURIECTS

405. 604. 696; 332(1)!: , see 340(4) 223, tenses under the names of

—,

tenses

final clauses 413, 477. 654: --. use of iva 5 formulaic expressions 147 French Bıo* future, aspect, meaning, and uses of 378 ff.; —. deliberative 397 ἢ: 384;

-- imperatival tive 485; —,

—,

gnomic

3691).

649.

400;

96, 402; —. incepicative 29. 31. 396.

454. 477, 478, 529. FD 565.

571.

540. o

603.

od"

657. 659, 69811),

822:

— —-. alter verbs of fearing 414 fl.: — —, in conditional sentences 401 ffT.; — --, in final clauses 413; — — .

in

relative

with

clauses

temporal

409

clauses

ἢ;

412;

— —.

-—.

ite-

rative 384; —, middle 367 ἢ, — morphology of 336 ff.; —, perfect 50(4); —. periphrastic 376; —, punc-

tıliar

385.

384.

386.

486.

398:

absolute

gnostic charms 9 Goodwin (W.W.)

31,

(B.P.) - Hunt

Hebrew

(G.)

60°,

865,

writings

788(3). 834.

43

(Historian)

231. 243.

409!.

482!. 562(1), 577, 840 Hesiod

(Epic poet) 83

Hesychius

(Lexicographer)

Holy Ghost

45

Homer

Homeric

and

460

Greek

163.

231.

284. 300!. 350. 355. 356. 35818). 379. 4427, 526'. 644, 692*. 756. 806, 878 Horn (R.C.) 6047, 6407, 649. 656 horoscopes 159 Hunt

(A.S.)

C.)

1054.

403;

- .

Edgar

296. 394

imperative 18, 31, 118. 123. 450. 531(2?.

354:

558.

378.

559.

585.

564,

587.

589.

56811).

603.

575.

605.

642.

44. 645. 649. 657. 659 HE. 749. 750%. 755(4). 756. 758 ff, 896. 422

.; —. Meaning and uses of 692 fl.: —, morphology of 661: fT. 101, 451. 5339;

29.

30.

39.

50(4).

BB.

9o.

103, 109 fl., 141, 143. 450. 482°. 501, 512. 513. 517, 518. --. aoristic 285, 288 fT. 518;

—,

conative

287,

342:

293

--.

Merative

fl.;

—,

continual

epistolary

286,

287(2);

295 —.

f.:

mean-

287(2)

indicative 346(2),

526!

philosophers 324.

4.

16,

(A.S.)

1307,

333(1),

121 243

133!

306(4), 306(12), 356. 358(10), 367(4).

394. 432, 458, 467, 491,

587(1)*,

526, 601,

653,

661.

870,

871,

indirect

Hellenistic authors 18; -—, Greek 43. 166, 171, 257. 300(4). 304, 305°.

The

—,

Herodotus

285,

22

B. G. Mandilaras,

658.

ing and uses of 284 ff.; —. morphology of 276 [íT.; --, narrative

341, 396

grammatical categories “Grec Biblique” 22

404.

657.

840. 841, 846, 861(4), 865. B89(22); —, vernacular 25. 236; — writers

—4

gradation 134, 690 Grammar 43. 852; —. ol 201 Grammarians | 265(41!,

Hadzidakis

624. 636%,

imperfect

ff.

17.

43,

volitive

557

go6, 907 fT. German 482, 810! Ghedini (G.) 458 Gignac (F.) 103°, 336! Gildersleeve (B.) 640%

Grenfell

—,

387, 389

gender of participle 877 genitive

NAMES

55;

euphonic -v 539

. durative

ANI

528, 603,

664,

529. δος,

730(1),

à 5t. Bio

896,

gor.

920,

921

discourse

18,

631;

--,

Bee ques-

tions 653 Indo - European

231,

457

infinitive 17, 18, 30. 31, 36, g1, 101, 119, 124, 126, 1453. 54113). 540/149).

559), at 558. 576. 578. 585. . 591, 598017), 605, 630.

vs 639. 649. 656. 662, 664. 663, 680(2). 684(2), 718, 731, 732 TF.

B65. 867. 879. 892. 893. 894. 898. 899, 909. gi2 780:

—.

ment

of

ff., 923; —, absolute

aorist

51;

--.

articular

782. 786(3). 806 ff.; - . as complethe

Verb in the Greek Non-Literary Papyri

verb

"793

fl.;

—-,

as

2)

INDEX

OF

SURIECTS

el

8:17. 834, 836, 839 ff.; --, prospective 7951; —. syntax of 782 £f; —, without article fanarthrous) 782 ff., 848, Byalı). 8350, 854. 856. 859. 860, 861 athematic 517; ---.

inscriptions 120, 138, 164%, 257, 265(4).

140%, 1536’, 138^, 266, 2657/2). 269,

intransitive meaning

61

Ionic

266,

86,

166,

246.

words

64;

—.

—, style of 18

lists 9 Ljungvik (H.) 856 loans of money 8541) Lobeck (C.A.) r10?. 419!

Lucius Bellenus Gemellus’ correspondence

45101).

209,

loan

757. 759. 798:

inflexion 6, 517; —. thematic 51?

446.

—,

Latinism 64° leases 175. 632. 772. 778. 849. 854(1) letters 37. 332(1), 636; —, —, business 15; content of 18; —, family 15; —, Official 716; —. private 14.

result 772. 773 ff; —, prepositional

4277. 871:

NAMES

Latin 482; words 60

subject 782 ff.; —. declarative 705}: ‚ ¢pistolary 766, 767; —, final 477; —, imperatival 756 ff.; meaning of 756 ff.; —. morphology of 735 ff.; —, of purpose 770. 771; —, of

358(7), 358(0. 500°, 549, 6681,

ANI;

300(1).

703

Luke

(Evangelist)

Lyric

poets

651,

658:1).

811

284!

magical

papvri

Maenien

(V.

inquiries g

Mahaffy

(J. P.)

invitations 0

Mavser (E.) 4, 8. 43. 63, 961 227° 220.

43612).

424,

355.

687(3), 75501)?

James’ translation 334 Jannaris (A.) 604, 175.

(O.)

John

M.)

(D.

Jones

Meillet

2277, 285°

(Evangelist)

227,

4607

231i!

132, 875

250(1),

Kenyon

(F.)

173;

.

280,

235

6.

110, 156.

306,

42301). 367. 417. 419}.

Meisterhans

(K.)

memoranda

9

minutes

of

307.

Mitteis

(L.)

Greck

120, THe,

2666), 270.

2813,

315.

4210177.

44;

—,

140(3)

29,

40].

54, 60,

271,

272,

87°. 95.

114. 140, 165, 209', 252,

122. P 1 8. 214. 262.

279,

280!

284. 291, 292. 29900) 99/2),

sHr(1),

629,

spoken

127,

300(3),

300(4).

401(1}, Jol

306(13)", 308.

316(8)*, 317, 335%. 338, 350, 350". 396, 417. 432, 443. 444 . 482* 525, 534 544 5502).

727

-—,

26,

ἘΝ 306 (3). 306(9),

des (Ch.) 43014) Kontos (C.) - Charitoni

13:

93,

61(5), 61(10), 65. 65!. 67, 69.

371, 380%,

written

forms

161!

103, 105. 106. 109. 111, 1264, 128!, 1402. 133. 139, 1562, 157, 160, 162° 163, 1702, 171, 173, 198, 2067, 223. 236, 240%, 247, 249.

ΝΞ

official

1585.

proceedings 312 2814, 635(1),. 75! 244.

905, 905

language.

296, 297, 306. (8),

legal

299/3),

(H.)

281°,

605, 658°

527. 491. 689(492, (0., 620. Sn595, q04596’ 134. 808. 3), 577(1), Koskenniemi

246(1)

72, 73. 74. 75, 76, 79. 87,

745°:

7435.

109, t40(3),

281°,

(A.)

6t(4),

]

11, 80, 82, 131, 130,

Koine 128,

S.)

(— Kapsomenos

244

271,

Modern

306(12).

379°

middle-passive

Jouguet (P.) 250! judicial business 9. 395

Kapsomenakis

159

317731, 33311), 341. 397, 435 (9). 458, 492. 537(3), 859(1)

371!. 522),

6054, 680(2)°

Jespersen

2634,

305

26546).

265(3).

265(1),

iotacism

668,

549.

442*.

664,

508.

48711).

68o0(1)!,

590.

680oi2).

595(1).

6B 4( 0).

686!, Gg0{1}, 694, 703'. 700!2), 709(3)*. 718, 7311, 745. 752. 7531),

12.

44

459

INDEX

~88(1), 792(10), Bor, 8051,

844,

8501,

867,

850(1)',

879(7),

OF

SUBJECTS

865.

880,

889(10),

8Bo(11),

889(14), 889(20),

889(25),

895

moods : see names of moods morphological corrections 44;

—, developments 155(1) morphology 8. 15 : see also under tenses Mosaic

Law

Moule

(C.F.D.)

Moulton

«Turner

(N.)

224,

297, 587, 841!

Mycenaean negative 706,

Greck

μή 794,

43,

227”.

296(2},

231!

I7,

568,

801,

ποδία),

862,

863,

628.

864:

—,

οὐ 783 (1}.--, οὐ μή 570

New Testament (abbr. Bo,

85,

95,

103,

128, 130, 138(1), 157,

162,

163.

210,

211,

214,

229,

277,

234,

2006/1),

140(3),

168,

261,

2807,

284,

296(3},

122,

152,

170,

218,

257,

279,

120,

221(4),

227,

265(4),

266,

299*,

304,

287,

298,

289,

306(3), 306(11), 306(13)*, 382,

403, 449, 491,

396,

397,

307, 315,

400,

402,

501,

544, 553, 555. 570, 577. 580, 588. 590, 399, 624, 629?, 651, 664, 680(2)3, 706,

525,

527,

162, 165, 166, 167, 168, 170, 229. 248, 256(1), 261, 267, 269, 278. 280, 296', 301, 304, 306 (1 ff.) 307.

402’,

313.

357, 432, 487, 538, 589,

613,

—,

and

papyrı

620,

621,

624,

625,

636,

649,

746, 748, 755 (2 ff), 772. 775. 781.

878, 881, a1:

358, 422, 427(2), 429, 43014). 449, 455. 458, 478, 480, 483. 488, 490, 500, 501. 511, 535(2). 547, 568', 570, 572. 574. 588. 597, 598 (2 ff), 599. boy“.

684(1), 685(2). 707. 723. 727. 742. 793,

882, 883, 889(1). 889(22), 890, 892, 922;

31765).

917(2),

316,

653, 654, 635, 656, 668, 681, 683,

820, 821, 826, 894, 838(r), 840, 841, 847, 852, 859(1), 861(3). 861(4),

921,

414.

317(11), 317(14), 318(1), 319, 321.

535(2).

757. 758, 7741, 782, 784(3), 787(1), 78714), 787(7), 788(1)', 789, 7go(t), 79505), 797, 798. 811, 814, Big.

894. 8y5, 896, 905, 911, 916,

13

60, 63, 67, 71, 73. 74, 76, 78(2), 86, 96, 109, 118, 131, 132, 147. 157.

571, 573, 574; 593, 598(1) FM, 656(1), 658(1) 707, 718, 746°,

863, 864, 865, 866. 876",

754

745

language of 9 ff.; —, post-Ptolemaic

406, 407(1), 499. 446, 447, 4545, 458, 464(1), 467, 409. 491,

741,

Palmer (L.R.) 63, 170', 745°, 875 papyri, contribution of 3; ——, language of i f., 21 ff; —, non-literary, the

294,

363, 367,

398(1),

3534: confusion

blemishes

corrections 44: —. errors

orthography

317(2}, 317(11), 317(13), 317014), 319°, 321, 323(1), 333(1), 335(1),

344, 350, 352, 356, 357°,

821,

(4); —, variants

153,

204,

685(2),

374—,

127,

171.

358(7), 446, 464(1),

orthographic

N. 1.) 67. 78(1),

109,

103,

optative t7, 31, 117, 124, 526, 531(1), 356, 603 f., 659; —, 1n final clauses 654; —, in indirect discourse 651, 52; -— —, questions 653; —, In secondary clauses 648 ff. —, in relative clauses 655; —, in temporal clauses 656; -—, morphology of bob T; —. potential 638 ff, 653; —. prepositional 845; —, syntax of 627 IT.; .—, volitive 627 ff. orders 9, 14, 390, 660; -—, for payments 9. 660

341, 363', 447°, 587(1)*, 603*. 924;

—,

O.T.)

4803, 357(9)*, 358°

838(1), 858, 861(3)

22*, 229 21, 22. 43, 175.

object, case of 17 official acts 9 (abbr. Old Testament

122, 130, 162,

396

(].H.)

NAMES

noun, morphology of 17; --, im -ıa 55 number of the participle 878 ff.

810, 842.

861(7).

AND

814,

851,

868,

8785),

876',

880, Bog5, 897, 901. 9o4. 907; —. Ptolemaic 4, 43, 56. 60, 67, Pa. 71. 73, 74, 76, 78(2), Bo, 83, 86. gb, 109, 117, 126, 132. 138. 147, 15}.

950),

fi;

—, Grammar 3; —, language ol at ff.; —, Mss. 24, 25, 96; --, vocabulary of 32 nominations 9 nominative 17, 28, 92; -—, absolute ort

156,

157,

161,

162,

168,

170,

210.

229,

261,

267,

209.

271,

164,

245,

280.

301, 303. 304. ποὺς BIL, 15!

165.

245,

296,

166.

2%.

299.

314, 317.

INDEX

319

321.

324%.

333/11)

nF

ΚΙ

EJECUTS

AND

335 1)*

437.

357; 338, 375. 403, 105. 415, 4211117, 322. 42712), 429. 430141. 431, 444.

H9.

452°.

303.

43217),

483.

501.

511.

D44- 547. 553. 556. 88.

599.

604,

5091'.

613.

Gar,

454.

455,

684/1),

696.

723.

338.

627.

649.

741,

742.

6811, 683,

724.

237. 75511) ff. 772, 780, 793. 814, B47, 855,

005.

907;

—,

859(1),

Bir,

883,

publications

889.

of 8;

—.,

oman and Byzantine 56, Bo, 83, 117. 1419. 14019), 156, 159, 161,

163. 164 168% 179, 219. 246 243. 247, 205(3), 282, 306. 507. Mt 317. 31B(2). 329. 358110), 375 399, 403. 415. 42701). 479. 523. SH 560. sh) 718,

of

741.

, 627, 639. 2a? 880; .., vocabulary

859.

32

papyrus

letters

12 : see

also

letters

papyrology 8 Parasyntheta 31, 56, +29. 433 paralactic construction parataxıs 15 parenthesis 18 participle 30. 31. 36.

126,

127.

575. 639.

146.

147.

69.

256.

o6( 1),

428. 901

501.

102,

125,

34013),

759', Bog, 846. 865 fT;

- , adverbial 898 ff. 908: —, aorist 745°, 856(2); —, articular 885 ff.; —, attrıbutive 882 7: —, circumstantial 195, 903; —, concessive go6; -, Anal 477; —. future 31; —--, passive 525; - , morphology of 868 Ifl; —-. perlect 525, positional ὅπη; --.

745°;

—,

pre-

supplementary (predicative) 890. [T.: --, syntax of 876 ΕΠ; --τ- uses of 881 [T ; EE without article 882... BB, particle 366 past participle 442: -, tenses : ser

impertect,

aorist,

pluperfect

perlect, aoristic 470

lary

474. 475

fT, 473:

fl. 513:

—.

7. episto-

extensive

or eHective 465. 466. 469. 515: —-. future 431, 4535/1), 482; 3525; τος gnomic 441; — . infinitive 794; —. in -a (second

periect)

433.

444.

435.

ff,

513;

518. 524; . resultative 467. 476. 513: —, time aspect and Currences of 436 ff. Periodicals 5 periphrasis 4822, τις, 525. 553. 717 periphrastic future 376, 3H0'; . lect 4354; pluperfect 5011 also under tenses persons 350. 5362. 711 th. Bako Peter (Apostle) 811

petitions 2428.

ἢ.

14.

332.

204.

$422),

221{ı), 390.

475. nc-

0932. perse If

221(21.

404.

4353.

458, 408. 474. 549. 604. 655, 650. 723. 763, 778, 78414). 849. ποι), 872. 87741). B77(2), 888 658

philosophic thought 400 phonetic changes 24; - , developments 15510)

phonology 6. 8, 13. 15. 673 phraseolowv 18 Phrynichus (Atticist) 110%, i20!

142°,

2537. 4191, 491. 493

284 470.

Pindar (Lyric pact) Plato (Philosopher)

377.

538

196. 431, perfect) (past pluperlect 44564). 450. 456, 482 ff.; —. epistolary

318:

517.

524:

ces

. extensive

- „in fF;

321

320: Clauses

Paul (Apostle) Bir payments 859í 1)

(first

Phrastic 209, 453139. 454. 455. 457. 400; --. present 2q, 30. 40. 44. 45. 431. 488'. 192. sor. 512. 514. 5315.

Philo (Judaeus! 92.

- . in -«a

462

398 (2 ff.).

651, 653, 654, 6256, 668.

M1, gga:

terative 480: —, meaning and --, uses of 461; —. middle-passive 452, 453: —. Morphology of 433 Hi: -new formations 437 ff; —, participle acve 454: -. passive 501: ᾿ς peri-

564:7}}, 373. 397. 625.

441

Perfect) 433. 434, 435. 437 ff. 452. 192; —. Intensive

458.

39713),

NAMES

—.

in

-.

515

ff.,

senten-

relative

clauses

and

causal

in

temporal

524:

483.

conditional . intensive

513.

514.

5151 τς lterative 517; —, meaning and uses of 5312 IF; -. middle-passive 4094 ff; -. morphology of 484: τον periphrastic 5300, 501 A, 514(1).

317{1), 522. 523

plural of politeness 215 Polvbius (Historian) 284. 40401)... 401}. 377. 658. 8.0. 847. 858. 861(4)

INDEX

OF

SUMIECIS

438.

451.

457.

478.

662.

663

512.

29;

513:

—

futuristic 229

ff.;

formations

214 --,

ff..

350:

historic

—.

227

ff.;

Smyly

--,

indica-

195. 202 fT..

Radermacher

212.

207.

298.

. parti-

sales

175

Salonius (A.H.? 691(2).

743

35341. 3501. 541/197.

suffix

Schwvzer

SVillax

Semitic

levelling

languace

B44.

we

tenders

tense der

3797. 453165117,

453

moods

under

(Oi

16;

. verbal

167°

clauses

412.

formanon

24.

524.

51 ol

occurrences.

of

coniugation

140.

:

usage

tenses;

tenses : see names fusion of 44 fh:

139.

22

44

also

598

ἢ,

also

un-

{

of 31 thematic

545

;

35

Szemerenvi

90

[Ὁ]

᾿ς -€w 58. „ye yo

6Botz)

33301),

constructions

forms

822

«αἴθ

corrections

I:

synihetic

470.

hz;

10 73.

svnlactical

488: semantic

bi,

syneopation

6330117

(E. 43. 175.

8035.

π||ι: ς τεύω G3; . τίζῳω δι. 67. δὴ: 0.0 45

temporal 656 fT.

566,

241. 401?

-ἰζὼ

sara 3H: ΠῚ

488! T.,

771.

. jussive 534. IT. 565. 703; meanine and uses of 551 ff.; morpholouv of 532 AL; — , volitive 552 IT.. 3571

salutatory formulae 19. 636.637. 542! 2). Schubarı (W.) Schweizer (E.

765.

- . aorist 31; —. delibe-

H.: .1m prohibitions 554. 562 ff., 3753/0: - „in temporal clauses 398;

24

Mielodist

3562).

835:

ratve 571 FM, 547: futuristic 569. 37% 571; -. hortatory 533; in. clauses of fearing 374; in conditional clauses 396. 599 fl.: . in. final and. consecutive clauses 30b. 597; --. m main clauses 551

(1..) 537(3}

333(0.

692

718,

845.

receipts ἢ. 175. 205. 432/141. 716. goo reduplication 273. 416 fl.. 44:1 AL. B69 regulations 9. 4990. 757 relative clauses 409. 520. 596. 307. 635: --. conditional clauses 730 ἢ trports 395; - . of meetings 9. 290 result 8354/2); - . infinitive of 772 ἢ. Robertson (A. T.) 43. 173. 296/21. 520 !. 530 Romanos the

43

subjunctive 8o. 114 EF. 128, 144, 522. 326 1L. 603. 604. 505. 833. 645. 649, 650. 6531. 635. 657, 659. 680(2).

purpose 409, 578. 774, 817. 854. 8354/2), quantitative distinction questions to oracles ἢ

819g

(H.W.)

-, verbose

9

902; ---, infinitive of 770; ciple of Bog

774!.

Sophocles (Tragic poet) 706! stereotyped expressions 44 stop verbs 362 : sve also under verbs Strabo (Geographer) 500, 638 style 35. 39; --. colloquial 729: literary 400; --. paratactic 406;

gnomic

342; -—. performatory 201; -- , progressive 193 A.. 342; —-, simple 175 εἰ subjunctive. 525(1ὺ. 337. 544 proceedings 14 pronunciation 374. 33301). 547 prophecies 218 "proskvnemata" 211 proverbial expressions 406

public announcements

(J.G.)

Smyth

tive 174 ff.. 544. 649; — --- in conditional sentences 217; —, iterative

222 fi.. 343: perfective

588°,

simplicia 36. 439. 442

fl.:

conative durative

NAMES

Semitisms 3, 22'. 396. 841. 852. 896 Sextus Empiricus 447

prepositional constructions 16 prepositions 244. 335(1)*. 806. 849 fl. present 39, 45. 5! FR. 87. 104 fl. 431. -—, aoristic 456, 462: --. 221; —-, dramatic 351: —.

ANTE

141.

940.

wr

4b

tenses:

. Junction

49

i;

8S0,

166,

. cone ol 37:

use

1.7.

118.

17%.

537.

INDEX

680, 51

744: ff,

—.

60!

forms

95;

: see also

OF

—.

under

SUNHJECTS.

verbs verbs

Thomas Magister (Grammarian) 266! Thucydides (Historian) 409), 577. 808, 840, 841, gnq! time 36 ff. tragedians 587(1) transitive meaning 61 Turner (E.G.) 341 Ursing

(U.)

235.

251

verb, morphology of 17; —, stems ending in liquid or nasal 305, 359 ff.; — —-, ending in vowel 364 verbs, by-forms of -éw 58; —, com. pound 36, 56; —, contracted 51:

IL, 140,

155(5),

t61, 299, 366, 620.

672, 673 fE. 746. 748. 873; —, de-

ponent

59;

—.

538;

—,

function

Impersonal

of the «ἕω

782,

701,

792,

816, 818; — . in -afw 356, 358; -- - —, meaning

70

ff.,

in

-aw

in -dàÀm

of

ha,

304;

304;

51

M.:

302,

- ,

—-,

in

In in

—.

atpw

-avw

-elw

AND

NAMEN

—-. in τιάω 51 ff, 55; —, in -ἰζω 50. In

76;—.

τέρω

IN τέσκω; 173, 307. 535

-—

--ς ff.

-

77.

I)

in -0u

— —, meaning of

ff.;

78. 303,356 69;—.

-rvt

H3;

54. 60

—-,

f.;

-ἰσκομα:

in

78;

in -μι 30. 80 ἢ. 547. 613, 680 ff; In

--

-ofw

in

-oww

69;

77

—.

[᾿ς

365: - . in εὐζω 69; -- in -vew 73: —-. interchange of 59; .., intransitive 39; - . transitive 59 Vergote (J.) 22 Victor's correspondence. 703 vocative 17 vowels. long 24; --. short 24

Wackernagel

Wilcken

(U.)

(J.)

596!

358, 43351,

wills g, 382. 384. 632 Witkowski (5.) 4354, Möörterbuch 32

633(1)%, 861

44504)"

488°

304;

—.

Xenophon (Historian) 2617, 284, 577, 658. H4o, 841. git!

Gg:

--.

Youtie

In

-acu

74; —.

in -evw 62 IL; --, in -éo 522), 53. 56 IL, τᾶ; - in -£o 66 IT, 301;

ferwick

(H.C.)

6, 8, 321!

(.5.J.)

22°

INDEX ἀγαγεῖν τοῦ

7ηη(8):

--

ἕνεκα

ἀγαγῆσαι 300(1), 744 ayayiv 755(8) Ayayöırwv

.

306(1)

ἀγανακτῶ

#92

ayarara

580

ἀγαπήσεις

ἀθύμει

ayeuya

dynoya

676;

(

ἀγήωχεν £356 1) ἀγνοῶ Po

arpuatlie

ἄγνυμι

αἰβρησομαι

atre

rk

ayopafnıs

ἀγοράζω

580

[ayopae}] 35801) ἀγοράσαι 791(3), 79115) (y22

‘dyopager’

255

dyopugcov

719

ἀγωμασωΐ

οὗμεν

ἀγωυμῶ

35H,

ἀγωρῶμεν dypapevo

ἄγω

358, 64

3001?

ἄγων (053 ἀγωνία

674

35801)

35801)

ἰγραρενόντων

6no

208

35001) Of

niic

€d-) 246( 2) 20],

i

ἐλ.}

anoyaw

ἀκούω

“ἢ,

70

dean

rns

dAeyurerac

203,

τῷ

aAcupymurnaouer O01 885

G69

ἀλλάσσω

40

ügap| rlurns, μή 567 ἁμαρτάνω 75, 300 (31,367!

753, €ws

αἰσθέσθαι,

em

αἰσθόμενος

30002)

GUI χύνομαι

82

ἀμβιτεύω

αἰτεῖν,

810

ἀμελεῖν

B35

d jue Ae ur

582

τοῦ

τῶι

03413)

701

αἰτηπαμένου

gray

uirnoor

504

αἰτήπσωιν

Boo

αἰτιάωμαι 3606( 3) πίἰτιάσομαι 360005;

155

rt )

57

685(2)

ἀλλάσου

30012) τοῦ 855

916

62

ἀλλαξέτω 1)

210( 1),

894,

G14g)

ἀλιφυμένων

I )

590

837

udturupur

4307

307 (5),

BO

285

418

412[ 1)

Bor,

αἰυϑάνωμαι acafiau@ac,

αἱτέομαι

—,

Ahr,

3071,

aMeeo

7.6

un

alyir,

5097

2603

I )

π07(1}}

(τ ἐδυ-

307

αἱρῶται

695

8.5 γ{

22114},

r1

αἱροῦμαι 795

588

35% 1),

ἀγομάσας

μή

ἔγρ-)

O8

αἰλώληκα

ι48

ἀγνύων

πὰ

σωποῦμην

400

676,

ἀκούσης,

atölvjeurorn[ ulm

426,

426

ἀκολούθει

axovaei| s 367i 1),

199

αἰδινήθημερ §

426

79102)

941!

Dia?

atypnia

426

üyyyoya

204

204

αἰδέσθητι

I )

ἀκήκοα

2073

andıLagae

1

436(

ἔχειν)

ἀκούσει

dye ὕδυ (2)? 440.

aiyır (-

αδικούμαι deióe

dyetoytv

αἰτῶ 797 574

aeovoarres

ἀγαπηῦντας 52/2) ἀγγέλλω 3ho, 803 dyeloyga

αἰτοῦμαι 798 atrovuerlos] 906

ἀἰ δι] κηθείη 625, 643 αδικηθήσομαι 404 aden

396

FORMS

701(4)

ἀγωνιοῦμεν 52(2) üyuric 199, 200, αδικέω

3061 1)

VERB

ἀγωνιᾷς, μή 567 ἀγωνιᾶσαι

853

ἀγαγών

OF

dpaprygas ἀμβιτεύειν

“00 (3) D4 b1

ἀμεληθῆναι,.

εἰς

τὸ

[gm]

850(1)

ἀμελὴς, μή 507 ἀμελήσατε,

μὴ

neAnulalre,

508

(1);

a-

μὴ

304

2)

IXhEX

ἀμελήσεις,

an

ἀμελήσειτε

373

GF

VERT

avadeflalunr

4395

qvade rat

FORMS

| αἰνανκήσῃς 302(1),550( 1)

250( 5)

( — .re)

ἀναπαύυσίομαι

681

412

ἀναδέχομαι 803 ἀνηδήσασθαι͵ ἐπὶ τῶ B54(5)

ἀνάπειθε 832

ἀμελήσις 53301)

ἀναδιδάσκηντα

ἀναπλεῖν

388( 1),

aulelÄnololv, μή 706

ἀναδίδομ[εν]

—,

τῶι

aj pelAotrra

ἀναδίδονται

220

ἀναπλεύσειν

ἀναδιδόντει

870(6)

ἀναπλεύσοντα

ἀμελήσῃς, μή 563(1), 706, 835 004

ἀμερίμνη

673,

ἀμηχανῶ

200

ἀμφιαζω

30,

698(1) 81

ἀμφιβάλαι 755(5) ἀμφιέζω

30,

ἀμφιέννναιν

BI

ἀμφιέσω

81

356!

ἀμφιῶ 356' äraßa

690( 1)

araßaıvev

216

ἀναβαίνω 770 ἀναβαλλόμενος avaßerıs

avaBy

879{ 1)

250(1)

ἀναβῆναι

794).

--, τοῦ 824: dvaynyetv

—, ἀντ᾽ 848

306

ἀναγγέλλω

79217):

ἀναδιδοῦντα

02

ἀναπλήρωσα

ἀναδιδοῦντε

02:

790(1)

avardrıra ἀν]

792(7]

ἀναζητοῦντος

QIO( 1)

ἀναζητούντων

QIOL

ivaysyoya 442

ἀναλίσκω

436(1)

ἀναγκάζω

358( 2), 796

ἀναλύω

75412), G19

arötdourrn

Q3

aröpilende ἀνδρίζημπι

671, 580

ἀνέβη

251,

332(1)

745 30618) 307

ἀνειλάμεθα

318(2)

araAwdın-

ἀνείλαντο,

dveiAar{ ro.

T \3

(2! ἀνείλημπται

ἀναγκὶ α] σθη! σ᾽ erac 4103

ἀναλωμένον

ἀναγκᾶτε

ἀνάλωσα 255 ἀναλώσης 596 araryedet 404

aveiAnda

ἀνείρημαι

452(

dv| d] veyx«

ἀνείμηται

15211

dvayrois 535(2) ἀναγνυῦναι

ἀνάγνωθι

745

θηρί2)

ἀν αγνωσ8] ἡ] σεται avayrwo

3331

ἀναγνώπομπαι ἀναγνωπόμεθα

urnócóaxar

ἀνεῖπαι

6641 9)

τὸ

#61

448)

755010) 1) )

240(1!

ἀνέκραξαν

306 ( 11)

54160 0)

ἀνεκτῆσαι

316(6)

avaverxorrlas|

240, 1)

ἀνανίκῃς 24011), 549 458

45209)

avaveyxw

240(1),

ἀνανκασέτω 683( 2) dvarxaa 358

456

541

318

476

ἀνανεγκῖν

(1)

4073

πρὸς

253

ἀνανέγκωμεν

707

ἀναγραφῆναι, (2! 4raócówxa

396

}

715

6oo( 1)

ἀναλώϑηϊ cav),

a 3H( 2)

695,

avéyrcoa ἀγέθηκαν

1)

267(

594,

dvaywpiy 791(6) ἀναψύχομεν 201

ἀνάγκασεν 255 ἀναγκασθῆναι 772

var]

584,

267(1)

61(2), 267(

157

ἀνεβαίνω 240*, 272?

πρὸς τῶι 861

(4)

drayrıyoya

852

( .«θει-} 472 176,

ἀνέβηκα

ἀναλήμψασθαι

rw]

αἰ υξανυμένον

ἀνέβα

533( 2)

draynyoxer 436i 1)

250(1)

803, 893

664(6)

ἀναλαμβάνειν,

[ἐν

arade pw

I Ἷ

7B4(1)

803

1)

ἀνατεθήσεται 306 ἀνατέταλκεν 460

ἀναζητῆσπι

(1)

205,

250(

ἀνασφῆλαι,

02

aradaßoper

367(4)

367(4)

69o( 1)

aradws 5635) aradwarı 305

ἀνάλαβε

792(8):

861(4)

avamizpwaoatrros>

—,

ἀνάστα

ἀνακύψαι

594

367(4}

ἀναπλεύσω

ἀναβρώσκω 707 ἀναιβηκέναι ( - ἀνεβ-) 745 ἀναιλούμεθα 242 ἀνακράξαντες 306( 11), 871

215

apes

87

aradovujralı

[qu di! «aBér Tos

581,

dvakiduvper

ἀναδιδοῦντος

81

ἀναπέμπω

87

878 (4)

30, B1

αμφιέννυμι

B79(4)

ἀνεκτῆσεθχαι 316(6) aveAde 216, 604(2), 730 (1), 730; ἄν) ελινε 664

(2) ἀνελθεῖν rau

7:

Ah

I)

-,

--,

πρῷ

To

811

INDEX

OF

vitm

ἀνέλθεν 241

ἀνηλίσκωμεν

ἠνελθῖν

ἀνηλοῦντε

765:

825 ἀνένεγκε

alr|eAdir,

τοῦ

arfe)re-

73001):

γκε 664(3) ἀνενέγκε

755(2)

ἀνενέγκης

549 731,

hn

ἀνηλέω 61(2) ἀνηλωμένον 267( 1) ἀνήλωσα 26711) ἀγηλῶσαι 730

ἀνθ)

684( 2)

aveveyOnoe rau

ἀνενήνεχαν

ἀντειπαμαδως

ἀνθέξο!

ἰστάνειν

ἀντιφάσκω μαι]

104

bah

ἀνενήνοχα 442

ἀυιεμωμένης

346

412

439 701

586,

961

701

ἀξιῶ 288, 35413), 797

6ılı)

ἀξιὼν

Off 1)

B358( 11

ἀνέκῃς 549

agiwocvros

ἀνεπλήρωσα 2501) ἀνεπνέω 2.40!

ἀνίρημαι

ἀξιώσας 923 ἀξιώσειν 78017)

ἀνερρώσθην

ἀννωνεύω

ἀνεπεπλεύκειααν

ἀνέρχομαι

490

262 216,

ἀνερχομένηυ,

4521)

ἀννωνενόμενον

ἀνοῖγεν

581

alvepyoperor,

are

τοῦ 889(1) ἀνεσύρω 240°

dyocyr etu

ἀνεσχόμην

auniya

arereiAn

04

üvocyrtiti

267(2)

ὃ 4

ἀξιώσεις

748

|yeraı

ἀξιώση,

2 B4

82 82,

αν κοδόμηκα

305

410

armandcunon

ἀνέχομαι

20512},

arnzeänynauete

avéwyov

261

ἄνω 778

χῆῆνπι,

230,

τοῦ

255

aflılwen

aéitwor

3311),

afoper

401

561

501

agw 413, 542 ἀπαγγέλλω 803

261

ἀνετειλάμην 305 ἀνέτειλεν 460

9gi4(4)

396

᾿αξίωσεν

24),

Lj

170?

ἀνύγειν 82 ἡνύγεσθαι 82 dud ( /— τοῦ) afar 755(8!

ἀξιόω

arte paw pal ἕνας

75412) ὦ

ἀντιποιτθῆναι

duepera D1( d^ aviepów 61( 1)

405

448(1)

[ἀἸ]νέπεμψα

ἀντιλήμψισθαι ἀντιτέπτωκα

ἀνθέξομπι,

arever cor

-

31709)

ἀνενέγκωμεν

509

ΜῈ

217(9)

ἀνήνεγκαν

ἀνενέγκω 392, 541( 1)

874

ἀντιλέγειν, τεῦ B21 arseAdym Bc3 ἀντιλέλονχα 442, 442° ἀντιλελόνχωσι 470(3)

61( 2)

ἀνηνέωκται 430(5) ἀνηρήμεθα 400

ἀνενεγκόσι

as

G1( 2)

ἀνήνεγκα

ἀνένεγκον 683( 2),

Foe

Arayıyaya

2)

μή

825

442

ἀπαγήγοχεμ

2757

4354

arayyoyade

1}

4354

1}

amaynaxer

4301)

ἀνεωιχότα 43015) ἀνέωξα 201

arranodıraı 741 πυταποδώπε 413,2 avrevpathes “10

ἀπαγαρεύω araıdavar

Bon ( = and-)

ἀνηβαίΐνω

272"

arreiArya

annrec@maar

ἀνήγγελκα 430

ἀντειπεῖν

ἐνηγγέλκασι 44912) ἀν ἠγγελλεν 105

πετελαβόμνν

arriıyleyplalder 751

damurorperng

ἀνήγκασαν

268

ἀντιγράφω

am|

ἀνήγκασεν

2b8

ἀντίγρπᾧαν

22504

ἀνήκασαι 208 ἀνηκάσαμεν 208

arrıypader

770

dez.

2340

fal aga 31719)

arridaBeir,

arramndonrn

ἀνέωιγμαι 43005)

ἀν 7iÀ0 56v

ἀνηλίσκεται

ἀντιλεξοῦ 267( 1)

ἀπαιτέω

E)

584

on.

|

inmate

pF

ru

B44:

bU)

b12

563

evridAapifa yop «rci

457

22

907

ΒΗ

[ἀ]παλλάξω ἀπαλλάσσαομαι

544

gab

ros$rr|os

anadAayoror

703

586

242

ἀπαλήλειπτπι 1),

677

267(3),

ἀπαιτήσατε

212

ἀντιλάἥηοιντο

6r( 2)

Hic 2),

7s

317

(12)

142

padecer

ἀνῆλθας 317(6) arnAßare 317( 5) ἀνπλίσκω

70806; 51

452(3) 545

392,

406

218

ἀππλλαχθῆναι 311 ἁἀπαι τὸν, ἐκ τοῦ μή ἀπαντό( ) 818(1)

8351;

INDEX

drarraw

307(2)

iva[v] τί ἡ] σης 55413) anarınaa

{-ἰ-σωὶ

ἀπαντήσω

357(2)

Amarınürr:

52( 2)

ἀπαντούντων

52

arapenderres

315

3571

ἀπαρτίξω

357( 0)

ἀπεγράψου

ἀπέδρα

774

320

pho

30040) 30010)

ἀπέθανα

3171

. διὰ

ais

ἀπείη

3175

ἀπείληφα

211, 770

ἀπέπταλκα

458.

-€

472,

47%

1

arti AK EP

Rap

yaa

4151! 2]

ἡπήτηκαν

407

ἀπήτησας

„15

annul

485 44512) {2

345

en

τα

amenraAxes

189,

450

So

14801) 338 5| nas

am@ovrza amAfaay

H88 322

amıaTttueg

58

ππιστεύσας

ἐπιστέω

nl

4350-40,

ἀπέστητε

202

ἀπεκρίθην

ἀπέστιλα 430, 345, 346

ἃ πηβήπεϊ rar]

ἀπεατίλατε

amoyadns

ἀπεκρινάμην

1

3104604]

ameAaatigo(i aj nv

Br)

ἀπεληλυθαν

417

ameAnArter

487.

dmeABe

—,

654:3)! ame\dar

543

241,

ameAdnrrar

(10)

263 Gong QUOLIÓ

ἐπὶ

rau

ἀπέ

γῶν

αὔθ |

H7!

25,

ἀπεύχημαι

O42.

2 |

202,

203,

01002!

207

458

annynpev-

3484

177

ἀπογραψοόμεθα 305 421(2)

442

Tune

448

[j

ἀποδείκνυμι

804,

003

ἀποδείξειν

75401)

ἀποδείξω

412

amoóéfe,

02

azoóe« 681

317.1)

ἀπηγαρευομένην,

177,

ἀπογμάφομαι 303 αἀποδέδηχα

apa

ἀϊπήγαγα

58g

amoar,

τοῦ

428

OF

VERE

anodaivas Bo4 ἀποφάσκω 170) ἀποφέρω 21g

ἀποφέρωμεν ἀπωλόμην

ἀπησὶ a) παθῆναι ἀποσταΐίνω 1761

79:14)

ἀργήσει 395

ἀποσταλέντα,

B8yi 2)

ἀποσταλέντος 886 ἀποστάνομαι 129,

217

786 (9),

787

(4), 820; —, τοῦ Bat Δποὶ στείλαντος

731

ἀποστείλῃ,

557

ἀπόστειλον

007

707,

πίστει λον, ἀϊ αν. 707

708:

ἀπόστει-

405 205

ἁρμόζω

dpplorre

ἁρμόττον

156

155( 3),

ἀρνέομαι

313

ἀρξασθαι͵ dpov

779, 915, 916 401, 413, 542

ἀποστήσομεν 303 ἀποστήσω 3096 anoariAa 760 anoarider 750 ἀπόστιλες 250( 1), 319 ἀποστίλης 55401) &TogT.Ào» 707, 730, 74! ἀποσυνέοστηκα 43314) 622

310

ἀπωτέθεικη

834 468

amatGcaraon 361

ἀποτείσω

361,

3103

ἀποτέτεικα 430 dTG€ Tt» Tévexn 4212) drurttsdranan

ammele| nmoriow

HBF

361 36)

ἀποτυγχίίν ον

302

απο

hey

πύπεν τὴ

156, 136!

Ban

al p|pworei 199 ἀρτοποιήσομεν 57

1}

ἀφείλατο

318(2)

ἀφείομεν

122

adeis

ἐκβάλω

680( 23

2)?

553;

ἀσπάζομαι 370( 1), 533(2):

122,

πφειῶνται

122

ἀσπάζομεν 370 1) ἁσπάζου 724 honmales 370( 1) ἀσπάσασθαι

Δοπάσατε

ἀσπάσεσθαι act |aaonv

ἴδωμεν

adew

121.

43354 4!

122

ἀφέωκεν

4451}

αφῆκεν

7235

ἀφῆκες

314

ἀφήκετε 319 ἀφήλπακαν 724

789, 814; a. owdeGar — ( — - ate!

688(2)

-

-

353 adérwoar O80 | 3) πφέω 122

αφέωνται

| ),

324

122

ἄφες 680(2), 699, 764:

gig

G8,

--ς

üdeixas 433(3) ἀφεῖκεν 435(3)

ἀσθενήσαιμι 622, 50 ἀσθενήσοιμι 60471 ἀσθενοῦντας, rang ἢθιᾳ( 3) ἀσπάζεται 3164 ")

ἄσπασαι

825;

| ro! v Bro

αφείρηται 1 τ. dág-)

ἀρώ! σο μεν 393 68o(

αὔξεται 057 αὔξοντα 157 αὔξονται 157 avfw 157

(3)

τοῦ 78714),

ἃς 68a; 2},

255

ἀφεῖκαν 435(3), 4481)

415

ἀρπάζξζω 66, 301( 1), 3 5^! äprafa 301(1)

ἂσε

νει]

ἀτιμάζεσθαι 786( 4) αὐθεντίσεις 543 αὐξάνει 157 αὐξάνεσθαι 157 αὐξάνω 75, 157

ἀφείκαμεν, ἀφείκαμ] εὐ] 435

315

707

ἄρχομαι

303

aifwr 157 ἀφεθῆναι, τ᾽ ο

~ (+ -fw-) 590

7 5H

amato

156

156

ἀρνήσασθαι

304.

156

1563

ἁρμόττω

581,

ἀποσχισθῇναι

a’

ἁρμόττουσα

ὁ BRo(2)

ἀπασφαλῆναι

156,

ἀμνησάμενος

478,

156, 1563

apporre, appotrey

ἀποστέλλω

ἀποσυστήσπις

220

15513),

ἀποστελλόμενος,

ἀποστελῶ

ἄσχημο!

dpev 68.4(3} dpéce 786,6)

ἁμμόττοντα᾽

704,

ἀποστέλας ἀποστέληι

ἀσπορέω

350

ἀρέσκουσιν

370( 1)

ἀσπορίζω 303 ἀσφαλίσομαι 385

ἀργυρίζεσθαι 863

ra

ἀπόστειλε

agwdaw

219

ἀποσπάσὦ] 366( 3)

ἀποστείλαι

FORMS

ἀφήνω

448( τὶ

1:22"

ἀφήρπακαν ἀφημπακέναι

148) 1) 763

ἀφῇς, μή 563(7!, 504

310,

I)

7541) 316(

460

1)

ἄφησε

fiBo( 2 )®

adno 5631 7)

342)

--, |

μή

INDEX

ἀφήσουσιν

122

OF

βαρήσεις βαρήσω

ἀφίεις 122 ἀφιεῖς 122 ἀφίεμεν 122 ἀφιέναι 30 ἀφίημι Boo ἀφίλεσαν 265( 1)

βασιλεύω

βούλῃ 597

62

BBgi 19)

βουληθείη

βαστάζω 301( 2), 356!, 358

(3) βαστάξεις

35813),

βαστάξω

122

αφισί rav] «ir

126

256,

127

396

adiw

βεβόασκηκα

βούλοιτο

dépaíre

Beßpexra

70

652

220,

βούλονται 905

Bow

462

788( 1)

B70

βρέχηι, Bpexie 550(2) βρῆκα 317 (11), 335°, 474

465

βερεθέντί os) 299( 1)

ἀφῶ 375, 541(4)

βιβάζξω 356, 358(4)

γαμέω 30617)

uxeioxa

426

γαμηϑεῖσαι

ἀχθῆναι

B20

βιβάσω 358(4) βιβῶ 356, 358 (4)

βαδιεῖται

βαδιοῦμαι 357( 8)!

βιόω

γαμηθῆναι 314(2) γαμῆσαι 306( 7)

306(6),

367!

γημήπασα

βαδίσαι, ro Bry βαίνω 306(4)

Βιῶναι

βάλε 564 βαλεῖν 75505): --,

βλέπε 575, 697, 707

835

βάλῃς 533(1);

-- μή 566

βάλλεσθαι, πρὸς ro ἤδι( 1] βάλλω 306(5), 360 βαπτιξζώμεθα (=-0-) 217 βάπτισαι 684(2) βαπτισθῆναι,

βαπτίσω

τοῦ

Gévac βαρέσαι

35719)

Boaw

ΖΦΟΓ1

)

200. ] )

210(2),

Bas,

Bape-

1);

Ron| Bet! v

Ι )

402,

7883)

[

ἣν

675,

ἐάσω 366(3), 397 fdw 366(3), 583 ἔβαλα 29, 317(2)

Hog

159

duvend’ --

Bh1i 2);

(

Gage i1) διίναται QU,

δύνει

τοὶ

ὑπὲρ

ἐάσθωσαν

[ἡ

δυστυχοῦντες 879(2) δυσωπήσης 589

Qio(1)

701. 45

ai,

221(4)

b;

δύνονται

δωξαζωμεν

δυναμένους 102 δυναμένωι 102 δύνπεται LOO $v.acat 97 δύνασθαι 773, mplols ro

ἐάσῃς, μή 564

bus, δῦς 535(1), 535(1)*

614

29!

786(3)

ἔβαλαν 317(2) ἔβαλλειν͵ ἐβάλλειν

δέομαι

δράσητε, anlöler 563(7) δῦ 535(1)

ace 237, 680(2)?

237,

£acev 237

102

δρᾶν 787(6) 306,0)

doar

δυνομένων 102 δύνοντα 150

δράσαντα

3671

240

aga

ἔασον

δυνόμεθα

δύνω 159 δύνων 150

δραμῶ

ἄκουσα

404

oo] μαι

δυνόμενης

750

’

ν᾽ € ^.

€

A

δύνηι

FORMS

31402) 408

7)

ἐγάμησὶ ev|

30047)

ἐγαμίσπετο

781

eyaraxınaa

240°,

1}

271

eyaraumr 318. 1) eyannoa 240%, 271

249

ἐγβεβλήκαπι

448

2}

4065 B. C.

Mandilaras,

The

Verb

in the

Greek

Non-Literary

Pupyri

3r

INDEX

OF

VERB

ἐγβιβάσι 358(4) ἐγβιβάσω 358(4)

¢yopaca

2497,

ἐγράφετο

283

eyyıoap

ἐγράφην 310

237

eyypada

(= ἐνέγραψαϑ)

238 ἐγγνῆσθαι 52(2) ἐγγνούμεθα 52(2) ἐγδέδοται 472 ἐγδημῆσαι, mapa τὸ 858 ἐγεγόνει

234

ἐγεγόνεισαν

491!

ἐγέγραπτο ἯΤΟ

520;

éy[é]ypa-

496

ἔγραφον

492,

518,

[ἐγεγράφει

518;

520;

e| γε]-

γράφει 487 ἐγεγράφεις

518;

ἐγε-

ypla] ges 518, 520 ἐγέμησεν

303

ἐγενώμην

318(1)

788

ἐγενήθην 314(3) 332(1)

edapme

-

ἐδεδώκει

ἔγημον 306(7)

edide

ἐγ) κααλέσειαν

ἐδόκει

300(

2)

300( 2)

801

ἐγκέκληκα

(70

439

ἐγλέλυκαν

44961)

ednvarn

él y | rwxasc

ἔγνων eyraaa

339,

306(8), 3068}

338

792/ı)

420

105, 7866):

336

1)

2)

2461 2)

ὦ poi 2 ) ἐδυ[ v] 580v

604,

πρὸς

εἶδες

135

etönv

136

Inl

466

617,

654

τὸ μή 84913); Tw

861(2)

εἰδῆσαι

gobo ra),

744

εἰδήσας

300! 14},

871

εἴδησον

3Ob( 14)

εἰδήσω εἰδίης {

24662)

217.

617

eıder 751 εἰδέναι, διὰ —,

246(

21004), e|?] 200

εἴδαμεν 317713) εἶδαν 317( 13] εἰδείης

2806

246,

351

εἰδέησπην

2 40/2) ἐδινόμην

€fuaa

440!

εἶδι 31703)

192

246: 2)

ἐδυνήθησαν

ἔθυκα 420, 440, ἐθύκαμεν 420

ef ),

“08,9)

€dur Hör, 44501)

515

1)

204

ἐδυνήθημεν

353 310

edvoapev

37, 40,

ἐδυναμεθα

ἐδυνάμην

éyvady 31361)

χη

79112)

430 745/92)

-διό-Ἰ

2HRI 1

fdpaga

163

ἐθλίβην

702i1)

ἔδομαι 353

163, ,245, 262, 361

ἐθεσάμην

2881

eönxnüner

622

abr

ἐθέλων

200

BH.

edufer

163

ἐθέλω

37,

ἐγκέκλικα ἐγλιπεῖν

348,

285,

ἐδηλωσας

30

edeAcıs

ἐθέλοι 163 ἐθέλομεν 163

320

ἔγημ[ εν] 306í(7)

308!

ἐθελήσω

31663)

ἐδηλώθηι

3066)

ἐθελήσειεν

442

ἐδεξίμην

ἐδήλωσα

ἐγκαλῶ

«ἐγδε-

715

ἔγημε 306(7)

ἐξησα[ν]

ἐζύμωκα

ἔδει 791i 1] ἐδείδι HR, 284 ἔδειρα 403

eöndoüru

ἐγκαλήσηις

31Q

515;

316653 1,

ἔγημα

75444)

299

ἐξώννυες

JZ,

ἐδεδώκεις

ἐδεόμην

ἐγκαλήσαι

-ere)

3160

ἐγεώργησας 333

ἐγκαλέσειεν

ἔξεσα

20)

€óc£np

624

308

ἐζήτησα

ἔγραψες 310, 353

edefrouleri{a

ἐγημάμην 314(2)

29,

299/ 2)

ἐγευσάμεθα

306(7)

ἔδωσα

fdwoev 308, 352

ἐζήτεσα

321

ἐγερθῆναι 787(7) 351

ἐδώκατε 307 ἔδωκεν 353

ἔγραψε

ἐδεκώκησπν

ἐγενόμην 314(3),

400( 1)

ἔζησα 306(6), 460, 540(4)

ἐδέησεν

γ88( 1),

324,

ἐγράψαμεν 325, 332( 1) ἔγραψας 339

AYLI:

ἐγένετο 347, (2), 820

308,

ἐδώκαμεν 39 ἔδωκαν 307

(1}, 34974), 343 344, 345. 478, 4B8o( 1). éypal ψαὶ 33201)

ἐδεήσαιτη

ἐγεγράφεσαν 4091

ἔδωκα

ἔγραψα 37, 44, 215, 332

Ówu Kt

492,

271

296

eypasberarl

ἐγεγράφει

WORMS

30614) --eins} Org;

--, dv

641

eov 317013), 329, 330

INDEX

OF

τὸ

861(1);

ε[ Πδότας 904 εἰδότες 745

e[Z]vai,

εἰδότος 877(2), gio(1)

τοῦ 819;

εἰδότων B73(2) elev 117

ein

630,

641,

632(1),

786(6);

642(3);

—, dv

—, ὃ μή

632 εἴημεν O35( 1) 117,

εἴθισμαι

653

462

εἴθιστο

[ ἦσαν

510

514

εἴλαντο

318(2)

20,

277,

289,

119 εἰλήφειν 521 εἰληφέναι, ὑπὲρ τοῦ un 884

317(3)

εἰοσαχθῆνα[.}, 317(5},

Li

ECT

422

317(4),

265( 1)

εἶμαι

104%,

el [mes 317(3)

εἴμεθα

dv 646

208

εἰμί

103,

217, εἶμι εἶν

ceimoa[c|]v

203,

264,

208,

295,

204,

Bgo

277, 289,

31763), 330,

317

33201),

321

731 7 5)

eipyalount

εἰργάσω

2h5( 4)"

401

εἴρηκα 39, 330, 458, 465,

355

474, 480

119

781,

329,

εἰπών

120,

εἶναι

14)

30,

τοῦ,

[10,

78700),

758.

787(4),

εἰσέλθομεν

241

401

εἴρηκας εἰρήκεις

445( 1) 145i4)

685( 1)

339

|

eoncA>da 317(0) εἰσήλθαμεν 3197/6) εἰσῆλθαν 317,60), 921 εἰσήνεγκαν 31700), Qui εἶσθε aim

τοῦ 208

εἰσιέναι

1204,

εἰσιέτω

120°

εἰσίν

B20;

εἰσί ν)}

eiminurns

εἰσίτω

᾿εἰσκυμίσαι,

πρὸς

445(2)

εἰρήκης 445(4), 486, 492

εἰσπέπραχα

858;

εἰρημένα,

εἰσπεπράχασιν

—,

τοῦ

mapa

ro 858:

B6o(1);

—,

—,

πρὸ πρὸς

108

886

εἴρηκες

05401);

ΑἹ

raat

20

τῷ

784i

εἰσιόντα QU7(3)

εἴρηκεν

ἐπὶ

B36(1Y;

—, τοῦ 7881} εἰσελθῆναι 744! [cac] Adis 656

861(4); εἶν[ ac] 746012) 791 2), —, διὰ τό 849 (3); [εἶν] αι, ἕνεκα | τοῦ] —,

430(1) τοῦ

εἰσενεγκεῖν 75502) eonpafarro 250, 1),

εἴποσί a]v 321

106

«ue

317,

μετὰ

εἰσενεγκάτω

—,

200,

ro

εἰσελθὼν B877( 1)

748

0831)

106

[eio] eyyvr«acw.

εἰσέλθω

εἶπην 29, 2651 3},

440

75400),

3321), 353

εἰληχότων 430(3)

εἷλον

664

780, 781 einer 39, 289, 290; | εἶ] πεν

εἴποι 609;

πρὸς

77U

εἰσελθεῖν,

317051,

^

τοῦ 860

εἰσαχθῆναι,

εἰσβαίνω

66401)

ELIV

πρὸ

B61(2)

142°,

einer

(1):

325

447

εἴποι alc 607 εἰπόμην 265; 31

452(9)

803

εἶπαν

εἴληφον 340(2), 451 εἴληχα 436(2) 425,

914

εἰσάγοντι, τῶι 889(9) εἶσαι 105, 105°, 106

εἰπέ.

458, 474

eicaywyov εἰσαγγέλλω

664

66441)

eiAndav 44B8( 1) εἰλήφασι 448 (2); e]iAndanı

eiAxvopa:

917,

105?

εἶπαι

εἰπέ

εἴληφα 339, 339, 340(2),

eiAxuxa

eipıxe 435(5) els 105,

εἴπασιν

318(2)

eipnxe 435(5), 465 eiponxes 43505), 445(2)

117

εἴοιτο

€imace

318(2)

εἱλάμην

εἴρηχας 435(5)

τοῦ 864

εἶπας 317(3),

514

εἰλάμεθα

[τ] ὧι 847:

διοῖ:

317(3)

652,

εἰθ[ιἸσμένοι

eipnre 452( 10) eipnxav 448( 1)

τό

117

eioı εἶπα

εἴην 635( 1), 653 εἴησαν

εἶν[ αἱ],

--

—,

485,

eiodew

FORMS

τοῦ 842:

-- χωρὶς (e)ve 110

631,

635(2),

VERR

[τῷ]

Bor 1)

ra B89(8!

εἰρηνεύσῃ, τοῦ va Bog εἴρηται 452(160), 45302)

407

tioper

C34

442 14812)

εἰσπλέοντες,

oi GBs,

«onrpafarro

25901),

339

INDEN

᾿εἴσχηκεν᾽ εἶχα

425

284°,

485,

292;

—

δεμένο

— δέσει 4Bat

oF

VERE

éxyvovres 171 ἐκχώννυμι 580 ἐκχωρήσει 752 ἐκώλυσεν 821

ἔκλινα 305 ἐκμισϑοῖν 746

ἐκξετάσας

εἴχατε

ἐκόμιζον 29313)

278 202

265(6),

284°,

292

εἴωθα 462 εἰώθει 514, 520 εἰ[ὠ ϑησαν 514 εἰωθώς

Qo)

ἐκομισάμην

εἴχεται (.- -re) 287 εἶχον

345:

213,

336,

ἰἐκομησαμην

339

ἐκομίσου

40,

320

ἐκομίσω

904

ἔλαβες 353 ἔλαβον ποδί 12),

514

ἐκπλέξω

éxcAnaa

300(2)

ἐκβέβλητο ἐκβένι

ἐκπληρωθήσεται

228

ἐκβιβάσω 358(4) ἐκδεδωκέναι͵ τῷ 847 ἐκδέξασϑαι,

μετὰ

τοῦ

856(1) ἐκδέξομαι OI ἐκδέχημαι Bug ἐκδεχόμενυν BB, ἐκδιδύσκω 78( 1) ἐκδίδων 02 endineiv 284(4) ἐκὸικηθῆναι, πρὸς l1)

ro

861

e| κὶ δυθήπεται 395

ἔκρινα

305, 319

€xpivar

802

49%.

406,

€é«eppnareonyult er)a

ἐκκλινάτω ἐκκόπτῳ ἐκὰ

[1{7

516

580

ἔλεγας 27B ἐλέγει 283

ἔλεγον

ἔκτεινα

ἐλεεῖ

ἔλεγξε 272°

ἐκτεῖσαι

72

ἐκτείσει

307 4bt,

1)

Aba.

q010;

424,

ἔκ TJA £L

ἐκτημένως

424°

424

316 6)

ἔκτηται

424

ἐκφυγότες

580

468

401

34607: bj

7453

| el &xoitovac

407

χοῦ( 14},

317 ἐλεοῦντος

406( 14},

54°

ἐλ] ευ[ϑεριαζε...

61,5!

δι(5?!

ἐλευθερυῦντα 07713! ἐλευϑερόω θι(5) ἐλευθερωθήσεται 810

3401, 395,

€x| φ] er£elile

éxre-

ἐλευϑεριάξω

ἔκτησα

ἐκτίσω

280°

54°

ἐλεεῖτε 544 ἐλείφθην 411!

70)

394,

280

ἐλέγωπαν

305

ἐκτιν ἄσσω 2]

665621

20)

314

50

834

683

420;

61(4)

ἔλεγεν 39, 289

e| el 301; ἐκτείίύσω

514,

499,

3.[O:2)

exoadAatpiniv 740 éxatyoer 754.4) exreße| «ja 4,68

ER TELM

RES

€AaBo€Xv» ras 239 ἐλαφρόω 61(4)

ἐλαφρώσί[ α]ν[ τ] 61(4)

ἔκπραξον 751 ἔκραγον 306( 11) ἔκραξεν 300( 11?

ἐκτείύθω $46,

317( 14),

ἐλαφρυνθῆναι O1(4) ἐλαφρύκω 61(4)

300( 9 Y

Expires

354

329, 330, 338

eAadpwoar'res δ1(4) ἐλεᾷ 54° ἐλεᾶτε 54! ἐλέγαμεν 270

405

ἐκκλεινέτω

μήτε

338,

ex mori

314

ἐκξζητήκαι

415

1),

ἐλαφρώνω

ἔκειτο

ἑκεκύμωι To)

τὸ

332(

éxvovà) 827 ἐκποιρλήσας 300( 3)

€xecpn

€x| ἐκ ' TyvTO

395,

εἰς

B5o( 1)

251

ἐκέκτυηντιν

834

ἐκποιήσῃ 792,3)

( — «βαίνει

ἐκεκήμιστο

μή

302

ἐκποιηθῆναι,

664(4)

317(14)

eAaßare 317( 14)

299

ἔκβαλε

317

317( 14) 317( 14)

ἔλαβεν

ἐκάθητο

ἑἐκαρποῦΪ ro] 285

ἐλαβαμεν

ἔλαβαν éAaBas

306(12),

ἐκόπην 310 ἐκούομεν 243

ἐκάλεσα

418

ἔλαβα 29, (14)

€AGBE aa ] ev 305( 12), 744

436

éxqvoa 271 ἐκπεσεῖν, τοῦ

ἑκαρπονήκαμεν

its

ἐκλέλυκα 430 ἐκλέπη 305°

εἴχαμεν 279 εἶχαν, 277, 292 εἶχεν

1 ΠῚ

172

ἐλευθερώνω

51( 3)

ἐλεύσωμε ἐλεῶντος

Ὁ 544

ἐλήλυθα

329°,

330,

426,

472,

t)

448.

447,

ἐληλυϑυῖα

eu farevaper ἐμβαλόμενος

876

ἐλήμφθη ἔλθαι

ἐμαρτυροποιήσατο ἔμβα 69o( 1 }*

474

ἐλήλυθαν

870

ἐμβαλών

664

ἐλθάτω

730

664(2),

6654,

ἐλβέ

ἐλθεῖν 9330 854(2), τοῦ 837;

τοῦ Bah ἐλθέτω ABO

Big,

ἔμεινα

,

τὸ 814:

832;

-,

, | τ] οὔ

τὸ

μή

543,

554

£AR|

71

3403) 721

1)

ἔμελλον

248,

ἐλικμῶμεν 3201! ἐλίπην 311!

317

ἐμιιτβιύπαμεν

11

pull,

ἐλογηπηιύμην

ἐμφανίπω 357095

Gb, 216,

794.

803.

os!

ἐλυπήθην

ernsepAnwar eryrotpie

34

202,

ἐμαρτυμάμην ἐμαρτύμρε!:

μι

B4

ἐνδοῦναι

706

ἐμπρτιρηεπηίησα

ἐμπρτυμρ) ol moveiro

wea,

5}

57

ware

774

Lb

ἐνέγκεις

737

evedarvera

288

evexapafa

331

ἐνέχε v^

61,6)

ἐνεχυρήζω

6106)

ereyupacer

bil

évfeyuputyal

ejra

6)

€rexvpna

238, 31719)

cveyupa (61,63 ἐνηθέμην 270

BAS

75512

ToO

Bl (

54000)

409

€vey-

ἐνήκαν

455

242

71

ἐνεγκ] eilv

aby

-.

UA)

eleysn

3171 20)

ἐνεχυραζέτω

1)

742:

ἐνέγκαντες

3057

ohh,

35!

74214)

TOO)

τ

34801)

ἐνευεργετημέν[ς}]

2)

Bo4;

| £|e6caiee

317115).

1}

+72

216

erh edruyety

ἔνε

ἔμαθα 3171 15^ ἐμάβθαμεν 317015)

ἐνετίλω

41454

3 1,

ἐνςἐγτευχαν 4341. ἐνετιλάμην 545

301

ἐνήπαιμα au 1

eränrerres

Any 334

1321

ἐν} ἐτυχαν

cvétdtaca

diAumn-

242

ἐνετειλάμην

ob?

ἐν ἠέγετε

033 434. 0)

317( 17)

ἔνεστι 106 ἐνεστῶτος 877(2) éréayero

152

5804.

el vl ἀεέκι

337°

ἐλύθην 435° Avumenrn

£uaBor

gi mer

Erde Cn riu

ἰ ἐγλυθηκα

1521 g) 441

129.

ἐμπι'

Anode br! ἐλουσάμην 358

439

μίπται

ἘΠΕ

Ol

ἐνέστηκε 435(4)

ἐμπείβιινεκα

er

“ἰῷ

ereneoager

344

ἐμφηνίζια,

745

ἐνενυήκεσαν

418

ἑλκύω 160, 2652) éAxw 160, 2055/2] ἐλλεῖπεν 747

£A πὶ ηϑὴς 230

305

ἐνένκ a

Ὁ 1:1.

920

106

| ἐν] ev xev

ἐμιπβθιύκαμεν

919( 1)

éve] xexeiprixgi 487 eve 654( 3)

BB

6.

ἐμπιριείλη

57?

-Eov)

eve)

eve. évecuca

5.20

ἐμπεπόληκα

306113,

319(1)

ἐνεδρεύσαντος ITA

485

“8

709

5.3

ἐνέδειξαν

200

ἐμεμετρήκνμεν

eurer

794,

(3)

ἐνέδειξων (

248

cueva

683(2),

ἐνέγκω 375, 541( 1) ἐνεδεδύκην 4185

473

ἔμελλες

ἐμί

27

D)

543

ἐνέγκουσιν

7691: 3)

ἐμεμίπθωταο

ἔλθω 375. 541 3:

ἐλπίζω

ἔνεγκαν 835401}

354

ι18,

549 541

ἐνέγκομεν

428 vr

ἐμεμετρήκειν

70415) ἐλθ] ἵν, 765:

B14

ἔλιπον

ἐνέγκι

pec peed peer yal € [eae

£ABovas

ἐλίκμα

eveyuns

ans

ἔμελκε

(= τη.) 59864)

ἐνέγκῃ 5401), 557

439

θην

ἐμελησε

μέχρι

-

773:

ἵνα

Bein’,

ἐμεγαλι

710 τοί 5) 3). oy ἐπὶ τῷ "ἐλ8541}:

663

erläylxes

87961!

ἐμβεβάτευκεν ἐμβῆναι, ἐφ᾽

( 1)

ἔνεγκεν

57

33312) 900

ἐμβεβάτευκα

709(5)

ἔλθε 53412),

FOTRMS

VERB

OF

INtiEN

6r

6)

Gat b)

307

eje 3398, 78501) erqraya

330,

126,

456

INDEX

ἐνηστηκότα 271 ἐνήτυχ|ον] 270 ἐνθυμέομαι

582

ἐνθυμοῦμαι

218

ἕνε

e£aAdorpıniv

ἐνίγκης ἔνιγκον

ἐνκαλέσω

366( 1)

ἐνόμισα

310,

701,

44801)

708( 1)

58r,

504

ἔντυχε, &ve|v|xe. 238, 354

ἐντυχεῖν,

τοῦ

ἐνώθρευσας ἐνώχληκα

ἐνὠχληκεν

353

43012)

ἐξέ-.} 31702) διὰ

τὸ

ΠῚ

Big

ἐξιστανόμενο efnixnans

406

ἐξύβρικα

Bao

442

ἐξε noinga

490

217,

ἔξωμεν

501

ἐξέσται

;836 2,

396, ἐϊέπται

785

τῆ τι ἐ

2 |

785/23,

785 3)

6852/13,

783

201

456,

ἐξέτακα

30,

€Éé rane

228,

425,

bc

ἐξετάσι 346 el fidranar 73061) €l £e | racurra 338 (cé cráneo

358)

ἐξετίθεσαν ἐξετὼ

63

356,

358° 6)

αἱ 726:

317061,

e£nABas

317(6)

272

ἐξῆλθεν 338 ἐξήνεγκαν

Eripreian,

édpalxla

430(4)

ἑόρακας

410(4}

Copawer

43004)

ἐπηγανῆντες

2431 1}

ἐξηράνθη 450

470

306/

300

χί er]

3348

853

ι}

4.16. 1) 244 214

117.

16)

€nallav

317(16)

eraflav

317(16)

ἐπαίδευσας [ ἐπ] αἰνεῖν,

273

D)

étayopevonper

1.14 τοῦ

ἐπακυλουθῆσαι,

818 πρὸς

τὸ μή

ἢθτί 21 ἐπακοληυθήπει

285

ἐξῆλθαν ἔξηλθε

ταῦ

ἐπαθαμεν

eferal o«i|

2773

374

eEwpodnynoapercu ἐξωτιάσθαι, ἕνεκα ἔρικαν 481

énuyópevan

464

458

40g:

379%, 410 751

303,

ἐπαγείω 338: b

2.42

358

379,

ἐπαγαγών

ἐξετάζω

448(2)

ἐξωκονομήσαντα

273

τι,

439

ἐξωκονομῆκεν

792.3}

ἐξεσϑενηκέμαι

ἔξεστιν

ι“0

cfuRpivaay

FOG; 3!

783

413

920

ἔξω 363,

δηχἰ 2)

ἐξεπεπτώκεα, av]

127

907

ἐϊξόμννμε 139

ἐξελθεῖν, ἐξένικων

834

256( 2)

ἐξομώνω

ἔξοντως

ἐξενήσοχα

s]

ἔξημεν 363,

514

τοῦ

3)

ἐξοδιαξομένης

ἐξέλαβα 317(14)

ἐξήλβθη

410

ἐξαίβαλαν ( ἑξακολαυθεῖν͵ (3)

827

65,

ξξεξι]

385,

e| £cl τάπαντα

462

434,

384:

eferaloum

442

ἐντυγχάνω

363,

(2!

448. 2)

ἐντραπῆναι

[27

ἐξετάσει

ἐντετάλμεθί a]

ἐντέτυχα

τοῦ

ἐξιστανομένη

ἐξέστωι

796, 85o(1) ἐντετεύχασιν

742

eene

ἐνοχλήσι 5'33(1) evoxl[eldein 6351) erraydein 604, 625 ἐντεθυμῆσξαι 831 ἐντέλλομαι 5&6, 7,14,

évrevyar

ἐξέδυσαν

(35

7)

302(

ἐξιλάσκεσθαι,

ἐξέρχαμαι

567

46

ἐξήτησᾳ

351

ἐξεπυίησπεν

ἐνοχλεῖ [092 ἐνοχλεῖς ( --τ -ς), μή ἐνοχλῆσαι, τοῦ 835

ἐξήτηση

ἐξεδόμην

ἐξέκειτο

515

334

46

ἕξεις 363,

ἐνόσησα 202 ἔνουσι 106

78

ἐξησθένησα

44H 2) ἐξεῖναι 83/2) ἐξειργάζατο 282

347

ἐνοχλήσειν

746 588

ἐξειλήφασι

ἐνκαλῶ 366, 366( 1), 394 [ἐϊνκαταλείψει 547 ἐνκαταλέληιπαν 448 1) ἐνκαταλελοίπει 488᾽, ἐνκατέλιπε 306( 13) ἐνμενέτωισαν 668

FORMS

ἐξέβησας

«£e

240, 549 240, 683(5) ἕνικε 258 ἕνικον 683(2) ἐνκαλεῖν ηδδ( 1) ἐνκαλέσεις 366( 1) 366( I)

VEI

ἐξαναστήπη

106

ἐνκαλέσιν

OF

400

ἐπαλείψεμεν 343 ἐπαναγκάσει, ἐπία]ναγκαoe: 35802) ἐππναγκάσεις 358(2) ἐπανείρηται 452( 1) ἐπανελθεῖν, ἐν τῷ 852 ἐπανῆλθαν χιγι0] ἐπανήξειν͵ τοῦ 810 ἐπανέίρητα|ι 452(1)

ἔπεσον

403

eravopdwulco]ua:

FORMS

VERB

OF

INDEX

ἐπιδεδεγμένων go8 ἐπιδεδημηκέναι, διὰ τό 849

317(17)

ἐπαντάλγεῖν, eis 850 erarrAnow 493 ἐπάρασσεν 255

eneora[A]ro 513, 520 ἐπέστειλα 343 ἐπέστελε (= -ude) 345

ἐπαρεκάλεσα 252 ἐπαφεῖκαν 448( 1)

ἐπέσχα 317(19) endrafa 345 ἐπ᾿ er ίθουν 140(2)

ἐπιδέδωκαν 448( 1) ἐπιδ e) δώκειμεν 230 3),

ἐπετρόπευσεν 334 ἔπευσα 306( 15)

515, 520 ἐπιδεδωκέναι,

ἐπαφίωκεν

ἐπέδωκα

435(3)

338

ἐπέδωκαν 307 endinoer 333 ἐπεζήτεσε 29912) ἐπεζήτουν 293(1!

774

ἐπείπαιμι 607 ἐπειπέπομφα 477 ἐπεί ι} σῆλθαν 312(6),

332

(2) *

ἐπιδέχεται

181

ἐπιδέχομαι

181,

31719)

ἐπηνέγκητε

117,0!

ἐπήνεγκε

3321 2}

478;

ἔξ wleupes,

ἔπεμ-

110

*

?

>

#

€TEVEWE

ἐπιβέβηι

ἐπενηνόχασιν

407

ἐπεξελεύσυμαι

321!

321 ἐπεποιήκεσαν 40! 490,

ἐπέρχεται 228 ἐπερωτήσαις 622 ἐπερωτηθείς

ἑπερωτῶ ἔπεσα

qoo

288

317(17)

520

xav i 448)

ἐπίγνοθι

ἐπιγνοῖς.

448)

p? I)

ἐπιθυμῶν

τῷ

854

ἐπικωλύω

Huch 2)

ἐπιλαθη

250( ι)

492(6)

τοῦ

847

775

800

μέχρι

τοῦ

857

575

ἐπιλάθης, μή 563(7)

743

471

Bor

915

367(3) 591, ta

ἐπιλαβεῖν,

ἐπιγίνγοῖς

ἐπιγνώσεται 403 ἐπιγραφῆναι, dvev

TO

906

ἐπικέκριται

ἐπικλαύσω ἐπικρεῖναι,

12} ἐπιγνῶναι

306(6)

ἐπιθεωροῦντα ἐπιθῆται 572 ἐπιθύμη σαν] ἐπιθυμῶ 705

oc] ro. 628 éniyev| 515,

ἐπιδῦμεν 533(2) émdorat 741 emiöns 681

(1)

bro

473

(2)

ἐπεξήλθοσαν

ἐπεποιήκησαν

18)

ἐπιγέγραμμαι 442 ἐπιγέγραφα 442 ἐπιγεινώσκειν, ἐπὶ

326

870

ἐπιζητεῖ 192 emideive 7911) ἐπιϑεωρῆσαι, πρὸς

ἐπιβεβηίκασι}

887

ἐπενεχθησόμενον

ἐπεξῆλθος

“17!

594

622

604,

ἐπιζήσαντι

272

“οὔ!

€ min

ἐπιβέβηκα

238

Βμρ, 4)

18)

317

ἔπιαν

τό

διὰ

ἐπηρωτηθέντες

ıBı

ἐπιδωθήντων

2050

ἐπήνεπη

ἐπιβιλλοιμεν

ἐπένεγκα 4170] ἐπένε!y| «av. 317/91

770 ἐπιδίξειεν

Pied γῃκας 31719)

(min

[ἔπει μῳῴε! 5]

Wels),

31719)

ἐπηϊ νεῖ γκαν

ἐπηρεᾶσθαι,

imeppa 344. 345, [ἔπεμψα 346 ἔπεμψες,

πηνέγκαμὶ

778

ἐπιδίδωμι 182, 22101),

351

εν

ἐπελεύσεται

Βοῦ(2)

877(2)

e| wi] δίδημιε 94

ἐπεκείμην, (| wewletpny 514 ἐπελεύσασθαι 75-41 2) ἐπελεύσεσ( ασὶ θα{ «| 7543) ἐπελεύσομαι 304 ἐπελθεῖν͵ μετὰ τὸ ἐπελθών goo

83

ἐπιδειχθέντων

ἐπιδεχόμεθϑα

321

[05

84,

ἐπῆλθαν 317(6) ἐπήλθασιν 422 εἰ and Ol »] σαν ἐπήλθοσαν,

e|

395

ἐπιδεικνυμένων B4 ἐπιδείκνυμι 804, 893 ἐπιδείκνυσθε

286

ἐπήνεγκα

μηδέ

τοῦ

ἐκ

ἐπιδεικνύω

,

458;

851

ἐπῆλθα 417(6)

ἐπίσταμαι)

210(4)

468,

ἐπιδεικνύουσα 83

ἐϊ π᾿ ἤγαγεν 306(1) ἐπήινει

(=

q65( 9)

énevyapiaTrovty>

ἐπέθετο 326 ἐπέθηκαν 307

ἐπείσταμε

288( 1);

wore

336,

ἐπιζδέγδωκα 421(2)

ἐπευχαρίστουν ἐπέχειν,

(2) ἐπιδέδωκα

ἐπ᾿ Πλανθάνεσθαι, ἐδ 18

τοῦ

μή

INDEX

ἐπιλελήθεσθα[ι],

ἐν τῷ 852

ἐπιμελεῖσθαι

161 *

ἐπιμελέομαι

1351351,

ἐπιμέλεσθαι

11; 696

ἐπιμέλημαι

771,

ἐπιμελόμενος

QO ^,

161%,

161,

779

hab,

845,

922

746

453: 4)

€mivetias

erifn, émov

465

ἐπιστήσεται ἐπίσχης

543,

366(21

ἐργάζαμαι

TT QUU €niTVy

442

emidurene

diras

ἐπιχειρήσειεν pra.

214),

Buy,

nlepli [ rou]

8590/1) 210( 4)

ἐπιστείλαντος

007,

91003}

ἐπιστείλας B77, 0) emiareidev 25001) ἐπίστελε 406( 01 ἐπίστελλε

hati),

ἐποηίσιω

ἔρθω

mpng

τῷ

μή

844

η3οί2)

epi» μη μαι

452( 4)

ἐρρέθη 209i5)

4]

338

775

ernuro

644!

ἔπομαι

265093)

ἐπωμνύμενει

"10

ἐπωμνύμενας

L0

ἐπόνεσα 2UQ, 300( 3) emovnea 30003) émopntucvTO

707,

237 753

ἔρθε 75513)

enninaes 310 ἐποίμαινεν 246

424

35817)

ἐρημώθη ἐρημωθὴ

ἔρρωμαι

ἐποίησα 333, 338 1!

grb

ἐπίσταται

530

3031 7)

ἐμγώμεϑα πῆι 7) ἐργῶνται 358 7)

ἐρημωθῆ,

ἐπλήρωσεν

emiato}ruodnı,

€pyms, μηθαμῶς ἐργηλαβησευ 237!

2ub

ἐπλήρωκα

3506(3)

τῶν Bögl 10) 7342)

358(7)

“τῷ

oQua3L1)

ἐπίσταμαι

022,

ἐργῆται

ἐπλέημεν

697

émioTnÀuéros

ἐργαζομένων, ἐργάσασί dla:

énÀavoeg

ἐπισκυποῦ

701(

ἐργαζόμ] εἶνοι, οἱ B8q( 10) ἐργαζόμενουις 88Βηι 10) ἐργαζημέεῳ, τῷ 889( 10)

ἐργῶμαι

631

^22

196

emornänrae

ἐπιτρές

2603 61

emanxonect( ac]

914

Hon:

Hay

rat

ἐπλήγη 310 ἐπλήγην 310

ἐπισκηπωῦντες

-τείναμεν)

ander

187,

eziyolbr]

158} 0)

ἐπισπάσω

43568) (

ro)

677,

40}

350i2)

421

ἐπισκεῴφάμενος

2)

183

305

y

205, 4)!

ἐργάσομαι 358i7)

eminpwnoes

ἐπισκευᾶν

“δ

36602),

ἐπιτρέπω

€T

265( 4),

355 7)

676

180

582

130

ἐπιτελεῖν

hao

ἐπισκέπτομαι 16H, emınwevalw 580

02

ἐργᾷ 358(7) ἐργάζει 358( 7)

emrpén|er|e,

453.

ἐπωμνιί pevos)

180

317018]

PHT AL

2BB( 1)

6)

ἐπιτείνω

ἐπιπέπημφπα EM

221

ἐπυνθάνετο

405

Omi Tivaper

ἐπιασκεμμένας

3061 15)

ἐπυθόμην

ἐπιτετευχήτας

B20

ἐπύθετο

14,

702

ἐπιτελοῦσιν

178

τοῦ

ἐπτώχευσεν 334 ἐπύησεν 336

130

ἐπιτελέσω

1}

ἐπιμέμνησμαι O12,

478,

687

418

enpaxropeucas 342 ἐπρίατο 332 (2)

586, 594, 770. 796

ἐπιτελέσομεν

336,

ἐπιμένωιεν

empdxara

δη8

34941

ἐπιτελείτω

ἐπιμεμέληται bot

τ] ελλε

ἐπιτάπποντες

022

ἐπιμεληύμεθα 10} ἐπιμελυυμένης 161

ἐπιμένητε

FORMS

ἐπιστησάτιωσαν

594,

ἐπιμελῶσϑε

ἐπιστέλλω

701

1553153)

ἐπιμέλον

ἐπίαί

ἐπιστήκων

ἐπιμελήθεητλι θδηι1},

582,

708;

VERE

(1), 707 161 -, nepe

τοῦ Βηηίτὶ ἐπιμέλεσθε

OF

Hb

402,

eppwueda

915

ἐμνωμένος

154

ἐρρώμην 514 ἐρρωνται 154, 'ν

452{12]

[34, 452( 12), 403: ἔρρω σ᾽ αι 452( 12!

éppwant

ἔρρωσβθαι 41520 12),433 07) ἐρρώσθαι 724, 756: —, ro

Bry:

2071

erpaön

van

172

452( 121

ἐρρωμένην

ἐπητίζαμί er) 279 μι

$52( 12),

202,

463

éppiolla|il,

ὅπῃ

4

723

—

σέ

ἐπὶ «t-

ἔρρωσθε

154, 691 (2), 715,

724, 725

154,

(2),

724,

τοῦ

725

792(3),

VERT

162

Fort Ws

(1), 476

155(4),

162

ἐσχήκει 1

829

ἐσκύλην

485

40,

epxiorw 670, 709(5)

ἔσομαι

ἔρχεται

\eoraplueraı

202,

306

( 10), 317( 19), 329,

330.

340( 2), 353 ἐτάγην 311!, 312

107 103 #loar)

510

ἐτεθεῖσαν

230

ἔρχετε ( - Tau) 45

foraca

299

ἐτέλεσα

ἔρχῃ 216 ἔρχοιο 608

ἔσπειρα

305

€rerüyaro

2653.

581,

594,

770 épyope

2160

ἐρχομένη Bob ἐρχόμενος

216,

9goa2( 13:

epxl o] jeevas, v|e|s 896;

€pxopt—,

(1)

710

ἔρχω 550(2) epwrav,

ἐν

ἐρωτάω

586,

ἐρωτηθείς

τῷ

852

701

877( 1)

ἐ σ᾽ παύδηπα ἐσσί 106!

ἐτιθόμην

4!

ἐτίθοσαν

14012)

302 5)

ἐσφραγισμένα

878i 3)

ἔσται 384, 405. 396. 401, “8

1,

786(9),

|éero]|: διὰ

ἐστερεσα

300, 4)

ἐστέρησα

300 130,

784

ἔστω

(2) ἐσθίει

226

éofiw

14514), 162

152

425

erocuaolelır

754( 1)

358,

ἑτοιμάσομεν

ἑτοιμάσω

378°

ἐτήλμηκα

458

58

ἐτρυγήσατε 333 ἔα τίνι

787

Η

208

Bao

ἔτρωγα 162° ἐτύγχανεν! 655 éruuanmase

20

118,

érvanao

682,

TIMIUL:,

tH £ruya

237

τ

ἐτπιμηαπωὶ

317, 20)

éruyor

‘317( 20!

ἔτυχεν

655

ἐσφάγην

310

εἰ ὑδαιμη]

ἐσφαλην

410

317110)

ἔσχαμεν 3171. 19) ἔσχαν 317 (19) ἐσχήκα

158. ΠῚ

310

ἔστωι 118, 758 ἔπτωσαν 652(3!

€cya

1672

358( 8), 770

ἑτοιμάκαμεν

ἐτράπην

784 aot

ἑτοιμάζω

eropunwas 4168 ἐτράπη 212, 310

4)

τὸθ

ἔστριυσαν

ἐπήμανα 304 ἔσθειν 102

201

| e| τρόφησεν

786 7.

523

ἑἐτοιμάξεται

ἐστι 78414)

ἔστιν

237

140(2)

ἔστηκεν 43514)

ἐστίν

-aln-}

4]

ἐτίθουν

ἐτμίβην 310

594. 761, 798,

|

μη

458

7844 T1;

ἐπϑέσθ)] αι]

ὃ

305

ἐστὶ

ἐπιστάμενος

To

108

. €nTt

ἔπσασθα[ι 7342) ἔσεσθε 408

787

78413)

310

478,

310

énÜns res

140(2)

ἕστηκα

237

3543),

ἔαθοντα

I4!

ἐτίθεσαν

ἔστειλα

Bot

ἔσῃ

ἐτιθέμην

ἐστέ

ἐρωτουμένης 52 (2) ἐρωτῶ 221(2). 268,

evann»

ἔσπευσα 34911), 478, 825 ἐσπούδασα 34913), 47H

ἐστασθαι

ἐρώτα 674, 695

ἐρώτησε

( — αἰτ-

ἐστάλην

Q03

500°

ἐτιάσατο

(2):

ἔρχυνται 225 ἔρχου 709(5),

ἐρωμένον

ὁ B8g

299

351

ἐσπείσαμεν

120,

284°,

erafov 320 ἐτάχθην 311!

ἐσμέν

ἔρχομαι

513

ἐσχήκη 445(4) ἔσχον

313(2)

ἐρχέσθω 670, 709 5) 217

487,

#

ἐεσχήκειν

442

ἐσκάφασι 448(2) ἐσκεψφάμην 168?

ἑσκάπησα 168? £axvÀa 305

154, 452( 12)

ἔρχεσθαι,

ἔσθονσαι donada

691(2), 691

715,

Eppwiae

OF

ἄσθω

ἐρρῶσθε 154 Eppwol 91» 724

dppwoo

INDEX

205,

330,

173

volens

εὐδηκεῖ

2

evdnxer

745

εὐδοκέω

454.

16,

but

2051011

εἰδόκημαι

4291

ecdnacuew

“οι 2)

358

INDEX

εὐδοκιμηκότα

429( 1),

8690

εὐδοκῖς 215 εὐδοκῶ 184 εὐδόνηκα

εὐεργετημένος 429(3), 455 53 53,

26612)

εὐθύμησα 266(2), 333 evO[ v] μοῦντος 9to( 1)

εὐθυμυῦσαν εὐθυμῶντος

QO3 53, 873 τὸ 817

εὐλαβοῦμαι

574

τοίὉ] 820

266(5)

( 11) eöpar 317( 11), 266(6) «spas 317( 11), 871 eupedein 625; e[ülpedein

τὸ

—. εἰ 649(3) —,

διὰ

8.5

τοῦ

820;

εὑρεῖν

τῷ μή 83% 1) εὑρεΐίσκεις 217 εὖμεν 266( 6), 332( 2) 'evpéais' 365( 2)

εὐρηθῇ 300(5) εὐρηθ] ἢ] vec

300( 3)

266( 11) 317/21)

317(21)

ἔφαγον

317( 21)

ἔφαμεν

143

ἐφάνην

310

752

26616),

365(2),

777,

ἐφάνης 338 ἐφανίσθη

ei 649(4)

26616},

317011),

ἐφέστακα

εὕροσαμ

2666)

ἐφευρέθη

εὕροσαν

32I

ἐφη

37

ἔφης 143, 143!

725

879i

3),

8745)

266 8) 266(B)

eudpavorro

143,

ἔφθακαν

266( 7)

εὐφραίνω εὐφράνθη

143

ἔφησθα

631

εὐτυχοῦντι

2666)

142.

ἔφηι 143 ednv 143

429( 5!

723,

εφθάρην 310 ἐφθάρησί av) 310 ἐφιδεῖν 306( 14)? ἐφιδῆσαι

266(8B8)

306(14)*,

egiora

1288

édiatuw

T

ἐφοδευσας

εὐχαριστέω

ἐφόρεσα

266( 9)

πρὸς τώ Bi

(1)

τι

(1) 224,

evxapiori| ple

892

33

εὔχετ!ε] ( - -rac) 224 εὔχομπι 197, 224. 26b6( 10},

474

128:

744

ἐφιστῶ

ί( ν)

128

253 2991 4)

ἐφύρησα 2991 4) ebuya

εὐχαρίστησαν 266, Q) εὐχαριστήσεις 405, 640 εὐχαρίστουν 2669), 288

143'

4481)

εὐχαρειστήσω 404 εὐχαριστάω 53

εὐχαριστῶ

435(4)

ἐφεστήκασι 435(4)

879í 4)

εὐτυχέω

243

ἐφάπτεσθαι 790(2) ἔφασαν 143 €óac[x]e 345

euporra

εὐχαριστῆσαι͵

εὑρεθῆναι 792(4); 7,— οὔ, ph 834(1) εὐρεῖ[v),

εὐχρήστησαν ἔφαγα 1625, ἔφαγαν

εὐτύχει

εὑρεθέντος 007 εὐρέθη | 266(6);

εὐχρηστηκώς 429(7)

εὐρήσω 218, 3€5( 2), 399

εὐτοιχοῖς 317

196

εὑρίσκει

εὐτάκτηκας

266( 6),

6493);

221(4)

224

εὐχόμενος 920 εὐχρηστέω 266( 11?

εὐσχολῖς 5.2.1} εὐτάκτηκα 438

317( 11) 216,

εὐρήσετε

€Upuv

εὐπορήσαμεν 266(5) euröpnoels] 319 εὐπορῶ 247°, 823 eOpa

εὔχομε

εὐχόμεθα

332( t), 338

εὖξε 6BB( 1) εὔξω 370(2) εὐπορεῖτο 266(5)

εὕραμεν

365(2)

εὖρον

266( 4)

ev£ag6[ali,

εὐμήσεις

εὕροις 608; —, εὕρομεν 266i6)

εὐλογέω 266(4) εὐλογημένος 429(4)

εὐπορέω

296', 370 (2),594. 799, 915

εὐρηκένε 610 ebpns 541(2)

300(5), G94, 916

200

εὐλαβαύμενος

εὐλόγησεν

εὕρηκα 317( 11), 345°, 458,

εὑρίσκομεν 266(6) εὐρίσκω 221(3),

266(3)

εὐκαιρεῖν,

Fok ws

εὐρήκασι 448(2) εὐρήκειμεν 515 εὑρηκέναι 763

εὐεργί «τημένοι) 455

εὐθύνω

VERD

474

429(6)

εὐθυμάω εὐθυμέω

OF

ἔφυγον

3171221

317( 22)

ἐφίην 313(3) ἐχάρηκα

316(8 7

ἐχάρημεν 334(1) ἐχάρην

216,

310,

334( 10) exapnea exapilarn

516(8) 282

316(8),

-

INDEX

OF

VERB

ἔχε 709(2), 709(2)

ear To 520

ἐχέθην

ἑώρακα

171

ἔχει 7844); — βοηθῆσαι 776; — δοθησόμενα 525,

—

προβῆναι

376;

—,

FORMS

210(2),

330,

430

ἡγοῦμαι 794, 802

(41,470

ἡγούμ(ενεν),

ἑωράκαμεν 430(4) ἑωρακέναι 430(4)

Nywsiama

ἔχειν 773, 787(2), 789 ff., 792(10), 919; — , διᾶ

54

τό 849 (3); —, παρὰ τὸ

[ζημιωθῆναι 791(3)

μέ

ζῆν

058;

—,

τοῦ

μή

819;

—, τῷ μή 847; ὑπὲρ τοῦ —,

χρείαν

ἐχειρογράφησε

856;

—,

332( 2)

ἔχεις 217; — ἀκί οὔ] σαι 376

ζήσομαι

ἔχεν 747

ζήσω 540(4)

ἔχετε

(=

ἐχέτω

Ἐἐχηται)

666,

709

τό

—, rod B42;

noc»

861(3X;

—, τῶι 838

ζῆσαι 306 ζήσεται 368 1)

819

ζητεῖ

561

13€

ἥδεις 136 5pó« cav 401 ἤδειτε 489 ἥδιν 136 ἠδυνάμην 2461, ἠδύνατο

210(1),

221(4)

221(4)

ζητηθείη

éxnes 596

468

246(1)

70:1: 98m»

246(

1)

ἠδυνόμην

240.

Ι )

ἤθελεν

625

291

ζητηθῇ 598( 10)

ηθέληκα

ἔχῃς 596

ζητηθήσεται

ἠθεληκέται

ἐχίρισας 342 ἔχοι 609, 650, 653; — εὖ (καλῶς) av 642 (2)

ζητῶ

ζῶ 306(6),

ἔχοις 604, 6047, 654

ζῶντος 903

ἔχην

(= -εἰν),

ἐχοισμένης

ἔχομεν

196,

205

878( 3)

ἔχοντα

395

221(4),

ζώνευμι

225,

R26

870,

87915),

890,

ἠθέλησα

149

ἤιμεθα

A114

fea 211, 450 yeapa 27I

ἥβλεπα

27!

245

ἥκατε

ἔχοντας 880 ifxolrres, οἱ 885

269!

ἧκε

ἔχοετι 879(5)

jyaya 317(1)

993

246!,

ἡβουλοόμὴν

ἤγαγον 306(1), ἠγαλλείασα 334 ἥγγειλα

305

ἔχουσιν

ἠἡγγέλην

310,

306(

10),

ἡγήσας 316(5)

3

363,

003,

904

ἐῶ 800, 917(2)

ἥκει

ΠΣ, 495.

514.

τοῦ

B60(1}

πρὸ

ἠκηκοεισαν ἠκίσατο

ηγόμασας

338

ἠγόρασε 336

332( 2)

475

317(6)

ἦλθαν 317(6) ἦλθας 317(6) ἤλθασιν

τ΄.

491

ἠκουκέναι 426, 426) qxuvca 38 ἥκουσας 335 ἥκω 203, 211, 3297, ἤλεγξε 272° ἤλθαμεν

457

773:

401

ἦλθα 317(6)

823, 894; —, ἑτοίμως 779 ἔχων

311

62 ἡγησάμην 347. 802, 818 1)

609

ἔχω 195, 263, 205, 206, 207, 209, 218, 265(6), 284°,

31761)

211

Waxy κόεσαν

ἡγεμενεύω

316(7)

ἔχυ 604, 604", exuoa 155(2)

aby!

ἤγειρα 305

ἐχρῇ 7916) ἔχρησεν

269,

112

715

ἥκειν

ἔχοντος 910(2) ἔχουσα 00% ἔχουσι, τοῦ νά 809 598( 7)

262

ἧι 786(7*. 787(7)

βουλήθην

ἔχοντί ol

440

410!

% 111

ἠβούλετο

9g17( 1);

419.

ἠθέλησαν 201 ἠθέλησεν 291 ἤθελον 262, 269

36801)

172

193,

ἐχόμενα

tva 775

246( 1).

269

368 1 )

ζητεῖτε

(2)

438

ἠγώρακα

ζῇ 218 ζημιᾶσθαι

τὸν 885

ἡγούμην 287

ro Bio'

862:

ἡγόρασεν 338 ἡγορασμένας 882

222

770

INDEX

ἦλθεν

834;

[ἦλθεν

45

Bes

308;

304,

522;

nAdn

—

πηασυπάμενες

—

πηιήπας

272

120,

263,

31761,

ere

nraywace

408

gÀ«uxa 440: gÀw|vjwa ἠλκύκησαν 153 MAxvopaı

472,

ἠλλάγην [ γλπιίζον

423

Sua

21:6,

28B

448

ἥμαρτες 350

ἡμεληκέναι ἡμεληκότα

ἥμελλαᾳα

2 4H,

ἤμελλεν

248

517!

103, διδαχϑείς

2 48,

260

διπατείληντες

109°: 324; $07:

257.

(3) 1093,

74b02),

— (= #1538). L1; Ale 510; 304;

IT,

H54 113,

78361:

(guys ámoBAy-

428

207: αἱ wo

ῃρμηλύγηται Bar:

ghia 2:

Pee] μέν} ἣν

npunen

rn

Jour

430. 3.

0: 261

201,

312

ah?

jpaaav 32111) Npraynonr

312

ἦρται 45212) nPxöpne 267 ἥμωπαν 321 1) ἡρώτα ΒΒ 1} ἡρώτηκες

312

26)

460

44

2)

ἡρώτησα 33201) nperav

"vanfa

312

ἡρωτήϑημεν

2517

201,

405

3135

ἡμπατηπαν

201

ἧς

208

110,

(1)

110%

ἧς

araßas 307, δημήσασπ

503, abt

nraydanen

+31

7£a 300 1} “80

ἠξίουν 288) 1) ἠξιώκει 513 4535. 2]

476

jaae 2

-,

114:

ἧς

523; — ἐπι303; — λαβὼν

— mupefus 503

oca | — ἦσθα}

nva£apnev

ἠξίωκες

ἥρκεπα 299

2

25:

rat£n

nee

48.

Howes 4.452)

p]

ἡνειμγμένωι ii

nrurfa

ees

znxe«us 204

267,

An

27%

ἤρηχες 43505), 44512) ἠρίθμημε 45214) pe

272

jr vynaavr? 201 nr"'yperar 493013) prvé£a 20]

τῷ

417! ἢ,

2]

ἡνύγη 201

247°

ἐπὶ

"pyn«a 438, 465

272

5:

jretyUÜn

247°

250

ἠργολίβηκεν

340

p

we-

ἠμπόληκα 428, 434

MWTNOng

1)

318,3

arr

Drorye

302

271

ἡργηληβήπσαντι

— —

ἡμοινί«) 109

205,

ἡπέθανεν 207: 4}. 417 12)

npnrae 45211)

nee

E )

yet

nreyweitv

Nele

FAQ, 507,

ἡμφοδηκένπι,

ἡπάτηκας

jreykar 317: 0!

»rny:

Pupeperpnal|via]| 7u^vvi a) boy

το,

301:

"uneoa

neenynlr|ro

crdedupevace>

ἡμπορῷ

ἡνεγκάμην

ἠτεωγμένης,

287

μὴν

|rle-

abr

ἠργολάβηκα 43H

jeeoxeume

1]

ἡμέερίμεηυν

—

ἡπαιτηθησαν

ἡπαίτησας 2671 31 ἡπαντηκὰ 458

ἡπώλησαν 271

nréaxera

277

—

muve-

ἡπώληπον

irényarra

246),

c0

3021

needa

61 ἢ

ἠμποροῦσα

3041

34

ἠἡναγκήηθην

ἥνει καὶ

ἡμέλησα 334

505,

522:

258

ἢν ει χο μι τ}

791i 2!

112;

S04,

Sol 1}

420.

ἡμάρτομεν 200, 4} ?uaprov 1084} naefa 103, 112

ἦμεν

nfovm

ἤνεγκαν 277,717.

I2I

ἡμελλὼν

508:

1 5n

(1) Anıxa

ἠξίωσας 353, Bay

xomei«

2rayxaalize

311

(sie)

ards

ἤνεγκα 277, 317. 917.4),

313

310,

—

ves

30H; TeÀ| «|o ro «| als ὑβρισμένος 30H

ἥλιμε 452i3! BAUM

-

Bertie Ms

σταμένης

329, 410, 339, 353 5A8nmnav, InAdarav 321

ἦν

NERB

ἦλθες 339 ἦλθον

os

OF

ttt,

1.

£13, 287, 5307:

γράψαντες

(15

-

306,

παθόντες

517

510,

522, 539°; ἦ} σα» rlernγμένοι] 510, 520 ἦσθα 110, 1103, 114. na@avany

304,

|)

330°

[NI

Aodas ıın ἠσοθένηκα

471

ἠσθενηκότες

880.3)

EN

WITT

VEI

ΕἼ

ΕΙΣ

ηὐχαρίστησαν ΟΠ) ηὐχόμην 2560, 10)

Beapaı

B94

ηὔχοντο

θεωρῶ

804,

260

θέτω

10)

ja8évnoa 333

ηὐχρήπτηκα

ἠσθόμην 306(2) daper 112

ηὐχρήστηκας 429(7)

ϑήσω

npaya

271

fiyeiv,

ἡσπάσουν

ἤφερα

270,

320

ἤσχαμεν 265(6), 417(10]

ἤἥφεραν

ἤσχημαι 462

nuda

ἤσχον

(-τ-εήσχον:

Emyor

)

438

13%,

ϑήσυμεν

271

qua

jl apax|a 43014)

θριαμβεύω

Hy

θύειν,

μή

red

θυσιάξοντα

Arnon 26713)

θανῆναι

ἑατρεύειν,

Wyre 272

dapor

ἦτο

θαρσεῖν.

ἡτοίμακα 438 ἦτον, din ro Bi! grove itt

ἥτω

τῷ

271

118, 6H2( 2) ah

ἃς

r0 854(5)

2060( 2),

334i

1)

877(3) 105 εἰς

ἰδεῖ, δεῖν

τὸ B41' Bia’: ος

791 1)

iyut

122,

ἴθι

θέλῃ 399

ἱκάμην

τι

θελῆσαι 684)2) ϑελήσατε 716;

nefarorro

nipa

157

ηὔραμεν 2660; 6), ηὗραν 317011)! ηὑρέθη 26h( 6) ηὐρέθης

yüpre.

317011)

2054

^!

2b6(6)

yrpiaxer

nepeakera.

266

6

260606)

2060( 7)

nidparas

26

nudpavdy

2660, 8?

nedpardönper

βελήπατίε!

Br

un

BeAnmer,

ἂν

θέληπυν

704,

ntipe-

θέλω

046

717,

710

o μαϑεῖν BéueBu

2066048)

" udpardyaar

hl

Hi

yuyaparnen

200(09)

7510

Hae

θέτω μπι

14

10%

inner

120

ἐπὶ

2030 41

ime

big! d

εἴμηκεὶ

11}

ἴαελθε inde:

,

64

21

Olla

118,

[4

*

I

a

Terrier

“Γαι

177

265051,

43545! ἴσασι

IGTARPAMI

7}

85400!

ent

ime

245,

τῷ

τυ,

Gori)

ἴσμεν 034

ϑέμ! ην 236 78.

Lang

‘per

cof

230

ϑερίσαι

"8

ine

TITI

29303), 301. 377. 478, 373, 386, 731. 7095. Bar: θέλων

δὲ)

2421,

38

60H

ipyxe

220,

58

3H

ἐματίξζειν,

107

103,

-

ἱκετέω Unio

3095

ÜsÀos Te.

266( δ}

ηὐτυχήσαμεν

Gernaes

‘

ἱκετεύω

θελήσω “μοὶ θέλωντες o7

ηὔρι] a xov! οί δ}: al xov | 2301) ηὗρων

236

θελήσῃ 396, 558 θελήσης, μή 30317)

abby 6)

nopellyonar

t

71:7...

266(6)

Bal

4)

ηὐξάμην

mo)!

μή

307

ἱκετι εὐύουσα

266

roi

120

t«qT£UDI'Ta

240},

αἱ

ἰδές 664 ἰδώς B7Q( 1)!

θέλησαι

}

ποι

hr

θέλῃς 547

4204

ro

745

nuAlolynaere 42914)

gvÀoynptvor

B23

ἰδέ bb4( 5)

Hı8

θεῖναι 79012), θέλετε 751!

1]

«D

ἰδαΐνε

ἐπὶ

Beim’

ηὐδόκησας

ηὐθύμησα

744! 904

θάραι 673 θαυμάζων 91741) θαυμήσης, μή 56317) θεάσασθηι, τὸ ὅτ"

267( 3)

846

200

θρέψης 580

271 462

Il

ἥτρωγα

916

392

θανατῶσαι, τοῦ 822 θανεῖν, τὸ Biot

til

141

386

ϑλείβομαι

265(6) ἤσχυνται 325, 462 ἦταν ttt, 113

ἥτουν

140,

(26, pale rts" εὶς

ἢ 47

INDEX

ἱστάω ἔστε

128

καθίσω

126,

ἴσχυσα

καίασεν

691( 1)

ire

καλέσω

128

καθεστήκασιν,

[καϑθε] στή-

κασιν 43514) καθέστηκεν

435(4)

καθ] ἤκ͵]ον,

xal85«cv,

re

88011) καθήκοντα, ra BB r1) καβήκοντος, tov HAG{ ri) aıßnAxne

κάθημαι καιθημεθα

265

2)

121

S10

κάμνω

BOI,

121

καθήρουν

29302)

narafleßAnkam

440. 2)

7092. 6)

025

449

καταγεγραφηκέναι

aafnrac

[21

Karayenyeraı

καταγηγώχαμεν

126

v n Hi rin

| “ἢ

12)

[1

435i

347

418

κατίπλιμπανειν

ιἢ 4

πανομένοις

43611) 41365! 1)

200)

καταλιπών

306019)

waradigac

13)

H13 17

5317.

575

547 218

καταλύσῳω

Jat

warapativ

775507) 6:2;

καιταμένων

|

καταμέι

877i

καταμίσ]

wr

54502)

κατανεῖμαι

«n TU Yeu

[ ju

κητανέμηντα

— dv

644

41352011) κοὐ)

ylovoc

κατανεικήπη

«arayrotg

178

154

WAT AA MELE

k«arnjcalicev

0)

ToL

11

«arznÀ| εἰλέχϑαι

κατημεμέτβρμηται

καταγήγοχεν 44011) καταγιωχένηι

catiarararrey

133610)

442

xaraynayer

250(

κατηλλάσσομαι

1)

4:354

περὶ

1)

κατιλίψω

4142

xadiarar

886

κατηλίψης

Bay

121

12H

ἅμα

557

607 894

νιαταλίφη

.adnaon

καθιπστ[ αἰνάμενος 127 καθιστανειν, wadcal 7| ἄν εἰν

.

B16

καθίσει 3574 8)!

341151

καταλημβάνω

καταλιμὶ

44911]

xaraynvuyn

709(3)

747151

καταλείῴη

25!

καταγέγραφαν

E32

6h05,

καταλειῴεν

403

νατηβέβληκαν

SgB 1g)

καταλαβούσης

83

1}

383

καταβεβήκεις

132

καταλειφθῆναι,

alÀet. yg

καταβαλοῦμεν

τοῦ

132 UCE?

καταλάβοιμι

py 250i

καταβήναι

OAT

περὶ

783 4)

61( 7}

x«arzaBaÀav

472

t)

«ara Aagn

Hii 7)

Hgoi

84

139

warnAnßeir

7)

κατηγέγρπφηα

312

[32

«araxwrt(ac)

GtQ

Hl

«arnfloa

καθηνται

καβηρπησβέντα

798

τοῦ

κατηβληθείη

121

KOTAKECOG

κατάλαβε

3660,

τῷ

393

«araxpargawam

57?

«araBaAÀAn

121

37

κάμει,

«aznBl

naw

wT

186

xaraüfa

«ara

κατήκηυ

57°

καρπόομαι

435(4)

394

ade |xrunrror

sq

50

καρπιζομένον

435(4)

xaralypaldw

warawexAtodn,

50

καρπίξζω

684( 7)

καταπέκλυκεν

39

«omouy

καλῶ

+68 236

59

κακοποιέω κὶ α[

(1),

625, 650

xaramexÄuxn

καινοποιηύμεναᾳ

καθεῖκα 435( 3) καθειστᾷ 128

san

ἐγένετο)

"arrianga

καθαρίσομεν 35707) καθαροποηιήσασθαι 57 καθαροποιήσομεν 393 καθεδεῖ 357( 8}!

καθεστήκαμεν

448

καίνετο

καινέζειν 50 και[ oc|oaarros

καθαρίζω 35717)

καθέστηκα

acer)

καικίνηκαν

καινήπαπα

265( 6), 292

κ[ αἰθέξω 363

waraypayer κατὶ

ware

120

καθειστῶσιν

{ c καὶ

ιν

148

καταγνωσθείη

257

334

ἰσχύσαμεν 334 ἰσχύω 777 ἰσώρακεν 4130(4)

(yov

€xa»| τ αγνύων

125

4574 9)

xadoppiadnper 253

1}

ἱστόρ[η]σα 339 ἴστωσαν

VERFFFONMN

vafıorwera

134

ἵστημι

OF

2530( 1]

1)

1066

36

7Hbr BI ἢ γ7η.

1 '

INDEX

karaseronka

410

κατανενόμικα

439

καταντῆσαι καταντήσας

790( 7) QI!

καταξιόσατη

686,

717

χω]

357( 6)

κατ]αχωριὦ

690( 1)

wareßairw

716 704;

xaza£]r]-

240°,

κατεισήλθαμεν

xarafıwon

κατείοχηκα

4,48( 2!

κατιστανομένων 127 waroıxoürrals 879(2) κεῖμαι 132, 133, κεινήσομαι 397 κείτομαι

133,

133)

κεκάθαρκα 430 κεκανοποίηκα 57 κέκαρκα 438

317(6)

tra O80( 12)

κεκέλευσται 702(5) κεκίνηκα 438 κέκλικα 4530

κεκομφιρματευμένους ἢ.

317 ( 14) 338

κεκοπίακα

438

κατελθεῖν

Gig

κεκοσκιν] evnévov]

κατελθὼν

#07

κεκοσκινευμένος

καταπλεῦσαι 78813); πρὸ τοῦ B6o( 1) καταπλευσάντων 007

κατέλιπεν

336°

κεκούφικεν

κατέλιψα 305( 13) «arevéyxa 5411)

Kenpaynaay 255 κεκρίκει 234

«| αἸτάπλευσεν

xareverkiv 753502) κατέπαυσαν Bai

κέκριται

κί αἰτέπλευσεν

κεκτῆσθαι

καταπεφρονήκασιν

καταπλεῖ

καταπλέω

448(2)

216

250( 1)

381

καταργηθϑῆναι

772

καταρραθυμοῦντα

καταρτισόμεθα

ΒηΒ{1)}

κατεργᾶται

κατεργώμεθα

3597)

κατερχομένου

GIO( 10)

κατασκευάσει

κατέηκαφα

358000,

305

£39

4!5 κατασκειὼ

κατέσπειραν"

125

καταστιθήσεται

καταστάνοντες waragreiAm,

τὸ

κατασχεθήσομαι

κατασχεθήτωσαν

3L7( I0)

πῃ

{1}

κατέσχηκαν

τὸ B6

r1)

κατεαχήκασι

255,

623

401

big 3!

κατάσχῃς 575: —. μή 563 (6), 564, 566 waraoynre 363(6), waraırafor 7301)

575

448ι

46,

N )

κατηβαίν

272°

ῳ

439.

κελεύεις 210 κέλευεν 665, 698( 2) κελεύομαι 04 ra

κελευσθέντα,

κελεύω 468

[ral

288,

586,

κερδαίνω

218

Kepparew

59

κερμηατίζῳ

κατηνέγκατε

κερματοῦμαι

12)

κελευ| Bu

20€

30

AU

κατήντλουσαν

481?

xerefiwonr 243 κεχείρικα 4360

κατηντλοῦπαν

aßı

Keytipoypagdnaa

179

BRG(

τὰ

σϑέϊν) τα,

κατήλθημεν 205 κατηνάλωσεν 267( 1) 31700)

κέ A| eve

κέλευαe] 236 «eAevatias 022

448: 2)

κατέφδακα

D)

756

κελευόμενα,

κατέσχον 202 waredayar 3217, 21)

7; BR, 4)

540{ 7)

καταστυχήισημει

408

κατέσχηκα 439

πρὸς

x| aral ol 7| ἣσ αι

43504),

κατέσασχαμεν

415

[20

καταπστεῖσαι͵ πρὸς

καταστήσω

xareotuxe

1)

444

boB( 2);

κελεύειν

κατέσπηρκα

421(

hos, 698 2)

442

«araoxeoacgl 8| yal ο[ ἐπὶ αὶ

35809)

κέλευε

462

Q1Q

κεκυρίευκαν

κατασεπημημμένα 453( 4) κατασκευᾶι 35Bi 9)

6)

424,

«κέγκτηται

QOO

2538| 7]

65 65

325

792(

κέκτημαι

326

κατεργασαμενῶς

3577

462

42101)

17 (14]

κατέλαβαν xareAnßor

684(9)

κεκελευσμένα͵

[|

425

κατέλαβα

200

κατάξω 393 καταπεπλεύκασι

κατήχευοεν

Cxe>wxacrwrny| μ] evo

430(

καταξιῶ 554(3), 797 558, 829

272°

xateyyva, μή 6009 κατεγγύηκα 430 κατεγγύηκας

731

xarafvourci

| «]a-

357(6) κατέβα

xarafıwoare

140(2)

ρίαί a)

καταχωριῶ,

604( 2)

«arafiwoor «Gov

καταί

701

καταξιῶσαι

FORMS

καταφερέτωσαν 668 καταχωριεῖ 357(6); ταχωρζιγεῖ 357(6)

717

καταξιόω

VERT

κατατιθο(οὔῦντες)

κατανοῶ 894

sarafiooo»

OF

(1

12!

INDEX

κεχερσευμένης

κεχερσωμένη

δι( 11)

κέχρηκας

B7, 88.

κινδυνεύειν Βη8

κουβαλέω

Q10(2)

κλαύσομαι 307(3) κλαυσοῦμαι 967(3)

sAatow

367{ 4)

κλεῖσαι

790( 2!

κρίνω

03

313(1)

xoßaAl evorrar) κοβαλεῦσαι

65!

κοίτομαι

133°

eo

pe

κωκύω 54

κομιεῖται

357(2

),

307

KOptulmer

357( 2)

κὠμέσασθαι

786: ἢ}:

- , fay

835

κωμίπε arb Bu, 357121 | κυμισθὴνπι ἧς πρὸς | τὰ

C1)

917(3) Boi 10}

λέγον

"opidi 45702) 70%

756,

284;

-,

bog

(==-wr)

903

870653), 696 39, 228

8741 2)

λέγω 142, 584, 504, 794. Adeper

7855):

τῷ Hah:

-,

vod

797, 803, 896 λέγων Bgb λεηλατήθησαν λεικμῆσαι,

236

μετὰ

τό 850(2)

λείπει 228 λείπω

αι

λάβῃς

388

λαβὴ! «o | cas

104,

Aew@dvera

306

ob

12),

744°

λελητόμητια

λέλεκται 306

480

12 *,

744

λελίκμηκηα

13)

8774 4)

λελατομεύκαμεν

308

λαβὴν}

τῷ

2173

λέγοντες λέγουσαι λέγουσιν

825

λάβη

τό Bro!

λέγοιτο

Außer 747 λαβέτω O04 861

λέγει, λέγειν

8381)

73514), dpa

58

764

λέγεις

6646) —,

λαλοῦντες ΟΤ0ι4) λαμβάνει 185 λαμβάνειν 700(4}: —, dm 854: —, πρὸς τῶι 861, 4) λαμβάνεις 215, 217 λαμβάνω 75, 185, 218, 306

λέγε

"07

λαβεῖν

λαβών 900, 914 ἀαγχάνῳ 75 λαθεῖν, πρὸς τὸ μή 861( 2) λαληϑῆναι 786(3) λαλῆσεν 750

λατομεύω 58 λαχαίνω 75

λάβαι 731, 1554}

κόμισαι OYE 1) κιοϊμισάμενος 877, 1 |

μισὴ

Bugo

λαβαίνω 75 λάβε Ghy, 6654,46);

35712)

οὐ μή 570

(10)

192

| κοϊμιυύμεθα

650

λανθάνω Bga λαοτομέω (=Aar-) λαοτόμουν 58

“οὔ

κωλύω Boo, κωμαρχήσας

κομίζω 357( 2) «vpits 357(2), 395

ToU

Boe

κιαλυθήσεται 395 “wAuurtes 821 κωλύσει 400

357(2), 395

t

wo etter

57

( — «σαι) 34,

778,

κυρωθῆναι, περὶ τοῦ ὅπηι i)

κοιλυποιούμενοι κοινῶσαι

76-,

κυριεύσυνσαι

x«oBaAevw 65! κοινῆσε

64

64

κυμζιγεύουσαν κυριεύσε: 384

65!

846

λαβῶ γμ'

κτῶμαι 424 κύπτω 367!

76, 761

κναφήτω

λάβω,

κρύβω 29 xracdaı 316(6)

( = κλαίων)

“Aw

76,

τῷ

612, 914

λαβόντα

κριθέν 792(6) κριθῆναι 820

| xA[emévra B70 κλεπέντων B70

ἅμα

λάβοιεν

κοσκινεύω 65 κοσκινέζω 63 κράζω 306 ( 11),803 «pater, πρὸς ro 861;2)

367173)

744!

Aafis 543

65!

κουρατυρεύω

κίχρημι 150 κλαιήσω

λαβήοω

Aaßiv,

κουρατορεύεσθαι 150 150

κλέων

δι

65!

κουβαλῶ

κῖται 38 κιχρᾷς κιχράω

ws

κόπτοντες 879(4) κορέννυμι 30

κινδυνευόντων 004 κινδυνεῦσαι 854 κινδυνεύσαντος

Fok

κοπῆναι 310 κοπροποιέω 57 κόπτειν 818

445(1)

κεχωρισμένον

VERE

κομφιμματεύω «ones 310

61( 11)

κεχορηγηθέντα

oF

58 38

$54(10) 130

INDEX

λελικμήκαμεν 46, 468, 472

λυποῦμαι

Addoyxa 430(3), 436(2),

λύσαιτε

Acdoyxvins 430(3) λέλονχα 430(3) λέλονχαν 44B( 1) λελόνχασι 430( 3), 448( 1) AdAovyer 430(3) λελονχέναι 430( 3) λέλωνχα 430(3) 70

λεχθέντα, rd 889(8) λήγω Sgt λήμψεται 384 λήμψομαι 218,

399,

(1) λημψομένων

ληρήσῃς,

406

870

λήμψονται

396

μή 563(7)

ληφθέντας 870 λήψασθαι 306( 12) λήψεται 411 λήψομαι

YERH

200, 892

μί

μάθε 755(7), μαϑεῖν 755(7)

755(7)*

164

μελετουμένην

367!

μελησάτω

μαθών 417(15) μαινομένου gob μακροβολέω 51% paxpoynpaw 51

791 (3); velAn]oarw 702 [ μέλλει] 791(3)

λύεται

μεμετρήκαμεν

472

paxpoxpovew 51", 59

«μερμέτρηκας

421( 1)

μακροχρονιεῖν

51S,

μακροχρονίζω

519, 59

μεμέτρημαι 452( 11)

59

51%

[ne] pérenue 452(11)

698

699

μεμετρήμεθα 452( 11) μεμέτ[ρ] nvra«

452( 11)

μεμετρήσθημεν 452( 11)

511

μεμηνυκώς 455

714

μεμίσθωκα 430; «ue» μίσθω-

μανθάνω 75, 202, 794, 801,

κα 421(1) μεμισθώκαμεν

μεμίσθωμαι

186

44

458

μαρτυμήσει 395

μέμνημαι 458

μαρτυρήσουσι 413(1), 543

μεμφθῆναι,

μαρτυροῖ

μένειν η80; πρὸς τῷ 861(5)

620,

paprvpoueÜa μαρτυροῦμεν μή

770

361

μεμελήῆήκι 233 μεμενήκεισαν 234

894

—,

717,

609

μεμετρη )452(11) (με)μέτρηκα 438

μαρτυρεῖ

λυμένος 417 λύπει 759; —, μηδενεί 699 λυπεῖσθε 677; —, μή 699, 7115. λυπηθείης 643 λυπίσθω 673, 677:

μέλω

514

nardaverw 709(4),

218

703,

μακροτομέω 51° μακροφνέω 514 parpodwrew 514

μακρωγηραίη 51

τό Brot

702,

μέλλοντα 888 μέλλοντος Βη0(1) μέλλω 220, 248, 377,

51

λογοποιέω

λύειν,

μέλλοι

(2)

Acv[o]drwoav 687( 1), 702

52(2)

μάθοιμι 607, 650

μακροψυχέω

57?

70

835

μελέτω 791(3)

paxpoj[v]x[e]

λογοποιουμένου

166

μαθ[1]ν 755(7)

λογιεῖται 357(B)! λογίζεσθαι, ἐν τῷ 852 λογέσεται 357(8}1 57°

541(5)

paßnaw

μέλει

514

155(4),

an

μελαίνω

μακρολογέω

λιμπάνω

pv

pa bn’ 588 μαθήσι 401

51°

580

166

707

p( «)oy«

μακροκομέω

λικνέζω 52( 1)?

151

μείνῃ 554(1)

75

μακροκαταληκτέω

52( 1)*

ε)ιγνύω

μείνατε

μακρογηρῴη 51

52( I )

νά 800

μεγαλυνθῆναι 810 ul ε)ίγνυμι 166

τοῦ vd Bog

μαϑαίνω

791(6) τοῦ

peiyrvoßlaı)

λικμάω §2(1) λικμήσω 21}

λιμνάζω

μάχεται,

μαζάω 51 μαζῶν 51i

μαϑαίνῃ,

746

μάχαισθαι

μακροθυμέω

486

λικνιζουσῶν

μαστιγοῖν

756%

λήψω 3671 λικμίξω

FORMS

λύσει, τὸ Bıo* λυτρώσασθαι 791(3)

442°

Acuxaivw

OF

634

192 186

μαρτυρῶ

186,

μαρτυρῶι

186

εἰς τὸ 850(1)

μενεῖς 412 μένιν, χωρὶς

μενούσης

Bo3

τοῦ

864

907

μένω 218, 360

481 B. G. Mandilaras,

The

Verb in the Greek

Non-Literary

Papyri

31

INDEX

OF

VERB

μενῶ 218, 399, 401

μνημίσκομαι

μερίζω 357(3)

μνημισκομένην

με]ριμνήσεις 719 μεριοῦμεν 357(3) pepiow 357(3)

μνημόνενε

μεταβαίνομεν

μνήσθητι

perades

165

μπορῶ 247°

μεταδώσει

μωραίΐίπω

395

μεταλάβοις

608,

μεταλλαχέναι

veatvw

161

μεταμελή[ σ]ει 361 μεταμιοσθοῖν 746 μετανίγκαι

νέμω

740,

1 },

240.

755(2) μεταπεμψάμενης

Oil 78701)

396,

peremyéypadav μετέχειν,

τοῦ

ulernyayor

44801)

μηνύεσθαι μίγνυμι

612

810

piens,

ro 8103

μι]μνήσκεσθαι

μιμνήσκομαι

786(

μινήσκω 1658 uil σ᾽ γεσθα .1

ναμίσητε,

I 1 )

200

\o]lodas οἴσω

165

134,

438

219,

167%,

802

135 375

οἴχητο 25612) οἴχημαι BQ!

65

ὀκνήσηις, μή 563(7)

240°

ἀκνήσης 821; —,

μή 563(7)

ἀκνήσις 821: ὀκνήσῳ 217

μή 563(7)

—,

ὄκνι, μή 699 ὀλιγορέω 582

70 52

ὀὁλιγοψιχήσητε, μή 563(7) ὀλιγωρῇς, μή 567

51

166 οἶδα

802

57

οἴομας 167, οἶσθα 155

240!

fepabaiyw

792(3)

3671

οἰνοποίηκα

65

ὁδοποιέω

88δη(10)

οἰκοῦντα 917(3) οἶμαι 167, 1677, οἴμωξον anh 2} οἰνοποιεῖν

νοῶν 00% νωθραίνω 65 νωβθρεύεται 200

ξυλαμῆσαι

οἰκονομήσας

οἰμώξω

357(4)

357(4)

ξηραίνω

438

οἰκονομήσασθαι

μή 563(7)

ξυλαμάω

151

μισθοῖν 746 μνημίσκεσθαι

13)

802

ξεκινῶ

584, 594. Bo5

165

Asyl

25061 2)

748

οἰκονόμηκα

87ι τὰ

25612)

δόμησενῚ

οἰκονομέν

νωθρεύω

15I

μιμνήσκω

τοῦ

νωθρευσάμενον

TSI

μιγνύναι

μίσγω

201

50

οἰκοδομήθη 353 οἰκοδόμηκεν 257 ot«o(

νοσφίσομαι 4η7(4) νοσῶ 402 νουθετοῦν[ τ]α 884

8701}

μηνυτρίζοιντο

65

59

οἰκοδάμησα

νοοφίζω

[] )

(5: μάχομαι)

(= -vraı)

νηωσφειοῦμαι

μετῆλθαι 738, 7η5(4) μετήνεγκαν 317(9) μέτρησον 731 μετρήσω 303 μέχωμε

οἰκίξζω

29

νοσεῖ

81g 306

393

νομίσῃς, μή 563(7)

54 1(1)

59

| οὐ] «c£ovrasc

160

νομίζω

τό 814

μετενέγκεις

100,

νομιζόμενα,

“17| 14)

μετενέγ᾽ xai,

οἰκέω

νίπτω 29 νομίζαντα

μετεβεβλ[ 5] cane. 239

257

oibds (= -ws) 135°

300

νικᾶν,

μεταπορεύεσθαι μεταφέρεσθαι 792 μετέλαβα

οἴδηκεν

νενώθβραντε

vito

136

135, 445(2)

οἴδης 135, 44514)

533( 1)

71

veunow

45

oldes

70

νεμήσεται

916

135

οἴδειν

643

255

μεταμελεῖσθαι

albe

μυοθηρεύσει

894,

44B( 1)

oldare

396

μεταδίδωμι 797 μεταδῶναι 741

Bot,

135

oiBami(v) 135

165

μοιχεύσεις

303

504,

οἶδας 135, 445(2), 445 ( 4)

715 715

689( 1)

μνήσκω

μεταδιαιράσομεν

οἶδαν

697

μνημόνευσον

681

465,

oibauev

165

μνημονεύσατε

216

FORMS

57? 115,

ἁλιγωρήσατε,

306 (14),

“40(1}}, 458, 462, 463, 482

μή

ὄλλυμι 137 ὀλωλότα 435(6)

568(

t)

INDEX

ὀμνύει 30, 138{1) ὀμνύειν 30, 138%,

ὄντας

138(1)

OF

VERS

FORMS

παραβεβλήκησαν

884

ὄντος 886,

ὀμνύετε

138( 1)

ὄντων,

ὄμνυμει

139

omrin

516

907

ὄν

7] ὧν

(=

rapaßeivar

877(2)

ὀφθείη)

649( 11)

785(2)

785(2); —, ἅ-

παραβῆναι

ὄμνυμι 138, 139, 367! ὀμνύναι 130( 1), 1385, 139

ὅρα

ὀργίζομαι Bye

mapayyekals}

Ouvely} μεν

ὁρίσαι

παράγγειλε

130

Guvurtes 139 dul] ν] ύομεν 187 Oprucvat

Ourus

1381

ὁμολογεῖ

E ron

18H

γήσαμεν

253

ὀφείλομεν

25%

Opodoynae

384,

λί αγηΐπώ

303:

Ogn-

104

ὁμολογήπωμεν

“478

τοῦ

ὀφείλω

108,

ur

SU

ὀφθείην

85901)

3771

625;

ὀφθείη!νῈ}

ὕμη 11);

—,

ὀχλήσιεν

4357)

253

ὁμώμεκα 435:7) ὀμώμεχα 43507) Suwpoxa 304, 426, $350 7) ὁμωμόκαμεν ὁμωμόκεμεν

435(

7),

130

ὅμωσες 319

ὅν 879( 2) ονομάσθης 253 ὀνοματίσαμεν 253 óv ra’

ὥχλησον

022;

--,

πρὸ

015

731

ὄψωμαι

210, 374

πάθομεν

533(2)

488!

$88", 492 515 ὁμώμοχα 435(7)

örra,

andeis

879( 2)

488,

405,

477

796

(---γίνομαι) 436

I )

παραγενέσθαι 7Q1{6): [m]a-

587

τοῦ 831 1 y

πηαρηαγενηθῆναι,

μέχρι

τοῦ

250( 1)

εἰ

rapayerou

FOR,

napayerwpeda

παιδοποιέω 57° παιδο[ποιησάμην

ἐπὶ

τῶι

τὸ

8...

παρηγίνημαι

381,

παραδέδωκα

458

504

παραδέδωκαν

448( 1)

παρηαδείκνυμι

BOs

mapadexvuoua

ἢ

map| adelinviw

B3

παράδες 81 raplalöer 681 παραδιδοῦντος παράδοτε

02

δι:

—,

iva

57° παιριπατῶ (= πε-) 201 πανηγυρίζοντας 880 παραβαίη 619, 650 παραβαλεῖ 384

παραδώσει

παραδώσηται

540( 1)

παραβάλλειν

παραδώσομεν

385

παραβέβηκεν 488! 483

—,

853403)

παραδοῦναι

791(3)

t)

792(2);

un

παραγίνεται

730(

29h!

frapayired bat

ὅμοσα

ὁμόμακα

594,

παραγέγονεν

mapayerfölun® 250(1)

ὁμόμεκα 4357) ὁμομέκα[ μεν] 435(7) ὁμόνω 130!

11

586,

παραγεψήμεθα

ὀφθείης 625, 649t11) ὀφίλις 198 ἀφλόντι BBE ὀχετεύομεν 215 ὄχλει 554

B77(

σμώνω

τ,

640/11?

ὑμολογῶν

311

napayyéAAw

857

LBB

625,

mapayyeAßcis

mapayern

220,

épodoynta

Bos,

[{πα]ραγ᾽ γέλλε-

napayeveaßaı,

τοί 41

631

δι,

μηθέν

254

ὁμαολογηῖμεν

188,

792(7)

229;

ῥαγενέσθαι, μέχρι 700857;

οἱ φείλων} O14 ὀφελείπειεν η4(4}

ὁμηλογῶ

272°

mapayeiwya

ὑπὲρ

ὀφείλοντες

27%

ὁμολογήσω

253

od| ec'Àeur, Biyz

γ ὃ

255

mapayeivaone 216

Bia

odtider

ὅπως᾿

ὁμοληγηπαν

ABA

δλείλαν 253. 277

ὁμολόγησα 233 ὁὄμ[ολα]

τ'

B47

ται 792(7)

H57BL T)

Uta tj, 882

"Lael Dt

254

ὁμωλογῆππε,

288,

Bay, 016

805

Gpodnyeire

210(2),

205,

atea

τοῦ

"[a]p[a]yycA«ÀA» era.

253

ὁρῶντες

1875,

ven

FEAT)

ὁρῶ

1)

159

ὀμνύω

6Ho( 2}?

Öpnıner

Tt

Guvures

375,

250(3),

728

742

mapaduvar 741 wapadwoare 308 305

παραδώσω 219, 303, 305.

INDEX

OF

VERB

FORMS

412; παραϊ]δώσω 394 rapaówewev) 374

παραπολλύμεθα

137( t)

rapamcAAÀvuevos

παραθησόμεθα

137( 1)

παρεγγέλθην παρεγενάμην

παραπολλύμενος

137(1)

παρεγινόμεθα

παραινέσαι,

395

τὸ 812

παραιτοῦμαι

Tapanopeverba,

189

παρακαλέσαι 8:8(1), 825 παρακαλέω 586, 701 παρακ[ α]λήσω 300(2) παρακαλῶ 221(2), 478,

566, παρα[

595(1)*, 761, 798 κ]αταστήσουσι

406,

719 παρακέκληκα 430 παρακέκλημαι 439 παρακληθείς 566, 920

παρακληθὴ

557(2)

παρακομιῶὼ

357(2),

412

παρακούσει

367(1)*,

415

132

παρακῶντί ai) 132 παραλάβαμεν 250(1),

317

879(4)

rapaAa| γ]μένου 255 παραλήμφ{ενἼ ται 395

πα[ pj αλίμπαναι wal ρ]αλιμπάνιν παραλιμπάνον παραλιπεῖν,

164 164

(= «ων 164 τὸ μή 786( 3),

818(1) παραμελήσειεν 604, 622 παραμεμέτρημαι A52( 11) παραζμεΣ μετρήμεθα 421

(2)

παραμένοντα παραμένω

παρᾶνγιλεν mapafiou

παρασχεθῆναι,

Bog, gI5

891

684(3) 255

τοῦ

787(3)},

mapeöwaes

319

παρεθέτωσαν

239

650

[ 7] apecev

634 464

παρείληφαν

446,

παρείληφας

445( 1)

448(2)

παρειλήφασι παρείληφες

205, 410

παρείλκυκα παρεῖναι,

διὰ

445(2)

τὸ μή

παρειορυγήτωσαν 514

πηαρεκάλασα

300(2)

-rgewaAnga» 300(2)

παρέκειντο

514

παρέκειτο

514,

παρέλαβα

4ι7(14]

288 33,

παρελάβαμεν͵

702

[wer]

520 παρεῖ λαΪ]| παρ] ελάβα-

41:714)]

παράσχῃ 557

παρέλαβαν,

παρασχήσεις 369! rap|aoy|noceodaı 363!

317( t4) παρεμβαὰ] als 411

παρασχῖναι

παρενέγκαι

684(2)

rapernroya

442

744!

παράσχοιεν 612 παράσχου 5541),

730( 1)

παράσχω 363, 541(5) παρατε[τευϊχέναι

παρατετευχότα παρατιθεῖ maparıdeis

παρατίθημι

435(8)

140(1)

ποδί 10) 363,

395,

403,

rane£erar

363,

411

παρέξομαι

363,

396

140(4?

παρέξου]

687

σι)

363

πα] pel£ovaır

363,

παρέξω

393

363,

396

ralple£of ow}

353!

rapemyeypada

442

παρέσασθαι

484

677

810

παρ] εξ μεθα 363, 393

140( 3!

(3)

παρέξας παρέξει

140(2)

παραφέρω 219 παραφίων 125 παραφυλάξομεν 393 παραχειρογραφησάντων

παρενοχλείζσγ θὼ

παρέξασθι αι) 754(2)

140(2)

παρατίθομαι

| ra] péAafar

παρενοχλῆσαι

435(8)

849( 3)

68q(3)

παρεκάθητο

Bal pele, 664( 7),

448( 1)

871}.

813

παρατιθόμενος 411

rapa-

πα ρα] σφραγιζέσθωσαν 396 710

παράσχες

307

παρείληφα

Tapaoryxaper 435(4) παραστῆσαι 540( 5) παραστήσω 403, 412; [maρ]αστήσω 540(3)

παρασχεῖν

(14)

παραμενεῖ

παρασκεύασον 704 παρασκευάσωμεν 374 616:

239

παρέδωκαν

"apei[xe]v. 435(3)

818

παράλαβε 664(6) παραλαβωμεν 569 παραλαβών

557

ei 649(5)

παρακολουθ Holy 408

παρακωντί ac}

250( 1)

616, 649(5); raplagrain} 649(5); --,

558

a

παρασκευάσῃ

296

παρεδεδώκαμεν

παρείδοιεν

οταίv]

παρακολουθείτωσαν 396; παρακολουθείτωϊ σαν] 719

παρακομιεῖ

820 παρασκευάσατε

παρασταίη

558

παρακληθῆτε

ev τῶι 852 Tapacneiv (= σχεῖν) 758 παρασκευάξω 796 παρασκευάσαι, τοῦ 787( 4),

311 318(1)

754(2)

408

INDEX παρέσομαι

OF

παρεστάκαμεν 435(4) mapearexores 271 παρέστηκαν 448( 1)

παύσεται 217,

παρέστηκας 435(4) va[p]éarn«ev 435( 4)

(1)',

368(2), 413 na] vcerat

543;

παύσομαι

waperodpe ( — παραιτοῦμαι)

παύσω

189

raum

368(2)

τό B61(2)

πειθαρχήσιαν

623,

radapxovcva

242

πείθομαι

πείθω

580

πί αρή]γ[ γ] ἰλα 343

πέμ"[é]u$ns 554(2); jns, μηδέν 568(3) πέμψι 752

650

396

πέμψον

758

πέμψουσι

413(2)

πέμψουσιν

215,

401

πέμψω 219, 392, 478

Bgo

202,

πέμψις

πέμψομαι 533(2)

368(2)

368(2)

πέ 664

παρέχει 821 παρέχειν, πρὸς παρεχέτω 758

πέμψεν 684(3), 750 πέμψῃ 557, 558

πέμψιν 754( 1)

368( 2), 386

πάρεστιν 785(4)

παρέχω

FORMS

παυσαίμην, dv 640 παύσασθαι, pera ro 856(2) παύσει 368(2)

386

παρεχόμην

VERB

πέμψωι 397

802

πεν θῶςν»

203

903

παρήγγειλε 272°

[π|εῖν, π]ρός B6: πείνω, οὐ μή 570

πεπαιδευμένος 454 πεπαιδοποιῆσθαι 57°

napnyye(Adaı) 792(7)

πειραϑείη

παρηκολουθήκη

παρηκολούθησεν 342 παρῆλθαν 317(6)

meipadeis 370(4) πειραθήσονται 403 πειράθητι 689( 1)

πέπαυτο 235 πέπεικα 434

παρῆλκεν

πειράομαι

487

265(2)

παρήλκυκα

650

366(

πεπείραμαι

4)

425 265( 2)

πειρᾶται

παρήμην 109 παρήνεγκα 317(9)

πειρῶ

675

πέμπειν,

παρῆς

πέμπεις (==-9s) 565

πέμπε

πέμπιν

παρῆσχα(ν) 317(19) παρῆσχε

παρητημένον 895

παριστῷ παρὸν,

1264

790(3);

—,

)

ὅπως

217},

344,

maplö]»ros 907; [παρ]όντίος) 886; παρόντας,

88ο(14) παρόντι, τῷ 880(14) πατρωνεύΪ εσθαι] 64

πατρωνεύω 64 παύομαι 358( 2), 891

τοῦ

396,

τὸ

(3) πεποζήγκαμεν 46, 468 πεποίηκα 464( 1) πεποιήκασιν 448(2) 235

πεποιήκεισαν πεποίηκες

234,

401

765

719,

920

πεμφθήτωσαν

πεποίηται

πέμψαι 684(2), —,

ἵνα 775;

—,

ὑπὲρ

731, 765; —,

τοῦ

ro 814; B62

QOO

πέμῴς 719, 731 πέμψεις, mé[n] eis

485

396

421( [)

472

ale] ποιεημένου

πέμσομεν 533(2) 689(3)

445{2)

WOK WS

πεποΐημαι πεποίησθαι

πέμψασα

234

πεπλάνηκαν 44B( 1) πεπλήρωκα 468 πεπλήρωμαι 462

me»

896

πέμσις

88q( 14)

44B( 1)

πεποιζη) κέναι 703

πέμσαι 684(2),

128

πέπεμφαν

πεποιήκει

πέμπων

1284 TO

728

478, 581, 594, 916

125

παριστούντω[

«iva

τὸ B13

πέμπω 216, 406(1),

παρησχόμην 265(6) παριστάνω

—,

776

265(6)

wapıerras

589;

462

πεπλήρωσα 423 πεπληρῶσθαι, διὰ

771

παρήνεγκαν 317(9) παρηνώχληκα 439 παρηνωχλήκαμεν 430(2) 110

404

229

πειρῶμαι 221(5), πεῖσαι 832

402

πέπεισμαι

πεπιστεύκεισαν

πειράσεις 370(4) πειράσομαι 3669),

439

παρήλκυκεμ παρήλκυσαν

625,

920

453( 1)

326

πέποιθα 434, πεπολυώρηκα

πέπομφα 476 πεπόμῴειν

233

πεπόμφην

485

memornen

438

462 438

049

INDEX

πεπόνημαι

438

451,

πέπρακε

VEHB

wedpovrixa

πέπονθα 40, 458, πεπότικα 438 πεπραγμένον͵ τό πέπρακα

OF

464(1)

88g( 16) 458,

336,

474

336°

ἰ σ᾽] ασθ΄αι, ἐπὶ τῷ 854(1) ἔσται

B35,

ro

πιεῖν

790(

2),

πιμπλάω

152

ποιῆσεν

πίμπλημι

152

ποιήσεις

πέπρακον

45:1

viv,

πεπτωκέναι,

ἕνεκα

1[ο] ὑ

μή 853 πεπύηκεν

468

eis 850

485

342 περιεβέβλητο

76?

B89( 15)

πιστεύοντες

πιστεύω

nern

(= περιῆν)

περιίδηις,

Lit

μή 504

περίμειν[ον7]ε

684 (1 )

περιουδεύομεν περιπάτει

περιποιῆσαι

389

πληρώσῃς

O69

πληρώσωσιν ποήσῳ ποιεῖ

ποιεῖν

πεσέοσμαι

mevoaga

375

πευσάμεθα

386

nedeluyaoır]

πεφοίτηκα πεφορτομένα πεφορτώκει

216,

639;

228,

—,

82]

καλωώς

61(

ra)

eis

ro

850(1)

B48

O22; --

ποιήσασθαι

πᾶν

554(

T017-

3)

18.

413(2); 409

ποιησ(α)] τω ποιήσω

ποιή-

685(2)

393,

εὖ

roi

394,

413;

ἡσ] ὧὐ 410

ποιήσωσιν 374 ποιῆτε 560 ποιοῖς

—,

εὖ

(καλῶς)

ἄν aν

(οὖν) 639

235

2 ):

$35(

408,

πο[ιἸήσω 392; medo] 412; "eoo 394

τοῦ

ποιήσαις

Di( 10)

πεφορτωμένων

—,

914 ποιεῖς 217

ἀντὶ

444

404,

392,

ποιήσονται

ποιῆσαι, τοῦ 845; roinolalı,

438

vo|:] n00-

401

πηιήσαυσι [o]ovo«

704(2);

ποι ἢ-

ποίησον 704; roca?ov 764;

304 196,

410,

394,

ποιήσομεν

474

ποιεῖσθαι, ποιέω 57

300( 15)

384,

oouelr]| 303

392

ποήσωι

5090

664

649(9)

413022,

ποεῖν TAC) γ85(4}

περισυνκεχωρημένον 454 περιτέμνεσθαι 7906) "wes

3773

TOLLE

μεθα

τοῦ 857

—,

216

[o] nac 384

746

85.

περισαεύῃ

ποιήσις

ποιησόμεθα

236

852

6499)

TOL

310

πλήρωσεν

ἐν τῷ 455

64919)

622,

πληγέντες

196

περισπᾶσθαι, περισπασμένος

G22,

ποιήσιεν

ποιήσομαι

τοῦ

καλῶς

5542};

ποιήσιας

ποιήσιται

πληρωθῆναι, μέχρι πληρώννῳ 60

306(3)

τῶι

357(4)

περισκεπασμένων περισπάσει

προς

1096

707

περιπατοῦμεν

802

πλευσούμαι 357(4) πλεύσω 357( 4) πληροῖν

—,

53408)

62,

πλεύσομαι

373;

ποιήσῃς 217, μή 563(2)

QUA

58,

410

Inlons

mioreve 729 πιστεύσεις 543

περιερχομένου

810

478

ποιήσῃ 557, 561, 565 ποιήσης 373, 373(1); ποι-

355

περιεβλήμην 494, 513 τοῦ

εὖ (xa-

καλῶς

ποιήσεται

4);

περιέσεσθαι,

—,

216

πλεῖν 787( 861(4)

910(4)

396;

πινῶν

Qo

520

750!

216

πλανόμέενοι

513,

750,

Aws) 639; —, ποιήσειτε 373

πιπράσκοντα

περεισσευύσῃ 500 περιεβεβλήμην +94, 513, 920, περί e] βεβλήμην

εἰ 649

πίνων πίομαι

πεπυρέχειν 233, merwaetın 235

—,

ποίησεν 750?

856

751

36,

845

622;

(9)

S104

4517,

Tiva

τοῦ

ποιήσειεν

πέπρακεν

448( 2)

70%

ποιῆος,

5367!

mei,

ποιήσατε

πεπράκεν

πεπράχασιν

468

465

πεφροντισμένον, πεφύτευται 465

πηδάῳ

FORMS

620;

186

ποιή-

καλῶς

639 ποιοῦ

677

ποιοῦμε 792{ 1);

—,

ποιοῦνται

( — -μαι) 879( 4)

223

dv

npo(ye]

ποίσει 810 ποίσης 373 ποίσης 217

ποιῶ 223, 580, 594, 796; —, φανερὸν 919 ποιωμένη 53, 873 πομπεύσει 396

πορεύομαι 594, 779 πορίσαι, ἕως τοῦ 855

μοῦσαν 281 προειδώς 004

ποτιεῖ

215

ποτίζομεν πραιδεύω

64

τον

78661);

762,

τοῦ 864 χωρὶς πράξει, τοῦ ὅ τὸ

πράξης 5751 7. BY 50313) 40]

πράσσειν,

πρὸς

453

43264 ;

πρωέξατηκεν

!

πράσ-

07903);

[v]ovca πράττοντα

προέφην

91702)

πρηηνέγκεσθαι

πραχθέντα.

πραχθέντων, τὸ πρέπον,

8lky 16)

τὰ

τῶν

Ütky 16)

πρέποντα, τα 88a 17} πρεσβεύσας 55 πρεσβεύσω 65, 218, 399 πρεσβευτεύω 65 πρεσβεύω 65 πριάμενον go2( 2) πριάμενος, ὁ 88ι 18) προάγομαι 771

ἂν 646

τι

προαναλλελεγμέναι

418

784(4) προβῆναι μέν α BB89( προγεγραμ

mpoyeypappévas

423

32

4.4Ul

προκειται

4560,

3704,

[ )!,

mpoxernpuxa 442 προκηρυχθεισ ὧν god 418 410

πρωολήμψεται

προλιπῖν

78512) 562

npovnenwat

περὶ

τοῦ

859

(1):--, χάριν τοῦ μή BH

προνοῆσαι

833 803

δ8.ι.2]

487

830

52(2)

[τ͵]οῦ

πρυσειπεῖν

307 755

(1);

τοῦ

025

4562

πρυλέλεκται

797

rpo|uleönnav

1242

προΐοωνται

442

851

672

προιομένηυ

προνοηθῆναι,

4)

i )

πρυήχβην 348 προθυμέυμαι

agi 171

προάγοιτο bog,

4512.

πρωπημέμεθ[α!]

πμοσαιενήνοχα

npoobduK nods 84(3) πρωσδουκοῦμεν 32( 2) προσδυκοῦσιν 32(2] προσδοκῶ By1 προσ] εἰδρευκέναι, ἐκ

438 προήρημαι

tO

755(2)

πρυασδοκεῖν

272

4532} Ἱ

προύρεσαι

76

πρωσανενεγκεῖν

προσδεχυμ[εἾἶθα 225 698(2), προσδοκα

01 2( 09!

gary

176

504

προσαναφέρω

προσδέχομαι

143

mpunreykar

786( 10)

πρυσδευμένηυ

525

πμυεστήξυμαι

προσαιδρεύειν

πρασαπογμάφομαι 177 πρυσαύξειν 157 προσγενέσθωσαν 672

320

45504

j88( 2)

προσαξιώ

277

προέστί ἡκαὶ

358( 1)

πρηπαγοβεῦσαι πρυσαναφέρομεν

προεφημέν 1453

mpaagoudu

πράττων

86:

ra[.]

(4)

πράττω

(2)

προείπαμε[υ])

πρυενήνεκτο

πράξῃ 557 πράξυνται

[πρ]οσαγήγοχας 436(1) προσαγηγόχει 487, 492, 517

προσαγο[ ρ] άσω

προειρημένον 886 προείρησθαι +52 1 ). [1 πρηείρηται 452( 10) mpaelyav

442

προσαγήγοχα

318(2)

31703)

64

πραιτευομένους πραιτεύω D4

πρᾶξαι

προσαγορεῦσε, τοῦ 818( 1) προσαγγέλλω 804

προσαγήοχα 412 προσαγηυχέναι, μετὰ τὸ 856

προείπαμεν,

64

πραιδεύονσι

306( 1)

προσαγαγόντων

προειληῴασιν 448( 2) προεῖμεν 216

405

bog

604,

mpocayayoı

mpoty| a-

Tpcteyapotcar,

574

mpanéons 587(1)

προγράφεται 218 mpoönkountras 4212) προδεδήλουται 452(5) Γπροδ]εδήηπροδεδήλωται, λωται 452(5}

300( 3}!

πον ὦ (-dw)

προορῶμαι

423

κιμένας

πρὸ διείλασ᾽be 272, πρυεγάμησαν 2814

300( 3)

πονέσαι

FORMS

VERD

OF

INDEX

προσεκέκλητο 515 προσεκύνησα 338 προσεληλυθέναι 763 mpooeAdiv B21 προσενεχθέντι 884 προσενεχθήσεται 415 προσερχὶ on] ἐνὼν 9go8 προσέ( a} xew, προσεσχειν,

προσ! εἸσχεῖν 730

INDEX προσετάχθημεν

312

προστέθεικα

προσετίθεντο 140(3) προσετέθοντο 140(3) Empoo]epuyaner 317(22) προσέχω

574,

766

(1) 439

προ] σήγαγες 306(1) προσήλθαμεν 4τ7(6) προσὴν {τι προσῇ) 538

303

T DOOT..€V.,

58

προσκαταβαλεῖ 401 προσκεκύνηκα 439 προσκυνῆσαι GIG:

τῷ 854(4):

τοῦ 822

προσμεταδηῖ

t)

4730

προσοφίλεκεν

306( 15),

462,

702

408

προστάξιεν 650, mpogragaw 796 mpoorarei 50;

622 mp|o]ara-

196

BBB

σκεψάμενος

8784]

σκέψη

π[ωλ]Τεῖν,

τοῦ

764

218

προστατεύω

58 58

56

προστατῆσαι 58, 784(3) προστατήσϊ εἰν] 38 προστατῶν 58, 914 mpolo]rexy@nserar 403 προστέταχα προστετάχασι

442 440(2)

r68?

920

axyvaw

61(8)

σκηνέω

61(8) QI4

σκαπεύω

155(5),

pedelvralv 294(5)

σκορπίξω

30

σκητώσει͵

τοῦ

poyetoa 54 poyeuw 54

σκυλῆναι

313(2)

σκύλης

413(2)

313(25

σκύλλητι x

[54 154

craw 773

310

(2)

σεσηί μείωμαι)

452( 13)

(= σχῶσινῚ

596

445

4)

306(3)

σπείρειν,

τοῦ

un

σπερμένα

105,

870

B21

701, 771, 81g, 824

σπεύσαντες

σεούλληχα 410(4)} σημαίνω 304. 584

488

366(

σπεύδω

σειτουμένων 5B σεσήμαγκα 438

(=--es)

μή

313(2)

UTLEY

σπάσω

σεσήμανκαις

=,

563(7)

βώννυμαι

gan?

BIO

[σ᾽] κύληθι 313(2)

ῥύσω 370(3)

σαλεύεσθαι

168

582

ῥήγνυμι 30, 153 ῥήσσω 30, 153

ῥύσει 370(3),

τ68

σκηνοῦντι 61/8) axnvow 61(8)

56

προστατεῦσαι

155(5), 358(9) 358(9)

σκηνοῦνται

pwr var

προστατεύειν

δι(8)

σκευάζω σκενάσω

210(3)

30

σκέπτομαι

σκοπέω

προσπεσεῖν 701(4) προστάξαι 706

προστατέω

σκενοῖ

288,

B18;

πωλοῦμαι

(8)

ret

210

425

προσπέπτωκεν

προστάξει

203,

πώλησον 730(1), πωλήσουσι 306

253

προσοφείληκα

75,

823

προσμεταδοῖμεν 535(1) προσόρμισαν

[σ᾽ καφῆναι 791(5) σκεδάννυμι

22%

πωλεῖν

580

225

πυνθανομένοις rum

535(

367!

σιδερῶσαι 765 σιτευΐ Js 58

(—-rai)

πυνθανόμενος

προακυνὼ 224 πραοσμαρτυρῶ 803

σημήνας 879( 3)

211

T€

πυνθανόμεθα

ἐπὶ

554(1)

σκάπτω

(3), 221, Bat —,

710

σημειωσάτω σιγάω

306( 15)

πυνθάνομαι 105

850(1)

πυθέσθαι

πυνθάνεται

προσκαρτεροῦμεν

τὸ

σιτεύω 58 σιτέω 58 σιωπάω 367!

nuvéave

128

σήμανον

eis

προσωικοδόμηκα 439 προσωικοδομήκασι 448(2) προσωφείληκα 410 [ πρ]οτετεκνωκζώΣ)ς 455 TpoUmapye 8η0

προσῆφα προσιατῶν

σημᾶναι, iva 775 annalr]are, iva 728

προσφερομένην 882 προσφων[ή]σατε 250(1)

προσ ἤνεγκα 317(9) προσηνέχθη 343 442

FORMS

458

προστείσω

προστῆναι,

582

προσεπιπαρακαλέσωι προσέξοχηκα

OF VERB

B25

σπουδαξε

698(2)

σπουδάζω

367’,

582,

594,

77! σπουδασεις

367(5)

σπουδασέτωσαν

687(2)

INDEX σπούδασον

715.

704,

(2)

730

OF

VERE

συγχωρηθῆναι,

190

συγχωροῦμεν

συγχωρῶ 803

στάνω

συλλέγω

100,

825

191}

Bon,

573 —,

ec (av)

649(6) 791(4)

συμβάλεσθε

592

συμβάντα,

ra

889( 20)

συμβῇ 791(4)

215

στέκομαι 130! στέκω 130! στέλλω 3060, 770 στένω 1307 στέρεσθαι 169 orepew 781), 169

συμμεῖξαι

στερῆσαι

συμπαβηθῆ,

συμβιούτωσαν

στερίζογκεσθαι

7H 1)

59

συνεγέγραπτο

496

συνε]γενάμην

318B( 1)

συνέθεντο

39

ouvedos, συνειδότι

τὸ Bäg( 22) 889( 22)

συνειδότος

88o( 22)

συνείληφας

445( 1)

συνείστα συνειατὰ

755(2)

128 128

συνειστῆκι

59

συμβροχίζω 59

300( 4)

59

59

συμβροχηθείσας

169,

335!

συνεισενεγκεῖν

678

συμβροχει[θεῖσαν]

avußpoxew

[σ] υνέβη

συνεβροχίσθη

619;

συμβαίνει

306( 1)

συνέβη 335%; 791(4) συνέβηκε

συμβαίη

131

συνδιήγαγεν

συνδιίρημε 452( 1)

580

συλλέξωμεν

στατιωνίξοντος στεγάζεται

μή

τοῦ 829

σπουδάσω 357(5)

στατίξζοντα 131 στατίζοντι 131 στατίζοντο 1531 ararilorros 131 στατίζω 131

τοῦ

συγχωρῆσαι

σταλήσεται 395 στάνομαι 129 129

FORMS

487

συνεκομίζαμεν

συελέγαμεν

792( 10)

τοῦ

συμπαρ(ιεγειμι

810

279

279

759,

ouveA@eiv

787γ{τπ):

|aure]Adeiv 792( 7) συνεπιβαλόμενος B27

104

crepionw

70( 1)

συμπάριμαι

oTépopar

169

συμπεσόντος GIO(4) συμ( re} φωνηθεῖσα[ν] 423

συνεπιτελέσω

συμφέρει 7915) συμφεροποιησαμένου

auveoraxaper 435(4) συνέστακας 435( 4)

στέρωνται

169

στεφανηφοροῦντας

B80

ατῇ 536 στήγων

( --στήκωνὶ

οτήκω

130,

στήνω

1402

130

1307

συμφωνῶ

104

τῶι,

συναγαγεῖν συνάγειν

στηρίσω 357(9) στῆς 546

57

435(4)

442

στῆσαι 540(3) στήσαντος

συναίνησεν

στήσω 540(3) 212

orparevaduevos στρατηγήσας,

συνανελβῆναι

079(4) ὁ 889( 19)

στρατηγήσαντος,

τοῦ

889( 19) στῶ

536 πρὸς

861(4) cvy

συνήνηαεν 300( 1) συνῆρμαι 452(2)

τῶι

συνηρπάκει

803

517

συναύξειν 157 συναφέσταλκα 439

συνῆρσμαι 452(2), 453(4)

σ[υ]Ἱναχϑέντων 877(2) σνναχθήσεσθαι, ἐκ τοῦ

συνήταξας 270 συνθεῖναι B19:

τά

συνῆρσθαι

880

851 (20)

συνβῆι 791(4) συνδιακομιοῦσιν

γίνωθι δοοί 2)

συγγράφω

758

744!

συνβεβηκότα,

συγκλείεσθαι,

συνηγηθῆναι, ἐπὶ τῷ 854( 2)

543

συνάξαι 755(8), συνάξεις 408

521

συνευδοκῶ 104 συνζεύχθημεν 250( 1) συνήλαβεν 270 αυνήμην 109

1}

| συϊναλλαξουσιν

στοχασάμενος B7g( 1) orparevédvra 886 orparevarraı

300(

avreornale]lr

συνετετέλεσ zo] 496,

707( 7)

συναγήγοχας 436{ 1) 'avv'ayopalew, παρὰ τὸ 858

540(3)

συν εργώμεθα 358(7) συνέστηκεν,

τοι;

70I( E)

συναγήγοχα

366(2)

409 συνδιείρημαι

452(1)

489

357(2),

452( 2)

ἢ Bbo(ı) [a] υνϑήσομεν συνιεῖς

—,

393

[28

συνιέντα 125 συνιστανόμενος

127

πρὸ

τοῦ

INDEX

συνίστημι oumora

OF

VERB

563( 7), 565

504

συνχωροῦσιν

1208

126

συνχωρὼ

συνιητῶν

126

ovrwrnoaoda:

122

συνκαταστήσατε συνκεχώρηται συνκομίσω

715 702(0)

συνλαβών

686

συνλαλήσω

412(1)

cvvÀauBavovrwr

συσταίνω

τελέσομεν

axoins

007

συνλέξατε

exe 375

435( 7)

cywped

συνομόμεχα 435(7) συνομώμεκα ouropw

autera

σωθῆναι,

1)

σώιϊιξω

3560!

συνπομπευέτω

σώσω

35h!

396

συνπρακτωρεύσι

gui

«τεθῆναι,

συντίσσω

814

rafovraı

790

συνταχθέντα,

ra B89(21)

συντελεῖσθαι,

τοῦ

συντελεσθήσονται

un

8.21

3Bb,

συντελέσω 3061 2) συντελουμένους, τούς

415

877(1)

τάσπω 796 τεδύνηται ( — δε-) τεθέατο 235

Τετιμάκει 45217)

458 464

419,

41gl,

234

συντυγχάνω

Gewpyol θαι]

581

συνφέρι 791(5)

συνφωνῖ IQ1 συνχορησάτωι δθηί 1),

705,

τεθλιμμένοι

—.

nm"

ἐπὶ

τῷ

μή

440

Terpudnpdvou

τεύξεται 451

421(1)

509

τέβνηκα 462 τέθυκα 420, 440, 440!

490

τετίμηκα 468 τετόλμηκεν 473 rerpodeuxay 5B rerpodevkév[( αι] 58 434,

58

435(8);

τε-

"| v|xnxa 435(8)

509

ἤμεθα

43518) 4511 p

τετύχηκα

reGnxonoynperwr 57 τεθηκοποιημένοί[v) 57 τέθιμαι 466 τέθλιμμαι

190

$521 14)

854(3)

419,

557.

37

206

τετευχέναι,

τεθεμελίωτο

συνχωρήσῃ

45313)

τετεκνωμένης

500}

rerevxa 434

τεθελήκουσι

821

τετάχαται

τετελευτηκώς

συντιϑοῦν res]. 14012)

ουϊν]χωρεῖν

ἦσαν

τετέλεσται

τεθέληκας 445( 1) τεθελήκασι 419 τεθεληκέναι 419!

4.48(2)

συντηρέω 580 συντηρήσης 589

714 συνχωρεῖ

368,3)

τεταγμένοι

ταραχί θ) ἧς, [μη] δέν 563( 7)

τεθέληκα

442

συντετρίφασι

1)

306

τέθειμαι

1)

QO2(1)

rerevyviay

redeına 885

366(2)

συντέτριφα

850

ταξάμενος Gob ταξόμεθα 303

702

394,

συντελοῦσιν

τὸ

393

rekioxw 7U( 1) τελῶ 366, Byı re€ovras

819

εἰς

36612),

rereAl ὠνημαι)

504 τὸ

466,

τελέω 7801) reAcoxopeva 70/1)

va Bog

412

συνπρυσγενέσθαι

gurmpog| γενοῦ

τελέσω

εἰς τὸ B50, 1)

σωϊιζεσθαι,

356i 2), 393 366( 2), 384

τελευτῆσαι 701(4] reXeury| advr] wr ΙΓ

212

συνπαρέλαβα F317114) συνπαρόντες B79( 1)

775

3661 2)

τελευτῶν

rov

B8Q( 23)

diva

reAdgores

| = συγχωρέσῃ)

σῴζεσθαι,

QIU δορί

357?

361!

43507)

συνπαράσταιτε

τελέσι

608

συνλαμβῖ ἀἾνο] ve«| 196 731

τήν

τελειῶσαι,

126!

57

ἡ 889(23)

τεκοῦσαν,

συσπεύδειν 825 σύστα 690( 1)

axoAalw 206 axoAaow, τοῦ

συνομόμεκα

τεκοῦσα, 723

| exsí]oere 363! σχήσω 463, 379. 379?

877( 1)

57

τεκνυποιείαθαι

1g0

σφραγισάμενον

35712)

συνκρωτήσαται

τεκνόσμαι

190

συνίστων

συνίω

FORMS

415

re|v€o[μαι 404 [ τευξόμεθ᾽ ] 404 τεύξονται 386 τηρῶν 911 τιθεῖν

τιθέναι

ι40(2)])

30

τιθέντες 870(2) τιθέω 140(2) τίϑημι 132, 140, τίθης

140

(t)

307,

580

INDEN

rıdı

(= ret)

τίθομαι

τίθω

140(2)

140(3),

140(3),

τίκτω

141

141

368( 3)

rıAaw 51 τιλήτωι 51

τολμῶ

VEHI

ὑγιένοντος

910[

ὑπακούσειν

τρέφειν,

τῷ

ὑπάρχω BIO ὑπεγεγράφεις

ἐπὶ

854( 1)

τριβέντος

5310

τροφεῦεν

747

ὑπενέγκη

Tpopevw

58

ὑπερβάλλειν

τροφέω τρυγεῖν

58 9109

τρώγω Tuyyare

296

541(1)* 785(2)

ὑπερβέβληντο

500

1625

ὑπερέξει 363 ὑπερηφάνηκᾳ

438,

201

ὑπερηφάνηκας

τυγχάνω

75, B91, 919

τύπτε, μή 508! TUmT)S, μή 568! τυχαίνω 75 τυχεῖν 784 (3),

787(6),

ὑπερθέμενος ὑπερτίθοντε

upidavro

318(2)

140(3)

ὑφίσταμαι

ὑπηρετεῖ 201 ὑπηρετέω 580

ὕγίαινεν 205 ὑγιαίνομεν 104 ὑγίαινον 205 ὑγιαίνοντι 876(5) ὑγιαίνῳ ὑγιαίνων

194,

805 442

ὑπὸ} ὀε δειχϑέντων ὑποδεικνύεις 85

—,

295

9003

ὑγιῖνεν 748 ὑγιένοντι 8793 '

τοῦ 835

102

ὑφορῶμαι 574

ὑποδείκνυμι

2967: 104

ὑστερέσαι 29G(3) ὑστέρησα 299{7) ὑφείλαντο 310(2)

310(2)

ὑβριξαν

ὑγιαίνειν ὑγιαίνεις

458

ὑφείλατο

Uroypagw 594, 803

752

1η7

ónepBt(= -05), μή 563 (7)

ruyoinv 607 τυχών 8771)

vies

140( 1)

ὑποτίθοντας 140(3) ὑποτνιθοῦσα 140(2) ὑπουργήσομεν 401 ὑπώγραψα 2z0( 1) ὑστέρεσα 299(1)

445( 1), 471

ὑπισχνοῦμαι ὑπογέγραφα

ὑγειαίνω 104 vyiawe 724, 725 [ὑγι] αἰνεε 194, 212; [ὑγεαί-

804

ὑποφώσκω

YOO

792(6); —, eis 16 850( 1) τύχοι 609, 655, 65611)

277

520

ὑποίζτέ»-

421(2)

ὑποτίϑημι

518,

ὑπελαμβάνομεν

464

442;

ὑποτίθεμαι

791( 1)

689{ 3)

476

ὑποτέταχα raya

367( 1)

ὑπάρχειν

φάγαι 755(6) dayei, 874

ro Bınl;

φαγεῖν

790( 2), 856 φαγῖν 755(6);

Bos

—,

75516),

—,

φάγω, ov μή 570

ὑπυδείκνυς

φαθί

B4 622

ὑποδέξασθαι,

ἕνεκεν

ὑπόδεξε

688(1)

564,

853

ὑποδίκνυ 04 ὑποθέμενος η14

142°

φαίνομαι 893 φ[α) νόμεθα 222 φαίνω 304 φαμὲν

vroAdußavor 250(2) ὑπολαμβάνω 802 ὑπολόγησα 250( 1)

φάναι

ὕπομεμένηκα

φανεῖ c| gv,

191

eis B50

φαίνεται 792( 10) φαίνηται 792( 10)

ὑποὶ x |e| μεῖναι 8792) ὑποκεχειρογραφηκα 439 ὑποζκε) χυμένος 421(2)

439

rod Bro ,84(3),

ὑποδεικνυ ovr wy B79( 1) ὑποδείξαι

814

786{2}

ὑποτέτακται

687(3)

τὸ

200( 1)

ὑποτέθεικα

480

ὑπακουσάντων

889( 19)

69n( 1)

ὑπονοοῦμαι

ὑπονυῶ 802 ὑποστρεφέτωσαν ὑπόσχεισαν 760

442

ὑ[ πα]κήκοας

—

786{3)

ὑποσχέσθαι

Tomapxnoas

τρέχα

771.

ὑπομνῆσαι

218

ὑπακήκοα

771

ὑπομένειν

ι )

690( 1)

ὑπάγω

888

FORMS

ὑγιένονσαν 907 ὑγιένω 194 ὑένεν 748 υἱοποιήσηται 57 tna

τίνω 76, 767, 361 rAdw 367! [τ]ολμήσαιμι 622 roAuoüvres 52(2),

OF

142

φαμένης

147

φαμένου

147

145,

φί[ανεῖαν

781

649( 10)

φανείη 625;

—,

e 649010)

dalre]en|v]

INDEX

649í( 10) $areponmei, 57 φανεροποιήσω

φοβῆται

φασί(ν)

φόσκω

142

φορτίζω

155(4),

170,

Biot 70 Brot 903

$épw 216, 581

219,

φεύγα

1)

δηρί

φορτώνω

260,

375,

φημί 142, 155(4), 794, 797, 805

170,

xapılou

808

φθάνω 75, 777 φϑαρῶσιν 110

iva

773

305;

--,

φιλεῖ

790(5)

φιλῆσαι, rou 820 φιλιάξω 61(9q) φιλιάσαι 61(9)

φιλοκαληθῆναι,

350

dil o ona:

τοῖς

φοβηϑείς

G1( 11) 61( II }

Hb6oí 1)

878( 4)

401 rg 854(5)

299( 5)

64613,

727

752

171 172

χορηγήσει 384, 395

626,

6361,

| χαΐρ|πις

xacponat

608

OUT

S70

316( 8),

χαριεῖ 357(5), χαριεῖται 357(5)

χαρίεσαι 357(5), xapıere 357(5) 492

xpewort

57

198

ra

χρεωστουμένων, 616),

B80(25) τῶν B89

(25) χρεωστῶ

198

χρή, χρ[ἡ] 791(6)

537

316(8)

χαΐρυς xaipw

χρειάξομαι 206! χρεοποιούμε Bal 57

χρεωστοίμενα,

6367, 637, 727; | χαί]pois,

30

xpeororoupelrv

20961,

xaipoıs 608, 636,

819

408

ἐπὶ

6361,

O1( 11)

χορηγηθήσεται 396

rob

757

φοβεθείς 299(5)

φοβεῖσθαι,

χέρσεύω

χοίζω

χαίρεν 747, 748

ro 813,

392,

626,

χαΐρειν

φιλοπονοῦμεν 201 φιλοῦντας, τοὺς B89( 24) φιλοῦντες 879( 2) φιλοῦντι,

61( t1)

xew 672

7926)

χαθήκαμε χαίρει

φιλιοθϑῆναι 61(9) φιλιόω 61(9)

φισθήση

Bro

τοῦ 810

χερσεύουσιν

xepowgarres

πρὸ

χαῖρε

171

χειροτονεῖν,

xrpralw

1220

φιλειάσειν

τοῦ

274

φωνῆσαι,

φθίρεν 747

χαρίσει 357(5) χάρισεν 684(3) χαρίσεται 357(5)

xepoow

φυληαπαέξαθωσαν

70}

642( [)

χειρογραφήσων 809

φυλάξα 1 643

φυτευθῆναι

ἂν

χεθήσομαι

309

533( 2)

φυλάξωσιν

580

χαρίσομαι 357(5)

218,

φυλάξῃ 561) φυλάξω 394

φησί(ν), φη σιν 142 φθίνω

χαρίζομαι 357(5)

δ8.4(4), 750 dpovriaare 716 φρηντισον 702, 704. 717

φυλάξει

142

χαρίζοιο dv

χαρίξοιζο»

642(1) xapitovaB^ 611

φροντίσαι

φυλάξαι,

653 653

608;

642(1);

φρηαντὼν 907 φρώντισεν H84(3)

142

φήσαντες

xapifor

χαριζόμενος

φύγομεν

610, bo7,

φροντίζω 582, 594, 779

φῆι [44

642( 1)

χαριζοίμην

791(1)

φυγηδεύσωμαι

φής

μή

61( 10)

φεύξω 367(6) φήις

—,

ἄν

χαριζοίμεθα

δι( 10)

φροντίζειν

φέρε 709(3). 709(3)*, 762

φέροντα

χαρίξοι

φράζω 803

ro

detec,

904

O1( 10)

$oprów

170? φεγγεῖ,

787(1) χαρίζηται 560 xapilıo dv 640

396

φηρέσης 2994): 563i7)

170!

147,

χαρίζεσθαι

870(2),

@nvevaes

[djds 146 φασίν,

FORMS

5389

φοβυυμένη

57

φαινησόμεθα 403

pioxoper

VERB

φοβοῦμαι 574

57

φανεροποιλιῶν

OF

χρήξω

206

χρήζωι, πῶς 595 892;

-.,

405, 640

χρηματίσασθ!

χρηννύομαι

yor, 405

ai]

785(3)

χρηματισϑὴ 603! χρηματισθϑήσοιτο 603? χρηννυόμεθα

150

150

χρήσομαι 404

dv

INDEX

χύζω ye

155(2),

171,

172

xwpdw 303

χωρηγηθέντος 877(2) χωρίζω 303, 357(6) χωρίσει, ψεῦσον,

τοῦ μὴ

Bro

116,

114,

aigue)

14

ψηλαφίζω

52(1)

peda

116,

52( 1)

ψηφίζομαι 778 ψυχρεύσῃ, μή 563(7)

ὥφειλαν εὔφειλεν

wAÀero 350 ὥλλυτο 137( 1)

52( 1) τῶν

ὧν 879(2) ὠφείλαμεν 279

ὥκνησα (Sic) 334 ὠκοδόμηκεν 257

ψηλαφάω ψηλαφισάνί

ὥμοσα 139, 336, 394

ὥκει 256(1)

ὧμαι

406]

ὠμείλισα

435(7)

ὠμόμεχα

273

wiouevos

486

ὡμολόγησα 253, 340(3)

ὥιμην 256(1)

χύνω 171, 172

254

ὠμολογήκεις

438

| 38*

r38?,

ὡμολογεῖτε

333

ὠικονόμηκα

172

FORMS

quvvny

ὠικοδόμησεν

206

χρῶμαι

VERT

257

wibónkev

316(7)

xpnow

OF

538

538

408

ὠφείλομεν

254

ὠφεληθήσεται 277

dxero 256(1)

ὦμεν 116 ᾧμην 258

493

285

205

ιὐφειλήσηι

ιφιλαν

343

277,

403